CF D Module Users Guide
Uploaded by
matinCF D Module Users Guide
Uploaded by
matinCFD Module
Users Guide
CFD Module Users Guide
19982016 COMSOL
Protected by U.S. Patents listed on www.comsol.com/patents, and U.S. Patents 7,519,518; 7,596,474;
7,623,991; 8,457,932; 8,954,302; 9,098,106; 9,146,652; and 9,323,503. Patents pending.
This Documentation and the Programs described herein are furnished under the COMSOL Software License
Agreement (www.comsol.com/comsol-license-agreement) and may be used or copied only under the terms
of the license agreement.
COMSOL, the COMSOL logo, COMSOL Multiphysics, Capture the Concept, COMSOL Desktop,
LiveLink, and COMSOL Server are either registered trademarks or trademarks of COMSOL AB. All other
trademarks are the property of their respective owners, and COMSOL AB and its subsidiaries and products
are not affiliated with, endorsed by, sponsored by, or supported by those trademark owners. For a list of such
trademark owners, see www.comsol.com/trademarks.
Version: COMSOL 5.2a
Contact Information
Visit the Contact COMSOL page at www.comsol.com/contact to submit general
inquiries, contact Technical Support, or search for an address and phone number. You can
also visit the Worldwide Sales Offices page at www.comsol.com/contact/offices for
address and contact information.
If you need to contact Support, an online request form is located at the COMSOL Access
page at www.comsol.com/support/case. Other useful links include:
Support Center: www.comsol.com/support
Product Download: www.comsol.com/product-download
Product Updates: www.comsol.com/support/updates
COMSOL Blog: www.comsol.com/blogs
Discussion Forum: www.comsol.com/community
Events: www.comsol.com/events
COMSOL Video Gallery: www.comsol.com/video
Support Knowledge Base: www.comsol.com/support/knowledgebase
Part number: CM021301
C o n t e n t s
Chapter 1: Introduction
About the CFD Module
20
Why CFD is Important for Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
How the CFD Module Helps Improve Your Modeling . . . . . . . . . 21
Where Do I Access the Documentation and Application Libraries? . . . . 22
Overview of the Users Guide
26
Chapter 2: Quick Start Guide
Modeling and Simulations of Fluid Flow
30
Modeling Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Geometric Complexities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Defining the Physics Interfaces and Features
. . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
The Choice of Solver and Solver Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
The CFD Module Physics Interface Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Common Physics Interface and Feature Settings and Nodes. . . . . . . 42
The Liquids and Gases Materials Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Chapter 3: Single-Phase Flow Interfaces
Modeling Single-Phase Flow
44
Selecting the Right Physics Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
The Single-Phase Flow Interface Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Coupling to Other Physics Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
The Creeping Flow, Laminar Flow, and Turbulent Flow
CONTENTS
|3
Interfaces
50
The Creeping Flow Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
The Laminar Flow Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
The Turbulent Flow, Algebraic yPlus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
The Turbulent Flow, L-VEL Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
The Turbulent Flow, k- Interface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
The Turbulent Flow, k- Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
The Turbulent Flow, SST Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
The Turbulent Flow, Low Re k- Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
The Turbulent Flow, Spalart-Allmaras Interface . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Domain, Boundary, Pair, and Point Nodes for Single-Phase Flow . . . . . 66
Fluid Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Volume Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Initial Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Wall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Open Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Boundary Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Vacuum Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Periodic Flow Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Interior Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Interior Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Grille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Pipe Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Flow Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Pressure Point Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Point Mass Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Line Mass Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Gravity
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
The Rotating Machinery, Laminar and Turbulent Flow
Interfaces
96
The Rotating Machinery, Laminar Flow Interface . . . . . . . . . . . 96
The Rotating Machinery, Turbulent Flow, Algebraic yPlus Interface . . . . 98
4 | CONTENTS
The Rotating Machinery, Turbulent Flow, L-VEL Interface. . . . . . . . 99
The Rotating Machinery, Turbulent Flow, k- Interface . . . . . . . .
100
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Rotating
Machinery Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
101
Initial Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
102
Rotating Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
102
Rotating Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
103
Rotating Interior Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
104
Stationary Free Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
104
Contact Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
105
Theory for the Single-Phase Flow Interfaces
106
General Single-Phase Flow Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
107
Compressible Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109
Weakly Compressible Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109
The Mach Number Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
110
Incompressible Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
The Reynolds Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
Non-Newtonian Flow: The Power Law and the Carreau Model . . . .
112
Gravity
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
The Boussinesq Approximation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
Theory for the Wall Boundary Condition . . . . . . . . . . . .
117
Prescribing Inlet and Outlet Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
Laminar Inflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
122
Laminar Outflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
122
Mass Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
No Viscous Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
Normal Stress Boundary Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
125
Pressure Boundary Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
125
Vacuum Pump Boundary Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
Fan Defined on an Interior Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
Fan and Grille Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
Screen Boundary Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
132
Mass Sources for Fluid Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
134
Numerical StabilityStabilization Techniques for Fluid Flow . . . . .
136
Solvers for Laminar Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
138
Pseudo Time Stepping for Laminar Flow Models . . . . . . . . . .
140
The Projection Method for the Navier-Stokes Equations . . . . . . .
141
CONTENTS
|5
Discontinuous Galerkin Formulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
Particle Tracing in Fluid Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
References for the Single-Phase Flow, Laminar Flow Interfaces. . . . .
144
Theory for the Turbulent Flow Interfaces
146
Turbulence Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
146
The Algebraic yPlus Turbulence Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150
The L-VEL Turbulence Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
153
The k- Turbulence Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
155
The k- Turbulence Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
162
The SST Turbulence Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
164
The Low Reynolds Number k- Turbulence Model . . . . . . . . .
167
The Spalart-Allmaras Turbulence Model . . . . . . . . . . . . .
170
Inlet Values for the Turbulence Length Scale and Turbulent Intensity . .
172
Theory for the Pressure, No Viscous Stress Boundary Condition . . .
173
Solvers for Turbulent Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
174
Pseudo Time Stepping for Turbulent Flow Models . . . . . . . . .
174
References for the Single-Phase Flow, Turbulent Flow Interfaces . . . .
175
Theory for the Rotating Machinery Interfaces
177
Frozen Rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
178
Setting Up a Rotating Machinery Model . . . . . . . . . . . . .
180
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
181
C h a p t e r 4 : H e a t Tr a n s f e r a n d N o n - I s o t h e r m a l F l ow
Interfaces
Modeling Heat Transfer in the CFD Module
184
Selecting the Right Physics Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
184
Coupling to Other Physics Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
186
The Non-Isothermal Flow and Conjugate Heat Transfer,
Laminar Flow and Turbulent Flow Interfaces
Advantages of Using the Multiphysics Interfaces . . . . . . . . . .
The Non-Isothermal Flow, Laminar Flow and Turbulent Flow
6 | CONTENTS
188
188
Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
188
The Conjugate Heat Transfer, Laminar Flow and Turbulent Flow
Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
189
Settings for Physics Interfaces and Coupling Features . . . . . . . .
190
Coupling Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
191
Physics Interface Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
191
Non-Isothermal Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
193
Flow Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
196
Marangoni Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
197
Theory for the Non-Isothermal Flow and Conjugate Heat
Transfer Interfaces
199
The Non-Isothermal Flow and Conjugate Heat Transfer Equations . . .
199
Turbulent Non-Isothermal Flow Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . .
201
Theory for the Non-Isothermal Screen Boundary Condition . . . . .
206
Theory for the Interior Fan Boundary Condition . . . . . . . . . .
206
References for the Non-Isothermal Flow and Conjugate Heat
Transfer Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
207
Chapter 5: High Mach Number Flow Interfaces
The High Mach Number Flow Interfaces
210
The High Mach Number Flow, Laminar Interface . . . . . . . . . .
211
The High Mach Number Flow, k- Interface. . . . . . . . . . . .
213
The High Mach Number Flow, Spalart-Allmaras Interface
215
. . . . . .
Domain, Boundary, Edge, Point, and Pair Nodes for the High Mach
Number Flow Laminar and Turbulent Interfaces . . . . . . . . .
216
Initial Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
217
Fluid
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
218
Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
220
Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
222
Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
223
Theory for the High Mach Number Flow Interfaces
224
Compressible Flow for All Mach Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . .
224
Sutherlands Law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
226
CONTENTS
|7
Consistent Inlet and Outlet Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
227
Pseudo Time Stepping for High Mach Number Flow Models . . . . .
231
References for the High Mach Number Flow Interfaces . . . . . . .
232
Chapter 6: Multiphase Flow Interfaces
Modeling Multiphase Flow
234
Selecting the Right Physics Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
234
The Multiphase Flow Interface Options . . . . . . . . . . . . .
235
The Relationship Between the Physics Interfaces . . . . . . . . . .
235
Coupling to Other Physics Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
239
The Two-Phase Flow, Level Set and Phase Field Interfaces
240
The Laminar Two-Phase Flow, Level Set Interface
. . . . . . . . .
240
The Turbulent Two-Phase Flow, Level Set Interface . . . . . . . . .
241
Two-Phase Flow, Level Set Coupling Features . . . . . . . . . . .
242
The Wetted Wall Coupling Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
244
The Laminar Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field Interface . . . . . . . . .
246
The Turbulent Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field Interface . . . . . . . .
247
The Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field Coupling Features . . . . . . . .
248
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Laminar and
Turbulent Flow, Two-Phase, Level Set and Phase Field Interfaces. . .
The Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field Interface
250
252
The Laminar Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field Interface . . . . . . . .
252
The Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field Coupling Feature . . . . . . . .
253
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Laminar
Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field Interface . . . . . . . . . . . .
254
The Bubbly Flow Interfaces
256
The Laminar Bubbly Flow Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
256
The Turbulent Bubbly Flow Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
258
Domain and Boundary Nodes for the Laminar and Turbulent Bubbly
8 | CONTENTS
Flow Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
260
Fluid Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
262
Gravity
263
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mass Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
264
Initial Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
265
Wall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
265
Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
267
Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
268
Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
270
Gas Boundary Condition Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
270
The Mixture Model Interfaces
272
The Mixture Model, Laminar Flow Interface. . . . . . . . . . . .
272
The Mixture Model, Turbulent Flow Interface . . . . . . . . . . .
275
Domain and Boundary Nodes for the Mixture Model Laminar and
Turbulent Flow Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
277
Mixture Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
278
Initial Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
281
Wall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
281
Mass Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
283
Gravity
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
284
Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
285
Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
286
Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
287
The Euler-Euler Model Interfaces
288
The Euler-Euler Model, Laminar Flow interface . . . . . . . . . .
288
The Euler-Euler Model, Turbulent Flow Interface . . . . . . . . . .
291
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Euler-Euler Model
Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
293
Phase Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
293
Initial Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
295
Wall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
296
Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
297
Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
298
Gravity
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
299
Volume Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
300
Theory for the Two-Phase Flow Interfaces
301
Level Set and Phase Field Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
301
Conservative and Non-Conservative Formulations . . . . . . . . .
304
CONTENTS
|9
Phase Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numerical Stabilization
304
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
306
References for the Level Set and Phase Field Interfaces . . . . . . .
306
Theory for the Three-Phase Flow Interface
307
Governing Equations of the Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field Interface . .
307
Reference for the Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field Interface . . . . . .
310
Theory for the Bubbly Flow Interfaces
311
The Bubbly Flow Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
311
Turbulence Modeling in Bubbly Flow Applications . . . . . . . . .
315
References for the Bubbly Flow Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . .
317
Theory for the Mixture Model Interfaces
318
The Mixture Model Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dispersed Phase Boundary Conditions Equations
318
. . . . . . . . .
321
Turbulence Modeling in Mixture Models . . . . . . . . . . . . .
322
Slip Velocity Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
324
References for the Mixture Model Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . .
326
Theory for the Euler-Euler Model Interfaces
327
The Euler-Euler Model Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
327
Turbulent Two-Phase Flow Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
333
References for the Euler-Euler Model Interfaces . . . . . . . . . .
338
C h a p t e r 7 : Po r o u s M e d i a a n d S u b s u r f a c e F l ow
Interfaces
Modeling Porous Media and Subsurface Flow
340
Selecting the Right Physics Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
340
The Porous Media Flow Interface Options . . . . . . . . . . . .
341
Coupling to Other Physics Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
343
The Darcys Law Interface
345
Domain, Boundary, Edge, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Darcys
10 | C O N T E N T S
Law Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
346
Fluid and Matrix Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
348
Mass Source
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
349
Initial Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
349
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
349
Mass Flux. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
350
Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
350
Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
350
No Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
351
Flux Discontinuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
351
Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
351
The Brinkman Equations Interface
353
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Brinkman
Equations Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
355
Fluid and Matrix Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
356
Forchheimer Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
357
Mass Source
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
357
Volume Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
358
Initial Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
358
Fluid Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
359
The Free and Porous Media Flow Interface
361
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Free and Porous
Media Flow Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
362
Fluid Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
363
Porous Matrix Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
364
Volume Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
365
Forchheimer Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
365
Initial Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
366
Microfluidic Wall Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
366
The Two-Phase Darcys Law Interface
367
Domain, Boundary, and Pair Nodes for the Two-Phase Darcys Law
Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
368
Fluid and Matrix Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
369
Initial Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
370
No Flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
371
CONTENTS
| 11
Pressure and Saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
371
Mass Flux. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
371
Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
372
Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
372
Theory for the Darcys Law Interface
373
Darcys LawEquation Formulation
373
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theory for the Brinkman Equations Interface
About the Brinkman Equations
375
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
375
Brinkman Equations Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
376
References for the Brinkman Equations Interface . . . . . . . . . .
377
Theory for the Free and Porous Media Flow Interface
378
Reference for the Free and Porous Media Flow Interface . . . . . . .
378
Theory for the Two-Phase Darcys Law Interface
379
Darcys Law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
379
Capillary Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
380
C h a p t e r 8 : C h e m i c a l S p e c i e s Tr a n s p o r t I n t e r f a c e s
Modeling Chemical Species Transport
384
Selecting the Right Physics Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
384
Coupling to Other Physics Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
386
Adding a Chemical Species Transport Interface . . . . . . . . . .
387
The Transport of Diluted Species Interface
389
The Transport of Diluted Species in Porous Media Interface . . . . .
392
Domain, Boundary, and Pair Nodes for the Transport of Diluted
12 | C O N T E N T S
Species Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
394
Transport Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
395
Turbulent Mixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
397
Initial Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
398
Mass-Based Concentrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
398
Reactions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
399
No Flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
400
Inflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
400
Outflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
401
Concentration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
401
Flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
402
Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
403
Flux Discontinuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
403
Periodic Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
403
Line Mass Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
404
Point Mass Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
405
Open Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
405
Thin Diffusion Barrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
406
Thin Impermeable Barrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
406
Equilibrium Reaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
406
Surface Equilibrium Reaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
407
Porous Electrode Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
407
Reaction Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
408
Electrode-Electrolyte Interface Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . .
408
Porous Media Transport Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
409
Partially Saturated Porous Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
411
Volatilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
412
Reactive Pellet Bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
412
Reactions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
415
Species Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
416
Hygroscopic Swelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
417
The Transport of Concentrated Species Interface
418
Domain, Boundary, and Pair Nodes for the Transport of
Concentrated Species Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
424
Transport Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
425
Porous Media Transport Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
429
Turbulent Mixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
432
Reaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
432
Reaction Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
434
Initial Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
434
Mass Fraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
435
Flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
436
Inflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
436
CONTENTS
| 13
No Flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
437
Outflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
437
Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
438
Flux Discontinuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
438
Open Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
439
The Reacting Flow Multiphysics Interfaces
440
The Reacting Laminar Flow Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
440
The Reacting Turbulent Flow, k- Interface . . . . . . . . . . . .
441
The Reacting Turbulent Flow, k- Interface . . . . . . . . . . . .
442
The Reacting Turbulent Flow, SST Interface . . . . . . . . . . . .
442
The Reacting Turbulent Flow, Low Re k- Interface . . . . . . . . .
443
The Reacting Flow Coupling Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
444
Physics Interface Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
446
The Reacting Flow in Porous Media Interfaces
448
The Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfcs) Interface . . . . . . . . .
448
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Reacting Flow in
Porous Media (rfcs) Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
450
Transport Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
451
Diffusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
452
Initial Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
452
Reacting Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
453
The Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfds) Interface . . . . . . . . .
453
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Reacting Flow in
14 | C O N T E N T S
Porous Media (rfds) Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
455
Transport Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
456
Initial Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
457
Theory for the Transport of Diluted Species Interface
458
Mass Balance Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
458
Equilibrium Reaction Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
460
Convective Term Formulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
461
Solving a Diffusion Equation Only
462
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mass Sources for Species Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
462
Adding Transport Through Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
464
Supporting Electrolytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
466
Crosswind Diffusion
467
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Danckwerts Inflow Boundary Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . .
468
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
468
About Turbulent Mixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
469
Theory for the Transport of Concentrated Species Interface
471
Multicomponent Mass Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
471
Multicomponent Diffusion: Mixture-Average Approximation . . . . .
472
Multispecies Diffusion: Ficks Law Approximation. . . . . . . . . .
473
Multicomponent Thermal Diffusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
474
Turbulent Mixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
475
References for the Transport of Concentrated Species Interface . . . .
475
Theory for the Reacting Flow Interfaces
476
Pseudo Time Stepping for Mass Transport . . . . . . . . . . . .
476
The Stefan Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
477
The Chemical Reaction Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
478
Turbulent Mass Transport Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
479
Mass Transport Wall Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
482
Turbulent Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
483
The Reaction Source Term for Turbulent Flow. . . . . . . . . . .
485
References for the Reacting Flow Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . .
486
Theory for the Reacting Flow in Porous Media Interfaces
487
Theory for the Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfcs) Interface. . . . .
487
Theory for the Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfds) Interface
488
. . . .
Chapter 9: Thin-Film Flow Interfaces
The Thin-Film Flow Interfaces
490
The Thin-Film Flow, Shell Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
490
The Thin-Film Flow, Domain Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
493
The Thin-Film Flow, Edge Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
494
Domain, Boundary, Edge, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Thin-Film
Flow Branch Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
495
Fluid-Film Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
495
Border. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
500
CONTENTS
| 15
Perforations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
502
Initial Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
503
Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
503
Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
504
Wall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
504
Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
504
Theory for the Thin-Film Flow Interfaces
505
Thin-Film Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
505
The Reynolds Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
506
Flow Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
510
The Modified Reynolds EquationGas Flows . . . . . . . . . . .
517
Flow Models for Rarefied Gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
518
Frequency Domain Formulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
521
Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
523
Cavitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
524
References for the Thin-Film Flow Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . .
526
Chapter 10: Mathematics , Moving Interface Branch
The Level Set Interface
Domain, Boundary, and Pair Nodes for the Level Set Interface
16 | C O N T E N T S
530
. . . .
531
Level Set Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
531
Initial Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
532
Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
533
Initial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
533
No Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
533
The Phase Field Interface
534
Domain, Boundary, and Pair Nodes for the Phase Field Interface . . . .
535
Phase Field Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
535
Initial Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
536
Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
537
Initial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
538
Wetted Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
538
The Ternary Phase Field Interface
539
Domain, Boundary, and Pair Nodes for the Ternary Phase Field
Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
540
Mixture Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
540
Initial Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
541
Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
541
Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
542
Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
542
Wetted Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
542
Theory for the Level Set Interface
544
The Level Set Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
544
Conservative and Non-Conservative Form . . . . . . . . . . . .
546
Initializing the Level Set Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
546
Variables For Geometric Properties of the Interface . . . . . . . .
547
Reference for the Level Set Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
548
Theory for the Phase Field Interface
549
About the Phase Field Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
549
The Equations for the Phase Field Method . . . . . . . . . . . .
549
Conservative and Non-Conservative Forms
. . . . . . . . . . .
551
Additional Sources of Free Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
551
Initializing the Phase Field Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
552
Variables and Expressions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
552
Reference for the Phase Field Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . .
553
Theory for the Ternary Phase Field Interface
554
About the Phase Field Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
554
The Equations of the Ternary Phase Field Method . . . . . . . . .
554
Reference for the Ternary Phase Field Interface . . . . . . . . . .
556
Chapter 11: Glossary
Glossary of Terms
558
CONTENTS
| 17
18 | C O N T E N T S
Introduction
This guide describes the CFD Module, an optional add-on package for COMSOL
Multiphysics that provides you with tools for computational fluid dynamics, CFD.
The modeling of fluid flow is an increasingly important part in development of new
equipment and processes.
This chapter introduces you to the capabilities of the module. A summary of the
physics interfaces and where you can find documentation and model examples is
also included. The last section is a brief overview with links to each chapter in this
guide.
About the CFD Module
Overview of the Users Guide
19
About the CFD Module
In this section:
Why CFD is Important for Modeling
How the CFD Module Helps Improve Your Modeling
Where Do I Access the Documentation and Application Libraries?
Why CFD is Important for Modeling
Computational fluid dynamics, CFD, is an integral part in a constantly growing
number of development processes, and is a well established field within many different
engineering disciplines; mechanical, chemical, civil, aeronautical, and also in more
specialized areas such as biomedical engineering.
Often the flow itself is not the main focus in a simulation. Instead it is how the flow
affects other process and application parameters that is important. The transport of
species through the different parts of a chemical reactor, the effective cooling of a
computers hard drive and electronics, the dispersion of energy within the damping
film of an accelerometer, the extent of nuclear waste spreading from a subterranean
repositoryall of these are applications for which the flow must be fully understood
and is an integral part of the processs description and simulation.
In many situations, while the flow can add necessary operational parameters to a
process or application, it is also affected by them. For example, a chemical reactor
creates a pressure which disturbs the flow, the electronic heat affects the fluids density
and flow properties, the accelerometer elasticity imposes an oscillation on the flow,
while the subterranean environments poroelasticity changes the course of the flow.
A description combining several physics fields is often required to produce accurate
models of real world applications involving fluid flow. Being able to effectively simulate
such models increases the understanding of the studied processes and applications,
which in turn leads to optimization of the flow and other parameters.
Historically, a sophisticated modeling tool was a privilege that only large companies
could afford, for which the savings made in bulk production justified the computer
software costs and need for CFD specialists. Todays engineers are educated in the use
of software modeling tools, and are often expected to create realistic models of
20 |
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
advanced systems on their personal computers. This is where COMSOL Multiphysics
can improve your modeling capabilities.
How the CFD Module Helps Improve Your Modeling
The CFD Module is an optional package that extends the COMSOL Multiphysics
modeling environment with customized physics interfaces and functionality optimized
for the analysis of all types of fluid flow. It is developed for a wide variety of users
including researchers, developers, teachers, and students. It is not just a tool for CFD
experts; it can be used by all engineers and scientists who work with systems in which
momentum transport through fluid flow is an important part of a process or
application.
The module uses the latest research possible to simulate fluid flow and it provides the
most user-friendly simulation environment for CFD applications. The solvers and
meshes are optimized for fluid-flow applications and have built-in robust stabilization
methods.
The readily available coupling of heat and mass transport to fluid flow enables
modeling of a wide range of industrial applications such as heat exchangers, turbines,
separation units, and ventilation systems.
Ready-to-use interfaces enable you to model laminar and turbulent single- or
multiphase flow. Functionality to treat coupled free and porous media flow, stirred
vessels, and fluid structure interaction is also included.
Together with COMSOL Multiphysics and its other optional packages, the CFD
Module takes flow simulations to a new level, allowing for arbitrary coupling to physics
interfaces describing other physical phenomena, such as structural mechanics,
electromagnetics, or even user-defined transport equations. This allows for
unparalleled modeling capabilities for multiphysics applications involving fluid flow.
Like all COMSOL modules, the interfaces described in this guide include all the steps
available for the modeling process, which are described in detail in the COMSOL
Multiphysics Reference Manual:
Definitions of parameters and component variables
Creating, importing and manipulating the geometry
Specifying the materials to include in the component
Defining the physics of the fluid flow in domains and on boundaries, and coupling
it to other physics
ABOUT THE CFD MODULE
21
Set up an appropriate mesh for the modeling domain with consideration given to the
fluid-flow systems behavior
Solving the equations that describe a system for stationary or dynamic behavior, or
as a parametric or optimization study
Collecting and analyzing results to present for further use in other analyses.
Once a model is defined, you can go back and make changes in all of the branches
listed, while maintaining consistency in the other definitions throughout. You can
restart the solver, for example, using the existing solution as an initial guess or even
alter the geometry, while the equations and boundary conditions are kept consistent
through the associative geometry feature.
Where Do I Access the Documentation and Application Libraries?
A number of internet resources have more information about COMSOL, including
licensing and technical information. The electronic documentation, topic-based (or
context-based) help, and the application libraries are all accessed through the
COMSOL Desktop.
If you are reading the documentation as a PDF file on your computer,
the blue links do not work to open an application or content
referenced in a different guide. However, if you are using the Help
system in COMSOL Multiphysics, these links work to open other
modules (as long as you have a license), application examples, and
documentation sets.
THE DOCUMENTATION AND ONLINE HELP
The COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual describes the core physics interfaces
and functionality included with the COMSOL Multiphysics license. This book also has
instructions about how to use COMSOL Multiphysics and how to access the
electronic Documentation and Help content.
Opening Topic-Based Help
The Help window is useful as it is connected to many of the features on the GUI. To
learn more about a node in the Model Builder, or a window on the Desktop, click to
highlight a node or window, then press F1 to open the Help window, which then
22 |
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
displays information about that feature (or click a node in the Model Builder followed
by the Help button (
). This is called topic-based (or context) help.
To open the Help window:
In the Model Builder, Application Builder, or Physics Builder click a node or
window and then press F1.
On any toolbar (for example, Home, Definitions, or Geometry), hover the
mouse over a button (for example, Add Physics or Build All) and then
press F1.
From the File menu, click Help (
).
In the upper-right corner of the COMSOL Desktop, click the Help (
button.
To open the Help window:
In the Model Builder or Physics Builder click a node or window and then
press F1.
On the main toolbar, click the Help (
) button.
From the main menu, select Help>Help.
Opening the Documentation Window
To open the Documentation window:
Press Ctrl+F1.
From the File menu select Help>Documentation (
).
To open the Documentation window:
Press Ctrl+F1.
On the main toolbar, click the Documentation (
) button.
From the main menu, select Help>Documentation.
ABOUT THE CFD MODULE
23
THE APPLICATION LIBRARIES WINDOW
Each application includes documentation with the theoretical background and
step-by-step instructions to create a model application. The applications are available
in COMSOL as MPH-files that you can open for further investigation. You can use the
step-by-step instructions and the actual applications as a template for your own
modeling and applications. In most models, SI units are used to describe the relevant
properties, parameters, and dimensions in most examples, but other unit systems are
available.
Once the Application Libraries window is opened, you can search by name or browse
under a module folder name. Click to view a summary of the application and its
properties, including options to open it or a PDF document.
The Application Libraries Window in the COMSOL Multiphysics
Reference Manual.
Opening the Application Libraries Window
To open the Application Libraries window (
):
From the Home toolbar, Windows menu, click (
Libraries.
) Applications
From the File menu select Application Libraries.
To include the latest versions of model examples, from the File>Help
menu, select (
) Update COMSOL Application Library.
Select Application Libraries from the main File> or Windows> menus.
To include the latest versions of model examples, from the Help menu
select (
) Update COMSOL Application Library.
CONT ACT ING COMSOL BY EMAIL
For general product information, contact COMSOL at info@comsol.com.
To receive technical support from COMSOL for the COMSOL products, please
contact your local COMSOL representative or send your questions to
24 |
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
support@comsol.com. An automatic notification and case number is sent to you by
email.
COMSOL WEBSITES
COMSOL website
www.comsol.com
Contact COMSOL
www.comsol.com/contact
Support Center
www.comsol.com/support
Product Download
www.comsol.com/product-download
Product Updates
www.comsol.com/support/updates
Discussion Forum
www.comsol.com/community
Events
www.comsol.com/events
COMSOL Video Gallery
www.comsol.com/video
Support Knowledge Base
www.comsol.com/support/knowledgebase
ABOUT THE CFD MODULE
25
Overview of the Users Guide
The CFD Module Users Guide gets you started with modeling CFD systems using
COMSOL Multiphysics. The information in this guide is specific to this module.
Instructions on how to use COMSOL in general are included with the COMSOL
Multiphysics Reference Manual. For theory relating to the physics interfaces, see the
end of each chapter.
As detailed in the section Where Do I Access the Documentation and
Application Libraries? this information can also be searched from the
COMSOL Multiphysics software Help menu.
TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S , G L O S S A R Y, A N D I N D E X
To help you navigate through this guide, see the Contents, Glossary, and Index.
QUICK START GUIDE
The Quick Start Guide includes some basic modeling strategies to get you started
modeling fluid flow in your particular application area. For example, it gives some tips
about how to control your material properties and how to set the optimal mesh to
make solving the model easier and quicker. It also includes a summary of all the physics
interfaces included with the CFD Module.
THE PHYSICS INTERFACES
The CFD Module both extends physics interfaces available with COMSOL
Multiphysics and provides additional physics interfaces. As a result, the module
contains a wide range of physics interfaces for modeling various types of momentum
transport. You can simulate laminar and turbulent flow, Newtonian and
non-Newtonian flow, isothermal and non-isothermal flow, multiphase flow, and flow
in porous media. The CFD Module also provides interfaces for modeling flows that
occur in thin-films or in bounded regions, and in stationary and rotating domains.
On top of this, the CFD Module includes physics interfaces for modeling heat transfer,
and transport and reactions of chemical species. These are typical phenomena that
occur in fluid flow and are strongly coupled to the flow field.
26 |
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
Single-Phase Flow
The Single-Phase Flow Interfaces chapter describes the many physics interfaces
available for laminar and turbulent flow. Modeling Single-Phase Flow helps you choose
the best Fluid Flow interface for your particular application.
Heat Transfer and Non-Isothermal Flow
The CFD Module includes physics interfaces for the simulation of heat transfer in fluid
flow. As with all other physics models simulated in COMSOL Multiphysics, any
description involving heat transfer can be directly coupled to any other physical
process. This is particularly relevant for systems with fluid flow and mass transfer. The
interfaces also allow you to account for heat sources and sinks, such as energy evolving
from chemical reactions.
The Heat Transfer and Non-Isothermal Flow Interfaces chapter describes these physics
interfaces in greater detail. To help you select which physics interface to use see
Modeling Heat Transfer in the CFD Module.
High Mach Flow
The High Mach Number Flow Interfaces chapter describes three versions of the same
predefined multiphysics interface used to model laminar and turbulent compressible
flows at high Mach numbers.
Multiphase Flow
The Multiphase Flow Interfaces chapter describes physics interfaces to model flows
with more than one phase, for example flows with two fluids or flows with dispersed
droplets or particles. To help you select which physics interface to use see Modeling
Multiphase Flow.
Porous Media and Subsurface Flow
The Porous Media and Subsurface Flow Interfaces chapter describes the Darcys Law,
Brinkman Equations, and Free and Porous Media Flow interfaces. To help you select
which physics interface to use see Modeling Porous Media and Subsurface Flow.
Thin-Film Flow
The Thin-Film Flow Interfaces chapter describes physics interfaces that model flow in
thin regions such as lubrication shells and fluid bearings.
Chemical Species Transport
The Chemical Species Transport Interfaces chapter describes physics interfaces that are
used for the simulation of chemical reactions, and mass or material transport through
diffusion and convection. Modeling Chemical Species Transport helps you select the
best physics interface to use.
O V E R V I E W O F T H E U S E R S G U I D E
27
The Mathematics Interfaces
Mathematics, Moving Interface Branch describes the Phase Field and Level Set
interfaces found under the Mathematics>Moving Interface branch. In the CFD Module
these physics features are integrated into the relevant physics interfaces.
28 |
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
Quick Start Guide
This chapter has some basic modeling strategies to get you started modeling fluid
flow in your application area.
In this chapter:
Modeling and Simulations of Fluid Flow
29
Modeling and Simulations of Fluid
Flow
In this section:
Modeling Strategy
Geometric Complexities
Material Properties
Defining the Physics Interfaces and Features
Meshing
The Choice of Solver and Solver Settings
The CFD Module Physics Interface Guide
Common Physics Interface and Feature Settings and Nodes
The Liquids and Gases Materials Database
The Physics Interfaces and Building a COMSOL Multiphysics Model in
the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual
Modeling Strategy
Modeling and simulating fluid flow is a cost-effective way for engineers and scientists
to understand, develop, optimize, and control designs and processes.
One of the most important things to consider before setting up a model is the accuracy
that is required in the simulation results. This determines the level of complexity in the
model.
Since fluid flow simulations are often computationally demanding, a multi-stage
modeling strategy is usually required. This implies using a simplified model as a
starting point in the project. Complexities can then be introduced gradually so that the
effect of each refinement of the model description is well understood before
introducing new complexities.
Complexities in the modeling process can be introduced at different stages in order to
achieve the desired accuracy. They can be introduced in the description of the
30 |
CHAPTER 2: QUICK START GUIDE
geometry, the physical properties, and in the governing equations. The Model Builder,
which shows the sequence of operations in the model tree, is designed with this
strategy in mind.
In addition to fluid flow, COMSOL Multiphysics and the CFD Module have
predefined couplings for fluid flow and other phenomena. Examples of these couplings
are heat transfer for free convection and transport of chemical species in simulations of
reacting flows. Set up your own couplings by defining mathematical expressions of the
dependent variables (velocity, pressure, temperature, and so forth) in the physics
interfaces for arbitrary multiphysics combinations.
Geometric Complexities
A complicated 3D CAD drawing is usually not the best starting point for the modeling
process. A 2D representation of a cross section of the geometry can give valuable initial
estimates of the flow field that can be used when setting up the full 3D model. For
example, you might be able to determine the pressure variations and the nature of the
flow, or whether or not a turbulence model is needed. This provides information about
where in the final geometry the most amount of change occurs, if a more advanced
fluid-flow model and/or better resolution is required, and what parts of the modeling
process are more sensitive than others.
Simplifying the geometry reduces the simulation time. Making use of symmetry planes
can cut down the geometry to one half or even less of the original size. Rounding-off
corners is another way to reduce mesh resolution. Resolving small geometric parts
requires a fine mesh, but the parts themselves can have a negligible effects on the fluid
field as a whole.
Geometry Modeling and CAD Tools in the COMSOL Multiphysics
Reference Manual
Material Properties
Depending on the accuracy required in a simulation, the effort put in acquiring data
for the fluid properties can also vary. In many cases, the dependencies of the fluid
properties on pressure and temperature have to be taken into account.
For a pressure-driven flow, it is usually a good approach to first set up a model using
constant density and viscosity, to get a first estimate of the flow and pressure fields.
MODELING AND SIMULATIONS OF FLUID FLOW
31
Once the model works with constant properties it can be extended by adding the
accurate expressions for density and viscosity.
For free convection the density variations drive the flow. The fluid properties
dependencies on the modeled variables, for example temperature, then have to be
accounted for from the beginning. In difficult cases, with large temperature variations,
it can be beneficial to run a time-dependent simulation even if the purpose of the
simulation is to get the results at steady-state.
Defining the Physics Interfaces and Features
The CFD Module has physics interfaces for laminar and turbulent single-phase flow,
multiphase flow, non-isothermal flow, high Mach number flow, thin-film flow, and
porous media flow.
The choice of physics interface and features depends on the accuracy required in a
simulation. A fluid that is weakly compressible could be approximated as
incompressible if the required accuracy allows for it. A complex turbulence model can
be replaced by a much simpler one, again if the resulting accuracy is sufficient. A first
step to set up the physics is to start by making the model as simple as possible. The
results from such a simulation can reveal useful pieces of information that help later
when more complex steps are added to the physics.
The Fluid Flow interfaces can also be coupled to any other physics interface in a
multiphysics model. When setting up such a complex multiphysics component
involving fluid flow and other coupled physics, it is a good strategy to first define and
solve one physics interface at a time. This allows for verification of the model setup, for
example to check if the intended domain and boundary settings are reflected in the
solution of each decoupled physics interface. The alternative, to debug the model
setup with several coupled physics interfaces, can be time-consuming.
In steady-state multiphysics simulations, it can also be a good strategy to start by
solving the model for each physics interface in a decoupled setup. The solutions from
the decoupled models can then be used as initial guesses for the fully coupled model.
This is especially recommended for highly nonlinear models. The Study node is
designed for this modeling strategy.
Building a COMSOL Multiphysics Model and Studies and Solvers in the
COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual
32 |
CHAPTER 2: QUICK START GUIDE
Meshing
The mesh used in a fluid flow simulation depends on the fluid flow model and on the
accuracy required in the simulation. A fluid flow model can inherently require a fine
resolution in order to converge, even though the results might not require a
correspondingly high accuracy. In such cases, it can be a good idea to change the fluid
flow model. An example is the low-Reynolds number k- model which gives a very
accurate description of the flow near solid walls, but requires a very fine mesh there.
In many cases, the standard k- model with wall functions can deliver an accurate
enough result at a much lower computational cost. In other cases, the requirement of
accuracy in the results can limit the maximum element size.
There are a number of different mesh types and meshing strategies for fluid flow
modeling in COMSOL Multiphysics.
UNSTRUCTURED MESHES
Free-meshing techniques generate unstructured meshes that can be used for most
types of geometries. The mesh-generating algorithms are highly automated, often
creating a good quality mesh from minimal user input. This mesh type is therefore a
good choice when the geometry of the domain is evident but the behavior of the
mathematical model in it is unknown. Yet, unstructured meshes tend to be isotropic
or homogeneous in nature, so that they fail to take advantage of the different
resolution requirements in the stream-wise and cross-stream directions.
STRUCTURED MESHES
In many ways, the properties of structured meshes complement those of the
unstructured type. Structured meshes provide high quality meshes with few elements
for sufficiently simple geometries. The properties of a structured mesh can
furthermore be used to create very efficient numerical methods. Finally, it is often
easier to control the mesh when high anisotropy or large variations in mesh size and
distribution is required, as the size of a structured mesh can be easily increased linearly
or geometrically with the dimensions of the computational domain.
SWEPT MESHES
Swept meshes are a particular form of structured meshes, sometimes denoted
semistructured. These are generated in 3D by creating a mesh at a source face and then
sweeping it along the domain to a destination face, such as from a cut in the cylindrical
part of a polymerization reactor to its outlet face. A swept mesh is structured in the
sweep direction, while the mesh at the source and destination faces can be either
MODELING AND SIMULATIONS OF FLUID FLOW
33
structured or unstructured. As is the case for structured meshes, the model geometry
determines if a swept mesh is applicable. Swept meshes are typically ideal when the
cross section in the sweep direction is constant, which is the case for channels and
pipes, for example. Revolving a mesh around a symmetry axis is another useful sweep
operation.
BOUNDARY LAYER MESHES
A boundary layer mesh is a mesh with an element distribution that is stacked or dense
in the direction normal to a boundary. It is created by inserting structured layers of
elements along specific boundaries and merging the outer layer with the surrounding
structured or unstructured mesh. This type of mesh is useful for many fluid flow
applications especially when coupled to mass and energy transfer, where thin boundary
layers need to be resolved. This is also the default physics-induced mesh for fluid flow.
MESH CONVERGENCE
Ideally, a mesh convergence analysis should be performed in order to estimate the
accuracy of a simulation. This means that the mesh should be made twice as fine in each
spatial direction and the simulation carried out once again on the refined mesh. If the
change in critical solution parameters for the original mesh and the finer mesh is within
the required tolerance, the solution can be regarded as being mesh-converged. For
practical reasons, it is seldom possible to make the mesh twice as fine in each direction.
Instead, some critical regions can be identified and the mesh is refined only there.
Meshing in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual
The Choice of Solver and Solver Settings
The default solver for the Fluid Flow interfaces is optimized for a large variety of fluid
flow conditions and applications. The suggested solver depends on the physics
interface and the study type.
The default solver settings is a trade-off between performance and robustness. The
more advanced the model, the more the solver can need tuning to obtain a solution.
This is another reason why it is good to start with a reduced model description rather
than the complete description.
2D models and small 3D models get so-called direct-solver suggestions. Direct solvers
are robust but the memory requirement scales somewhere between N1.5and N2 where
34 |
CHAPTER 2: QUICK START GUIDE
N is the number of degrees of freedom in the model. This means that a direct solver
becomes prohibitively expensive for large problems. Large 3D models therefore get
iterative solver suggestions per default. The memory requirement for an iterative solver
optimally scales as N. The drawback with iterative solvers is that they are less robust
than direct solvers. A model can converge with a direct solver but fail with an iterative
solver. Large models therefore require more care when being set up than small models
do.
For well-posed models, there are possibilities to tune the default solvers to gain
performance. This is especially true for time-dependent models with a variety of solver
settings providing options to reduce the computational time.
Studies and Solvers in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual
The CFD Module Physics Interface Guide
The CFD Module extends the functionality of the physics interfaces of the base
package for COMSOL Multiphysics. The details of the physics interfaces and study
types for the CFD Module are listed in the table. The functionality of the COMSOL
Multiphysics base package is listed in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual.
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual:
Studies and Solvers
The Physics Interfaces
For a list of all the core physics interfaces included with a COMSOL
Multiphysics license, see Physics Interface Guide.
PHYSICS INTERFACE
ICON
TAG
SPACE
DIMENSION
AVAILABLE PRESET STUDY
TYPE
all dimensions
stationary; time dependent
Chemical Species Transport
Transport of Diluted
Species(1)
tds
MODELING AND SIMULATIONS OF FLUID FLOW
35
PHYSICS INTERFACE
TAG
SPACE
DIMENSION
AVAILABLE PRESET STUDY
TYPE
tcs
all dimensions
stationary; time dependent
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Turbulent Flow, k-
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Turbulent Flow, k-
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Turbulent Flow, SST
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary with
initialization; transient with
initialization
Turbulent Flow, Low
Re k-
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary with
initialization; transient with
initialization
Transport of
Concentrated Species
ICON
Reacting Flow
Laminar Flow
Turbulent Flow
Reacting Flow in Porous Media
Transport of Diluted
Species
rfds
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Transport of
Concentrated Species
rfcs
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Creeping Flow
spf
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Laminar Flow(1)
spf
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Fluid Flow
Single-Phase Flow
36 |
CHAPTER 2: QUICK START GUIDE
PHYSICS INTERFACE
ICON
TAG
SPACE
DIMENSION
AVAILABLE PRESET STUDY
TYPE
Turbulent Flow,
Algebraic yPlus
spf
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary with
initialization; transient with
initialization
Turbulent Flow, L-VEL
spf
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary with
initialization; transient with
initialization
Turbulent Flow, k-
spf
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Turbulent Flow, k-
spf
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Turbulent Flow, SST
spf
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary with
initialization; transient with
initialization
Turbulent Flow, Low
Re k-
spf
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary with
initialization; transient with
initialization
Turbulent Flow,
Spalart-Allmaras
spf
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary with
initialization; transient with
initialization
Turbulent Flow
Rotating Machinery, Fluid Flow
Rotating Machinery,
Laminar Flow
rmspf
3D, 2D
frozen rotor; time
dependent
Rotating Machinery,
Turbulent Flow,
Algebraic yPlus
rmspf
3D, 2D
frozen rotor with
initialization; transient with
initialization
Rotating Machinery,
Turbulent Flow, L-VEL
rmspf
3D, 2D
frozen rotor with
initialization; transient with
initialization
Rotating Machinery,
Turbulent Flow, k-
rmspf
3D, 2D
frozen rotor; time
dependent
MODELING AND SIMULATIONS OF FLUID FLOW
37
PHYSICS INTERFACE
ICON
TAG
SPACE
DIMENSION
AVAILABLE PRESET STUDY
TYPE
Thin-Film Flow, Shell
tffs
3D
stationary; time dependent;
frequency domain;
eigenfrequency
Thin-Film Flow,
Domain
tff
2D
stationary; time dependent;
frequency domain;
eigenfrequency
Thin-Film Flow, Edge
tffs
2D and 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent;
frequency domain;
eigenfrequency
Laminar Bubbly Flow
bf
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Turbulent Bubbly Flow
bf
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Mixture Model,
Laminar Flow
mm
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Mixture Model,
Turbulent Flow
mm
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Euler-Euler Model,
Laminar Flow
ee
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Euler-Euler Model,
Turbulent Flow
ee
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
transient with phase
initialization
Thin-Film Flow
Multiphase Flow
Bubbly Flow
Mixture Model
Euler-Euler Model
Two-Phase Flow, Level Set
Laminar Two-Phase
Flow, Level Set
38 |
CHAPTER 2: QUICK START GUIDE
PHYSICS INTERFACE
ICON
TAG
SPACE
DIMENSION
AVAILABLE PRESET STUDY
TYPE
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
transient with phase
initialization
Laminar Two-Phase
Flow, Phase Field
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
transient with phase
initialization
Turbulent Two-Phase
Flow, Phase Field
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
transient with phase
initialization
3D, 2D
time dependent
Turbulent Two-Phase
Flow, Level Set
Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field
Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field
Laminar, Three-Phase
Flow, Phase Field
Porous Media and Subsurface Flow
Brinkman Equations
br
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Darcys Law
dl
all dimensions
stationary; time dependent
Two-Phase Darcys Law
tpdl
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Free and Porous Media
Flow
fp
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Turbulent Flow,
Algebraic yPlus(2)
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary with
initialization; transient with
initialization
Turbulent Flow,
L-VEL(2)
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary with
initialization; transient with
initialization
Non-Isothermal Flow
Laminar Flow(2)
Turbulent Flow
MODELING AND SIMULATIONS OF FLUID FLOW
39
PHYSICS INTERFACE
ICON
TAG
SPACE
DIMENSION
AVAILABLE PRESET STUDY
TYPE
Turbulent Flow, k-(2)
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Turbulent Flow, k-(2)
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Turbulent Flow, SST(2)
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary with
initialization; transient with
initialization
Turbulent Flow, Low
Re k-(2)
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary with
initialization; transient with
initialization
Turbulent Flow,
Spalart-Allmaras(2)
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary with
initialization; transient with
initialization
High Mach Number Flow
High Mach Number
Flow
hmnf
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Turbulent Flow, k-
hmnf
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Turbulent Flow,
Spalart-Allmaras
hmnf
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary with
initialization; transient with
initialization
Heat Transfer in Fluids(1)
ht
all dimensions
stationary; time dependent
Heat Transfer in Porous
Media
ht
all dimensions
stationary; time dependent
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Heat Transfer
Conjugate Heat Transfer
Laminar Flow(2)
40 |
CHAPTER 2: QUICK START GUIDE
PHYSICS INTERFACE
ICON
TAG
SPACE
DIMENSION
AVAILABLE PRESET STUDY
TYPE
Turbulent Flow,
Algebraic yPlus
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary with
initialization; transient with
initialization
Turbulent Flow, L-VEL
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary with
initialization; transient with
initialization
Turbulent Flow, k-(2)
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Turbulent Flow, k-(2)
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary; time dependent
Turbulent Flow, Low
Re k-(2)
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary with
initialization; transient with
initialization
Turbulent Flow, SST(2)
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary with
initialization; transient with
initialization
Turbulent Flow,
Spalart-Allmaras(2)
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
stationary with
initialization; transient with
initialization
Level Set
ls
all dimensions
transient with phase
initialization
Phase Field
pf
all dimensions
time dependent; transient
with phase initialization
Ternary Phase Field
terpf
3D, 2D, 2D
axisymmetric
time dependent
Turbulent Flow
Mathematics
Moving Interface
(1)
This physics interface is included with the core COMSOL package but has added
functionality for this module.
(2)
This physics interface is a predefined multiphysics coupling that automatically adds all the
physics interfaces and coupling features required.
MODELING AND SIMULATIONS OF FLUID FLOW
41
Common Physics Interface and Feature Settings and Nodes
There are several common settings and sections available for the physics interfaces and
feature nodes. Some of these sections also have similar settings or are implemented in
the same way no matter the physics interface or feature being used. There are also some
physics feature nodes that display in COMSOL Multiphysics.
In each modules documentation, only unique or extra information is included;
standard information and procedures are centralized in the COMSOL Multiphysics
Reference Manual.
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual see Table 2-3 for
links to common sections and Table 2-4 to common feature nodes.
You can also search for information: press F1 to open the Help
window or Ctrl+F1 to open the Documentation window.
The Liquids and Gases Materials Database
The CFD Module includes an additional Liquids and Gases material database with
temperature-dependent fluid properties.
For detailed information about materials and the Liquids and Gases
Material Database, see Materials in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference
Manual.
42 |
CHAPTER 2: QUICK START GUIDE
Single-Phase Flow Interfaces
There are several fluid flow physics interfaces available as listed in The CFD Module Physics
Interface Guide. This chapter describes the physics interfaces found under the Fluid
Flow>Single-Phase Flow branch (
). The section Modeling Single-Phase Flow helps to
choose the best physics interface to start with.
In this chapter:
The Creeping Flow, Laminar Flow, and Turbulent Flow Interfaces
The Rotating Machinery, Laminar and Turbulent Flow Interfaces
Theory for the Single-Phase Flow Interfaces
Theory for the Turbulent Flow Interfaces
Theory for the Rotating Machinery Interfaces
The Wall Distance Interface is also available and described in the COMSOL Multiphysics
Reference Manual including the theory and how it relates to fluid flow.
43
Modeling Single-Phase Flow
The descriptions in this section are structured based on the order displayed in the Fluid
Flow branch. All the physics interfaces described in this section are found under the Fluid
Flow>Single-Phase Flow branch (
). Because most of the physics interfaces are integrated
with each other, many physics features described cross reference to other physics interfaces.
For example, nodes are usually available in both the laminar flow (Creeping Flow and
Laminar Flow) and turbulent flow (Algebraic yPlus, L-VEL, k-, k-, SST, low Reynolds
number k-, and Spalart-Allmaras turbulence models) interfaces.
In this section:
Selecting the Right Physics Interface
The Single-Phase Flow Interface Options
Coupling to Other Physics Interfaces
The Wall Distance Interface in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference
Manual
Selecting the Right Physics Interface
The Single-Phase Flow branch included with the CFD Module has a number of
subbranches with physics interfaces that describe different types of single-phase fluid flow.
One or more of these physics interfaces can be added, either singularly or in combination
with other physics interfaces for mass transport and heat transfer, for example.
Different types of flow require different equations to describe them. If the type of flow to
model is already known, then select it directly. However, when you are uncertain of the
flow type, or because it is difficult to reach a solution easily, you can start instead with a
simplified model and add complexity as the model is built. Then test your way forward and
compare models and results. For single-phase flow, the Laminar Flow interface is a good
place to start if this is the case.
In other cases, you may know exactly how a fluid behaves and which equations, models,
or physics interfaces best describe it, but because the model is so complex it is difficult to
reach an immediate solution. Simpler assumptions may need to be made to solve the
problem, and other physics interfaces might be better to fine-tune the solution process for
44 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
the more complex problem. The next section gives you an overview of each of the
Single-Phase Flow interfaces to help you choose.
The Single-Phase Flow Interface Options
Several of the physics interfaces vary only by one or two default settings (see Table 3-1) in
the Physical Model section, which are selected either from a check box or drop-down list.
For the Single-Phase Flow branch, all except the Rotating Machinery interfaces have the
same Name (spf). The differences are based on the default settings required to model that
type of flow as described in Table 3-1. Figure 3-1 shows the Settings window for Laminar
Flow where you choose the type of compressibility (incompressible, weakly compressible
or compressible at Mach numbers below 0.3) and the turbulence model (or none for
laminar flow), and a check box to model Stokes flow by neglecting the inertial term.
TABLE 3-1: THE SINGLE-PHASE FLOW PHYSICAL MODEL DEFAULT SETTINGS
PHYSICS INTERFACE
LABEL
NAME
COMPRESSIBILITY
TURBULENT
MODEL TYPE
TURBULENCE
MODEL
NEGLECT
INERTIAL TERM
(STOKES
FLOW)
Creeping Flow
spf
Incompressible
flow
None
n/a
Stokes Flow
Laminar Flow
spf
Incompressible
flow
None
n/a
None
Turbulent Flow,
Algebraic yPlus
spf
Incompressible
flow
RANS
Algebraic
yPlus
None
Turbulent Flow,
L-VEL
spf
Incompressible
flow
RANS
L-VEL
None
Turbulent Flow, k-
spf
Incompressible
flow
RANS
k-
None
Turbulent Flow, k-
spf
Incompressible
flow
RANS
k-
None
Turbulent Flow, SST
spf
Incompressible
flow
RANS
SST
None
Turbulent Flow, Low
Re k-
spf
Incompressible
flow
RANS
Low
Reynolds
number k-
None
Turbulent Flow,
Spalart-Allmaras
spf
Incompressible
flow
RANS
SpalartAllmaras
None
Rotating Machinery,
Laminar Flow
rmspf
Compressible
flow (Ma<0.3)
None
None
None
MODELING SINGLE-PHASE FLOW
45
TABLE 3-1: THE SINGLE-PHASE FLOW PHYSICAL MODEL DEFAULT SETTINGS
PHYSICS INTERFACE
LABEL
NAME
COMPRESSIBILITY
TURBULENT
MODEL TYPE
TURBULENCE
MODEL
NEGLECT
INERTIAL TERM
(STOKES
FLOW)
Rotating Machinery,
Turbulent Flow,
Algebraic yPlus
rmspf
Compressible
flow (Ma<0.3)
RANS
Algebraic
yPlus
None
Rotating Machinery,
Turbulent Flow,
L-VEL
rmspf
Compressible
flow (Ma<0.3)
RANS
L-VEL
None
Rotating Machinery,
Turbulent Flow, k-
rmspf
Compressible
flow (Ma<0.3)
None
RANS, k-
None
CREEPING FLOW
The Creeping Flow Interface (
) models the Navier-Stokes equations without the
contribution of the inertia term. This is often referred to as Stokes flow and is appropriate
for flow at small Reynolds numbers, such as in very small channels or in microfluidic
applications.
The Creeping Flow interface can also be activated by selecting a check box in the Laminar
Flow interface. This physics interface can also model non-Newtonian fluids, using the
Power Law and Carreau models, but not turbulence.
LAMINAR FLOW
The Laminar Flow Interface (
) is used primarily to model flow at small to intermediate
Reynolds numbers. The physics interface solves the Navier-Stokes equations, and by
default assumes the flow to be incompressible; that is, the density is assumed to be
constant.
Compressible flow is possible to model in this physics interface but you have to maintain
control of the density and any of the mass balances that are deployed to accomplish this.
The Laminar Flow Interface allows you to model porous media flow or even mixed freeand porous media flow. A volume force due to gravity can optionally be included.
This physics interface also allows you to simulate a certain class of non-Newtonian fluid
flows by modifying the dynamic viscosity in the Navier-Stokes equations. You can model
the fluid using the power law and Carreau models or enter another expression that
describes the dynamic viscosity appropriately.
You can also describe other material properties such as density by entering equations for
its dependence on fluid composition and pressure (for compressible flow), or temperature.
46 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Many materials in the material libraries use temperature- and pressure-dependent property
values. If the density is affected by temperature, a non-isothermal flow interface may be
applicable (see The Non-Isothermal Flow and Conjugate Heat Transfer, Laminar Flow
and Turbulent Flow Interfaces).
Figure 3-1: The Settings window for the Laminar Flow interface. Model incompressible or
compressible flow, laminar or turbulent flow, Stokes flow and/or porous media flow.
Combinations are also possible.
MODELING SINGLE-PHASE FLOW
47
TU R B U L E N T F L OW
The various forms of the Single-Phase Flow, Turbulent Flow interfaces (
) model flow
of large Reynolds numbers. The interfaces solve the Reynolds-averaged Navier-Stokes
(RANS) equations for the filtered velocity field and filtered pressure as well as models for
the turbulent viscosity. See The Creeping Flow, Laminar Flow, and Turbulent Flow
Interfaces for links to the physics interface information.
There are several turbulence models available: two algebraic turbulence models, the
Algebraic yPlus and L-VEL models, and five transport-equation models, including a basic
k- model, a k- model, an SST model, a Low Reynolds number k- model, and the
Spalart-Allmaras model. Each model has its merits and weaknesses. See the Theory for the
Turbulent Flow Interfaces for more details.
Similarly to the Laminar Flow interface, incompressible flow is selected by default. If
required, this can be changed to compressible flow. Non-Newtonian fluid models are not
available for the Turbulent Flow interfaces.
ROTATING MACHINERY
The Rotating Machinery, Laminar and Turbulent Flow Interfaces (
) model fluid flow
in geometries with rotating parts. For example, stirred tanks, mixers, propellers and
pumps.
Unlike the other physics interfaces under the Single-Phase Flow branch, the Rotating
Machinery, Fluid Flow interface can not be activated directly from the Laminar Flow
interface or any of the other physics interfaces. It supports compressible and
incompressible flow, the flow of non-Newtonian fluids using the Power Law and Carreau
models, as well as turbulence. This physics interface also supports creeping flow.
Coupling to Other Physics Interfaces
Often, you may want to simulate applications that couple fluid flow to another type of
phenomenon described in another physics interface. Although this is not often another
type of flow, it can still involve physics interfaces supported in the CFD Module and in the
COMSOL Multiphysics base package. This is often the case for applications that include
chemical reactions and mass transport (see Chemical Species Transport Interfaces), or
energy transport, found in the Heat Transfer and Non-Isothermal Flow Interfaces chapter.
More extensive descriptions of heat transfer, including radiation, can be found in the Heat
Transfer Module, while a wider variety of tools for modeling chemical reactions and mass
transport are found in the Chemical Reaction Engineering Module. Fluid flow is an
important component for cooling electromagnetic phenomena, such as heat created
48 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
through induction and microwave heating, which are simulated using the AC/DC
Module and RF Module, respectively. Many applications involve the effect of
fluid-imposed loads on structural applications, for example, fluid-structure interaction
(FSI). The Structural Mechanics Module and MEMS Module have physics interfaces
specifically for these multiphysics applications.
MODELING SINGLE-PHASE FLOW
49
T he C r e e pi ng Fl ow, Lam i n ar Fl ow,
and Turbulent Flow Interfaces
In this section:
The Creeping Flow Interface
The Laminar Flow Interface
The Turbulent Flow, Algebraic yPlus Interface
The Turbulent Flow, L-VEL Interface
The Turbulent Flow, k-e Interface
The Turbulent Flow, k-w Interface
The Turbulent Flow, SST Interface
The Turbulent Flow, Low Re k-e Interface
The Turbulent Flow, Spalart-Allmaras Interface
Domain, Boundary, Pair, and Point Nodes for Single-Phase Flow
Theory for the Single-Phase Flow Interfaces
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual, see Table 2-3 for links to common
sections such as Discretization, Consistent Stabilization, Inconsistent Stabilization, and
Advanced Settings sections, all accessed by clicking the Show button (
) and choosing the
applicable option. You can also search for information: press F1 to open the Help window
or Ctrl+F1 to open the Documentation window.
The Creeping Flow Interface
The Creeping Flow (spf) interface (
) is used for simulating fluid flows at very low
Reynolds numbers for which the inertial term in the Navier-Stokes equations can be
neglected. Creeping flow, also referred to as Stokes flow, occurs in systems with high
viscosity or small geometrical length scales (for example, in microfluidics and MEMS
devices). The fluid can be compressible or incompressible, as well as Newtonian or
non-Newtonian.
50 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
The equations solved by the Creeping Flow interface are the Stokes equations for
conservation of momentum and the continuity equation for conservation of mass.
The Creeping Flow interface can be used for stationary and time-dependent analyses.
The main feature is the Fluid Properties node, which adds the Stokes equations and
provides an interface for defining the fluid material and its properties. Except where noted
below, see The Laminar Flow Interface for all other settings.
PHYSICAL MODEL
By default, the Neglect inertial term (Stokes flow) check box is selected. If unchecked, or, if
the Turbulence model type is changed to RANS, the inertial terms are included in the
computations.
DISCRETIZATION
By default, the Creeping Flow interface uses P2+P1 elements. Contrary to general laminar
and turbulent single-phase flow simulations employing purely linear P1+P1 elements,
P2+P1 elements are well suited for Creeping flow simulations.
CONSISTENT STABILIZATION
This check box is selected by default and should remain selected for optimal performance.
The consistent stabilization method does not perturb the original transport equation.
The Laminar Flow Interface
Theory for the Single-Phase Flow Interfaces
The Laminar Flow Interface
The Laminar Flow (spf) interface (
) is used to compute the velocity and pressure fields
for the flow of a single-phase fluid in the laminar flow regime. A flow remains laminar as
long as the Reynolds number is below a certain critical value. At higher Reynolds numbers,
disturbances have a tendency to grow and cause transition to turbulence. This critical
Reynolds number depends on the model, but a classical example is pipe flow where the
critical Reynolds number is known to be approximately 2000.
The physics interface supports incompressible flow, weakly compressible flow (the density
depends on temperature but not pressure) and compressible flow at low Mach numbers
(typically less than 0.3). It also supports flow of non-Newtonian fluids.
T H E C R E E P I N G F L O W , L A M I N A R F L O W , A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
51
The equations solved by the Laminar Flow interface are the Navier-Stokes equations for
conservation of momentum and the continuity equation for conservation of mass.
The Laminar Flow interface can be used for stationary and time-dependent analyses.
Time-dependent studies should be used in the high-Reynolds number regime as these
flows tend to become inherently unsteady.
When the Laminar Flow interface is added, the following default nodes are also added in
the Model Builder: Fluid Properties, Wall (the default boundary condition is No slip), and
Initial Values. Other nodes, that implement, for example, boundary conditions and volume
forces, can be added from the Physics toolbar or from the context menu displayed when
right-clicking Laminar Flow.
SETTINGS
The Label is the default physics interface name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the physics interface.
Physics interface variables can be referred to using the pattern
<name>.<variable_name>. In order to distinguish between variables belonging to
different physics interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers, and
underscores (_) are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first physics interface in the model) is spf.
About the Physics Interface Label Names
The label for a single-phase flow interface (the node name in the Model Builder) is
dynamic and is re-set according to the turbulence model and the neglect inertial term
(Stokes flow) property set at the physics interface level. The availability also depends on
the software license.
For example, a Laminar Flow interface is added to the Model Tree. If the Low Reynolds
number k- turbulence model is selected, the interface Label changes to Turbulent Flow, Low
Re k-, which is the same Label that displays when the corresponding interface is added
from the Model Wizard or Add Physics window.
If the Neglect inertial term (Stokes flow) check box is selected, then the Label changes to
Creeping Flow, which is the same Label that displays when that interface is added from the
Model Wizard or Add Physics window.
52 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
PHYSICAL MODEL
Compressibility
Depending of the fluid properties and the flow regime, three options are available for the
Compressibility option. In general the computational complexity increases from
Incompressible flow to Weakly compressible flow to Compressible flow (Ma<0.3) but the
underlying hypotheses are increasingly more restrictive in the opposite direction.
When the Incompressible flow option (default) is selected, the incompressible form of the
Navier-Stokes and continuity equations is applied. In addition, the fluid density is
evaluated at the Reference pressure level and at the Reference temperature defined in
Reference values. The fluid dynamic viscosity is evaluated at the Reference temperature.
The Weakly compressible flow option models compressible flow when the pressure
dependency of the density can be neglected. When selected, the compressible form of the
Navier-Stokes and continuity equations is applied. In addition, the fluid density is
evaluated at the Reference pressure level defined in Reference values.
When the Compressible flow (Ma<0.3) option is selected, the compressible form of the
Navier-Stokes and continuity equations is applied. Ma < 0.3 indicates that the inlet and
outlet conditions, as well as the stabilization, may not be suitable for transonic and
supersonic flow. For more information, see The Mach Number Limit.
Turbulence Model Type
Turbulent flow can be simulated by changing the Turbulence model type to RANS
(Reynolds-Averaged NavierStokes).
Swirl Flow
The velocity component, u, in the azimuthal direction can be included for 2D
axisymmetric components by selecting the Swirl flow check box. While u can be nonzero,
there can be no gradients in the direction. Also see General Single-Phase Flow Theory.
Neglect Inertial Term (Stokes Flow)
For low Reynolds number flows, the inertial terms in the Navier-Stokes equations may be
neglected.
Porous Media Domains
With the addition of various modules, the Enable porous media domains check box is
available. Selecting this option, a Fluid and Matrix Properties node, a Mass Source node, and
a Forchheimer Drag subnode are added to the physics interface. These are described for the
Brinkman Equations interface in the respective modules documentation. The Fluid and
Matrix Properties can be applied on all domains or on a subset of the domains.
T H E C R E E P I N G F L O W , L A M I N A R F L O W , A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
53
Include gravity
When the Include gravity check-box is selected a global Gravity feature is shown in the
interface model tree and the buoyancy force is included in the Navier-Stokes equations.
When the Include gravity check-box is selected, the option Use reduced pressure changes
the pressure formulation from using the total pressure (default) to using the reduced
pressure. This option is suitable for configurations where the density changes are very
small, otherwise the default formulation can be used. For more information, see Gravity.
Natural convection is induced by variations in magnitude of the buoyancy
force which is defined from the density. For incompressible flow the
density is constant, hence the buoyancy force is homogeneous and natural
convection can not be modeled. Nevertheless, using the Non Isothermal
Flow multiphysics coupling, the buoyancy force is defined using the
thermal expansion coefficient and the temperature. Hence in this case
natural convection is accounted for following Bousinesqs approximation.
Use Shallow Channel Approximation
For 2D components, selecting the Use shallow channel approximation check box enables
modeling of fluid flow in shallow channels in microfluidics applications. Such channels
often have an almost rectangular cross section where the Channel thickness dz is much
smaller than the channel width. Simple 2D components often fail to give correct results
for this type of problems because they exclude the boundaries that have the greatest effect
on the flow. The shallow channel approximation takes the effect of these boundaries into
account by adding a drag term as a volume force to the momentum equation. The form
of this term is
u
F = 12 --------2
dz
(3-1)
where is the fluids dynamic viscosity, u is the velocity field, and dz is the channel
thickness. This term represents the resistance that the parallel boundaries impose on the
flow; however, it does not account for any changes in velocity due to variations in the
cross-sectional area of the channel.
Reference values
Reference values are global quantities used to evaluate the density and viscosity of the fluid
when the Incompressible flow or the Weakly compressible flow option is selected and to
define the gravity force.
54 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Reference pressure level There are generally two ways to include the pressure in fluid flow
computations: either to use the absolute pressure pA=p+pref, or the gauge pressure p.
When pref is nonzero, the physics interface solves for the gauge pressure whereas material
properties are evaluated using the absolute pressure. The reference pressure level is also
used to define the reference density.
Reference temperature The reference temperature is used to define the reference density.
Reference position When Include gravity is selected, the reference position can be defined.
It corresponds to the location where the total pressure (that includes the hydrostatic
pressure) is equal to the Reference pressure level.
D EPENDE N T VAR IA BL ES
The following dependent variables (fields) are defined for this physics interfacethe
Velocity field u and its components, and the Pressure p.
The Projection Method for the Navier-Stokes Equations requires additional dependent
variables. These are the Corrected velocity field uc and the Corrected pressure pc.
If required, the names of the field, component, and dependent variable may be edited.
Editing the name of a scalar dependent variable changes both its field name and the
dependent variable name. If a new field name coincides with the name of another field of
the same type, the fields share degrees of freedom and dependent variable names. A new
field name must not coincide with the name of a field of another type or with a component
name belonging to some other field. Component names must be unique within a model
except when two fields share a common field name.
ADVANCED SETTINGS
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
Normally these settings do not need to be changed.
The Use pseudo time stepping for stationary equation form option adds pseudo time
derivatives to the equation when the Stationary equation form is used in order to speed up
convergence. When selected, a CFL number expression should also be defined. For the
T H E C R E E P I N G F L O W , L A M I N A R F L O W , A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
55
default Automatic option, the local CFL number (from the CourantFriedrichsLewy
condition) is determined by a PID regulator.
Pseudo Time Stepping for Laminar Flow Models
The Projection Method for the Navier-Stokes Equations
Domain, Boundary, Pair, and Point Nodes for Single-Phase Flow
Theory for the Single-Phase Flow Interfaces
Flow Past a Cylinder: Application Library path
COMSOL_Multiphysics/Fluid_Dynamics/cylinder_flow
The Turbulent Flow, Algebraic yPlus Interface
The Turbulent Flow, Algebraic yPlus (spf) interface (
) is used for simulating single-phase
flows at high Reynolds numbers. The physics interface is suitable for incompressible flows,
weakly compressible flows, and compressible flows at low Mach numbers (typically less
than 0.3).
The equations solved by the Turbulent Flow, Algebraic yPlus interface are the
Reynolds-averaged Navier-Stokes (RANS) equations for conservation of momentum, the
continuity equation for conservation of mass, and an algebraic equation for the scaled wall
distance. Turbulence effects are included using an enhanced viscosity model based on the
scaled wall distance, and the physics interface therefore includes a wall distance equation.
When this physics interface is added, the following default nodes are also added in the
Model BuilderFluid Properties, Wall (the default boundary condition is No slip), and Initial
Values.
Except where included below, see The Laminar Flow Interface and The Turbulent Flow,
k-e Interface for all the other settings.
PHYSICAL MODEL
A different turbulence model can be selected under Turbulence model. Laminar or creeping
flow may simulated by changing the Turbulence model type to None.
Porous Media Domains
With the addition of various modules, the Enable porous media domains check box is
available. Selecting this option, a Fluid and Matrix Properties node, a Mass Source node, and
a Forchheimer Drag subnode are added to the physics interface. These are described for the
56 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Brinkman Equations interface in the respective modules documentation. Applying the Fluid
and Matrix Properties on a subset of the domains enables studies of coupled porous-media
flow and turbulent flow.
TU R B U L E N C E M O D E L PA R A M E T E R S
The turbulence model parameters for the Algebraic yPlus model, a and Ba, have been
optimized for turbulent pipe flow. For certain cases, better performance can be obtained
by tuning the model parameters.
D EPENDE N T VAR IA BL ES
The following dependent variables (fields) are defined for this physics interface:
Velocity field u
Pressure p
Reciprocal wall distance G
Wall distance in viscous units yPlus (dimensionless)
The Algebraic yPlus interface requires a Wall Distance Initialization study step in the study
previous to the Stationary or Time Dependent study step.
For study information, see Stationary with Initialization, Transient with Initialization, and
Wall Distance Initialization in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual.
The Turbulent Flow, L-VEL Interface
The Turbulent Flow, L-VEL (spf) interface (
) is used for simulating single-phase flows at
high Reynolds numbers. The physics interface is suitable for incompressible flows, weakly
compressible flows, and compressible flows at low Mach number (typically less than 0.3).
The equations solved by the Turbulent Flow, L-VEL interface are the Reynolds-averaged
Navier-Stokes (RANS) equations for conservation of momentum and the continuity
equation for conservation of mass. Turbulence effects are included using an enhanced
viscosity model based on the local wall distance, and the physics interface therefore
includes a wall distance equation. When this physics interface is added, the following
default nodes are also added in the Model BuilderFluid Properties, Wall (the default
boundary condition is No slip), and Initial Values. Except where included below, see The
Laminar Flow Interface and The Turbulent Flow, k-e Interface for all the other settings.
T H E C R E E P I N G F L O W , L A M I N A R F L O W , A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
57
PHYSICAL MODEL
A different turbulence model can be selected under Turbulence model. Laminar or creeping
flow may simulated by changing the Turbulence model type to None.
Porous Media Domains
With the addition of various modules, the Enable porous media domains check box is
available. Selecting this option, a Fluid and Matrix Properties node, a Mass Source node, and
a Forchheimer Drag subnode are added to the physics interface. These are described for the
Brinkman Equations interface in the respective modules documentation. Applying the Fluid
and Matrix Properties on a subset of the domains enables studies of coupled porous-media
flow and turbulent flow.
TU R B U L E N C E M O D E L P A R A M E T E R S
Turbulence model parameters, l and El, have been optimized for internal flow. For
certain cases, better performance can be obtained by tuning the model parameters.
D E P E N D E N T VA R I A BL E S
The following dependent variables (fields) are defined for this physics interface:
Velocity field u and its components
Pressure p
Reciprocal wall distance G
Tangential velocity in viscous units uPlus (dimensionless)
The L-VEL interface requires a Wall Distance Initialization study step in the study
previous to the Stationary or Time Dependent study step.
For study information, see Stationary with Initialization, Transient with Initialization, and
Wall Distance Initialization in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual.
The Turbulent Flow, k- Interface
The Turbulent Flow, k- (spf) interface (
) is used for simulating single-phase flows at
high Reynolds numbers. The physics interface is suitable for incompressible flows, weakly
compressible flows, and compressible flows at low Mach numbers (typically less than 0.3).
The equations solved by the Turbulent Flow, k- interface are the Reynolds-averaged
Navier-Stokes (RANS) equations for conservation of momentum and the continuity
equation for conservation of mass. Turbulence effects are modeled using the standard
two-equation k- model with realizability constraints. The flow near walls is modeled using
wall functions.
58 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
The Turbulent Flow, k- interface can be used for stationary and time-dependent analyses.
The main feature is Fluid Properties, which adds the RANS equations and the transport
equations for k and , and provides an interface for defining the fluid material and its
properties. When this physics interface is added, the following default nodes are also added
in the Model Builder: Fluid Properties, Wall (the default boundary condition is Wall
functions), and Initial Values.
Except where included below, see The Laminar Flow Interface for all the other settings.
PHYSICAL MODEL
A different turbulence model can be selected under Turbulence model. Laminar or creeping
flow may simulated by changing the Turbulence model type to None.
The Turbulence model property disables the Neglect inertial term (Stokes flow) check box,
and for 2D components also the Shallow Channel Approximation check box.
TU R B U L E N C E M O D E L PA R A M E T E R S
Turbulence model parameters are optimized to fit as many flow types as possible, but for
some special cases, better performance can be obtained by tuning the model parameters.
For this physics interface the parameters are Ce1, Ce2, C, k, e, v, and B.
D EPENDE N T VAR IA BL ES
The following dependent variables (fields) are defined for this physics interface:
Velocity field u and its components
Pressure p
Turbulent kinetic energy k
Turbulent dissipation rate ep
The Projection Method for the Navier-Stokes Equations requires additional dependent
variables. These are the Corrected velocity field uc and the Corrected pressure pc.
ADVANCED SETTINGS
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
The Turbulence variables scale parameters subsection is available when the Turbulence model
type is set to RANS.
In addition to the settings described for the Laminar Flow interface, enter a value for
Uscale and Lfact under the Turbulence variables scale parameters subsection.
T H E C R E E P I N G F L O W , L A M I N A R F L O W , A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
59
The Uscale and Lfact parameters are used to calculate absolute tolerances for the
turbulence variables. The scaling parameters must only contain numerical values, units or
parameters defined under Global Definitions. The scaling parameters cannot contain
variables. The parameters are used when a new default solver for a transient study step is
generated. If you change the parameters, the new values take effect the next time you
generate a new default solver
The Laminar Flow Interface
Pseudo Time Stepping in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference
Manual
Theory for the Turbulent Flow Interfaces
Airflow Over an Ahmed Body: Application Library path
CFD_Module/Single-Phase_Benchmarks/ahmed_body
Solar Panel in Periodic Flow: Application Library path
CFD_Module/Single-Phase_Tutorials/solar_panel
The Turbulent Flow, k- Interface
The Turbulent Flow, k- (spf) interface (
) is used for simulating single-phase flows at
high Reynolds numbers. The physics interface is suitable for incompressible flows, weakly
compressible flows, and compressible flows at low Mach numbers (typically less than 0.3).
The equations solved by the Turbulent Flow, k- interface are the Reynolds-averaged
Navier-Stokes (RANS) equations for conservation of momentum and the continuity
equation for conservation of mass. Turbulence effects are modeled using the Wilcox
revised two-equation k- model with realizability constraints. The flow near walls is
modeled using wall functions.
The Turbulent Flow, k- interface can be used for stationary and time-dependent analyses.
The main feature is Fluid Properties, which adds the RANS equations and the transport
equations for the turbulent kinetic energy k and the specific dissipation , and provides an
interface for defining the fluid material and its properties. When this physics interface is
added, the following default nodes are also added in the Model Builder: Fluid Properties,
Wall (the default boundary condition is Wall functions), and Initial Values.
Except where included below, see The Laminar Flow Interface and The Turbulent Flow,
k-e Interface for all the other settings.
60 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
PHYSICAL MODEL
A different turbulence model can be selected under Turbulence model. Laminar or creeping
flow may simulated by changing the Turbulence model type to None.
The Turbulence model property disables the Neglect inertial term (Stokes flow) check box,
and for 2D components also the Shallow Channel Approximation check box.
TU R B U L E N C E M O D E L PA R A M E T E R S
Turbulence model parameters are optimized to fit as many flow types as possible, but for
some special cases, better performance can be obtained by tuning the model parameters.
For this physics interface the parameters are , k, w, 0, 0, v, and B.
D EPENDE N T VAR IA BL ES
The following dependent variables (fields) are defined for this physics interface:
Velocity field u and its components
Pressure p
Turbulent kinetic energy k
Specific dissipation rate om
Flow Through a Pipe Elbow: Application Library path
CFD_Module/Single-Phase_Benchmarks/pipe_elbow
The Turbulent Flow, SST Interface
The Turbulent Flow, SST (spf) interface (
) is used for simulating single-phase flows at
high Reynolds numbers. The physics interface is suitable for incompressible flows, weakly
compressible flows, and compressible flows at low Mach numbers (typically less than 0.3).
The equations solved by the Turbulent Flow, SST interface are the Reynolds-averaged
Navier-Stokes (RANS) equation for conservation of momentum and the continuity
equation for conservation of mass. Turbulence effects are modeled using the Menter
shear-stress transport (SST) two-equation model from 2003 with realizability constraints.
The SST model is a so-called low-Reynolds number model, which means that it resolves
the flow all the way down to the wall. The SST model depends on the distance to the
closest wall. The physics interface therefore includes a wall distance equation.
The Turbulent Flow, SST interface can be used for stationary and time-dependent
analyses.
T H E C R E E P I N G F L O W , L A M I N A R F L O W , A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
61
When this physics interface is added, the following default nodes are also added in the
Model Builder: Fluid Properties, Wall (the default boundary condition is No slip), and Initial
Values.
Except where included below, see The Laminar Flow Interface and The Turbulent Flow,
k-e Interface for all the other settings.
PHYSICAL MODEL
A different turbulence model can be selected under Turbulence model. Laminar or creeping
flow may simulated by changing the Turbulence model type to None.
The Turbulence model property disables the Neglect inertial term (Stokes flow) check box,
and for 2D components also the Shallow Channel Approximation check box.
TU R B U L E N C E M O D E L P A R A M E T E R S
Turbulence model parameters are optimized to fit as many flow types as possible, but for
some special cases, better performance can be obtained by tuning the model parameters.
For this physics interface the parameters are a1, 0, 1, 2, 1, 2, k1, k2, w1,and w2.
D E P E N D E N T VA R I A BL E S
The following dependent variables (fields) are defined for this physics interface:
Velocity field u and its components
Pressure p
Turbulent kinetic energy k
Specific dissipation rate om
Reciprocal wall distance G
The SST interface requires a Wall Distance Initialization study step in the study previous to
the Stationary or Time Dependent study step.
For study information, see Stationary with Initialization, Transient with Initialization, and
Wall Distance Initialization in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual.
The Turbulent Flow, Low Re k- Interface
The Turbulent Flow, Low Re k- (spf) interface (
) is used for simulating single-phase
flows at high Reynolds numbers. The physics interface is suitable for incompressible flows,
weakly compressible flows, and compressible flows at low Mach numbers (typically less
than 0.3).
62 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
The equations solved by the Turbulent Flow, Low Re k- interface are the
Reynolds-averaged Navier-Stokes (RANS) equations for conservation of momentum and
the continuity equation for conservation of mass. Turbulence effects are modeled using
the AKN two-equation k- model with realizability constraints. The AKN model is a
so-called low-Reynolds number model, which means that it resolves the flow all the way
down to the wall. The AKN model depends on the distance to the closest wall. The physics
interface therefore includes a wall distance equation.
The Turbulent Flow, Low Re k- interface can be used for stationary and time-dependent
analyses.
Except where included below, see The Laminar Flow Interface and The Turbulent Flow,
k-e Interface for all the other settings.
PHYSICAL MODEL
A different turbulence model can be selected under Turbulence model. Laminar or creeping
flow may simulated by changing the Turbulence model type to None.
The Turbulence model property disables the Neglect inertial term (Stokes flow) check box,
and for 2D components also the Shallow Channel Approximation check box.
TU R B U L E N C E M O D E L PA R A M E T E R S
Turbulence model parameters are optimized to fit as many flow types as possible, but for
some special cases, better performance can be obtained by tuning the model parameters.
For this physics interface the parameters are Ce1, Ce2, C, k, e, and v.
D EPENDE N T VAR IA BL ES
The following dependent variables (fields) are defined for this physics interface:
Velocity field u and its components
Pressure p
Turbulent kinetic energy k
Turbulent dissipation rate ep
Reciprocal wall distance G
The Low Reynolds number k- interface requires a Wall Distance Initialization study step
in the study previous to the Stationary or Time Dependent study step.
T H E C R E E P I N G F L O W , L A M I N A R F L O W , A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
63
For study information, see Stationary with Initialization, Transient with Initialization, and
Wall Distance Initialization in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual.
The Laminar Flow Interface
Pseudo Time Stepping in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference
Manual
Theory for the Turbulent Flow Interfaces
The Turbulent Flow, Spalart-Allmaras Interface
The Turbulent Flow, Spalart-Allmaras (spf) interface (
) is used for simulating
single-phase flows at high Reynolds numbers. The physics interface is suitable for
incompressible flows, weakly compressible flows, and compressible flows at low Mach
numbers (typically less than 0.3).
The equations solved by the Turbulent Flow, Spalart-Allmaras interface are the
Reynolds-averaged Navier-Stokes (RANS) equation for conservation of momentum and
the continuity equation for conservation of mass. Turbulence effects are modeled using
the Spalart-Allmaras one-equation model. The Spalart-Allmaras model is a so-called
low-Reynolds number model, which means that it resolves the flow all the way down to
the wall. The Spalart-Allmaras model depends on the distance to the closest wall. The
physics interface therefore includes a wall distance equation.
The Turbulent Flow, Spalart-Allmaras interface can be used for stationary and
time-dependent analyses. The main feature is Fluid Properties, which adds the RANS
equations and the transport equations for the undamped turbulent kinematic velocity ,
and provides an interface for defining the fluid material and its properties. When this
physics interface is added, the following default nodes are also added in the Model Builder
Fluid Properties, Wall (the default boundary condition is No slip), and Initial Values.
Except where included below, see The Laminar Flow Interface and The Turbulent Flow,
k-e Interface for all the other settings.
PHYSICAL MODEL
A different turbulence model can be selected under Turbulence model. Laminar or creeping
flow may simulated by changing the Turbulence model type to None.
The Turbulence model property disables the Neglect inertial term (Stokes flow) check box,
and for 2D components also the Shallow Channel Approximation check box.
64 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
TU R B U L E N C E M O D E L PA R A M E T E R S
Turbulence model parameters are optimized to fit as many flow types as possible, but for
some special cases, better performance can be obtained by tuning the model parameters.
For this physics interface the parameters are Cb1, Cb2, Cv1, v, Cw2, Cw3, v, and Crot.
ADVANCED SETTINGS
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
Under the Turbulence variables scale parameters subsection, the default scale is of the same
order of magnitude as the kinematic viscosity of air at room temperature.
D EPENDE N T VAR IA BL ES
The following dependent variables (fields) are defined for this physics interface:
Velocity field u and its components
Pressure p
Reciprocal wall distance G
Undamped turbulent kinematic viscosity
The Spalart-Allmaras interface requires a Wall Distance Initialization study step in the
study previous to the Stationary or Time Dependent study step.
For study information, see Stationary with Initialization, Transient with Initialization, and
Wall Distance Initialization in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual.
T H E C R E E P I N G F L O W , L A M I N A R F L O W , A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
65
Domain, Boundary, Pair, and Point Nodes for Single-Phase Flow
The following nodes, listed in alphabetical order, are available from the Physics ribbon
toolbar (Windows users), Physics context menu (Mac or Linux users), or by right-clicking
to access the context menu (all users).
Boundary Stress
Open Boundary
Fan
Outlet
Flow Continuity
Periodic Flow Condition
Fluid Properties
Pipe Connection1
Grille
Point Mass Source1
Gravity
Pressure Point Constraint
Initial Values
Screen
Inlet
Symmetry
Interior Fan
Vacuum Pump
Interior Wall
Volume Force
1
Line Mass Source
Wall
1 A feature that may require an additional license
For 2D axisymmetric components, COMSOL Multiphysics takes the axial
symmetry boundaries (at r = 0) into account and adds an Axial Symmetry
node that is valid on the axial symmetry boundaries only.
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual, see Table 2-3 for links to common
sections and Table 2-4 to common feature nodes. You can also search for information:
press F1 to open the Help window or Ctrl+F1 to open the Documentation window.
Fluid Properties
The Fluid Properties node adds the momentum and continuity equations solved by the
physics interface, except for volume forces which are added by the Volume Force feature.
The node also provides an interface for defining the material properties of the fluid.
For the Turbulent Flow interfaces, the Fluid Properties node also adds the equations for
the turbulence transport equations.
66 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
MODEL INPUTS
Fluid properties, such as density and viscosity, can be defined through user inputs,
variables, or by selecting a material. For the latter option, additional inputs, for example
temperature and/or pressure, may be required to define these properties.
Temperature
By default, the single-phase flow interfaces are set to model isothermal flow. If a Heat
Transfer interface is included in the component, the temperature field may alternatively be
selected from this physics interface. All physics interfaces have their own tags (Name). For
example, if a Heat Transfer in Fluids interface is included in the component, the
Temperature (ht) option is available for T.
Absolute Pressure
This input appears when a material requires the absolute pressure as a model input. The
absolute pressure is used to evaluate material properties, but it also relates to the value of
the calculated pressure field. There are generally two ways to calculate the pressure when
describing fluid flow: either to solve for the absolute pressure or for a pressure (often
denoted gauge pressure) that relates to the absolute pressure through a reference pressure.
The choice of pressure variable depends on the system of equations being solved. For
example, in a unidirectional incompressible flow problem, the pressure drop over the
modeled domain is probably many orders of magnitude smaller than the atmospheric
pressure, which, when included, may reduce the stability and convergence properties of
the solver. In other cases, such as when the pressure is part of an expression for the gas
volume or the diffusion coefficients, it may be more convenient to solve for the absolute
pressure.
The default Absolute pressure pA is p+pref, where p is the dependent pressure variable from
the Navier-Stokes or RANS equations, and pref is from the user input defined at the
physics interface level. When pref is nonzero, the physics interface solves for a gauge
pressure. If the pressure field instead is an absolute pressure field, pref should be set to 0.
The Absolute pressure field can be edited by clicking Make All Model Inputs Editable (
and entering the desired value in the input field.
FLUID PROPERTIES
Density
If density variations with respect to pressure are to be included in the computations, the
flow must be set to compressible (at the physics interface level).
T H E C R E E P I N G F L O W , L A M I N A R F L O W , A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
67
Dynamic Viscosity
The Dynamic viscosity describes the relationship between the shear rate and the shear
stresses in a fluid. Intuitively, water and air have low viscosities, and substances often
described as thick (such as oil) have higher viscosities.
Using the built-in variable for the shear rate magnitude, spf.sr, makes it possible to
define arbitrary expressions of the dynamic viscosity as a function of the shear rate.
For laminar flow, the Non-Newtonian power law may be used to model the viscosity of a
non-Newtonian fluid. The following model parameters are required for the Non-Newtonian
power law:
Fluid consistency coefficient m
Flow behavior index n
Lower shear rate limit min
Alternatively, the Non-Newtonian Carreau model may be used to model the viscosity of a
non-Newtonian fluid for laminar flow. The following Carreau model parameters are
required:
Zero shear rate viscosity 0
Infinite shear rate viscosity inf
Model parameter and n
The non-Newtonian fluids models have a shear-rate dependent viscosity. Examples of
non-Newtonian fluids include yogurt, paper pulp, and polymer suspensions. See
Non-Newtonian Flow: The Power Law and the Carreau Model.
MIXING LENGTH LIMIT
For the Turbulent Flow, k-, Turbulent Flow, k-, and Rotating Machinery, Turbulent
Flow k- interfaces, an upper limit on the mixing length is required.
When the Mixing length limit lmix,lim is set to Automatic, it is evaluated to the shortest side
of the geometry bounding box. If the geometry is, for example, a complicated system of
slim entities, this measure can be too high. In such cases, it is recommended that the
mixing length limit is defined manually.
DISTANCE EQUATION
For the Turbulent Flow, Low Reynolds number k-, Turbulent flow, Algebraic yPlus,
Turbulent Flow, L-VEL, Turbulent flow, SST, and the Turbulent Flow, Spalart-Allmaras
interfaces, a Wall Distance interface is included.
68 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
When the Reference length scale lref is set to Automatic, it is evaluated to one tenth of the
shortest side of the geometry bounding box. The solution to the wall distance equation is
controlled by the parameter lref. The distance to objects larger than lref is represented
accurately, while objects smaller than lref are effectively diminished by appearing to be
farther away than they actually are. This is a desirable feature in turbulence modeling
because small objects would have too large an impact on the solution if the wall distance
were measured exactly. The automatic value is usually a good choice but the value can
become too high if the geometry consists of several slim entities. In such cases, it is
recommended that the reference length scale is defined manually.
Volume Force
The Volume Force node specifies the volume force F on the right-hand side of the
momentum equation.
u
2
T
+ ( u )u = pI + ( u + ( u ) ) --- ( u )I + F
t
3
If several volume-force nodes are added to the same domain, then the sum of all
contributions are added to the momentum equation.
Initial Values
The initial values serve as initial conditions for a transient simulation or as an initial guess
for a nonlinear solver in a stationary simulation. Note that for a transient
compressible-flow simulation employing a material for which the density depends on the
pressure (such as air), discontinuities in the initial values trigger pressure waves even when
the Mach number is small. The pressure waves must be resolved and this puts a restriction
on the time step.
I N ITI AL VAL U ES
Initial values or expressions should be specified for the Velocity field u and the Pressure p.
When Include gravity is selected and Use reduced pressure not selected in the interface
Physical model section, the Compensate for hydrostatic pressure approximation (named
Compensate for hydrostatic pressure for compressible flows) checkbox is available and
selected by default. When it is selected, the hydrostatic pressure is automatically added to
the pressure entered in p user input.
T H E C R E E P I N G F L O W , L A M I N A R F L O W , A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
69
In the Turbulent Flow interfaces, initial values for the turbulence variables should also
specified. Depending on the turbulent flow interface being used, additional initial values
may be required for:
Turbulent kinetic energy k
Turbulent dissipation rate ep
Reciprocal wall distance G
Specific dissipation rate om
Undamped turbulent kinematic viscosity 0
Wall distance in viscous units yPlus (dimensionless). Under normal circumstances the
default value need not be changed.
Tangential velocity in viscous units uPlus (dimensionless). Under normal circumstances
the default value need not be changed.
Wall
The Wall node includes a set of boundary conditions describing fluid-flow conditions at
stationary, moving, and leaking walls. For turbulent flow, the description may involve wall
functions and/or asymptotic expressions for certain turbulence variables.
BOUNDARY CONDITION
Select a Boundary condition for the wall.
No Slip1
Moving Wall (Wall Functions)
Slip
Moving Wall
Sliding Wall
Leaking Wall
Wall Functions
Slip Velocity
Sliding Wall (Wall Functions)
1
The default for laminar flow, and the turbulence models: Low Reynolds number
k-, SST, Algebraic yPlus, L-VEL, and Spalart-Allmaras
No Slip
No slip is the default boundary condition for a stationary solid wall for laminar flow (and
SST, Low Re k-, Algebraic yPlus, L-VEL, and Spalart-Allmaras turbulence models). The
condition prescribes u = 0; that is, the fluid at the wall is not moving.
70 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Slip
The Slip option prescribes a no-penetration condition, un=0. It is implicitly assumed that
there are no viscous effects at the slip wall and hence, no boundary layer develops. From
a modeling point of view, this can be a reasonable approximation if the main effect of the
wall is to prevent fluid from leaving the domain.
Sliding Wall
The Sliding wall boundary condition is appropriate if the wall behaves like a conveyor belt;
that is, the surface is sliding in its tangential direction. A velocity is prescribed at the wall
and the boundary itself does not have to actually move relative to the reference frame.
For 3D components, values or expressions for the Velocity of sliding wall uw should be
specified. If the velocity vector entered is not in the plane of the wall, COMSOL
Multiphysics projects it onto the tangential direction. Its magnitude is adjusted to be
the same as the magnitude of the vector entered.
For 2D components, the tangential direction is unambiguously defined by the direction
of the boundary. For this reason, the sliding wall boundary condition has different
definitions in different space dimensions. A single entry for the Velocity of the
tangentially moving wall Uw should be specified in 2D.
For 2D axisymmetric components when Swirl flow is selected in the physics interface
properties, the Velocity of moving wall, component vw may also be specified.
Moving Wall
For an arbitrary wall movement, the condition u = uw may be prescribed. In this case, the
components of the Velocity of moving wall uw should be specified.
Specifying this boundary condition does not automatically cause the associated wall to
move. An additional Moving Mesh interface needs to be added to physically track the wall
movement in the spatial reference frame.
Leaking Wall
This boundary condition may be used to simulate a wall where fluid is leaking into or
leaving the domain with the velocity u = ul through a perforated wall. The components
of the Fluid velocity ul on the leaking wall should be specified.
Slip Velocity
In the microscale range, the flow condition at a boundary is seldom strictly no slip or slip.
Instead, the boundary condition is something in between, and there is a Slip velocity at the
boundary. Two phenomena account for this velocity: noncontinuum effects and the flow
induced by a thermal gradient along the boundary. The components of Velocity of moving
wall: uw should be specified. Zero values are used for a stationary wall.
T H E C R E E P I N G F L O W , L A M I N A R F L O W , A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
71
When the Use viscous slip check box is selected, the default Slip length Ls is User defined.
Another value or expression may be entered if the default value is not applicable. For
Maxwells model values or expressions for the Tangential momentum accommodation
coefficient av and the Mean free path should be specified. Tangential accommodation
coefficients are typically in the range of 0.85 to 1.0 and can be found in G. Kariadakis, A.
Beskok, and N. Aluru, Microflows and Nanoflows, Springer Science and Business Media,
2005.
When the Use thermal creep check box is selected, a thermal creep contribution with
Thermal slip coefficient T is activated. Thermal slip coefficients are typically between 0.3
and 1.0 and can be found in G. Kariadakis, A. Beskok, and N. Aluru, Microflows and
Nanoflows, Springer Science and Business Media, 2005.
This boundary condition is not compatible with the projection method.
Wall Functions
The Wall functions boundary condition replaces the no-slip condition on solid walls for
certain turbulence models such as the k- and k- models. Wall functions are used to
model the thin region with large gradients in flow variables near the wall.
When Apply wall roughness is selected, a Sand roughness model, derived from the
experiments by Nikuradse, is applied. More general roughness types can be specified by
selecting Generic roughness.
For Sand roughness an Equivalent sand roughness height kseq should be specified.
For Generic roughness a Roughness height ks and a dimensionless Roughness parameter Cs
should be specified.
Sliding Wall (Wall Functions)
The Sliding wall (wall functions) boundary condition applies wall functions to a wall in a
turbulent flow where the velocity magnitude in the tangential direction of the wall is
prescribed. The tangential direction is determined in the same manner as in the Sliding
Wall feature. The component values or expressions for the Velocity of sliding wall uw should
be specified.
The Apply wall roughness option is available for the Sliding wall (wall functions). See Wall
Functions for details.
Moving Wall (Wall Functions)
Applying this boundary condition does not automatically cause an associated geometry
change. The Moving wall (wall functions) boundary condition applies wall functions to a
72 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
wall with prescribed velocity uw in a turbulent flow. Component values or expressions for
the Velocity of moving wall uw should be specified.
The Apply wall roughness option is available for the Moving wall (wall functions). See Wall
Functions for details.
CONSTRAINT SETTINGS
This section is displayed by clicking the Show button (
Options.
) and selecting Advanced Physics
Theory for the Wall Boundary Condition
Moving Mesh Interface in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference
Manual
Inlet
This condition should be used on boundaries for which there is a net flow into the domain.
To obtain a numerically well-posed problem, it is advisable to also consider the Outlet
conditions when specifying an Inlet condition. For example, if the pressure is specified at
the outlet, the velocity may be specified at the inlet, and vice versa. Specifying the velocity
vector at both the inlet and the outlet may cause convergence difficulties.
BOUNDARY CONDITION
The available Boundary condition options for an inlet are Velocity, Laminar inflow, Mass flow,
and Pressure. After selecting a Boundary Condition from the list, a section with the same or
a similar name displays underneath. For example, if Velocity is selected, a Velocity section,
where further settings are defined, is displayed.
VE L O C I T Y
The Normal inflow velocity is specified as u = nU0, where n is the boundary normal
pointing out of the domain and U0 is the normal inflow speed.
The Velocity field option sets the velocity vector to u = u0. The components of the inlet
velocity vector u0 should be defined for this choice.
PRESSURE CONDITIONS
This option specifies the normal stress, which in most cases is approximately equal to the
pressure. If the reference pressure pref, defined at the physics interface level, is equal to 0,
T H E C R E E P I N G F L O W , L A M I N A R F L O W , A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
73
the value of the Pressure p0, at the boundary, is the absolute pressure.Otherwise, p0 is the
relative pressure at the boundary.
When Include gravity is selected and Use reduced pressure not selected in the interface
Physical model section, the Compensate for hydrostatic pressure approximation (named
Compensate for hydrostatic pressure for compressible flows) checkbox is available and
selected by default. When it is selected, the hydrostatic pressure is automatically added to
the pressure entered in p0 user input.
The Suppress backflow option adjusts the inlet pressure locally in order to prevent fluid
from exiting the domain through the boundary. If suppress backflow is deselected, the
inlet boundary can become an outlet depending on the pressure field in the rest of the
domain.
Flow direction controls in which direction the fluid enters the domain.
- For Normal flow, it prescribes zero tangential velocity component.
- For User defined, an Inflow velocity direction du (dimensionless) should be specified.
The magnitude of du does not matter, only the direction. du must point into the
domain.
LAMINAR INFLOW
This boundary condition is applicable when the fluid enters the domain from a long pipe
or channel, in which the laminar flow profile is fully developed. The normal stress at the
inlet is determined from the flow conditions at the entrance to a fictitious channel of
length Lentr appended to the boundary. The inflow can be specified by the Average velocity
Uav, the Flow rate V0, or the Entrance pressure pentr.
For the Entrance pressure option, when Include gravity is selected and Use reduced pressure
not selected in the interface Physical model section, the Compensate for hydrostatic pressure
approximation (named Compensate for hydrostatic pressure for compressible flows)
checkbox is available and selected by default. When it is selected, the hydrostatic pressure
is automatically added to the pressure entered in pentr user input.
The Entrance length Lentr should be significantly greater than 0.06ReD, where Re is the
Reynolds number and D is the inlet length scale (hydraulic diameter), in order that the
flow can adjust to a fully developed laminar profile.
The Constrain outer edges to zero option forces the laminar profile to go to zero at the
bounding points or edges of the inlet channel. Otherwise the velocity is defined by the
boundary condition of the adjacent boundary in the computational domain. For example,
74 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
if one end of a boundary with a Laminar inflow condition connects to a slip boundary, the
laminar profile will have a maximum at that end.
MASS FLOW
The mass flow at an inlet can be specified by the Mass flow rate, the Pointwise mass flux,
the Standard flow rate, or the Standard flow rate (SCCM).
Mass Flow Rate
The Mass flow rate option sets the integrated mass flow across the entire boundary, the
Normal mass flow rate to a specific value, m. The mass flow is assumed to be parallel to the
boundary normal, and the tangential flow velocity is set to zero.
For 2D components, the Channel thickness dbc is used to define the area across which the
mass flow occurs. This setting is not applied to the whole model. Line or surface integrals
of the mass flow over the boundary evaluated during postprocessing or used in integration
coupling operators do not include this scaling automatically. Such results should be
appropriately scaled when comparing them with the specified mass flow.
Pointwise Mass Flux
The Pointwise mass flux sets the mass flow parallel to the boundary normal. The tangential
flow velocity is set to zero. The mass flux is a model input, which means that COMSOL
Multiphysics can take its value from another physics interface when available. When User
defined is selected a value or function Mf should be specified for the Mass flux.
Standard Flow Rate
The Standard flow rate Qsv sets a standard volumetric flow rate, according to the SEMI
standard E12-0303. The mass flow rate is specified as the volumetric flow rate of a gas at
standard densitythe Mean molar mass Mn divided by a Standard molar volume Vm (that
is, the volume of one mole of a perfect gas at standard pressure and standard temperature).
The flow occurs across the whole boundary in the direction of the boundary normal and
is computed by a surface (3D) or line (2D) integral. The tangential flow velocity is set to
zero.
The standard density can be defined directly, or by specifying a standard pressure and
temperature, in which case the ideal gas law is assumed. The options in the
Standard flow rate defined by list are:
Standard density, for which the Standard molar volume Vm should be specified.
Standard pressure and temperature, for which the Standard pressure Pst and the Standard
temperature Tst should be defined.
T H E C R E E P I N G F L O W , L A M I N A R F L O W , A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
75
For 2D components, the Channel thickness dbc is used to define the area across which the
mass flow occurs. This setting is not applied to the whole model. Line or surface integrals
of the mass flow over the boundary evaluated during post-processing or used in
integration coupling operators do not include this scaling automatically. Such results
should be appropriately scaled when comparing them with the specified mass flow.
Standard Flow Rate (SCCM)
The Standard flow rate (SCCM) boundary condition is equivalent to the Standard flow rate
boundary condition, except that the flow rate is entered directly in SCCMs (standard cubic
centimeters per minute) without the requirement to specify units. Here, the dimensionless
Number of SCCM units Qsccm should be specified.
TU R B U L E N T F L OW S E T T I N G S
No additional inlet conditions are required for the algebraic turbulence models: Algebraic
yPlus and L-VEL.
For the Turbulent Flow, Spalart-Allmaras interface, a value or expression for the Undamped
turbulent kinematic viscosity 0 should be specified.
For transport-equation turbulence models, apart from the Spalart-Allmaras turbulence
model, the following settings are available under the Specify turbulence length scale and
intensity option (see Table 3-2 for the default values):
Turbulent intensity IT
Turbulence length scale LT
Reference velocity scale Uref
When Specify turbulence variables is selected, values or expressions for the dependent
turbulence variables should be defined. Availability is based on the physics interface and
the boundary condition chosen.
Turbulent kinetic energy k0
Turbulent dissipation rate, 0
Specific dissipation rate 0
76 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
TABLE 3-2: DEFAULT VALUES FOR THE TURBULENT INTERFACES
NAME AND UNIT
VARIABLE
INLET
OPEN
BOUNDARY
BOUNDARY
STRESS
Turbulent intensity
(dimensionless)
IT
0.05
0.005
0.01
Turbulence length scale (m)
LT
0.01
0.1
0.1
Reference velocity scale (m/s) Uref
Turbulent kinetic energy
(m2/s2)
k0
0.005
2.510-3
110-2
Turbulent dissipation rate
(m2/s3)
0.005
1.110-4
110-3
Specific dissipation rate (1/s)
20
0.5
0.5
Undamped turbulent
kinematic viscosity (m2/s)
3*spf5.nu
About the Turbulent Intensity and Turbulence Length Scale Parameters
The Turbulent intensity IT and Turbulence length scale LT values are related to the
turbulence variables via the following equations, Equation 3-2 for the Inlet and
Equation 3-3 for the Open Boundary:
3
2
Inlet k = --- ( U I T ) ,
2
2
3
Open Boundary k = --- ( I T U ref ) ,
2
3 4 k3 / 2
= C
(3-2)
----------LT
34
3
2 ---
C 3 ( I T U ref ) 2
= ------------ ----------------------------
LT
2
(3-3)
For the Open Boundary and Boundary Stress options, and with any Turbulent Flow
interface, inlet conditions for the turbulence variables also need to be specified. These
conditions are used on the parts of the boundary where un < 0, that is, where flow enters
the computational domain.
For the k- and SST turbulence models the Turbulent intensity IT and Turbulence length
scale LT values are related to the turbulence variables via the following equations,
Equation 3-4 for the Inlet and Equation 3-5 for the Open Boundary:
2
3
Inlet k = --- ( U I T ) ,
2
k
= -------------------------1
*
( 0 ) / 4 LT
(3-4)
T H E C R E E P I N G F L O W , L A M I N A R F L O W , A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
77
2
3
Open Boundary k = --- ( I T U ref ) ,
2
3 ( I T U ref )
1
= ------------------------- ----------------------------
1
/
4
*
2
( 0 ) LT
(3-5)
CONSTRAINT SETTINGS
This section is displayed by clicking the Show button (
Options.
) and selecting Advanced Physics
Prescribing Inlet and Outlet Conditions
Normal Stress Boundary Condition
For recommendations of physically sound values for the Turbulent
intensity IT and Turbulence length scale LT, see Inlet Values for the
Turbulence Length Scale and Turbulent Intensity.
Non-Newtonian Flow (inlet): Application Library path
CFD_Module/Single-Phase_Tutorials/non_newtonian_flow
Outlet
This condition should be used on boundaries for which there is a net outflow from the
domain. To obtain a numerically well-posed problem, it is advisable to also consider the
Inlet conditions when specifying an Outlet condition. For example, if the velocity is
specified at the inlet, the pressure may be specified at the outlet, and vice versa. Specifying
the velocity vector at both the inlet and the outlet may cause convergence difficulties.
Selecting appropriate outlet conditions for the Navier-Stokes equations is a nontrivial task.
Generally, if there is something interesting happening at an outflow boundary, the
computational domain should be extended to include this phenomenon.
BOUNDARY CONDITION
The available Boundary condition options for an outlet are Pressure, Laminar outflow, and
Velocity.
PRESSURE CONDITIONS
This option specifies the normal stress, which in most cases is approximately equal to the
pressure. The tangential stress component is set to zero. If the reference pressure pref,
78 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
defined at the physics interface level, is equal to 0, the value of the Pressure p0, at the
boundary, is the absolute pressure. Otherwise, p0 is the relative pressure at the boundary.
When Include gravity is selected and Use reduced pressure not selected in the interface
Physical model section, the Compensate for hydrostatic pressure approximation (named
Compensate for hydrostatic pressure for compressible flows) checkbox is available and
selected by default. When it is selected, the hydrostatic pressure is automatically added to
the pressure entered in p0 user input.
The Normal flow option changes the no tangential stress condition to a no tangential
velocity condition. This forces the flow to exit (or enter) the domain perpendicularly to
the outlet boundary.
The Suppress backflow check box is selected by default. This option adjusts the outlet
pressure in order to prevent fluid from entering the domain through the boundary.
VE L O C I T Y
See the Inlet node Velocity section for the settings.
LAMINAR OUTFLOW
This boundary condition is applicable when the flow exits the domain into a long pipe or
channel, at the end of which a laminar flow profile is fully developed. The normal stress at
the outlet is determined from the flow conditions at the end of a fictitious channel
appended to the outlet boundary. The outflow can be specified by the Average velocity Uav,
the Flow rate V0, or the Exit pressure pexit.
For the Entrance pressure option, when Include gravity is selected and Use reduced pressure
not selected in the interface Physical model section, the Compensate for hydrostatic pressure
approximation (named Compensate for hydrostatic pressure for compressible flows)
checkbox is available and selected by default. When it is selected, the hydrostatic pressure
is automatically added to the pressure entered in pexit user input.
The Exit length Lexit should be significantly greater than 0.06ReD, where Re is the
Reynolds number and D is the outlet length scale (hydraulic diameter), in order that the
flow can adjust to a fully developed laminar profile.
The Constrain outer edges to zero option forces the laminar profile to go to zero at the
bounding points or edges of the outlet channel. Otherwise the velocity is defined by the
boundary condition of the adjacent boundary in the computational domain. For example,
if one end of a boundary with a Laminar outflow condition connects to a slip boundary, the
laminar profile will have a maximum at that end.
T H E C R E E P I N G F L O W , L A M I N A R F L O W , A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
79
CONSTRAINT SETTINGS
This section is displayed by clicking the Show button (
Options.
) and selecting Advanced Physics
Prescribing Inlet and Outlet Conditions
Symmetry
The Symmetry boundary condition prescribes no penetration and vanishing shear stresses.
The boundary condition is a combination of a Dirichlet condition and a Neumann
condition:
u n = 0,
pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) 2
--- ( u )I n = 0
u n = 0,
( pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) )n = 0
for the compressible and incompressible formulations. The Dirichlet condition takes
precedence over the Neumann condition, and the above equations are equivalent to the
following equation for both the compressible and incompressible formulations:
u n = 0,
K ( K n )n = 0
K = ( u + ( u ) T )n
BOUNDARY SELECTION
For 2D axial symmetry, a boundary condition does not need to be defined for the
symmetry axis at r = 0. The software automatically provides a condition that prescribes
ur = 0 and vanishing stresses in the z direction and adds an Axial Symmetry node that
implements these conditions on the axial symmetry boundaries only.
CONSTRAINT SETTINGS
This section is displayed by clicking the Show button (
Options.
) and selecting Advanced Physics
Open Boundary
The Open Boundary condition describes boundaries in contact with a large volume of fluid.
Fluid can both enter and leave the domain on boundaries with this type of condition.
80 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
BOUNDARY CONDITIONS
The Boundary condition options for open boundaries are Normal stress and No viscous
stress.
Normal Stress
The Normal stress f0 condition implicitly imposes p f0 .
When Include gravity is selected and Use reduced pressure not selected in the interface
Physical model section, the Compensate for hydrostatic pressure approximation (named
Compensate for hydrostatic pressure for compressible flows) checkbox is available and
selected by default. When it is selected, the hydrostatic pressure is automatically added to
the pressure entered in f0 user input.
No Viscous Stress
The No Viscous Stress condition specifies vanishing viscous stress on the boundary. This
condition does not provide sufficient information to fully specify the flow at the open
boundary and must at least be combined with pressure constraints at adjacent points.
The No viscous stress condition prescribes:
( u + ( u ) T ) 2
--- ( u )I n = 0
3
( u + ( u ) T )n = 0
for the compressible and the incompressible formulations. This condition can be useful in
some situations because it does not impose any constraint on the pressure. A typical
example is a model with volume forces that give rise to pressure gradients that are hard to
prescribe in advance. To make the model numerically stable, this boundary condition
should be combined with a point constraint on the pressure.
This boundary condition is not compatible with the projection method equation form.
TU R B U L E N C E C O N D I T I O N S
See Turbulent Flow Settings.
Boundary Stress
The Boundary Stress node adds a boundary condition that represents a general class of
conditions also known as traction boundary conditions.
T H E C R E E P I N G F L O W , L A M I N A R F L O W , A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
81
BOUNDARY CONDITION
The Boundary condition options for the boundary stress are General stress, Normal stress,
and Normal stress, normal flow.
General Stress
When General stress is selected, the components for the Stress F should be specified. The
total stress on the boundary is set equal to the given stress F:
pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) 2
--- ( u )I n = F
3
( pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) )n = F
for the compressible and the incompressible formulations.
This boundary condition implicitly sets a constraint on the pressure that for 2D flows is
u n
p = 2 ---------- n F
n
(3-6)
If un/n is small, Equation 3-6 states that p nF.
Normal Stress
Normal Stress is described for the Open Boundary node.
Normal Stress, Normal Flow
For Normal stress, normal flow, the magnitude of the Normal stress f0 should be specified.
The tangential velocity is set to zero on the boundary:
2
T
n pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) --- ( u )I n = f 0 ,
3
T
n ( pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) )n = f 0 ,
tu = 0
tu = 0
for the compressible and the incompressible formulations.
This boundary condition implicitly sets a constraint on the pressure that for 2D flows is
u n
p = 2 ---------- + f 0
n
(3-7)
If un/n is small, Equation 3-7 states that p f0.
This boundary condition is not compatible with the projection method equation form.
82 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
When Include gravity is selected and Use reduced pressure not selected in the interface
Physical model section, the Compensate for hydrostatic pressure approximation (named
Compensate for hydrostatic pressure for compressible flows) checkbox is available and
selected by default. When it is selected, the hydrostatic pressure is automatically added to
the pressure entered in f0 or phydron is added to F depending of the selected option.
Turbulent Boundary Type
The Turbulent boundary type options for this boundary condition are Open boundary, Inlet,
and Outlet.
For Open boundary parts of the boundary are expected to be outlets and other parts are
expected to be to be inlets.
The Inlet option should be selected when the whole boundary is expected to be an inlet.
The Outlet option should be used when the whole boundary is expected to be an
outflow boundary. In this case, homogeneous Neumann conditions are applied for the
turbulence variables, that is, for k and
k n = 0
n = 0
k n = 0
n = 0
for k and
or for the Spalart-Allmaras model:
n = 0
TU R B U L E N C E C O N D I T I O N S
See Turbulent Flow Settings.
CONSTRAINT SETTINGS
This section is displayed by clicking the Show button (
Options.
) and selecting Advanced Physics
If Normal Stress, Normal Flow is selected as the Boundary condition, then to Apply reaction
terms on all dependent variables, the All physics (symmetric) option should be selected.
Alternatively, the Individual dependent variables could be selected to restrict the reaction
terms as needed.
T H E C R E E P I N G F L O W , L A M I N A R F L O W , A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
83
Screen
The Screen condition models interior wire-gauzes, grilles, or perforated plates as thin
permeable barriers. Common correlations are included for resistance and refraction
coefficients. The Screen boundary condition can only be applied on interior boundaries.
S C R E E N TY P E
The available options for the Screen type are Wire gauze, Square mesh, Perforated plate, and
User defined. The settings are defined by the equations shown based on the selection
(excluding User defined) which in turn adjusts what is available in the Parameters section.
PARAMETERS
If Wire gauze, Square mesh, or Perforated plate is selected as the Screen type, values or
expressions for the Solidity s (ratio of blocked area to total area of the screen) should be
specified.
For Wire gauze a value or expression for the Wire diameter d should also be specified.
The User defined options requires the dimensionless Resistance coefficient K.
For all screen types, the Refraction defaults to Wire gauze. With the User defined option,
a different Refraction coefficient (dimensionless) can be specified.
Screen Boundary Condition
Theory for the Non-Isothermal Screen Boundary Condition
Vacuum Pump
The Vacuum Pump node models the effective outlet pressure created by a vacuum pump
device that is attached to the outlet.
PARAMETERS
The Static pressure curve option defines a lumped curveLinear, Static pressure curve data,
or User defined.
Linear
For the Linear option, values or expressions should be specified for the Static pressure at
no flow pnf and the Free delivery flow rate V0,fd.
The static pressure curve value is equal to the static pressure at no flow rate when V0 < 0
and equal to 0 when the flow rate is larger than the free delivery flow rate.
84 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Static Pressure Curve Data
The Static pressure curve data option can be used to enter or load data under the Static
Pressure Curve Data section below. The interpolation between points given in the Static
Pressure Curve Data table is defined using the Interpolation function type list in the Static
Pressure Curve Interpolation section.
User Defined
The User defined option can be used to enter a different value or expression. The flow rate
across the selection where this boundary condition is applied is defined by phys_id.V0
where phys_id is the name (for example, phys_id is spf by default for this physics
interface). In order to avoid unexpected behavior, the function used for the fan curve is
the maximum of the user-defined function and 0.
STATIC PRESSURE CUR VE DATA
This section displays when Static pressure curve data is selected as the Static pressure curve.
In the table, values or expressions for the Flow rate and Static pressure curve should be
specified. Alternatively, a text file can be imported by clicking the Load from file button
(
) under the table.
UNITS
This section is available when Static pressure curve data is selected as the Static pressure
curve. Units can be specified here for the Flow rate and Static pressure curve.
STATIC PRESSURE CUR VE INTERPOLATION
This section is available when Static pressure curve data is selected as the Static pressure
curve. The available options for the Interpolation function type are Linear, Piecewise cubic,
and Cubic spline.
The extrapolation method always returns a constant value. In order to avoid problems with
undefined data, the function used for the boundary condition is the maximum of the
interpolated function and 0.
Vacuum Pump Boundary Condition
Periodic Flow Condition
The Periodic Flow Condition splits its selection into a source group and a destination group.
Fluid that leaves the domain through one of the destination boundaries enters the domain
T H E C R E E P I N G F L O W , L A M I N A R F L O W , A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
85
through the corresponding source boundary. This corresponds to a situation where the
geometry is a periodic part of a larger geometry. If the boundaries are not parallel to each
other, the velocity vector is automatically transformed.
If the boundaries are curved, it is recommended to only include two boundaries.
No input is required when Compressible flow (Ma<0.3) is selected for Compressibility under
the Physical Model section for the physics interface. Typically when a periodic boundary
condition is used with a compressible flow, the pressure is the same at both boundaries and
the flow is driven by a volume force.
PRESSURE DIFFERENCE
This section is available when Incompressible flow is selected for Compressibility under the
Physical Model section for the physics interface.
A value or expression should be specified for the Pressure difference, psrc pdst. This
pressure difference can, for example, drive the fully developed flow in a channel.
To set up a periodic boundary condition, both boundaries must be selected in the Periodic
Flow Condition node. COMSOL Multiphysics automatically assigns one boundary as the
source and the other as the destination. To manually set the destination selection, a
Destination Selection subnode is available from the context menu (by right-clicking the
parent node) or from the Physics toolbar, Attributes menu. All destination sides must be
connected.
CONSTRAINT SETTINGS
This section is displayed by clicking the Show button (
Options.
) and selecting Advanced Physics
ORIENTATION OF SOURCE
For information about the Orientation of Source section, see Orientation of Source and
Destination in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual.
This boundary condition is not compatible with the projection method equation form.
Fan
The Fan condition is used to define the flow direction (inlet or outlet) and the fan
parameters on exterior boundaries. The Interior Fan condition is available on interior
boundaries.
86 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
FLOW DIRECTION
The Flow direction can be set to Inlet or Outlet. When a boundary has been selected, an
arrow displays in the Graphics window to indicate the selected flow direction. The arrow
can be updated if the selection changes by clicking any node in the Model Builder and then
clicking the Fan node again to update the Graphics window.
The Inlet Flow direction controls in which direction the fluid enters the domain.
For Normal flow it sets the tangential velocity component to zero.
For User defined an Inflow velocity direction du (dimensionless) should be specified. The
magnitude of du does not matter, only the direction. du must point into the domain.
For Swirl flow (which is available for 3D or 2D axisymmetric when the Swirl flow
checkbox in Physical Model Properties is checked) it specifies a swirl flow on the
downstream side of the fan based on the Rotation axis base point rbp, Revolutions per
time f, Rotational direction and Swirl ratio csf.
PARAMETERS
When Inlet is selected as the Flow direction, the Input pressure pinput defines the pressure
at the fan inlet.
When Outlet is selected as the Flow direction, the Exit pressure pexit defines the pressure at
the fan outlet.
When Include gravity is selected and Use reduced pressure not selected in the interface
Physical model section, the Compensate for hydrostatic pressure approximation (named
Compensate for hydrostatic pressure for compressible flows) checkbox is available and
selected by default. When it is selected, the hydrostatic pressure is automatically added to
the pressure entered in pinput or pexit user input.
For either flow direction, Static pressure curve specifies a fan curveLinear, Static pressure
curve data, or User defined.
Linear
For both Inlet and Outlet flow directions, if Linear is selected, values or expressions for the
Static pressure at no flow pnf and the Free delivery flow rate V0,fd should be specified. The
static pressure curve is equal to the static pressure at no flow rate when V0 < 0 and equal
to 0 when the flow rate is larger than the free delivery flow rate.
User Defined
With the User defined option, a different value or expression for the Static pressure curve
can be specified. The flow rate across the selection where this boundary condition is
applied is defined by phys_id.V0 where phys_id is the name (for example, phys_id is
T H E C R E E P I N G F L O W , L A M I N A R F L O W , A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
87
spf by default for laminar single-phase flow). In order to avoid unexpected behavior, the
function used for the fan curve returns the maximum of the user-defined function and 0.
Static Pressure Curve Data
The Static pressure curve data can be entered or loaded under the Static Pressure Curve Data
section that displays for this option. The interpolation between points given in the table is
defined using the Interpolation function type list in the Static Pressure Curve Interpolation
section.
UNITS
This section is available when Static pressure curve data is selected as the Static pressure
curve. Units can be specified for the Flow rate and Static pressure.
STATIC PRESSURE CUR VE DATA
When Static pressure curve data is selected as the Static pressure curve, a table appears,
where values or expressions the Flow rate and Static pressure can be specified or imported
) under the table. Units can be
from a text file by clicking the Load from file button (
specified for the Flow rate and the Static pressure curve.
STATIC PRESSURE CUR VE INTERPOLATION
This section is available when Static pressure curve data is selected as the Static pressure
curve. The available options for the Interpolation function type are Linear, Piecewise cubic,
and Cubic spline.
The extrapolation method always returns a constant value. In order to avoid problems with
undefined data, the function used for the boundary condition returns the maximum of the
interpolated function and 0.
TURBULENCE CONDITIONS ON FAN OUTLET
When Inlet is selected as the Flow direction and the Turbulence model has transport
equations for the turbulent kinetic energy, k, and turbulent dissipation rate, , or specific
dissipation rate, , the values of the Turbulent kinetic energy and the Turbulent dissipation
rate or Specific dissipation rate on the downstream side of the fan should be specified.
Alternatively, the Reference velocity scale can be used to specify default values.
Fan and Grille Boundary Conditions
88 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Interior Fan
The Interior Fan condition represents interior boundaries where a fan condition is set using
a fan pressure curve to avoid an explicit representation of the fan. The Interior Fan defines
a boundary condition on a slit for laminar flow. That means that the pressure and the
velocity can be discontinuous across this boundary.
One side represents a flow inlet; the other side represents the fan outlet. The fan boundary
condition ensures that the mass flow rate is conserved between its inlet and outlet:
inlet
u n +
u n = 0
outlet
This boundary condition acts like a pressure boundary condition on each side of the fan.
The pressure at the fan outlet is fixed so that the mass flow rate is conserved. On the fan
inlet the pressure is set to the pressure at the fan outlet minus the pressure drop induced
by the fan. The pressure drop is defined from the static pressure curve, and is usually a
function of the flow rate. To define a fan boundary condition on an exterior boundary, the
Fan condition should be used instead.
INTERIOR FAN
The Flow direction can be defined by selecting Along normal vector or Opposite to normal
vector. This defines which side of the boundary is the fans inlet and which side is the fans
outlet.
TURBULENCE CONDITIONS ON FAN OUTLET
When using a Turbulence model which has transport equations for the turbulent kinetic
energy, k, and turbulent dissipation rate, , or specific dissipation rate, , the values of the
Turbulent kinetic energy and the Turbulent dissipation rate or Specific dissipation rate on the
downstream side of the fan should be specified. Alternatively, the Reference velocity scale
can be used to specify default values.
After a boundary has been selected, an arrow displays in the Graphics window to indicate
the selected flow direction. If the selection changes, the arrow can be updated by clicking
any node in the Model Builder and then clicking the Interior fan node again to update the
Graphics window.
T H E C R E E P I N G F L O W , L A M I N A R F L O W , A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
89
The rest of the settings for this section are the same as for the Fan node. See Linear and
Static Pressure Curve Data for details.
Fan Defined on an Interior Boundary
Interior Wall
The Interior Wall boundary condition can only be applied on interior boundaries.
It is similar to the Wall boundary condition available on exterior boundaries except that it
applies on both sides of an internal boundary. It allows discontinuities (velocity, pressure,
and turbulence variables) across the boundary. The Interior Wall boundary condition can
be used to avoid meshing thin structures by applying no-slip conditions on interior curves
and surfaces instead. Slip conditions and conditions for a moving wall can also be
prescribed. The Interior Wall boundary condition is only available for single-phase flow. It
is compatible with laminar and turbulent flow.
BOUNDARY CONDITION
The available Boundary condition options are No slip (for laminar flow), Wall functions (for
turbulent flow), Slip, or Moving wall.
No Slip
The No slip condition prescribes u = 0 on both sides of the boundary; that is, the fluid at
the wall is not moving.
Wall Functions
For the k- and k- turbulence models, the Wall functions boundary condition is used to
model the thin region with large gradients in flow variables near a stationary, solid wall.
When Apply wall roughness is selected, a Sand roughness model, derived from the
experiments by Nikuradse, is applied. More general roughness types can be specified by
selecting Generic roughness.
For Sand roughness an Equivalent sand roughness height kseq should be specified.
For Generic roughness a Roughness height ks and a dimensionless Roughness parameter Cs
should be specified.
90 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Slip
The Slip condition prescribes a no-penetration condition, un=0. It implicitly assumes that
there are no viscous effects on either side of the slip wall and hence, no boundary layer
develops. From a modeling point of view, this can be a reasonable approximation if the
important effect is to prevent the exchange of fluid between the regions separated by the
interior wall.
Moving Wall
Applying this boundary condition does not automatically cause an associated geometry
change. An additional Moving Mesh interface must be added to physically track the wall
movement in the spatial reference frame.
If the wall moves, so must the fluid on both sides of the wall. Hence, this boundary
condition prescribes u = uw. The components of the Velocity of moving wall uw should be
specified.
CONSTRAINT SETTINGS
This section is displayed by clicking the Show button (
Options.
) and selecting Advanced Physics
Wall
Moving Mesh Interface in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference
Manual
This boundary condition is not compatible with the projection method.
Grille
The Grille boundary condition models the pressure drop caused by having a grille that
covers the inlet or outlet.
PARAMETERS
When Inlet is selected as the Flow direction, the Input pressure pinput defines the pressure
at the fan inlet.
When Outlet is selected as the Flow direction, the Exit pressure pexit defines the pressure at
the fan outlet.
When Include gravity is selected and Use reduced pressure not selected in the interface
Physical model section, the Compensate for hydrostatic pressure approximation (named
T H E C R E E P I N G F L O W , L A M I N A R F L O W , A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
91
Compensate for hydrostatic pressure for compressible flows) checkbox is available and
selected by default. When it is selected, the hydrostatic pressure is automatically added to
the pressure entered in pinput or pexit user input.
When Quadratic loss is selected for the Static pressure curve, the Quadratic loss coefficient
qlc should be specified. qlc defines the static pressure curve which is a piecewise quadratic
function equal to 0 when the flow rate is < 0, equal to V02qlc when the flow rate is > 0.
See Fan for other settings for the Laminar Flow interface. Note that for the Turbulent
Flow interfaces, Quadratic loss is the only available option for Static pressure curve.
TURBULENCE CONDITIONS
When Inlet is selected as the Flow direction and the Turbulence model has transport
equations for the turbulent kinetic energy, k, and turbulent dissipation rate, , or specific
dissipation rate, , the Specify turbulent length scale and intensity and Specify turbulence
variables options are available for the turbulence conditions on the downstream side of the
grille. Alternatively, the Reference velocity scale can be used to specify default values.
Fan and Grille Boundary Conditions
Pipe Connection
This feature is available with a license for the Pipe Flow Module. For details, see Pipe
Connection the in the Pipe Flow Module Users Guide.
Flow Continuity
The Flow Continuity condition is suitable for pairs where the boundaries match; it
prescribes that the flow field is continuous across the pair.
A Wall subnode is added by default and it applies to the parts of the pair boundaries where
a source boundary lacks a corresponding destination boundary and vice versa. The Wall
feature can be overridden by any other boundary condition that applies to exterior
boundaries. By right-clicking the Flow Continuity node, additional Fallback feature
subnodes can be added.
This boundary condition is not compatible with the projection method.
92 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Pressure Point Constraint
The Pressure Point Constraint condition can be used to specify the pressure level. If it is not
possible to specify the pressure level using a boundary condition, the pressure level must
be set in some other way, for example, by specifying a fixed pressure at a point.
PRESSURE CONSTRAINT
The relative pressure value is set by specifying the Pressure p0. Or, if the reference pressure
pref defined at the physics interface level is equal to zero, p0 represents the absolute
pressure.
When Include gravity is selected and Use reduced pressure not selected in the interface
Physical model section, the Compensate for hydrostatic pressure approximation (named
Compensate for hydrostatic pressure for compressible flows) checkbox is available and
selected by default. When it is selected, the hydrostatic pressure is automatically added to
the pressure entered in p0 user input.
CONSTRAINT SETTINGS
This section is displayed by clicking the Show button (
Options.
) and selecting Advanced Physics
Point Mass Source
This feature requires at least one of the following licenses: Batteries & Fuel Cells Module,
CFD Module, Chemical Reaction Engineering Module, Corrosion Module,
Electrochemistry Module, Electrodeposition Module, Microfluidics Module, Pipe Flow
Module, or Subsurface Flow Module.
The Point Mass Source feature models mass flow originating from an infinitely small domain
centered around a point
For the Reacting Flow in Porous Media, Diluted Species interface, which is available with
the CFD Module, Chemical Reaction Engineering Module, or Batteries & Fuel Cells
Module, there are two nodes: one for the fluid flow (Fluid Point Source) and one for the
species (Species Point Source).
SOURCE STRENGTH
The source Mass flux, q p should be specified. A positive value results in mass being ejected
from the point into the computational domain. A negative value results in mass being
removed from the computational domain.
T H E C R E E P I N G F L O W , L A M I N A R F L O W , A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
93
Point sources located on a boundary or on an edge affect the adjacent computational
domains. This has the effect, for example, that a point source located on a symmetry plane
has twice the given strength.
Numerical Stability Stabilization Techniques for Fluid Flow in the
COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual
Line Mass Source
This feature requires at least one of the following licenses: Batteries & Fuel Cells Module,
CFD Module, Chemical Reaction Engineering Module, Corrosion Module,
Electrochemistry Module, Electrodeposition Module, Microfluidics Module, Pipe Flow
Module, or Subsurface Flow Module.
The Line Mass Source feature models mass flow originating from a tube region with
infinitely small radius.
For the Reacting Flow in Porous Media, Diluted Species interface, which is available with
the CFD Module, Chemical Reaction Engineering Module, or Batteries & Fuel Cells
Module, there are two nodes, one for the fluid flow (Fluid Line Source) and one for the
species (Species Line Source).
SELECTION
The Line Mass Source feature is available for all dimensions, but the applicable selection
differs between the dimensions.
MODEL DIMENSION
APPLICABLE GEOMETRICAL ENTITY
2D
Points
2D Axisymmetry
Points not on the axis of symmetry
3D
Edges
SOURCE STRENGTH
The source Mass flux, q l , should be specified. A positive value results in mass being ejected
from the line into the computational domain and a negative value means that mass is
removed from the computational domain.
94 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Line sources located on a boundary affect the adjacent computational domains. This, for
example, has the effect that a line source located on a symmetry plane has twice the given
strength.
Numerical Stability Stabilization Techniques for Fluid Flow in the
COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual
Gravity
This feature requires at least one of the following licenses: CFD Module, Heat Transfer
Module.
The Gravity global feature is automatically added when Include gravity is selected at the
interface level in the Physical Model settings. It defines the gravity forces from the
Acceleration of gravity value.
ACCELERATION OF GRAVITY
The Acceleration of gravity (SI unit m/s, default value -gconstez in 2Daxi and 3D and
-gconstey in 2D) is used to define the gravity forces. It should be a global quantity.
T H E C R E E P I N G F L O W , L A M I N A R F L O W , A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
95
The Rotating Machinery, Laminar and
Turbulent Flow Interfaces
The Rotating Machinery, Laminar Flow (rmspf) and Rotating Machinery, Turbulent Flow
(rmspf) interfaces, found under the Single-Phase Flow>Rotating Machinery branch (
)
when adding a physics interface, are used for modeling flow where one or more of the
boundaries rotate in a periodic fashion. This is used for mixers and propellers.
The physics interfaces support compressible and incompressible flow, the flow of
non-Newtonian fluids described by the Power Law and Carreau models, and also
turbulent flow. The physics interfaces also support creeping flow, although the shallow
channel approximation is redundant.
In this section:
The Rotating Machinery, Laminar Flow Interface
The Rotating Machinery, Turbulent Flow, Algebraic yPlus Interface
The Rotating Machinery, Turbulent Flow, L-VEL Interface
The Rotating Machinery, Turbulent Flow, k-e Interface
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Rotating Machinery Interfaces
The Rotating Machinery, Laminar Flow Interface
The Rotating Machinery, Laminar Flow (rmspf) interface (
), found under the Single-Phase
) when adding a physics interface, is used to simulate
Flow>Rotating Machinery branch (
flow at low to moderate Reynolds numbers in geometries with one or more rotating parts.
The physics interface supports incompressible and compressible flows at low Mach
numbers (typically less than 0.3). It also supports modeling of non-Newtonian fluids. The
physics interface is available for 3D and 2D components.
There are two study types available for this physics interface. Using the Time Dependent
study type, rotation is achieved through moving mesh functionality, also known as sliding
mesh. Using the Frozen Rotor study type, the rotating parts are kept frozen in position, and
rotation is accounted for by the inclusion of centrifugal and Coriolis forces. In both types,
the momentum balance is governed by the Navier-Stokes equations, and the mass
conservation is governed by the continuity equation. See Theory for the Rotating
Machinery Interfaces .
96 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
When this physics interface is added, the following default physics nodes are also added in
the Model BuilderFluid Properties, Wall, Rotating Wall, and Initial Values. Then, from the
Physics toolbar, add other nodes that implement, for example, boundary conditions and
volume forces. You can also right-click Rotating Machinery, Laminar Flow to select physics
features from the context menu. See Rotating Domain, Initial Values, and Rotating Wall.
It should be noted that only one physics interface at a time can be used to control the solid
body rotation in the machinery under investigation. If more than one rotating machinery
interface is added to the same component, the last interface in the list (top to bottom) will
control the rotation.
Pseudo Time Stepping for Laminar Flow Models
Laminar Flow in a Baffled Stirred Mixer: Application Library path
CFD_Module/Single-Phase_Tutorials/baffled_mixer
SETTINGS
The Label is the default physics interface name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the physics interface.
Refer to such physics interface variables in expressions using the pattern
<name>.<variable_name>. In order to distinguish between variables belonging to
different physics interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and
underscores (_) are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first physics interface in the model) is rmspf.
In addition to the settings described below, see The Creeping Flow, Laminar Flow, and
Turbulent Flow Interfaces for all the other settings available. See Domain, Boundary,
Point, and Pair Nodes for the Rotating Machinery Interfaces for links to all the physics
nodes.
ADVANCED SETTINGS
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
Normally these settings do not need to be changed.
T H E R O T A T I N G M A C H I N E R Y , L A M I N A R A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
97
Pseudo Time Stepping
Select the Use pseudo time stepping for stationary equation form check box to add pseudo
time derivatives to the equation when the Frozen Rotor equation form is used. (Frozen
rotor is a pseudo stationary formulation.) When selected, also choose a CFL number
expressionAutomatic (the default) or Manual. Automatic sets the local CFL number (from
the CourantFriedrichsLewy condition) to the built-in variable CFLCMP which in turn
triggers a PID regulator for the CFL number. For Manual enter a Local CFL number CFLloc
(dimensionless).
The Rotating Machinery, Turbulent Flow, Algebraic yPlus Interface
The Rotating Machinery, Turbulent Flow, Algebraic yPlus (rmspf) interface (
), found
) when adding a physics
under the Single-Phase Flow>Rotating Machinery branch (
interface, is used to simulate flow at high Reynolds numbers in geometries with one or
more rotating parts. The physics interface is suitable for incompressible and compressible
flows at low Mach numbers (typically less than 0.3).
The equations solved by the Turbulent Flow, Algebraic yPlus interface are the
Reynolds-averaged Navier-Stokes (RANS) equations for conservation of momentum, the
continuity equation for conservation of mass, and an algebraic equation for the scaled wall
distance. Turbulence effects are included using an enhanced viscosity model based on the
scaled wall distance, and the physics interface therefore includes a wall distance equation.
Two study types available for this physics interface. Using the Transient with Initialization
study type, the rotation is achieved through moving mesh functionality, also known as
sliding mesh. Using the Frozen Rotor with Initialization study type, the rotating parts are
kept frozen in position, and the rotation is accounted for by the inclusion of centrifugal
and Coriolis forces. Both study types includes an initial Wall Distance Initialization step in
order to compute the wall distance. See Theory for the Rotating Machinery Interfaces .
When this physics interface is added, the following physics nodes are also added in the
Model BuilderFluid Properties, Wall, Rotating Wall, and Initial Values. Then, from the
Physics toolbar, add other nodes that implement, for example, boundary conditions and
volume forces. You can also right-click Rotating Machinery, Turbulent Flow, Algebraic yPlus
to select physics features from the context menu. For information about the available
physics features, see Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Rotating
Machinery Interfaces.
A part for the settings below, see the advanced settings for the The Rotating Machinery,
Laminar Flow Interface, and the The Creeping Flow, Laminar Flow, and Turbulent Flow
Interfaces.
98 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
TU R B U L E N C E M O D E L PA R A M E T E R S
The turbulence model parameters for the Algebraic yPlus model, a and Ba, have been
optimized for turbulent pipe flow. For certain cases, better performance can be obtained
by tuning the model parameters.
D EPENDE N T VAR IA BL ES
The following dependent variables (fields) are defined for this physics interface:
Velocity field u
Pressure p
Reciprocal wall distance G
Wall distance in viscous units yPlus (dimensionless)
The Rotating Machinery, Turbulent Flow, L-VEL Interface
The Rotating Machinery, Turbulent Flow, L-VEL (rmspf) interface (
), found under the
Single-Phase Flow>Rotating Machinery branch (
) when adding a physics interface, is used
to simulate flow at high Reynolds numbers in geometries with one or more rotating parts.
The physics interface is suitable for incompressible and compressible flows at low Mach
numbers (typically less than 0.3).
The equations solved by the Turbulent Flow, L-VEL interface are the Reynolds-averaged
Navier-Stokes (RANS) equations for conservation of momentum, the continuity equation
for conservation of mass, and an algebraic equation for the scaled fluid flow velocity
tangential to the nearest wall. Turbulence effects are included using an enhanced viscosity
model based on the scaled wall distance, and the physics interface therefore includes a wall
distance equation.
Two study types available for this physics interface. Using the Transient with Initialization
study type, the rotation is achieved through moving mesh functionality, also known as
sliding mesh. Using the Frozen Rotor with Initialization study type, the rotating parts are
kept frozen in position, and the rotation is accounted for by the inclusion of centrifugal
and Coriolis forces. Both study types includes an initial Wall Distance Initialization step in
order to compute the wall distance. See Theory for the Rotating Machinery Interfaces .
When this physics interface is added, the following physics nodes are also added in the
Model BuilderFluid Properties, Wall, Rotating Wall, and Initial Values. Then, from the
Physics toolbar, add other nodes that implement, for example, boundary conditions and
volume forces. You can also right-click Rotating Machinery, Turbulent Flow, L-VEL to select
physics features from the context menu. For information about the available physics
T H E R O T A T I N G M A C H I N E R Y , L A M I N A R A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
99
features, see Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Rotating Machinery
Interfaces.
A part for the interface settings defined below, see the advanced settings for the The
Rotating Machinery, Laminar Flow Interface, and the settings in The Creeping Flow,
Laminar Flow, and Turbulent Flow Interfaces.
TU R B U L E N C E M O D E L P A R A M E T E R S
The turbulence model parameters for the L-VEL model, l and El, have been optimized
for internal flow. For certain cases, better performance can be obtained by tuning the
model parameters.
D E P E N D E N T VA R I A BL E S
The following dependent variables (fields) are defined for this physics interface:
Velocity field u
Pressure p
Reciprocal wall distance G
Tangential velocity in viscous units uPlus (dimensionless)
The Rotating Machinery, Turbulent Flow, k- Interface
The Rotating Machinery, Turbulent Flow, k- (rmspf) interface (
), found under the
Single-Phase Flow>Rotating Machinery branch (
) when adding a physics interface, is used
to simulate flow at high Reynolds numbers in geometries with one or more rotating parts.
The physics interface is suitable for incompressible and compressible flows at low Mach
numbers (typically less than 0.3).
The momentum balance is governed by the Navier-Stokes equations, and the mass
conservation is governed by the continuity equation. Turbulence effects are modeled
using the standard two-equation k- model with realizability constraints. Flow close to
walls is modeled using wall functions.
There are two study types available for this physics interface. Using the Time Dependent
study type, the rotation is achieved through moving mesh functionality, also known as
sliding mesh. Using the Frozen Rotor study type, the rotating parts are kept frozen in
position, and the rotation is accounted for by the inclusion of centrifugal and Coriolis
forces. See Theory for the Rotating Machinery Interfaces .
When this physics interface is added, the following physics nodes are also added in the
Model BuilderFluid Properties, Wall, Rotating Wall, and Initial Values. Then, from the
100 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Physics toolbar, add other nodes that implement, for example, boundary conditions and
volume forces. You can also right-click Rotating Machinery, Turbulent Flow, k- to select
physics features from the context menu. For information about the available physics
features, see Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Rotating Machinery
Interfaces.
A part for the defined settings below, see the advanced settings for the The Rotating
Machinery, Laminar Flow Interface, and the settings in The Creeping Flow, Laminar Flow,
and Turbulent Flow Interfaces.
TU R B U L E N C E M O D E L PA R A M E T E R S
Turbulence model parameters are optimized to fit as many flow types as possible, but for
some special cases, better performance can be obtained by tuning the model parameters.
For this physics interface the parameters are Ce1, Ce2, C, k, e, v, and B.
D EPENDE N T VAR IA BL ES
The following dependent variables (fields) are defined for this physics interface:
Velocity field u and its components
Pressure p
Turbulent kinetic energy k
Turbulent dissipation rate ep
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Rotating Machinery
Interfaces
All versions of the Rotating Machinery, Fluid Flow interfaces include the following unique
domain, boundary, point, and pair physics nodes.
Contact Angle
Rotating Wall
Initial Values
Rotating Interior Wall
Rotating Domain
Stationary Free Surface
The nodes are available from the Physics ribbon toolbar (Windows users), Physics context
menu (Mac or Linux users), or right-click to access the context menu (all users).
T H E R O T A T I N G M A C H I N E R Y , L A M I N A R A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
101
The following nodes, also available in the Rotating Machinery, Fluid Flow interfaces, are
described for the Laminar Flow interface:
No Viscous Stress
Periodic Flow Condition
Flow Continuity
Point Mass Source
Fluid Properties
Pressure Point Constraint
Inlet
Screen
Interior Wall
Symmetry
Line Mass Source
Volume Force
Open Boundary
Wall
Outlet
Initial Values
The node prescribes initial values for the dependent variables solved for. The initial values
can serve as initial conditions for a transient simulation, or as an initial guess for a nonlinear
solver.
IN ITIA L VA LUES
Enter values or expressions for the initial value of the Velocity field u and for the Pressure p.
When using a turbulence model, also enter values or expressions for the turbulence
variables solved for.
Rotating Domain
This node defines a domain as rotating with respect to a stationary coordinate system. The
mesh inside the domain, including external or internal boundaries, is defined to rotate as
a solid body. The node prescribed the rotation rotational frequency and direction as well
as the axis of rotation. If there is more than one rotating domain, these must not intersect.
The angular displacement, (SI unit: rad), of the rotating domain is computed from a
specified angular velocity w (SI unit: rad/s) by solving the ODE
d------= w( t) .
dt
102 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
(3-8)
Since the angular displacement is solved for, the domain rotation can be specified using
any type of angular velocity (constant, analytic, interpolation function, and so forth).
ROTATING DOMAIN
3D Components
For 3D components, select the Axis of rotation, the z-axis is the default. If the x-axis is
selected, it corresponds to a rotational axis (1, 0, 0) with the origin as the base point. This
is the same for the y-axis and z-axis. For User defined enter values for the Rotation axis base
point rbp and Rotation axis direction rax.
Select a Rotational frequencyRevolutions per time (the default) or Angular velocity.
For Revolutions per time enter a value or expression in the field and select a Rotational
directionPositive angular velocity or Negative angular velocity. The angular velocity in
this case is defined as the input multiplied by 2.
For Angular velocity enter an Angular velocity w.
2D Components
For 2D components, enter coordinates for the Rotation axis base point rbp. The default is
the origin (0, 0).
Select a Rotational frequencyRevolutions per time or Angular velocity.
For Revolutions per time enter a value or expression in the field and select a Rotational
directionClockwise or Counterclockwise. The angular velocity in this case is defined as
the input multiplied by 2.
For Angular velocity enter an Angular velocity w.
Rotating Wall
This feature applies boundary conditions to external boundaries of a Rotating Domain.
For laminar flow conditions corresponding to no slip (with respect to the rotating wall)
are prescribed.
For turbulence models using wall functions, corresponding conditions accounting for the
rotation of the wall are prescribed.
T H E R O T A T I N G M A C H I N E R Y , L A M I N A R A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
103
CONSTRAINT SETTINGS
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
References for the Single-Phase Flow, Turbulent Flow Interfaces
Rotating Interior Wall
This feature can be used to prescribe Rotating Wall conditions to internal (infinitely thin)
walls of a Rotating Domain.
The feature is similar to the Rotating Wall boundary condition, except that it applies
boundary conditions on both sides of an internal boundary. It allows for discontinuities in
the dependent variables (velocity, pressure, turbulence) across the boundary.
The Rotating Interior Wall boundary condition is particularly useful to avoid meshing thin
structures by instead introducing infinitely thin curves and surfaces in the mesh and
applying rotating wall conditions on these.
References for the Single-Phase Flow, Turbulent Flow Interfaces
Stationary Free Surface
This post-processing feature is used to estimate the deformation of a free surface from the
pressure distribution on the boundary when using the Frozen Rotor or Frozen Rotor with
Initialization study types. When computing the flow field, a slip condition together with a
constant pressure level pext is applied on the boundary. The free surface deformation FS
is evaluated from the linearized free surface condition in a separate study step, Stationary
Free Surface, using the pressure from the Frozen Rotor study step.
p
p ( x 0 ) p ext + n
x = x0
FS = S2 FS
(3-9)
is the surface tension coefficient, x = x0 represents the position of the undisturbed
is its unit normal. The correct study sequence can
surface - the feature selection, and n
be triggered by toggling the study window once a selection for the Stationary Free Surface
feature has been made.
104 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
The Stationary Free Surface feature is supported by laminar and turbulent flow, and is
applicable for small surface deformations (FS and its gradient should be small compared
to the dimensions of the computational domain).
STATIONARY FREE SURFACE
Enter an External pressure pext corresponding to the average pressure level on the free
surface.
S U R F A C E TE N S I O N
The default Surface tension coefficient (SI unit: N/m) is User defined. It can also be
specified from predefined libraries, by selecting Library coefficient, liquid/gas interface or
Library coefficient, liquid/liquid interface.
For Library coefficient, liquid/gas interface select an option from the listWater/Air,
Acetone/Air, Acetic acid/Air, Ethanol/Air, Ethylene glycol/Ethylene glycol vapor, Diethyl
ether/Air, Glycerol/Air, Heptane/Nitrogen, Mercury/Mercury vapor, or Toluene/Air.
For Library coefficient, liquid/liquid interface select an option from the list
Benzene/Water, 20C, Corn oil/Water, 20C, Ether/Water, 20C, Hexane/Water, 20C,
Mercury/Water, 20C, or Olive oil/Water, 20C.
Only one Stationary Free Surface feature can be applied in a Rotating Machinery, Fluid
Flow interface and it requires the study to be stationary (Frozen Rotor).
Contact Angle
This feature specifies the contact angle between the free surface and a solid wall.The
Contact Angle feature is a subfeature to, and added under a Stationary Free Surface
feature.
CONTACT ANGLE
Select an option from the Specify contact angle listDirectly (the default) or Through
Youngs equation.
For Directly enter a Contact angle w (SI unit: rad). The default is /2.
For Through Youngs equation enter values or expressions for Phase 1-Solid surface energy
density s1 (SI unit: J/m2) and Phase 2-Solid surface energy density s2 (SI unit: J/m2).
T H E R O T A T I N G M A C H I N E R Y , L A M I N A R A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
105
Theory for the Single-Phase Flow
Interfaces
Also see Theory for the Turbulent Flow Interfaces and Theory for the
Rotating Machinery Interfaces.
The theory for the Single-Phase Flow, Laminar Flow interface is described in this section:
General Single-Phase Flow Theory
Compressible Flow
Weakly Compressible Flow
The Mach Number Limit
Incompressible Flow
The Reynolds Number
Non-Newtonian Flow: The Power Law and the Carreau Model
Gravity
The Boussinesq Approximation
Theory for the Wall Boundary Condition
Prescribing Inlet and Outlet Conditions
Laminar Inflow
Laminar Outflow
Mass Flow
No Viscous Stress
Normal Stress Boundary Condition
Vacuum Pump Boundary Condition
Fan Defined on an Interior Boundary
Fan and Grille Boundary Conditions
Screen Boundary Condition
Mass Sources for Fluid Flow
Numerical StabilityStabilization Techniques for Fluid Flow
106 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Solvers for Laminar Flow
Pseudo Time Stepping for Laminar Flow Models
The Projection Method for the Navier-Stokes Equations
Discontinuous Galerkin Formulation
Particle Tracing in Fluid Flow
References for the Single-Phase Flow, Laminar Flow Interfaces
The theory about most boundary conditions is found in Ref. 2.
General Single-Phase Flow Theory
The Single-Phase Fluid Flow interfaces are based on the Navier-Stokes equations, which
in their most general form read
----+ ( u ) = 0
t
(3-10)
u
------- + ( u )u = [ pI + ] + F
t
(3-11)
T p
T
C p ------- + ( u )T = ( q ) + :S ---- ------- ------ + ( u )p + Q
t
T p t
(3-12)
where
is the density (SI unit: kg/m3)
u is the velocity vector (SI unit: m/s)
p is pressure (SI unit: Pa)
is the viscous stress tensor (SI unit: Pa)
F is the volume force vector (SI unit: N/m3)
Cp is the specific heat capacity at constant pressure (SI unit: J/(kgK))
T is the absolute temperature (SI unit: K)
q is the heat flux vector (SI unit: W/m2)
Q contains the heat sources (SI unit: W/m3)
S is the strain-rate tensor:
THEORY FOR THE SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
107
1
S = --- ( u + ( u ) T )
2
The operation : denotes a contraction between tensors defined by
a:b =
anm bnm
(3-13)
n m
This is sometimes referred to as the double dot product.
Equation 3-10 is the continuity equation and represents conservation of mass.
Equation 3-11 is a vector equation which represents conservation of momentum.
Equation 3-12 describes the conservation of energy, formulated in terms of temperature.
This is an intuitive formulation that facilitates boundary condition specifications.
To close the equation system, Equation 3-10 through Equation 3-12, constitutive
relations are needed. For a Newtonian fluid, which has a linear relationship between stress
and strain, Stokes (Ref. 1) deduced the following expression:
2
= 2S --- ( u )I
3
(3-14)
The dynamic viscosity, (SI unit: Pas), for a Newtonian fluid is allowed to depend on the
thermodynamic state but not on the velocity field. All gases and many liquids can be
considered Newtonian. Examples of non-Newtonian fluids are honey, mud, blood, liquid
metals, and most polymer solutions. With the CFD Module, you can model flows of
non-Newtonian fluids using the predefined power law and Carreau models, which
describe the dynamic viscosity for non-Newtonian fluids.Other commonly used
constitutive relations are Fouriers law of heat conduction and the ideal gas law.
In theory, the same equations describe both laminar and turbulent flows. In practice,
however, the mesh resolution required to simulate turbulence with the Laminar Flow
interface makes such an approach impractical.
There are several books where derivations of the Navier-Stokes equations
and detailed explanations of concepts such as Newtonian fluids can be
found. See, for example, the classical text by Batchelor (Ref. 3) and the
more recent work by Panton (Ref. 4).
Many applications describe isothermal flows for which Equation 3-12 is decoupled from
Equation 3-10 and Equation 3-11. Non-isothermal flow and the temperature equation
108 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
are described in the Heat Transfer and Non-Isothermal Flow Interfaces chapter.
2D AXISYMMETRIC FORMULATIONS
A 2D axisymmetric formulation of Equation 3-10 and Equation 3-11 requires to
be zero. That is, there must be no gradients in the azimuthal direction. A common
additional assumption is however that u=0. In such cases, the -equation can be removed
from Equation 3-11. The resulting system of equations is both easier to converge and
computationally less expensive compared to retaining the -equation. The default 2D
axisymmetric formulation of Equation 3-10 and Equation 3-11 therefore assumes that
= 0
u = 0
You can activate the Swirl Flow property which reduces the above assumptions to
= 0 and reintroduces the -equation into Equation 3-11.
Compressible Flow
The equations of motion for a single-phase fluid are the continuity equation:
----+ ( u ) = 0
t
(3-15)
u
2
------- + u u = p + ( u + ( u ) T ) --- ( u )I + F
t
3
(3-16)
and the momentum equation:
These equations are applicable for incompressible as well as for compressible flow with
density and viscosity variations.
Weakly Compressible Flow
The same equations as for Compressible Flow are applied for weakly compressible flow.
The only difference is that the density is evaluated at the reference pressure. The density
may be a function of other quantities, in particular it may be temperature dependent.
The weakly compressible flow equations are valid for incompressible as well as
compressible flow with density variations independent of the pressure.
THEORY FOR THE SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
109
The Mach Number Limit
An important dimensionless number in fluid dynamics is the Mach number, Ma, defined
by
u
Ma = ------a
where a is the speed of sound. A flow is formally incompressible when Ma = 0. This is
theoretically achieved by letting the speed of sound tend to infinity. The Navier-Stokes
equations then have the mathematical property that pressure disturbances are
instantaneously propagated throughout the entire domain. This results in a parabolic
equation system.
The momentum equation, Equation 3-16, is parabolic for unsteady flow and elliptic for
steady flow, whereas the continuity equation, Equation 3-15, is hyperbolic for both steady
and unsteady flow. The combined system of equations is thus hybrid parabolic-hyperbolic
for unsteady flow and hybrid elliptic-hyperbolic for steady flow. An exception occurs when
the viscous term in Equation 3-16 becomes vanishingly small, such as at an outflow
boundary, in which case the momentum equation becomes locally hyperbolic. The
number of boundary conditions to apply on the boundary then depends on the number
of characteristics propagating into the computational domain. For the purely hyperbolic
system, the number of characteristics propagating from the boundary into the domain
changes as the Mach number passes through unity. Hence, the number of boundary
conditions required to obtain a numerically well-posed system must also change. The
compressible formulation of the laminar and turbulent interfaces uses the same boundary
conditions as the incompressible formulation, which implies that the compressible
interfaces are not suitable for flows with a Mach number larger than or equal to one.
The practical Mach number limit is lower than one, however. The main reason is that the
numerical scheme (stabilization and boundary conditions) of the Laminar Flow interface
does not recognize the direction and speed of pressure waves. The fully compressible
Navier-Stokes equations do, for example, start to display very sharp gradients already at
moderate Mach numbers. But the stabilization for the single-phase flow interface does not
necessarily capture these gradients. It is impossible to give an exact limit where the low
Mach number regime ends and the moderate Mach number regime begins, but a rule of
thumb is that the Mach number effects start to appear at Ma = 0.3. For this reason, the
compressible formulation is referred to as Compressible flow (Ma<0.3) in COMSOL
Multiphysics. To model high Mach number flows, use on of The High Mach Number
Flow Interfaces.
110 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Incompressible Flow
When the temperature variations in the flow are small, a single-phase fluid can often be
assumed incompressible; that is, is constant or nearly constant. This is the case for all
liquids under normal conditions and also for gases at low velocities. For constant ,
Equation 3-15 reduces to
u = 0
(3-17)
and Equation 3-16 becomes
T
u
+ ( u )u = [ pI + ( u + ( u ) ) ] + F
t
(3-18)
In order to apply the incompressible flow formulation, the density is evaluated at the
reference pressure level, and both the density and viscosity are evaluated at the reference
temperature. However, if the density is a function of other quantities such as a
concentration field, the user has to make sure that the density is defined as constant when
the incompressible flow formulation is used.
The Reynolds Number
A fundamental characteristic in analyses of fluid flow is the Reynolds number:
UL
Re = -----------
where U denotes a velocity scale, and L denotes a representative length. The Reynolds
number represents the ratio between inertial and viscous forces. At low Reynolds numbers,
viscous forces dominate and tend to damp out all disturbances, which leads to laminar
flow. At high Reynolds numbers, the damping in the system is very low, giving small
disturbances the possibility to grow by nonlinear interactions. If the Reynolds number is
high enough, the flow field eventually ends up in a chaotic state called turbulence.
Observe that the Reynolds number can have different meanings depending on the length
scale and velocity scale. To be able to compare two Reynolds numbers, they must be based
on equivalent length and velocity scales.
The Fluid Flow interfaces automatically calculate the local cell Reynolds number
Rec = |u|h/(2) using the element length h for L and the magnitude of the velocity vector
u for the velocity scale U. This Reynolds number is not related to the character of the flow
field, but to the stability of the numerical discretization. The risk for numerical oscillations
THEORY FOR THE SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
111
in the solution increases as Rec grows. The cell Reynolds number is a predefined quantity
available for visualization and evaluation (typically it is available as: spf.cellRe).
Non-Newtonian Flow: The Power Law and the Carreau Model
The viscous stress tensor is directly dependent on the shear rate tensor and can be written
as:
2
= --- ( u )I
3
=
using the compressible and incompressible formulations. Here denotes the strain-rate
tensor defined by:
= ( u + ( u ) T )
Its magnitude, the shear rate, is:
= =
1
--- :
2
where the contraction operator : is defined by
a:b =
anm bnm
n m
For a non-Newtonian fluid, the dynamic viscosity is assumed to be a function of the shear
rate:
= ()
The Laminar Flow interfaces have the following predefined models to prescribe a
non-Newtonian viscositythe power law and the Carreau model.
POWER L AW
The power law model is an example of a generalized Newtonian model. It prescribes
= m n 1
112 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
(3-19)
where m and n are scalars that can be set to arbitrary values. For n > 1, the power law
describes a shear thickening (dilatant) fluid. For n < 1, it describes a shear thinning
(pseudoplastic) fluid. A value of n equal to one gives the expression for a Newtonian fluid.
Equation 3-19 predicts an infinite viscosity at zero shear rate for n < 1. This is however
never the case physically. Instead, most fluids have a constant viscosity for shear rates
smaller than 10-2 s-1 (Ref. 19). Since infinite viscosity also makes models using
Equation 3-19 difficult to solve, COMSOL Multiphysics implements the power law
model as
= mmax ( , min ) n 1
(3-20)
where min is a lower limit for the evaluation of the shear rate magnitude. The default
value for min is 10-2 s-1, but can be given an arbitrary value or expression using the
corresponding text field.
CARREAU MODEL
The Carreau model defines the viscosity in terms of the following four-parameter
expression
(n 1)
---------------- = + ( 0 inf ) [ 1 + ( ) 2 ] 2
(3-21)
where is a parameter with the unit of time, 0 is the zero shear rate viscosity, inf is the
infinite shear-rate viscosity, and n is a dimensionless parameter. This expression is able to
describe the viscosity for most stationary polymer flows.
Gravity
DEFINITION
The gravity force is defined from the acceleration of gravity vector, g, and the density, .
Under usual conditions and in Cartesian coordinates with the z-axis in the vertical
direction,
g =
0
const
When gravity is considered, a volume force equal to g is included in the momentum
equation. For example, for laminar weakly compressible flow, it reads:
THEORY FOR THE SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
113
u
2
------- + u u = pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) --- ( u )I + F + g
t
3
(3-22)
Introducing a constant reference density ref, and assuming that g is homogeneous, this
equation is equivalently written:
u
------- + u u=
t
(3-23)
2
pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) --- ( u )I + ref g ( r r ref ) + F + ( ref )g
3
where r is the position vector and rref is an arbitrary reference position vector.
From this equation, it is convenient to define the reduced pressure which accounts for the
hydrostatic pressure, p = p ref g ( r r ref )
u
2
------- + u u = p I + ( u + ( u ) T ) --- ( u )I + F + ( ref )g (3-24)
t
3
In Equation 3-24, the gravity force is written ( ref )g . Assuming that the density is a
function of the temperature only ( ref )g = ( ( T ) ( T ref ) )g . A first order Taylor
approximation gives ( ref )g ( T ref ) p ( T ref ) ( T T ref )g where
1
p ( T ref ) = --- ------ T
T ref
is the thermal expansion coefficient.
Using the same approach, the gravity force in Equation 3-22 can be rewritten as
g ( T ref ) ( 1 p ( T ref ) ( T T ref ) )g .
INCOMPRESSIBLE FLOW
For incompressible flow the fluid properties are assumed to be constant (Boussinesqs
approximation). Hence it is natural to define the reference density, ref, such that
=ref=(ref,pref) and ref=(ref) which makes it possible to simplify equation
Equation 3-24:
u
ref ------- + ref u u = ( p I + ref ( u + ( u ) T ) ) + F
t
In some cases, even when the flow is modeled as incompressible, buoyancy should be
accounted for. Using the approximation of the gravity force based on the thermal
expansion coefficient (which is relevant in this case: since the density changes are small, the
114 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
first order approximation is reasonably accurate), it is possible to rewrite the momentum
equation with constant density and a buoyancy force:
u
ref ------- + ref u u = ( p I + ref ( u + ( u ) T ) ) + F
t
ref p ( T ref ) ( T T ref )g
WEAKLY COMPRESSIBLE FLOW
For weakly compressible flow the assumption is that the density depends only on the
temperature. In particular, the pressure dependency of the density is neglected, and the
density is evaluated at the reference pressure: =(,pref). With the relative pressure as
dependent variable, Equation 3-22 is used
u
2
------- + u u = pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) --- ( u )I + F + g
t
3
With the reduced pressure as dependent variable, Equation 3-24 is used:
u
2
------- + u u = p I + ( u + ( u ) T ) --- ( u )I + F + ( ref )g
t
3
COMPRESSIBLE FLOW
For compressible flow the density may depend on any other variable, in particular on the
temperature and the pressure. Similar equations are used as for the Weakly Compressible
Flow case except that the density is not evaluated at the reference pressure.
NON-ISOTHERMAL FLOW COUPLING
For consistency, when the Non-Isothermal Flow coupling is active, the assumptions made
for the single phase flow interface are also made in the heat transfer interface:
Incompressible flow: the Boussinesq approximation implies that the thermal
conductivity and heat capacity are also constant.
Weakly Compressible flow: the density is evaluated at pref in the heat interface too.
Compressible flow: no change.
PRESSURE FORMULATION
When the relative pressure is used (default option) the interface dependent variable
represents the relative pressure and the absolute pressure is defined as p A = p ref + p .
When the pressure is used to define a boundary condition (for example when p0 defines
the pressure condition at an outlet), it represents the relative pressure. Hence defining the
THEORY FOR THE SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
115
outlet pressure as p hydro, approx = ref g ( r r ref ) compensates for the gravity force for
an ambient reference pressure of 0Pa when the density is constant, there is no external
force, and provided pref, g and r0 are defined consistently.
When the reduced pressure is used, the interface dependent variable (named p by default)
represents the reduced pressure. The absolute pressure is then defined as
p A = p ref ref g ( r r ref ) + p . In this case when the pressure is used to define a
boundary condition (for example to define a pressure condition at an outlet), its value
corresponds to the reduced pressure. Hence, the prescribed pressure compensates for an
approximate hydrostatic pressure, p hydro, approx = ref g ( r r ref ) which is exact only
when the density is constant and there is no external force.
PRESSURE BOUNDARY CONDITION
For an immobile fluid the momentum equation simplifies to ( pI ) = F + g or
( p I ) = F + ( ref )g depending on the pressure formulation.
For incompressible flow, assuming there are no external forces, this leads respectively to
p = ref g ( r r ref ) + p 0 or p = p 0 .
For weakly compressible flow and compressible flow, since the density varies, there is no
r
corresponding explicit expression. We have p =
g dr + p 0 and
r
p =
r
.
ref
( ref )g dr + p 0
rref
In practice, these integrals can be problematic to evaluate. Hence, whenever possible, it is
recommended to locate the pressure boundary in a region where the approximate
definition of the hydrostatic pressure is applicable, or to define a boundary that is
perpendicular to the gravity vector.
If it is not possible and if the pressure conditions can not be determined, one may use a no
viscous stress condition (available in the Open Boundary feature).
The Boussinesq Approximation
The Boussinesq approximation is a way to treat certain simple cases of buoyant flow
without having to use the compressible formulation of the Navier-Stokes equations.
The Boussinesq approximation assumes that variations in density have no effect on the
flow field except that they give rise to a buoyancy force. The density is assigned a reference
value, 0, everywhere except in the volume force term, which is set to
F = ( 0 + )g
116 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
(3-25)
where g is the gravity vector. A further simplification is often possible. Because g can be
written in terms of a potential, , Equation 3-25 can be written as:
F = ( 0 ) + g
The first part can be canceled out by splitting the true pressure, p, into a hydrodynamic
component, P, and a hydrostatic component, 0. Equation 3-17 and Equation 3-18 are
expressed in terms of the hydrodynamic pressure P = p + 0:
u = 0
(3-26)
u
0 ------- + ( 0 u )u = P + ( ( u + ( u ) T ) ) + g
t
(3-27)
To obtain the Boussinesq approximation on this form, the flow must be defined as
Incompressible with the Include gravity and Use reduced pressure options selected in the flow
interface, and the Non-Isothermal Flow multiphysics feature should be used to coupled the
heat transfer and fluid flow interfaces.
In practice, the shift from p to P can be ignored except where the pressure appears in
boundary conditions. The pressure that is specified at boundaries is the reduced pressure
in this case. For example, at a vertical outflow or inflow boundary, the reduced pressure is
typically a constant, whereas the true pressure is a function of the vertical coordinate.
The system formed by Equation 3-26 and Equation 3-27 has its limitations. The main
assumption is that the density fluctuations must be small; that is, /0 << 1. There are also
some more subtle constraints that, for example, make the Boussinesq approximation
unsuitable for systems of very large dimensions. An excellent discussion of the Boussinesq
approximation and its limitations appears in Chapter 14 of Ref. 10.
Theory for the Wall Boundary Condition
See Wall for the node settings.
SLIP
The Slip condition assumes that there are no viscous effects at the slip wall and hence, no
boundary layer develops. From a modeling point of view, this is a reasonable
approximation if the important effect of the wall is to prevent fluid from leaving the
domain. Mathematically, the constraint can be formulated as:
u n = 0,
( pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) )n = 0
THEORY FOR THE SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
117
The no penetration term takes precedence over the Neumann part of the condition and
the above expression is therefore equivalent to
u n = 0,
K ( K n )n = 0
K = ( u + ( u ) T )n
expressing that there is no flow across the boundary and no viscous stress in the tangential
direction.
For turbulent flow, turbulence variables are in general subject to homogeneous Neumann
conditions. For example
k n = 0
n = 0
for the k- model.
SLIDING WALL
The Sliding Wall boundary condition is appropriate if the wall behaves like a conveyor belt;
that is, the surface is sliding in its tangential direction. The wall does not have to actually
move in the coordinate system.
In 2D, the tangential direction is unambiguously defined by the direction of the
boundary, but the situation becomes more complicated in 3D. For this reason, this
boundary condition has slightly different definitions in the different space dimensions.
For 2D and 2D axisymmetric components, the velocity is given as a scalar Uw and the
condition prescribes
u n = 0,
u t = Uw
where t = (ny, nx) for 2D and t = (nz, nr) for axial symmetry.
For 3D components, the velocity is set equal to a given vector uw projected onto the
boundary plane:
u w ( n u w )n
u = -------------------------------------------- u w
u w ( n u w )n
The normalization makes u have the same magnitude as uw even if uw is not exactly
parallel to the wall.
S L I P VE L O C I T Y
In the microscale range, the flow at a boundary is seldom strictly no slip or slip. Instead,
the boundary condition is something in between, and there is a slip velocity at the
118 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
boundary. Two phenomena account for this velocity: violation of the continuum
hypothesis for the viscosity and flow induced by a thermal gradient along the boundary.
The following equation relates the viscosity-induced jump in tangential velocity to the
tangential shear stress along the boundary:
1
u = --- n, t
For gaseous fluids, the coefficient is given by
= ------------------------2
v
-------------- v
where is the fluids dynamic viscosity (SI unit: Pas), v represents the tangential
momentum accommodation coefficient (TMAC) (dimensionless), and is the molecules
mean free path (SI unit: m). The tangential accommodation coefficients are typically in the
range of 0.85 to 1.0 and can be found in Ref. 15.
A simpler expression for is
= -----Ls
where Ls, the slip length (SI unit: m), is a straight channel measure of the distance from
the boundary to the virtual point outside the flow domain where the flow profile
extrapolates to zero. This equation holds for both liquids and gases.
Thermal creep results from a temperature gradient along the boundary. The following
equation relates the thermally-induced jump in tangential velocity to the tangential
gradient of the natural logarithm of the temperature along the boundary:
u = T --- t log T
where T is the thermal slip coefficient (dimensionless) and is the density of the fluid.
The thermal slip coefficients range between 0.3 and 1.0 and can be found in Ref. 15.
Combining the previous relationships results in the following equation:
Ls
u u w, t = ------ n, t + T ------- t T
T
Relate the tangential shear stress to the viscous boundary force by
THEORY FOR THE SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
119
n, t = K ( n K )n
where the components of K are the Lagrange multipliers that are used to implement the
boundary condition. Similarly, the tangential temperature gradient results from the
difference of the gradient and its normal projection:
t T = T ( n T )n
Use Viscous Slip
When viscous slip is used, select Maxwells model to calculate Ls using:
2 v
L s = ---------------
v
Also see Wall for the node settings.
Prescribing Inlet and Outlet Conditions
The Navier-Stokes equations can show large variations in mathematical behavior, ranging
from almost completely elliptic to almost completely hyperbolic. This has implications
when it comes to prescribing admissible boundary conditions. There is also a discrepancy
between mathematically valid boundary conditions and practically useful boundary
conditions. See Inlet and Outlet for the node settings.
INLET CONDITIONS
An inlet requires specification of the velocity components. The most robust way to do this
is to prescribe a velocity field using a Velocity condition.
A common alternative to prescribing the complete velocity field is to prescribe a pressure
and all but one velocity component. The pressure cannot be specified pointwise because
this is mathematically over-constraining. Instead the pressure can be specified via a stress
condition:
u n
p + 2 --------- = F n
n
(3-28)
where un/n is the normal derivative of the normal velocity component. Equation 3-28
is prescribed by the Pressure condition in the Inlet and Outlet features and the Normal
stress condition in the Open Boundary and Boundary Stress features. Equation 3-28 is
mathematically more stringent compared to specifying the pressure pointwise and at the
same time cannot guarantee that p obtains the desired value. In practice, p is close to Fn,
120 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
except for low Reynolds number flows where viscous effects are the only effects that
balance the pressure. In addition to Equation 3-28, all but one velocity component must
be specified. For low Reynolds numbers, this can be specified by a vanishing tangential
stress condition:
u t
-------- = 0
n
which is what the Normal stress condition does. Vanishing tangential stress becomes a less
well-posed inlet condition as the Reynolds number increases. The Pressure condition in
the Inlet feature therefore requires a flow direction to be prescribed, which provides a
well-posed condition independent of Reynolds number.
OUTLET CONDITIONS
The most common approach is to prescribe a pressure via a normal stress condition on the
outlet. This is often accompanied by a vanishing tangential stress condition:
u t
-------- = 0
n
where ut/n is the normal derivative of the tangential velocity field. It is also possible to
prescribe ut to be zero. The latter option should be used with care since it can have a
significant effect on the upstream solution.
The elliptic character of the Navier-Stokes equations mathematically permit specifying a
complete velocity field at an outlet. This can, however, be difficult to apply in practice. The
reason being that it is hard to prescribe the outlet velocity so that it is consistent with the
interior solution at each point. The adjustment to the specified velocity then occurs across
an outlet boundary layer. The thickness of this boundary layer depends on the Reynolds
number; the higher the Reynolds number, the thinner the boundary layer.
ALTERNATIVE FORMULATIONS
COMSOL provides several specialized boundary conditions that either provide detailed
control over the flow at the boundary or that simulate specific devices. In practice they
often prescribe a velocity or a pressure, but calculate the prescribed values using for
example ODEs.
Normal Stress Boundary Condition
THEORY FOR THE SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
121
Laminar Inflow
In order to prescribe a fully developed inlet velocity profile, this boundary condition adds
a weak form contribution and constraints corresponding to unidirectional flow
perpendicular to the boundary. The applied condition corresponds to the situation shown
in Figure 3-2: a fictitious domain of length Lentr is assumed to be attached to the inlet of
the computational domain. The domain is an extrusion of the inlet boundary, which means
that laminar inflow requires the inlet to be flat. The boundary condition uses the
assumption that the flow in this fictitious domain is fully developed laminar flow. The
wall boundary conditions for the fictitious domain is inherited from the real domain, ,
unless the option to constrain outer edges or endpoints to zero is selected in which case
the fictitious walls are no-slip walls.
pentr
Lentr
Figure 3-2: An example of the physical situation simulated when using the Laminar inflow
boundary condition. is the actual computational domain while the dashed domain is a
fictitious domain.
If an average inlet velocity or inlet volume flow is specified instead of the pressure,
COMSOL Multiphysics adds an ODE that calculates a pressure, pentr, such that the
desired inlet velocity or volume flow is obtained.
Laminar Outflow
In order to prescribe an outlet velocity profile, this boundary condition adds a weak form
contribution and constraints corresponding to unidirectional flow perpendicular to the
boundary. The applied condition corresponds to the situation shown in Figure 3-3:
assume that a fictitious domain of length Lexit is attached to the outlet of the
computational domain. The domain is an extrusion of the outlet boundary, which means
that laminar outflow requires the outlet to be flat. The boundary condition uses the
assumption that the flow in this fictitious domain is fully developed laminar flow. The
wall boundary conditions for the fictitious domain is inherited from the real domain, ,
122 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
unless the option to constrain outer edges or endpoints to zero is selected in which case
the fictitious walls are no-slip walls.
pexit
Lexit
Figure 3-3: An example of the physical situation simulated when using the Laminar outflow
boundary condition. is the actual computational domain while the dashed domain is a
fictitious domain.
If the average outlet velocity or outlet volume flow is specified instead of the pressure, the
software adds an ODE that calculates pexit such that the desired outlet velocity or volume
flow is obtained.
Mass Flow
The Mass Flow boundary condition constrains the mass flowing into the domain across an
inlet boundary. The mass flow can be specified in a number of ways.
POINTWISE MASS FLUX
The pointwise mass flux sets the velocity at the boundary to:
mf
u = ------- n
where mf is the normal mass flux and is the density.
MASS FLOW RATE
The mass flow rate boundary condition sets the total mass flow through the boundary
according to:
dbc ( u n ) dS = m
where dbc (only present in the 2D Cartesian axis system) is the boundary thickness normal
to the fluid-flow domain and m is the total mass flow rate.
In addition to the constraint on the total flow across the boundary, the tangential velocity
components are set to zero on the boundary
THEORY FOR THE SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
123
un = 0
(3-29)
STANDARD FLOW RATE
The standard flow rate boundary condition specifies the mass flow as a standard volumetric
flow rate. The mass flow through the boundary is set by the equation:
( u n ) dS = Q sv
dbc ------ st
where dbc (only present in the 2D component Cartesian axis system) is the boundary
thickness normal to the fluid-flow domain, st is the standard density, and Qsv is the
standard flow rate. The standard density is defined by one of the following equations:
Mn
st = -------Vn
p st M n
st = ----------------RT st
where Mn is the mean molar mass of the fluid, Vn is the standard molar volume, pst is the
standard pressure, R is the universal molar gas constant, and Tst is the standard
temperature.
Equation 3-29 or Equation 3-30 is also enforced for compressible and incompressible
flow, respectively, ensuring that the normal component of the viscous stress and the
tangential component of the velocity are zero at the boundary.
No Viscous Stress
For this module, and in addition to the Pressure, No Viscous Stress boundary condition,
the viscous stress condition sets the viscous stress to zero:
( u + ( u ) T ) 2
--- ( u )I n = 0
3
( ( u + ( u ) T ) )n = 0
using the compressible/weakly compressible and the incompressible formulation,
respectively.
124 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
The condition is not a sufficient outlet condition since it lacks information about the outlet
pressure. It must hence be combined with pressure point constraints on one or several
points or lines surrounding the outlet.
This boundary condition is numerically the least stable outlet condition, but can still be
beneficial if the outlet pressure is nonconstant due to, for example, a nonlinear volume
force.
Normal Stress Boundary Condition
The total stress on the boundary is set equal to a stress vector of magnitude f0, oriented in
the negative normal direction:
pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) 2
--- ( u )I n = f 0 n
3
( pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) )n = f 0 n
using the compressible/weakly compressible and the incompressible formulation,
respectively.
This implies that the total stress in the tangential direction is zero. This boundary
condition implicitly sets a constraint on the pressure which for 2D flows is
u n
p = 2 ---------- + f 0
n
(3-30)
If un/n is small, Equation 3-30 states that p f0.
The Normal Stress condition is the mathematically correct version of the Pressure
Conditions condition (Ref. 4), but it is numerically less stable.
Pressure Boundary Condition
For single-phase flow, a mathematically correct natural boundary condition for outlets is
pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) 2
--- ( u )I n = p 0 n
(3-31)
( pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) )n = p 0 n
(3-32)
using the compressible/weakly compressible and the incompressible formulation,
respectively.
THEORY FOR THE SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
125
This is a normal stress condition together with a no-tangential-stress condition. When
> 0, Equation 3-31 or Equation 3-32 can be supplemented with a tangential velocity
condition
ut = 0
(3-33)
If so, the no-tangential-stress condition is overridden. An issue with Equation 3-31 or
Equation 3-32 is that it does not strongly enforce unidirectional flow on the boundary. If
the prescribed pressure on an outlet is too high, parts of the outlet can actually have inflow.
This is not as much of an issue for the Navier-Stokes equations as it is an issue for scalar
transport equations solved along with the Navier-Stokes equations. Hence, when applying
the Pressure boundary condition at an outlet or inlet you can further constrain the flow.
With the Suppress backflow option
pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) 2
--- ( u )I n = p 0 n
3
( pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) )n = p 0 n
p p
0
(3-34)
the normal stress is adjusted to keep
un0
(3-35)
Equation 3-34 effectively means that the prescribed pressure is p0 if un 0, but smaller
at locations where un < 0. This means that Equation 3-34 does not completely prevent
backflow, but the backflow is substantially reduced.
A pressure condition can also be applied at an inlet. In this case, either the normal stress is
prescribed
2
T
n pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) --- ( u )I n = p 0
3
T
n ( pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) )n = p 0
p p
0
(3-36)
together with the tangential condition in Equation 3-33, or, a general flow direction is
prescribed.
126 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
T pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) 2
--- ( u )I n = p 0 ( r n )
ru
u
3
(r n)
T ( pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) )n = p
ru
0 u
p p
0
(3-37)
du
u ( u r u )r u = 0, r u = ------------du
The > option is used with suppress backflow to have u n 0 or u r u 0 .
See Inlet, Outlet, Open Boundary, and No Viscous Stress for the individual node settings.
Note that some modules have additional theory sections describing options available with
that module.
Vacuum Pump Boundary Condition
Vacuum pumps (devices) can be represented using lumped curves implemented as
boundary conditions. These simplifications also imply some assumptions. In particular, it
is assumed that a given boundary can only be either an inlet or an outlet. Such a boundary
should not be a mix of inlets/outlets nor switch between them during a simulation.
Manufacturers usually provide curves that describe the static pressure as a function of flow
rate for a vacuum pump. Also see Vacuum Pump for the node settings.
DEFINING A DEVICE AT AN OUTLET
In this case (see Figure 3-4), the devices inlet is the interior face situated between the blue
(cube) and green (circle) domains while its outlet is an external boundary, here the circular
boundary of the green domain. The lumped curve gives the flow rate as a function of the
pressure difference between the interior face and the external boundary. This boundary
condition implementation follows the Pressure Boundary Condition for outlets with the
Suppress backflow option:
pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) 2
--- ( u )I n = p 0 n
(3-38)
p 0 p vacuum pump ( V 0 ) p ref
Here, V0 is the flow rate across the boundary and pvacuum pump(V0) is the static pressure
function of flow rate for the vacuum pump. pref is the reference pressure that ensure that
the absolute pressure is set to pvacuum pump. Equation 3-38 corresponds to the
THEORY FOR THE SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
127
compressible formulation. For incompressible flows, the term (2/3)( u) vanishes. In
2D the thickness in the third direction, Dz, is used to define the flow rate. Vacuum pumps
are modeled as rectangles in this case.
Figure 3-4: A vacuum pump at the outlet. The arrow represents the flow direction, the green
circle represents the vacuum pump (that should not be part of the model), and the blue cube
represents the modeled domain with an outlet boundary condition described by a lumped curve
for the attached vacuum pump.
Fan Defined on an Interior Boundary
In this case, the inlet and outlet of the device are both interior boundaries (see Figure 3-5).
The boundaries are called dev_in and dev_out. The boundary conditions are described
as follows:
The inlet of the device is an outlet boundary condition for the modeled domain. For
this outlet side, on dev_in, a pressure condition is set. The value of the pressure is set
to the sum of the mean value of the pressure on dev_out and the pressure drop across
the device. The pressure drop is calculated from a lumped curve using the flow rate
evaluated on dev_in.
For the inlet side, on dev_out, a pressure boundary condition is defined. The pressure
value is set so that the flow rate is equal on dev_in and dev_out. An ODE is added to
compute the pressure value.
When a turbulence model with transport equations for the turbulence quantities is
applied, the turbulent kinetic energy, k, and dissipation rate, , or specific dissipation
rate, , must be specified on the downstream side of the fan. The turbulence conditions
are specific to the design and operating conditions of the fan. A reference velocity scale
Uref is available in order to set default values.
128 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
2 ,
k 0init = 0.015U ref
3/2
C 3/4 k 0init
0init = -------------------------l ref
(3-39)
In both cases, the boundary condition implementation follows the
Pressure Boundary Condition for outlet or inlet with the Suppress
backflow option.
See Interior Fan for node settings.
Figure 3-5: A device between two boundaries. The red arrows represent the flow direction, the
cylindrical part represents the device (that should be not be part of the model), and the two
cubes are the domain that are modeled with a particular inlet boundary condition to account
for the device.
Fan and Grille Boundary Conditions
Fans, pumps, or grilles (devices) can be represented using lumped curves implemented as
boundary conditions. These simplifications also imply some assumptions. In particular, it
is assumed that a given boundary can only be either an inlet or an outlet. Such a boundary
should not be a mix of inlets/outlets, nor switch between them during a simulation.
Manufacturers usually provide curves that describe the static pressure as a function of flow
rate for a fan. See Fan and Grille for the node settings.
THEORY FOR THE SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
129
DEFINING A DEVICE AT AN INLET
In this case, the devices inlet is an external boundary, represented by the external circular
boundary of the green domain on Figure 3-6. The devices outlet is an interior face
situated between the green and blue domains in Figure 3-6. The lumped curve gives the
flow rate as a function of the pressure difference between the external boundary and the
interior face. This boundary condition implementation follows the Pressure Boundary
Condition for inlets with the Suppress backflow option:
T
2
n pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) --- ( u )I n = p 0
3
(3-40)
p 0 p input + p fan ( V 0 )
The Grille boundary condition sets the following conditions:
T
2
n pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) --- ( u )I n = p 0
3
(3-41)
p 0 p input + p grille ( V 0 )
Here, V0 is the flow rate across the boundary, pinput is the pressure at the devices inlet,
and pfan(V0) and pgrille(V0) are the static pressure functions of flow rate for the fan and
the grille. Equation 3-40 and Equation 3-41 correspond to the compressible formulation.
For incompressible flows, the term (2/3)( u) vanishes. When a turbulence model with
a transport equation for the turbulent kinetic energy is applied, the term (2/3)k appears
on the left-hand sides of Equation 3-40 and Equation 3-41. In such cases the turbulent
kinetic energy, k, and dissipation rate, , or specific dissipation rate, , must be specified
on the downstream side. The turbulence conditions are specific to the design and
operating conditions of the fan or grille. For the Fan condition, a reference velocity scale
Uref is available in order to set default values according to Equation 3-39. For the Grille
boundary condition the turbulence quantities on the downstream side are specified by
defining a loss coefficient K = 2p grille ( u n ) 2 , from which a refraction coefficient is
derived using Equation 3-53. Equation 3-47 through Equation 3-49 are then used to
relate upstream and downstream turbulence quantities.
When an algebraic turbulence model, such as the Algebraic yPlus or L-VEL model, is used,
the turbulence is only implicitly affected by the device through the change in the local
Reynolds number.
The flow direction is enforced to be normal to the boundary by default. However, it is
possible to define an arbitrary inflow velocity direction. In such case, Equation 3-40 and
130 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Equation 3-41 are modified similarly to Equation 3-37. In 2D, the thickness in the third
2
ispIused
+ (to
u
+ ( u
) Tflow
) ---
( Fans
u )Iare
n =modeled
p 0
direction, Dz,
define
the
rate.
as rectangles in this case.
3
For 3D and 2D axisymmetry
when
swirlflow
included,
it is possible to define a swirl
= cthe
( r isr pb
)
u t = u swirl
sf 2fn
on the downstream side ofthe
fan.
It
sets
the
following
boundary
p 0 p input + p fan
conditions:
Here, the swirl ratio csf is a positive number less than 1, defining the ratio of the rotation
transferred from the fan to the flow, f is the number of revolutions per time for the fan,
and rrb is the rotation axis base point.
Figure 3-6: A device at the inlet. The arrow represents the flow direction, the green circle
represents the device (that should not be part of the model), and the blue cube represents the
modeled domain with an inlet boundary condition described by a lumped curve for the
attached device.
DEFINING A DEVICE AT AN OUTLET
In this case (see Figure 3-15), the fans inlet is the interior face situated between the blue
(cube) and green (circle) domain while its outlet is an external boundary, here the circular
boundary of the green domain. The lumped curve gives the flow rate as a function of the
pressure difference between the interior face and the external boundary. This boundary
condition implementation follows the Pressure Boundary Condition for outlets with the
Suppress backflow option:
pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) 2
--- ( u )I n = p 0 n
(3-42)
p 0 p exit p fan ( V 0 )
The Grille boundary condition sets the following conditions:
THEORY FOR THE SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
131
pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) 2
--- ( u )I n = p 0 n
(3-43)
p 0 p exit p grille ( V 0 )
Here, V0 is the flow rate across the boundary, pexit is the pressure at the device outlet, and
pfan(V0) and pgrille(V0) are the static pressure function of flow rate for the fan and the
grille. Equation 3-42 and Equation 3-43 correspond to the compressible formulation. For
incompressible flows, the term (2/3)( u)n vanishes. When a turbulence model with a
transport equation for the turbulence kinetic energy is applied, the term (2/3)kn appears
on the left-hand sides of Equation 3-42 and Equation 3-43. In 2D the thickness in the
third direction, Dz, is used to define the flow rate. Fans are modeled as rectangles in this
case.
Figure 3-7: A fan at the outlet. The arrow represents the flow direction, the green circle
represents the fan (that should not be part of the model), and the blue cube represents the
modeled domain with an outlet boundary condition described by a lumped curve for the
attached fan.
Screen Boundary Condition
The word screen refers to a barrier with distributed perforations such as a wire gauze,
grille, or perforated plate. The screen is assumed to have a width, which is small compared
to the resolved length-scales of the flow field and can thus be modeled as an edge (in 2D)
or surface (in 3D). This idea permits an economic implementation of the screen, where
the details of the barrier need not be resolved. The general influence of a screen on the
flow field is a loss in the normal momentum component, a change in direction (related to
a suppression of the tangential velocity component), attenuation of the turbulence kinetic
energy and preservation of the turbulence length scale (Ref. 16). The conditions across the
screen are expressed as,
132 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
[ u n ] -+ = 0
2
2
( u n ) 2 + p n T ( + T ) u + ( u ) T --- ( u )I --- kI n
3
3
(3-44)
+
-
(3-45)
K
= ---- - ( u - n ) 2
2
n u+ = ( n u- )
(3-46)
k+ = 2 k-
(3-47)
and, depending on the turbulence model in use, either,
+ = 3 -
(3-48)
+ = -
(3-49)
or,
and + refer to the upstream and downstream side of the screen, whereas K and are the
screen resistance and refraction coefficients. The attenuation of the turbulence kinetic
energy (Equation 3-47) is based on the suppression of the tangential velocity
(Equation 3-46) and the changes in and are determined by the assumption of
preservation of the turbulence length-scale across the screen.
When an algebraic turbulence model, such as the Algebraic yPlus or L-VEL model, is used,
the turbulence is only implicitly affected by the device through the change in the local
Reynolds number.
The Screen feature provides three commonly used correlations for K (Ref. 17). The
following correlation is valid for wire gauzes
K = ( 0.52 + 0.66/Re d4 / 3 ) ( ( 1 s ) 2 1 ), Re d = u d
(3-50)
Here s is the solidity (ratio of blocked area to total area of the screen) and d is the
diameter of the wires. For a square mesh, the following correlation is applied,
K = 0.98 ( ( 1 s ) 2 1 ) 1.09
(3-51)
and for a perforated plate,
THEORY FOR THE SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
133
K = 0.94 ( ( 1 s ) 2 1 ) 1.28
(3-52)
The following correlation for wire gauzes (Ref. 18) gives reasonable values for for a wide
range of applications and has been included in the implementation,
=
K2
------- + 1 K
---16
4
(3-53)
See Screen for the node settings. Also see Theory for the Non-Isothermal
Screen Boundary Condition for the non-isothermal version of these
physics interfaces.
Mass Sources for Fluid Flow
There are two types of mass sources in a Single-Phase Flow interface: point sources and
line sources.
These features require at least one of the following licenses: Batteries &
Fuel Cells Module, CFD Module, Chemical Reaction Engineering
Module, Corrosion Module, Electrochemistry Module,
Electrodeposition Module, Microfluidics Module, Pipe Flow Module, or
Subsurface Flow Module.
PO INT SO URCE
A point source is theoretically formed by taking a mass injection/ejection, Q (SI unit:
3
kg/(m s)), in a small volume V and then letting the size of the volume tend to zero
while keeping the total mass flux constant. Given a point source strength, q p (SI unit:
kg/s), this can be expressed as
lim
V 0
= q p
(3-54)
An alternative way to form a point source/sink is to assume that mass is injected/extracted
through the surface of a small object. Letting the object surface area tend to zero while
keeping the mass flux constant, results in the same point source. For this alternative
approach, effects resulting from the physical object volume, such as drag and fluid
displacement, need to be neglected.
134 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
The weak contribution
q p test ( p )
is added to a point in the geometry. As can be seen from Equation 3-54, Q must tend to
plus or minus infinity as V tends to zero. This means that in theory the pressure also tends
to plus or minus infinity.
Observe that point refers to the physical representation of the source. A point source
can therefore only be added to points in 3D components and to points on the symmetry
axis in 2D axisymmetry components. Other geometrical points in 2D components
represent physical lines.
The finite element representation of Equation 3-54 corresponds to a finite pressure in a
point with the effect of the point source spread out over a region around the point. The
size of the region depends on the mesh and on the strength of the source. A finer mesh
gives a smaller affected region, but also a more extreme pressure value. It is important not
to mesh too finely around a point source since the resulting pressure can result in
unphysical values for the density, for example. It can also have a negative effect on the
condition number for the equation system.
LINE SOURCE
A line source can theoretically be formed by assuming a source of strength Q (SI unit:
kg/(m3s)), located within a tube with cross-sectional area S and then letting S tend to
zero, while keeping the total mass flux per unit length constant. Given a line source
strength, q l (SI unit: kg/(ms)), this can be expressed as
lim
S 0
Q =
q l
(3-55)
As in the point source case, an alternative approach is to assume that mass is
injected/extracted through the surface of a small object. This results in the same mass
source, but requires that effects on the fluid resulting from the physical object volume are
neglected.
The weak contribution
q l test ( p )
is added to lines in 3D or to points in 2D (which represent cut-through views of lines).
Line sources can also be added to the axisymmetry line in 2D axisymmetry components.
THEORY FOR THE SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
135
It cannot, however, be added to geometrical lines in 2D because they represent physical
planes.
As with a point source, it is important not to mesh too finely around the line source.
For feature node information, see Line Mass Source and Point Mass
Source in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual.
For the Reacting Flow in Porous Media, Diluted Species interface, which
is available with the CFD Module, Chemical Reaction Engineering
Module, or Batteries & Fuel Cells Module, these shared physics nodes are
renamed as follows:
The Line Mass Source node is available as two nodes, one for the fluid
flow (Fluid Line Source) and one for the species (Species Line Source).
The Point Mass Source node is available as two nodes, one for the fluid
flow (Fluid Point Source) and one for the species (Species Point Source).
Numerical StabilityStabilization Techniques for Fluid Flow
The momentum equation (Equation 3-16 or Equation 3-18) is a (nonlinear)
convection-diffusion equation. Such equations can easily become unstable if discretized
using the Galerkin finite element method. Stabilized finite element methods are usually
necessary in order to obtain physical solutions. The stabilization settings are found in the
) and
main Fluid Flow interface features. To display this section, click the Show button (
select Stabilization.
There are three types of stabilization methods available for Navier-Stokesstreamline
diffusion, crosswind diffusion, and isotropic diffusion. Streamline diffusion and
crosswind diffusion are consistent stabilization methods, whereas isotropic diffusion is an
inconsistent stabilization method.
For optimal functionality, the exact weak formulations of and constants in the streamline
diffusion and crosswind diffusion methods depend on the order of the shape functions
(basis functions) for the elements. The values of constants in the streamline diffusion and
crosswind diffusion methods follow Ref. 5 and Ref. 6.
136 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
STREAMLINE DIFFUSION
For strongly coupled systems of equations, the streamline diffusion method must be
applied to the system as a whole rather than to each equation separately. These ideas were
first explored by Hughes and Mallet (Ref. 7) and were later extended to Galerkin
least-squares (GLS) applied to the Navier-Stokes equations (Ref. 8). This is the streamline
diffusion formulation that COMSOL Multiphysics supports. The time-scale tensor is the
diagonal tensor presented in Ref. 9.
Streamline diffusion is active by default because it is necessary when convection is
dominating the flow.
The governing equations for incompressible flow are subject to the Babuska-Brezzi
condition, which states that the shape functions (basis functions) for pressure must be of
lower order than the shape functions for velocity. If the incompressible Navier-Stokes
equations are stabilized by streamline diffusion, it is possible to use equal-order
interpolation. Hence, streamline diffusion is necessary when using first-order elements for
both velocity and pressure. This applies also if the model is solved using geometric
multigrid (either as a solver or as a preconditioner) and at least one multigrid hierarchy
level uses linear Lagrange elements.
CROSSWIND DIFFUSION
Crosswind diffusion can also be formulated for systems of equations, and when applied to
the Navier-Stokes equations it becomes a shock-capturing operator. COMSOL
Multiphysics supports the formulation in Ref. 8 with a shock-capturing viscosity of the
Hughes-Mallet type Ref. 7.
Incompressible flows do not contain shock waves, but crosswind diffusion is still useful for
introducing extra diffusion in sharp boundary layers and shear layers that otherwise would
require a very fine mesh to resolve.
Crosswind diffusion is active by default as it makes it easier to obtain a solution even if the
problem is fully resolved by the mesh. Crosswind diffusion also enables the iterative solvers
to use inexpensive presmoothers. If crosswind diffusion is deactivated, more expensive
preconditioners must be used instead.
THEORY FOR THE SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
137
ISOTROPIC DIFFUSION
Isotropic diffusion adds diffusion to the Navier-Stokes equations. Isotropic diffusion
significantly reduces the accuracy of the solution but does a very good job at reducing
oscillations. The stability of the continuity equation is not improved.
Numerical Stabilization and Iterative in the COMSOL Multiphysics
Reference Manual
Solvers for Laminar Flow
The Navier-Stokes equations constitute a nonlinear equation system. A nonlinear solver
must hence be applied to solve the problem. The nonlinear solver iterates to reach the final
solution. In each iteration, a linearized version of the nonlinear system is solved using a
linear solver. In the time-dependent case, a time marching method must also be applied.
The default suggestions for each of these solver elements are discussed below.
NONLINEAR SOLVER
The nonlinear solver method depends on if the model solves a stationary or a
time-dependent problem.
Stationary Solver
In the stationary case, a fully coupled, damped Newton method is applied. The initial
damping factor is low since a full Newton step can be harmful unless the initial values are
close to the final solution. The nonlinear solver algorithm automatically regulates the
damping factor in order to reach a converged solution.
For advanced models, the automatically damped Newton method might not be robust
enough. A pseudo time-stepping algorithm can then be invoked. See Pseudo Time
Stepping for Laminar Flow Models.
Time-Dependent Solver
In the time-dependent case, the initial guess for each time step is (loosely speaking) the
previous time step, which is a very good initial value for the nonlinear solver. The
automatic damping algorithm is then not necessary. The damping factor in the Newton
method is instead set to a constant value slightly smaller than one. Also, for the same
reason, it suffices to update the Jacobian once per time-step.
It is seldom worth the extra computational cost to update the Jacobian more than once
per time step. For most models it is more efficient to restrict the maximum time step or
possibly lower the damping factor in the Newton method.
138 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
LINEAR SOLVER
The linearized Navier-Stokes equation system has saddle point character, unless the density
depends on the pressure. This means that the Jacobian matrix has zeros on the diagonal.
Even when the density depends on the pressure, the equation system effectively shares
many numerical properties with a saddle point system.
For small 2D and 3D models, the default solver suggestion is a direct solver. Direct solvers
can handle most nonsingular systems and are very robust and also very fast for small
models. Unfortunately, they become slow for large models and their memory requirement
scales as somewhere between N1.5and N2, where N is the number of degrees of freedom
in the model. The default suggestion for large 2D and 3D models is therefore the iterative
GMRES solver. The memory requirement for an iterative solver optimally scales as N.
Geometric Multigrid (GMG) is used to accelerate GMRES. GMG needs smoothers but
the saddle point character of the linear system restricts the number of applicable
smoothers. The choices are further restricted by the anisotropic meshes frequently
encountered in fluid-flow problems. Pointwise smoothers, such as SOR, are not very
efficient on anisotropic meshes.
The efficiency of the smoothers is highly dependent on the numerical stabilization.
Iterative solvers perform at their best when both Streamline Diffusion and Crosswind
Diffusion are active.
The default smoother for P1+P1 elements is SCGS. This is an efficient and robust
smoother specially designed to solve saddle point systems on meshes that contain
anisotropic elements. The SCGS smoother works well even without crosswind diffusion.
SCGS can sometimes work for higher-order elements, especially if Method in the SCGS
settings is set to Mesh element lines. But there is no guarantee for this, so the default
smoother for P2+P1 elements and P3+P2 elements is an SOR Line smoother. SOR Line
handles mesh anisotropy but does not formally address the saddle point character. It does,
however, function in practice provided that streamline diffusion and crosswind diffusion
are both active.
A different kind of saddle point character can arise if the equation system contains ODE
variables. Some advanced boundary conditions, for example Laminar Inflow, can add
equations with such variables. These variables must be treated with the Vanka algorithm.
SCGS includes an option to invoke Vanka. Models with higher-order elements must apply
SCGS or use the Vanka smoother. The latter is the default suggestion for higher-order
elements, but it does not work optimally for anisotropic meshes.
THEORY FOR THE SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
139
TIME-DEPENDENT SOLVERS
The default time-dependent solver for Navier-Stokes is the BDF method with maximum
order set to two. Higher BDF orders are not stable for transport problems in general nor
for Navier-Stokes in particular.
BDF methods have been used for a long time and are known for their stability. However,
they can have severe damping effects, especially the lower-order methods. Hence, if
robustness is not an issue, a model can benefit from using the generalized- method
instead. Generalized- is a solver which has properties similar to those of the second-order
BDF solver but it is much less diffusive.
Both BDF and generalized- are per default set to automatically adjust the time step.
While this works well for many models, extra efficiency and accuracy can often be gained
by specifying a maximum time step. It is also often beneficial to specify an initial time step
to make the solver progress smoothly in the beginning of the time series.
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual:
Time-Dependent Solver
Multigrid, Direct, Iterative, SCGS, SOR Line, and Vanka
Stationary Solver
Pseudo Time Stepping for Laminar Flow Models
A stationary formulation has per definition no time derivatives and Equation 3-18 reduces
to:
T
( u )u = [ pI + ( u + ( u ) ) ] + F
(3-56)
Solving Equation 3-56 requires a starting guess that is close enough to the final solution.
If no such guess is at hand, the fully transient problem can be solved instead. This is,
however, a rather costly approach in terms of computational time. An intermediate
approach is to add a fictitious time derivative to Equation 3-56:
T
u nojac ( u )
--------------------------------- + ( u )u = [ pI + ( u + ( u ) ) ] + F
where t is a pseudo time step. Since unojac(u) is always zero, this term does not affect
the final solution. It does, however, affect the discrete equation system and effectively
transforms a nonlinear iteration into a step of size t of a time-dependent solver.
140 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Pseudo time stepping is not active per default. The pseudo time step t can be chosen
individually for each element based on the local CFL number:
h
t = CFL loc ------u
where h is the mesh cell size. A small CFL number means a small time step. It is practical
to start with a small CFL number and gradually increase it as the solution approaches
steady state.
If the automatic expression for CFLloc is set to the built-in variable CFLCMP, then the
automatic setting suggests a PID regulator for the pseudo time step in the default solver.
The PID regulator starts with a small CFL number and increases CFLloc as the solution
comes closer to convergence.
The default manual expression is
1.3 min ( niterCMP, 9 ) +
if ( niterCMP > 20, 9 1.3 min ( niterCMP 20, 9 ), 0 ) +
(3-57)
if ( niterCMP > 40, 90 1.3 min ( niterCMP 40, 9 ), 0 )
The variable niterCMP is the nonlinear iteration number. It is equal to one for the first
nonlinear iteration. CFLloc starts at 1.3 and increases by 30% each iteration until it reaches
1.3 9 10.6 . It remains there until iteration number 20 at which it starts to increase until
it reaches approximately 106. A final increase after iteration number 40 then takes it to
1060. Equation 3-57 can, for some advanced flows, increase CFLloc too slowly or too
quickly. CFLloc can then be tuned for the specific application.
For details about the CFL regulator, see Pseudo Time Stepping in the
COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual.
The Projection Method for the Navier-Stokes Equations
A well-known approach to solve the Navier-Stokes equations is the pressure-correction
method. This type of method is a so-called segregated method, and it generally requires
far less memory than the COMSOL Multiphysics default formulation. Several versions of
the original method have been developed (see Ref. 12, for example). COMSOL uses
THEORY FOR THE SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
141
incremental pressure-correction schemes.
This formulation is only available for time-dependent problems and
requires the time discrete solver. It is available for the Laminar Flow and
Turbulent Flow, k- interfaces.
This method reformulates the Navier-Stokes equations so that it is possible to solve for one
variable at a time in sequence. Let u and p be the velocity and pressure variables and uc
and pc the corrected velocity and pressure variables, respectively. The pressure-correction
algorithm solves the Navier-Stokes equations using the following steps:
1 Solve in sequence for all u components following equation:
n
n+1
n
n+1
n+1 T
n+1
u
2
------- + u c u
= p + ( u
+ ( u
) ) --- ( u
)I + F
t
3
u
where the superscript denotes the time-step index, and ------- is discretized using a BDF
t
method up to second order where the u values from previous time steps are replaced by
uc values. To first order it is discretized as:
n+1
u
u
---------------------------c
timestep
2 Solve Poissons equation to adjust the pressure:
n
n+1
timestep ( p n + 1 p ) = ------ u
t
(3-58)
3 Update the corrected velocity:
n+1
uc
= u
n+1
timestep
--------------------- ( p n + 1 p n )
For incompressible flows, the
2
--- ( u n + 1 )I
3
term in Equation 3-57 and the ------ term in Equation 3-58 are excluded.
t
Due to the specific time discretization scheme, this algorithm is only available with the
time discrete solver.
Because the velocity components and the pressure are solved in a segregated way, some
boundary conditions have a different implementation or might not be available with the
142 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
projection method. In such cases, this is mentioned in the documentation for each
boundary condition.
When the projection method is used for turbulent flows or with multiphysics couplings,
the same algorithm is used for the velocity and pressure variables. Extra steps are needed
to solve the other variables. By default the equation form used for these variables is the
time-dependent form, and the time derivative is automatically discretized using a
second-order BDF method.
Discontinuous Galerkin Formulation
Some boundary conditions are implemented using a discontinuous Galerkin formulation.
These boundary conditions include
Wall Slip
Periodic Flow Condition
Flow Continuity
The formulation used in the Fluid Flow interfaces in COMSOL Multiphysics is the
Symmetric Interior Penalty Galerkin method (SIPG). The SIPG method can be regarded
to satisfy the boundary conditions in an integral sense rather than pointwise. More
information on SIPG can be found in Ref. 13.
In particular, the SIPG formulation includes a penalty parameter that must be large
enough for the formulation to be coercive. The higher the value, the better the boundary
condition is fulfilled, but a too high value results in an ill-conditioned equation system.
The penalty parameter in COMSOL Multiphysics is implemented according to Ref. 14.
Particle Tracing in Fluid Flow
The Particle Tracing Module is available to assist with these types of modeling problems.
It is possible to model particle tracing with COMSOL Multiphysics provided that the
impact of the particles on the flow field is negligible. First compute the flow field, and
then, as an analysis step, calculate the motion of the particles. The motion of a particle is
defined by Newtons second law
2
dx
d x
= F t, x,
dt
d t2
THEORY FOR THE SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
143
where x is the position of the particle, m the particle mass, and F is the sum of all forces
acting on the particle. Examples of forces acting on a particle in a fluid are the drag force,
the buoyancy force, and the gravity force. The drag force represents the force that a fluid
exerts on a particle due to a difference in velocity between the fluid and the particle. It
includes the viscous drag, the added mass, and the Basset history term. Several empirical
expressions have been suggested for the drag force. One of those is the one proposed by
Khan and Richardson (Ref. 11). That expression is valid for spherical particles for a wide
range of particle Reynolds numbers. The particle Reynolds number is defined as
u u p 2r
Re p = -----------------------------
where u is the velocity of the fluid, up the particle velocity, r the particle radius, the fluid
density, and the dynamic viscosity of the fluid. The empirical expression for the drag
force according to Khan and Richardson is
2
-0.31
F = r u u p ( u u p ) [ 1.84Re p
+ 0.293Re p0.06 ]
3.45
The model Flow Past a Cylinder (Application Library path
COMSOL_Multiphysics/Fluid_Dynamics/cylinder_flow) demonstrates how to
add and set up particle tracing in a plot group using the Particle Tracing
with Mass node. It uses the predefined Khan-Richardson model for the
drag force and neglects gravity and buoyancy forces.
References for the Single-Phase Flow, Laminar Flow Interfaces
1. G.G. Stokes, Trans. Camb. Phil. Soc., 8, 287-305, 1845
2. P.M. Gresho and R.L. Sani, Incompressible Flow and the Finite Element Method,
Volume 2: Isothermal Laminar Flow, John Wiley & Sons, 2000.
3. G.K. Batchelor, An Introduction To Fluid Dynamics, Cambridge University Press,
1967.
4. R.L. Panton, Incompressible Flow, 2nd ed., John Wiley & Sons, 1996.
5. I. Harari and T.J.R. Hughes, What are C and h? Inequalities for the Analysis and
Design of Finite Element Methods, Comp. Meth. Appl. Mech. Engrg, vol. 97, pp. 157
192, 1992.
144 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
6. Y. Bazilevs, V.M. Calo, T.E. Tezduyar, and T.J.R. Hughes, YZ Discontinuity
Capturing for Advection-dominated Processes with Application to Arterial Drug
Delivery, Int.J.Num. Meth. Fluids, vol. 54, pp. 593608, 2007.
7. T.J.R. Hughes and M. Mallet, A New Finite Element Formulation for Computational
Fluid Dynamics: III. The Generalized Streamline Operator for Multidimensional
Advective-Diffusive System, Comp. Meth. Appl. Mech. Engrg, vol. 58, pp. 305328,
1986.
8. G. Hauke and T.J.R. Hughes, A Unified Approach to Compressible and
Incompressible Flows, Comp. Meth. Appl. Mech. Engrg, vol. 113, pp. 389395, 1994.
9. G. Hauke, Simple Stabilizing Matrices for the Computation of Compressible Flows in
Primitive Variables, Comp. Meth. Appl. Mech. Engrg, vol. 190, pp. 68816893, 2001.
10. D.J. Tritton, Physical Fluid Dynamics, 2nd ed., Oxford University Press, 1988.
11. J.M. Coulson and J.F. Richardson, Particle Technology and Separation Processes,
Chemical Engineering, Volume 2, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2002.
12. J.L. Guermond, P. Minev, and J. Shen, An overview of projection methods for
incompressible flows, Comp. Meth. Appl. Mech. Engrg, vol. 195, pp. 60116045, 2006.
13. B. Rivire, Discontinuous Galerkin Methods for Solving Elliptic and Parabolic
Equations, SIAM, 2008.
14. Y. Epshteyn and B. Rivire, Estimation of penalty parameters for symmetric interior
penalty Galerkin methods, J. Computational and Applied Mathematics, vol. 206, pp.
843872, 2007.
15. G. Kariadakis, A. Beskok, and N. Aluru, Microflows and Nanoflows, Springer Science
and Business Media, 2005.
16. G.B. Schubauer, W.G. Spangenberg, and P.S. Klebanoff, Aerodynamic
Characteristics of Damping Screens, NACA Technical note 2001, Jan. 1950.
17. P.E. Roach, The Generation of Nearly Isotropic Turbulence by Means of Grids, Int.
J. Heat and Fluid Flow, vol. 8, pp. 8292, 1986.
18. J.C. Gibbings, The Pyramid Gauze Diffuser, Ing. Arch., vol. 42, pp. 225233,
1973.
19. R.P. Chhabra and J.F. Richardson, Non-Newtonian Flow and Applied Rheology, 2nd
ed., Elsevier, 2008.
THEORY FOR THE SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
145
Theory for the Turbulent Flow
Interfaces
The theory for the Single-Phase Flow, Turbulent Flow interfaces is described in this
section:
Turbulence Modeling
The Algebraic yPlus Turbulence Model
The L-VEL Turbulence Model
The k-e Turbulence Model
The k-w Turbulence Model
The SST Turbulence Model
The Low Reynolds Number k-e Turbulence Model
The Spalart-Allmaras Turbulence Model
Inlet Values for the Turbulence Length Scale and Turbulent Intensity
Theory for the Pressure, No Viscous Stress Boundary Condition
Solvers for Turbulent Flow
Pseudo Time Stepping for Turbulent Flow Models
References for the Single-Phase Flow, Turbulent Flow Interfaces
Theory for the Single-Phase Flow Interfaces
Turbulence Modeling
Turbulence is a property of the flow field and it is characterized by a wide range of flow
scales: the largest occurring scales, which depend on the geometry, the smallest, quickly
fluctuating scales, and all the scales in between. The propensity for an isothermal flow to
become turbulent is measured by the Reynolds number
UL
Re = -----------
146 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
(3-59)
where is the dynamic viscosity, the density, and U and L are velocity and length scales
of the flow, respectively. Flows with high Reynolds numbers tend to become turbulent.
Most engineering applications belong to this category of flows.
The Navier-Stokes equations can be used for turbulent flow simulations, although this
would require a large number of elements in order to capture the wide range of scales in
the flow. An alternative approach is to divide the flow quantities into mean values and
fluctuations. When solving for the mean-flow quantities, the effect of the fluctuations is
modeled using a turbulence closure. The idea behind this approach is that solving the
model for the turbulence closure is numerically less expensive than resolving all the
turbulence scales. Different turbulence closures invoke different assumptions on the
modeled fluctuations, resulting in various degrees of accuracy for different flow cases.
This module includes Reynolds-averaged Navier-Stokes (RANS) models which is the
model type most commonly used in industrial flow applications.
REYNOLDS-AVERAGED NAVIER-STOKES (RANS) EQUATIONS
The following assumes that the fluid is incompressible and Newtonian in which case the
Navier-Stokes equations take the form:
u
T
+ ( u )u = [ pI + ( u + ( u ) ) ] + F
t
u = 0
(3-60)
Once the flow has become turbulent, all quantities fluctuate in time and space. It is seldom
worth the extreme computational cost to obtain detailed information about the
fluctuations. An averaged representation often provides sufficient information about the
flow.
The Reynolds-averaged representation of turbulent flows divides the flow quantities into
an averaged value and a fluctuating part,
= +
where can represent any scalar quantity of the flow. In general, the mean value can vary
in space and time. This is exemplified in Figure 3-8, which shows time averaging of one
component of the velocity vector for nonstationary turbulence. The unfiltered flow has a
time scale t1. After a time filter with width t2 >> t1 has been applied, there is a
fluctuating part, ui, and an average part, Ui. Because the flow field also varies on a time
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
147
scale longer than t2, Ui is still time-dependent but is much smoother than the unfiltered
velocity ui.
Figure 3-8: The unfiltered velocity component ui, with a time scale t1, and the averaged
velocity component, Ui, with time scale t2.
Decomposition of the flow field into an averaged part and a fluctuating part, followed by
insertion into the Navier-Stokes equation, and averaging, gives the Reynolds-averaged
Navier-Stokes (RANS) equations:
U
T
+ U U + ( u' u' ) = P + ( U + ( U ) ) + F
t
U = 0
(3-61)
where U is the averaged velocity field and is the outer vector product. A comparison
with Equation 3-60 indicates that the only difference is the appearance of the last term on
the left-hand side of Equation 3-61. This term represents the interaction between the
fluctuating parts of the velocity field and is called the Reynolds stress tensor. This means
that to obtain the mean flow characteristics, information about the small-scale structure of
the flow is needed. In this case, that information is the correlation between fluctuations in
all three directions.
EDDY VISCOSITY
The most common way to model turbulence is to assume that the turbulence is of a purely
diffusive nature. The deviating part of the Reynolds stress is then expressed as
T
( u' u' ) --- trace ( u' u' )I = T ( U + ( U ) )
3
148 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
where T is the eddy viscosity, also known as the turbulent viscosity. The spherical part can
be written
--- trace ( u' u' )I = 2
--- k
3
3
where k is the turbulent kinetic energy. In simulations of incompressible flows, this term
is included in the pressure, but when the absolute pressure level is of importance (in
compressible flows, for example) this term must be explicitly included.
TU R B U L E N T C O M P RE S S I BL E F L OW
If the Reynolds average is applied to the compressible form of the Navier-Stokes equations,
terms of the form
u
appear and need to be modeled. To avoid this, a density-based average, known as the Favre
average, is introduced:
t+T
1
1
u i = --- lim --- T T
(x,)u i (x,) d
(3-62)
It follows from Equation 3-62 that
u i = u i
(3-63)
and a variable, ui, is decomposed into a mass-averaged component, u i , and a fluctuating
component, ui, according to
u i = u i + u i
(3-64)
Using Equation 3-63 and Equation 3-64 along with some modeling assumptions for
compressible flows (Ref. 7), Equation 3-16 and Equation 3-17 can be written on the form
------ + ------- ( u i ) = 0
t x i
u i
u i
u i u j 2 u k
p
-------- + u j -------- = ------- + ------- -------- + -------- --- --------- ij u j u i + F i
t
x j
x i x j x j x i 3 x k
(3-65)
The Favre-averaged Reynolds stress tensor is modeled using the same argument as for
incompressible flows:
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
149
u i u j 2 u k
u j u i = T -------- + -------- --- T --------- + k ij
x j x i 3 x k
where k is the turbulent kinetic energy. Comparing Equation 3-65 to its incompressible
counterpart (Equation 3-61), it can be seen that except for the term
( 2 3 )k ij
the compressible and incompressible formulations are exactly the same, except that the
free variables are u i instead of
Ui = ui
More information about modeling turbulent compressible flows can be found in Ref. 1
and Ref. 7.
The turbulent transport equations are used in their fully compressible formulations (Ref.
8).
The Algebraic yPlus Turbulence Model
The Albebraic yPlus turbulence model is an algebraic turbulence model based on the
distance to the nearest wall. The model is based on Prandtls mixing-length theory and is
suitable for internal flows. It is less mesh sensitive than transport-equation models like
Spalart-Allmaras or the k- model. In what follows, let y be the coordinate normal to the
wall, and U the velocity parallel to the wall. Using a mixing length formulation, the balance
for the shear stress in the wall layer may be approximated as
+ l 2 U
U- = u 2
mix -------- ------
y y
which, expressed on dimensionless form, reduces to
+ u +
+2
1 + l mix u
--------- ---------+ = 1
+
y y
(3-66)
where y+ = yu/, u+ = U/u and u = w is the friction velocity. Close to the wall,
+
+
the mixing length must be zero such that u+ = y+, and far away from the wall, l mix y
+
+
such that u = (1/)log(y ) + B. To obtain the correct behavior, the mixing length is
chosen to be
150 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
+
l mix
y y*
= 0
( y+ y * ) y+ > y *
(3-67)
where y* is to be determined. Inserting Equation 3-67 into Equation 3-66
+
1
y y*
u
--------- =
+
2
+
1 + 4 2 ( y y * ) 1 +
---------------------------------------------------------y
y > y*
2 ( y+ y* )2
2
(3-68)
Integrating Equation 3-68
+
y
+
2
+
1 1 + 4 2 ( y y * )
u = y * + ---------------------------------------------------------+
2 2 ( y y * )
+
2
+
1
+ --- log ( 1 + 4 2 ( y y * ) + 2 ( y y * ) )
y y*
(3-69)
+
y > y*
For large values of y+, Equation 3-69 reduces to
+
1
+
1
u = --- log ( y ) + --- ( log ( 4 ) 1 ) + y *
Comparing the above expression with the logarithmic law of the wall
+
1
+
u = --- log ( y ) + B
the value of the constant y* is obtained as
1
y * = B --- ( log ( 4 ) 1 )
The dimensionless effective viscosity can be evaluated from
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
151
+
+
2
=
+
1 + 1 + 4 2 ( y y * )
1 + 2 ( y + y * ) 2 u
--------- = ----------------------------------------------------------2
+
y y*
+
y > y*
(3-70)
This requires the local value of y+, which is obtained from the Reynolds number
+ +
Uy U yu
Re = -------- = ----- --------- = u y =
u
+
y +2
y y*
(3-71)
2 ( y+ y* ) 2 1
+
1
1
+
4
+
2
+
y y * + ---------------------------------------------------------- + --- log ( 1 + 4 2 ( y y * ) + 2 ( y y * ) )
+
2 2 ( y y * )
+
y > y*
The nonlinear algebraic Equation 3-71 has to be solved at each node point to evaluate the
effective viscosity from Equation 3-70. The local Reynolds number Re = Uy/ is formed
with the local absolute value of the velocity and the distance to the nearest wall. This
implicitly assumes that the main flow direction is parallel to the wall.
WALL D IS TANCE
The wall distance, y is provided by a mathematical Wall Distance interface that is included
when using the Algebraic yPlus model. The solution to the wall distance equation is
controlled using the parameter lref. The distance to objects larger than lref is represented
accurately, while objects smaller than lref are effectively diminished by appearing to be
farther away than they actually are. This is a desirable feature in turbulence modeling since
small objects would get too large an impact on the solution if the wall distance were
measured exactly.
The most convenient way to handle the wall distance variable is to solve for it in a separate
study step. A Wall Distance Initialization study type is provided for this purpose and should
be added before the actual Stationary or Transient study step.
WAL L B O U NDA R Y CONDITION
The Algebraic yPlus turbulence model is consistent with a no slip boundary condition, that
is u=0. Since the turbulence model is algebraic, no additional boundary condition is
needed.
152 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
The Algebraic yPlus model can be considered to be well resolved at a wall if l c* is of order
unity. l c* is the distance, measured in viscous units, from the wall to the center of the wall
adjacent cell and can be evaluated as the boundary variable:
Dimensionless distance to cell center. See also Wall for boundary condition details.
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual:
The Wall Distance Interface
Stationary with Initialization, Transient with Initialization, and Wall
Distance Initialization
The L-VEL Turbulence Model
The L-VEL (Length-VELocity) turbulence model is an algebraic turbulence model often
used in electronic cooling applications. It is less mesh sensitive than transport-equation
models like Spalart-Allmaras or the k- model. It was developed by Agonafer et al. (Ref.
20) for internal flows and uses an extension of the logarithmic law of the wall which applies
all the way down to the wall
+ 2
+ 3
+ 4
+
+
1 u +
+ ( u )
( u )
( u )
y = u + ---- e
1 u ----------------- ----------------- -----------------
E
2
6
24
+
(3-72)
where y = yu , u = U u , U is the local flow speed, y is the distance to the nearest
wall, is the kinematic viscosity and u is the friction velocity. is the von Krman
constant and E=8.6 is another constant needed to fit the logarithmic law of the wall. The
shear stress in the wall layer is given by
T u 2 1
1
U
( + T ) -------- = u 2 1 + ------ = ------ ------------------ = ---------------------------------------------------
y
U y ( U u ) ( yu )
+
1 = ---------------------+
+
u y
Differentiating Equation 3-72 with respect to y+, the dimensionless effective viscosity is
obtained as
+ 2
+ 3
+
+ ( u )
u +
( u )
= 1 + ---- e
1 u ----------------- -----------------
2
6
E
(3-73)
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
153
If the local value of u+ is known, the effective viscosity can be evaluated from
Equation 3-73. The value of u+ is obtained by forming a local Reynolds number
+ +
Uy U yu
Re = -------- = ----- --------- = u y =
u
+ 2
+ 3
+ 4
1 u +
+ ( u )
( u )
( u )
= u u + ---- e
1 u ----------------- ----------------- -----------------
2
6
24
E
+ +
(3-74)
where the last expression follows from Equation 3-72. Hence, the nonlinear algebraic
Equation 3-74 has to be solved at each node point to evaluate the effective viscosity. The
local Reynolds number Re = Uy/ is formed with the local absolute value of the velocity
and the distance to the nearest wall. This implicitly assumes that the main flow direction
is parallel to the wall.
WALL D IS TANCE
The wall distance, y is provided by a mathematical Wall Distance interface that is included
when using the L-VEL model. The solution to the wall distance equation is controlled
using the parameter lref. The distance to objects larger than lref is represented accurately,
while objects smaller than lref are effectively diminished by appearing to be farther away
than they actually are. This is a desirable feature in turbulence modeling since small objects
would get too large an impact on the solution if the wall distance were measured exactly.
The most convenient way to handle the wall distance variable is to solve for it in a separate
study step. A Wall Distance Initialization study type is provided for this purpose and should
be added before the actual Stationary or Transient study step.
WAL L B O U NDA R Y CONDITION
The L-VEL turbulence model is consistent with a no slip boundary condition, that is u=0.
Since the turbulence model is algebraic, no additional boundary condition is needed.
The L-VEL model can be considered to be well resolved at a wall if l c* is of order unity.
l c* is the distance, measured in viscous units, from the wall to the center of the wall
adjacent cell and can be evaluated as the boundary variable:
154 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Dimensionless distance to cell center. See also Wall for boundary condition details.
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual:
The Wall Distance Interface
Stationary with Initialization, Transient with Initialization, and Wall
Distance Initialization
The k- Turbulence Model
The k- model is one of the most used turbulence models for industrial applications. This
module includes the standard k- model (Ref. 1). The model introduces two additional
transport equations and two dependent variables: the turbulent kinetic energy, k, and the
turbulent dissipation rate, . The turbulent viscosity is modeled as
k2
T = C -----
(3-75)
T
k
------ + u k = + ------ k + P k
k
t
(3-76)
where C is a model constant.
The transport equation for k reads:
where the production term is
2
2
P k = T u: ( u + ( u ) T ) --- ( u ) 2 --- k u
3
3
(3-77)
The transport equation for reads:
T
2
----- + u = + ------ + C 1 --- P C 2 ----
k
k k
t
(3-78)
The model constants in Equation 3-75, Equation 3-76, and Equation 3-78 are
determined from experimental data (Ref. 1) and the values are listed in Table 3-3.
TABLE 3-3: MODEL CONSTANTS
CONSTANT
VALUE
0.09
C1
1.44
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
155
TABLE 3-3: MODEL CONSTANTS
CONSTANT
VALUE
C2
1.92
1.0
1.3
MIXING LENGTH LIMIT
Equation 3-76 and Equation 3-78 cannot be implemented directly as written. There is, for
example, nothing that prevents division by zero. The equations are instead implemented
as suggested in Ref. 9. The implementation includes an upper limit on the mixing length,
lim :
l mix
k 3 / 2 lim
l mix = max C -----------, l mix
(3-79)
lim should not be active
The mixing length is used to calculated the turbulent viscosity. l mix
in a converged solution but is merely a tool to obtain convergence.
REALIZABILITY CONSTRAINTS
The eddy-viscosity model of the Reynolds stress tensor can be written
2
u i u j = 2 T S ij + --- k ij
3
where ij is the Kronecker delta and Sij is the strain-rate tensor. The diagonal elements of
the Reynolds stress tensor must be nonnegative, but calculating T from Equation 3-75
does not guarantee this. To assert that
u i u i 0 i
the turbulent viscosity is subjected to a realizability constraint. The constraint for 2D and
2D axisymmetry without swirl is:
k 2
T ----------------------3 S ij S ij
(3-80)
and for 3D and 2D axisymmetry with swirl flow it reads:
k
T --------------------------6 S ij S ij
156 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
(3-81)
Combining equation Equation 3-80 with Equation 3-75 and the definition of the mixing
length gives a limit on the mixing length scale:
k
l mix 2
--- ------------------3 S ij S ij
(3-82)
Equivalently, combining Equation 3-81 with Equation 3-75 and Equation 3-79 gives:
1
k
l mix ------- ------------------6 S ij S ij
(3-83)
This means there are two limitations on lmix: the realizability constraint and the imposed
limit via Equation 3-79.
The effect of not applying a realizability constraint is typically excessive turbulence
production. The effect is most clearly visible at stagnation points. To avoid such artifacts,
the realizability constraint is always applied for the RANS models. More details can be
found in Ref. 4, Ref. 5, and Ref. 6.
MODEL LIMITATIONS
The k- turbulence model relies on several assumptions, the most important of which is
that the Reynolds number is high enough. It is also important that the turbulence is in
equilibrium in boundary layers, which means that production equals dissipation. These
assumptions limit the accuracy of the model because they are not always true. It does not,
for example, respond correctly to flows with adverse pressure gradients and can result in
under-prediction of the spatial extent of recirculation zones (Ref. 1). Furthermore, in
simulations of rotating flows, the model often shows poor agreement with experimental
data (Ref. 2). In most cases, the limited accuracy is a fair trade-off for the amount of
computational resources saved compared to using more complicated turbulence models.
WALL FUNCTIONS
The flow close to a solid wall is for a turbulent flow very different from the free stream.
This means that the assumptions used to derive the k- model are not valid close to walls.
While it is possible to modify the k- model so that it describes the flow in wall regions
(see The Low Reynolds Number k-e Turbulence Model), this is not always desirable
because of the very high resolution requirements that follow. Instead, analytical
expressions are used to describe the flow near the walls. These expressions are known as
wall functions.
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
157
The wall functions in COMSOL Multiphysics are such that the computational domain is
assumed to be located a distance w from the wall (see Figure 3-9).
Mesh cells
Solid wall
Figure 3-9: The computational domain is located a distance w from the wall for wall
functions.
The distance w is automatically computed so that
+ = u
w
w
where u=C1/4k is the friction velocity, is 11.06. This corresponds to the distance from
the wall where the logarithmic layer meets the viscous sublayer (or to some extent would
meet it if there were no buffer layer in between). w is limited from below so that it never
+ can
becomes smaller than half the height of the boundary mesh cell. This means that w
become larger than 11.06 if the mesh is relatively coarse.
Always investigate the solution to check that w is small compared to the dimensions of
+ is 11.06 on most of the walls. If + is much larger than
the geometry. Also check that w
w
11.06 over a significant part of the walls, the accuracy might become compromised. Both
+ , are available as results and
the wall lift-off, w, and the wall lift-off in viscous units, w
analysis variables.
The boundary conditions for the velocity is a no-penetration condition u n = 0 and a
shear stress condition
u
n ( n n )n = u ------- max ( C 1 / 4 k, u )
u
where
= ( u + ( u ) T )
158 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
is the viscous stress tensor and
u
u = ----------------------------1
+ +B
----- ln w
v
where in turn, v, is the von Krman constant (default value 0.41) and B is a constant that
by default is set to 5.2.
The turbulent kinetic energy is subject to a homogeneous Neumann condition n k = 0
and the boundary condition for reads:
C 3 / 4 k 3 / 2
= ----------------------v w
See Ref. 9 and Ref. 10 for further details.
WAL L FUN CTI ON S FO R RO UGH WA LL S
The physics interfaces: Wall, Interior Wall, Rotating Wall, and Rotating Interior Wall have
an option to apply wall roughness by modifying the wall functions. Cebeci (Ref. 18)
suggested a model which adjusts the friction velocity for surface roughness,
u
u = ------------------------------------------1
+
----- ln w + B B
v
(3-84)
where
B =
k s+ 2.25
k s+ 2.25
1---ln ------------------------ + C s k s+ sin [ 0.4258 ( ln k s+ 0.811 ) ]
v
87.75
2.25 k s+ 90
1---ln ( 1 + C s k s+ )
v
k s+ 90
k s+ is the roughness height in viscous units,
C 1 / 4 k
k s+ = ----------------------- k s
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
159
The roughness height, ks, is the peak-to-peak value of the surface variations and the wall
is relocated to their mean level.
Figure 3-10: Definitions of the roughness height and the modified wall location.
Hence, when Equation 3-84 is used the lift-off is modified according to,
+
+ = max { 11.06, k + 2, h 2 }
w
s
where h+ is the height of the boundary mesh cell in viscous units. Cs is a parameter that
depends on the shape and distribution of the roughness elements. When the turbulence
parameters and B have the values 0.41 and 5.2, respectively, and Cs = 0.26, ks
corresponds to the equivalent sand roughness height, kseq, as introduced by Nikuradse
(Ref. 19). A few characteristic values of the equivalent sand roughness height are given in
Table 3-4 below,
TABLE 3-4: EQUIVALENT SAND ROUGHNESS HEIGHTS
kseq
SURFACE TYPE
EQUIVALENT SAND ROUGHNESS HEIGHT
Steel, new
50 m
Galvanized steel
0.13 mm
Riveted steel
0.9-9 mm
Cast iron, new
0.25 mm
Galvanized iron
0.15-0.30 mm
Cast iron, rusted
1.0-1.5 mm
Bituminized steel or iron, new
30-50 m
Glass
0.3 m
Drawn tubing
1.5 m
Wood, new
0.5 mm
Concrete, new
0.3-3 mm
Use other values of the roughness parameter Cs and roughness height ks to specify generic
surface roughnesses.
160 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
I N ITI AL VAL U ES
The default initial values for a stationary simulation are (Ref. 9),
u=0
p=0
10 2
k = ------------------------------ ( 0.1 l lim )
mix
3/2
C k init
= ---------------------lim
0.1 l mix
lim is the mixing length limit. For time-dependent simulations, the initial value for
where l mix
k is instead
2
k = ------------------------------lim
( 0.1 l mix )
SCALING FOR TIME-DEPENDENT SIMULATIONS
The k- equations are derived under the assumption that the flow has a high enough
Reynolds number. If this assumption is not fulfilled, both k and have very small
magnitudes and behave chaotically in the manner that the relative values of k and can
change by large amounts due to small changes in the flow field.
A time-dependent simulation of a turbulent flow can include a period when the flow is not
fully turbulent. A typical example is the startup phase when for example an inlet velocity
or a pressure difference is gradually increased. To sort out numerical fluctuations in k and
during such periods, the default time-dependent solver for the k- model employs
unscaled absolute tolerances for k and . The tolerances are set to
k scale = ( 0.01U scale ) 2
3/ 2 (L
scale = 0.09k sclae
fact l bb, min )
(3-85)
where Uscale and Lfact are input parameters available in the Advanced Settings section of
the physics interface node. Their default values are 1 m/s and 0.035 respectively. lbb,min is
the shortest side of the geometry bounding box. Equation 3-85 is closely related to the
expressions for k and on inlet boundaries (see Equation 3-108).
The practical implication of Equation 3-85 is that variations in k and smaller than kscale
and scale respectively, are regarded as numerical noise.
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
161
The k- Turbulence Model
The k- model solves for the turbulent kinetic energy, k, and for the dissipation per unit
turbulent kinetic energy, . is also commonly know as the specific dissipation rate. The
CFD Module has the Wilcox revised k- model (Ref. 1)
k
------ + u k = P k * k + ( ( + * T ) k )
t
-----
- + u = ---- P k 2 + ( ( + T ) )
t
k
(3-86)
k
T = ---
(3-87)
where
13
1
1
= ------ = 0 f * = 0* f = --- * = --25
2
2
1 + 70
ij jk S ki
13
0 = ---------- f = ----------------------- = -------------------------1 + 80
125
( 0* ) 3
9
0* = ---------- f *
100
1
k 0
= 1 + 680 2
-------------------------k 1 + 400 2 k > 0
k
1
k = ------3- ( k )
(3-88)
where in turn ij is the mean rotation-rate tensor
1 u i u j
ij = --- -------- --------
2 x j x i
and Sij is the mean strain-rate tensor
1 u i u j
S ij = --- -------- + --------
2 x j x i
Pk is given by Equation 3-77. The following auxiliary relations for the dissipation, , and
the turbulent mixing length, l, are also used:
162 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
k
= * k l mix = ------
(3-89)
MIXING LENGTH LIMIT AND REALIZABILITY CONSTRAINTS
The implementation of the k- model relies on the same concepts as the k- model (Ref.
9). This means that the following approximations have been used:
---- --------------------------------k max ( T, eps )
2
l mix
l mix
1- ----------k - l-------mix
- --------------------------------- = l mix -------------=
=
T max ( T, eps )
k
k
k lim
l mix = min -------, l mix
, l r
where lr is the limit given by the realizability constraints (Equation 3-82 and
Equation 3-83).
WALL FUNCTIONS
Wall boundaries are treated with the same type of boundary conditions as for the k-
model (see Wall Functions) with C replaced by 0* and the boundary condition for
given by
k w = ------------+
w
(3-90)
I N ITI AL VAL U ES
The default initial values are the same as for the k- model (see Initial Values) but with the
initial value of given by
k init
init = ---------------------lim
0.1 l mix
SCALING FOR TIME-DEPENDENT SIMULATIONS
The k- model applies absolute scales of the same type as the k- model (see Scaling for
Time-Dependent Simulations) except that the scale for is given by
k scale
scale = --------------------------------L fact l bb, min
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
163
MODEL PROPERTIES
The k- model can in many cases give results that are superior to those obtained with the
k- model (Ref. 1). It behaves, for example, much better for flat plate flows with adverse
or favorable pressure gradients. However, there are two main drawbacks. The first is that
the k- model can display a relatively strong sensitivity to free stream inlet values of . The
other is that the k- model is numerically less robust than the k- model.
The SST Turbulence Model
To combine the superior behavior of the k- model in the near-wall region with the
robustness of the k- model, Menter (Ref. 15) introduced the SST (Shear Stress
Transport) model which interpolates between the two. The version of the SST model in
the CFD Module includes a few well-tested (Ref. 14, Ref. 16) modifications, such as
production limiters for both k and , the use of S instead of in the limiter for T and a
sharper cut-off for the cross-diffusion term.
It is also a low Reynolds number model, that is, it does not apply wall functions. Low
Reynolds number refers to the region close to the wall where viscous effects dominate.
The model equations are formulated in terms k and ,
k
------ + u k = P 0* k + ( ( + k T ) k )
t
(3-91)
2
-----
2
----------------P + ( ( + T ) ) + 2 ( 1 f v1 )
k
+ u =
t
T
where,
P = min ( P k, 10 0* k )
(3-92)
and Pk is given in Equation 3-77. The turbulent viscosity is given by,
a 1 k
T = ---------------------------------------max ( a 1 , Sf v2 )
(3-93)
where S is the characteristic magnitude of the mean velocity gradients,
S =
2S ij S ij
(3-94)
The model constants are defined through interpolation of appropriate inner and outer
values,
164 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
= f v1 1 + ( 1 f v1 ) 2
= , , k,
for
(3-95)
The interpolation functions fv1 and fv2 are defined as,
f v1 = tanh ( 14 )
k 500 4 2 k
- , -------------------- 1 = min max ---------------, ------------*
2 CD l 2
0 l w l w
k w
(3-96)
2 2
CD k = max ----------------- k, 10 -10
and,
f v2 = tanh ( 22 )
2 k 500
-
2 = max ---------------, ------------2
0* l w l w
(3-97)
where lw is the distance to the closest wall.
Realizability Constraints are applied to the SST model.
WALL DISTANCE
The wall distance variable, lw, is provided by a mathematical Wall Distance interface that
is included when using the SST model. The solution to the wall distance equation is
controlled using the parameter lref. The distance to objects larger than lref is represented
accurately, while objects smaller than lref are effectively diminished by appearing to be
farther away than they actually are. This is a desirable feature in turbulence modeling since
small objects would get too large an impact on the solution if the wall distance were
measured exactly.
The most convenient way to handle the wall distance variable is to solve for it in a separate
study step. A Wall Distance Initialization study type is provided for this purpose and should
be added before the actual Stationary or Transient study step.
The default model constants are given by,
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
165
1 = 0.075,
1 = 5 9, k1 = 0.85, 1 = 0.5
2 = 0.0828, 2 = 0.44, k2 = 1.0, 2 = 0.856
0* = 0.09,
(3-98)
a 1 = 0.31
WAL L B O U NDA R Y C ON D I T I ON S
In a low Reynolds number model the equations are integrated all the way through the
boundary layer to the wall, which allows for a no slip condition to be applied to the
velocity, that is u=0.
Since all velocities must disappear on the wall, so must k. Hence, k=0 on the wall.
The corresponding boundary condition for is
6
lim = --------------2
1 l w
lw 0
(3-99)
To avoid the singularity at the wall, is not solved for in the cells adjacent to a solid wall.
Instead, its value is prescribed by Equation 3-99 (using the variable w, which only exists
in those cells). Accurate solutions in the near-wall region require that,
+ = u l 1
lw
w
(3-100)
where u is the friction velocity which is calculated from the wall shear-stress w,
u =
(3-101)
The boundary variable Dimensionless distance to cell center, l c+ , is available to ensure that
the mesh is fine enough. According to Equation 3-100, l c+ should be about 0.5. Observe
that very small values of l c+ can reduce the convergence rate.
I N L E T VA L U E S F O R T H E TU R B U L E N C E L E N G T H S C A L E A N D I N T E N S I T Y
The guidelines given in Inlet Values for the Turbulence Length Scale and Turbulent
Intensity for selecting the turbulence length scale, LT, and the turbulence intensity, IT,
apply also to the SST model.
FAR-FIELD BOUNDAR Y CONDITIONS
The SST model was originally developed for exterior aerodynamic simulations. The
recommended far-field boundary conditions (Ref. 15) can be expressed as,
166 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
2
10 -5 U
0.1U 2
-------------------- < k < ----------------Re L
Re L
(3-102)
U
U
-------- < < 10 -------L
L
where L is the approximate length of the computational domain.
I N ITI AL VAL U ES
The SST model has the same default initial guess as the standard k- model (see Initial
lim replaced by l .
Values) but with l mix
ref
The default initial value for the wall distance equation (which solves for the reciprocal wall
distance) is 2/lref.
SCALING FOR TIME-DEPENDENT SIMULATIONS
The SST model applies absolute scales of the same type as the k- model (see Scaling for
Time-Dependent Simulations).
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual:
The Wall Distance Interface
Stationary with Initialization, Transient with Initialization, and Wall
Distance Initialization
The Low Reynolds Number k- Turbulence Model
When the accuracy provided by wall functions in the k- model is not enough, a so called
low Reynolds number model can be used. Low Reynolds number refers to the region
close to the wall where viscous effects dominate.
Most low Reynolds number k- models adapt the turbulence transport equations by
introducing damping functions. This module includes the AKN model (after the inventors
Abe, Kondoh, and Nagano; Ref. 11). The AKN k- model for compressible flows reads
(Ref. 8 and Ref. 11):
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
167
T
k
------ + u k = + ------ k + P k
k
t
T
----- + u = + ------ + C 1 --- P f C 2 ----
t
k
k k
(3-103)
where
2
2
P k = T u: ( u + ( u ) T ) --- ( u ) 2 --- k u
3
3
k2
T = f C -----
5 ( R t 200 ) 2
*
2
14
-e
) 1 + ----------f = ( 1 e
R t3 / 4
f = ( 1 e l
3.1 ) 2
(3-104)
( 1 0.3e ( Rt 6.5 ) )
l * = ( u l w ) R t = k 2 ( ) u = ( ) 1 / 4
and
C 1 = 1.5 C 2 = 1.9 C = 0.09 k = 1.4 = 1.4
(3-105)
lw is the distance to the closest wall.
Realizability Constraints are applied to the low Reynolds number k- model.
WALL D IS TANCE
The wall distance variable, lw, is provided by a mathematical Wall Distance interface that
is included when using the low Reynolds number k- model. The solution to the wall
distance equation is controlled using the parameter lref. The distance to objects larger than
lref is represented accurately, while objects smaller than lref are effectively diminished by
appearing to be farther away than they actually are. This is a desirable feature in turbulence
modeling since small objects would get too large an impact on the solution if the wall
distance were measured exactly.
The most convenient way to handle the wall distance variable is to solve for it in a separate
study step. A Wall Distance Initialization study type is provided for this purpose and should
be added before the actual Stationary or Transient study step.
168 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
WALL BOUNDAR Y CONDITIONS
The damping terms in the equations for k and allow for a no slip condition to be applied
to the velocity, that is u=0.
Since all velocities must disappear on the wall, so must k. Hence, k=0 on the wall.
The correct wall boundary condition for is
2 ( ) ( k n ) 2
where n is the wall normal direction. This condition is however numerically very unstable.
Therefore, is not solved for in the cells adjacent to a solid wall and instead the analytical
relation
k
= 2 --- ----2
lw
(3-106)
is prescribed in those cells (using the variable w, which only exists in those cells).
Equation 3-106 can be derived as the first term in a series expansion of
2 ( ) ( k n ) 2
For the expansion to be valid, it is required that
l c* < 0.5
l c* is the distance, measured in viscous units, from the wall to the center of the wall
adjacent cell. The boundary variable Dimensionless distance to cell center is available to
ensure that the mesh is fine enough. Observe that it is unlikely that a solution is obtained
at all if
l c* 0.5
I N L E T VA L U E S F O R T H E TU R B U L E N C E L E N G T H S C A L E A N D I N T E N S I T Y
The guidelines given in Inlet Values for the Turbulence Length Scale and Turbulent
Intensity for selecting the turbulence length scale, LT, and the turbulence intensity, IT,
apply also to the low-Reynolds number k- model.
I N ITI AL VAL U ES
The low-Reynolds number k- model has the same default initial guess as the standard k-
lim replaced by l .
model (see Initial Values) but with l mix
ref
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
169
The default initial value for the wall distance equation (which solves for the reciprocal wall
distance) is 2/lref.
In some cases, especially for stationary solutions, a fast way to convergence is to first solve
the model using the ordinary k- model and then to use that solution as an initial guess
for the low-Reynolds number k- model. The procedure is then as follows:
1 Solve the model using the k- model.
2 Switch to the low-Reynolds number k- model.
3 Add a new Stationary with Initialization study.
4 In the Wall Distance Initialization study step, set Values of variables not solved for to
Solution from the first study. This is to propagate the solution from the first study down
to the second step in the new study.
5 Solve the new study.
SCALING FOR TIME-DEPENDENT SIMULATIONS
The low-Reynolds number k- model applies absolute scales of the same type as the k-
model (see Scaling for Time-Dependent Simulations).
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual:
The Wall Distance Interface
Stationary with Initialization, Transient with Initialization, and Wall
Distance Initialization
The Spalart-Allmaras Turbulence Model
The Spalart-Allmaras turbulence model is a one-equation turbulence model designed
mainly for aerodynamic applications. It is a low Reynolds number model, that is, it does
not utilize wall functions. Low Reynolds number refers to the region close to the wall
where viscous effects dominate.
The model gives satisfactory results for many engineering applications, in particular for
airfoil and turbine blade applications for which it is calibrated. It is however not
appropriate for applications involving jet-like free shear regions. It also has some
nonphysical properties. For example, it predicts zero decay rate for the eddy viscosity in a
uniform free-stream (Ref. 1).
170 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Compared to the low Reynolds number k- model, the Spalart-Allmaras model is generally
considered more robust and is often used as a way to obtain an initial solution for more
advanced models. It can give reasonable results on relatively coarse meshes for which the
low Reynolds number k- model does not converge or even diverges.
This module includes the standard version of the Spalart-Allmaras model without the trip
term (see Ref. 1 and Ref. 12). The model solves for the undamped turbulent kinematic
viscosity, :
c b2
2 1
---- c f ----
- ( ( + ) ) + ------+ u = c b1 S
w1 w l - + -
t
w
(3-107)
The model includes the following auxiliary variables
c b1 1 + c b2
- + -----------------,
c w1 = ------
v2
f v2 = 1 --------------------,
1 + f v1
r = min -----------------, 10 ,
S
2l 2
v w
= ---,
6
1 + c w3
-
f w = g -------------------6
g 6 + c w3
3 f v1 = ------------------3
3 + c v1
1/6
g = r + c w2 ( r 6 r )
= max + C min ( 0, S ) + ----------- f , 0.3
S
Rot
2 l 2 v2
S=
v w
2S ij S ij
2 ij ij
where
S ij = 0.5 ( u + u T )
ij = 0.5 ( u u T )
are the mean strain rate and mean rotation rate tensors, lw, is the distance to the closest
wall and =/ is the kinematic viscosity. The turbulent viscosity is calculated by
T = f v1
The default values for the modeling parameters are:
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
171
c b1 = 0.1355 c b2 = 0.622 c v2 = 7.1
c w2 = 0.3
c w3 = 2
= 23
v = 0.41 C Rot = 2.0
includes the rotation correction suggested
The implementation of the production term S
are furthermore regularized according to
in Ref. 12. See also Ref. 13. The terms r and S
Ref. 12.
Pseudo Time Stepping for Turbulent Flow Models is by default applied to the stationary
form of the Spalart-Allmaras model.
WAL L B O U NDA R Y C ON D I T I ON S
The Spalart-Allmaras model is consistent with a no slip boundary condition, that is u=0.
Since, there can be no fluctuations on the wall, the boundary condition for is = 0 .
The Spalart-Allmaras model can be considered to be well resolved at a wall if l c* is of order
unity. l c* is the distance, measured in viscous units, from the wall to the center of the wall
adjacent cell and can be evaluated as the boundary variable:
Dimensionless distance to cell center. See also Wall for boundary condition details.
IN ITIA L VA LUES
The default initial values for the Spalart-Allmaras version of the physics interface are:
u=0
p=0
= --
SCALING FOR TIME-DEPENDENT SIMULATIONS
The Spalart-Allmaras model applies absolute scales of the same type as the k- model (see
Scaling for Time-Dependent Simulations) except that the scale for is given directly by
the scale parameter available in the advanced section of the physics interface node. The
default value for scale is 5106 m2/s.
Inlet Values for the Turbulence Length Scale and Turbulent Intensity
If inlet data for the turbulence variables are not available, crude approximations for k,
and can be obtained from the following formulas:
172 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
2
3
k = --- ( U I T )
2
3 4 k3 / 2
= C
----------LT
(3-108)
k
= -------------------------( 0* ) 1 / 4 L T
where IT is the turbulent intensity and LT is the turbulence length scale.
A value of 103 (0.1%) is a low turbulent intensity IT. Good wind tunnels can produce
values as low as 5104 (0.05%). Fully turbulent flows usually have intensities between 0.05
(5%) and 0.1 (10%).
The turbulence length scale LT is a measure of the size of the eddies that are not resolved.
For free-stream flows these are typically very small (on the order of centimeters). The
length scale cannot be zero, however, because that would imply infinite dissipation. Use
Table 3-5 as a guideline when specifying LT (Ref. 3) where lw is the wall distance, and
+
lw = lw l *
TABLE 3-5: TURBULENCE LENGTH SCALES FOR TWO-DIMENSIONAL FLOWS
FLOW CASE
LT
Mixing layer
0.07L
Layer width
Plane jet
0.09L
Jet half width
Wake
0.08L
Wake width
Axisymmetric jet
0.075L
Boundary layer (p / x = 0)
Viscous sublayer and log-layer
l w ( 1
Outer layer
0.09L
Pipes and channels
0.07L
(fully developed flows)
Jet half width
+
exp ( l w
26 ) )
Boundary layer
thickness
Pipe diameter or
hydraulic diameter
or channel width
Theory for the Pressure, No Viscous Stress Boundary Condition
For this module, the turbulent intensity IT, turbulence length scale LT, and reference
velocity scale Uref values are related to the turbulence variables via
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
173
3
2
k = --- ( I T U ref ) ,
2
34
3
2 ---
C 3 ( I T U ref ) 2
= ------------ ---------------------------- ,
LT
2
I T U ref
3
--- -------------------------2 ( 0* ) 1 / 4 L T
For recommendations of physically sound values see Inlet Values for the
Turbulence Length Scale and Turbulent Intensity.
Also see Inlet and Outlet for the node settings.
Solvers for Turbulent Flow
The nonlinear system that the Navier-Stokes (RANS) and turbulence transport equations
constitute can become ill-conditioned if solved using a fully coupled solver. Turbulent
flows are therefore solved using a segregated approach (Ref. 17): Navier-Stokes in one
group and the turbulence transport equations in another.
For each iteration in the Navier-Stokes group, two or three iterations are performed for
the turbulence transport equations. This is necessary to make sure that the very nonlinear
source terms in the turbulence transport equations are in balance before performing
another iteration for the Navier-Stokes group.
The default iterative solver for the turbulence transport equations is GMRES accelerated
by Geometric Multigrid. The default smoother is SOR Line.
Pseudo Time Stepping for Turbulent Flow Models
Multigrid, Stationary Solver, Iterative, and SOR Line in the COMSOL
Multiphysics Reference Manual
Pseudo Time Stepping for Turbulent Flow Models
The default stationary solver applies pseudo time stepping for both 2D and 3D models.
This improves the robustness of the nonlinear iterations as well as the condition number
for the linear equation system. The latter is especially important for large 3D models where
iterative solvers must be applied. The turbulence equations use the same t as the
momentum equations.
The default manual expression for CFLloc is, for 2D models:
174 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
1.3 min ( niterCMP-1, 9 ) +
if ( niterCMP > 25, 9 1.3 min ( niterCMP 25, 9 ), 0 ) +
if ( niterCMP > 50, 90 1.3 min ( niterCMP 50, 9 ), 0 )
and for 3D models:
1.3 min ( niterCMP-1, 9 ) +
if ( niterCMP > 30, 9 1.3 min ( niterCMP 30, 9 ), 0 ) +
if ( niterCMP > 60, 90 1.3 min ( niterCMP 60, 9 ), 0 )
References for the Single-Phase Flow, Turbulent Flow Interfaces
1. D.C. Wilcox, Turbulence Modeling for CFD, 2nd ed., DCW Industries, 1998.
2. D.M. Driver and H.L. Seegmiller, Features of a Reattaching Turbulent Shear Layer in
Diverging Channel Flow, AIAA Journal, vol. 23, pp. 163171, 1985.
3. H.K. Versteeg and W. Malalasekera, An Introduction to Computational Fluid
Dynamics, Prentice Hall, 1995.
4. A. Durbin, On the k- Stagnation Point Anomality, Int. J. Heat and Fluid Flow, vol.
17, pp. 8990, 1986.
5. A, Svenningsson, Turbulence Transport Modeling in Gas Turbine Related
Applications, doctoral dissertation, Department of Applied Mechanics, Chalmers
University of Technology, 2006.
6. C.H. Park and S.O. Park, On the Limiters of Two-equation Turbulence Models, Int.
J. Computational Fluid Dynamics, vol. 19, no. 1, pp. 7986, 2005.
7. J. Larsson, Numerical Simulation of Turbulent Flows for Turbine Blade Heat
Transfer, doctoral dissertation, Chalmers University of Technology, Sweden, 1998.
8. L. Ignat, D. Pelletier, and F. Ilinca, A Universal Formulation of Two-equation Models
for Adaptive Computation of Turbulent Flows, Computer Methods in Applied
Mechanics and Engineering, vol. 189, pp. 11191139, 2000.
9. D. Kuzmin, O. Mierka, and S. Turek, On the Implementation of the k- Turbulence
Model in Incompressible Flow Solvers Based on a Finite Element Discretization, Int.J.
Computing Science and Mathematics, vol. 1, no. 24, pp. 193206, 2007.
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
175
10. H. Grotjans and F.R. Menter, Wall Functions for General Application CFD Codes,
ECCOMAS 98, Proceedings of the Fourth European Computational Fluid Dynamics
Conference, John Wiley & Sons, pp. 11121117, 1998.
11. K. Abe, T. Kondoh, and Y. Nagano, A New Turbulence Model for Predicting Fluid
Flow and Heat Transfer in Separating and Reattaching FlowsI. Flow Field
Calculations, Int. J. Heat and Mass Transfer, vol. 37, no. 1, pp. 139151, 1994.
12. The Spalart-Allmaras Turbulence Model,
http://turbmodels.larc.nasa.gov/spalart.html.
13. J. Dacles-Mariani, G.G. Zilliac and J.S. Chow, Numerical/Experimental Study of a
Wingtip Vortex in the Near Field, AIAA Journal, vol. 33, no. 9, 1995.
14. The Menter Shear Stress Transport Turbulence Model,
http://turbmodels.larc.nasa.gov/sst.html.
15. F.R. Menter, Two-Equation Eddy-Viscosity Turbulence Models for Engineering
Applications, AIAA Journal, vol. 32, no. 8, 1994.
16. F.R. Menter, M. Kuntz, and R. Langtry, Ten Years of Industrial Experience with the
SST Turbulence Model, Turbulence Heat and Mass Transfer, vol. 4, 2003.
17. M. Vzquez, M. Ravachol, F. Chalot, and M. Mallet, The Robustness Issue on
Multigrid Schemes Applied to the Navier-Stokes Equations for Laminar and Turbulent,
Incompressible and Compressible Flows, Int. J.for Numerical Methods in Fluids, vol.
45, pp. 555579, 2004.
18. T. Cebeci, Analysis of Turbulent Flows, 2nd ed., Elsevier, Amsterdam, 2004.
19. J. Nikuradse, Strmungsgesetze in rauhen Rohren, Forschg. Arb. Ing.-Wes., no.
361, 1933.
20. D. Agonafer, L. Gan-Li and D.B. Spalding, LVEL turbulence model for conjugate
heat transfer at low Reynolds numbers, EEP 6, ASME International Mechanical
Congress and Exposition, Atlanta, 1996.
21. L. Prandtl, ber die ausgebildete Turbulenz, ZAMM 5, 1925.
176 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Theory for the Rotating Machinery
Interfaces
Both the Rotating Machinery, Laminar Flow and Rotating Machinery, Turbulent Flow
interfaces model flow in geometries with rotating parts. For example, stirred tanks, mixers,
and pumps.
The Navier-Stokes equations formulated in a rotating coordinate system read (Ref. 1 and
Ref. 2)
------ + ( v ) = 0
t
v
------ + ( v )v + 2 v =
t
[ pI + ] + F ------- r + ( r )
t
(3-109)
(3-110)
where v is the velocity vector in the rotating coordinate system, r is the position vector,
and is the angular velocity vector. The relation between v and the velocity vector in the
stationary coordinate system is
r
u = v + -----t
The Rotating Machinery, Fluid Flow interfaces solve Equation 3-109 and
Equation 3-110, but reformulated in terms of a non-rotating coordinate system; that is,
they solve for u. This is achieved by invoking the Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian
Formulation (ALE) machinery. In rotating domains, x = x(, t) as prescribed in the
Rotating Domain features. The Navier-Stokes equations on rotating domains then read
x
- ---------- - + ( u ) = 0
T T
(3-111)
u x
------- ------- u + ( u )u = [ pI + ] + F
T T
(3-112)
THEORY FOR THE ROTATING MACHINERY INTERFACES
177
The derivative operator T is the mesh time derivative of the density and appears in
the equation view as d(rmspf.rho,TIME). Analogously, u T is the mesh time
derivative of the velocity. The variable TIME replaces t as the variable for time.
The user input for a rotating domain prescribes the angular frequency, w. To calculate ,
the physics interfaces set up an ODE variable for the angular displacement . The equation
for is
d------= w
dt
(3-113)
, is defined as w times the normalized axis of rotation. In 2D, the axis of rotation is the
z direction while it in 3D is specified in the Rotating Domain features. If the model
contains several rotating domains, each domain has its own angular displacement ODE
variable.
In non-rotating domains, the ordinary Navier-Stokes equations are solved. The rotating
and fixed parts need to be coupled together by an identity pair, where a continuity
boundary condition is applied.
Boundary conditions in the rotating parts must be specified correctly. For example, walls
that rotate must be prescribed as rotating walls. Walls in rotating domains can also be
prescribed as non-rotating, but in that case, n , where n is the wall normal, must be
tangential to the wall.
Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian Formulation (ALE) in the COMSOL
Multiphysics Reference Manual
Frozen Rotor
Equation 3-111 through Equation 3-113 must be solved using a Time Dependent study.
This can be computationally expensive. The Rotating Machinery, Fluid Flow interfaces
therefore support the so-called frozen rotor approach. The frozen rotor approach assumes
that the flow in the rotating domain, expressed in the rotating coordinate system, is fully
developed. Equation 3-109 then reduces to
( v ) = 0
and Equation 3-110 to
178 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
(3-114)
( v )v + 2 v =
[ pI + ] + F ( r )
(3-115)
Frozen rotor is both a study type and an equation form. When solving a rotating
machinery model using a Frozen Rotor study step, the Rotating Machinery, Fluid Flow
interfaces effectively solve Equation 3-115 and Equation 3-115 in a rotating domain,
but rotating domains do not rotate at all. Boundary conditions remain transformed as
if the domains were rotating, but the domains remain fixed, or frozen, in position. As in
the time-dependent case, the Rotating Machinery, Fluid Flow interfaces solve for the
velocity vector in the stationary coordinate system, u, rather than for v.
To make Equation 3-111 and Equation 3-112 equivalent to Equation 3-114 and
Equation 3-115, the Frozen Rotor study step defines a parameter TIME, which by default
is set to zero (TIME appears in the Parameters node under Global Definitions).
Equation 3-113 is replaced by
= wTIME
Since TIME is a parameter and x is a function of TIME, x T evaluates to its correct value.
Finally, T = 0 and the mesh time derivative of the velocity is replaced by
u
------- = u
T
In non-rotating domains, the ordinary, stationary Navier-Stokes equations are solved. The
Frozen Rotor study step invokes a stationary solver to solve the resulting equation system.
The frozen rotor approach can in special cases give the same solution as solving
Equation 3-111 through Equation 3-113 to steady state. This is the case if, for example,
the whole geometry is rotating, or if the model is invariant with respect to the position of
the rotating domain relative to the non-rotating domain. The latter is the case for a fan
placed in the middle of a straight, cylindrical duct.
In most cases, however, there is no steady state solution to the rotating machinery
problem. Only a pseudo-steady state where the solution varies periodically around some
average solution. In these cases, the frozen rotor approach gives an approximate solution
to the pseudo-steady state. The approximation depends on the position in which the rotor
is frozen, and the method cannot capture transient effects (see Ref. 3 and Ref. 4). An
estimate of the effect of the rotor position can be obtained by making a parametric sweep
over TIME.
THEORY FOR THE ROTATING MACHINERY INTERFACES
179
The frozen rotor approach is very useful for attaining initial values for time-dependent
simulations. Starting from a frozen rotor solution, the pseudo-steady state can be reached
within a few revolutions, while staring from u=0 can require tens of revolutions. See, for
example, Ref. 5.
Only interfaces that explicitly support frozen rotors are included in a Frozen Rotor study
step.
Studies and Solvers in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual
Setting Up a Rotating Machinery Model
The Rotating Machinery, Fluid Flow interfaces primarily handle two types of geometries
with rotating parts.
The first type is where the whole geometry rotates. Typical examples are individual parts
in turbo machinery and lab-on-a-chip devices. For such cases, apply a Rotating Domain
feature to all domains in the geometry.
The other type is geometries where it is possible to divide the modeled device into
rotationally invariant geometries. The operation can be, for example, to rotate an impeller
in a baffled tank, as in Figure 3-11 where the impeller rotates from position 1 to 2.
The first step to set up these type of models is to divide the geometry into two parts, as
shown in Step 1a. Draw the geometry using separate domains for fixed and rotating parts.
If you intend to do a time-dependent simulation, activate the assembly (using an assembly
instead of a union, see Geometry Modeling and CAD Tools in the COMSOL Multiphysics
Reference Manual) and create identity pairs, which makes it possible to treat the domains
as separate parts in an assembly.
The second step is to specify the parts to model using Rotating Domain features and the
ones to model using a fixed frame (Step 1b).
Once this is done, proceed to the usual steps of setting the fluid properties, boundary
conditions. Apply a Flow Continuity to assembly pairs (Step 2a). Then mesh and solve the
problem.
180 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
1a
1b
2a
Figure 3-11: The modeling procedure in the Rotating Machinery, Fluid Flow interface.
References
1. H.P. Greenspan, The Theory of Rotating Fluids, Breukelen Press, 1990.
2. G.K. Batchelor, An Introduction to Fluid Dynamics, Cambridge University Press,
2000.
3. CFD Online, Best practice guidelines for turbomachinery CFD,
http://www.cfd-online.com/Wiki/Best_practice_guidelines_for_turbomachinery_CFD.
4. A. Brucato, M. Ciofalo, F. Grisafi, and G. Micale, Numerical Prediction of Flow Fields
in Baffled Stirred Vessels: A Comparison of Alternative Modelling Approaches, Chemical
Engineering Science, vol. 53, no. 21, pp. 36533684, 1998.
5. J.-P. Torr, D.F. Fletcher, T. Lasuye, and C. Xuereb, Single and Multiphase CFD
Approaches for Modelling Partially Baffled Stirred Vessels: Comparison of Experimental
Data with Numerical Predictions, Chemical Engineering Science, vol. 62, no. 22, pp.
62466262, 2007.
THEORY FOR THE ROTATING MACHINERY INTERFACES
181
182 |
CHAPTER 3: SINGLE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Heat Transfer and Non-Isothermal Flow
Interfaces
There are several physics interfaces included in the CFD Module to model heat
transfer and non-isothermal flow. This chapter describes the physics interfaces
) as well as those under the
found under the Heat Transfer branch (
Fluid Flow>Non-Isothermal Flow branch (
). The Modeling Heat Transfer in the
CFD Module section helps you choose the best physics interface to start with.
Modeling Heat Transfer in the CFD Module
The Non-Isothermal Flow and Conjugate Heat Transfer, Laminar Flow and
Turbulent Flow Interfaces
Theory for the Non-Isothermal Flow and Conjugate Heat Transfer Interfaces
The documentation of all features in the Heat Transfer in Porous Media interface
is now found in the Heat Transfer Module Users Guide, specifically in the
following sections:
The Heat Transfer Module Interfaces
The Heat Transfer in Porous Media Interface
Theory for the Heat Transfer Module
Theory for Heat Transfer in Porous Media
183
Modeling Heat Transfer in the CFD
Module
Heat transfer is an important phenomenon in many industrial processes. Often, a fluid
plays a major role in transporting the heat and a detailed description of the flow field
is necessary to accurately describe such processes. Typical examples are heating and
cooling operations. Chemical reactions and phase changes are other commonly
occurring phenomena. The temperature, in turn, affects the fluid properties and can
alter the flow field. Natural convection is an example of this.
In this section:
Selecting the Right Physics Interface
Coupling to Other Physics Interfaces
Selecting the Right Physics Interface
The Heat Transfer branch (
) included with this module has a number of physics
interfaces that can be used to model energy transport. One or more of these can be
added; either by themselves or together with other physics interfaces, typically flow
physics interfaces.
While the standard COMSOL Multiphysics package includes physics interfaces for
simulating heat transfer through conduction and convection, this module provides
extra functionality within the standard Heat Transfer interfaces. The CFD Module also
includes additional Heat Transfer interfaces such as The Heat Transfer in Porous
Media Interface.
For heat transfer in single-phase flows, the CFD Module provides the Non-Isothermal
Flow (
) (located under the Fluid Flow branch) and Conjugate Heat Transfer (
)
(located under the Heat Transfer branch) interfaces. There are several versions of these
interfaces that combine heat transfer with either laminar or turbulent flow. The
multiphysics interfaces automatically couple the flow and heat equations and they also
provide functionality, such as support for turbulent heat transfer, that is not readily
available when adding the interfaces separately.
184 |
C H A P T E R 4 : H E A T TR A N S F E R A N D N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
H E A T TR A N S F E R I N S O L I D S O R F L U I D S , A N D J O U L E H E A T I N G
The Heat Transfer in Solids (
), Heat Transfer in Fluids (
) (general convection and
conduction), and Electromagnetic Heating>Joule Heating interfaces (
), all belong to
the COMSOL Multiphysics base package.
H E A T TR A N S F E R I N PO RO U S M E D I A
The Heat Transfer in Porous Media interface (
) is an extension of a the generic heat
transfer interface that includes modeling heat transfer through convection, conduction
and radiation, conjugate heat transfer, and non-isothermal flow. The ability to define
material properties, boundary conditions, and more for porous media heat transfer is
also activated by selecting the Heat transfer in porous media check box on any heat
transfer interface.
N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L OW A N D C O N J U G A T E H E A T TR A N S F E R
The Non-Isothermal Flow (
) and Conjugate Heat Transfer (
) interfaces solve the
Navier-Stokes equations together with an energy balance. They can also solve for heat
transfer in solids.
Non-Isothermal Flow and Conjugate Heat Transfer differ by their default features.
The default heat transfer domain feature for Non-Isothermal Flow is a Heat Transfer
in Fluids node while Conjugate Heat Transfer has a Heat Transfer in Solids node as its
default domain feature.
The Laminar Flow versions of the physics interfaces are used primarily to model slowly
flowing fluids in environments where energy transport is also an important part of the
system and application, and must be coupled or connected to the fluid flow in some
way. Stokes law (creeping flow) can be activated from the Non-Isothermal Flow,
Laminar Flow and Conjugate Heat Transfer, Laminar Flow interfaces if wanted. If you
expect the flow to become turbulent, select one of the versions of the turbulent flow
interfaces. Each physics interface includes a RANS turbulence model to calculate the
turbulence and algebraic models for the turbulent Prandtl number.
The Non-Isothermal Flow and Conjugate Heat Transfer interfaces can solve the fully
compressible form of the Navier-Stokes equations. But boundary conditions and
stabilizations are provided for Mach numbers less than 0.3. If you expect the Mach
number in your model to become higher than 0.3, use The High Mach Number Flow
Interfaces.
M O D E L I N G H E A T TR A N S F E R I N T H E C F D M O D U L E
185
Theory for the Heat Transfer Module in the Heat Transfer Module
Users Guide
The Joule Heating Interface in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference
Manual
Coupling to Other Physics Interfaces
Often, you are simulating applications that couple heat transfer in turbulent flow to
another type of phenomenon described by another physics interface. This can, for
example, include chemical reactions and mass transport, as covered by the physics
interfaces in the Chemical Species Transport branch.
Furthermore, the Chemical Reaction Engineering Module includes, not only support
for setting up and simulating chemical reactions, but also for simulating reaction
kinetics through the temperature-dependent Arrhenius Expression and Mass Action
Law. This physics interface also includes support for including and calculating
thermodynamic data as temperature-dependent expressions, for both reaction kinetics
and fluid-flow.
In addition, if you also have the Heat Transfer Module, it includes more detailed
descriptions and tools for simulating energy transport, such as surface-to-surface and
participating media radiation.
Fluid Damper: Application Library path
CFD_Module/Non-Isothermal_Flow/fluid_damper
A variety of modeling techniques are discussed in the following sections of the Heat
Transfer Module Users Guide:
Heat Transfer Variables
Using the Boundary Conditions for the Heat Transfer Interfaces
Handling Frames in Heat Transfer
Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow Coupling
Solver Settings
186 |
C H A P T E R 4 : H E A T TR A N S F E R A N D N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
Also see The Heat Transfer Module Interfaces and Theory for the Heat Transfer
Module.
M O D E L I N G H E A T TR A N S F E R I N T H E C F D M O D U L E
187
The Non-Isothermal Flow and
Conjugate Heat Transfer, Laminar
Flow and Turbulent Flow Interfaces
In this section:
Advantages of Using the Multiphysics Interfaces
The Non-Isothermal Flow, Laminar Flow and Turbulent Flow Interfaces
The Conjugate Heat Transfer, Laminar Flow and Turbulent Flow Interfaces
Settings for Physics Interfaces and Coupling Features
Coupling Features
Physics Interface Features
Non-Isothermal Flow
Flow Coupling
Marangoni Effect
Advantages of Using the Multiphysics Interfaces
The Non-Isothermal Flow and Conjugate Heat Transfer interfaces combine the heat
equation with either laminar flow or turbulent flow and use either a Heat Transfer in
Fluids or Heat Transfer in Solids domain model. The advantage of using the multiphysics
interfaces is that predefined couplings are available in both directions. In particular,
physics interfaces use the same definition of the density, which can therefore be a
function of both pressure and temperature. Solving this coupled system of equations
usually requires numerical stabilization accounting for the couplings, which the
predefined multiphysics interfaces also set up.
The Non-Isothermal Flow, Laminar Flow and Turbulent Flow
Interfaces
When a multiphysics interface is added from the Fluid Flow>Non-Isothermal Flow
branch of the Model Wizard or Add Physics windows, one of the Single-Phase Flow
188 |
C H A P T E R 4 : H E A T TR A N S F E R A N D N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
interfaces (laminar or turbulent flow) and Heat Transfer are added to the Model
Builder.
In addition, the Multiphysics node is added, which automatically includes the
multiphysics coupling feature Non-Isothermal Flow.
The Multiphysics Node in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference
Manual.
The Laminar Flow interface (
a Laminar Flow interface.
) combines a Heat Transfer in Fluids interface with
) combines a Heat Transfer in
The Turbulent Flow, Algebraic yPlus interface (
Fluids interface with a Turbulent Flow, Algebraic yPlus interface.
The Turbulent Flow, L-VEL interface (
) combines a Heat Transfer in Fluids
interface with a Turbulent Flow, L-VEL interface.
) combines a Heat Transfer in Fluids interface
The Turbulent Flow, k- interface (
with a Turbulent Flow, k- interface.
) combines a Heat Transfer in Fluids interface
The Turbulent Flow, k- interface (
with a Turbulent Flow, k- interface.
The Turbulent Flow, SST interface (
) combines a Heat Transfer in Fluids interface
with a Turbulent Flow, SST interface.
) combines a Heat Transfer in Fluids
The Turbulent Flow, Low Re k- interface (
interface with a Turbulent Flow, Low Re k- interface.
) combines a Heat Transfer in
The Turbulent Flow, Spalart-Allmaras interface (
Fluids interface with a Turbulent Flow, Spalart-Allmaras interface.
The Conjugate Heat Transfer, Laminar Flow and Turbulent Flow
Interfaces
When a multiphysics interface is added from the Heat Transfer>Conjugate Heat Transfer
branch of the Model Wizard or Add Physics windows, Heat Transfer and one of the
Single-Phase Flow interfaces (laminar or turbulent flow) are added to the Model Builder.
T H E N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L O W A N D C O N J U G A T E H E A T TR A N S F E R , L A M I N A R F L O W A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
In addition, the Multiphysics node is added, which automatically includes the
multiphysics coupling feature Non-Isothermal Flow.
The Multiphysics Node in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference
Manual.
The Laminar Flow interface (
a Laminar Flow interface.
) combines a Heat Transfer in Solids interface with
) combines a Heat Transfer in
The Turbulent Flow, Algebraic yPlus interface (
Solids interface with a Turbulent Flow, Algebraic yPlus interface.
) combines a Heat Transfer in Solids
The Turbulent Flow, L-VEL interface (
interface with a Turbulent Flow, L-VEL interface.
The Turbulent Flow, k- interface (
) combines a Heat Transfer in Solids interface
with a Turbulent Flow, k- interface.
) combines a Heat Transfer in Solids interface
The Turbulent Flow, k- interface (
with a Turbulent Flow, k- interface.
) combines a Heat Transfer in Solids interface
The Turbulent Flow, SST interface (
with a Turbulent Flow, SST interface.
The Turbulent Flow, Low Re k- interface (
)combines a Heat Transfer in Solids
interface with a Turbulent Flow, Low Re k- interface.
) combines a Heat Transfer in
The Turbulent Flow, Spalart-Allmaras interface (
Solids interface with a Turbulent Flow, Spalart-Allmaras interface.
Settings for Physics Interfaces and Coupling Features
When physics interfaces are added using the predefined couplings, specific settings are
included with the physics interfaces and the coupling features.
However, if physics interfaces are added one at a time, followed by the coupling
features, these modified settings are not automatically included.
For example, if single Heat Transfer in Fluids and Laminar Flow interfaces are added,
COMSOL adds an empty Multiphysics node. When you right-click this node, you can
190 |
C H A P T E R 4 : H E A T TR A N S F E R A N D N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
choose from the available coupling features, Non-Isothermal Flow, Temperature
Coupling, and Flow Coupling, but the modified settings are not included.
TABLE 4-1: MODIFIED SETTINGS FOR THE NON-ISOTHERMAL FLOW INTERFACES
PHYSICS OR COUPLING INTERFACE
MODIFIED SETTINGS (IF ANY)
Heat Transfer in Solids
Discretization order from temperature Lagrange
shape function is 1.
A Heat Transfer in Fluids feature is added with a
default editable selection set to All domains.
Heat Transfer in Fluids
none
Non-Isothermal Flow
The Fluid flow and Heat transfer interfaces are
preselected
The Compressibility option of the fluid flow
interface is set to Weakly Compressible
Coupling Features
The Non-Isothermal Flow and Flow Coupling multiphysics coupling nodes are
described in this section. See Temperature Coupling in the COMSOL Multiphysics
Reference Manual.
Use the online help in COMSOL Multiphysics to locate and search all the
documentation. All these links also work directly in COMSOL
Multiphysics when using the Help system.
Physics Interface Features
Physics nodes are available from the Physics ribbon toolbar (Windows users), Physics
context menu (Mac or Linux users), or right-click to access the context menu (all
users).
In general, to add a node, go to the Physics toolbar, no matter what
operating system you are using.
T H E N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L O W A N D C O N J U G A T E H E A T TR A N S F E R , L A M I N A R F L O W A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
H E A T TR A N S F E R I N F L U I D S ( N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L OW )
The available physics features for The Heat Transfer in Fluids Interface are listed in the
section Feature Nodes for the Heat Transfer in Fluids Interface in the Heat Transfer
Module Users Guide.
H E A T TR A N S F E R I N S O L I D S ( C O N J U G A T E H E A T TR A N S F E R )
The available physics features for The Heat Transfer in Solids Interface are listed in the
section Feature Nodes for the Heat Transfer in Solids Interface in the Heat Transfer
Module Users Guide.
LAMINAR FLOW
The available physics features for The Laminar Flow Interface are listed in the section
Domain, Boundary, Pair, and Point Nodes for Single-Phase Flow.
TU R B U L E N T F L O W, A L G E B R A I C Y P L U S
The available physics features for The Turbulent Flow, Algebraic yPlus Interface are
listed in the section Domain, Boundary, Pair, and Point Nodes for Single-Phase Flow.
TU R B U L E N T F L O W, L - V E L
The available physics features for The Turbulent Flow, L-VEL Interface are listed in
the section Domain, Boundary, Pair, and Point Nodes for Single-Phase Flow.
T U R B U L E N T F L O W , k-
The available physics features for The Turbulent Flow, k-e Interface are listed in the
section Domain, Boundary, Pair, and Point Nodes for Single-Phase Flow.
T U R B U L E N T F L O W , k-
The available physics features for The Turbulent Flow, k-w Interface are listed in the
section Domain, Boundary, Pair, and Point Nodes for Single-Phase Flow.
TU R B U L E N T F L O W, S S T
The available physics features for The Turbulent Flow, SST Interface are listed in the
section Domain, Boundary, Pair, and Point Nodes for Single-Phase Flow.
T U R B U L E N T F L O W , L O W R E k-
The available physics features for The Turbulent Flow, Low Re k-e Interface are listed
in the section Domain, Boundary, Pair, and Point Nodes for Single-Phase Flow.
192 |
C H A P T E R 4 : H E A T TR A N S F E R A N D N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
TU R B U L E N T F L O W, S P A L A R T - A L L M A R A S
The available physics features for The Turbulent Flow, Spalart-Allmaras Interface are
listed in the section Domain, Boundary, Pair, and Point Nodes for Single-Phase Flow.
Non-Isothermal Flow
Use the Non-Isothermal Flow (
) multiphysics coupling to simulate fluid flows where
the fluid properties depend on temperature. Models can also include heat transfer in
solids or in porous media as well as surface-to-surface radiation and radiation in
participating media, with the Heat Transfer Module. The physics interface supports
low Mach numbers (typically less than 0.3).
The Non-Isothermal Flow, Laminar Flow interface solves for conservation of energy,
mass and momentum in fluids and porous media and for conservation of energy in
solids. It synchronizes the features from the Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow interfaces
when a turbulent flow regime is defined. It also complements the Screen and Interior
Fan feature from the flow interface to account for thermal effects. The physics interface
can be used for stationary and time-dependent analysis.
When the Non-Isothermal Flow is used, there is no need to add Flow
Coupling or Temperature Coupling. Indeed, Non-Isothermal Flow combines
the effects of both of them. In addition it also accounts for the
multiphysics stabilization terms and for the heat transfer changes in the
turbulent regime (for example, thermal wall functions).
The multiphysics stabilization (streamline diffusion, crosswind diffusion,
and isotropic diffusion) are controlled by the Fluid Flow interface. For
example, the multiphysics streamline diffusion can be disabled in a
Laminar Flow physics node, in the Stabilization section. The streamline
diffusion contained in a Heat Transfer interface has no effect if the
multiphysics coupling is active.
SETTINGS
The Label is the default multiphysics coupling feature name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the coupling node.
Refer to such variables in expressions using the pattern <name>.<variable_name>. In
order to distinguish between variables belonging to different coupling nodes or physics
T H E N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L O W A N D C O N J U G A T E H E A T TR A N S F E R , L A M I N A R F L O W A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and underscores (_)
are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first multiphysics coupling feature in the model) is nitf1.
DOMAIN SELECTION
When nodes are added from the context menu, you can select Manual (the default)
from the Selection list to choose specific domains to define the non-isothermal flow, or
select All domains as needed.
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
Select an option from the Specify density listFrom heat transfer interface (the default),
From fluid flow interface, or Custom.
For Custom, linearized density, enter the Reference density ref (SI unit: kg/m3) and the
Coefficient of thermal expansion p(SI unit:1/K), or select From material, or select a
variable in the list if available. When Custom, linearized density is selected, regardless
how the properties are defined they should be constant. If material properties are not
constant you should consider using any of the other options to define the density.
For Custom, enter a Density (SI unit: kg/m3), or select a density in the list if available.
The density definition in the Non-Isothermal Flow node ensure that the same definition
of the density is used on the fluid flow and heat transfer interfaces. When the fluid flow
compressibility setting is set to Incompressible then the thermal conductivity and the
heat capacity are evaluated at the Reference temperature defined in the fluid flow
interface. When Include gravity is selected and the Compressibility is set to
Incompressible flow in the fluid interface properties, the gravity forces are defined using
the coefficient of thermal expansion. Along with the fact that the material properties
are evaluated for a constant temperature and pressure, this gravity force definition
corresponds to Boussinesq approximation. Unless the density is defined as Custom,
linearized density the coefficient of thermal expansion is evaluated from the fluid
density.
H E A T TU R B U L E N C E P R O P E R T Y
Select an option from the Heat transport turbulence model listKays-Crawford (the
default), Extended Kays-Crawford, or User-defined turbulent Prandtl number.
For Extended Kays-Crawford, enter a Reynolds number at infinity Reinf (dimensionless).
For User-defined turbulent Prandtl number, enter a Turbulent Prandtl number prT
(dimensionless).
194 |
C H A P T E R 4 : H E A T TR A N S F E R A N D N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
When the flow interface uses a RANS turbulence model, the conductive heat flux is
defined as
q = ( k + k T ) T
with
T Cp
k T = -------------Pr T
where T is defined by the flow interface, and PrT depends on the Heat transport
turbulence model. See Turbulent Conductivity for details.
FLOW HEATING
Select the Include work done by pressure changes check box to account for the heat
source due to pressure changes:
p
Q p = p ------ + u p
t
By default this option is not selected, however it should be selected for compressible
fluids as soon as significant pressure gradients occur.
Select the Include viscous dissipation check box to account for the heat source
corresponding to viscous heating. This option is not selected by default. Because it may
induce an extra computational cost it should be only selected in application where such
effect is expected. If no information on this is available, selecting the option ensure that
energy balance for the heat and the flow equation is respected.
NON-ISOTHERMAL FLOW
This section defines the physics involved in the multiphysics coupling. The Fluid flow
and Heat transfer lists include all applicable physics interfaces.
The default values depend on how this coupling node is created.
If it is added from the Physics ribbon (Windows users), Physics contextual toolbar
(Mac and Linux users), or context menu (all users), then the first physics interface
of each type in the component is selected as the default.
If it is added automatically when a multiphysics interface is chosen in the Model
Wizard or Add Physics window, then the two participating physics interfaces are
selected.
T H E N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L O W A N D C O N J U G A T E H E A T TR A N S F E R , L A M I N A R F L O W A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
You can also select None from either list to uncouple the node from a physics interface.
If the physics interface is removed from the Model Builder, for example Heat Transfer in
Fluids is deleted, then the Heat transfer list defaults to None as there is nothing to couple
to.
If a physics interface is deleted and then added to the model again, then
in order to reestablish the coupling, you need to choose the physics
interface again from the Fluid flow or Heat transfer lists. This is applicable
to all multiphysics coupling nodes that would normally default to the
once present interface. See Multiphysics Modeling Approaches in the
COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual.
Flow Coupling
The Flow Coupling multiphysics coupling (
) defines u and p variables in order to set
the model inputs in the Heat Transfer interface (or when applicable, a chemical species
transport interface). In addition it provides all the fluids quantities that may be needed
by the Heat Transfer interface (for example, viscosity, turbulence parameters, and so
on).
SETTINGS
The Label is the default multiphysics coupling feature name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the coupling node.
Refer to such variables in expressions using the pattern <name>.<variable_name>. In
order to distinguish between variables belonging to different coupling nodes or physics
interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and underscores (_)
are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first multiphysics coupling feature in the model) is fc1.
FLOW COUPLING
This section defines the physics involved in the multiphysics coupling. By default, the
applicable physics interface is selected in the Source list to apply the Destination to its
physics interface to establish the coupling.
You can also select None from either list to uncouple the node from a physics interface.
If the physics interface is removed from the Model Builder, for example Heat Transfer in
196 |
C H A P T E R 4 : H E A T TR A N S F E R A N D N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
Solids is deleted, then the Destination list defaults to None as there is nothing to couple
to.
If a physics interface is deleted and then added to the model again, and in
order to re-establish the coupling, you need to choose the physics
interface again from the lists. This is applicable to all multiphysics
coupling nodes that would normally default to the once present physics
interface. See Multiphysics Modeling Approaches in the COMSOL
Multiphysics Reference Manual.
Marangoni Effect
The Marangoni Effect multiphysics coupling (
) accounts for Marangoni convection.
Marangoni convection occurs when the surface tension of an interface (generally
liquid-air) depends on the concentration of a species or on the temperature
distribution. In the case of temperature dependence, the Marangoni effect is also called
thermo-capillary convection. It is of primary importance in the fields of welding,
crystal growth, and electron beam melting of metals.
The Marangoni effect is a shear stress which depends on the tangential temperature
gradient and should be implemented as such. It has the following contribution
described by forces induced on the fluid/fluid interface:
T
2
pI + ( u + ( u ) ) --- ( u )I n = t T
3
where is the temperature derivative of the surface tension (N/(mK)). Note that
this formulation is intended for laminar flow regimes only.
SETTINGS
The Label is the default multiphysics coupling feature name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the coupling node.
Refer to such variables in expressions using the pattern <name>.<variable_name>. In
order to distinguish between variables belonging to different coupling nodes or physics
interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and underscores (_)
are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first multiphysics coupling feature in the model) is me1.
T H E N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L O W A N D C O N J U G A T E H E A T TR A N S F E R , L A M I N A R F L O W A N D TU R B U L E N T F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
S U R F A C E TE N S I O N
Select a Surface tension coefficient typeLibrary coefficient, liquid/gas interface or User
defined (the default).
For Library coefficient, liquid/gas interface choose an option from the Library surface
tension coefficient list.
For User defined enter a Surface tension coefficient (SI unit: N/m).
MARANGONI EFFECT
This section defines the physics involved in the multiphysics coupling. The Fluid flow
and Heat transfer lists include all applicable physics interfaces.
The default values depend on how this coupling node is created.
If it is added from the Physics ribbon (Windows users), Physics contextual toolbar
(Mac and Linux users), or context menu (all users), then the first physics interface
of each type in the component is selected as the default.
If it is added automatically when a multiphysics interface is chosen in the Model
Wizard or Add Physics window, then the two participating physics interfaces are
selected.
You can also select None from either list to uncouple the node from a physics interface.
If the physics interface is removed from the Model Builder, for example Heat Transfer in
Fluids is deleted, then the Heat transfer list defaults to None as there is nothing to couple
to.
If a physics interface is deleted and then added to the model again, then
in order to re-establish the coupling, you need to choose the physics
interface again from the Fluid flow or Heat transfer lists. This is applicable
to all multiphysics coupling nodes that would normally default to the
once present interface. See Multiphysics Modeling Approaches in the
COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual.
198 |
C H A P T E R 4 : H E A T TR A N S F E R A N D N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
T he o r y f o r t he N on - Isot h ermal Fl ow
and Conjugate Heat Transfer
Interfaces
In this section:
The Non-Isothermal Flow and Conjugate Heat Transfer Equations
Turbulent Non-Isothermal Flow Theory
Theory for the Non-Isothermal Screen Boundary Condition
Theory for the Interior Fan Boundary Condition
References for the Non-Isothermal Flow and Conjugate Heat Transfer Interfaces
The Non-Isothermal Flow and Conjugate Heat Transfer Equations
In industrial applications it is common that the density of a process fluid varies. These
variations can have a number of different sources but the most common one is the
presence of an inhomogeneous temperature field. This module includes the
Non-Isothermal Flow predefined multiphysics coupling to simulate systems in which
the density varies with temperature.
Other situations where the density might vary includes chemical reactions, for instance
where reactants associate or dissociate.
The Non-Isothermal Flow and Conjugate Heat Transfer interfaces contain the fully
compressible formulation of the continuity and momentum equations:
------ + ( u ) = 0
t
2
u
------- + u u = p + ( u + ( u ) T ) --- ( u )I + F
3
t
(4-1)
where
is the density (SI unit: kg/m3)
u is the velocity vector (SI unit: m/s)
p is the pressure (SI unit: Pa)
T H E O R Y F O R T H E N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L O W A N D C O N J U G A T E H E A T TR A N S F E R I N T E R F A C E S
199
is the dynamic viscosity (SI unit: Pas)
F is the body force vector (SI unit: N/m3)
It also solves the heat equation, which for a fluid is given by
T
T p
C p ------- + ( u )T = ( q ) + :S ---- ------- ------ + ( u )p + Q
t
T p t
where in addition to the quantities above
Cp is the specific heat capacity at constant pressure (SI unit: J/(kgK))
T is the absolute temperature (SI unit: K)
q is the heat flux by conduction (SI unit: W/m2)
is the viscous stress tensor (SI unit: Pa)
S is the strain-rate tensor (SI unit: 1/s)
1
S = --- ( u + ( u ) T )
2
Q contains heat sources other than viscous heating (SI unit: W/m3)
The work done by pressure changes term
p
1
p T ------ + u p with p = --- ------ t
.
p
and the viscous heating term
:S
are not included by default because they are usually negligible. These terms can,
however, be added by selection corresponding check-boxes in the Non-Isothermal
Flow feature. For a detailed discussion of the fundamentals of heat transfer in fluids,
see Ref. 3.
The physics interface also supports heat transfer in solids:
T
C p ------- = ( q ) + Q + Q ted
t
200 |
C H A P T E R 4 : H E A T TR A N S F E R A N D N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
where Qted is the thermoelastic damping heat source (SI unit: W/(m3)). This term is
not included by default but must be added by selecting corresponding check-box.
Turbulent Non-Isothermal Flow Theory
References for the Non-Isothermal Flow and Conjugate Heat Transfer
Interfaces
Turbulent Non-Isothermal Flow Theory
Turbulent energy transport is conceptually more complicated than energy transport in
laminar flows since the turbulence is also a form of energy.
Equations for compressible turbulence are derived using the Favre average. The Favre
average of a variable T is denoted T and is defined by
T
T = ------
where the bar denotes the usual Reynolds average. The full field is then decomposed as
T = T + T''
With this notation the equation for total internal energy, e, becomes
u i u i u i''u i'' u i u i u i''u i''
----- ---------- + ------------------- + ------- u j h + ----------- + u j ------------------- =
e+
t
2
2 x j
2
2
(4-2)
u j''u i''u i''
-
----- q j u j''h'' + ij u i'' --------------------------- + ------- ( u i ( ij u i''u j'' ) )
x j
x j
2
where h is the enthalpy. The vector
T
q j = ------x j
(4-3)
is the laminar conductive heat flux and
2 u k
ij = 2S ij --- --------- ij
3 x k
is the laminar, viscous stress tensor. Notice that the thermal conductivity is denoted .
T H E O R Y F O R T H E N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L O W A N D C O N J U G A T E H E A T TR A N S F E R I N T E R F A C E S
201
The modeling assumptions are in large part analogous to those for incompressible
turbulence modeling. The stress tensor
u i''u'' j
is modeled using the Boussinesq approximation:
1 u k 2
u i''u'' j = T ij = 2 T S ij --- --------- ij --- k ij
3 x k 3
(4-4)
where k is the turbulent kinetic energy, which in turn is defined by
1
k = --- u i''u i''
2
(4-5)
The correlation between u j'' and h'' in Equation 4-2 is the turbulent transport of
heat. It is modeled analogously to the laminar conductive heat flux
T C p T
T
u j''h'' = q T j = T ------- = -------------- ------x j
Pr T x j
(4-6)
The molecular diffusion term,
ij u i''
and turbulent transport term,
u j''u i''u i'' 2
are modeled by a generalization of the molecular diffusion and turbulent transport
terms found in the incompressible k equation
T k
u j''u i''u i''
ij u i'' --------------------------- = + ------ ------
2
k x j
(4-7)
Inserting Equation 4-3, Equation 4-4, Equation 4-5, Equation 4-6 and Equation 4-7
into Equation 4-2 gives
202 |
C H A P T E R 4 : H E A T TR A N S F E R A N D N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
u i u i
----- u i u i
e + ----------- + k + ------- u j h + ----------- + k =
2
x j
2
t
(4-8)
T k
------- q j q T j + + ------------ + ------- ( u ( + T ij ) )
x j
k x j x j i ij
The Favre average can also be applied to the momentum equation, which, using
Equation 4-4, can be written
-----
p
( u i ) + ------- ( u j u i ) = ------- + ------- ( ij + T ij )
x j
t
x j x j
(4-9)
Taking the inner product between u i and Equation 4-9 results in an equation for the
resolved kinetic energy, which can be subtracted from Equation 4-8 with the following
result:
u j
----
( ( e + k ) ) + ------- ( u j ( e + k ) ) = p -------- +
x j
x j
t
T k
-
----- q q T j + + ------ ------- + ------- ( u i ( ij + T ij ) )
x j j
k x j
x j
(4-10)
where the relation
h = e + p
has been used.
According to Wilcox (Ref. 1), it is usually a good approximation to neglect the
contributions of k for flows with Mach numbers up to the supersonic range. This gives
the following approximation of Equation 4-10 is
u j
-----
( e ) + ------- ( u j e ) = p -------- + ------- ( q j q T j ) + ------- ( u i ( ij + T ij ) )
x j x j
t
x j
x j
(4-11)
Larsson (Ref. 2) suggests to make the split
ij = ij + ij''
Since
T H E O R Y F O R T H E N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L O W A N D C O N J U G A T E H E A T TR A N S F E R I N T E R F A C E S
203
ij ij''
for all applications of engineering interest, it follows that
ij ij
and consequently
Tot
----- ( e ) + ------- ( u j e ) = p --------j + ------- ( + T ) ------- + ------- ( u i ij
)
x j x j
x j
x j x j
t
(4-12)
where
2 u k
Tot
ij
= ( + T ) 2S ij --- --------- ij
3 x k
Equation 4-12 is completely analogous to the laminar energy equation and can be
expanded using the same theory (see for example Ref. 3):
T
p
T p
T
C p ------- + u j ------- = ------- ( + T ) ------- + ij S ij ---- ------- ------ + u j -------
xj
x
T
j
j
j
p
which is the temperature equation solved in the turbulent Non-Isothermal Flow and
Conjugate Heat Transfer interfaces.
TU R B U L E N T C O N D U C T I V I T Y
Kays-Crawford
This is a relatively exact model for PrT, while still quite simple. In Ref. 4, it is compared
to other models for PrT and found to be a good approximation for most kinds of
turbulent wall bounded flows except for turbulent flow of liquid metals. The model is
given by
Cp T 2
1
0.3 C p T
Pr T = ----------------- + ------------------ -------------- 0.3 -------------- ( 1 e ( 0.3C p T
Pr T
2Pr T
1
(4-13)
Pr T ) )
where the Prandtl number at infinity is PrT = 0.85 and is the conductivity.
204 |
C H A P T E R 4 : H E A T TR A N S F E R A N D N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
Extended Kays-Crawford
Weigand and others (Ref. 5) suggested an extension of Equation 4-13 to liquid metals
by introducing
100
Pr T = 0.85 + ------------------------------0.888
C p Re
where Re, the Reynolds number at infinity must be provided either as a constant or
as a function of the flow field. This is entered in the Model Inputs section of the Fluid
feature.
TE M P E R A T U R E WA L L F U N C T I O N S
Analogous to the single-phase flow wall functions (see Wall Functions described for the
Wall boundary condition), there is a theoretical gap between the solid wall and the
computational domain for the fluid and temperature fields. This gap is often ignored
when the computational geometry is drawn.
The heat flux between the fluid with temperature Tf and a wall with temperature Tw, is:
C p C 1 / 4 k 1 / 2 ( T w T f )
q wf = ---------------------------------------------------------T+
where is the fluid density, Cp is the fluid heat capacity, C is a turbulence modeling
constant, and k is the turbulent kinetic energy. T+ is the dimensionless temperature
and is given by (Ref. 6):
+ < +
for w
w1
+
Pr w
15Pr 2 / 3 500
----------
T+ =
+2
+ + < +
for w1
w
w2
Pr
+ +
--------T- ln w
+ +
for w2
w
where in turn
T H E O R Y F O R T H E N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L O W A N D C O N J U G A T E H E A T TR A N S F E R I N T E R F A C E S
205
w C 1 / 2 k
+ = -----------------------------w
+ = 10 10 ------- w2
Pr T
10 + = ----------- w1
Pr 1 / 3
Cp
Pr = ---------
Pr T
= 15Pr 2 / 3 --------- 1 + ln 1000 ---------
2
Pr T
is the thermal conductivity, and is the von Karman constant equal to 0.41.
The computational results should be checked so that the distance between the
computational fluid domain and the wall, w, is everywhere small compared to any
geometrical quantity of interest. The distance w is available for evaluation on
boundaries.
Theory for the Non-Isothermal Screen Boundary Condition
When the Non-Isothermal Flow multiphysics coupling feature is active, the conditions
that apply across a screen in isothermal flow are complemented by:
[ H 0 ] -+ = 0
(4-14)
where H0 is the total enthalpy.
See Screen for the feature node details.
Also see Screen Boundary Condition described for the single-phase
flow interfaces.
Theory for the Interior Fan Boundary Condition
When the Non-Isothermal Flow multiphysics coupling feature is active, the conditions
that apply across an interior fan are complemented by:
If direction is Along normal vector, the outlet temperature is T_avg where T_avg is
the weighted averaged temperature defined as:
206 |
C H A P T E R 4 : H E A T TR A N S F E R A N D N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
( down ( u nCp T ) ) dS
T avg =
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
max , ( down ( u nC p T ) ) dS
If the direction is opposite to normal vector, the outlet temperature is T_avg where
T_avg is:
( up ( u nCp T ) ) dS
T avg = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
max , ( up ( u nC p T ) ) dS
References for the Non-Isothermal Flow and Conjugate Heat Transfer
Interfaces
1. D.C. Wilcox, Turbulence Modeling for CFD, 2nd ed., DCW Industries, 1998.
2. J. Larsson, Numerical Simulation of Turbulent Flows for Turbine Blade Heat
Transfer, Doctoral Thesis for the Degree of Doctor of Philosophy, Chalmers
University of Technology, Sweden, 1998.
3. R.L. Panton, Incompressible Flow, 2nd ed., John Wiley & Sons, 1996.
4. W.M. Kays, Turbulent Prandtl Number Where Are We?, ASME Journal of
Heat Transfer, vol. 116, pp. 284295, 1994.
5. B. Weigand, J.R. Ferguson, and M.E. Crawford, An Extended Kays and Crawford
Turbulent Prandtl Number Model, Int. J. Heat and Mass Transfer, vol. 40, no. 17,
pp. 41914196, 1997.
6. D. Lacasse, . Turgeon, and D. Pelletier, On the Judicious Use of the k Model,
Wall Functions and Adaptivity, Int. J. Thermal Sciences, vol. 43, pp. 925938, 2004.
T H E O R Y F O R T H E N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L O W A N D C O N J U G A T E H E A T TR A N S F E R I N T E R F A C E S
207
208 |
C H A P T E R 4 : H E A T TR A N S F E R A N D N O N - I S O T H E R M A L F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
High Mach Number Flow Interfaces
This chapter discusses physics interfaces found under the Fluid Flow>High Mach
Number Flow branch (
).
In this chapter:
The High Mach Number Flow Interfaces
Theory for the High Mach Number Flow Interfaces
209
The High Mach Number Flow
Interfaces
There are three versions of the same predefined multiphysics interface (all with the
name hmnf) that combine the heat equation with either the laminar or turbulent flow
equations. The advantage of using the multiphysics interfacescompared to adding
the individual physics interfaces separatelyis that a set of two-way couplings has been
predefined. In particular, the physics interfaces use the same definition of the density,
which can therefore be a function of both pressure and temperature. Solving this
coupled system of equations usually requires numerical stabilization, which the
predefined multiphysics interface also sets up.
These physics interfaces vary only by one or two default settings (see Table 5-1) or
selections from check boxes or lists under the Physical Model section for the physics
interface.
TABLE 5-1: THE HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW PHYSICAL MODEL DEFAULT SETTINGS
PHYSICS INTERFACE LABEL
NAME
TURBULENCE
MODEL TYPE
TURBULENCE
MODEL
HEAT
TRANSPORT
TURBULENCE
MODEL
High Mach Number Flow,
Laminar
hmnf
None
N/A
N/A
High Mach Number Flow,
k-
hmnf
RANS
k-
Kays-Crawford
High Mach Number Flow,
Spalart- Allmaras
hmnf
RANS
Spalart-Allmaras
Kays-Crawford
Most of the other physics nodes share the same setting options as
described in this section and in Domain, Boundary, Edge, Point, and Pair
Nodes for the High Mach Number Flow Laminar and Turbulent
Interfaces. See also The Heat Transfer in Solids Interface in the Heat
Transfer Module Users Guide for details about the Heat Transfer in
Solids physics node.
210 |
CHAPTER 5: HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW INTERFACES
The High Mach Number Flow, Laminar Interface
The High Mach Number Flow, k-e Interface
The High Mach Number Flow, Spalart-Allmaras Interface
Theory for the High Mach Number Flow Interfaces
The High Mach Number Flow, Laminar Interface
The High Mach Number Flow, Laminar (hmnf) interface (
), found under the Fluid
) when adding a physics interface, is used to
model gas flows at low and moderate Reynolds number where the velocity magnitude
is comparable to the speed of sound, that is, laminar flows in the transonic and
supersonic range. This state is often connected to very low pressures.
Flow>High Mach Number Flow branch (
The physics interface solves for conservation of energy, mass and momentum. The
interface also supports heat transfer in solids as well as surface-to-surface radiation.
This physics interface is a predefined multiphysics coupling consisting of a Laminar
Flow interface, applied to compressible flow, in combination with a Heat Transfer
interface.
When this physics interface is added, the following default nodes are also added in the
Model BuilderFluid, Wall, Thermal Insulation, and Initial Values. Then, from the Physics
toolbar, add other nodes that implement, for example, boundary conditions, volume
forces, and heat sources. You can also right-click the node to select physics features
from the context menu.
SETTINGS
The Label is the default physics interface name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the physics
interface. Refer to such physics interface variables in expressions using the pattern
<name>.<variable_name>. In order to distinguish between variables belonging to
different physics interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and
underscores (_) are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first physics interface in the model) is hmnf.
PHYSICAL MODEL
Define physics interface properties to control the overall type of model.
THE HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW INTERFACES
211
Turbulence Model Type
By definition, no turbulence model is needed when studying laminar flows. The
default is None. See The High Mach Number Flow, k-e Interface or The High Mach
Number Flow, Spalart-Allmaras Interface for the settings if RANS is chosen as the
Turbulence model type.
SURFACE-TO-SURFACE RADIATION
This section requires an additional Heat Transfer Module license and displays when the
Surface-to-surface radiation check box is selected. See the Heat Transfer Module Users
Guide for details.
Select the Surface-to-surface radiation check box to enable the Radiation Settings
section.
RADIATION SETTINGS
This section requires an additional Heat Transfer Module license and displays when the
Surface-to-surface radiation check box is selected. See the Heat Transfer Module Users
Guide for details.
DEPENDENT VARIABLES
The dependent variables (field variables) are the Velocity field u (SI unit: m/s), the
Pressure p (SI unit: Pa), and the Temperature T (SI unit: K). The names can be changed
but the names of fields and dependent variables must be unique within a component.
ADVANCED SETTINGS
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
Normally these settings do not need to be changed.
Select the Use pseudo time stepping for stationary equation form check box to add
pseudo time derivatives to the equation when the Stationary equation form is used.
When selected, also choose a CFL number expressionAutomatic (the default) or
Manual. Automatic calculates the local CFL number (from the CourantFriedrichs
Lewy condition) from a built-in expression. For Manual enter a Local CFL number
CFLloc.
212 |
CHAPTER 5: HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW INTERFACES
By default the Enable conversions between material and spatial frames check box is
selected.
Domain, Boundary, Edge, Point, and Pair Nodes for the High Mach
Number Flow Laminar and Turbulent Interfaces
The Heat Transfer Module Interfaces
The High Mach Number Flow, k-e Interface
The High Mach Number Flow, Spalart-Allmaras Interface
The High Mach Number Flow, k- Interface
The High Mach Number Flow, k- (hmnf) interface (
), found under the High Mach
) when adding a physics interface, is used to
model gas flows at high Reynolds number where the velocity magnitude is comparable
to the speed of sound, that is, turbulent flows in the transonic and supersonic range.
Number Flow>Turbulent Flow branch (
The physics interface solves for conservation of energy, mass, and momentum.
Turbulence effects are modeled using the standard two-equation k- model with
realizability constraints. Flow and heat transfer close to walls are modeled using wall
functions. The physics interface also supports heat transfer in solids as well as
surface-to-surface radiation.
This is a predefined multiphysics coupling consisting of a Turbulent Flow k- interface,
applied to compressible flow, in combination with a heat transfer interface. As shown
in Table 5-1, the turbulent versions of the physics interfaces differ by where they are
selected when adding a physics interface and the default turbulence model selected
k- for this physics interface.
When this physics interface is added, the following default nodes are also added in the
Model BuilderFluid, Wall, Thermal Insulation, and Initial Values. Then, from the Physics
toolbar, add other nodes that implement, for example, boundary conditions, volume
forces, and heat sources. You can also right-click the node to select physics features
from the context menu.
SETTINGS
The Label is the default physics interface name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the physics
interface. Refer to such physics interface variables in expressions using the pattern
THE HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW INTERFACES
213
<name>.<variable_name>. In order to distinguish between variables belonging to
different physics interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and
underscores (_) are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first physics interface in the model) is hmnf.
PHYSICAL MODEL
The default Turbulence model type is RANS, the default Turbulence model is k-, and the
default Heat transport turbulence model is Kays-Crawford. Alternatively, select
User-defined turbulent Prandtl number. The turbulent Prandtl number model describes
the influence of the turbulent fluctuations on the temperature field. It is always
possible to have a user-defined model for the turbulence Prandtl number. Enter the
user-defined value or expression for the turbulence Prandtl number in the Model Inputs
section of the Fluid feature node.
TU R B U L E N C E M O D E L P A R A M E T E R S
Edit the model parameters of the k- model as needed. Turbulence model parameters
are optimized to fit as many flow types as possible, but for some special cases, better
performance can be obtained by tuning the model parameters. For a description of the
turbulence model and the included model parameters see Theory for the Turbulent
Flow Interfaces.
DEPENDENT VARIABLES
The dependent variables (field variables) are the Velocity field u (SI unit: m/s), the
Pressure p (SI unit: Pa), and the Temperature T (SI unit: K). For turbulence modeling
and heat radiation, the Turbulent kinetic energy k (SI unit: m2/s2) and Turbulent
dissipation rate ep (SI unit: m2/s3) variables are also available.
The names can be changed but the names of fields and dependent variables must be
unique within a model.
The Heat Transfer Module Interfaces in the H
Domain, Boundary, Edge, Point, and Pair Nodes for the High Mach
Number Flow Laminar and Turbulent Interfaces
The High Mach Number Flow, Laminar Interface
The High Mach Number Flow, Spalart-Allmaras Interface
214 |
CHAPTER 5: HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW INTERFACES
The High Mach Number Flow, Spalart-Allmaras Interface
The High Mach Number Flow, Spalart-Allmaras (hmnf) interface (
), found under the
High Mach Number Flow>Turbulent Flow branch (
) when adding a physics interface,
is used to model gas flows at high Reynolds number where the velocity magnitude is
comparable to the speed of sound, that is, turbulent flows in the transonic and
supersonic range.
The physics interface solves for conservation of energy, mass, and momentum.
Turbulence effects are modeled using the one-equation Spalart-Allmaras turbulence
model. The Spalart-Allmaras model is a so-called low-Reynolds number model, which
means that it resolves the velocity, pressure, and temperature fields all the way down
to the wall. The Spalart-Allmaras model depends on the distance to the closest wall.
The physics interface therefore includes a wall distance equation. It also supports heat
transfer in solids as well as surface-to-surface radiation.
This is a predefined multiphysics coupling consisting of a Turbulent Flow,
Spalart-Allmaras interface, applied to compressible flow, in combination with a Heat
Transfer interface. As shown in Table 5-1, the turbulent versions of the physics
interfaces differ by where they are selected when adding a physics interface and the
default Turbulence model selectedSpalart-Allmaras for this physics interface.
When this physics interface is added, the following default nodes are also added in the
Model BuilderFluid, Wall, Thermal Insulation, and Initial Values. Then, from the Physics
toolbar, add other nodes that implement, for example, boundary conditions, volume
forces, and heat sources. You can also right-click the node to select physics features
from the context menu.
PHYSICAL MODEL
The default Turbulence model type is RANS, the default Turbulence model is
Spalart-Allmaras., and the default Heat transport turbulence model is Kays-Crawford.
Alternatively, select User-defined turbulent Prandtl number. The turbulent Prandtl
number model describes the influence of the turbulent fluctuations on the temperature
field. It is always possible to have a user-defined model for the turbulence Prandtl
number. Enter the user-defined value or expression for the turbulence Prandtl number
in the Model Inputs section of the Fluid feature node.
DEPENDENT VA RIA BLES
The dependent variables (field variables) are the Velocity field u (SI unit: m/s), the
Pressure p (SI unit: Pa), and the Temperature T (SI unit: K). For turbulence modeling
THE HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW INTERFACES
215
and heat radiation, the Reciprocal wall distance G (SI unit: 1/m) and Undamped
turbulent kinematic viscosity nutilde (SI unit: m2/s) variables are also available.
The Heat Transfer Module Interfaces in the Heat Transfer Module
Users Guide
Domain, Boundary, Edge, Point, and Pair Nodes for the High Mach
Number Flow Laminar and Turbulent Interfaces
The High Mach Number Flow, Laminar Interface
The High Mach Number Flow, k-e Interface
Transonic Flow in a Sajben Diffuser: Application Library path
CFD_Module/High_Mach_Number_Flow/sajben_diffuser
Domain, Boundary, Edge, Point, and Pair Nodes for the High Mach
Number Flow Laminar and Turbulent Interfaces
The High Mach Number Flow Interfaces has these domain, boundary, edge, point,
and pair nodes available from the Physics ribbon toolbar (Windows users), Physics
context menu (Mac or Linux users), or right-click to access the context menu (all
users).
In general, to add a node, go to the Physics toolbar, no matter what
operating system you are using. Subnodes are available by clicking the
parent node and selecting it from the Attributes menu.
The following nodes are slightly different from those in the other physics interfaces and
are described in this section (listed in alphabetical order):
Fluid
Inlet
Initial Values
Outlet
Symmetry
The following nodes (listed in alphabetical order) are described for the Laminar Flow
interface:
216 |
CHAPTER 5: HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW INTERFACES
Pressure Point Constraint
Volume Force
Wall
For The High Mach Number Flow, k-e Interface, the same nodes are selected from the
Turbulent Flow, k- submenus. For The High Mach Number Flow, Spalart-Allmaras
Interface, the same nodes are selected from the Turbulent Flow, Spalart-Allmaras
submenus.
The following physics nodes and subnodes (listed in alphabetical order) are described
for the Heat Transfer interfaces in the Heat Transfer Module Users Guide.
Additional features can also be available when you have additional licenses:
Boundary Heat Source
Point Heat Source
Heat Flux
Diffuse Surface
Heat Source
Temperature
Solid
Thermal Insulation
Line Heat Source
Thin Layer
Periodic Condition
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual see Table 2-3 for links
to common sections and Table 2-4 to common feature nodes. You can
also search for information: press F1 to open the Help window or Ctrl+F1
to open the Documentation window.
Initial Values
The Initial Values node adds initial values for the velocity field, the pressure and the
temperature that can serve as initial conditions for a transient simulation or as an initial
guess for a nonlinear solver. For turbulent flow there are also initial values for the
turbulence model variables. The surface radiosity is only applicable for
surface-to-surface radiation.
IN IT IA L VA LUES
Enter values or expressions for the initial value of the Velocity field u (SI unit: m/s),
the Pressure p (SI unit: Pa), and the Temperature T (SI unit: K). The default values are
0 m/s for the velocity, 1 atm for the pressure, and 293.15 K for the temperature.
THE HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW INTERFACES
217
In a turbulent flow interface, initial values for the turbulence variables are also
specified. By default these are specified using the predefined variables defined by the
expressions described in Theory for the High Mach Number Flow Interfaces under
Initial Values.
Fluid
The Fluid node adds the continuity, momentum and temperature equations for an ideal
gas but omits volume forces and heat sources. Volume forces and heat sources can be
added as separate physics features. Viscous heating and pressure work terms are added
by default to the temperature equation.
When the turbulence model type is set to RANS, the Fluid node also adds the equations
for k and , or the undamped turbulent kinematic viscosity, depending on the
turbulence model used.
The thermal conductivity describes the relationship between the heat flux vector q and
the temperature gradient T as in q = kT, which is Fouriers law of heat
conduction. Enter this quantity as power per length and temperature.
HEAT CONDUCTION
Select a Thermal conductivity k (SI unit: W/(mK)) from the listSutherlands Law (the
default), From material, or User defined. For User defined select Isotropic, Diagonal,
Symmetric, or Anisotropic based on the characteristics of the thermal conductivity and
enter another value or expression in the field or matrix.
Sutherlands Law
For Sutherlands Law enter the following model parameters:
Conductivity at reference temperature kref (SI unit: W/(mK))
Reference temperature Tk,ref (SI unit: K)
Sutherland constant Sk (SI unit: K)
Sutherlands law describes the relationship between the thermal conductivity and the
total temperature of an ideal fluid according to
T 3 / 2 T k, ref + S k
k = k ref -------------- --------------------------T + Sk
T k, ref
218 |
CHAPTER 5: HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW INTERFACES
THERMODYNAMICS
The High Mach Number Flow interface is applicable for ideal gases. Specify the
thermodynamics properties by selecting a gas constant type and selecting between
entering the heat capacity at constant pressure or the ratio of specific heats. For an ideal
gas the density is defined as
pA
Mn pA
= ---------------- = ----------RT
Rs T
where pA is the absolute pressure, and T is the temperature.
Select a Gas constant typeSpecific gas constant Rs (SI unit: J/(kgK)) or Mean molar
mass Mn (SI unit: kg/mol). The default setting is to use the property value From
material. For User defined enter another value or expression for either material
property. For Mean molar mass the universal gas constant R = 8.314 J/(molK),
which is a built-in physical constant, is also used.
From the Specify Cp or list, select Heat capacity at constant pressure Cp
(SI unit: J/(kgK)) or Ratio of specific heats (dimensionless). The default setting is
to use the property value From material. For User defined enter another value or
expression for either material property.
DYNAMIC VISCOSITY
The dynamic viscosity describes the relationship between the shear rate and the shear
stresses in a fluid.
Select a Dynamic viscosity (SI unit: Pas) from the listSutherlands Law (the default),
From material, or User defined.
Sutherlands Law
For Sutherlands Law enter the following model parameters:
Dynamic viscosity at reference temperature ref (SI unit: Pas)
Reference temperature T,ref (SI unit: K)
Sutherland constant S (SI unit: K)
Sutherlands law describes the relationship between the dynamic viscosity and the total
temperature of an ideal fluid according to
T 3 / 2 T , ref + S
= ref -------------- -------------------------- T , ref
T + S
THE HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW INTERFACES
219
MIXING LENGTH LIMIT
This section is available for the Turbulent Flow, k- model.
The k- turbulence model needs an upper limit on the mixing length to be numerically
robust. Select a Mixing length limitAutomatic (the default) or Manual.
For Automatic this limit is automatically evaluated as:
lim = 0.5l
l mix
bb
(5-1)
where lbb is the shortest side of the geometry bounding box. If the geometry is a
complicated system of very slender entities, for example, Equation 5-1 tends to give
lim manually.
a result that is too large. In such cases, define l mix
lim (SI unit: m).
For Manual enter a value or expression for the Mixing length limit l mix
DISTANCE EQUATION
This section is available for Turbulent Flow, Spalart-Allmaras since a Wall Distance
interface is then included.
Select how the Reference length scale lref (SI unit: m) is definedAutomatic (default)
or Manual:
For Automatic the wall distance is automatically evaluated to one tenth of the
shortest side of the geometry bounding box. This is usually quite accurate but it can
sometimes give a too high value if the geometry consists of several slim entities. In
such cases, define the reference length scale manually.
For Manual it defines a different value or expression for the length scale. The default
is 1 m.
lref controls the result of the distance equation. Objects that are much smaller than lref
are effectively be diminished while the distance to objects much larger than lref are
accurately represented.
Inlet
The Inlet node includes a set of boundary conditions describing the fluid flow and
temperature conditions at an inlet. The applied conditions are controlled by the Flow
Condition.
FLOW CONDITION
Select a Flow conditionCharacteristics based (the default) or Supersonic.
220 |
CHAPTER 5: HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW INTERFACES
For Characteristics based the current flow situation is analyzed using the inviscid flow
characteristics at the inlet. This can be used to specify either a subsonic (Ma < 1) inlet
or a supersonic inlet (Ma > 1).
For Supersonic the inlet flow is assumed to be supersonic.
FLOW PROPER TIES
Specify the flow properties at the inlet in terms of the static or total pressure, static or
total temperature, Mach number, and flow direction. By default Static input variables
are used.
Select an Input stateStatic (the default) or Total. For either selection also enter values
or expressions for the Mach number Ma0 (dimensionless) at the inlet. The default is 1.5.
For Static enter values or expressions for the Static pressure p0,stat (SI unit: Pa) and
Static temperature T0,stat (SI unit: K).
For Total enter values or expressions for the Total pressure p0,tot (SI unit: Pa) and
Total temperature T0,tot (SI unit: K).
The relationships between the static and total states are:
-----------
p tot
1
2 1
--------- = 1 + ----------Ma
p stat
2
(5-2)
T tot
2
1
---------- = 1 + ----------- Ma
2
T stat
Select a Flow directionNormal inflow (the default) or User defined to specify an
arbitrary flow direction. Then enter the components of the direction normal nM
(dimensionless).
TU R B U L E N C E P RO P E R T I E S
This section displays when RANS is selected as Turbulence model type.
Using a turbulence model, specify the turbulence properties at an inlet. For the
Turbulent Flow, k- model, specify turbulence quantities according to one of the
following options:
Select Specify turbulence length scale and intensity to enter values or expressions for
the Turbulent intensity IT (dimensionless) and Turbulence length scale LT
(SI unit: m). IT and LT values are related to the turbulence variables via
THE HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW INTERFACES
221
3
2
k = --- ( U I T ) ,
2
3 4 k3 / 2
= C
----------LT
For Specify turbulence variables enter values or expressions for the Turbulent kinetic
energy k0 (SI unit: m2/s2) and Turbulent dissipation rate, 0 (SI unit: m2/s3).
For The High Mach Number Flow, Spalart-Allmaras Interface, enter a
value or expression for the Undamped turbulent kinematic viscosity 0 (SI
unit: m2/s).
For background on the derivation and implementation of the conditions,
see Theory for the High Mach Number Flow Interfaces.
For recommendations of physically sound values see Inlet Values for the
Turbulence Length Scale and Turbulent Intensity.
Outlet
The Outlet node includes a set of boundary conditions describing fluid flow and
temperature conditions at an outlet. The applied conditions are controlled by the Flow
Condition.
FLOW CONDITION
Select a Flow conditionHybrid (the default), Supersonic, or Subsonic.
Using a Hybrid condition, both subsonic (Ma < 1) and supersonic flow (Ma > 1)
conditions at the outlet are supported.
Select Supersonic when the flow at the outlet is known to be supersonic.
Select Subsonic when the flow at the outlet is known to be subsonic.
FLOW PROPER TIES
This section displays when the Hybrid or Subsonic flow condition is selected.
Hybrid
For Hybrid an outlet pressure is specified. This pressure is enforced at the outlet when
the flow is subsonic. Select an Input stateStatic (the default) or Total. The relation
222 |
CHAPTER 5: HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW INTERFACES
between the static and total pressure is defined in Equation 5-2.
For Static enter a value or expression for the Static pressure p0,stat (SI unit: Pa). The
default is 1 atm.
For Total enter a value or expression for the Total pressure p0,tot (SI unit: Pa). The
default is 1 atm.
Subsonic
For Subsonic select the Boundary conditionNormal Stress (the default) or Pressure.
Then enter a value or expression for the Normal stress f0 (SI unit: N/m2) or Pressure
p0 (SI unit: Pa). The defaults are 1 atm for both.
Symmetry
The Symmetry boundary condition prescribes no heat flux, no penetration and
vanishing shear stresses. The boundary condition is a combination of Dirichlet
conditions and a Neumann condition.
q n = 0,
u n = 0,
pI + ( u + ( u ) T ) 2
--- ( u )I n = 0
These conditions correspond to the ones for the Single-Phase Flow,
Laminar Flow interface. See Inlet and Outlet.
For a background on the derivation and implementation of the
conditions, see Theory for the High Mach Number Flow Interfaces.
Selecting appropriate outlet conditions for the Navier-Stokes equations is
not a trivial task. Generally, if there is something interesting happening at
an outflow boundary, extend the computational domain to include this
phenomenon.
THE HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW INTERFACES
223
Theory for the High Mach Number
Flow Interfaces
In some industrial applications involving fluid flow, the flow velocity is large enough
to introduce significant changes in the density and temperature of the fluid. This
occurs because the thermodynamic properties of the fluid are coupled. Appreciable
changes in the fluid properties are encountered as the flow velocity approaches, or
exceeds, the speed of sound. As a rule of thumb, velocities greater than 0.3 times the
speed of sound are considered to be high Mach number flows.
The High Mach Number Flow interface theory is described in this section:
Compressible Flow for All Mach Numbers
Sutherlands Law
Consistent Inlet and Outlet Conditions
Pseudo Time Stepping for High Mach Number Flow Models
References for the High Mach Number Flow Interfaces
Compressible Flow for All Mach Numbers
The High Mach Number Flow interfaces solve the following equations
----+ ( u ) = 0
t
(5-3)
u
------- + ( u )u = [ pI + ] + F
t
(5-4)
T p
T
C p ------- + ( u )T = ( q ) + :S ---- ------- ------ + ( u )p + Q
t
T p t
(5-5)
where
is the density (SI unit: kg/m3)
u is the velocity vector (SI unit: m/s)
p is the pressure (SI unit: Pa)
is the viscous stress tensor (SI unit: Pa)
224 |
CHAPTER 5: HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW INTERFACES
F is the volume force vector (SI unit: N/m3)
Cp is the specific heat capacity at constant pressure (SI unit: J/(kgK))
T is the absolute temperature (SI unit: K)
q is the heat flux vector (SI unit: W/m2)
Q contains the heat sources (SI unit: W/m3)
S is the strain-rate tensor:
1
S = --- ( u + ( u ) T )
2
These are the fully compressible Navier-Stokes equations for a simple compressible
fluid. As can be seen, the same set of equations can be assembled using, for example,
a Non-Isothermal Flow interface or by manually coupling a Single-Phase Flow
interface with a Heat Transfer interface. The difference is that the High Mach Number
Flow interface can handle flow of any Mach numbers, while the other physics interfaces
are subject to The Mach Number Limit. The Mach number is defined as
u
Ma = ------a
where a is the speed of sound. Equation 5-3 is hyperbolic whereas Equation 5-4 and
Equation 5-5 are parabolic for time-dependent flow and elliptic for stationary flow. If
diffusive effects can be neglected, as is usually the case for high-speed flows, the entire
system of equations becomes hyperbolic. When the Mach number passes through
unity, the direction of the characteristics associated with the hyperbolic system
changes. This means that new phenomena not observed for incompressible flows, such
as shock waves and expansion fans, can occur (Ref. 2). The stabilization and boundary
conditions must be adapted to the change in direction of the characteristics.
Note that the diffusive effects do not disappear entirely unless these terms are explicitly
excluded from the equations. Instead, they are confined to either boundary layers or
to shock-waves which are really thin regions with steep gradients. In the High Mach
Number Flow interfaces these thin regions are assumed to be under resolved, and the
stabilization takes this into account. If the details of these regions are of physical
interest they must be adequately resolved.
The physics interface assumes that the fluid is an ideal gas. This is necessary for the
formulation of the Consistent Inlet and Outlet Conditions. The ideal gas law relates
density and specific heats to the pressure and temperature. The viscosity and thermal
conductivity of an ideal gas can be accurately approximated using Sutherlands Law,
THEORY FOR THE HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW INTERFACES
225
which is included as an option in the High Mach Number Flow interface.
The Mach Number Limit
Sutherlands Law
Sutherlands law, or Sutherlands formula, is an approximation for how the viscosity of
gases depends on the temperature. This law is based on an idealized
intermolecular-force potential and reads (Ref. 5)
T 3 / 2 T0 + S
----= ------ ------------------- T 0
T + S
0
(5-6)
where S is an effective temperature called the Sutherland constant. Each gas has its
own Sutherland constant. Equation 5-6 is strictly valid only for single-component
gases at low pressure. It does, however, work well for air because air is mainly
composed of nitrogen and oxygen, which have very similar properties. Parameter
values for some common gases are given in Table 5-2 (Ref. 5).
TABLE 5-2: SUTHERLANDS LAW PARAMETERS FOR DYNAMIC VISCOSITY
GAS
T0
1.71610-5
Air
273
111
2.12510
-5
273
114
1.37010
-5
273
222
CO
1.65710
-5
273
136
N2
1.66310-5
273
107
O2
1.91910
-5
273
139
8.41110
-5
273
97
350
1064
Argon
C02
H2
Steam
1.1210
-5
The SI unit for 0 in Table 5-2 is Ns/m2. The SI unit for T0 and S is Kelvin (K).
Sutherlands law can also be formulated for thermal conductivity (Ref. 5):
kT 3 / 2 T0 + Sk
----= ------ ------------------ T 0
T + Sk
k0
226 |
CHAPTER 5: HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW INTERFACES
(5-7)
Values for k0, T0 and Sk for some common gases are given in Table 5-3(Ref. 5).
TABLE 5-3: SUTHERLANDS LAW PARAMETERS FOR THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY
GAS
K0
T0
S,k
Air
0.0241
273 K
194
Argon
0.0163
273
170
C02
0.0146
273
1800
CO
0.0232
273
180
N2
0.0242
273
150
O2
0.0244
273
240
H2
0.168
273
120
Steam
0.0181
300
2200
The unit for k0 in Table 5-3 is W/(mK). The unit for T0 and Sk is Kelvin (K).
Consistent Inlet and Outlet Conditions
In order to provide consistent inlet and outlet conditions for high Mach number flow,
the flow situation needs to be monitored at the boundary. Because all flow properties
are coupled, the number and combinations of boundary conditions needed for well
posedness depend on the flow statethat is, with which speeds the different flow
quantities are propagated at the boundary. For a detailed specification on the number
of physical boundary conditions needed for well posedness, see Ref. 1.
PL AN E WAVE A NA LY S IS OF INV I SCI D F LOW
On inlets a plane wave analysis of the inviscid part of the flow is used in order to apply
a consistent number of boundary conditions. The method used here is described in
Ref. 3.
Inviscid flow is governed by Eulers equations, which, provided that the solution is
smooth and neglecting the gravity terms, can be written as
Q F j Q
+ --------- -------- = 0
Q x j
t
Considering a small region close to a boundary, the Jacobian matrices can be regarded
as constant, which leads to a system of linear equations
Q F
j Q
+ --------- -------- = 0
t Q 0 x j
THEORY FOR THE HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW INTERFACES
227
where the subscript 0 denotes a reference state at the boundary. Assuming that the
state at the boundary, described by a surface normal vector i (pointing out from the
domain), is perturbed by a plane wave, the linear system of equations can be
transformed to
Q
Q
+ A 0 ------- = 0
t
where
F j
A 0 = j ---------
Q 0
and corresponds to the direction normal to the boundary. In the unsteady case,
Eulers equations are known to be hyperbolic in all flow regimes: subsonic, sonic, and
supersonic flow (Ref. 4). This implies that A0 has real-valued eigenvalues and
corresponding eigenvectors, and it can therefore be diagonalized according to
TA 0 T
= ,
ii = { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 }
The matrix T contains the (left) eigenvectors, and the matrix is a diagonal matrix
containing the eigenvalues. The eigenvalues are given exactly by
1 = i ui
2 = 1
3 = 1
4 = 1 + cs
5 = 1 cs
where cs is the speed of sound. Using the primitive variables
u
Q = v
w
p
The characteristic variables on the boundary are
228 |
CHAPTER 5: HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW INTERFACES
p
w 1 = ---------------2A
( cs )
1 v 2 u
w 2 = ------------------------------------1 1 + 2 2
1 u + 2 v
1
w 3 = --------------- ( w 1 1 + 2 2 ) 3 -------------------------------------
i i
1 1 + 2 2
(5-8)
A
1 i ui
p
w 4 = --- -------A- --------------- + ---------------2-
2c
i i ( c A )
s
s
A
1 i ui
p
w 5 = --- -------A- --------------- + ---------------2-
2 c
i i ( c A )
s
s
Each characteristic can be interpreted to describe a wave transporting some quantity.
The first one is an entropy wave while the next two correspond to vorticity waves. The
fourth and fifth, in turn, are sound waves.
Evaluating the primitive variables in Equation 5-8, the values are taken from the
outside (specified values) or from the inside (domain values) depending on the sign of
the eigenvalue corresponding to that characteristic variable. At inlets, a negative
eigenvalue implies that the characteristic is pointing into the domain and hence outside
values are used. Correspondingly, for a positive eigenvalue the inside values are used.
Variables in Equation 5-8 with a superscript A are computed as averages of the inside
and outside values.
The characteristic variables are then transformed to consistent face values of the
primitive variables on the boundary in the manner of
THEORY FOR THE HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW INTERFACES
229
b = w1 + w4 + w5
A
1
cs
2 w2
3 w3
- ( w 4 w 5 )
u 1, b = ------------------------------------- --------------- ------------------------------------- ------A
1 1 + 2 2
i i 1 1 + 2 2
u 2, b
2
cs
1 w2
3 w3
- ( w 4 w 5 )
= ------------------------------------- --------------- ------------------------------------- ------A
1 1 + 2 2
i i 1 1 + 2 2
(5-9)
cs
1
- ( w 4 w 5 )
u 3, b = --------------- w 3 1 1 + 2 2 + 3 ------A
i i
A 2
pb = ( cs ) ( w4 + w5 )
Characteristics Based Inlets
Applying this condition implies using the plane wave analysis described in Consistent
Inlet and Outlet Conditions. With this condition, a varying flow situation at the inlet
can be handled. This means that changes due to prescribed variations at the boundary,
due to upstream propagating sound waves or spurious conditions encountered during
the nonlinear solution procedure, can be handled in a consistent manner. The full flow
condition at the inlet is specified by the following properties
M in, p in, T in
(5-10)
from which the density is computed using the ideal gas law. The dependent variables
defined in Equation 5-10 are applied as the outside values used in Equation 5-8, and
the boundary values of the dependent variables are obtained from Equation 5-9.
Supersonic Inlets
Applying a supersonic inlet, the full flow at the inlet is specified using the inlet
properties in Equation 5-10. Because the flow is supersonic, all characteristic at the
inlet are known to be directed into the domain, and the boundary values of the
dependent variables are computed directly from the inlet properties.
Hybrid Outlet
When building a model, it is recommended that it is constructed so that as little as
possible happens at the outlet. In the high Mach number flow case this implies keeping
the conditions either subsonic or supersonic at the outlet. This is, however, usually not
possible. For example, often one boundary adjacent to the outlet consists of a no slip
wall, in which case a boundary layer containing a subsonic region is present. The
hybrid outlet feature adds the following weak expression:
230 |
CHAPTER 5: HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW INTERFACES
0.5 ( p p )n u
out
W NS =
( p )n u
Ma < 1
else
where is the test function for the velocity vector. This corresponds to a pressure, no
viscous stress condition in regions with subsonic flow and a no viscous stress condition
in regions with supersonic flow. When the static pressure at the outlet is not known
beforehand, it is recommended that it is set to the inlet pressure. When a converged
solution has been reached, the solution can be analyzed to find the pressure level just
outside the sonic point (Ma = 1) along the boundary. You can then apply this pressure
level instead.
Supersonic Outlet
When the outlet condition is known to be fully supersonic, the viscous stress is
specified in accordance with the equations and hence no physical condition is applied.
This is done by prescribing the boundary stress using the full stress vector:
T
2
W NS = pI + ( u + ( u ) ) --- ( u )I ( n u )
3
It is often possible to use the supersonic condition at outlets that are not strictly
supersonic but mainly supersonic (the main part of the outlet boundary contains
supersonic flow).
Pseudo Time Stepping for High Mach Number Flow Models
Pseudo time stepping is per default applied to all governing equations for stationary
problems, for 2D component models as well as 3D component models. The
momentum, continuity, energy and turbulence equations (when present) use the same
expression for the pseudo time step symbol t .
For laminar models the automatic expression for CFLloc is
1+
if ( niterCMP > 10, 1.2 min ( niterCMP 10, 12 ), 0 ) +
if ( niterCMP > 32, 9 1.3 min ( niterCMP 32, 9 ), 0 ) +
if ( niterCMP > 60, 40 1.3 min ( niterCMP 60, 9 ), 0 )
while for models with turbulent flow it is
THEORY FOR THE HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW INTERFACES
231
1+
if ( niterCMP > 10, 1.2 min ( niterCMP 10, 12 ), 0 ) +
if ( niterCMP > 120, 1.3 min ( niterCMP 120, 9 ), 0 ) +
if ( niterCMP > 220, 1.3 min ( niterCMP 220, 9 ), 0 )
The Projection Method for the Navier-Stokes Equations
Pseudo Time Stepping for Laminar Flow Models
References for the High Mach Number Flow Interfaces
1. T. Poinsot and D. Veynante, Theoretical and Numerical Combustion, 2nd ed.,
Edwards, 2005.
2. J.D. Anderson, Modern Compressible Flow, 3rd ed., McGraw-Hill, 2003.
3. J. Larsson, Numerical Simulation of Turbulent Flows for Turbine Blade Heat
Transfer Applications, Ph.D thesis, Chalmers University of Technology, 1998.
4. J.D. Tannehill, D.A. Anderson, and R.H. Pletcher, Computational Fluid
Mechanics and Heat Transfer, 2nd ed., Taylor & Francis, 1997.
5. F.M. White, Viscous Fluid Flow, 3rd ed., McGraw-Hill, 2006.
232 |
CHAPTER 5: HIGH MACH NUMBER FLOW INTERFACES
Multiphase Flow Interfaces
This chapter discusses the physics interfaces found under the Fluid Flow>Multiphase
Flow branch (
). The section Modeling Multiphase Flow helps you choose the best
physics interface to start with.
In this chapter:
The Two-Phase Flow, Level Set and Phase Field Interfaces
The Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field Interface
The Bubbly Flow Interfaces
The Mixture Model Interfaces
The Euler-Euler Model Interfaces
Theory for the Two-Phase Flow Interfaces
Theory for the Three-Phase Flow Interface
Theory for the Bubbly Flow Interfaces
Theory for the Mixture Model Interfaces
Theory for the Euler-Euler Model Interfaces
233
Modeling Multiphase Flow
In this section:
Selecting the Right Physics Interface
The Multiphase Flow Interface Options
The Relationship Between the Physics Interfaces
Coupling to Other Physics Interfaces
Certain types of multiphase flow can be described using the Phase Field
and Level Set interfaces found under the Mathematics>Moving Interface
branch ( ). In this module these physics features are already integrated
into the relevant Fluid Flow interfaces.
The Physics Interfaces in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference
Manual
Mathematics, Moving Interface Branch
Selecting the Right Physics Interface
The Multiphase Flow branch (
) included with this module has a number of subbranches
to describe momentum transport for multiphase flow. One or more physics interfaces can
be added; either singularly or in combination with other physics interfaces for applications
such as mass transfer and energy (heat) transfer.
Different types of flow require different equations to describe them. If you know the type
of flow to model, then select it directly. However, when you are not certain of the flow
type, or when it is difficult to obtain a solution, you can instead start with a simplified
model and add complexity as you build the model. Then you can successively advance
forward, comparing models and results.
The Bubbly Flow, Mixture Model and Euler-Euler Model interfaces are appropriate when
you want to simulate a flow with many particles, droplets, or bubbles immersed in a liquid.
With these physics interfaces, you do not track each particle in detail. Instead you solve for
the averaged volume fraction. If you are interested in the exact motion of individual
234 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
bubbles, including how the fluid interface deforms due to, for instance, surface tension,
use any of the Two-Phase Flow interfaces.
To model the detailed dynamics of fluid interfaces, either use the level set method or the
phase field method. In general, it is not obvious which one of these to use when the flow
is convection-dominating. However when the flow is diffusion-dominating, for example,
phase-separation, only phase field should be used.
Three-phase flow can be simulated using the Laminar Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field
interface.
The Multiphase Flow Interface Options
For any of the Multiphase Flow interfaces, you can assume either laminar or turbulent flow
as the starting point. This enables you to make the appropriate mathematical model
assumptions required to solve the flow. Turbulence is modeled using the standard k-
model
The Relationship Between the Physics Interfaces
Several of the interfaces vary only by one or two default settings (see Table 6-1, Table 6-2,
and Table 6-4) in the Physical Model section, which are selected either from a check box
or a list. For the Multiphase Flow branch, the Bubbly Flow (bf), Mixture Model (mm) and
Euler-Euler Model (ee) subbranches have two physics interfaces each and both have the same
Name. All the Two-Phase Flow interfaces contain a multiphysics coupling feature with a
name as (tpf). The Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field branch contains a single interface for
laminar flow.
BUBBLY FLOW
TABLE 6-1: BUBBLY FLOW PHYSICAL MODEL DEFAULT SETTINGS
PHYSICS INTERFACE LABEL
NAME
LOW GAS
CONCENTRATION
TURBULENT
MODEL TYPE
SOLVE FOR
INTERFACIAL AREA
Laminar Bubbly Flow
bf
Yes
None
No
Turbulent Bubbly Flow
bf
Yes
RANS, k-
No
The Bubbly Flow (
) branch interfaces are used primarily to model two-phase flow where
the fluids are gas-liquid mixtures, and gas content is less than 10%. The Laminar Bubbly
Flow Interface (
) and The Turbulent Bubbly Flow Interface (
) solve the flow
equations, whether described by the Navier-Stokes equations or the RANS equations with
the k- turbulence model, and where the momentum equation is corrected by a term
MODELING MULTIPHASE FLOW
235
induced by the slip velocity. The slip velocity can be described by the
Hadamard-Rybczynski drag law for small spherical bubbles, a nonlinear drag law taking
surface tension into account for larger bubbles, or by defining it on your own.
By default, the physics interfaces assume that the volume fraction of the gas is less than 0.1.
It is then valid to approximate the liquid velocity as incompressible. This is significantly
easier to solve numerically. It is possible, though, to use the complete continuity equation.
The physics interfaces also allow you to define your own relations for the density of both
phases and for the dynamic viscosity of the gas phase. Definitions of non-Newtonian fluid
flow through the power law and Carreau models are however not possible. You can also
model mass transfer between the two phases, using the two-film theory or your own
expression for interfacial mass transfer.
MIXTURE MODEL INTERFACES
TABLE 6-2: MIXTURE MODEL PHYSICAL MODEL DEFAULT SETTINGS
PHYSICS INTERFACE
LABEL
NAME
DISPERSED
PHASE
SLIP MODEL
TURBULENCE
MODEL TYPE
SOLVE FOR
INTERFACIAL
AREA
Mixture Model,
Laminar Flow
mm
Solid
particles
Homogeneous
flow
None
No
Mixture Model,
Turbulent Flow
mm
Solid
particles
Homogeneous
flow
RANS, k-
No
The Mixture Model (
) branch interfaces are similar to the Bubbly Flow interfaces except
that both phases are assumed to be incompressible. Examples include solid particles
dispersed in a liquid, and liquid droplets dispersed in another liquid when the two liquids
are immiscible.
Like the Bubbly Flow interfaces, The Mixture Model, Laminar Flow Interface (
) and
The Mixture Model, Turbulent Flow Interface (
) solve the flow equations, whether
described by the Navier-Stokes equations or the RANS equations with the k- turbulence
model, and where the momentum equation is corrected by a term induced by the slip
velocity. The slip velocity can be described by the Hadamard-Rybczynski,
Schiller-Naumann or Haider-Levenspiel method, or by defining it on your own.
These physics interfaces also allow you to define your own relations for the dynamic
viscosity and density of both phases. Definitions of non-Newtonian fluid flow through the
power law and Carreau models are however not possible. The dynamic viscosity of the
mixture can either be of Krieger type (which uses a maximum packing concentration),
volume-averaged (for gas-liquid, liquid-liquid systems), or a user-defined expression.
236 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
You can also describe other material properties such as density by entering equations that
describe this term as a function of other parameters like material concentration, pressure,
or temperature. The physics interfaces also enable you to model mass transfer between the
two phases, using the two-film theory or your own expression for interfacial mass transfer.
EULER-EULER MODEL INTERFACES
TABLE 6-3: EULER-EULER MODEL PHYSICAL MODEL DEFAULT SETTINGS
PHYSICS INTERFACE LABEL
NAME
DIPERSED
PHASE
DRAG MODEL
TURBULENCE
MODEL TYPE
Euler-Euler Model,
Laminar Flow
ee
Solid
particles
Schiller-Naumann
None
Euler-Euler Model,
Turbulent Flow
ee
Solid
particles
Schiller-Naumann
RANS, k-
The Euler-Euler Model (
) branch interfaces are used to model the flow of two
continuous and fully interpenetrating phases. For both phases the conservation equations
are averaged over volumes, which are small compared to the computational domain, but
large compared to the dispersed phase particles, droplets or bubbles. The Euler-Euler
Model, Laminar Flow interface solves two sets of conservation equations, one for each
phase. The Euler-Euler Model, Turbulent Flow Interface additionally solves transport
equations for the turbulence quantities, either using a mixture averaged turbulence models
or solving separate transport equations for the turbulence quantities of each phase. The
drag model can be described by the Hadamard-Rybczynski, Schiller-Naumann,
Haider-Levenspiel or Gidaspow method, or by defining it on your own.
These physics interfaces also allow you to define your own relations for the dynamic
viscosity and density of both phases. Definitions of non-Newtonian fluid flow through the
power law and Carreau models are however not possible. Predefined expressions for the
dynamic viscosity of Krieger type (which uses a maximum packing concentration), are
available.
You can also describe other material properties such as density by entering equations that
describe this term as a function of other parameters like material concentration, pressure,
or temperature.
MODELING MULTIPHASE FLOW
237
TW O - P H A S E F L O W A N D T H R E E - P H A S E F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
TABLE 6-4: TWO-PHASE FLOW AND THREE-PHASE FLOW PHYSICAL MODEL DEFAULT SETTINGS
PHYSICS
INTERFACE LABEL
NAME
MULTIPHASE
FLOW MODEL
COMPRESSIBILITY
TURBULENCE
MODEL TYPE
NEGLECT
INERTIAL
TERM
(STOKES
FLOW)
Laminar,
Two-Phase Flow,
Level Set
Two-phase flow,
level set
Incompressible
flow
None
False
Turbulent,
Two-Phase Flow,
Level Set
Two-phase flow,
level set
Incompressible
flow
RANS, k-
False
Laminar,
Two-Phase Flow,
Phase Field
Two-phase flow,
phase field
Incompressible
flow
None
False
Turbulent,
Two-Phase Flow,
Phase Field
Two-phase flow,
phase field
Incompressible
flow
RANS, k-
False
Laminar
Three-Phase
Flow, Phase Field
Three-phase
flow, phase field
Incompressible
flow
None
RANS, k-
RANS, k-
False
Two-Phase Flow, Level Set
The Laminar Two-Phase Flow, Level Set Interface (
) and The Turbulent Two-Phase
Flow, Level Set Interface (
), found under the Two-Phase Flow, Level Set branch (
),
are used primarily to model two fluids separated by a fluid interface. The moving interface
is tracked in detail using the level set method. Surface tension acting on the fluid interface
is automatically included in the fluid-flow equations.
Like for other Fluid Flow interfaces, compressible flow is possible to model for speeds less
than Mach 0.3 in the Two-Phase Flow, Level Set interface. You can also choose to model
incompressible flow, and simplify the equations to be solved. Stokes law is an option.
Specify the density and viscosity for each of the two fluids. For any of the two fluids, you
can easily use non-Newtonian models based on the power law or Carreau model, or by
using an arbitrary user-defined expression.
Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field
The Laminar Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field Interface (
) and The Turbulent
Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field Interface (
) found under the Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field
branch (
), also model two fluids separated by a fluid interface. You can easily switch
238 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
between the physics interfaces, which can be useful if you are not sure which physics
interface provides the best description. Library surface tension coefficients between a
number of common substances are also available.
Like for other Fluid Flow interfaces, compressible flow is possible to model for speeds less
than Mach 0.3 in the Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field interfaces. You can also model
incompressible flow and simplify the equations to be solved. Stokes flow is also an option.
Specify the density and viscosity for each of the two fluids. For any of the two fluids, you
can easily use non-Newtonian models based on the power law or Carreau model, or by
using an arbitrary user-defined expression.
Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field
The Laminar Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field Interface found under the Three-Phase Flow,
Phase Field branch (
) models flows of three incompressible fluids separated by sharp
interfaces. Library surface tension coefficients between a number of common substances
are also available.
Specify the density and viscosity for each of the three fluids. For any of the fluids, you can
easily use non-Newtonian models based on the power law or Carreau model, or by using
an arbitrary user-defined expression.
Coupling to Other Physics Interfaces
Often, you are simulating applications that couple fluid flow to another type of
phenomenon described in another physics interface. Although this is not often another
type of flow, it can still involve physics interfaces supported in the CFD Module or in the
COMSOL Multiphysics base package. This typically occurs in cases where applications
include chemical reactions and mass transport, as included in Chemical Species Transport
Interfaces, or energy transport, found in the Heat Transfer and Non-Isothermal Flow
Interfaces chapter.
More extensive descriptions of heat transfer, such as those involving radiation, can be
found in the Heat Transfer Module, while tools for modeling chemical reactions and mass
transport are available in the Chemical Reaction Engineering Module.
MODELING MULTIPHASE FLOW
239
The Two-Phase Flow, Level Set and
Phase Field Interfaces
The following sections list all the physics interfaces and the physics features associated with
them under the Multiphase Flow branch (
). The descriptions follow a structured order
as defined by the order in the branch. Because many of the physics interfaces are integrated
with each other, some nodes described also cross reference to other physics interfaces.
Selecting the Right Physics Interface
This section includes the following topics:
The Laminar Two-Phase Flow, Level Set Interface
The Turbulent Two-Phase Flow, Level Set Interface
Two-Phase Flow, Level Set Coupling Features
The Wetted Wall Coupling Feature
The Laminar Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field Interface
The Turbulent Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field Interface
The Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field Coupling Features
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Laminar and Turbulent Flow,
Two-Phase, Level Set and Phase Field Interfaces
Mathematics, Moving Interface Branch
The Laminar Two-Phase Flow, Level Set Interface
The Laminar Two-Phase Flow, Level Set interface (
) found under the Multiphase
Flow>Two-Phase Flow, Level Set branch (
), is a multiphysics interface designed to track
the interface between two immiscible fluids. The flow is assumed to be laminar, that is, to
be of low to moderate Reynolds number. The fluids can be incompressible or
compressible.
240 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
When adding the Laminar Two-Phase Flow, Level Set multiphysics interface, a Laminar Flow
and a Level Set interface are added to the Model Builder. In addition the Multiphysics node,
a multiphysics coupling feature Two-Phase Flow, Level Set is added automatically. Another
multiphysics coupling feature Wetted Wall can be added when needed.
Simulations using the Laminar Two-Phase Flow, Level Set interface are always
time-dependent since the position of an interface is almost always dependent of its history.
INTERFACE PROPERTIES
Turbulence Model
By default the Turbulence model type selected is None. If RANS is selected, the property
Turbulence model will be activated, and allow to select k- or k- turbulent model.
Multiphysics Coupling Option
Laminar Flow interface coupled to a Laminar Two-Phase Flow, Level Set interface
contains a Multiphysics coupling option property to control the form of the continuity
equation. Adding the Laminar Two-Phase Flow, Level Set interface Multiphysics coupling
option is automatically set to Level Set. In this case the following form of the continuity
equation, appropriate for high density difference mixtures is used
u = 0
(6-1)
When Multiphysics coupling option is set to None, the form of the continuity equation
follows the definitions in Theory for the Single-Phase Flow Interfaces.
Theory for the Two-Phase Flow Interfaces
Theory for the Single-Phase Flow Interfaces
The Turbulent Two-Phase Flow, Level Set Interface
The Turbulent Two-Phase Flow, Level Set interface (
) found under the Multiphase
Flow>Two-Phase Flow, Level Set branch (
), is a multiphysics interface designed to track
the interface between two immiscible fluids. The flow is assumed to be laminar, that is, to
be of low to moderate Reynolds number. The fluids can be incompressible or
compressible.
When adding the Turbulent Two-Phase Flow, Level Set multiphysics interface, a Laminar Flow
and a Level Set interface are added to the Model Builder. In addition the Multiphysics node,
T H E TW O - P H A S E F L O W , L E V E L S E T A N D P H A S E F I E L D I N T E R F A C E S
241
a multiphysics coupling feature Two-Phase Flow, Level Set is added automatically. Another
multiphysics coupling feature Wetted Wall can be added when needed.
Simulations using the Turbulent Two-Phase Flow, Level Set interface are always
time-dependent since the position of an interface is almost always dependent of its history.
INTERFACE PROPERTIES
Turbulence Model
By default the Turbulence model type selected is RANS. The property Turbulence model will
be activated, and allow to select k- or k- turbulent model. If None is selected for
Turbulence model type, it becomes a laminar model.
Multiphysics coupling option
Laminar Flow interface coupled to a Laminar Two-Phase Flow, Level Set interface
contains a Multiphysics coupling option property to control the form of the continuity
equation. Adding the Laminar Two-Phase Flow, Level Set interface Multiphysics coupling
option is automatically set to Level Set. In this case the following form of the continuity
equation, appropriate for high density difference mixtures is used
u = 0
(6-2)
When Multiphysics coupling option is set to None, the form of the continuity equation
follows the definitions in Theory for the Single-Phase Flow Interfaces.
Theory for the Two-Phase Flow Interfaces
Theory for the Single-Phase Flow Interfaces
Two-Phase Flow, Level Set Coupling Features
The Laminar Two-Phase Flow, Level Set, (
) and Turbulent Two-Phase Flow, Level Set,
(
) interfaces contain a multiphysics coupling feature, Two-Phase Flow, Level Set, which
is added automatically.
The multiphysics coupling feature Two-Phase Flow, Level Set defines density and dynamic
viscosity of the flow used in the Laminar Flow and Turbulent Flow interfaces, and defines the
surface tension on the interface in form of a volume force used in momentum equation.
It also enable the Level set interface use the velocity field calculated from Laminar Flow or
Turbulent Flow interfaces to convect the interface.
242 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
SETTINGS
The Label is the default multiphysics coupling feature name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the coupling node.
Refer to such variables in expressions using the pattern <name>.<variable_name>. In
order to distinguish between variables belonging to different coupling nodes or physics
interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and underscores (_) are
permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first multiphysics coupling feature Two-Phase Flow, Level Set in
the model) is tpf1.
DOMAIN SELECTION
When nodes are added from the context menu, you can select All domains (the default) or
select Manual from the Selection list to choose specific domains.
FLUID PROPERTIES
Use the corresponding section to specify the properties of the two fluids. The fluids are
denoted Fluid 1 and Fluid 2 respectively.
To specify the properties of Fluid 1from a material, select the appropriate material in the
Fluid 1 list. Also make sure that the Density of fluid 11 and Dynamic viscosity of fluid 11
are both set to From Material.
The non-Newtonian power-law and Carreau models can alternatively be used to specify
the dynamic viscosities of the two fluids.
To instead apply a variable or expression for the density or dynamic viscosity for Fluid A,
select User defined in the Density of fluid 1 1 or the Dynamic viscosity of fluid 1 1 drop
down list and enter the expression in the corresponding edit field.
Similarly, the properties of Fluid 2 can be specified.
Care should be taken when using the Domain Material setting for the
material properties for Fluid 1 and Fluid 2.
The material properties are obtained from the domain irrespective of the location of the
interface. If two different materials are selected in domains 1 and 2, with the phase
boundary initially coincident with the domain boundary, the model has convergence issues
once the phase boundary moves away from the domain boundary. This is because a density
discontinuity and a viscosity discontinuity occurs at the boundary separating the two
T H E TW O - P H A S E F L O W , L E V E L S E T A N D P H A S E F I E L D I N T E R F A C E S
243
fluids. For this reason selecting the material directly is recommended when setting the
material properties for Fluid 1 and Fluid 2.
S U R F A C E TE N S I O N
Select the Neglect surface tension in momentum equation check box to neglect surface
tension.
Select a Surface tension coefficient (SI unit: N/m):
To use a predefined expression, select Library coefficient, liquid/gas interface or Library
coefficient, liquid/liquid interface. Then select an option from the list that displays below
(for example, Water/Air, Glycerol/Air and so forth).
For User defined enter a value or expression for the surface tension coefficient (SI unit:
N/m).
COUPLED INTERFACES
This section controls which individual interfaces are coupled by the current coupling
feature. If a physics interface is deleted and then added to the model again, then in order
to reestablish the coupling, you need to choose the correct physics interface again from
the Fluid flow or Moving interfaces lists.
The Wetted Wall Coupling Feature
The Laminar Two-Phase Flow, Level Set, (
) and Turbulent Two-Phase Flow, Level Set,
(
) interfaces contain an optional multiphysics coupling boundary feature, Wetted Wall.
It is an exclusive feature which overrides the Wall feature of Laminar Flow or Turbulence
Flow interfaces together with the No Flow feature of Level Set interface.
The Wetted wall boundary condition is suitable for walls in contact with the fluid-fluid
interface. If this boundary condition is used, the fluid-fluid interface can move along the
wall.
This boundary condition enforces the no-penetration condition u nwall = 0 and adds a
frictional force of the form
F fr = --- u
where is the slip length. For numerical calculations it is suitable to set = h, where h is
the mesh element size. The boundary condition does not set the tangential velocity
component to zero; however, the extrapolated tangential velocity component is 0 at a
distance outside the wall (see Figure 6-1).
244 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Finally, the boundary condition adds the following weak boundary term:
test ( u ) [ ( nwall ( n cos w ) ) ] dS
The boundary term results from the partial integration of the surface tension force in the
momentum equation. Define the contact angle w (that is, the angle between the fluid
interface and the wall). Figure 6-1 illustrates the definition of the contact angle.
Fluid 1
Wall
Wall
Fluid 2
Figure 6-1: Definition of the contact angle at interface/wall contact points (left) and an
illustration of the slip length (right).
SETTINGS
The Label is the default multiphysics coupling feature name.
The default Name (for the first multiphysics coupling feature Wetted Wall in the model) is
ww1.
DOMAIN SELECTION
When nodes are added from the context menu, you can select All domains (the default) or
select Manual from the Selection list to choose specific domains.
WETTED WALL
Here define the following two properties for the wetted wall:
Enter a value or expression for the Contact angle w. The default is pi/2 (/2) rad.
Enter a value or expression for the Slip length (SI unit: m). The default is h, which is
the variable for the local mesh element size h.
Theory for the Two-Phase Flow Interfaces
T H E TW O - P H A S E F L O W , L E V E L S E T A N D P H A S E F I E L D I N T E R F A C E S
245
The Laminar Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field Interface
The Laminar Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field interface (
) found under the Multiphase
Flow>Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field branch (
), is a multiphysics interface designed to track
the interface between two immiscible fluids. The flow is assumed to be laminar, that is, to
be of low to moderate Reynolds number. The fluids can be incompressible or
compressible.
When adding the Laminar Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field multiphysics interface, a Laminar
Flow and a Phase Field interface are added to the Model Builder. In addition the
Multiphysics node, a multiphysics coupling feature Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field is added
automatically. Note that unlike the Two-Phase Flow, Level Set interfaces, the wetted wall
function here is not implemented as a separated multiphase coupling boundary feature,
but as the default Wetted Wall feature of Phase Field interface.
Wetted Wall
Simulations using the Laminar Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field interface are always
time-dependent since the position of an interface is almost always dependent of its history.
INTERFACE PROPERTIES
Turbulence Model
By default the Turbulence model type selected is None. If RANS is selected, the property
Turbulence model will be activated, and allow to select k- or k- turbulent model.
Multiphysics Coupling Option
Laminar Flow or Turbulent Flow interface coupled to a Laminar or Turbulent Two-Phase
Flow, Phase Field interface contains a Multiphysics coupling option property to control the
form of the continuity equation. Adding the Laminar or Turbulent Two-Phase Flow,
Phase Field interface, a Multiphysics coupling option is automatically set to Phase Field. In
this case the following form of the continuity equation, appropriate for high density
difference mixtures is used
u = 0
246 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
(6-3)
When Multiphysics coupling option is set to None, the form of the continuity equation
follows the definitions in Theory for the Single-Phase Flow Interfaces
Theory for the Two-Phase Flow Interfaces
The Turbulent Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field Interface
The Tubulent Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field interface (
) found under the Multiphase
Flow>Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field branch (
), is a multiphysics interface designed to track
the interface between two immiscible fluids. The flow is assumed to be laminar, that is, to
be of low to moderate Reynolds number. The fluids can be incompressible or
compressible.
When adding the Turbulent Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field multiphysics interface, a Turbulent
Flow and a Phase Field interface are added to the Model Builder. In addition the
Multiphysics node, a multiphysics coupling feature Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field is added
automatically. Note that unlike the Two-Phase Flow, Level Set interfaces, the wetted wall
function here is not implemented as a separated multiphase coupling boundary feature,
but as the default Wetted Wall feature of Phase Field interface.
Wetted Wall
Simulations using the Laminar Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field interface are always
time-dependent since the position of an interface is almost always dependent of its history.
INTERFACE PROPERTIES
Turbulence Model
By default the Turbulence model type selected is RANS. The property Turbulence model
allows the user to select k- or k- turbulent model If RANS is selected. When None is
selected for Turbulence model type, it will become a laminar model.
Multiphysics Coupling Option
Laminar Flow or Turbulent Flow interface coupled to a Laminar or Turbulent Two-Phase
Flow, Phase Field interface contains a Multiphysics coupling option property to control the
form of the continuity equation. Adding the Laminar or Turbulent Two-Phase Flow,
T H E TW O - P H A S E F L O W , L E V E L S E T A N D P H A S E F I E L D I N T E R F A C E S
247
Phase Field interface, a Multiphysics coupling option is automatically set to Phase Field. In
this case the following form of the continuity equation, appropriate for high density
difference mixtures is used
u = 0
(6-4)
When Multiphysics coupling option is set to None, the form of the continuity equation
follows the definitions in Theory for the Single-Phase Flow Interfaces
Theory for the Two-Phase Flow Interfaces
The Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field Coupling Features
The Laminar Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field, (
) and Turbulent Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field,
(
) interfaces contain a multiphysics coupling feature, Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field, which
is added automatically.
The multiphysics coupling feature Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field defines density and dynamic
viscosity of the flow used in the Laminar Flow and Turbulent Flow interfaces, and defines the
surface tension on the interface in form of a volume force used in momentum equation.
It also enable the Phase Field interface use the velocity field calculated from Laminar Flow
or Turbulent Flow interfaces to convect the interface.
SETTINGS
The Label is the default multiphysics coupling feature name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the coupling node.
Refer to such variables in expressions using the pattern <name>.<variable_name>. In
order to distinguish between variables belonging to different coupling nodes or physics
interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and underscores (_) are
permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first multiphysics coupling feature Two-Phase Flow, Phase Field
in the model) is tpf1.
DOMAIN SELECTION
When nodes are added from the context menu, you can select All domains (the default) or
select Manual from the Selection list to choose specific domains.
248 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
FLUID PROPERTIES
Use the corresponding section to specify the properties of the two fluids. The fluids are
denoted Fluid 1 and Fluid 2 respectively.
To specify the properties of Fluid 1from a material, select the appropriate material in the
Fluid 1 list. Also make sure that the Density of fluid 11 and Dynamic viscosity of fluid 11
are both set to From Material.
The non-Newtonian power-law and Carreau models can alternatively be used to specify
the dynamic viscosities of the two fluids.
To instead apply a variable or expression for the density or dynamic viscosity for Fluid A,
select User defined in the Density of fluid 1 1 or the Dynamic viscosity of fluid 1 1 drop
down list and enter the expression in the corresponding edit field.
Similarly, the properties of Fluid 2 can be specified.
Care should be taken when using the Domain Material setting for the
material properties for Fluid 1 and Fluid 2.
The material properties are obtained from the domain irrespective of the location of the
interface. If two different materials are selected in domains 1 and 2, with the phase
boundary initially coincident with the domain boundary, the model has convergence issues
once the phase boundary moves away from the domain boundary. This is because a density
discontinuity and a viscosity discontinuity occurs at the boundary separating the two
fluids. For this reason selecting the material directly is recommended when setting the
material properties for Fluid 1 and Fluid 2.
The fluid defined as Fluid 1 affects the wetting characteristics on wetted walls. See the
Wetted Wall node for details.
S U R F A C E TE N S I O N
Select the Neglect surface tension in momentum equation check box to neglect surface
tension.
T H E TW O - P H A S E F L O W , L E V E L S E T A N D P H A S E F I E L D I N T E R F A C E S
249
Select a Surface tension coefficient (SI unit: N/m):
To use a predefined expression, select Library coefficient, liquid/gas interface or Library
coefficient, liquid/liquid interface. Then select an option from the list that displays below
(for example, Water/Air, Glycerol/Air and so forth).
For User defined enter a value or expression for the surface tension coefficient (SI unit:
N/m).
COUPLED INTERFACES
This section controls which individual interfaces are coupled by the current coupling
feature. If a physics interface is deleted and then added to the model again, then in order
to reestablish the coupling, you need to choose the correct physics interface again from
the Fluid flow or Moving interfaces lists.
Theory for the Two-Phase Flow Interfaces
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Laminar and
Turbulent Flow, Two-Phase, Level Set and Phase Field Interfaces
The Two-Phase Flow, Level Set and Phase Field Interfaces are multiphysics interfaces
combining Laminar Flow or Turbulent Flow interfaces together with Level Set or Phase
Field interfaces.
LAMINAR FLOW
The available physics features for the Laminar Flow interface are listed in Domain,
Boundary, Pair, and Point Nodes for Single-Phase Flow
TU R B U L E N T L OW
The available physics features for The Turbulent Flow Interface are also listed in Domain,
Boundary, Pair, and Point Nodes for Single-Phase Flow.
LEVEL SET
The available physics features for the Level Set Interface are listed in Domain, Boundary,
and Pair Nodes for the Level Set Interface.
250 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
PHASE FIELD
The available physics features for the Phase Field Interface are listed in Domain, Boundary,
and Pair Nodes for the Phase Field Interface.
All domain, boundary, point, and pair nodes are available from the Physics ribbon toolbar
(Windows users), Physics context menu (Mac or Linux users), or by right-clicking to access
the context menu (all users).
T H E TW O - P H A S E F L O W , L E V E L S E T A N D P H A S E F I E L D I N T E R F A C E S
251
The Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field
Interface
This section includes the following topics:
The Laminar Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field Interface
The Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field Coupling Feature
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Laminar Three-Phase Flow, Phase
Field Interface
Mathematics, Moving Interface Branch
The Laminar Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field Interface
The Laminar Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field interface (
), found under the Multiphase
Flow> Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field branch (
), is a multiphysics interface designed to
track the interfaces between three immiscible and incompressible fluids. The flow is
assumed to be laminar, that is, to be of low to moderate Reynolds number. The density of
each fluid is assumed to be constant, but the there is no restriction on the density
differences between the separate fluids.
When adding the Laminar Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field multiphysics interface, a Laminar
Flow and a Ternary Phase Field interface are added to the Model Builder. In addition the
Multiphysics node, including the multiphysics coupling feature Three-Phase Flow, Phase
Field is added.
The Multiphysics Node in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference
Manual.
Simulations using the Laminar Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field interface are always
time-dependent since the position of an interface is almost always dependent of its history.
252 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
INTERFACE PROPERTIES
Turbulence Model
Since the Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field interface assumes laminar flow, the Turbulence
Model property in the Laminar Flow interface is deactivated when the interface is added
as a part of a multiphysics interface.
Multiphysics Coupling Option
Laminar Flow interfaces coupled to a Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field interface contains a
Multiphysics coupling option property to control the form of the continuity equation.
Adding the Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field interface Multiphysics coupling option is
automatically set to Ternary Phase Field. In this case the following form of the continuity
equation, appropriate for high density difference mixtures is used
-------------log + u + u log = 0
t
(6-5)
When Multiphysics coupling option is set to None, the form of the continuity equation
follows the definitions in Theory for the Single-Phase Flow Interfaces.
The Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field Coupling Feature
Use the Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field (
) multiphysics coupling to simulate the flow of
a three immiscible fluids while explicitly tracking the interface separating each pair of the
fluids.
The Three-Phase Flow interface solves Navier-Stokes equations for the conservation of
momentum, and a continuity equation for the conservation of mass. The positions of the
interfaces separating the fluid phases are tracked by solving four additional transport
equations; two equations governing phase field variables, and two equations for the
corresponding generalized chemical potentials. The movement of the fluid-fluid interfaces
is determined by minimization of free energy.
SETTINGS
The Label is the default multiphysics coupling feature name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the coupling node.
Refer to such variables in expressions using the pattern <name>.<variable_name>. In
order to distinguish between variables belonging to different coupling nodes or physics
interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and underscores (_) are
permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
T H E T H RE E - P H AS E F L OW, P H AS E F I E L D I N T E R F A C E
253
The default Name (for the first multiphysics coupling feature in the model) is tfpf1.
DOMAIN SELECTION
When nodes are added from the context menu, you can select Manual (the default) from
the Selection list to choose specific domains to define the three-phase flow, or select All
domains as needed.
FLUID PROPERTIES
Use the corresponding section to specify the properties of all three fluids. The fluids are
denoted Fluid A, Fluid B, and Fluid C respectively.
To specify the properties of Fluid A from a material, select the appropriate material in the
Fluid A list. Also make sure that the Density of fluid A A and Dynamic viscosity of fluid A A
are both set to From Material.
The non-Newtonian power-law and Carreau models can alternatively be used to specify
the dynamic viscosities of the three fluids.
To instead apply a variable or expression for the density or dynamic viscosity for Fluid A,
select User defined in the Density of fluid A A or the Dynamic viscosity of fluid A A drop
down list and enter the expression in the corresponding edit field.
COUPLED INTERFACES
This section controls which individual interfaces are coupled by the current coupling
feature. If a physics interface is deleted and then added to the model again, then in order
to reestablish the coupling, you need to choose the correct physics interface again from
the Fluid flow or Moving interfaces lists.
Theory for the Two-Phase Flow Interfaces
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Laminar Three-Phase
Flow, Phase Field Interface
The Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field Interface is a multiphysics interface combining The
Laminar Flow Interface and the The Ternary Phase Field Interface.
254 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
LAMINAR FLOW
The available physics features for The Laminar Flow Interface are listed in Domain,
Boundary, Pair, and Point Nodes for Single-Phase Flow
TE R N A R Y P H A S E - F I E L D
The available physics features for The Ternary Phase Field Interface are listed in Domain,
Boundary, and Pair Nodes for the Ternary Phase Field Interface.
All domain, boundary, point, and pair nodes are available from the Physics ribbon toolbar
(Windows users), Physics context menu (Mac or Linux users), or by right-clicking to access
the context menu (all users).
T H E T H RE E - P H AS E F L OW, P H AS E F I E L D I N T E R F A C E
255
The Bubbly Flow Interfaces
In this section:
The Laminar Bubbly Flow Interface
The Turbulent Bubbly Flow Interface
Domain and Boundary Nodes for the Laminar and Turbulent Bubbly Flow Interfaces
The Laminar Bubbly Flow Interface
The Laminar Bubbly Flow (bf) interface (
), found under the Multiphase Flow>Bubbly Flow
branch (
) when adding a physics interface, is used to model the flow of liquids with
dispersed bubbles at low and moderate Reynolds numbers.
It is assumed that the bubbles only occupy a small volume fraction and that they always
travel with their terminal velocity. It is thereby possible to solve only one set of
Navier-Stokes equations for the liquid phase and to let the velocity of the bubbles be
guided by a slip model. The pressure distribution is computed from a mixture-averaged
continuity equation. The volume fraction of bubbles is tracked by solving a transport
equation for the effective gas density.
The physics interface can also model the distribution of the number density, that is, the
number of bubbles per unit volume which in turn can be used to calculate the interfacial
area, useful when simulating chemical reactions in the mixture.
The main physics node is the Fluid Properties feature, which adds the equations for
laminar bubbly flow and provides an interface for defining the fluid materials for the liquid
and the gas and the slip velocity model to use.
When this physics interface is added, the following default physics nodes are also added in
the Model BuilderLaminar Bubbly Flow, Fluid Properties, Wall (the default boundary types
are No slip for the liquid and No gas flux for the gas), and Initial Values. Then, from the
Physics toolbar, add other nodes that implement, for example, boundary conditions and
volume forces. You can also right-click Laminar Bubbly Flow to select physics features from
the context menu.
SETTINGS
The Label is the default physics interface name.
256 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the physics interface.
Refer to such physics interface variables in expressions using the pattern
<name>.<variable_name>. In order to distinguish between variables belonging to
different physics interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and
underscores (_) are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first physics interface in the model) is bf.
PHYSICAL MODEL
Specify if the gas concentration is low and whether or not to solve for the interfacial area.
Low Gas Concentration
The Low gas concentration check box is selected by default. This approximation is valid if
the gas volume fraction is low and its density does not have any significant effects on the
continuity equation in The Bubbly Flow Equations (Equation 6-22 becomes
Equation 6-23).
Turbulence Model Type
By default no turbulence model is used.
Solve For Interfacial Area
To add a transport equation for the bubble density in order to determine the interfacial
area, select the Solve for interfacial area check box.
Reference Pressure Level
Enter a Reference pressure level pref (SI unit: Pa). The default value is 1[atm].
Swirl Flow
For 2D axisymmetric models, select the Swirl flow check box to include the swirl velocity
componentthat is, the velocity component u in the azimuthal direction. While u can
be nonzero, there can be no gradients in the direction. Also see General Single-Phase
Flow Theory (2D Axisymmetric Formulations).
D EPENDE N T VAR IA BL ES
The dependent variables (field variables) are the Velocity field, liquid phase u (SI unit:
m/s), the Pressure p (SI unit: Pa), the Effective gas density rhogeff (SI unit: kg/m3), and
the Number density, gas phase nd (SI unit: 1/m3). The names can be changed but the
names of fields and dependent variables must be unique within a component.
THE BUBBLY FLOW INTERFACES
257
CONSISTENT STABILIZATION AND INCONSISTENT STABILIZATION
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Stabilization. This section
contains the settings for stabilization of the momentum transport (the fluid flow) in the
Momentum transport area and stabilization of the equation for the dispersed phase in the
Gas phase transport area.
Isotropic diffusion (shock capturing, O(h2)) requires a scale for the effective gas density.
An appropriate scale is the maximum value of the gas volume fraction.
ADVANCED SETTINGS
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
Normally these settings do not need to be changed.
Select the Use pseudo time stepping for stationary equation form check box to add pseudo
time derivatives to the equation when the Stationary equation form is used. When selected,
also choose a CFL number expressionAutomatic (the default) or Manual. Automatic sets the
local CFL number (from the CourantFriedrichsLewy condition) to the built-in variable
CFLCMP which in turn triggers a PID regulator for the CFL number. For Manual enter a
Local CFL number CFLloc (dimensionless).
Pseudo Time Stepping for Laminar Flow Models in this guide and
Pseudo Time Stepping in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference
Manual
Domain and Boundary Nodes for the Laminar and Turbulent Bubbly
Flow Interfaces
Theory for the Bubbly Flow Interfaces
The Turbulent Bubbly Flow Interface
The Turbulent Bubbly Flow Interface
The Turbulent Bubbly Flow (bf) interface (
), found under the Multiphase Flow>Bubbly
Flow branch (
) when adding a physics interface, is used to model the flow of liquids
with dispersed bubbles at high Reynolds numbers.
It is assumed that the bubbles only occupy a small volume fraction and that they always
travel with their terminal velocity. It is thereby possible to solve only one set of
Navier-Stokes equations for the liquid phase and to let the velocity of the bubbles be
guided by a slip model. The pressure distribution is calculated from a mixture-averaged
continuity equation. The volume fraction of bubbles is tracked by solving a transport
258 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
equation for the effective gas density. Turbulence effects are modeled using the standard
two-equation k- model with realizability constraints and bubble-induced turbulence
production. Flow close to walls is modeled using wall functions.
The physics interface can also model the distribution of the number density (that is, the
number of bubbles per unit volume), which in turn can be used to calculate the interfacial
area, useful when simulating chemical reactions in the mixture.
The main physics node is the Fluid Properties feature, which adds the equations for
turbulent bubbly flow and provides an interface for defining the fluid materials for the
liquid and the gas and the slip velocity model to use.
When this physics interface is added, the following default physics nodes are also added in
the Model BuilderTurbulent Bubbly Flow, Fluid Properties, Wall (the default boundary types
are Wall functions for the liquid and No gas flux for the gas), and Initial Values.
Then, from the Physics toolbar, add other nodes that implement, for example, boundary
conditions and volume forces. You can also right-click Turbulent Bubbly Flow to select
physics features from the context menu.
Except where indicated below, the nodes settings for this physics interface are the same as
for The Laminar Bubbly Flow Interface.
PHYSICAL MODEL
Specify if the gas concentration is low and whether or not to solve for the interfacial area.
Low Gas Concentration
Select the Low gas concentration check box if the gas volume fraction is low ( g less than
a few percent). It is then generally valid to replace the continuity equation in The Bubbly
Flow Equations see Equation 6-23 with Equation 6-26). This option is selected by
default.
Turbulence Model Type
By default a k- turbulence model is used.
D EPENDE N T VAR IA BL ES
The dependent variables (field variables) are the Velocity field, liquid phase u (SI unit:
m/s), the Pressure p (SI unit: Pa), the Effective gas density rhogeff (SI unit: kg/m3), the
Turbulent dissipation rate ep (SI unit: m2/s3), the Turbulent kinetic energy k (SI unit:
m2/s2), and the Number density, gas phase nd (SI unit: 1/m3).
The names of variables can be changed but the names of fields and dependent variables
must be unique within a component.
THE BUBBLY FLOW INTERFACES
259
CONSISTENT AND INCONSISTENT STABILIZATION
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Stabilization. The settings
for this section are the same as for The Laminar Bubbly Flow Interface with the addition
of this section: stabilization for the turbulence variables in the Turbulence equations area.
When using a turbulence model, streamline and crosswind diffusion are by default applied
to the turbulence equations.
DISCRETIZATION
P1+P1 is not permitted unless streamline diffusion is active for the momentum transport.
Pseudo Time Stepping for Laminar Flow Models in this guide and
Pseudo Time Stepping in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference
Manual
Domain and Boundary Nodes for the Laminar and Turbulent Bubbly
Flow Interfaces
Theory for the Bubbly Flow Interfaces
Flow in an Airlift Loop Reactor: path
CFD_Module/Multiphase_Benchmarks/airlift_loop_reactor
Domain and Boundary Nodes for the Laminar and Turbulent Bubbly
Flow Interfaces
For both The Laminar Bubbly Flow Interface and The Turbulent Bubbly Flow Interface
these domain and boundary nodes are available from the Physics ribbon toolbar (Windows
users), Physics context menu (Mac or Linux users), or right-click to access the context
menu (all users).
In general, to add a node, go to the Physics toolbar, no matter what
operating system you are using. Subnodes are available by clicking the
parent node and selecting it from the Attributes menu.
DOMAIN
Fluid Properties
Gravity
260 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Initial Values
Mass Transfer
Volume Force (described for The Laminar Flow Interface)
BOUNDARY
The sections describe the available boundary conditions for the liquid and
the gas. In all equations, n denotes the outward pointing unit vector
normal to the boundary.
The boundary types for the liquid flow variables, described in this section, are:
Inlet
Outlet
Symmetry
Wall (the default boundary condition)
In addition to the boundary conditions for the liquid, the following boundary conditions
for the gas are available for all boundary condition types except symmetry:
Gas Concentration (the default condition for inlets)
Gas Flux
Gas Outlet (the default condition for outlets)
No Gas Flux (the default condition for walls)
Symmetry
Gas Boundary Condition Equations
For 2D axisymmetric components, COMSOL Multiphysics takes the axial
symmetry boundaries (at r = 0) into account and automatically adds an
Axial Symmetry node that is valid on the axial symmetry boundaries only.
THE BUBBLY FLOW INTERFACES
261
Fluid Properties
The Fluid Properties node contains the material properties for the liquid and the gas. It also
contains settings for the slip model.
MATERIALS
Select the materials to use for the material properties of the liquid and the gas (when they
are set to take their value from the material). The default is to use the Domain material for
both the Liquid and the Gas. Select another material to use that materials properties for
the liquid or gas as needed.
LIQUID PROPERTIES
The default Density, liquid phase l (SI unit: kg/m3) uses values From material. For User
defined enter another value or expression.
The default Dynamic viscosity, liquid phase l (SI unit: Pas) uses values From material; the
value is then defined for the material selected in the Materials section for the continuous
phase. For User defined enter another value or expression.
The dynamic viscosity describes the relationship between the shear stresses and the shear
rate in a fluid. Intuitively, water and air have a low viscosity, and substances often described
as thick, such as oil, have a higher viscosity.
GAS PROPERTIES
The default Density, gas phase g (SI unit: kg/m3) uses values From material. For User
defined enter another value or expression.
Enter the Bubble diameter db (SI unit: m). The default value is 103 m (1 mm).
SLIP MODEL
Select a Slip modelHomogeneous flow (the default), Pressure-drag balance, or User defined.
Homogeneous flow assumes that the velocity of the two phases are equal; that is, uslip = 0.
For User defined enter different values or expressions for the components of the Slip velocity
uslip (SI unit: m/s).
For Pressure-drag balance it uses a model based on the assumption that the pressure forces
on a bubble are balanced by the drag force:
C
3
--- ------d- l u slip u slip = p
4 db
262 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Here db (SI unit: m) is the bubble diameter, and Cd (dimensionless) is the drag coefficient.
Select a Drag coefficient model:
Small spherical bubbles (Hadamard-Rybczynski) for bubbles with a diameter smaller than
2 mm.
Large bubbles for gas bubbles with a diameter larger than 2 mm. Then enter the Surface
tension coefficient (SI unit N/m). The default is 0.07 N/m.
Air bubbles in tap water (Schwarz-Turner) for air bubbles of 110 mm mean diameter in
water.
User defined to enter a different value or expression for the Drag coefficient Cd
(dimensionless). The default value is 1.
See the Slip Model theory section.
MIXING LENGTH LIMIT
This section is available for The Turbulent Bubbly Flow Interface.
When the Mixing length limit lmix, lim is set to Automatic, the mixing length limit is
evaluated as the shortest side of the geometry bounding box. If the geometry is, for
example, a complicated system of slim entities, this measure can be too high. In such cases,
it is recommended that the mixing length limit is defined manually. Select Manual to enter
a different value or expression.
Gravity
The Gravity node adds the force g to the right-hand side of the momentum transport
equation. Gravity nodes are mutually exclusive, that is, there can only be one active Gravity
node per domain.
GRAVITY
Enter the components of the Gravity vector, g (SI unit: m/s2). For 2D components the
default Gravity vector is defined as (0,-g_const). Here g_const is a physical constant equal
to 9.8066 m/s2. For 3D and 2D axisymmetric components, the gravity acts in the
negative z direction by default.
THE BUBBLY FLOW INTERFACES
263
Mass Transfer
Add a Mass Transfer node to include mass transfer from the gas to the liquid.
M A S S TR A N S F E R
Select a Mass transfer modelTwo-film theory model or User defined. For User defined enter
a value or expression for the Mass transfer from gas to liquid mgl (SI unit: kg/(m3s)). The
default is 0 kg/(m3s).
For Two-film theory enter values for the Mass transfer coefficient k (SI unit: m/s), Henrys
constant H (SI unit: Pam3/mol), the Dissolved gas concentration c (SI unit: mol/m3), and
the Molecular weight of species M (SI unit: kg/mol). Refer to the theory below for more
information.
Henrys law gives the equilibrium concentration c* of gas dissolved in liquid:
p + p ref
c = ------------------H
where H is Henrys constant. The molar flux per interfacial area, N (SI unit: mol/(sm2)),
is determined by
N = k ( c c )
where k is the Mass transfer coefficient and c is the Dissolved gas concentration in liquid.
The mass transfer from gas to liquid, mgl, is given by
m gl = NMa
where M is the Molecular weight of species and a is the interfacial area per volume
(SI unit: m2/m3).
Also see Theory for the Bubbly Flow Interfaces for details about how a is
computed.
For two-film theory, you also need to solve for the concentration of the dissolved gas;
m gl
c
+ ( cu l ) = ( Dc ) + --------t
M
which can be done by adding a Transport of Diluted Species interface.
264 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Initial Values
The Initial Values node adds initial values for the flow variables and the effective gas density
that can serve as initial conditions for a transient simulation or as an initial guess for a
nonlinear solver.
I N ITI AL VAL U ES
Enter initial values or expressions for the Velocity field. liquid phase u (SI unit: m/s) and
for the Pressure p (SI unit: Pa). The default values are 0. Also enter a value or expression
for the Effective gas density rhogeff (SI unit: kg/m3). The default is 0 kg/m3.
If the Solve for interfacial area check box is selected in The Laminar Bubbly Flow Interface
or The Turbulent Bubbly Flow Interface enter an initial value for the Number density, gas
phase nd (SI unit: 1/m3). The default is 0 1/m3.
For The Turbulent Bubbly Flow Interface also enter initial values for the Turbulent
dissipation rate ep (SI unit: m2/s3), and Turbulent kinetic energy k (SI unit: m2/s2).
Wall
The Wall node adds a selection of boundary conditions that describe the existence of a
solid wall. The Wall node by default specifies no gas flux for the gas phase.
Gas Boundary Condition Equations
LIQUID BOUNDARY CONDITION
The Liquid boundary condition is specified as follows.
For The Laminar Bubbly Flow Interface, select No slip (the default) or Slip.
For The Turbulent Bubbly Flow Interface, select Wall functions (the default) or Slip.
No Slip
Sets the liquid velocity to zero at the wall:
ul = 0
This is the default boundary condition for the liquid.
Slip
Sets the velocity component normal to the wall to zero:
THE BUBBLY FLOW INTERFACES
265
ul n = 0
Wall Functions
This boundary condition models a no slip condition for solid walls in a turbulent flow. Wall
functions are used to model the thin region with large gradients in the flow variables near
the wall.
Click to select the Apply wall roughness check box to apply the roughness correction. When
the check box is selected, the default Roughness model is Sand roughness, which is derived
from the experiments by Nikuradse. Select Generic roughness to specify more general
roughness types.
For Sand roughness enter an Equivalent sand roughness height kseq (SI unit: m). The
default is 3.2 micrometers.
For Generic roughness enter a Roughness height ks (SI unit: m). The default is
3.2 micrometers. Then enter a Roughness parameters Cs (dimensionless). The default is
0.26.
References for the Single-Phase Flow, Turbulent Flow Interfaces
GAS BOUNDARY CONDITION
From the list, select a Gas boundary condition for the gas phase on the wallNo gas flux
(the default), Gas concentration, Gas outlet, Gas flux, or Symmetry.
Gas Concentration
For Gas concentration enter the Effective gas density g g0 (SI unit: kg/m3). The default
is 0 kg/m3.If Solve for interfacial area is selected, also select either the Bubble number
density (the default) or the Bubble diameter and gas density button.
For Bubble number density enter the Bubble number density n0 (SI unit: 1/m3). The
default is 1000 1/m3.
For Bubble diameter and gas density enter the Bubble diameter db (SI unit: m) (the
default is 1 mm) and Density, gas phase g (SI unit: kg/m3) (the default is 1 kg/m3).
Gas Flux
For Gas flux enter the Gas mass flux N g g (SI unit: kg/(m2s)) (the default is 0 kg/(m2s))
and if the Solve for interfacial area check box is selected on the physics interface, the Number
density flux Nn (SI unit: 1/(m2s)). The default is 0 (1/(m2s)).
266 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Inlet
The Inlet node adds a selection of boundary conditions that describe inlets in fluid-flow
simulations.
Gas Boundary Condition Equations
LIQUID BOUNDARY CONDITION
Select a Liquid boundary conditionVelocity (the default), Pressure, or for The Laminar
Bubbly Flow Interface, Laminar inflow is also an option.
VE L O C I T Y
For Velocity click the Normal inflow velocity (the default) or Velocity field buttons.
For Normal inflow velocity enter a value or expression for U0 (SI unit: m/s).
For Velocity field specify that the velocity at the boundary is equal to a given u0 (SI unit:
m/s) and enter the components in the matrix:
ul = u0
PRESSURE
This condition specifies the normal stress which in most cases is approximately equal to the
pressure. Enter the Pressure p0 (SI unit: Pa) at the boundary. The default is 0 Pa. Enter a
relative pressure value in p0 (SI unit: Pa). Or if the reference pressure pref defined at the
physics interface level is equal to 0 Pa, enter an absolute pressure in p0.
The Suppress backflow check box is selected by default. This option adjusts the inlet
pressure, p 0 p 0 , locally in order to prevent fluid from exiting the domain through the
boundary. If suppress backflow is deselected, the inlet boundary can become an outlet
depending on the pressure field in the rest of the domain.
Flow direction controls in which direction the fluid enters the domain.
- For Normal flow (the default) it prescribes zero tangential velocity component.
- For User defined define an Inflow velocity direction, du (dimensionless). The
magnitude of du does not matter, only the direction. du must point into the domain.
LAMINAR INFLOW
This section is available for The Laminar Bubbly Flow Interface and when Laminar inflow
is selected as the Liquid boundary condition.
THE BUBBLY FLOW INTERFACES
267
Select a Laminar inflow optionAverage velocity (the default), Flow rate, or Entrance
pressure.
For any selection, also choose the Constrain outer edges to zero check box to force the
laminar profile to go to zero at the bounding points or edges of the inlet channel.
Otherwise the velocity is defined by the boundary condition of the adjacent boundary in
the model. For example, if one end of a boundary with a laminar inflow condition connects
to a slip boundary condition, the laminar profile has a maximum at that end.
Then:
For Average velocity enter Uav (SI unit: m/s). Enter an Entrance length Lentr (SI
unit: m). The default is 1 m.
For Flow rate enter an Entrance length Lentr (SI unit: m, default 1 m), Entrance thickness
Dz (SI unit: m), and Flow rate V0 (SI unit: m3/s).
For Entrance pressure enter an Entrance pressure pentr (SI unit: Pa) and an Entrance
length Lentr (SI unit: m).
GAS BOUNDARY CONDITION
These settings are the same as for Wall. See Gas Boundary Condition. The only difference
is that Gas concentration is the default.
TU R B U L E N C E P R O P E R T I E S
This section is available for The Turbulent Bubbly Flow Interface so that the inlet
conditions for the turbulence variables (k and ) can be specified. Except for Equation 6-6,
of the settings information is the same as that described for single-phase flow.
The turbulent length scale LT and turbulence intensity IT are related to the turbulence
variables via
2
3
k = --- ( U I T ) ,
2
3 4 k3 / 2
= C
----------LT
(6-6)
Outlet
The Outlet node adds a set of boundary conditions that describe outlets in fluid-flow
simulations; that is, the conditions at boundaries where the fluid exits the domain.
LIQUID BOUNDARY CONDITION
Select a Liquid boundary conditionPressure (the default), Velocity, or for The Laminar
Bubbly Flow Interface, Laminar outflow is also an option.
268 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
PRESSURE CONDITIONS
The Pressure condition specifies the normal stress which in most cases is approximately
equal to the pressure. The tangential stress component is set to 0 N/m2.
Enter the Pressure p0 (SI unit: Pa) at the boundary. The default is 0 Pa. Enter a relative
pressure value in p0 (SI unit: Pa). Or if the reference pressure pref defined at the physics
interface level is equal to 0 Pa, enter an absolute pressure in p0.
Select the Normal flow check box to change the no tangential stress condition to a no
tangential velocity condition. This forces the flow to exit (or enter) the domain
perpendicularly to the outlet boundary.
The Suppress backflow check box is selected by default. This option adjusts the outlet
pressure in order to prevent fluid from entering the domain through the boundary.
VE L O C I T Y
For Velocity click the Velocity field (the default) or Normal outflow velocity buttons.
For Velocity field specify that the velocity at the boundary is equal to a given u0 (SI unit:
m/s) and enter the components in the matrix:
ul = u0
For Normal outflow velocity enter a value or expression for U0 (SI unit: m/s).
GAS BOUNDARY CONDITION
The settings for the Gas boundary condition are the same as for Wall. See Gas Boundary
Condition.
When the Gas boundary condition is set to Gas outlet, the Exterior gas condition(s) section
contains an input field for the Effective gas density on the downstream side of the outlet.
If Solve for interfacial area is selected at the physics interface level, additional input fields
appear for the Bubble number density or the Bubble diameter and gas density on the
downstream side of the outlet.
LAMINAR OUTFLOW
This section is available for The Laminar Bubbly Flow Interface when Laminar outflow is
selected as the Liquid boundary condition.
Select a Laminar outflow optionAverage velocity (the default), Flow rate, or Exit pressure.
For any selection, also choose the Constrain outer edges to zero check box to force the
laminar profile to go to zero at the bounding points or edges of the inlet channel.
THE BUBBLY FLOW INTERFACES
269
Otherwise the velocity is defined by the boundary condition of the adjacent boundary in
the model.
For example, if one end of a boundary with a laminar inflow condition connects to a slip
boundary condition, then the laminar profile has a maximum at that end.
For Average velocity enter an Average velocity Uav (SI unit: m/s) the default is 0. Enter
an Exit length Lexit (SI unit: m). The default is 1 m.
For Flow rate enter an Exit length Lexit (SI unit: m). The default is 1 m. Enter a Flow
rate V0 (SI unit: m3/s).
For Entrance pressure enter an Exit length Lexit (SI unit: m). The default is 1 m. Enter
an Exit pressure pexit (SI unit: Pa).
Symmetry
The Symmetry node adds boundary conditions that describe symmetry boundaries in
fluid-flow simulations. The boundary condition for symmetry boundaries prescribes no
penetration and vanishing shear stresses:
u l n = 0,
T 2
t T l ( l + T ) u l + u l --- ( u l )I n = 0
BOUNDARY SELECTION
A boundary condition for 2D axial symmetry is not required.
For the symmetry axis at r = 0, the software automatically provides a condition that
prescribes ur = 0 and vanishing stresses in the z direction and adds an Axial Symmetry node
that is valid on the axial symmetry boundaries only.
Gas Boundary Condition Equations
In addition to the boundary conditions for the liquid, specify boundary conditions for the
gas on Wall, Inlet, and Outlet nodes. Select a Gas Boundary Condition:
Gas Concentration
Using this boundary condition, specify the effective gas density.
0
g = g
270 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Gas Outlet
This boundary condition is appropriate for boundaries where the gas phase flows outward
with the gas velocity, ug, at the boundary.
Gas Flux
Using this boundary condition, specify the gas mass flux through the boundary:
n ( g u g ) = N g g
Symmetry
This boundary condition, which is useful on boundaries that represent a symmetry line for
the gas flow, sets the gas flux through the boundary to zero:
n ( g u g ) = 0
No Gas Flux
This boundary condition represents boundaries where the gas flux through the boundary
is zero:
n ( d ud ) = 0
THE BUBBLY FLOW INTERFACES
271
The Mixture Model Interfaces
In this section:
The Mixture Model, Laminar Flow Interface
The Mixture Model, Turbulent Flow Interface
Domain and Boundary Nodes for the Mixture Model Laminar and Turbulent Flow
Interfaces
The Mixture Model, Laminar Flow Interface
The Mixture Model, Laminar Flow (mm) interface (
), found under the Multiphase
Flow>Mixture Model branch (
) when adding a physics interface, is used to model the
flow at low and moderate Reynolds numbers of liquids containing a dispersed phase. The
dispersed phase can be bubbles, liquid droplets, or solid particles, which are assumed to
always travel with their terminal velocity.
The Mixture Model, Laminar Flow interface solves one set of Navier-Stokes equations for
the momentum of the mixture. The pressure distribution is calculated from a
mixture-averaged continuity equation and the velocity of the dispersed phase is described
by a slip model. The volume fraction of the dispersed phase is tracked by solving a
transport equation for the volume fraction.
The physics interface can also model the distribution of the number density, which in turn
can be used to calculate the interfacial area, which is useful when simulating chemical
reactions in the mixture.
The main physics node is the Mixture Properties feature, which adds the equations for the
mixture and provides an interface for defining the fluid materials for the continuous and
dispersed phases as well as which slip model and mixture viscosity model to use.
When this physics interface is added, the following default physics nodes are also added in
the Model BuilderMixture Properties, Wall, and Initial Values. Then, from the Physics
toolbar, add other nodes that implement, for example, boundary conditions and volume
forces. You can also right-click Mixture Model, Laminar Flow to select physics features from
the context menu.
SETTINGS
The Label is the default physics interface name.
272 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the physics interface.
Refer to such physics interface variables in expressions using the pattern
<name>.<variable_name>. In order to distinguish between variables belonging to
different physics interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and
underscores (_) are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first physics interface in the model) is mm.
PHYSICAL MODEL
Specify the characteristics of the dispersed phase, the model for the slip velocity, and
whether or not to solve for the interfacial area.
Dispersed Phase
To characterize the Dispersed phase, select Solid particles (the default) or Liquid
droplets/bubbles.
The selection from this list is further defined for the Mixture Properties node under the
Mixture Model section.
Slip Model
To compute the slip velocity uslip (SI unit: m/s), select a Slip modelHomogeneous flow
(the default), Hadamard-Rybczynski, Schiller-Naumann, Haider-Levenspiel, or User defined.
The Homogeneous flow model assumes that the velocities of the two phases are equal,
that is, uslip = 0.
In most cases there is a significant difference in the velocity fields due to the buoyancy
of the dispersed phase. Use one of the predefined slip models for such cases.
For User defined specify an arbitrary expression for the relative velocity. For example,
give a constant velocity based on experimental data. For the Mixture Properties node
under the Mixture Model section, enter the Slip velocity field uslip (SI unit: m/s).
Turbulence Model Type
The default selection is None.
Solve For Interfacial Area
To add a transport equation for the number density of the dispersed particles, in order to
determine the interfacial area, select the Solve for interfacial area check box (by default not
selected.
For the Mass Transfer rate, use a two-film theory model, which includes the interfacial area
per unit volume between the two phases. It is possible to compute the interfacial area per
unit volume if the number density n (that is, the number of dispersed particles per volume)
THE MIXTURE MODEL INTERFACES
273
is known. Select the Solve for interfacial area check box to add the following equation for
the number density n:
n
+ ( nu d ) = 0
t
This equation states that a dispersed phase particle cannot disappear, appear, or merge with
other particles, although it can expand or shrink.
The Mixture Model, Laminar Flow Interface calculates the interfacial area a
(SI unit: m2/m3) from
a = ( 4n )
13
( 3 d )
23
Reference Pressure Level
Enter a Reference pressure level pref (SI unit: Pa). The default value is 1[atm].
Swirl Flow
For 2D axisymmetric components, select the Swirl flow check box to include the swirl
velocity componentthat is, the velocity component u in the azimuthal direction. While
u can be nonzero, there can be no gradients in the direction
General Single-Phase Flow Theory (2D Axisymmetric Formulations)
D E P E N D E N T VA R I A BL E S
Enter values for the dependent variables (field variables):
Velocity field, mixture u (SI unit: m/s)
Pressure p (SI unit: Pa)
Volume fraction, dispersed phase phid (dimensionless)
Squared slip velocity slipvel
Number density, dispersed phase nd (SI unit: 1/m3).
The names can be changed but the names of fields and dependent variables must be unique
within a component.
CONSISTENT STABILIZATION AND INCONSISTENT STABILIZATION
To display this section, click the Show button (
274 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
) and select Stabilization.
The consistent stabilizations Streamline diffusion and Crosswind diffusion are by default
applied to the Navier-Stokes and gas transport equations. In addition, when the flow is
turbulent, the consistent stabilizations are also applied to the Turbulence.
Isotropic shock capturing, O(h2) for the dispersed phase needs a scale for the volume
fraction of the dispersed phase. A suitable scale is the maximum value of the dispersed
phase volume fraction.
ADVANCED SETTINGS
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
Normally these settings do not need to be changed.
Penalty Diffusion can be used to suppress negative values of the dispersed volume fraction.
Including this term has been observed to slow down convergence and it is therefore
disabled by default
Select the Use pseudo time stepping for stationary equation form check box to add pseudo
time derivatives to the equation when the Stationary equation form is used. When selected,
also choose a CFL number expressionAutomatic (the default) or Manual. Automatic sets the
local CFL number (from the CourantFriedrichsLewy condition) to the built-in variable
CFLCMP which in turn triggers a PID regulator for the CFL number. For Manual enter a
Local CFL number CFLloc (dimensionless).
Pseudo Time Stepping for Laminar Flow Models in this guide and
Pseudo Time Stepping in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference
Manual
Domain and Boundary Nodes for the Mixture Model Laminar and
Turbulent Flow Interfaces
The Mixture Model, Turbulent Flow Interface
Slip Velocity Models and Theory for the Mixture Model Interfaces
Two-Phase Flow Modeling of a Dense Suspension: path
CFD_Module/Multiphase_Benchmarks/dense_suspension
The Mixture Model, Turbulent Flow Interface
The Mixture Model, Turbulent Flow (mm) interface (
), found under the Multiphase
Flow>Mixture Model branch (
) when adding a physics interface, is used to model the
THE MIXTURE MODEL INTERFACES
275
flow at high Reynolds numbers of liquids containing a dispersed phase. The dispersed
phase can be bubbles, liquid droplets, or solid particles, which are assumed to always travel
with their terminal velocity.
The Mixture Model, Turbulent Flow interface solves one set of Navier-Stokes equations
for the momentum of the mixture. The pressure distribution is calculated from a mixture
averaged continuity equation and the velocity of the dispersed phase is described by a slip
model. The volume fraction of the dispersed phase is tracked by solving a transport
equation for the volume fraction. Turbulence effects are modeled using the standard
two-equation k- model with realizability constraints. Flow close to walls is modeled using
wall functions.
The physics interface can also model the distribution of the number density, which in turn
can be used to calculate the interfacial area, which is useful when simulating chemical
reactions in the mixture.
Except where indicated below, the settings for this physics interface are the same as for The
Mixture Model, Laminar Flow Interface.
PHYSICAL MODEL
The default Turbulence model type is RANS, k-.
TU R B U L E N C E M O D E L P A R A M E T E R S
Turbulence model parameters are optimized to fit as many flow types as possible, but for
some special cases, better performance can be obtained by tuning the model parameters.
For a description of the turbulence model and the included model parameters see Theory
for the Turbulent Flow Interfaces.
D E P E N D E N T VA R I A BL E S
Enter values for the dependent variables (field variables):
Velocity field, mixture u (SI unit: m/s)
Pressure p (SI unit: Pa)
Volume fraction, dispersed phase phid (dimensionless)
Squared slip velocity slipvel
Number density, dispersed phase nd (SI unit: 1/m3)
Turbulent kinetic energy k (SI unit: m2/s2)
Turbulent dissipation rate (SI unit: m2/s3)
276 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
The names can be changed but the names of fields and dependent variables must be unique
within a component.
Domain and Boundary Nodes for the Mixture Model Laminar and
Turbulent Flow Interfaces
Slip Velocity Models
Theory for the Mixture Model Interfaces
Domain and Boundary Nodes for the Mixture Model Laminar and
Turbulent Flow Interfaces
For both The Mixture Model, Laminar Flow Interface and The Mixture Model, Turbulent
Flow Interface the following domain and boundary nodes are available from the Physics
ribbon toolbar (Windows users), Physics context menu (Mac or Linux users), or right-click
to access the context menu (all users).
In general, to add a node, go to the Physics toolbar, no matter what
operating system you are using. Subnodes are available by clicking the
parent node and selecting it from the Attributes menu.
DOMAIN
Gravity
Initial Values
Mass Transfer
Mixture Properties
Volume Force (described for The Laminar Flow Interface)
BOUNDARY
Boundary conditions for the mixture velocity, pressure and dispersed phase volume
fraction need to be specified. The following boundary condition types are available for The
Mixture Model, Laminar Flow Interface and The Mixture Model, Turbulent Flow
Interface:
Inlet
Outlet
THE MIXTURE MODEL INTERFACES
277
Symmetry
Wall (the default boundary condition feature).
For the flow variables, the velocity and the pressure, the boundary conditions correspond
to those defined for single phase flow (see Domain, Boundary, Pair, and Point Nodes for
Single-Phase Flow). There is also a point constraint for the pressure, which is useful if no
other boundary condition in the model includes a pressure level constraint.
The following boundary conditions for the dispersed phase are available for all boundary
condition types except symmetry. These are described in more detail in the Theory for the
Mixture Model Interfaces.
Dispersed phase concentration (the default condition for inlets)
Dispersed phase flux
Dispersed phase outlet (the default condition for outlets)
No dispersed phase flux (the default condition for walls)
Symmetry
For 2D axisymmetric components, COMSOL Multiphysics takes the axial
symmetry boundaries (at r = 0) into account and automatically adds an
Axial Symmetry node to the component that is valid on the axial symmetry
boundaries only.
Mixture Properties
The Mixture Properties node contains the material properties for the continuous phase and
the dispersed phase. It also contains settings for the viscosity model.
MATERIALS
Select the fluid materials to use for the material properties. The default material used for
both Continuous phase and Dispersed phase is the Domain material. Select another material
(when available).
CONTINUOUS PHASE PROPERTIES
The default Density, continuous phase c (SI unit: kg/m3) uses values From material (as
selected in the Materials section). For User defined enter another value or expression. In this
case the default is 0 kg/m3.
278 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
The default Dynamic viscosity, continuous phase c (SI unit: Pas), uses values From material.
It describes the relationship between the shear stresses and the shear rate in a fluid.
Intuitively, water and air have a low viscosity, and substances often described as thick, such
as oil, have a higher viscosity. For User defined enter another value or expression. In this
case, the default is 0 Pas.
DISPERSED PHASE PROPERTIES
The default Density, dispersed phase d (SI unit: kg/m3) uses values From material (as
selected in the Materials section). For User defined enter another value or expression. In this
case, the default is 0 kg/m3.
Enter the Diameter of particles/droplets dd (SI unit: m). The default is 103 m (1 mm). If
Haider-Levenspiel is selected for the Slip model under Physical Model, enter a value between
0 and 1 for the Sphericity (dimensionless). The default is 1.
If Liquid droplets/bubbles is selected from the Dispersed phase list for either The Mixture
Model, Laminar Flow Interface or The Mixture Model, Turbulent Flow Interface, then
Dynamic viscosity, dispersed phase d (SI unit: Pas) is also available. The default uses values
From material (as selected in the Materials section) or select User defined to enter another
value or expression. In this case, the default is 0 Pas.
MIXTURE MODEL
The options in this section are based on the selection made from the Dispersed phase list
for either The Mixture Model, Laminar Flow Interface or The Mixture Model, Turbulent
Flow Interface.
Slip Velocity Field
When a User defined Slip model is selected for the physics interface, specify an arbitrary
expression for the relative velocity. For example, give a constant velocity based on
experimental data. Enter the Slip velocity field uslip (SI unit: m/s).
Mixture Viscosity Model
Select the Mixture viscosity model.
When Solid particles is the Dispersed phase, select either Krieger type (the default) or User
defined.
When Liquid droplets/bubbles is the Dispersed phase, select Krieger type (the default),
User defined, or Volume averaged.
THE MIXTURE MODEL INTERFACES
279
User Defined
For User defined enter a value or expression for the Dynamic viscosity (SI unit: Pas). The
default is 0 Pas. When using this option, make sure to limit the viscosity to bounded
positive values.
Krieger Type
When Krieger type is selected, enter a value or expression for the Maximum packing
concentration max (dimensionless). The default is 0.62.
Select Krieger type to model the most generally valid expression for the mixture viscosity:
d 2,5 max
= c 1 ------------
max
where max is the maximum packing concentration, which for solid particles is
approximately 0.62. The dimensionless parameter * = 1 for solid particles and
d + 0,4 c
= --------------------------d + c
for droplets and bubbles. When applying the Krieger type viscosity model, d is replaced
by min(d, 0.999max) for better robustness.
Volume Averaged
Select Volume averaged to model the mixture viscosity of liquid-liquid mixtures, which uses
the following equation for the viscosity:
= d d + c c
The Mixture Model interfaces always employ the mixture viscosity in the particle Reynolds
number expression used to calculate the slip velocity, thereby accounting for the increase
in viscous drag due to particle-particle interactions.
MIXING LENGTH LIMIT
This section is available for The Mixture Model, Turbulent Flow Interface.
Select how the Mixing length limit lmix,lim (SI unit: m) is definedAutomatic (default) or
Manual:
For Automatic the mixing length limit is automatically evaluated as the shortest side of
the geometry bounding box. If the geometry is, for example, a complicated system of
280 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
slim entities, this measure can give a too high value. In such cases, it is recommended
that it is defined manually.
For Manual it defines a different value or expression. The default is 1 (that is, one unit
length of the model unit system).
Initial Values
The Initial Values node adds initial values for the mixture velocity, pressure, and volume
fraction of the dispersed phase, that can serve as an initial condition for a transient
simulation or as an initial guess for a nonlinear solver.
I N ITI AL VAL U ES
Enter values or expressions for the following dependent variables:
Velocity field, mixture, the components of u (SI unit: m/s). The defaults are 0 m/s.
Pressure p (SI unit: Pa). The default is 0 Pa.
Volume fraction, dispersed phase (dimensionless). The default is 0.
If the Solve for interfacial area check box is selected for the physics interface, enter an
initial value for the Number density, dispersed phase nd (SI unit: 1/m3). The default is
0 1/m3.
If a Schiller-Naumann or a Haider-Levenspiel slip model is used in the physics interface,
enter an initial value for the Squared slip velocity slipvel (SI unit: m2/s2). The default
is 0.081 m2/s2.
For The Mixture Model, Turbulent Flow Interface also enter values or expressions for:
Turbulent dissipation rate ep (SI unit: m2/s3). The default is mm.epinit.
Turbulent kinetic energy k (SI unit: m2/s2). The default is mm.kinit.
The following sections describe the available boundary conditions for the
mixture and the dispersed phase volume fraction. In all equations, n
denotes the outward pointing unit vector normal to the boundary.
Wall
The Wall node has boundary conditions available that describe the existence of a solid wall.
THE MIXTURE MODEL INTERFACES
281
MIXTURE BOUNDARY CONDITION
Select a Mixture boundary conditionNo slip (laminar flow only), Slip, or Wall functions
(turbulent flow only).
Slip
Select Slip to set the velocity component normal to the wall to zero u n = 0 .
No Slip
No slip is the default boundary condition for The Mixture Model, Laminar Flow Interface
and prescribes u = 0, that is, the fluid at the wall is not moving.
Wall Functions
Wall functions is the default boundary condition for The Mixture Model, Turbulent Flow
Interface. It models a no slip condition for a solid wall in turbulent flow. Wall functions
are used to model the thin region with high gradients in the flow variables near the wall.
This boundary condition models a no slip condition for solid walls in a turbulent flow. Wall
functions are used to model the thin region with large gradients in the flow variables near
the wall.
Click to select the Apply wall roughness check box to apply the roughness correction. When
the check box is selected, the default Roughness model is Sand roughness, which is derived
from the experiments by Nikuradse. Select Generic roughness to specify more general
roughness types.
For Sand roughness enter an Equivalent sand roughness height kseq (SI unit: m). The
default is 3.2 m.
For Generic roughness enter a Roughness height ks (SI unit: m). The default is 3.2 m.
Enter a Roughness parameter Cs (dimensionless). The default is 0.26.
References for the Single-Phase Flow, Turbulent Flow Interfaces
DISPERSED PHASE BOUNDARY CONDITION
Select a Dispersed phase boundary conditionNo dispersed phase flux, Dispersed phase
concentration, Dispersed phase outlet, Dispersed phase flux, or Symmetry.
For Dispersed phase concentration enter a Dispersed phase volume fraction d0
(dimensionless). The default is 0. When Solve for interfacial area is selected under the
Physical Model section, click either the Dispersed phase number density n0 (SI unit:
282 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
1/m3) or Diameter of particles/droplets dd (SI unit: m) button and enter a value or
expression for n0 (the default is 5 106 1/m3) or dd (the default is 1 mm).
For Dispersed phase flux enter values or expression for the Dispersed phase flux d (SI
unit: m/s) and, if Solve for interfacial area is selected under the Physical Model section,
the Number density flux n (SI unit: 1/(m2s)). The defaults are 0 m/s and 0 1/(m2s),
respectively.
Dispersed Phase Boundary Conditions Equations
Mass Transfer
Use the Mass Transfer node to include mass transfer from the dispersed phase to the
continuous phase.
M A S S TR A N S F E R
Select a Mass transfer model User defined (the default) or Two-film theory. For User defined
enter a value or expression for the Mass transfer from dispersed to continuous phase mdc (SI
unit: kg/(m3s)). The default is 0 kg/(m3s).
Two-film Theory
For Two-film theory enter values or expressions for each of the following:
Mass transfer coefficient k (SI unit: m/s). The default is 0 m/s.
Species concentration in dispersed phase cd (SI unit: mol/m3). The default is 0 mol/m3.
Species concentration in continuous phase cc (SI unit: mol/m3). The default is
0 mol/m3.
Molecular weight of species M (SI unit: kg/mol). The default is 0 kg/mol.
The mass transfer is modeled as
m dc = k ( c d c c )Ma
where k denotes the mass transfer rate, and cd and cc are the species concentrations in the
dispersed and the continuous phase, respectively. M is the species molecular weight, and
a is the interfacial area per unit volume between the two phases.
THE MIXTURE MODEL INTERFACES
283
Interfacial Area
When the Solve for interfacial area check box is selected for either The Mixture Model,
Laminar Flow Interface or The Turbulent Bubbly Flow Interface (under the Physical Model
section), it is also possible to compute the interfacial area per unit volume. When Solve for
interfacial area is selected, the following equation for the number density n of dispersed
particles is added:
n
+ ( nu d ) = 0
t
This equation states that a dispersed phase particle cannot disappear, appear, or merge with
other particles, although it can expand or shrink.
The Mixture Model interfaces calculate the interfacial area a (SI unit: m2/m3) from the
following equation:
a = ( 4n )
13
( 3 d )
23
Gravity
The Gravity node adds the force g to the right-hand side of the momentum transport
equation.
GRAVITY
Enter the components of the Gravity vector, g (SI unit: m/s2). The default value is
(0,-g_const) where g_const is a physical constant equal to 9.8066 m/s2.
For 2D components, gravity acts in the negative y direction by default.
For example, in a 2D component, the y component is -g_const and the
other component is 0. In this setting, g_const is a predefined physical
constant for the standard gravity (acceleration due to gravity at sea level).
For 3D and 2D axisymmetric components, gravity acts in the negative z
direction by default. For example, in a 3D component, the z component
is -g_const and the other components are 0. In this setting, g_const is
a predefined physical constant for the standard gravity (acceleration due
to gravity at sea level).
284 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Inlet
The Inlet node adds a set of boundary conditions that describe inlets in fluid-flow
simulations. Define the Velocity boundary condition (the default mixture boundary
condition for inlet boundaries) or the Pressure condition.
MIXTURE BOUNDARY CONDITION
Select a Mixture boundary condition for the inletVelocity (the default) or Pressure.
VE L O C I T Y
For Velocity click the Normal inflow velocity (the default) or Velocity field buttons.
For Normal inflow velocity enter a value or expression for U0 (SI unit: m/s).
For Velocity field specify that the velocity at the boundary is equal to a given u0 (SI unit:
m/s) and enter the components in the matrix:
u = u0
PRESSURE
This condition specifies the normal stress which in most cases is approximately equal to the
pressure. Enter the Pressure p0 (SI unit: Pa) at the boundary. The default is 0 Pa. Enter a
relative pressure value in p0 (SI unit: Pa). Or if the reference pressure pref defined at the
physics interface level is equal to 0 Pa, enter an absolute pressure in p0.
The Suppress backflow check box is selected by default. This option adjusts the inlet
pressure, p 0 p 0 , locally in order to prevent fluid from exiting the domain through the
boundary. If suppress backflow is deselected, the inlet boundary can become an outlet
depending on the pressure field in the rest of the domain.
Flow direction controls in which direction the fluid enters the domain.
- For Normal flow (the default) it prescribes zero tangential velocity component.
- For User defined define an Inflow velocity direction, du (dimensionless). The
magnitude of du does not matter, only the direction. du must point into the domain.
DISPERSED PHASE BOUNDARY CONDITION
The default is Dispersed phase concentration. See Wall > Dispersed Phase Boundary
Condition for the settings.
See Dispersed Phase Boundary Conditions Equations for more information.
THE MIXTURE MODEL INTERFACES
285
TU R B U L E N C E P R O P E R T I E S
For The Mixture Model, Turbulent Flow Interface the following is also available.
Click the Specify turbulent length scale and intensity or Specify turbulence variables button.
For Specify turbulent length scale and intensity enter a value for the Turbulent intensity
IT (dimensionless) and Turbulence length scale LT (SI unit: m). When Pressure is
selected, also enter a Reference velocity scale Uref (SI unit: m/s).
For Specify turbulence variables enter values or expressions for the Turbulent kinetic
energy k0 (SI unit: m2/s2) and Turbulent dissipation rate 0 (SI unit: m2/s3).
Outlet
The Outlet node adds a selection of boundary conditions that describe outlets in fluid-flow
simulations; that is, the conditions at boundaries where the fluid exits the domain.
MIXTURE BOUNDARY CONDITION
Select a Mixture boundary condition for the outletPressure (the default) or Velocity.
PRESSURE CONDITIONS
The Pressure condition specifies the normal stress which in most cases is approximately
equal to the pressure. The tangential stress component is set to 0 N/m2.
Enter the Pressure p0 (SI unit: Pa) at the boundary. The default is 0 Pa. Enter a relative
pressure value in p0 (SI unit: Pa). Or if the reference pressure pref defined at the physics
interface level is equal to 0 Pa, enter an absolute pressure in p0.
Select the Normal flow check box to change the no tangential stress condition to a no
tangential velocity condition. This forces the flow to exit (or enter) the domain
perpendicularly to the outlet boundary.
The Suppress backflow check box is selected by default. This option adjusts the outlet
pressure in order to prevent fluid from entering the domain through the boundary.
VE L O C I T Y
For Velocity click the Normal outflow velocity (the default) or Velocity field buttons.
For Normal outflow velocity enter a value or expression for U0 (SI unit: m/s).
For Velocity field specify that the velocity at the boundary is equal to a given u0 (SI unit:
m/s) and enter the components in the matrix:
u = u0
286 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
DISPERSED PHASE BOUNDARY CONDITION
The default is Dispersed phase outlet. See Wall > Dispersed Phase Boundary Condition for
the settings.
When the Dispersed phase boundary condition is set to Dispersed phase outlet, the Exterior
dispersed phase condition(s) section contains an input field for the Dispersed phase volume
fraction on the downstream side of the outlet. If Solve for interfacial area is selected at the
physics interface level, additional input fields appear for the Dispersed phase number density
or the Diameter of particles/droplets on the downstream side of the outlet.
See Dispersed Phase Boundary Conditions Equations for more information.
Symmetry
The Symmetry node adds boundary conditions that describe symmetry boundaries in
fluid-flow simulations. The boundary condition for symmetry boundaries prescribes no
penetration and vanishing tangential stress:
u n = 0,
t T ( c d ( 1 c d )u slip u slip + Gm )n = 0
BOUNDARY SELECTION
A boundary condition for 2D axial symmetry is not required.
For the symmetry axis at r = 0, the program automatically provides a condition that
prescribes ur = 0 and vanishing stresses in the z direction and adds an Axial Symmetry node
that is valid on the axial symmetry boundaries only.
THE MIXTURE MODEL INTERFACES
287
The Euler-Euler Model Interfaces
In this section:
The Euler-Euler Model, Laminar Flow interface
The Euler-Euler Model, Turbulent Flow Interface
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Euler-Euler Model Interfaces
The Euler-Euler Model, Laminar Flow interface
The Euler-Euler Model, Laminar Flow (ee) interface (
), found under the Multiphase
Flow>Euler-Euler Model branch (
) when adding a physics interface, can be used to
simulate the flow of two continuous and fully interpenetrating incompressible phases (see
Ref. 1 under the Theory for the Euler-Euler Model Interfaces). The physics interface can
model flow at low and moderate Reynolds numbers. Typical applications are fluidized beds
(solid particles in gas), sedimentation (solid particles in liquid), or transport of liquid
droplets or bubbles in a liquid.
The physics interface solves two sets of Navier-Stokes equations, one for each phase, in
order to calculate the velocity field for each phase. The phases interchange momentum as
described by a drag model. The pressure is calculated from a mixture-averaged continuity
equation and the volume fraction of the dispersed phase is tracked with a transport
equation.
When this physics interface is added, the following default physics nodes are also added in
the Model Builder Phase Properties, Wall, and Initial Values. Then, from the Physics
toolbar, add other nodes that implement, for example, boundary conditions and volume
forces. You can also right-click Euler-Euler Model, Laminar Flow to select physics features
from the context menu.
SETTINGS
The Label is the default physics interface name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the physics interface.
Refer to such physics interface variables in expressions using the pattern
<name>.<variable_name>. In order to distinguish between variables belonging to
different physics interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and
underscores (_) are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
288 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
The default Name (for the first physics interface in the model) is ee.
DISPERSED PHASE
Select a Dispersed phaseSolid particles or Liquid droplets/bubbles.
When Solid particles is selected, the Solid Pressure section is available in the Phase
Properties node. Also see Dispersed Phase in the theory section.
PHYSICAL MODEL
The pressure solved for by the interface may represent the absolute pressure, or a relative
pressure. The absolute pressure, used for example by the material properties, is defined by
the interface as the sum of the Reference pressure level pref and the pressure solved for.
D EPENDE N T VAR IA BL ES
The dependent variables (field variables) are:
Velocity field, continuous phase uc
Velocity field, dispersed phase ud
Pressure p
Volume fraction, dispersed phase phid
The names can be changed but the names of fields and dependent variables must be unique
within a component.
CONSISTENT STABILIZATION
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Stabilization.
INCONSISTENT STABILIZATION
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Stabilization.
Inconsistent stabilization can be activated independently for the momentum equation for
the continuous phase, the momentum equation for the dispersed phase, and for the
dispersed phase transport equation respectively by selecting the corresponding check box.
Each inconsistent stabilization contribution has a tuning parameter.
ADVANCED SETTINGS
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
Normally these settings do not need to be changed.
Select the Use pseudo time stepping for stationary equation form check box to add pseudo
time derivatives to the equation when the Stationary equation form is used. When selected,
T H E E U L E R- E U L E R M O D E L I N T E R F A C E S
289
also choose a CFL number expressionAutomatic (the default) or Manual. Automatic sets the
local CFL number (from the CourantFriedrichsLewy condition) to the built-in variable
CFLCMP which in turn triggers a PID regulator for the CFL number. For Manual enter a
Local CFL number CFLloc (dimensionless).
DISCRETIZATION
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Discretization.
The Euler-Euler Model, Laminar Flow interface supports three options for the basis
functions: P1+P1 (the default option), P2+P1, and P3+P2. They all represent Lagrangian
basis functions of different orders:
P1+P1 Linear basis functions for all degrees of freedom. Linear basis functions are
computationally less expensive than the higher-order options and are also more robust.
This option requires that Streamline diffusion is activated for both of the momentum
equations.
P2+P1 Quadratic basis functions for all degrees of freedom except the pressure which
is described by linear basis functions. Higher order elements, as compared to linear
elements, are a computationally effective way to obtain high accuracy but only if the
flow is well resolved. This requirement is most likely fulfilled for flows with very low
velocities and/or small length scales.
P3+P2 Cubic basis functions for all degrees of freedom except the pressure which is
described by quadratic basis functions. This option is computationally very expensive
and the least robust one but it is also the option with the highest formal accuracy.
Specify the Value type when using splitting of complex variablesReal (the default) or
Complex.
MIXING LENGTH LIMIT
This section is available for The Euler-Euler Model, Turbulent Flow Interface.
When the Mixing length limit lmix, lim is set to Automatic, the mixing length limit is
evaluated as the shortest side of the geometry bounding box. If the geometry is, for
example, a complicated system of slim entities, this measure can be too high. In such cases,
290 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
it is recommended that the mixing length limit is defined manually. Select Manual to enter
a different value or expression.
Pseudo Time Stepping for Laminar Flow Models in this guide and
Pseudo Time Stepping in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference
Manual
Isotropic Diffusion in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Euler-Euler Model
Interfaces
Theory for the Euler-Euler Model Interfaces
Circulating Fluidized Bed: path
CFD_Module/Multiphase_Tutorials/fluidized_bed
The Euler-Euler Model, Turbulent Flow Interface
The Euler-Euler Model, Turbulent Flow (ee) interface (
), found under the Multiphase
Flow>Euler-Euler Model branch (
) when adding a physics interface, can be used to
simulate high Reynolds number flow of a two-phase mixture containing a continuous and
a dispersed phase. The Euler-Euler model assumes that both phases are continuous, fully
interpenetrating, and incompressible (see Theory for the Euler-Euler Model Interfaces).
Typical applications for the interface are fluidized beds (solid particles in gas),
sedimentation (solid particles in liquid), or transport of liquid droplets or bubbles in a
liquid.
The physics interface solves two sets of Navier-Stokes equations, one for each phase, in
order to calculate the velocity field for each phase. The phases interchange momentum as
described by a drag model. The pressure is calculated from a mixture-averaged continuity
equation and the volume fraction of the dispersed phase is tracked with a transport
equation.
Two-phase turbulence is modeled using the standard two-equation k- model with
realizability constraints. The interface includes the possibility to solve one set of k-
equations for the two-phase mixture, or to solve two sets of k- equations, one for each
phase. Flow close to walls is modeled using wall functions.
Except where indicated below, the settings for this physics interface are the same as for The
Euler-Euler Model, Laminar Flow interface.
T H E E U L E R- E U L E R M O D E L I N T E R F A C E S
291
PHYSICAL MODEL
Turbulence Model Type
The default Turbulence model type is RANS, k-.
Two-phase turbulence
By default the Two-Phase Turbulence is defined as Mixture. This implies that one set of k-
equations are solved for. To instead solve for two sets of k- equations, one for each fluid
phase, select Phase specific (see Turbulent Two-Phase Flow Modeling).
TU R B U L E N C E M O D E L P A R A M E T E R S
Turbulence model parameters are optimized to fit as many flow types as possible, but for
some special cases, better performance can be obtained by tuning the model parameters.
For a description of the turbulence model and the included model parameters see
Turbulent Two-Phase Flow Modeling.
D E P E N D E N T VA R I A BL E S
The following dependent variables (field variables) are defined for this interface:
Velocity field, continuous phase uc
Velocity field, dispersed phase ud
Pressure p
Turbulent kinetic energy, mixture k
Turbulent dissipation rate, mixture ep
Turbulent kinetic energy, continuous phase kc
Turbulent dissipation rate, continuous phase epc
Turbulent kinetic energy, dispersed phase kd
Turbulent dissipation rate, dispersed phase epd
The names can be changed but the names of fields and dependent variables must be unique
within a component.
292 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Euler-Euler Model
Interfaces
The Euler-Euler Model Interfaces has the following domain, boundary, point, and pair
nodes available from the Physics ribbon toolbar (Windows users), Physics context menu
(Mac or Linux users), or right-click to access the context menu (all users).
Gravity
Outlet
Initial Values
Phase Properties
Inlet
Volume Force
Wall
The following nodes are described for the Laminar Flow interface:
Pressure Point Constraint
Symmetry
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual see Table 2-3 for links
to common sections and Table 2-4 to common feature nodes. You can
also search for information: press F1 to open the Help window or Ctrl+F1
to open the Documentation window.
Phase Properties
The Phase Properties node has the material properties settings for the pure continuous and
dispersed phases. It also has settings for the viscosity models for each of the two
interpenetrating phases and the drag model. When the dispersed phase consists of solid
particles, it also has settings for the solid pressure model.
MATERIALS
Select the materials to use for the material properties of the continuous phase and the
dispersed phase respectively (when they are defined to take their values From material). By
default, both the Continuous phase and Dispersed phase use the Domain material. This
corresponds to the material currently applied to the domain in question.
Other materials present can be selected from the Continuous phase or Dispersed phase list
in order to use that materials properties for the liquid or gas, respectively.
T H E E U L E R- E U L E R M O D E L I N T E R F A C E S
293
CONTINUOUS PHASE PROPERTIES
Density, Continuous Phase
The default Density, continuous phase c (SI unit: kg/m3) uses values From material. For
User defined enter another value or expression.
Dynamic Viscosity, Pure Continuous Phase
The dynamic viscosity describes the relationship between the shear stresses and the shear
rate in a fluid. Intuitively, water and air have a low viscosity, and substances often described
as thick, such as oil, have a higher viscosity. The dynamic viscosity of the pure continuous
phase refers to the viscosity the fluid would have in the absence of the dispersed phase.
The default Dynamic viscosity, pure continuous phase c (SI unit: Pas) uses values From
material. The value of the viscosity is then the value defined for the material selected in the
Materials section for the continuous phase. For User defined define a different value or
expression.
DISPERSED PHASE PROPERTIES
The default Density, dispersed phase d (SI unit: kg/m3) uses values From material. For
User defined enter another value or expression.
Enter a value or expression for the Diameter of particles/droplets dd (SI unit: m). The
default is 103 m (1 mm).
The Dynamic viscosity, pure dispersed phase d (SI unit: Pas) field is
available when Liquid droplets/bubbles is selected as the Dispersed phase in
The Euler-Euler Model Interfaces.
The default uses values From material. The value of the viscosity is then
the value defined for the material selected in the Materials section for the
dispersed phase. For User defined define a different value or expression.
VISCOSITY MODEL
Select a Viscosity modelCalculate from mixture velocity (the default) or User defined.
For Calculate from mixture viscosity select a Mixture viscosity modelKrieger type (the
default) or User defined. For Krieger type, enter an expression or value for the Maximum
packing concentration max (dimensionless). The default is 0.62 when the dispersed
294 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
phase is solid particles and 1 when the dispersed phase is liquid droplets/bubbles. For
User defined, enter a value or expression for the Dynamic viscosity .
For User defined enter a value or expression for the Dynamic viscosity, dispersed phase d.
The default expression, muinit, corresponds to the Krieger type viscosity.
DRAG MODEL
The models for the interphase drag force Fdrag are available and described in The
Euler-Euler Model Equations. When the dispersed phase corresponds to Solid particles, the
Gidaspow, Schiller-Naumann, Haider-Levenspiel, and Hadamard-Rybczynzki models are
available. For Liquid droplets/bubbles, the Schiller-Naumann, Haider-Levenspiel and
Hadamard-Rybczynzki models are available.
Select a Drag modelGidaspow, Schiller-Naumann, Haider-Levenspiel, Hadamard-Rybczynzki,
or User defined. For User defined enter a value or expression for the Drag force coefficient .
For Haider-Levenspiel enter a value between 0 and 1 for the Sphericity Sp (dimensionless).
SOLID PRESSURE MODEL
The solid pressure models the particle dispersion due to collisions and friction between the
solid particles. Details of the implemented models are described in Solid Pressure.
This section is available when Solid particles is selected as the Dispersed phase in The
Euler-Euler Model Interfaces. Select a Solid pressure model psNo solid pressure (the
default), Gidaspow-Ettehadieh, Gidaspow, Ettehadieh, or User defined. For User defined enter
values or expressions in the table for each component.
Initial Values
The Initial Values node adds initial values for the velocity fields for the continuous and
dispersed phases, the pressure, and the volume fraction of the dispersed phase that can
serve as initial conditions for a transient simulation or as an initial guess for a nonlinear
solver.
I N ITI AL VAL U ES
Enter initial values or expressions in the tables for each component of:
Velocity field, continuous phase uc
Velocity field, dispersed phase ud
Enter initial values or expressions for:
T H E E U L E R- E U L E R M O D E L I N T E R F A C E S
295
Pressure p
Volume fraction, dispersed phase phid
For the The Euler-Euler Model, Turbulent Flow Interface, initial values are needed for the
turbulence variables. When Mixture is selected as Two-phase turbulence, enter values or
expressions for:
Turbulent kinetic energy, mixture k
Turbulent dissipation rate, mixture ep
When Phase specific is selected as Two-phase turbulence, enter values or expressions for:
Turbulent kinetic energy, continuous phase kc
Turbulent dissipation rate, continuous phase epc
Turbulent kinetic energy, dispersed phase kd
Turbulent dissipation rate, dispersed phase epd
Wall
The Wall node includes a set of boundary conditions to describe the flow conditions at a
wall. The conditions for each phase are selected separately.
CONTINUOUS PHASE BOUNDARY CONDITION
Select a Continuous Phase ConditionNo slip (laminar flow only), Slip, or Wall functions
(turbulent flow only).
Slip
Slip prescribes the velocity component normal to the wall to zero u n = 0 .
No Slip
No slip prescribes u = 0, that is, the fluid at the wall is at rest. This is the default boundary
condition for The Mixture Model, Laminar Flow Interface
Wall Functions
Wall functions are used in the case of turbulent flow to model the thin region near solid
(no slip) walls with high gradients in the flow variables. It is the default boundary
condition for The Mixture Model, Turbulent Flow Interface.
DISPERSED PHASE BOUNDARY CONDITION
Select a Dispersed Phase Boundary ConditionNo slip (laminar flow only), Slip, or Wall
functions (turbulent flow only). The conditions prescribed corresponds to those described
for the continuous phase above,
296 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Dispersed Phase Boundary Condition
The Dispersed Phase Boundary Condition defines the condition at the wall for the volume
fraction of the dispersed phase.
No dispersed phase flux prescribes a zero flux condition at the wall.
Dispersed phase concentration prescribes the dispersed phase volume fraction at the wall
d0 (dimensionless).
CONSTRAINT SETTINGS
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
Inlet
The Inlet node prescribes the flow and turbulence conditions (when applicable) at a
boundary where one or both phases enter the adjacent domain.
TW O - P H A S E I N L E T TY P E
Selecting Mixture as the Two-Phase Inlet Type, inlet conditions are prescribed for both
phases. Selecting Continuous phase or Dispersed phase, inlet conditions are prescribed for
the corresponding phase, while wall conditions are applied to the remaining phase.
CONTINUOUS PHASE
The options available in this section are based on the Two-phase inlet type selected.
When Mixture or Continuous phase is selected as the Two-phase inlet typ the Velocity field,
continuous phase uc0 is prescribed.
When Dispersed phase is selected as the Two-phase inlet type, the conditions applied to the
continuous phase are No slip (uc=0) or Slip (ucn=0, and no viscous stresses in the
tangential directions).
Using the Phase specific option for the Two-phase turbulence interface property, the
feature also prescribes inlet conditions for the continuous phase turbulence variables.
Specify turbulent length scale and intensity defines the turbulence inlet conditions using
the Turbulent intensity IT,c (dimensionless) and the Turbulence length scale LT,c (SI unit:
m).
Specify turbulence variables prescribes the Turbulent kinetic energy k0,c (SI unit: m2/s2)
and the Turbulent dissipation rate 0,c (SI unit: m2/s3) at the inlet.
T H E E U L E R- E U L E R M O D E L I N T E R F A C E S
297
DISPERSED PHASE
The options available in this section are based on the Two-phase inlet type selected.
When Mixture or Dispersed phase is selected as the Two-phase inlet type, the Velocity field,
dispersed phase ud0 and the Dispersed phase volume fraction, d0, at the inlet are defined.
When Continuous phase is selected as the Two-phase inlet type, the conditions applied to
the dispersed phase are No slip (ud=0) or Slip (udn=0, and no viscous stresses in the
tangential directions).
Using the Phase specific option for the Two-phase turbulence interface property, the
feature also prescribes inlet conditions for the dispersed phase turbulence variables.
Specify turbulent length scale and intensity defines the turbulence inlet conditions using
the Turbulent intensity IT,d (dimensionless) and the Turbulence length scale LT,d (SI unit:
m).
Specify turbulence variables prescribes the Turbulent kinetic energy k0,d (SI unit: m2/s2)
and the Turbulent dissipation rate 0,d (SI unit: m2/s3) at the inlet.
TU R B U L E N C E C O N D I T I O N S
Using the Mixture option for the Two-phase turbulence interface property, the feature
also prescribes inlet conditions for the mixture turbulence variables.
Specify turbulent length scale and intensity defines the turbulence inlet conditions using
the Turbulent intensity IT (dimensionless) and the Turbulence length scale LT (SI unit:
m).
Specify turbulence variables prescribes the Turbulent kinetic energy k0 (SI unit: m2/s2)
and the Turbulent dissipation rate 0 (SI unit: m2/s3) at the inlet.
CONSTRAINT SETTINGS
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
Outlet
This node is used to prescribe conditions at boundaries where the two-phase mixture exits
the computational domain. The settings available in the node specifies conditions for the
entire mixture, as opposed to the Inlet, Outlet and Wall nodes where the conditions for
can be specified for each phase individually.
298 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
MIXTURE BOUNDARY CONDITION
Select Mixture boundary conditionsPressure, no viscous stress, Pressure, normal flow,
Velocity, Degassing, or Filtration.
Pressure Conditions
When Pressure, no viscous stress or Pressure, normal flow is selected as the Mixture boundary
condition, specify the Pressure p0 (SI unit: Pa) at the outlet. Note that the prescribed
pressure should be consistent with the reference pressure level specified at the interface
level as well as consistent with present volume forces (including gravity).
Velocity
Select Velocity to specify the Velocity field, continuous phase uc0 (SI unit: m/s) together
with the Velocity field, dispersed phase ud (SI unit: m/s) at the outlet.
Degassing and Filtration
Selecting Degassing allows the dispersed phase to exit the domain but prevents the
continuous phase from exiting. This is achieved through a pressure (p0), no viscous stress
condition for the dispersed phase, in combination with a no penetration condition for the
continuous phase.
Selecting Filtration on the other hand allows the continuous phase to exit the domain but
prevents the continuous phase from exiting. This is achieved through a pressure (p0), no
viscous stress condition for the continuous phase, in combination with a no penetration
condition for the dispersed phase.
Pressure, no viscous stress is the least constraining option and allows the
flow to exit the domain in non-normal directions.
Pressure, normal flow restricts the flow to be completely normal to the
outlet boundary. This option can influence the flow quite a bit upstream
of the inlet.
CONSTRAINT SETTINGS
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
Gravity
The Gravity node adds the gravity force vector to the right-hand side of the momentum
equations; cg for the continuous phase and dg for the dispersed phase.
T H E E U L E R- E U L E R M O D E L I N T E R F A C E S
299
Gravity nodes are mutually exclusive, that is, there can only be one active Gravity node per
domain.
GRAVITY
Enter the components of the Gravity vector, g (SI unit: m/s2). For 2D components the
default Gravity vector is defined as (0,-g_const). Here g_const is a physical constant equal
to 9.8066 m/s2. For 3D and 2D axisymmetric components, the gravity acts in the
negative z direction by default.
Volume Force
The Volume Force node specifies the volume forces on the right-hand side of the
momentum equations; Fc for the continuous phase and Fd for the dispersed phase. It may
for example be used to add user defined interaction forces (a part from the interphase drag
force).
If several volume force nodes are added to the same domain, the sum of all contributions
are added to the respective momentum equations.
300 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Theory for the Two-Phase Flow
Interfaces
The Two-Phase Flow, Level Set and Phase Field interfaces can be used to model the flow
of two different, immiscible fluids, where the exact position of the interface between the
two fluids is of interest. The fluid-fluid interface is tracked using an auxiliary function on
a fixed mesh. These methods account for differences in the two fluids densities and
viscosities and include the effects of surface tension and gravity.
The Two-Phase Flow, Level Set and Phase Field Interfaces theory is described in this
section:
Level Set and Phase Field Equations
Conservative and Non-Conservative Formulations
Phase Initialization
Numerical Stabilization
References for the Level Set and Phase Field Interfaces
Level Set and Phase Field Equations
By default, the Level Set and Phase Field interfaces use the incompressible formulation of
the Navier-Stokes equations:
u
T
+ ( u )u = [ p I + ( u + u ) ] + F g + F st + F ext + F
t
u = 0
(6-7)
(6-8)
Note that Equation 6-7, and Equation 6-8 are solved in the contained interface, Laminar
Flow or Turbulent Flow interface. Note that if the Laminar Flow and Turbulent Flow are
added automatically when we add a Two-Phase Flow, Level Set and Phase Field
multiphysics interface, these interface contains a Multiphysics coupling option property to
control the form of the continuity equation. The Multiphysics coupling option is
automatically set to Level Set or Phase Field. In this case continuity equation takes the form
as in Equation 6-8. When Multiphysics coupling option is set to None, the form of the
continuity equation follows the definitions in Theory for the Single-Phase Flow
InterfacesTheory for the single-phase flow.
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TW O - P H A S E F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
301
USING THE LEVEL SET METHOD
If the level set method is used to track the interface, it adds the following equation:
----+ u = ( 1 ) ----------
t
(6-9)
where is the reinitialization parameter (set to 1 by default) and is the interface thickness
controlling parameter (set to hmax/2 where hmax is the maximum element size in the
component). The density is a function of the level set function defined as
= 1 + ( 2 1 )
and the dynamic viscosity is given by
= 1 + ( 2 1 )
where 1 and 2 are the constant densities of Fluid 1 and Fluid 2, respectively, and 1 and
2 are the dynamic viscosities of Fluid 1 and Fluid 2, respectively. Here, Fluid 1
corresponds to the domain where < 0.5 , and Fluid 2 corresponds to the domain where
> 0.5 .
Further details of the theory for the level set method are in Ref. 1.
USING THE PHASE FIELD METHOD
If the phase field method is used to track the interface, it adds the following equations:
+ u = -----2-
t
(6-10)
f ext
2
2
= + ( 1 ) + -----
2
(6-11)
where the quantity (SI unit: N) is the mixing energy density and (SI unit: m) is a
capillary width that scales with the thickness of the interface. These two parameters are
related to the surface tension coefficient, (SI unit: N/m), through the equation
2 2
= ----------- --3
and is related to through =2 where is the mobility tuning parameter (set to 1 by
default). The volume fraction of Fluid 2 is computed as
V f = min ( max ( [ ( 1 + ) 2 ], 0 ), 1 )
302 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
where the min and max operators are used so that the volume fraction has a lower limit of
0 and an upper limit of 1. The density is then defined as
= 1 + ( 2 1 )V f
and the dynamic viscosity according to
= 1 + ( 2 1 )V f
where 1 and 2 are the densities and 1 and 2 are the dynamic viscosities of Fluid 1 and
Fluid 2, respectively.
The mean curvature (SI unit: 1/m) can be computed by entering the following
expression:
G
= 2 ( 1 + ) ( 1 ) ---
where G is the chemical potential defined as:
2
( 1 ) f
- + -----G = 2 + ---------------------
2
Details of the theory for the phase field method are in Ref. 2.
F O RC E TE R M S
The four forces on the right-hand side of Equation 6-7 are due to gravity, surface tension,
a force due to an external contribution to the free energy (using the phase field method
only), and a user-defined volume force.
The Surface Tension Force for the Level Set Method
For the level set method, the surface tension force acting on the interface between the two
fluids is Fst = n where is the surface tensions coefficient (SI unit: N/m), is the
curvature, and n is the unit normal to the interface. (SI unit: 1/m) is a Dirac delta
function located at the interface. depends on second derivatives of the level set function
. This can lead to poor accuracy of the surface tension force. Therefore, the following
alternative formulation is used:
T
F st = ( ( I ( nn ) ) )
For a derivation of this formulation, see Appendix A in Ref. 3. In the weak formulation of
the momentum equation, it is possible to move the divergence operator, using integration
by parts, to the test functions for the velocity components.
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TW O - P H A S E F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
303
The -function is approximated by a smooth function according to
= 6 ( 1 )
The Surface Tension Force for the Phase Field Method
The surface tension force for the phase field method is implemented as a body force
f
F st = G ------
where G is the chemical potential (SI unit: J/m3) defined in The Equations for the Phase
Field Method and f is a user-defined source of free energy.
The Gravity Force
The gravity force is Fg = g where g is the gravity vector. Add this as a Gravity feature to
the fluid domain.
The User Defined Volume Force
When using a Phase Field interface, a force arising due to a user-defined source of free
energy is computed according to:
f
F ext =
This force is added when a -derivative of the external free energy has been defined in the
External Free Energy section of the Fluid Properties feature.
Conservative and Non-Conservative Formulations
When the velocity field is divergence free, you can use either the conservative or the
non-conservative formulation of the level set or phase field equation. The conservative
form perfectly conserves the mass of each fluid, but the computational time is generally
longer.
Phase Initialization
If the study type Transient with Phase Initialization is used in the model, the level set or
phase field variable is automatically initialized. For this study, two study steps are created,
Phase Initialization and Time Dependent. The Phase Initialization step solves for the
distance to the initial interface >, Dwi. The Time Dependent step then uses the initial
condition for the level set function according to the following expression:
304 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
1 0 = ----------------------D
1 + e wi
in domains initially filled with Fluid 1 and
1
0 = ------------------------D
1 + e wi
in domains initially filled with Fluid 2.
Correspondingly, for the phase field method the following expressions are used:
D wi
0 = tanh ----------
2
in Fluid 1 and
D wi
0 = tanh ----------
2
in Fluid 2. The initial condition for the help variable is 0 = 0. These expressions are based
on the analytical solution of the steady state solution of Equation 6-9, Equation 6-10, and
Equation 6-11 for a straight, non-moving interface.
For the initialization to work it is crucial that there are two Initial Values
nodes and one Initial Interface node. One of the Initial Values nodes
should use Domain Intially: Fluid 1( =0)and the other Fluid initially in
domain: Fluid 2( =0). The Initial Interface node is not default but can be
added which should have all interior boundaries where the interface is
initially present as selection. If the selection of the Initial Interface node is
empty, the initialization fails. Note that the default value of Domain
Initially is Specified level set function explicitly allowing arbitrary user
defined initial value. In this case, no Initial Interface node should be
added, and Time-dependent study should be used instead of Transient
with Phase Initialization.
The Two-Phase Flow, Level Set and Phase Field Interfaces
Studies and Solvers and Transient with Phase Initialization in the
COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TW O - P H A S E F L O W I N T E R F A C E S
305
Numerical Stabilization
Four types of stabilization methods are available for the flow (Navier-Stokes), turbulence,
and interface (level set or phase field) equations. Two are consistent stabilization
methodsStreamline diffusion and Crosswind diffusionand two are inconsistent
Isotropic diffusion and Anisotropic diffusion.
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Stabilization.
The Two-Phase Flow, Level Set and Phase Field Interfaces
Stabilization in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual
References for the Level Set and Phase Field Interfaces
1. E. Olsson and G. Kreiss, A Conservative Level Set Method for Two Phase Flow,
J. Comput. Phys., vol. 210, pp. 225246, 2005.
2. P. Yue, J.J. Feng, C. Liu, and J. Shen, A Diffuse-interface Method for Simulating
Two-phase Flows of Complex Fluids, J. Fluid Mech., vol. 515, pp. 293317, 2004.
3. B. Lafaurie, C. Nardone, R. Scardovelli, S. Zaleski, and G. Zanetti Modelling Merging
and Fragmentation in Multiphase Flows with SURFER. J. Comput. Phys., vol. 113, no.
1, pp. 134147, 1994.
306 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Theory for the Three-Phase Flow
Interface
The Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field interface can be used to model the flow and interaction
of three different, immiscible fluids, when the exact positions of the interfaces separating
the fluids are of interest. The fluid-fluid interfaces are tracked using a ternary phase field
formulation which account for differences in the fluids densities and viscosities and
include the effects of surface tension.
The Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field Interface theory is described in the following sections:
Governing Equations of the Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field Interface
Reference for the Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field Interface
Governing Equations of the Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field Interface
LAMINAR FLOW EQUATIONS
The Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field interface is used to study the evolution of three
immiscible fluid phases denoted by fluid A, fluid B, and fluid C. The interface solves the
Navier-Stokes equations governing conservation of momentum and mass. The
momentum equations solved correspond to
u
T
2
+ ( u )u = p I + ( u + u ) --- ( u ) I + F st + F
t
3
(6-12)
where Fst is the surface tension force. The physics interface assumes that the density of
each phase is constant. The density may however vary between the phases. In order to
accurately handle systems where density of the phases are significantly different, as well as
systems with phases of similar density, the following fully compressible continuity equation
is solved by the interface
-------------log + u + u log = 0
t
(6-13)
THEORY FOR THE THREE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACE
307
TE R N A R Y P H A S E F I E L D E Q U A T I O N S
In order to track the interfaces between three immiscible fluids, a ternary phase field model
based on the work of Boyer and co-workers in Ref. 1 is used. The model solves the
following Cahn-Hilliard equations
M
--------i + ( u i ) = -------0- i
t
i
4 T
i = ---------
ji
1 F F 3
---- -------- -------- --- 2 i
j i j 4 j
(6-14)
governing the phase field variable, i, and a generalized chemical potential, i, of each
phase i = A, B, C. The phase field variables vary between 0 and 1 and are a measure of the
concentration of each phase. The phase field variable for phase A is one in instances
containing only this phase, and zero where there is no phase A. Since the fluids are
immiscible, variations in the phase field variable occur, and define the interface separating
two phases. At each point the phase field variables satisfy the following constraint
i = 1
(6-15)
i = A , B, C
The density of each phase is assumed to be constant which implies that the phase field
variable corresponds to the volume fraction of the phase in question. In order to satisfy
Equation 6-15, two sets of the equations shown in Equation 6-14 are solved, namely
those for phase A and phase B. The phase field variable, and correspondingly the mass
fraction, for fluid C is computed from Equation 6-15.
The density and viscosity of the fluid mixture used in Equation 6-7 and 6-8 are defined as:
= A A + B B + C C
(6-16)
= A A + B B + C C
Free energy
The free energy of the three phase system is defined as a function of the phase field
variables in the manner of:
2 2
2 2
2 2
F = AB A B + AC A C + BC B C +
2 2 2
A B C ( A A + B B + C C ) + A B C
308 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
(6-17)
Here the ij denotes the surface tension coefficient of the interface separating phase i and
j, and the capillary parameters i are defined for each phase in the manner of:
A = AB + AC BC
B = AB + BC AC
(6-18)
C = BC + AC AB
in the free energy is a function or parameter specifying the additional free bulk energy
of the system. By default is zero. In this case it can be seen that the free energy in
Equation 6-17 represents the mixing energy, since only interfaces between two phases
(where two phase field variables varies between the limiting values) contributes to the free
energy.
Ternary Phase Field parameters
In Equation 6-14, (SI unit: 1/m) is a parameter controlling the interface thickness, M0
(SI unit: m3/s) is a molecular mobility parameter, and the parameter T is defined as
3
1
1
1
-----= ------- + ------- + ------T
A B C
(6-19)
When using the interface it is recommended that the parameter is given a value in the
same order as the elements in the regions passed by the fluid-fluid interfaces. The mobility
determines the time scale of the Cahn-Hilliard diffusion and must be large enough to
retain a constant interfacial thickness, but small enough to avoid damping the convective
transport. In order to ensure that the mobility is in the correct range, it is recommended
to a apply a mobility parameter such that the following holds approximately
M 0 = L c U c 10
(6-20)
where Lc and Uc are the characteristic length and velocity scales of the system at hand.
SURFACE TENSION
The surface tension force applied in the momentum equations (Equation 6-7) as a body
force computed from the generalized chemical potentials:
F st =
i i
(6-21)
i = A, B , C
THEORY FOR THE THREE-PHASE FLOW INTERFACE
309
Reference for the Three-Phase Flow, Phase Field Interface
1. F. Boyer, C. Lapuerta, S. Minjeaud, B. Piar and M. Quintard,
Cahn-hilliard/Navier-Stokes model for the simulation of three-phase flows, Transport
in Porous Media, vol. 28, pp. 463484, 2010.
310 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Theory for the Bubbly Flow
Interfaces
The Bubbly Flow interfaces are suitable for macroscopic modeling of mixtures of liquids
and gas bubbles. These physics interfaces solve for the averaged volume fraction occupied
by each of the two phases, rather than tracking each bubble in detail. Each phase has its
own velocity field.
In this section:
The Bubbly Flow Equations
Turbulence Modeling in Bubbly Flow Applications
References for the Bubbly Flow Interfaces
The Bubbly Flow Equations
The two-fluid Euler-Euler Model is a general, macroscopic model for two-phase fluid flow.
It treats the two phases as interpenetrating media, tracking the averaged concentration of
the phases. One velocity field is associated with each phase. A momentum balance
equation and a continuity equation describe the dynamics of each of the phases. The
bubbly flow model is a simplification of the two-fluid model, relying on the following
assumptions:
The gas density is negligible compared to the liquid density.
The motion of the gas bubbles relative to the liquid is determined by a balance between
viscous drag and pressure forces.
The two phases share the same pressure field.
Based on these assumptions, the momentum and continuity equations for the two phases
can be combined and a gas phase transport equation is kept in order to track the volume
fraction of the bubbles. The momentum equation is
l l
u l
+ l l u l u l =
t
(6-22)
T 2
= p + l ( l + T ) u l + u l --- ( u l )I + l l g + F
3
THEORY FOR THE BUBBLY FLOW INTERFACES
311
In Equation 6-22, the variables are as follows:
ul is the velocity vector (SI unit: m/s)
p is the pressure (SI unit: Pa)
is the phase volume fraction (SI unit: m3/m3)
is the density (SI unit: kg/m3)
g is the gravity vector (SI unit: m/s2)
F is any additional volume force (SI unit: N/m3)
l is the dynamic viscosity of the liquid (SI unit: Pas), and
T is the turbulent viscosity (SI unit: Pas)
The subscripts l and g denote quantities related to the liquid phase and the gas phase,
respectively.
The continuity equation is
( + g g ) + ( l l ul + g g ug ) = 0
t l l
(6-23)
and the gas phase transport equation is
g g
--------------- + ( g u g ) = m gl
g
t
(6-24)
where mgl is the mass transfer rate from the gas to the liquid (SI unit: kg/(m3s)).
For low gas volume fractions ( g 0.01 ), you can replace the momentum equations,
Equation 6-22, and the continuity equation, Equation 6-23, by
l l
u l
+ l l u l u l =
t
(6-25)
T
= p + [ l ( l + T ) ( u l + u l ) ] + l l g + F
l ul = 0
(6-26)
By default, the Laminar Bubbly Flow interface uses Equation 6-25 and 6-26. To switch to
Equation 6-22 and 6-23, click to clear the Low gas concentration check box under the
Physical Model section.
The physics interface solves for ul, p, and
312 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
g = g g
the effective gas density. The gas velocity ug is the sum of the following velocities:
u g = u l + u slip + u drift
(6-27)
where uslip is the relative velocity between the phases and udrift is a drift velocity (see
Turbulence Modeling in Bubbly Flow Applications). The physics interface calculates the
gas density from the ideal gas law:
( p + p ref )M
g = -----------------------------RT
where M is the molecular weight of the gas (SI unit: kg/mol), R is the ideal gas constant
(8.314472 J/(molK)), pref a reference pressure (SI unit: Pa), and T is temperature
(SI unit: K). pref is a scalar variable, which by default is 1 atm (1 atmosphere or
101,325 Pa). The liquid volume fraction is calculated from
l = 1 g
When there is a drift velocity, it has the form
g
u drift = ---- ---------l g
(6-28)
Where is an effective viscosity causing the drift. Inserting Equation 6-28 and
Equation 6-27 into Equation 6-24 gives
g g
--------------- + ( g ( u l + u slip ) ) = ---------g g m gl
g
t
l
That is, the drift velocity introduces a diffusive term in the gas transport equation. This is
how the equation for the transport of the volume fraction of gas is actually implemented
in the physics interface.
The bubbly-flow equation formulation is relatively simple, but it can display some
nonphysical behavior. One is artificial accumulation of bubbles, for example, beneath walls
where the pressure gradient forces the bubbles upward, but the bubbles have no place to
go and there is no term in the model to prevent the volume fraction of gas from growing.
To prevent this from happening, is set to l in the laminar case. The only apparent effect
of this in most cases where the bubbly-flow equations are applicable is that nonphysical
THEORY FOR THE BUBBLY FLOW INTERFACES
313
accumulation of bubbles is reduced. The small effective viscosity in the transport equation
for g has beneficial effects on the numerical properties of the equation system.
M A S S TR A N S F E R A N D I N T E R F A C I A L A RE A
It is possible to account for mass transfer between the two phases by specifying an
expression for the mass transfer rate from the gas to the liquid mgl (SI unit: kg/(m3s)).
The mass transfer rate typically depends on the interfacial area between the two phases. An
example is when gas dissolves into a liquid. In order to determine the interfacial area, it is
necessary to solve for the bubble number density (that is, the number of bubbles per
volume) in addition to the phase volume fraction. The Bubbly Flow interface assumes that
the gas bubbles can expand or shrink but not completely vanish, merge, or split. The
conservation of the number density n (SI unit: 1/m3) then gives
n
+ ( nu g ) = 0
t
The number density and the volume fraction of gas give the interfacial area per unit
volume (SI unit: m2/m3):
a = ( 4n )
13
( 3 g )
23
SLIP MODEL
The simplest possible approximation for the slip velocity uslip is to assume that the bubbles
always follow the liquid phase; that is, uslip = 0. This is known as homogeneous flow.
A better model can be obtained from the momentum equation for the gas phase.
Comparing size of different terms, it can be argued that the equation can be reduced to a
balance between the viscous drag force, fD and the pressure gradient (Ref. 3), a so called
pressure-drag balance:
g p = f D
(6-29)
3 l
f D = d C d --- ------ u slip u slip
4 db
(6-30)
Here fD can be written as
where in turn db (SI unit: m) is the bubble diameter, and Cd (dimensionless) is the viscous
drag coefficient. Given Cd and db, Equation 6-29 can be used to calculate the slip velocity.
314 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Schwarz and Turner (Ref. 4) proposed a linearized version of Equation 6-30 appropriate
for air bubbles of 110 mm mean diameter in water:
f D = d C W u slip
kgC W = 5 10 4 --------m3s
(6-31)
The Hadamard-Rybczynski model is appropriate for small spherical bubbles with diameter
less than 2 mm. The model uses the following expression for the drag coefficient (Ref. 5):
16
C d = ---------- ,
Re b
d b l u slip
Re b = --------------------------l
For bubbles with diameter larger than 2 mm, the model suggested by Sokolichin,
Eigenberger, and Lapin (Ref. 1) is a more appropriate choice:
0,622
C d = ----------------------------1
------- + 0,235
E
where E is the Etvs number
2
g l d b
E = --------------
Here, g is the magnitude of the gravity vector and the surface tension coefficient.
Turbulence Modeling in Bubbly Flow Applications
For most bubbly flow applications the flow field is turbulent. In that case, use a turbulence
model and solve for the averaged velocity field. For the Turbulent Bubbly Flow interface,
the k- turbulence model is used. In addition to the options of the single-phase flow
model, it is also possible to account for bubble-induced turbulencethat is, extra
production of turbulence due to relative motion between the gas bubbles and the liquid.
The k- model solves two extra transport equations for two additional variables: the
turbulent kinetic energy, k (SI unit: m2/s2) and the dissipation rate of turbulent energy,
(SI unit: m/s3). The turbulent viscosity is then
k2
T = l C -----
where C is a model constant.
THEORY FOR THE BUBBLY FLOW INTERFACES
315
The transport equation for the turbulent kinetic energy, k, is
l
T
k
+ l u l k = l + ------ k + P k l + S k
t
k
(6-32)
where the production term is
2
2
P k = T u l : ( u l + ( u l ) T ) --- ( u l ) 2 --- k u l
3
3
and the evolution of the turbulent energys dissipation rate is given by:
l
+ l u l = l + ------ + C 1 --- C P k l C 2 ----- + C S k --
t
k
k 1
k
(6-33)
In all the previous equations, the velocity, ul, is the liquid phase averaged velocity field.
The standard k- turbulence model uses the following constants:
CONSTANT
VALUE
0.09
C1
1.44
C2
1.92
1.0
1.3
The included source term Sk accounts for bubble-induced turbulence and is given by
S k = C k g p u slip
Suitable values for the model parameters Ck and C are not as well established as the
parameters for single-phase flow. In the literature, values within the ranges 0.01 < Ck < 1
and 1 < C < 1.92 have been suggested (Ref. 1). The turbulent viscosity appears in the
momentum equation and when adding a drift term to the gas velocity:
T g
u drift = ------ ---------l g
Using the k- model together with a gas concentration that is not assumed to be low, the
stress tensor contains an extra contribution, and the momentum equations becomes
316 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
l l
u l
+ l l u l u l =
t
(6-34)
2
T 2
= p + l ( l + T ) u l + u l --- ( u l )I --- l l kI + l l g + F
3
3
References for the Bubbly Flow Interfaces
1. A. Sokolichin, G. Eigenberger, and A. Lapin, Simulations of Buoyancy Driven Bubbly
Flow: Established Simplifications and Open Questions, AIChE Journal, vol. 50, no. 1,
pp. 2449, 2004.
2. D. Kuzmin and S. Turek, Efficient Numerical Techniques for Flow Simulation in
Bubble Column Reactors, Institute of Applied Mathematics, University of Dortmund,
2000.
3. D. Kuzmin, S. Turek, and H. Haario, Finite Element Simulation of Turbulent Bubbly
Flows in Gas-liquid Reactors, Ergebnisberichte Angew, Math, 298, University of
Dortmund, 2005.
4. M.P. Schwarz and W.J. Turner, Applicability of the Standard k- Turbulence Model to
Gas-stirred Baths, Applied Mathematical Modelling, vol. 12, pp. 273279, 1988.
5. C. Crowe, M. Sommerfeld, and Y. Tsuji, Multiphase Flows with Droplets and
Particles, CRC Press, 1998.
THEORY FOR THE BUBBLY FLOW INTERFACES
317
T he o r y f o r the Mi xt u re Mod el
Interfaces
The mixture model is a macroscopic two-phase flow model, in many ways similar to the
bubbly flow model. It tracks the averaged phase concentration, or volume fraction, and
solves a single momentum equation for the mixture velocity. It is suitable for mixtures
consisting of solid particles or liquid droplets immersed in a liquid.
The Mixture Model interface theory is described in this section:
The Mixture Model Equations
Dispersed Phase Boundary Conditions Equations
Turbulence Modeling in Mixture Models
Slip Velocity Models
References for the Mixture Model Interfaces
The Mixture Model Equations
Just as for the Bubbly Flow interfaces, the Mixture Model interfaces are based on the two
fluid Euler-Euler Model. The two phases consist of one dispersed phase and one
continuous phase. The mixture model is valid if the continuous phase is a liquid, and the
dispersed phase consists of solid particles, liquid droplets, or gas bubbles. For gas bubbles
in a liquid, however, the bubbly flow model is preferable. The mixture model relies on the
following assumptions.
The density of each phase is approximately constant.
Both phases share the same pressure field.
The relative velocity between the two phases is essentially determined assuming a
balance between the pressure gradient and viscous drag.
The momentum equation for the mixture is
u t + ( u )u = p Gm + g + F
T
D md
D md
c d ( 1 c d ) u slip -------------------------- d u slip -------------------------- d
( 1 c d ) d
( 1 c d ) d
318 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
where:
u is the velocity vector (SI unit: m/s)
is the density (SI unit: kg/m3)
p is the pressure (SI unit: Pa)
cd is the mass fraction of the dispersed phase (SI unit: kg/kg)
uslip is the relative velocity vector between the two phases (SI unit: m/s)
Gm is the sum of the viscous and turbulent stresses (SI unit: kg/(ms2))
g is the gravity vector (SI unit: m/s2), and
F is any additional volume force (SI unit: N/m3)
The velocity u used here is the mass-averaged mixture velocity (SI unit: m/s), defined as
c c uc + d d ud
u = -------------------------------------------
where
c and d denote the volume fractions of the continuous phase and the dispersed phase
(SI unit: m3/m3), respectively
uc is the continuous phase velocity vector (SI unit: m/s)
ud is the dispersed phase velocity vector (SI unit: m/s)
c is the continuous phase density (SI unit: kg/m3)
d is the dispersed phase density (SI unit: kg/m3), and
is the mixture density (SI unit: kg/m3)
The relationship between the velocities of the two phases is defined by
D md
u d u c = u cd = u slip -------------------------- d
( 1 c d ) d
(6-35)
Here, uslip (SI unit: m/s) denotes the relative velocity between the two phases. For
different available models for the slip velocity, see Slip Velocity Models. Dmd is a turbulent
dispersion coefficient (SI unit: m2/s) (see Turbulence Modeling in Mixture Models),
accounting for extra diffusion due to turbulent eddies. When a turbulence model is not
used, Dmd is zero.
The mixture density is given by
= c c + d d
THEORY FOR THE MIXTURE MODEL INTERFACES
319
where c and d (SI units: kg/m3) are the densities of the two phases. The mass fraction
of the dispersed phase cd is given by
d d
c d = -----------
The sum of the viscous and turbulent stresses is
T
2
Gm = ( + T ) ( u + u ) --- ( u )I
3
(6-36)
where (SI unit: Pas) is the mixture viscosity and T (SI unit: Pas) the turbulent viscosity.
If no turbulence model is used, T equals zero.
The transport equation for d, the dispersed phase volume fraction, is
( ) + ( u ) = m
d d d
dc
t d d
(6-37)
where mdc (SI unit: kg/(m3s)) is the mass transfer rate from the dispersed to the
continuous phase and ud (SI unit: m/s) is the dispersed phase velocity according to
Equation 6-35. Assuming constant density for the dispersed phase, Equation 6-37 can be
rewritten as
m dc
( ) + ( u )
d
d d = --------d
t
(6-38)
The continuous phase volume fraction c is
c = 1 d
The continuity equation for the mixture is
t + ( u ) = 0
(6-39)
In the Mixture Model interfaces it is assumed that the densities of both phases, c and d,
are constant, and therefore the following alternative form of the continuity equation for
the mixture is used
m dc
( c d ) ( d ( 1 c d )u slip D md d ) + ---------- + c ( u ) = 0
d
Equation 6-40 is derived from Equation 6-37 and Equation 6-39.
320 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
(6-40)
M A S S TR A N S F E R A N D I N T E R F A C I A L A RE A
It is possible to account for mass transfer between the two phases by specifying an
expression for the mass transfer rate from the dispersed phase to the continuous mdc (SI
unit: kg/(m3s)).
The mass transfer rate typically depends on the interfacial area between the two phases. An
example is when gas dissolves into a liquid. In order to determine the interfacial area, it is
necessary to solve for the dispersed phase number density (that is, the number of particles
per volume) in addition to the phase volume fraction. The Mixture Model interface
assumes that the particles can increase or decrease in size but not completely vanish,
merge, or split. The conservation of the number density n (SI unit: 1/m3) then gives
n
+ ( nu d ) = 0
t
The number density and the volume fraction dispersed particles give the interfacial area
per unit volume (SI unit: m2/m3):
a = ( 4n )
13
( 3 d )
23
Dispersed Phase Boundary Conditions Equations
In addition to the boundary conditions for the mixture, specify boundary conditions for
the dispersed phase on Wall, Inlet, and Outlet nodes. For these boundary types, the
boundary conditions Settings window contains a Dispersed Phase Boundary Condition
section.
DISPERSED PHASE CONCENTRATION
This is the default for the Inlet node. Specify the dispersed phase volume fraction:
d = d0
Enter the Dispersed phase volume fraction (dimensionless) in the d0 field.
DISPERSED PHASE OUTLET
This is the default for the Outlet node. This boundary condition is appropriate for
boundaries where the dispersed phase leaves the domain with the dispersed phase velocity
ud. No condition is imposed on the volume fractions at the boundary.
DISPERSED PHASE FLUX
Using this boundary condition, specify the dispersed phase flux through the boundary:
THEORY FOR THE MIXTURE MODEL INTERFACES
321
n ( d u d ) = Nd
Enter the Dispersed phase flux (SI unit: m/s) in the N d field.
SYMMETRY
This boundary condition, which is useful on boundaries that represent a symmetry line for
the dispersed phase, sets the dispersed phase flux through the boundary to zero:
n ( d ud ) = 0
NO DISPERSED FLUX
This is the default for the Wall node. This boundary condition represents boundaries
where the dispersed phase flux through the boundary is zero:
n ( d ud ) = 0
Turbulence Modeling in Mixture Models
For turbulence modeling, use the k- turbulence model. Turbulence modeling is
particularly relevant for dilute flows, that is, for flows with a low dispersed phase volume
fraction. For dense flows, the mixture viscosity usually becomes high. In such cases, the
flow is laminar and no turbulence modeling is necessary.
The k- turbulence model solves two extra transport equations for two additional
variables: the turbulent kinetic energy, k (SI unit: m2/s2), and the dissipation rate of
turbulent kinetic energy, (SI unit: m2/s3). The turbulent viscosity is given by
k2
T = C -----
where C is a model constant.
The transport equation for the turbulent kinetic energy k is
T
k
------ + u k = + ------ k + P k
k
t
where the production term is
2
2
P k = T u: ( u + ( u ) T ) --- ( u ) 2 --- k u
3
3
322 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
The evolution of the dissipation rate of the turbulent kinetic energy, , is determined by
T
----- + u = + ------ + C 1 --- P C 2 ----
t
k
k k
By default, the following variables are used for the dimensionless parameters:
CONSTANT
VALUE
0.09
C1
1.44
C2
1.92
1.0
1.3
The turbulence must also be accounted for in the calculation of the dispersed phase
volume fraction. This is accomplished by introducing a turbulent dispersion coefficient
Dmd (SI unit: m2/s) in Equation 6-35 as
T
D md = --------- T
where T is the turbulent particle Schmidt number (dimensionless). The particle Schmidt
number is usually suggested a value ranging from 0.35 to 0.7. In the physics interface the
default value is 0.35. The so-called drift velocity is included in Equation 6-38 as a diffusion
term
m dc
( ) + ( d d ) = ( D md d ) ---------d
t d
where in turn
d = u + u slip ( 1 c d )
Similarly, the number density equation (used to compute the interfacial area) for turbulent
flow corresponds to
n
+ ( n d ) = ( D md n )
t
Using the k- turbulence model, the viscous stress tensor contains an extra contribution
and eq.Equation 6-36 is replaced by
THEORY FOR THE MIXTURE MODEL INTERFACES
323
2
2
T
Gm = ( + T ) ( u + u ) --- ( u )I --- kI
3
3
(6-41)
Slip Velocity Models
The Mixture Model interfaces contain three predefined models for the relative velocity
between the two phases uslip (SI unit: m/s):
The Schiller-Naumann model
The Haider-Levenspiel model
The Hadamard-Rybczynski model
All three models use the following relation for the slip velocity:
( d )
3 Cd
- u t ( u )u + g + F
----
--- ------- c u slip u slip = ------------------
4 dd
(6-42)
where Cd (dimensionless) is the particle drag coefficient. Essentially, interpret the relation
as a balance between viscous drag and buoyancy forces acting on the dispersed phase.
The Schiller-Naumann model models the drag coefficient according to
Cd =
0,687
24
---------- ( 1 + 0,15Rep
)
Re p
Re p < 1000
0,44
Re p > 1000
where Rep is the particle Reynolds number
d d c u slip
Re p = --------------------------
Because the particle Reynolds number depends on the slip velocity, an implicit equation
must be solved to obtain the slip velocity. Therefore, the Mixture Model interfaces add an
additional equation for
u slip
when the Schiller-Naumann slip model is used. The Schiller-Naumann model is
particularly well-suited for solid particles in a liquid.
The Haider-Levenspiel model is applicable to non-spherical particles. It models the drag
coefficient according to
324 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
B ( Sp )
C ( Sp )
24
+ ---------------------------------------C d = ---------- 1 + A ( S p )Re p
1 + D ( S p ) Re p
Re p
where A, B, C and D are empirical correlations of the particle sphericity. The sphericity is
defined as the ratio of the surface area of a volume equivalent sphere to the surface area of
the considered non-spherical particle
A sphere
0 < S p = ------------------ 1
A particle
The correlation coefficients are given by
A ( Sp ) = e
2.3288-6.4581S p + 2.4486S p2
B ( S p ) = 0.0964+0.5565S p
C ( Sp ) = e
4.905-13.8944S p + 18.4222S p2 10.2599S p3
D ( Sp ) = e
1.4681 + 12.2584S p 20.7322S p2 + 15.8855S p3
The diameter used in the particle Reynolds number is that of the volume equivalent
sphere. The equation for the squared slip velocity is also added when the
Haider-Levenspiel slip model is used.
The Hadamard-Rybczynski drag law is valid for particle Reynolds numbers less than 1, for
particles, bubbles, and droplets. The drag coefficient for liquid droplets or bubbles is
2 c
1 + --3- ---- d
24-
--------------------------Cd =
Re p
c
1 + ------
d
which yields the following explicit expression for the slip velocity
u slip
2 1 + ------
( d )d d
d
= --------------------------- -------------------- p
18 c
1 + 2
--- -----c-
3 d
For solid particles, the slip velocity is given by
THEORY FOR THE MIXTURE MODEL INTERFACES
325
( d )d d
u slip = --------------------------- p
18 c
when Rep < 1. For very small gas bubbles, the drag coefficient is observed to be closer to
the solid-particle value. This is believed to be caused by surface-active impurities collecting
on the bubble surface.
References for the Mixture Model Interfaces
1. M. Manninen, V. Taivassalo, and S. Kallio, On the Mixture Model for Multiphase Flow,
VTT Publications, 288, VTT Energy, Nuclear Energy, Technical Research Center of
Finland (VTT), 1996.
2. C. Crowe, M. Sommerfeld, and Y. Tsuji, Multiphase Flows with Droplets and
Particles, CRC Press, 1998.
326 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Theory for the Euler-Euler Model
Interfaces
The Euler-Euler Model interfaces are based on averaging the Navier-Stokes equations for
each present phase over a volume that is small compared to the computational domain but
large compared to the dispersed phase (particles, droplets, or bubbles). The two phases,
the continuous and the dispersed phase, are assumed to behave as two continuous and
interpenetrating fluids, and the physics interface solves one set of momentum equations
for each phase.
In this section:
The Euler-Euler Model Equations
Turbulent Two-Phase Flow Modeling
References for the Euler-Euler Model Interfaces
The Euler-Euler Model Equations
MASS BALANCE
Assuming that the mass transfer between the two phases is zero, the following continuity
relations hold for the continuous and dispersed phases (Ref. 3):
( ) + ( c c uc ) = 0
t c c
(6-43)
( ) + ( d d ud ) = 0
t d d
(6-44)
Here (dimensionless) denotes the phase volume fraction, (SI unit: kg/m3) is the
density, and u (SI unit: m/s) the velocity of each phase. The subscripts c and d denote
quantities relating to the continuous and the dispersed and phase, respectively. The
following relation between the volume fractions must hold
c = 1 d
Both phases are considered to be incompressible, in which case Equation 6-43 and
Equation 6-44 can be simplified as:
T H E O R Y F O R T H E E U L E R- E U L E R M O D E L I N T E R F A C E S
327
d
+ ( d ud ) = 0
t
(6-45)
c
+ ( c uc ) = 0
t
(6-46)
If Equation 6-45 and Equation 6-46 are added together, a continuity equation for the
mixture is obtained:
( d ud + uc ( 1 d ) ) = 0
(6-47)
In order to control the mass balance of the two phases, the Euler-Euler Model interfaces
solves Equation 6-45 together with Equation 6-47. Equation 6-45 is used to compute the
volume fraction of the dispersed phase, and Equation 6-47 is used to compute the mixture
pressure.
MOMENTUM BALANCE
The momentum equations for the continuous and dispersed phases, using the
non-conservative forms of Ishii (Ref. 4), are:
c c
d d
( u ) + u c ( u c ) = c p + ( c c ) + c c g + F m,c + c F c
t c
(6-48)
( u ) + u d ( u d ) = d p + ( d d ) + d d g + F m,d + d F d
t d
(6-49)
Here p (SI unit: Pa) is the mixture pressure, which is assumed to be equal for the two
phases. In the momentum equations the viscous stress tensor for each phase is denoted by
(SI unit: Pa), g (SI unit: m/s2) is the vector of gravitational acceleration, Fm (SI unit:
N/m3) is the interphase momentum transfer term (that is, the volume force exerted on
each phase by the other phase), and F (SI unit: N/m3) is any other volume force term.
In these equations, the influence of surface tension in the case of liquid phases has been
neglected, and the potential size distribution of the dispersed particles or droplets is not
considered.
For fluid-solid mixtures, Equation 6-49 is modified in the manner of Enwald (Ref. 5)
d d
( u ) + ud ( ud ) =
t d
d p + ( d d ) p s + d d g + F m,d + d F d
328 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
(6-50)
where ps (SI unit: Pa) is the solid pressure.
The fluid phases in the above equations are assumed to be Newtonian and the viscous
stress tensors are defined as
T 2
c = C u c + ( u c ) --- ( u c )I
3
T 2
d = D u d + ( u d ) --- ( u d )I
3
where (SI unit: Pas) is the dynamic viscosity of the respective phase.
In order to avoid singular solutions when the volume fractions tend to zero, the governing
equations above are divided by the corresponding volume fraction. The implemented
momentum equation for the continuous phase is:
c c
F m,c
c (u c) + c u c ( u c ) = p + c + --------------- + c g + ----------- + F c
t
c
c
The implemented momentum equations for the dispersed phase in the case of dispersed
liquid droplets or bubbles is:
d d
F m,d
d (u d) + d u d ( u d ) = p + d + -------------------- + d g + ------------ + F d
t
d
d
(6-51)
and in the case of dispersed solid particles:
( u ) + d ud ( ud ) =
t d
d d p s
F m,d
p + d + -------------------- --------- + d g + ------------ + F d
d
d
d
d
(6-52)
DISPERSED PHASE VISCOSITY
The Newtonian viscosities of interpenetrating media are not readily available. Instead
empirical and analytical models for the dynamic viscosity of the two-phase mixture have
been developed by various researchers, usually as a function of the dispersed volume
fraction. Using an expression for the mixture viscosity, the default values for the dynamic
viscosities of the two interpenetrating phases are taken to be:
C = D = mix
(6-53)
T H E O R Y F O R T H E E U L E R- E U L E R M O D E L I N T E R F A C E S
329
A simple mixture viscosity covering the entire range of particle concentrations is the
Krieger type model (Ref. 5):
d 2.5 d,max
mix = c 1 ---------------
d,max
(6-54)
Here d,max is the maximum packing limit, by default 0.62 for solid particles.
Equation 6-54 can be applied when c d . An extension of Equation 6-54 can be
applied for liquid droplets/bubbles:
mix
d
= c 1 ---------------
d,max
d + 0.4 c
2.5 d,max ------------------------d + c
(6-55)
For liquid droplets/bubbles the default value of d,max is 1.
I N T E R P H A S E M O M E N T U M TR A N S F E R
In all the equations, Fm denotes the interphase momentum transfer, that is the force
imposed on one phase by the other phase. Considering a particle, droplet, or bubble in a
fluid flow, it is affected by a number of forces, for example, the drag force, the added mass
force, the Basset force, and the lift force. The most important force is usually the drag
force, especially in fluids with a high concentration of dispersed solids, and hence this is
the predefined force included in the Euler-Euler model. The drag force added to the
momentum equation is defined as:
F drag,c = F drag,d = u slip
(6-56)
where is a drag force coefficient and the slip velocity is defined as
u slip = u d u c
The drag force on the dispersed phase is equal to the one on the
continuous phase but is working in the opposite direction.
Dense Flows
For dense flows with a high concentration of the dispersed phasefor example, in
fluidized bed modelsthe Gidaspow model (Ref. 6) for the drag coefficient can be used.
It combines the Wen and Yu (Ref. 7) fluidized state expression:
For c > 0.8
330 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
3 c d c C d
2.65
= ---------------------------- u slip c
4d d
(6-57)
with the Ergun (Ref. 8) packed bed expression:
For c < 0.8
2
c d
d c
= 150 -----------2- + 1.75 ----------- u slip
dd
c d d
(6-58)
In the above equations, dd (SI unit: m) is the dispersed particle diameter, and Cd is the
drag coefficient for a single dispersed particle. The drag coefficient is in general a function
of the particle Reynolds number
c d d c u slip
Re p = -------------------------------c
No universally valid expression for the drag coefficient exists. Using the implemented
Gidaspow model, Cd is computed using the Schiller-Naumann relation
Cd =
0.687
24
---------- ( 1 + 0.15Re p
)
Re p
Re p < 1000
0.44
Re p > 1000
(6-59)
Dilute Flows
For dilute flows the drag force coefficient can be modeled as:
3 d c C d
= ----------------------- u slip
4d d
(6-60)
In this case the drag coefficient can be computed from the Schiller-Naumann model in
Equation 6-59, the Haider-Levenspiel model, or by using the Hadamard-Rybczynski drag
law. The Haider-Levenspiel model is applicable to nonspherical particles. It models the
drag coefficient according to
B ( Sp )
C ( Sp )
24
+ ---------------------------------------C d = ---------- 1 + A ( S p )Re p
1 + D ( S p ) Re p
Re p
where A, B, C, and D are empirical correlations of the particle sphericity (see Slip Velocity
Models for further details). The Hadamard-Rybczynski drag law is valid for particle
Reynolds number less than one for particles, bubbles, and droplets and is defined as:
T H E O R Y F O R T H E E U L E R- E U L E R M O D E L I N T E R F A C E S
331
2 c-
1 + --3- ---- d
24
C d = ---------- --------------------
Re p
1 + -----c-
d
for bubbles and droplets and as
24
C d = ---------Re p
for solid particles (the Stokes limit). For very small gas bubbles, the drag coefficient is
observed to be closer to the solid-particle value. This is believed to be caused by
surface-active impurities collecting on the bubble surface.
SOLID PRESSURE
For fluid-solid mixtures, a model for the solid pressure, ps in Equation 6-52, is needed.
The solid pressure models the particle interaction due to collisions and friction between
the particles. The solid pressure model implemented uses a gradient diffusion based
assumption:
p s = G ( c ) c
where the empirical function G is given by
G ( c ) = 10
B1 c + B2
(6-61)
described in Ref. 5. The available predefined models (all defined in Ref. 5) are those of
Gidaspow and Ettehadieh,
G ( c ) = 10
-8.76 c + 5.43
(6-62)
Ettehadieh,
G ( c ) = 10
-10.46 c + 6.577
(6-63)
and Gidaspow,
G ( c ) = 10
332 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
-10.5 c + 9.0
(6-64)
NOTES ON THE IMPLEMENTATION
There are several equations with potentially singular terms and expressions such as the
term
F m,d
-----------d
in Equation 6-51. Also, d is a degree of freedom and can therefore, during
computations, obtain nonphysical values in small areas. This can, in turn, lead to
nonphysical values of material properties such as viscosity and density. To avoid these
problems, the implementation uses the following regularizations:
1/ k, k=c,d is replaced by1/ k,pos where
k, pos = 0.001 + 0.999 flc1hs ( k 5e 4, 5e 4 )
k k is evaluated as ( log ( k, pos ) ) .
The variable d is only used directly in Equation 6-45. It is everywhere else replaced by
d, reg = min ( max ( d, 0 ), 1 )
Note that this includes the way c is calculated; that is,
c = 1 d, reg
An extra diffusion term is added to the right-hand side of Equation 6-45 to minimize
the occurrence of negative values of d . The barrier viscosity is calculated as
k
b = ( e max ( d 0.0025, 0 ) 1 ) -----k
where the index k indicates that the viscosity and density are taken from the continuous
phase if the dispersed phase is a solid and from the dispersed phase otherwise. Note that
b is only nonzero if d is less than zero.
Turbulent Two-Phase Flow Modeling
When the characteristic Reynolds number of the two-phase mixture under investigation
becomes high, the flow transitions and becomes turbulent. The influence of the
turbulence on the flow characteristics (mixing, particle dispersion, pressure drop etc.) are
usually significant and warrants the use of a turbulence model.
T H E O R Y F O R T H E E U L E R- E U L E R M O D E L I N T E R F A C E S
333
In order to model fluid flow turbulence, the Euler-Euler Model, Turbulent Flow interface
uses the k- turbulence model. This is realized by solving transport equations for the
kinetic energy k (SI unit: m2/s2) and the dissipation rate of turbulent kinetic energy (SI
unit: m2/s3).
The interface includes the possibility to model the turbulent flow of the two-phase
mixture, or to solve for turbulent flow of each phase separately. In the former case one set
of k- equations are solved, while in the latter two sets of k- equations are solved for, one
for each phase.
M I X T U R E TU R B U L E N C E
Mixture turbulence assumes that the turbulence effects on the both continuous and
dispersed phase can be modeled by solving for the turbulence of the resulting two-phase
mixture. Here this is done using a two-equation k- model where the transport of
turbulence quantities is based on based on the mixture velocity
c c um + d d um
u m = ----------------------------------------------- ,
and a volume averaged mixture viscosity
m = c C + d D
This implies that the model is appropriate for flows where the relaxation time of the
dispersed particles (the time scale on which particles react to changes in the carrier fluid
velocity) is not significantly different to the time scale of the turbulence. It is also
appropriate for stratified flows, where the mixture mainly consists of one of the phases.
Setting the Two-phase turbulence interface property to Mixture, the turbulence of the
two-phase flow is modeled by solving the following k and equations:
T
k
------ + u m k = m + ------ k + P k
t
k
(6-65)
----- + u m = m + ------ + C 1 --- P C 2 ----
k
t
k k
(6-66)
The equations correspond to the standard two-equation k- model including realizability
constraints.
The production term is defined accordingly as
334 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
2
2
P k = T u m : ( u m + ( u m ) T ) --- ( u m ) 2 --- k u m
3
3
and the resulting turbulent viscosity is defined as
k2
T = C -----
where C is a model constant. The viscous stress tensors for the phases are hence defined as
T 2
2
c = ( C + T ) u c + ( u c ) --- ( u c )I --- c kI ,
3
3
T 2
2
d = ( D + T ) u d + ( u d ) --- ( u d )I --- d kI .
3
3
Assuming mixture turbulence, the transport equation for the volume fraction is:
( ) + ( d u d ) = ( D md d )
t d
(6-67)
Here the dispersion of the particulate phase by the turbulent fluctuations is modeled using
a gradient based hypothesis. The turbulent dispersion coefficient is defined from the
turbulent viscosity of the two-phase mixture in the manner of
T
D md = --------- T
where T is a turbulent particle Schmidt number (dimensionless).
T H E O R Y F O R T H E E U L E R- E U L E R M O D E L I N T E R F A C E S
335
Th default values of the dimensionless parameters using the Mixture Two-phase
turbulence model are:
CONSTANT
VALUE
0.09
C1
1.44
C2
1.92
1.0
1.3
Kv
0.41
5.2
0.35
P H A S E S P E C I F I C TU R B U L E N C E
Phase specific Two-phase turbulence model assumes that the turbulent flow of the
continuous and dispersed phase can be modeled by solving for the turbulence of each
phase separately by a using two sets of k- equations. The model implies that the time
scales of the turbulent flow of each phase can differ, but it is also computationally more
expensive than assuming solving one set of k- equations for the mixture.
Setting the Two-phase turbulence interface property to Phase specific, the turbulent flow of
the two phases is modeled by solving two sets of k and equations, one for each phase.
For the continuous phase, the transport equations for k and are
k c
T,c
c -------- + c u c k c = C + ---------- k c + P k, c c c
t
k, c
(6-68)
c
c
d2
T,c
c ------- + c u c c = C + ---------- c + C 1,c ----- P k, c C 2,c -----
t
, c
kc
kd
(6-69)
while for the dispersed phase the corresponding equations are
336 |
k d
T,d
d --------- + d u d k d = D + ----------- k d + P k, d d d
t
k, d
(6-70)
d
d
d2
T,d
d -------- + d u d d = D + ---------- d + C 1,d ------ P k, d C 2,d -----
t
kd
kd
, d
(6-71)
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
The equations for each phase correspond to the standard two-equation k- model
including realizability constraints.
The production terms are defined as
2
2
P k, c = T,c u c : ( u c + ( u c ) T ) --- ( u c ) 2 --- c k d u c
3
3
2
2
P k, d = T,d u d : ( u d + ( u d ) T ) --- ( u d ) 2 --- d k d u d
3
3
The resulting turbulent viscosity, applied individually in the momentum equations of the
continuous and the dispersed phases, are
k c2
k d2
T, c = c C , c ------ , T, d = d C , d -----c
d
(6-72)
where C,c and C,d are model constants. The viscous stress tensors for the phases are
hence defined as
T 2
2
c = ( C + T, c ) u c + ( u c ) --- ( u c )I --- c k c I ,
3
3
T 2
2
d = ( D + T, d ) u d + ( u d ) --- ( u d )I --- d k d I .
3
3
As in the case of mixture turbulence, the dispersion of the particulate phase by the
turbulent fluctuations is modeled using a gradient based hypothesis (Equation 6-67). For
phase specific turbulence the dispersion coefficient is modeled as a volume average of the
respective turbulent diffusivity of each phase
T, c
T, d
1
D md = ----------- c ----------- + d -----------
c
d
T, d
using a turbulent particle Schmidt number T,d (dimensionless).
T H E O R Y F O R T H E E U L E R- E U L E R M O D E L I N T E R F A C E S
337
The default values of the turbulence model parameters for phase specific turbulence are
CONTINUOUS
PHASE
CONSTANTS
VALUE
DISPERSED
PHASE
CONSTANTS
VALUE
C,c
0.09
C,d
0.09
C1,c
1.44
C1,d
1.44
C2,c
1.92
C2,d
1.92
k,c
1.0
k,d
1.0
,c
1.3
,d
1.3
Kv,c
0.41
Kv,d
0.41
Bc
5.2
Bd
5.2
,d
0.35
References for the Euler-Euler Model Interfaces
1. M.J.V. Goldschmidt, B.P.B. Hoomans, and J.A.M. Kuipers, Recent Progress Towards
Hydrodynamic Modelling of Dense Gas-Particle Flows, Recent Research Developments
in Chemical Engineering, Transworld Research Network, India, pp. 273292, 2000.
2. A. Soulaimani and M. Fortin, Finite Element Solution of Compressible Viscous Flows
Using Conservative Variables, Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and
Engineering, vol. 118, pp. 319350, 1994.
3. C. Crowe, M. Sommerfeld, and Y Tsuji, Multiphase Flows with Droplets and Particles,
CRC Press, Boca Raton, 1998.
4. B.G.M. van Wachem, J.C. Schouten, C.M. van den Bleek, R. Krishna, and J.L. Sinclair,
Comparative Analysis of CFD Models of Dense Gas-Solid Systems, AIChE Journal,
vol. 47, no. 5, pp. 10351051, 2001.
5. H. Enwald, E. Peirano, and A.-E. Almstedt, Eulerian Two-Phase Flow Theory Applied
to Fluidization, Int. J. Multiphase Flow, vol. 22, pp. 2166, 1996.
6. D. Gidaspow, Multiphase Flow and Fluidization, Academic Press, San Diego, 1994.
7. C.Y. Wen and Y.H. Yu, Mechanics of Fluidization, Chemical Engineering Progress
Symposium Series, vol. 62, pp. 100110, 1966.
8. S. Ergun, Fluid Flow Through Packed Columns, Chemical Engineering Progress,
vol. 48, pp. 8994, 1952.
338 |
CHAPTER 6: MULTIPHASE FLOW INTERFACES
Porous Media and Subsurface Flow
Interfaces
This chapter discusses physics interfaces under the Fluid Flow>Porous Media and
Subsurface Flow branch (
). The section Modeling Porous Media and Subsurface
Flow helps you choose the best physics interface to start with.
In this chapter:
The Darcys Law Interface
The Brinkman Equations Interface
The Free and Porous Media Flow Interface
The Two-Phase Darcys Law Interface
Theory for the Darcys Law Interface
Theory for the Brinkman Equations Interface
Theory for the Free and Porous Media Flow Interface
Theory for the Two-Phase Darcys Law Interface
339
Modeling Porous Media and
Subsurface Flow
In this section:
Selecting the Right Physics Interface
The Porous Media Flow Interface Options
Coupling to Other Physics Interfaces
Selecting the Right Physics Interface
The Porous Media and Subsurface Flow branch (
) included with the CFD Module
has a number of subbranches to describe momentum transport. These can be added
either singularly or in combination with other physics interfaces modeling mass and
energy transfer, and even chemical reactions.
Different types of flow require different equations to describe them. If the flow type
to model is known, then select it directly. However, when you are not certain of the
flow type, or when it is difficult to obtain a solution, you can instead start with a
simplified model and add complexity as you build the model. Then you can
successively advance forward, comparing models and results. For porous media flow,
the Darcys Law interface is a good place to start if this is the case.
In other cases, you might know exactly how a fluid behaves and which equations,
models, or physics interfaces best describe it, but because the model is so complex it is
difficult to reach convergence. Simplifying assumptions can be made to solve the
problem, and other physics interfaces can be better at fine-tuning the solution process
for the more complex problem. The next section gives you an overview of each of the
physics interfaces to help you choose.
TABLE 7-1: THE POROUS MEDIA FLOW DEFAULT SETTINGS
340 |
PHYSICS
INTERFACE LABEL
NAME
COMPRESSIBILITY
NEGLECT
INERTIAL TERM
PORE SIZE
Darcy's Law
dl
n/a
n/a
Low porosity and low
permeability, slow flow
Two-Phase
Darcys law
tpdl
n/a
n/a
Low porosity and low
permeability, slow flow
CHAPTER 7: POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW INTERFACES
TABLE 7-1: THE POROUS MEDIA FLOW DEFAULT SETTINGS
PHYSICS
INTERFACE LABEL
NAME
COMPRESSIBILITY
NEGLECT
INERTIAL TERM
PORE SIZE
Brinkman
Equations
br
Incompressible
flow
Yes Stokes-Brink
man
High permeability and
porosity, faster flow
Free and Porous
Media Flow
fp
Incompressible
flow
Not selected
High permeability and
porosity, fast flow
Figure 7-1 is an example of the Settings window for Brinkman Equations where you can
select either Compressible or Incompressible flow, and either normal or Stokes
Brinkman flow.
The Porous Media Flow Interface Options
D A RC Y S L AW
The Darcys Law Interface (
) is used for modeling fluid movement through
interstices in a porous medium by homogenizing the porous and fluid media into a
single medium. Together with the continuity equation and equation of state for the
pore fluid (or gas) this physics interface can be used to model low velocity flows, for
which the pressure gradient is the major driving force. The penetration of reacting
gases into a tight catalytic layer, such as a washcoat or membrane, is a classic example
for the use of Darcys Law.
Darcys law can be used in porous media where the fluid is mostly influenced by the
frictional resistance within the pores. It applies to very slow flows, or media where the
pore size is very small.
BRINKMAN EQUATIONS
Where the size of the interstices are larger, and the fluid is also influenced by internal
shear or shear stresses on boundaries, the viscous shear within the fluid must be
considered. This is done in the Brinkman Equations interface. Fluid penetration of
filters and packed beds are applications for this mode. The Brinkman Equations
Interface (
) is used to model compressible flow at speeds less than Mach 0.3, but
you have to maintain control over the density and any of the mass balances that are
deployed to accomplish this. You can also choose to model incompressible flow, and
simplify the equations to be solved. Furthermore, you can select the Stokes-Brinkman
flow feature to reduce the influence of inertial effects (see Figure 7-1).
MODELING POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW
341
Figure 7-1: The Settings window for the Brinkman Equations interface. You can model
compressible or incompressible flow as well as Stokes-Brinkman flow. Combinations are also
possible.
The Brinkman equations extend Darcys law to describe the dissipation of
momentum by viscous shear, similar to the Navier-Stokes equation. Consequently,
they are well suited to model transitions between slow flow in porous media, governed
by Darcys law, and fast flow in channels described by the Navier-Stokes equations.
The Brinkman Equations interface also includes the possibility to add a Forchheimer
drag term, which is a viscous drag on the porous matrix proportional to the square of
the flow velocity. This term accounts for an inertial turbulent drag effect that comes
into play for fast flows through large pores. Adding the Forchheimer term takes into
account all drag contributions that the Ergun equation covers.
FREE AND POROUS MEDIA FLOW
The Free and Porous Media Flow Interface (
) is useful for modeling equipment
that contains domains with both free flow and porous media flow, such as packed-bed
reactors and catalytic converters. It should be noted that if the porous medium is large
342 |
CHAPTER 7: POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW INTERFACES
in comparison with the free channel, and you are not primarily interested in results in
the vicinity of the interface, you can always couple a Fluid Flow interface to a Darcys
Law interface, to make your overall model computationally cheaper.
The Free and Porous Media Flow interface is used on at least two different domains;
a free channel and a porous medium. The physics interface adds functionality that
allows the equations to be optimized according to the definitions of the material
properties of the relevant domain. For example, you can select the Stokes-Brinkman
flow feature to reduce the dependence on inertial effects in the porous domain, or just
the Stokes flow feature to reduce the dependence on inertial effects in the free
channel.
Compressible flow is also possible to model in this physics interface at speeds less than
Mach 0.3, but you have to maintain control over the density and any of the mass
balances that are deployed to accomplish this. You can also choose to model
incompressible flow, and simplify the equations to be solved.
As always, the physics interface gives you provides you with options to define, either
by constants or expressions, the material properties that describe the porous media
flow. This includes the density, dynamic viscosity, permeability, porosity, and matrix
properties.
TW O - P H A S E D A R C Y S L A W
The Two-Phase Darcys Law Interface (
) has the equations and boundary
conditions for modeling two-phase fluid movement through interstices in a porous
medium using Darcys law. The two fluids are considered immiscible, and in general,
have different densities and viscosities.
As for the single phase Darcy's Law, the total velocity field is determined by the total
pressure gradient and the structure of the porous medium, but the average viscosity
and average density are calculated from the saturation of each immiscible phase and
their fluid properties. An extra equation is computedthe fluid content of one
phasein order to calculate the saturation transport.
Coupling to Other Physics Interfaces
Often, you are simulating applications that couple fluid flow in porous or subsurface
media to another type of phenomenon described in another physics interface. This can
include chemical reactions and mass transport, as described in Chemical Species
Transport Interfaces, or energy transport in porous media described in the Heat
Transfer and Non-Isothermal Flow Interfaces chapter.
MODELING POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW
343
More extensive descriptions of modeling chemical reactions and mass transport are
found in the Chemical Reaction Engineering Module. Furthermore, some applications
that involve electrochemical reactions and porous electrodes, particularly in
electrochemical power source applications, are supported in the Batteries & Fuel Cells
Module.
Fluid flow is an important phenomenon for cooling in electromagnetic applications,
such as heat created through induction and microwave heating, which are simulated in
the AC/DC Module and RF Module, respectively. Other applications can involve the
effect of fluid-imposed momentum on structural applications; poroelasticity. The
Structural Mechanics Module and Subsurface Flow Module have interfaces specifically
for these multiphysics applications.
The following sections list all the physics interfaces and the features associated with
them under the Porous Media Subsurface Flow branch. The descriptions follow a
structured order as defined by the order in the branch. Because many of the physics
interfaces are integrated with each other, some features described also cross reference
to other physics interfaces. At the end of this section is a summary of the theory for
the physics interfaces under the Porous Media Subsurface Flow branch.
344 |
CHAPTER 7: POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW INTERFACES
The Darcys Law Interface
The Darcys Law (dl) interface (
), found under the Porous Media and Subsurface Flow
branch (
) when adding a physics interface, is used to simulate fluid flow through
interstices in a porous medium. It can be used to model low-velocity flows or media
where the permeability and porosity are very small, and for which the pressure gradient
is the major driving force and the flow is mostly influenced by the frictional resistance
within the pores. Set up multiple Darcy's Law interfaces to model multiphase flows
involving more than one mobile phase. The Darcy's Law interface can be used for
stationary and time-dependent analyses.
The main feature is the Fluid and Matrix Properties node, which provides an interface
for defining the fluid material along with the porous medium properties.
When this physics interface is added, the following default nodes are also added in the
Model Builder Fluid and Matrix Properties, No Flow (the default boundary condition),
and Initial Values. Then, from the Physics toolbar, add other nodes that implement, for
example, boundary conditions and mass sources. You can also right-click Darcy's Law
to select physics features from the context menu.
SETTINGS
The Label is the default physics interface name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the physics
interface. Refer to such physics interface variables in expressions using the pattern
<name>.<variable_name>. In order to distinguish between variables belonging to
different physics interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers, and
underscores (_) are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first physics interface in the model) is dl.
PHYSICAL MODEL
Enter a Reference pressure level pref (SI unit: Pa). The default value is 1[atm].
DEPENDENT VA RIA BLES
The dependent variable (field variable) is the Pressure. The name can be changed but
the names of fields and dependent variables must be unique within a model.
T H E D A R C Y S L A W I N T E R F A C E
345
DISCRETIZATION
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Discretization.
The Compute boundary fluxes check box is not activated by default. When this option
is selected, the solver computes variables storing accurate boundary fluxes from each
boundary into the adjacent domain.
If the check box is cleared, COMSOL instead computes the flux variables from the
dependent variables using extrapolation, which is less accurate in postprocessing
results, but does not create extra dependent variables on the boundaries for the fluxes.
Also the Apply smoothing to boundary fluxes check box is available if the previous check
box is checked. The smoothing can provide a better behaved flux value close to
singularities.
For details about the boundary fluxes settings, see Computing Accurate Fluxes in the
COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual.
The Value type when using splitting of complex variables setting should in most pure
mass transport problems be set to Real which is the default. It makes sure that the
dependent variable does not get affected by small imaginary contributions, which can
occur, for example, when combining a Time Dependent or Stationary study with a
frequency-domain study. For more information, see Splitting Complex-Valued
Variables in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual.
Domain, Boundary, Edge, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Darcys Law
Interface
Theory for the Darcys Law Interface
Physical Constants in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual
Domain, Boundary, Edge, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Darcys Law
Interface
The Darcys Law Interface has the following domain, boundary, edge, point, and pair
nodes, These nodes available from the Physics ribbon toolbar (Windows users), Physics
346 |
CHAPTER 7: POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW INTERFACES
context menu (Mac or Linux users), or right-click to access the context menu (all
users).
In general, to add a node, go to the Physics toolbar, no matter what
operating system you are using. Subnodes are available by clicking the
parent node and selecting it from the Attributes menu.
For axisymmetric components, COMSOL Multiphysics takes the axial
symmetry boundaries (at r = 0) into account and automatically adds an
Axial Symmetry node that is valid on the axial symmetry boundaries only.
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual see Table 2-3 for links
to common sections and Table 2-4 to common feature nodes. You can
also search for information: press F1 to open the Help window or Ctrl+F1
to open the Documentation window.
DOMAIN
Fluid and Matrix Properties
Initial Values
Mass Source
B O U N D A R Y, E D G E , A N D P O I N T
The following nodes (listed in alphabetical order) are available on exterior boundaries:
The relevant physics interface condition at interior boundaries is continuity:
n ( 1 u1 2 u2 ) = 0
The continuity boundary condition ensures that the pressure and mass flux are
continuous. In addition, the Pressure boundary condition is available on interior
boundaries.
T H E D A R C Y S L A W I N T E R F A C E
347
Fluid and Matrix Properties
The Fluid and Matrix Properties node adds the equations for Darcys law, Equation 7-1
and Equation 7-2(excluding any mass sources), and contains settings for the fluid
properties and the porous matrix properties such as the effective porosity.
( ) + ( u )
= Qm
t
(7-1)
u = --- p
(7-2)
FLUID PROPERTIES
Select the Fluid material to use for the fluid properties. Select Domain material (the
default) to use the material defined for the domain. Select another material to use that
materials properties for the fluid.
Density
The default Density (SI unit: kg/m3) uses values From material based on the Fluid
material selection.
For User defined enter another value or expression. The default is 0 kg/m3.
For Ideal gas it uses the ideal gas law to describe the fluid. In this case, specify the
thermodynamics properties. Select a Gas constant typeSpecific gas constant Rs (the
default) or Mean molar mass Mn (SI unit: J/(molK)). For Mean molar mass the
universal gas constant R = 8.314 J/(molK) is used as the built-in physical constant.
For both properties, the defaults use values From material. For User defined enter
another value or expression.
Dynamic Viscosity
Select a Dynamic viscosity (SI unit: Pas). The default uses values From material as
defined by the Fluid material selected. For User defined the default is 0 Pas.
MATRIX PROPERTIES
Select the material to use as porous matrix. Select Domain material from the Porous
material list (the default) to use the material defined for the porous domain. Select
another material to use that materials properties.
The default Porosity p (a dimensionless number between 0 and 1) uses the value From
material, defined by the Porous material selected. For User defined the default is 0.
348 |
CHAPTER 7: POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW INTERFACES
The default Permeability (SI unit: m2) uses the value From material, as defined by the
Porous material selected. For User defined select Isotropic to define a scalar value or
Diagonal, Symmetric, or Anisotropic to define a tensor value and enter another value or
expression in the field or matrix.
Mass Source
The Mass Source node adds a mass source Qm, which appears on the right-hand side of
the Darcys Law equation (Equation 7-3, the equation for porosity).
( ) + ( u )
= Qm
t
(7-3)
MASS SOURCE
Enter a value or expression for the Mass source Qm (SI unit: kg/(m3s)). The default is
0 kg/(m3s).
Initial Values
The Initial Values node adds an initial value for the pressure that can serve as an initial
condition for a transient simulation or as an initial guess for a nonlinear solver.
IN IT IA L VA LUES
Enter a value or expression for the initial value of the Pressure p (SI unit: Pa). The
default value is 0 Pa.
Pressure
Use the Pressure node to specify the pressure on a boundary. In many cases the
distribution of pressure is known, giving a Dirichlet condition p = p0 where p0 is a
known pressure given as a number, a distribution, or an expression involving time, t,
for example.
PRESSURE
Enter a value or expression for the Pressure p0(SI unit: Pa). Enter a relative pressure
value in p0 (SI unit: Pa).
CONSTRAINT SETTINGS
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
T H E D A R C Y S L A W I N T E R F A C E
349
Mass Flux
Use the Mass Flux node to specify the mass flux into or out of the model domain
through some of its boundaries. It is often possible to determine the mass flux from
the pumping rate or from measurements. With this boundary condition, positive
values correspond to flow into the model domain:
n --- p = N 0
where N0 is a value or expression for the specified inward (or outward) Darcy flux.
MASS FLUX
Enter a value or expression for the Inward mass flux N0. A positive value of N0
represents an inward mass flux whereas a negative value represents an outward mass
flux. The units are based on the geometric entity: Boundaries: (SI unit: kg/(m2s)),
Edges (SI unit: kg/(ms), and Points (SI unit: kg/s)).
Inlet
The Inlet node adds a boundary condition for the inflow (or outflow) perpendicular
(normal) to the boundary:
n --- p = U 0
where U0 is a value or expression for the specified inward (or outward) Darcy velocity.
A positive value of the velocity U0 corresponds to flow into the model domain whereas
a negative value represents an outflow.
INLET
Enter a value or expression for the Normal inflow velocity U0 (SI unit: m/s). A positive
value of U0 represents an inflow velocity. A negative value represents an outflow
velocity.
Symmetry
The Symmetry node describes a symmetry boundary. The following condition
implements the symmetry condition on an axis or a flow divide:
n --- p = 0
350 |
CHAPTER 7: POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW INTERFACES
For axisymmetric components, COMSOL Multiphysics takes the axial symmetry
boundaries (at r = 0) into account and automatically adds an Axial Symmetry node that
is valid on the axial symmetry boundaries only.
No Flow
The No Flow node is the default boundary condition stating that there is no flow across
impervious boundaries. The mathematical formulation is:
n --- p = 0
where n is the vector normal to the boundary.
Flux Discontinuity
Use the Flux Discontinuity node to specify a mass flux discontinuity through an interior
boundary. The condition is represented by the following equation:
n ( u 1 u 2 ) = N 0
In this equation, n is the vector normal (perpendicular) to the interior boundary, is
the fluid density, u1 and u2 are the Darcys velocities in the adjacent domains (as
defined in Equation 7-4) and N0 is a specified value or expression for the flux
discontinuity.
u = --- p
(7-4)
For this boundary condition, a positive value of N0 corresponds to a flow discontinuity
in the opposite direction to the normal vector of the interior boundary.
MASS FLUX
Enter a value or expression for the Inward mass flux N0 (SI unit: kg/(m2s)). A positive
value of N0 represents a mass flux discontinuity in the opposite direction to the normal
vector of the interior boundary.
Outlet
The Outlet node adds a boundary condition for the outflow (or inflow) perpendicular
(normal) to the boundary:
T H E D A R C Y S L A W I N T E R F A C E
351
n --- p = U 0
where U0 is a specified value or expression for the outward (or inward) Darcy velocity.
A positive value of the velocity U0 corresponds to flow out of the model domain
whereas a negative value represents an inflow.
OUTLET
Enter a value or expression for the Normal outflow velocity U0 (SI unit: m/s). A positive
value of U0 represents an outflow velocity whereas a negative value represents an
inflow velocity.
352 |
CHAPTER 7: POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW INTERFACES
The Brinkman Equations Interface
The Brinkman Equations (br) interface (
), found under the Porous Media and
Subsurface Flow branch (
) when adding a physics interface, is used to compute fluid
velocity and pressure fields of single-phase flow in porous media in the laminar flow
regime. The physics interface extends Darcy's law to describe the dissipation of the
kinetic energy by viscous shear, similar to the Navier-Stokes equations. Fluids with
varying density can be included at Mach numbers below 0.3. Also the viscosity of a
fluid can vary, for example, to describe non-Newtonian fluids. To simplify the
equations, select the Stokes-Brinkman flow feature to reduce the dependence on
inertial effects when the Reynolds number is significantly less than 1. The physics
interface can be used for stationary and time-dependent analyses.
The main node is the Fluid and Matrix Properties feature, which adds the Brinkman
equations and provides an interface for defining the fluid material and the porous
matrix.
When this physics interface is added, the following default nodes are also added in the
Model BuilderFluid and Matrix Properties, Wall (the default boundary type, using No
slip as the default boundary condition), and Initial Values. Then, from the Physics
toolbar, add other nodes that implement, for example, boundary conditions and
volume forces. You can also right-click Brinkman Equations to select physics features
from the context menu.
The boundary conditions are essentially the same as for the Laminar Flow interface.
Differences exist for the following boundary types: Outlet, Symmetry, Open
Boundary, and Boundary Stress where the viscous part of the stress is divided by the
porosity to appear as
2
1-
T
--- ( u + ( u ) ) --- ( u )I
3
p
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual see Table 2-3 for links to common
sections such as Discretization, Consistent Stabilization, and Inconsistent Stabilization,
and Advanced Settings sections, all accessed by clicking the Show button (
) and
choosing the applicable option. You can also search for information: press F1 to open
the Help window or Ctrl+F1 to open the Documentation window.
THE BRINKMAN EQUATIONS INTERFACE
353
SETTINGS
The Label is the default physics interface name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the physics
interface. Refer to such physics interface variables in expressions using the pattern
<name>.<variable_name>. In order to distinguish between variables belonging to
different physics interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and
underscores (_) are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first physics interface in the model) is br.
PHYSICAL MODEL
This node specifies the properties of the Brinkman Equations interface, which describe
the overall type of fluid flow model.
Compressibility
By default the physics interface uses the Incompressible flow formulation of the
Brinkman equations to model constant density flow. Alternatively, select Compressible
flow (Ma<0.3) from the Compressibility list if there are small variations in the density,
typically dependent on the temperature (non-isothermal flow). For compressible flow
modeled with the Brinkman Equations interface, the Mach number must be below
0.3.
Neglect Inertial Term (Stokes-Brinkman Flow)
The Neglect inertial term (Stokes-Brinkman) check box is selected by default to model
flow at very low Reynolds numbers for which the inertial term can be neglected in the
Brinkman equations. This results in the linear Stokes-Brinkman equations.
Enable porous media domains
The Enable porous media domains check box is selected by default to solve Brinkman
equations in porous domains.
Reference Pressure Level
Enter a Reference pressure level pref (SI unit: Pa). The default value is 1[atm].
Swirl Flow
For 2D axisymmetric models, select the Swirl flow check box to include the swirl
velocity component, that is the velocity component u in the azimuthal direction.
While u can be nonzero, there can be no gradients in the direction.
354 |
CHAPTER 7: POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW INTERFACES
DEPENDENT VA RIA BLES
The following dependent variables (fields) are defined for this physics interfacethe
Velocity field u (SI unit: m/s) and its components, and the Pressure p (SI unit: Pa).
ADVANCED SETTINGS
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
Normally these settings do not need to be changed.
The Use pseudo time stepping for stationary equation form option adds pseudo time
derivatives to the equation when the Stationary equation form is used in order to speed
up convergence. When selected, a CFL number expression should also be defined. For
the default Automatic option, the local CFL number (from the CourantFriedrichs
Lewy condition) is determined by a PID regulator.
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Brinkman Equations
Interface
Pseudo Time Stepping for Laminar Flow Models and Pseudo Time
Stepping in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual
Numerical StabilityStabilization Techniques for Fluid Flow
Discontinuous Galerkin Formulation
Theory for the Brinkman Equations Interface
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Brinkman
Equations Interface
The Brinkman Equations Interface has the following domain, boundary, point, and
pair nodes, listed in alphabetical order, available from the Physics ribbon toolbar
(Windows users), Physics context menu (Mac or Linux users), or right-click to access
the context menu (all users).
In general, to add a node, go to the Physics toolbar, no matter what
operating system you are using. Subnodes are available by clicking the
parent node and selecting it from the Attributes menu.
THE BRINKMAN EQUATIONS INTERFACE
355
These nodes are described in this section:
Fluid and Matrix Properties
Mass Source
Forchheimer Drag
Volume Force
Initial Values
Fluid Properties
The following nodes(listed in alphabetical order) are described for the Laminar Flow
interface :
Flow Continuity
Periodic Flow Condition
Inlet
Point Mass Source
Line Mass Source
Pressure Point Constraint
Boundary Stress
Symmetry
Outlet
Wall
Open Boundary
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual see Table 2-3 for links
to common sections and Table 2-4 to common feature nodes. You can
also search for information: press F1 to open the Help window or Ctrl+F1
to open the Documentation window.
Fluid and Matrix Properties
The Fluid and Matrix Properties node adds the Brinkman equations: Equation 7-5 and
Equation 7-6 (excluding any mass sources), and provides an interface for defining the
properties of the fluid material and the porous matrix The Forchheimer Drag subnode
is available from the context menu (right-click the parent node) or from the Physics
toolbar, Attributes menu.
FLUID PROPERTIES
The default Fluid material uses the Domain material (the material defined for the
domain). Select another material as needed.
Both the default Density (SI unit: kg/m3) and Dynamic viscosity (SI unit: Pas) use
values From material based on the Fluid material selection. For User defined enter
356 |
CHAPTER 7: POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW INTERFACES
another value or expression. In this case, the default is 0 kg/m3 for the density and
0 Pas for the dynamic viscosity. The dynamic viscosity describes the relationship
between the shear stresses and the shear rate in a fluid. Intuitively, water and air have
a low viscosity, and substances often described as thick, such as oil, have a higher
viscosity. Non-Newtonian fluids have a viscosity that is shear-rate dependent. Examples
of non-Newtonian fluids include yoghurt, paper pulp, and polymer suspensions.
PO RO US MATR IX PRO PER TIES
The default Porous material uses the Domain material (the material defined for the
domain) for the porous matrix. Select another material as needed.
Both the default Porosity p (a dimensionless number between 0 and 1) and
Permeability (SI unit: m2) use values From material as defined by the Porous material
selection. For User defined select Isotropic, Diagonal, Symmetric, or Anisotropic based on
the characteristics of the thermal conductivity, and enter another value or expression.
The components of a permeability in the case that it is a tensor (xx, yy, and so on,
representing an anisotropic permeability) are available as br.kappaxx, br.kappayy,
and so on (using the default name br).
Forchheimer Drag
The Forchheimer Drag subnode is available from the context menu (right-click the Fluid
and Matrix Propertiesparent node) or from the Physics toolbar, Attributes menu. While
the drag of the fluid on the porous matrix in the basic Brinkman equations is
proportional to the flow velocity, (Darcys law drag), the Forchheimer drag is
proportional to the square of the fluid velocity. The latter term accounts for an inertial
turbulent drag effect that comes into play for fast flows through large pores. Adding
the Forchheimer term takes into account all drag contributions that the Ergun
equation covers.
FORCHHEIMER DRAG
Enter a value for the Forchheimer coefficient F (SI unit: kg/m4). The default is 0 kg/
m4.
Mass Source
The Mass Source node adds a mass source (or mass sink) Qbr to the right-hand side of
the continuity equation: Equation 7-5. This term accounts for mass deposit and/or
THE BRINKMAN EQUATIONS INTERFACE
357
mass creation in porous domains. The physics interface assumes that the mass
exchange occurs at zero velocity.
( ) + ( u ) = Q br
t p
(7-5)
DOMAIN SELECTION
Only Porous Matrix domains are available.
MASS SOURCE
Enter a value or expression for the Source term Qbr (SI unit: kg/(m3s)). The default
is 0 kg/(m3s).
Volume Force
Use the Volume Force node to specify the force F on the right-hand side of
Equation 7-6. It then acts on each fluid element in the specified domains. A common
application is to include gravity effects.
- u
u
---+ ( u ) ----- =
p t
p
(7-6)
Q br
1
2
T
- u + F
p + ----- ( u + ( u ) ) --- ( u )I 1 + -------p
3
p2
VO L U M E F O R C E
Enter the components of Volume force F (SI unit: N/m3).
Initial Values
The Initial Values node adds initial values for the velocity field and the pressure that can
serve as an initial condition for a transient simulation or as an initial guess for a
nonlinear solver.
INITIAL VALUES
Enter initial values or expressions for the Velocity field u (SI unit: m/s) and the Pressure
p (SI unit: Pa). The default values are 0 m/s and 0 Pa, respectively.
358 |
CHAPTER 7: POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW INTERFACES
Fluid Properties
The Fluid Properties node adds the momentum and continuity equations to solve for
free flow in non-porous domains. The node also provides an interface for defining the
material properties of the fluid.
MODEL INPUTS
Fluid properties, such as density and viscosity, can be defined through user inputs,
variables or by selecting a material. For the latter option, additional inputs, for example
temperature and/or pressure, may be required to define these properties.
Temperature
By default, the single-phase flow interfaces are set to model isothermal flow. Hence,
the Temperature is User defined and defaults to 293.15 K. If a Heat Transfer interface
is included in the component, the temperature may alternatively be selected from this
physics interface. All physics interfaces have their own tags (Name). For example, if a
Heat Transfer in Fluids interface is included in the component, the Temperature (ht)
option is available.
Absolute Pressure
This input appears when a material requires the absolute pressure as a model input.
The absolute pressure is used to evaluate material properties, but it also relates to the
value of the calculated pressure field. There are generally two ways to calculate the
pressure when describing fluid flow: either to solve for the absolute pressure or for a
pressure (often denoted gauge pressure) that relates to the absolute pressure through
a reference pressure.
The choice of pressure variable depends on the system of equations being solved. For
example, in a unidirectional incompressible flow problem, the pressure drop over the
modeled domain is probably many orders of magnitude smaller than the atmospheric
pressure, which, when included, may reduce the stability and convergence properties
of the solver. In other cases, such as when the pressure is part of an expression for the
gas volume or the diffusion coefficients, it may be more convenient to solve for the
absolute pressure.
The default Absolute pressure pA is p+pref where p is the dependent pressure variable
from the Navier-Stokes equations, and pref is from the user input defined at the physics
interface level. When pref is non zero, the physics interface solves for a gauge pressure.
If the pressure field instead is an absolute pressure field, pref should be set to 0.
THE BRINKMAN EQUATIONS INTERFACE
359
The Absolute pressure field can be edited by clicking Make All Model Inputs Editable
(
) and entering the desired value in the input field.
FLUID PROPERTIES
If density variations with respect to pressure are to be included in the computations,
the flow must be set to compressible.
The Dynamic viscosity describes the relationship between the shear rate and the shear
stresses in a fluid. Intuitively, water and air have low viscosities, and substances often
described as thick (such as oil) have higher viscosities.
360 |
CHAPTER 7: POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW INTERFACES
The Free and Porous Media Flow
Interface
The Free and Porous Media Flow (fp) interface (
), found under the Porous Media and
Subsurface Flow branch (
) when adding a physics interface, is used to compute fluid
velocity and pressure fields of single-phase flow where free flow is connected to porous
media. The Free and Porous Media Flow interface is used over at least two different
domains: a free channel and a porous medium. The physics interface is well suited for
transitions between slow flow in porous media, governed by the Brinkman equations,
and fast flow in channels described by the Navier-Stokes equations. Fluids with varying
density can be included at Mach numbers below 0.3. Also the viscosity of a fluid can
vary, for example, to describe non-Newtonian fluids. The physics interface can be used
for stationary and time-dependent analyses.
When this physics interface is added, the following default nodes are also added in the
Model Builder Fluid Properties, Wall, and Initial Values. Then, from the Physics toolbar,
add a Porous Matrix Properties node to be used on the domain selection corresponding
to the porous media, or add other nodes that implement, for example, boundary
conditions and volume forces. You can also right-click Free and Porous Media Flow to
select physics features from the context menu.
SETTINGS
The Label is the default physics interface name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the physics
interface. Refer to such physics interface variables in expressions using the pattern
<name>.<variable_name>. In order to distinguish between variables belonging to
different physics interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and
underscores (_) are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first physics interface in the model) is fp.
PHYSICAL MODEL
Compressibility
By default the physics interface uses the Incompressible flow formulation of the
Navier-Stokes and Brinkman equations to model constant density flow. If required,
select Compressible flow (Ma<0.3) from the Compressibility list, to account for small
THE FREE AND POROUS MEDIA FLOW INTERFACE
361
variations in the density, typically dependent on the temperature (non-isothermal
flow). For compressible flow modeled with this physics interface, the Mach number
must be below 0.3.
Neglect Inertial Term
Select the Neglect inertial term in free flow (Stokes flow) check box if the inertial forces
are small compared to the viscous forces. This is typical for creeping flow, where
Re 1 .
Select the Neglect inertial term in porous media flow (Stokes-Brinkman) check box to
model flow at very low Reynolds numbers in the porous media, for which the inertial
term in the Brinkman equations can be neglected. The physics interface then solves the
linear Stokes-Brinkman equations.
Reference Pressure Level
Enter a Reference pressure level pref (SI unit: Pa). The default value is 1[atm].
Swirl Flow
For 2D axisymmetric components, select the Swirl flow check box to include the swirl
velocity component, that is the velocity component u in the azimuthal direction.
While u can be nonzero, there can be no gradients in the direction.
DEPENDENT VARIABLES
The following dependent variables (fields) are defined for this physics interfacethe
Velocity field u (SI unit: m/s) and its components, and the Pressure p (SI unit: Pa).
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Free and Porous
Media Flow Interface
Theory for the Free and Porous Media Flow Interface
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Free and Porous
Media Flow Interface
The Free and Porous Media Flow Interface has the following domain, boundary,
point, and pair nodes, listed in alphabetical order, available from the Physics ribbon
362 |
CHAPTER 7: POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW INTERFACES
toolbar (Windows users), Physics context menu (Mac or Linux users), or right-click to
access the context menu (all users).
In general, to add a node, go to the Physics toolbar, no matter what
operating system you are using. Subnodes are available by clicking the
parent node and selecting it from the Attributes menu.
Fluid Properties
Mass Source
Forchheimer Drag
Microfluidic Wall Conditions
Initial Values
Porous Matrix Properties
Volume Force
The following nodes (listed in alphabetical order) are described for the Laminar Flow
interface:
No Viscous Stress
Periodic Flow Condition
Flow Continuity
Point Mass Source
Inlet
Pressure Point Constraint
Line Mass Source
Symmetry
Outlet
Wall
Open Boundary
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual see Table 2-3 for links
to common sections and Table 2-4 to common feature nodes. You can
also search for information: press F1 to open the Help window or Ctrl+F1
to open the Documentation window.
Fluid Properties
Use the Fluid Properties node to define the fluid material, density, and dynamic
viscosity.
THE FREE AND POROUS MEDIA FLOW INTERFACE
363
FLUID PROPERTIES
The default Fluid material uses the Domain material (the material defined for the
domain). Select another material as needed.
The default Density (SI unit: kg/m3) uses values From material based on the Fluid
material selection. For User defined enter another value or expression. The default is
0 kg/m3.
The Dynamic viscosity (SI unit: Pas) uses values From material based on the Fluid
material selection. For User defined enter another value or expression. The default is
0 Pas.
Porous Matrix Properties
Use the Porous Matrix Properties node to define which domains contain porous
material and to define the porous matrix properties, such as the porosity and
permeability in these domains. The Forchheimer Drag subnode is available from the
context menu (right-click the parent node) or from the Physics toolbar, Attributes
menu.
DOMAIN SELECTION
Choose domains from the Selection list, to solve for porous media flow governed by
the Brinkman equations. In the domains not selected, the Free and Porous Media Flow
interface solves for laminar flow governed by the Navier-Stokes (or Stokes) equations.
POROUS MATRIX PROPER TIES
The default Porous material uses the Domain material (the material defined for the
domain) for the porous matrix. Select another material as needed.
Porosity
The default Porosity p (a dimensionless number between 0 and 1) uses values From
material as defined by the Porous material selection. For User defined enter another
value or expression. The default is 0.
Permeability
The default Permeability br (SI unit: m2) uses values From material as defined by the
Porous material selection. For User defined select Isotropic, Diagonal, Symmetric, or
Anisotropic from the list and then enter other values or expressions. The components
of a permeability in the case that it is a tensor (xx, yy, and so on, representing an
anisotropic permeability) are available as fp.kappaxx, fp.kappayy, and so on (using
the default name fp). The defaults is 0 m2.
364 |
CHAPTER 7: POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW INTERFACES
Source Term
Enter a value or expression for an optional mass source (or sink) Source term Qbr (SI
unit: kg/(m3s)). This term accounts for mass deposit and mass creation within
domains. The physics interface assumes that the mass exchange occurs at zero velocity.
Effective Mass Transport Parameters
A correction factor (Bruggeman, No Correction, or User defined) to the mass transport
parameters (defined in the Transport Properties node) can be applied for the porous
domain. Species diffusivities and mobilities are automatically adjusted by the porous
media corrections. For User defined enter a value or expression for the Conversion factor
feff. The default is 1. Species diffusivities and mobilities are automatically adjusted by
the porous media corrections.
Volume Force
The Volume Force node specifies the force F on the right-hand side of the
Navier-Stokes or Brinkman equations, depending on whether the Porous Matrix
Properties node is active for the domain. Use it, for example, to incorporate the effects
of gravity in a model.
VO L U M E F O R C E
Enter the components of the Volume force F (SI unit: N/m3).
Forchheimer Drag
The Forchheimer Drag subnode is available from the context menu (right-click the
Porous Matrix Properties parent node) or from the Physics toolbar, Attributes menu.
It can be used on the domain selection that corresponds to the porous medium. For
the Brinkman equations the drag of the fluid on the porous matrix is proportional to
the flow velocity, in the same way as for Darcys law. Add a Forchheimer drag,
proportional to the square of the fluid velocity, as needed.
FORCHHEIMER DRAG
Enter a value for the Forchheimer coefficient F (SI unit: kg/m4).
THE FREE AND POROUS MEDIA FLOW INTERFACE
365
Initial Values
The Initial Values node adds initial values for the velocity field and the pressure that can
serve as an initial condition for a transient simulation or as an initial guess for a
nonlinear solver.
INITIAL VALUES
Enter initial values or expressions for the Velocity field u (SI unit: m/s) and for the
Pressure p (SI unit: Pa). The default values are 0 m/s and 0 Pa, respectively.
Microfluidic Wall Conditions
Use the Microfluidic Wall Conditions node to add boundary conditions to the moving
wall and specify whether to use viscous slip or thermal creep.
BOUNDARY CONDITION
The default Boundary condition for the wall is Slip velocity. Enter values or expressions
for the components of the Velocity of moving wall uw (SI unit: m/s).
Use Viscous Slip
Select the Use viscous slip check box to define the slip length:
The default is User defined. Enter a value for Ls (SI unit: m). The default is 1e-7 m.
Select Maxwells model to calculate it from:
2 v
L s = ---------------
v
Then enter values or expressions for the Tangential momentum accommodation
coefficient (TMAC) av (dimensionless) (the default is 0.9) and the Mean free path
(SI unit: m) (the default is 1e-6 m).
Use Thermal Creep
Select the Use thermal creep check box to activate the thermal creep component of the
boundary condition. Enter the fluids Temperature T (SI unit: K) and the Thermal slip
coefficient T. The default temperature is 293.15 K and the default thermal slip
coefficient is 0.75.
If you also have a license for the MEMS Module, an additional Boundary condition
option Electroosmotic velocity is available. This is described in the MEMS Module
Users Guide.
366 |
CHAPTER 7: POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW INTERFACES
The Two-Phase Darcys Law Interface
The Two-Phase Darcys Law (tpdl) interface (
), found under the Porous Media and
Subsurface Flow branch (
) when adding a physics interface, is used to simulate fluid
flow through interstices in a porous medium. It solves Darcy's law for the total
pressure and the transport of the fluid content for one fluid phase. The physics
interface can be used to model low velocity flows or media where the permeability and
porosity are very small, for which the pressure gradient is the major driving force and
the flow is mostly influenced by the frictional resistance within the pores. The physics
interface can be used for stationary and time-dependent analyses.
The main feature is the Fluids and Matrix Properties node, which provides an interface
for defining the two immiscible fluids properties along with the porous medium
properties. The physics interface is available in 2D, 2D axisymmetric, and 3D.
When this physics interface is added, the following default nodes are also added in the
Model Builder Fluids and Matrix Properties, No Flow (the default boundary condition),
and Initial Values. Then, from the Physics toolbar, add other nodes that implement, for
example, boundary conditions and mass sources. You can also right-click Two-Phase
Darcys Law to select physics features from the context menu.
SETTINGS
The Label is the default physics interface name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the physics
interface. Refer to such physics interface variables in expressions using the pattern
<name>.<variable_name>. In order to distinguish between variables belonging to
different physics interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and
underscores (_) are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first physics interface in the model) is tpdl.
PHYSICAL MODEL
Enter a Reference pressure level pref (SI unit: Pa). The default value is 1[atm].
DEPENDENT VA RIA BLES
The dependent variables (field variables) are the Pressure and Fluid content 1. The name
can be changed but the names of fields and dependent variables must be unique within
a component.
T H E TW O - P H A S E D A R C Y S L A W I N T E R F A C E
367
CONSISTENT STABILIZATION
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Stabilization.
DISCRETIZATION
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Discretization.
Domain, Boundary, and Pair Nodes for the Two-Phase Darcys Law
Interface
Theory for the Two-Phase Darcys Law Interface
Domain, Boundary, and Pair Nodes for the Two-Phase Darcys Law
Interface
The Two-Phase Darcys Law Interface has these domain, boundary, and pair nodes,
listed in alphabetical order, available from the Physics ribbon toolbar (Windows users),
Physics context menu (Mac or Linux users), or right-click to access the context menu
(all users).
In general, to add a node, go to the Physics toolbar, no matter what
operating system you are using. Subnodes are available by clicking the
parent node and selecting it from the Attributes menu.
Fluid and Matrix Properties
No Flux
Inlet
Outlet
Initial Values
Pressure and Saturation
Mass Flux
For axisymmetric models, COMSOL Multiphysics takes the axial
symmetry boundaries (at r = 0) into account and automatically adds an
Axial Symmetry node that is valid on the axial symmetry boundaries only.
368 |
CHAPTER 7: POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW INTERFACES
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual see Table 2-3 for links
to common sections and Table 2-4 to common feature nodes. You can
also search for information: press F1 to open the Help window or Ctrl+F1
to open the Documentation window.
Fluid and Matrix Properties
The Fluids and Matrix Properties node adds Equation 7-7 and Equation 7-8 and defines
properties including density, dynamic viscosity, relative permeability, and porosity.
( ) + ( u ) = 0
p
t
(7-7)
c
( ) + ( c 1 u ) = D c c 1
t 1 p
(7-8)
CAPILLARY MODEL
The list defaults to Capillary diffusion or choose Capillary pressure.
For Capillary diffusion, choose Isotropic to define a scalar or Diagonal, Symmetric, or
Anisotropic to enter a tensor, and then enter values or expressions in the Dc (SI unit:
m2/s) field or fields.
For Capillary pressure, select a Pressure modelvan Genuchten (the default), Brooks and
Corey, or User defined.
For van Genuchten, enter an Entry capillary pressure pec (SI unit: Pa), the Constitutive
relations constant mvG (dimensionless), and Constitutive relations constant IvG
(dimensionless).
For Brooks and Corey, enter an Entry capillary pressure pec (SI unit: Pa) and the Pore
size distribution index p (dimensionless).
For User defined, enter a Capillary pressure pc (SI unit: Pa).
FLUID 1 PROPERTIES
Select the material to use for Fluid 1. Select Domain material (the default value) to use
the material defined for the domain. Select another material to use that materials
properties.
Define the properties for Fluid 1:
T H E TW O - P H A S E D A R C Y S L A W I N T E R F A C E
369
The default Density 1 (SI unit: kg/m3) uses values From material based on the Fluid 1
selection. For User defined enter another value or expression. The default is 0 kg/m3.
Select a Dynamic viscosity 1 (SI unit: Pas). The default uses values From material as
defined by the Fluid 1 selection. For User defined enter another value or expression. The
default is 0 Pas.
Select the Relative permeability r1 (a dimensionless number between 0 and 1) for
fluid 1. The default is 1.
FLUID 2 PROPERTIES
The settings to define the properties for Fluid 2 are similar as for Fluid 1.
MATRIX PROPERTIES
Select the material to use as porous matrix. Select Domain material (the default) from
the Porous material list to use the material defined for the porous domain. Select
another material to use that materials properties.
The default Porosity p (a dimensionless number between 0 and 1) uses the value From
material, defined by the Porous material selection. For User defined enter another value
or expression The default is 0.
The default Permeability (SI unit: m2) uses the value From material, as defined by the
Porous material selection. For User defined select Isotropic to define a scalar or Diagonal,
Symmetric or Anisotropic to enter a tensor and enter other values or expressions in the
field or matrix.
Initial Values
The Initial Values node adds initial values for the pressure and the saturation of fluid 1
(that is, the fraction of that fluid inside the pore space) that can serve as initial
conditions for a transient simulation or as an initial guess for a nonlinear solver.
INITIAL VALUES
Enter a value or expression for the initial value of the Pressure p (SI unit: Pa). The
default value is 0 Pa. Enter a value or expression for the initial value of the Saturation
fluid 1 s1 (a dimensionless number between 0 and 1). The default value is 0. The
saturation of Fluid 2 is then calculated as s2 = 1 s1.
370 |
CHAPTER 7: POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW INTERFACES
No Flux
The No Flux node is the default boundary condition stating that there is no flow across
impervious boundaries. The mathematical formulation is:
n u = 0
where n is the vector normal to the boundary.
Also, the No Flux boundary enforces a zero gradient condition for the fluid content
across the selected boundary
n c 1 = 0
Pressure and Saturation
Use the Pressure and Saturation node to specify the pressure and fluid volume fractions
on a boundary. In many cases the distribution of pressure and saturation are known as
numbers, distributions, or expressions involving time, t, for example.
PRESSURE AND SATURATION
Enter a value or expression for the Pressure p (SI unit: Pa), and for the Saturation
fluid 1 s1 (a dimensionless number between 0 and 1). The default values are 0. The
saturation of Fluid 2 is then calculated as s2 = 1 s1.
Mass Flux
Use the Mass Flux node to specify the mass flux into or out of the model domain
through some of its boundaries. It is often possible to determine the mass flux from
the pumping rate or from measurements. With this boundary condition, positive
values correspond to flow into the model domain
n u = N 0
where N0 is a value or expression for the inward (or outward) Darcys flux that is
specified.
MASS FLUX AND SATURATION
Enter a value or expression for the Inward mass flux N0 (SI unit: kg/(m2s)). A positive
value of N0 represents an inward mass flux, whereas a negative value represents an
outward mass flux.
T H E TW O - P H A S E D A R C Y S L A W I N T E R F A C E
371
Enter a value or expression for the Saturation fluid 1 s1 (a dimensionless number
between 0 and 1) in the mass flux. The default value is 0.
Inlet
The Inlet node adds a boundary condition for the inflow (or outflow) perpendicular
(normal) to the boundary:
n u = ( s 1 1 + s 2 1 )U 0
where U0 is a specified value or expression for the inward (or outward) Darcys velocity.
A positive value of the velocity U0 corresponds to flow into the model domain whereas
a negative value represents an outflow.
INLET
Enter a value or expression for the Normal inflow velocity U0 (SI unit: m/s). A positive
value of U0 represents an inflow velocity, whereas a negative value represents an
outward velocity.
Enter a value or expression for the Saturation fluid 1 s1 (a dimensionless number
between 0 and 1). The default value is 0.
Outlet
The Outlet node adds a boundary condition for the outflow perpendicular (normal) to
the boundary:
n D c c 1 = 0
where Dc is the capillary diffusion (SI unit: m2/s) and c1 = s11 is the fluid 1 content
(SI unit: kg/m3). This means that the normal gradient of fluid saturation does not
change through this boundary.
PRESSURE
Enter a value or expression for the Pressure p. The default value is 0. If the reference
pressure pref, defined at the physics interface level is 0, enter the absolute pressure.
Otherwise, enter the relative pressure.
372 |
CHAPTER 7: POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW INTERFACES
Theory for the Darcys Law Interface
The Darcys Law Interface theory is described in this section.
In a porous medium, the global transport of momentum by shear stresses in the fluid
is often negligible: the pore walls impede momentum transport between fluid
occupying different pores. In most applications, a detailed description of the resolution
of every pore is not practical. A homogenization of the porous and fluid media into a
single medium is a common alternative approach. Darcys law, together with the
continuity equation and equation of state for the pore fluid provides a complete
mathematical model suitable for a variety of applications involving porous media flows
when the pressure gradient is the major driving force.
Darcys LawEquation Formulation
Darcys law states that the velocity field is determined by the pressure gradient, the
fluid viscosity, and the structure of the porous medium:
u = --- p
(7-9)
In this equation, (SI unit: m2) denotes the permeability of the porous medium,
(SI unit: kg/(ms)) the dynamic viscosity of the fluid, p (SI unit: Pa) the pressure, and
u (SI unit: m/s) the Darcy velocity. The Darcys Law interface combines Darcys law
with the continuity equation:
( ) + ( u )
= Qm
t
(7-10)
In the above equation, (SI unit: kg/m3) is the density of the fluid, (dimensionless)
is the porosity, and Qm (SI unit: kg/(m3s)) is a mass source term. Porosity is defined
as the fraction of the control volume that is occupied by pores. Thus, the porosity can
vary from zero for pure solid regions to unity for domains of free flow.
If the Darcys Law interface is coupled to an energy balance, then the fluid density can
be a function of the temperature, pressure, and composition (for mixture flows). For
gas flows in porous media, the relation is given by the ideal gas law:
pM
= --------RT
(7-11)
T H E O R Y F O R T H E D A R C Y S L A W I N T E R F A C E
373
where R= 8.314 J/(molK) is the universal gas constant, M (SI unit: kg/mol) is the
molecular weight of the gas, and T (SI unit: K) is the temperature.
374 |
CHAPTER 7: POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW INTERFACES
Theory for the Brinkman Equations
Interface
The Brinkman Equations Interface theory is described in this section:
About the Brinkman Equations
Brinkman Equations Theory
References for the Brinkman Equations Interface
About the Brinkman Equations
The Brinkman equations describe fluids in porous media for which the momentum
transport within the fluid due to shear stresses is of importance. This mathematical
model extends Darcys law to include a term that accounts for the viscous transport in
the momentum balance, and it treats both the pressure and the flow velocity vector as
independent variables. Use the Free and Porous Media Flow interface to model
combinations of porous media and free flow domains. These types of problems are
often encountered in applications such as monolithic reactors and fuel cells.
The Free and Porous Media Flow Interface
In porous domains, the flow variables and fluid properties are defined at any point
inside the medium by means of averaging of the actual variables and properties over a
certain volume surrounding the point. This control volume must be small compared
to the typical macroscopic dimensions of the problem, but it must be large enough to
contain many pores and solid matrix elements.
Porosity is defined as the fraction of the control volume that is occupied by pores.
Thus, the porosity can vary from zero for pure solid regions to unity for domains of
free flow.
The physical properties of the fluid, such as density and viscosity, are defined as
intrinsic volume averages that correspond to a unit volume of the pores. Defined this
way, they present the relevant physical parameters that can be measured experimentally,
and they are assumed to be continuous with the corresponding parameters in the
adjacent free flow.
THEORY FOR THE BRINKMAN EQUATIONS INTERFACE
375
The flow velocity is defined as a superficial volume average, and it corresponds to a
unit volume of the medium including both the pores and the matrix. It is sometimes
called the Darcy velocity, defined as the volume flow rate per unit cross section of the
medium. Such a definition makes the velocity field continuous across the boundaries
between porous regions and regions of free flow.
Brinkman Equations Theory
The dependent variables in the Brinkman equations are the Darcy velocity and the
pressure. The flow in porous media is governed by a combination of the continuity
equation and the momentum equation, which together form the Brinkman equations:
( ) + ( u ) = Q br
t p
(7-12)
- u
u
---+ ( u ) ----- =
p t
p
(7-13)
Q br
1
2
T
- u + F
p + ----- ( u + ( u ) ) --- ( u )I 1 + -------p
3
p2
In these equations:
(SI unit: kg/(ms)) is the dynamic viscosity of the fluid
u (SI unit: m/s) is the velocity vector
(SI unit: kg/m3) is the density of the fluid
p (SI unit: Pa) is the pressure
p is the porosity
(SI unit: m2) is the permeability tensor of the porous medium, and
Qbr (SI unit: kg/(m3s)) is a mass source or mass sink
Influence of gravity and other volume forces can be accounted for via the force term
F (SI unit: kg/(m2s2)).
When the Neglect inertial term (Stokes-Brinkman) check box is selected, the term
(u )(u/p) on the left-hand side of Equation 7-6 is disabled.
The mass source, Qbr, accounts for mass deposit and mass creation within the domains.
The mass exchange is assumed to occur at zero velocity.
376 |
CHAPTER 7: POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW INTERFACES
The Forchheimer drag option, F (SI unit: kg/m4), adds a viscous force proportional
to the square of the fluid velocity, FF = F|u|u, to the right-hand side of
Equation 7-6.
In case of a flow with variable density, Equation 7-5 and Equation 7-6 must be solved
together with the equation of state that relates the density to the temperature and
pressure (for instance the ideal gas law).
For incompressible flow, the density stays constant in any fluid particle, which can be
expressed as
( ) + u = 0
t p
and the continuity equation (Equation 7-5) reduces to
u = Q br
References for the Brinkman Equations Interface
1. D. Nield and A. Bejan, Convection in Porous Media, 3rd ed., Springer, 2006.
2. M. Le Bars and M.G. Worster, Interfacial Conditions Between a Pure Fluid and a
Porous Medium: Implications for Binary Alloy Solidification, J. of Fluid Mechanics,
vol. 550, pp. 149173, 2006.
THEORY FOR THE BRINKMAN EQUATIONS INTERFACE
377
Theory for the Free and Porous
Media Flow Interface
The Free and Porous Media Flow Interface uses the Navier-Stokes equations to
describe the flow in open regions, and the Brinkman equations to describe the flow in
porous regions.
The same fields, u and p, are solved for in both the free flow domains and in the porous
domains. This means that the pressure in the free fluid and the pressure in the pores is
continuous over the interface between a free flow domain and a porous domain. It also
means that continuity is enforced between the fluid velocity in the free flow and the
Darcy velocity in the porous domain. This treatment is one of several possible models
for the physics at the interface. Examples of other models can be found in Ref. 1.
The continuity in u and p implies a stress discontinuity at the interface between a
free-flow domain and a porous domain. The difference corresponds to the stress
absorbed by the rigid porous matrix, which is a consequence implicit in the
formulations of the Navier-Stokes and Brinkman equations.
Reference for the Free and Porous Media Flow Interface
1. M.L. Bars and M.G. Worster, Interfacial Conditions Between a Pure Fluid and a
Porous Medium: Implications for Binary Alloy Solidification, J. Fluid Mech.,
vol. 550, pp. 149173, 2006.
378 |
CHAPTER 7: POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW INTERFACES
Theory for the Two-Phase Darcys
L a w Inte r f a c e
Darcys Law
Darcys law states that the velocity field is determined by the pressure gradient, the
fluid viscosity, and the permeability of the porous medium. According to Darcys law,
the velocity field is given by
u = --- p
(7-14)
In this equation:
u (SI unit: m/s) is the Darcy velocity vector
(SI unit: m2) is the permeability of the porous medium
(SI unit: Pas) is the fluids dynamic viscosity, and
p (SI unit: Pa) is the fluids pressure
The permeability, , represents the resistance to flow over a representative volume
consisting of solid grains and pores.
In the presence of two fluid phases, the average density and average viscosity are
calculated from the saturation and fluid property of each phase
1 = s1 + s2
(7-15)
= s1 1 + s2 2
(7-16)
r1
r2
--1- = s 1 ------- + s 2 ------1
2
(7-17)
here, s1 and s2 represent the saturation of each phase, 1 and 2 the densities, and r1
and r2 the relative permeabilities.
The Two-Phase Darcys Law interface combines Darcys law (Equation 7-14) with the
continuity equation for the average density
( p ) + ( u ) = 0
t
(7-18)
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TW O - P H A S E D A R C Y S L A W I N T E R F A C E
379
here, p is the porosity, defined as the fraction of the control volume that is occupied
by pores. Inserting Darcys law (Equation 7-14) into the continuity equation
(Equation 7-18) produces the governing equation
( p ) + --- p = 0
(7-19)
When either of the fluids is compressible, its density can be related to the pressure (for
instance using the ideal gas law).
Capillary Pressure
Beside the continuity equation for the mixture (Equation 7-19), the Two-Phase
Darcys Law interface also solves the transport equation for the fluid content of one of
the phases, c1 = s11
( c ) + ( c 1 u ) = D c c 1
t p 1
(7-20)
here, Dc (SI unit: m2/s) is the capillary diffusion coefficient, which can be directly
specified, or it can be derived from a capillary pressure expression. Normally, the fluid
content c1 will be the concentration of the wetting phase.
When capillary pressure is selected as capillary model, the capillary diffusion coefficient
is computed from the saturation of one of the phases and the capillary pressure
r1
p c
D c = -------- ( s 1 1 )
1
s1
(7-21)
The capillary pressure is defined as the pressure difference between the phases, and it
can be defined as a function of saturation, pc(s1). The capillary pressure can be a user
defined expression, or it can be derived from van Genuchten or Brooks and Corey
models.
For van Genuchten model, the expression for the capillary pressure as a function of
saturation follows the curve
1
1 m
- 1
p c = p ec ---------- s 11 m
where pec is the entry capillary pressure and m is a constitutive exponent.
380 |
CHAPTER 7: POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW INTERFACES
(7-22)
For the Brooks and Corey model, the capillary pressure curve depends on saturation as
1p c = p ec ---------1
s1
(7-23)
where is the pore distribution index.
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TW O - P H A S E D A R C Y S L A W I N T E R F A C E
381
382 |
CHAPTER 7: POROUS MEDIA AND SUBSURFACE FLOW INTERFACES
Chemical Species Transport Interfaces
The physics interfaces under the Chemical Species Transport branch (
)
accommodate all types of material transport that can occur through diffusion and
convection. The section Modeling Chemical Species Transport helps you choose
the best physics interface to start with.
In this chapter:
The Transport of Diluted Species Interface
The Transport of Concentrated Species Interface
The Reacting Flow Multiphysics Interfaces
The Reacting Flow in Porous Media Interfaces
Theory for the Transport of Diluted Species Interface
Theory for the Transport of Concentrated Species Interface
Theory for the Reacting Flow Interfaces
Theory for the Reacting Flow in Porous Media Interfaces
383
Modeling Chemical Species Transport
In this section:
Selecting the Right Physics Interface
Coupling to Other Physics Interfaces
Adding a Chemical Species Transport Interface
Selecting the Right Physics Interface
The behavior of chemical reactions in real environments is often not adequately
described by the assumptions of perfectly mixed or controlled environments. This
means that the transport of material through both time and space need to be
considered. Physics interfaces in the Chemical Species Transport branch accommodate
all types of material transport that can occur through diffusion and convectioneither
alone or in combination with one another. The branch includes physics interfaces
solving equations for diluted as well as concentrated mixtures, where the species
propagation can occur in solids, free flowing fluids, or through porous media.
) is applicable for solutions (either
The Transport of Diluted Species Interface (
fluid or solid) where the transported species have concentrations at least one order of
magnitude less than the solvent. The settings for this physics interface can be chosen
to simulate chemical species transport through diffusion (Ficks law) and convection
(when coupled to fluid flow).
The Transport of Concentrated Species Interface (
) is used for modeling transport
within mixtures where no single component is clearly dominant. Often the
concentrations of the participating species are of the same order of magnitude, and the
molecular effects of the respective species on each other need to be considered. This
physics interface supports transport through Fickean diffusion, a mixture average
diffusion model, and as described by the Maxwell-Stefan equations.
REACTING FLOW
The Reacting Laminar Flow Interface (
) combines the functionality of the Laminar
Flow and Transport of Concentrated Species interfaces. Using this physics interface
the mass and momentum transport in a reacting fluid can be modeled, with the
couplings between the velocity field and the mixture density set up automatically. This
physics interface is applicable for fluid flow in the laminar regime.
384 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
The Reacting Turbulent Flow, k-e Interface (
) combines the functionality of the
Turbulent Flow, k- and Transport of Concentrated Species interfaces. Using this
physics interface, the mass and momentum transport in reacting turbulent fluid flow
can be modeled, with the couplings between the velocity field and the mixture density
set up automatically. The physics interface solves for the mean velocity and pressure
fields, together with an arbitrary number of mass fractions. The fluid-flow turbulence
is modeled using the standard k- model, solving for the turbulent kinetic energy k and
the rate of dissipation of turbulent kinetic energy .
The Reacting Turbulent Flow, k-w Interface (
) combines the functionality of the
Turbulent Flow, k- and Transport of Concentrated Species interfaces. Using this
physics interface, the mass and momentum transport in reacting turbulent fluid flow
can be modeled, with the couplings between the velocity field and the mixture density
set up automatically. The physics interface solves for the mean velocity and pressure
fields, together with an arbitrary number of mass fractions. The fluid-flow turbulence
is modeled using the Wilcox revised k- model, solving for the turbulent kinetic
energy k and the rate of specific dissipation of turbulent kinetic energy .
The Reacting Turbulent Flow, SST Interface (
) combines the functionality of the
Turbulent Flow, SST and Transport of Concentrated Species interfaces. Using this
physics interface, the mass and momentum transport in reacting turbulent fluid flow
can be modeled, with the couplings between the velocity field and the mixture density
set up automatically. The physics interface solves for the mean velocity and pressure
fields, together with an arbitrary number of mass fractions. The fluid-flow turbulence
is modeled using the Menter SST model, solving for the turbulent kinetic energy k and
the rate of specific dissipation of turbulent kinetic energy . The physics interface also
includes a wall distance equation that solves for the reciprocal wall distance.
The Reacting Turbulent Flow, Low Re k-e Interface (
) combines the functionality
of the Turbulent Flow, Low Re k- and Transport of Concentrated Species interfaces.
Using this physics interface, the mass and momentum transport in reacting turbulent
fluid flow can be modeled, with the couplings between the velocity field and the
mixture density set up automatically. The physics interface solves for the mean velocity
and pressure fields, together with an arbitrary number of mass fractions. The fluid-flow
turbulence is modeled using the AKN low-Reynolds number k- model, solving for
the turbulent kinetic energy k and the rate of dissipation of turbulent kinetic energy .
The physics interface also includes a wall distance equation that solves for the
reciprocal wall distance.
M O D E L I N G C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T
385
REACTING FLOW IN POROUS MEDIA
The Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfds) Interface (
), merges the functionality of
the Transport of Diluted Species and the Free and Porous Media Flow interfaces into
a multiphysics interface. This way, coupled mass and momentum transport in free and
porous media can be modeled from a single physics interface, with the component
coupling for the velocity field set up automatically. In addition, the effective transport
coefficients in a porous matrix domain can be derived based on the corresponding
values in for a non-porous domain.
The Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfcs) Interface (
), combines the Transport of
Concentrated Species and the Free and Porous Media Flow interfaces. This means that
mass and momentum transport can be modeled from a single physics interface, with
the couplings between the velocity field and the mixture density set up automatically.
Also, the effective transport coefficients in a porous matrix domain are derived based
on the corresponding values for a non-porous domain. This physics interface is
applicable for fluid flow in the laminar regime.
Coupling to Other Physics Interfaces
When you are simulating applications that can be described by the material transport
interfaces in the Chemical Species Transport branch, there is often a need to couple the
material transport to other physics interfaces. Convection is often the cause of the
material transport, so couplings to Fluid Flow interfaces is required. The CFD Module
includes physics interfaces for Laminar Flow and Porous Media Flow as well as more
advanced descriptions of fluid flow, such as turbulent and Multiphase Flow.
Moreover, most chemical reactions or other types of material processing, such as
casting, either require or produce heat, which in turn affects both the reaction and
other physical processes connected to the system. This module includes physics
interfaces for heat transfer through conduction and convection as well as through
porous media. More extensive description of heat transfer, such as surface-to-surface
radiation, can be found in the Heat Transfer Module.
Finally, COMSOL Multiphysics supports simulations of electrostatics or DC-based
physical phenomena, even when the conductivity is nonlinear. If the electric field is
AC/DC in nature, or if your system is affected by electromagnetic waves, then the
AC/DC Module and RF Module include appropriate physics interfaces for such
phenomena. Furthermore, some applications of electrochemical reactions, particularly
in electrochemical power source applications, are better handled by the Batteries &
Fuel Cells Module.
386 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
Adding a Chemical Species Transport Interface
A chemical species transport interface can be added when first creating a new model,
or at any time during the modeling process.
Creating a New Model in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual
1 To add a physics interface:
- Select New to open the Model Wizard, after selecting a space dimension, go to the
Select Physics page.
- From the Home toolbar, click Add Physics (
). Or right-click the Component
node in the Model Builder and select Add Physics. Go to the Add Physics window.
2 Under Chemical Species Transport, navigate to the physics interface to add and
double-click it.
There are other ways to add a physics interface depending on whether you are in the
Model Builder or Add Physics window:
- In the Model Wizard, click Add or right-click and select Add Physics (
physics interface displays under Added physics interfaces.
- In the Add Physics window, click Add to Component (
Add to Component.
). The
) or right-click and select
3 Specify the number of species (concentrations or mass fractions) and the names:
- In the Model Wizard, on the Review Physics Interface page under Dependent
Variables.
- In the Add Physics window, click to expand the Dependent Variables section.
- After adding the physics interface, you can also edit this informationclick the
node in the Model Builder, then, on the Settings window under Dependent
Variables, specify the information.
4 Continue by adding more interfaces and specifying the number of species
(concentrations or mass fractions) that are to be simulated in a mass transport
physics interface when adding that interface.
5 In the Dependent Variables section, enter the Number of species. To add a single
species, click the Add Concentration button (
) underneath the table or enter a
M O D E L I N G C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T
387
value into the Number of species field. Click the Remove Concentration button (
underneath the table if required.
The Transport of Concentrated Species interface needs to contain at least two species
(the default). Also edit the strings or names directly in the table. The names must
be unique for all species (and all other dependent variables) in the model.
388 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
The Transport of Diluted Species
Interface
The Transport of Diluted Species (tds) interface (
), found under the Chemical Species
), is used to calculate the concentration field of a dilute solute in
a solvent. Transport and reactions of the species dissolved in a gas, liquid, or solid can
be handled with this interface. The driving forces for transport can be diffusion by
Ficks law, convection when coupled to a flow field, and migration, when coupled to
an electric field.
Transport branch (
The interface supports simulation of transport by convection and diffusion in 1D, 2D,
and 3D as well as for axisymmetric components in 1D and 2D. The dependent variable
is the molar concentration, c. Modeling multiple species transport is possible, whereby
the physics interface solves for the molar concentration, ci, of each species i.
Some features are only available in a limited set of add-on products. For
a detailed overview of which features are available in each product, visit
http://www.comsol.com/products/specifications/
SETTINGS
The Label is the default physics interface name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the physics
interface. Refer to such physics interface variables in expressions using the pattern
<name>.<variable_name>. In order to distinguish between variables belonging to
different physics interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers, and
underscores (_) are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first physics interface in the model) is tds.
DOMAIN SELECTION
If any parts of the model geometry should not partake in the mass transfer model,
remove that part from the selection list.
TR A N S P O R T M E C H A N I S M S
Diffusion is always included. By default, the Convection check box is selected under
Additional transport mechanisms.
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F D I L U T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
389
Note: Not all additional transport mechanisms listed below are available in all
products. For details see http://www.comsol.com/products/specifications/.
Select the Migration in electric field check box to activate the migration transport of
ionic species. See further the theory section Adding Transport Through Migration.
Select the Adsorption in porous media check box to activate the adsorption of solutes
in porous media. See further Adsorption.
Select the Dispersion in porous media check box to activate the dispersion mechanism
in porous media. See further Dispersion in the theory chapter.
Select the Volatilization in partially saturated porous media check box to model
volatilization in partially saturated domains. Theory for the Transport of Diluted
Species Interface
CONSISTENT STABILIZATION
To display this sections, click the Show button (
) and select Stabilization.
When the Crosswind diffusion check box is selected, a weak term that reduces
spurious oscillations is added to the transport equation. The resulting equation
system is always nonlinear. There are two options for the Crosswind diffusion type:
- Do Carmo and Galeothe default option. This type of crosswind diffusion
reduces undershoots and overshoots to a minimum but can in rare cases give
equation systems that are difficult to fully converge.
- Codina. This option is less diffusive compared to the Do Carmo and Galeo
option but can result in more undershoots and overshoots. It is also less effective
for anisotropic meshes. The Codina option activates a text field for the Lower
gradient limit glim. It defaults to 0.1[mol/m^3)/tds.helem, where tds.helem
is the local element size.
For both consistent stabilization methods, select an Equation residual. Approximate
residual is the default and means that derivatives of the diffusion tensor components
are neglected. This setting is usually accurate enough and is computationally faster.
If required, select Full residual instead.
INCONSISTENT STABILIZATION
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Stabilization. By default,
the Isotropic diffusion check box is not selected, because this type of stabilization adds
artificial diffusion and affects the accuracy of the original problem. However, this
option can be used to get a good initial guess for under-resolved problems.
390 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
ADVANCED SETTINGS
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
Normally these settings do not need to be changed. Select a Convective term
Non-conservative form (the default) or Conservative form. The conservative formulation
should be used for compressible flow. See Convective Term Formulation for more
information.
DISCRETIZATION
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Discretization.
The Compute boundary fluxes check box is activated by default so that COMSOL
Multiphysics computes predefined accurate boundary flux variables. When this option
is checked, the solver computes variables storing accurate boundary fluxes from each
boundary into the adjacent domain.
If the check box is cleared, the COMSOL software instead computes the flux variables
from the dependent variables using extrapolation, which is less accurate in
postprocessing results but does not create extra dependent variables on the boundaries
for the fluxes.
The flux variables affected in the interface are:
ndflux_c (where c is the dependent variable for the concentration). This is the
normal diffusive flux and corresponds to the boundary flux when diffusion is the
only contribution to the flux term.
ntflux_c (where c is the dependent variable for the concentration). This is the
normal total flux and corresponds to the boundary flux plus additional transport
terms, for example, the convective flux when you use the non-conservative form.
Also the Apply smoothing to boundary fluxes check box is available if the previous check
box is checked. The smoothing can provide a more well-behaved flux value close to
singularities.
For details about the boundary fluxes settings, see Computing Accurate Fluxes in the
COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual.
The Value type when using splitting of complex variables setting should in most pure
mass transfer problems be set to Real, which is the default. It makes sure that the
dependent variable does not get affected by small imaginary contributions, which can
occur, for example, when combining a Time Dependent or Stationary study with a
frequency-domain study. For more information, see Splitting Complex-Valued
Variables in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual.
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F D I L U T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
391
DEPENDENT VARIABLES
The dependent variable name is Concentration c by default. The names must be unique
with respect to all other dependent variables in the component.
Add or remove species variables in the model and also change the names of the
dependent variables that represent the species concentrations.
Enter the Number of species. Use the Add concentration (
concentration (
) buttons as needed.
) and Remove
FURTHER READING
Theory for the Transport of Diluted Species Interface
Numerical Stabilization in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference
Manual.
Domain, Boundary, and Pair Nodes for the Transport of Diluted
Species Interface
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual, see Table 2-3 for
links to common sections and Table 2-4 for common feature nodes.
You can also search for information: press F1 to open the Help window
or Ctrl+F1 to open the Documentation window.
Effective Diffusivity in Porous Materials: Application Library path
COMSOL_Multiphysics/Diffusion/effective_diffusivity
Thin-Layer Diffusion: Application Library path COMSOL_Multiphysics/
Diffusion/thin_layer_diffusion
The Transport of Diluted Species in Porous Media Interface
This interface (
), found under the Chemical Species Transport branch (
), is used
to calculate the species concentration and transport in free and porous media. The
interface is the same as the Transport of Diluted Species interface but it uses other
defaults: A Porous Media Transport Properties node is activated by default. It includes
392 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
reaction rate expressions and solute sources for modeling of species transport and
reaction in porous media.
Not all additional transport mechanisms listed below are available in all
products. For details, see http://www.comsol.com/products/
specifications/.
This interface includes free and porous media flow with immobile and mobile phases,
including diffusion, convection, dispersion, adsorption, and volatilization in porous
media. It supports cases where either the solid phase substrate is exclusively immobile,
or when a gas-filling medium is also assumed to be immobile.
It applies to one or more diluted species or solutes that move primarily within a fluid
that fills (saturated) or partially fills (unsaturated) the voids in a solid porous medium.
The pore space not filled with fluid contains an immobile gas phase. Models including
a combination of porous media types can be studied.
The main feature nodes are the Porous Media Transport Properties and Partially
Saturated Porous Media nodes, which add the equations for the species concentrations
and provide an interface for defining the properties of the porous media, as well as
additional properties governing adsorption, volatilization, dispersion and diffusion,
and the velocity field to model convection.
The physics interface can be used for stationary and time-dependent analysis.
When this physics interface is added, these default nodes are also added to the Model
BuilderPorous Media Transport Properties, No Flux (the default boundary condition),
and Initial Values. Then, from the Physics toolbar, add other nodes that implement, for
example, boundary conditions, reaction rate expressions, and species sources. You can
also right-click Transport of Diluted Species in Porous Media to select physics features
from the context menu.
SETTINGS
The rest of the settings are the same as The Transport of Diluted Species Interface.
FURTHER READING
Domain, Boundary, and Pair Nodes for the Transport of Diluted
Species Interface
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F D I L U T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
393
Variably Saturated Flow and TransportSorbing Solute:
Application Library path Subsurface_Flow_Module/Solute_Transport/
sorbing_solute
Web link: http://www.comsol.com/model/
variably-saturated-flow-and-transport-sorbing-solute-490
Domain, Boundary, and Pair Nodes for the Transport of Diluted
Species Interface
The Transport of Diluted Species Interface has the following domain, boundary, and
pair nodes, listed in alphabetical order, available from the Physics ribbon toolbar
(Windows users), Physics context menu (Mac or Linux users), or by right-clicking to
access the context menu (all users).
To add a node, go to the Physics toolbar, no matter what operating system
you are using. Subnodes are available by clicking the parent node and
selecting it from the Attributes menu.
Concentration
Periodic Condition
Flux
Point Mass Source
Flux Discontinuity
Reactions
Inflow
Symmetry
Initial Values
Thin Diffusion Barrier
Line Mass Source
Thin Impermeable Barrier
No Flux
Transport PropertiesTurbulent
Mixing
Open Boundary
Outflow
Some features may require certain add-on modules. See details http://
www.comsol.com/products/specifications/
394 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
For axisymmetric components, COMSOL Multiphysics takes the axial
symmetry boundaries (at r = 0) into account and automatically adds an
Axial Symmetry node that is valid on boundaries representing the
symmetry axis.
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual, see Table 2-3 for links
to common sections and Table 2-4 for common feature nodes. You can
also search for information: press F1 to open the Help window or Ctrl+F1
to open the Documentation window.
Transport Properties
The settings in this node are dependent on the check boxes selected under Transport
Mechanisms on the Settings window for the Transport of Diluted Species interface. It
includes only the sections required by the activated transport mechanisms. It has all the
equations defining transport of diluted species as well as inputs for the material
properties.
When the Convection check box is selected, the Turbulent Mixing subnode is available
from the context menu as well as from the Physics toolbar, Attributes menu. Note that
this feature is only available in some COMSOL products. See details: http://
www.comsol.com/products/specifications/.
MODEL INPUTS
If transport by convection is active, the velocity field of the solvent needs to be
specified as a model input. Select the source of the Velocity field u. For User defined,
enter values or expressions for the velocity components in the fields or table. This input
option is always available.
You can also select the velocity field solved by a Fluid Flow interface that been added
to the model component. These physics interfaces are available for selection from the
Velocity field list if they are active in the domains. A list of the variable names related to
the Fluid Flow interface will be visible in a table.
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F D I L U T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
395
When the Migration in electric field check box is selected on the Settings window for
Transport of Diluted Species, select the source of the electric potential field and,
optionally, temperature.
Enter values or expressions for the Electric potential V, which is User defined; this
input option is always available.
Select the electromagnetic field solved by an AC/DC-based interface that has also
been added to the model. This works like the velocity field model input described
above.
The default mobility model is the Nernst-Einstein relation. This also requires a
temperature input, which will be exposed in the same manner as the electric
potential described above.
Note that the migration in electric fields feature is only available in some COMSOL
products. See details: http://www.comsol.com/products/specifications/.
DIFFUSION
Select an option from the Material list. This selection list can only be used if a material
has been added in the Materials node and if that material has a diffusion coefficient
defined. Else, you need to type in the diffusivity in the User Defined edit field.
Enter the Diffusion coefficient Dc for each species. This can be a scalar value for isotropic
diffusion or a tensor describing anisotropic diffusion. Select the appropriate tensor
type Isotropic, Diagonal, Symmetric, or Anisotropic that describes the diffusion
transport, and then enter the values in the corresponding element (one value for each
species).
Note that multiple species, as well as Migration in Electric fields (described below) is
only available for certain COMSOL add-on products. See details: http://
www.comsol.com/products/specifications/.
MIGRATION IN ELECTRIC FIELD
This section is available when the Migration in electric field check box is selected. By
default the Mobility is set to be calculated based on the species diffusivity and the
temperature using the Nernst-Einstein relation. For User defined, and under Mobility,
select the appropriate scalar or tensor typeIsotropic, Diagonal, Symmetric, or
Anisotropicand type in the value of expression of the mobility um,c.
Enter the Charge number zc (dimensionless, but requires a plus or minus sign) for each
species.
396 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
Specify the temperature (if you are using mobilities based on the Nernst-Einstein
relation) and electric field in the Model Inputs section.
EXAMPLE MODELS
Separation Through Dialysis: Application Library path
Chemical_Reaction_Engineering_Module/Separation_Processes/dialysis
Web link: http://www.comsol.com/model/
separation-through-dialysis-258
Transport in an Electrokinetic Valve: Application Library path
Microfluidics_Module/Fluid_Flow/electrokinetic_valve
Web link:
http://www.comsol.com/model/electrokinetic-valve-603
Turbulent Mixing
Note that the Turbulent Mixing node is only available for some product add-ons. See
details: http://www.comsol.com/products/specifications/.
This subnode is available from the context menu (right-click the Transport Properties
parent node) as well as from the Physics toolbar, Attributes menu, if Convection is
selected as a transport mechanism. Use this node to account for the turbulent mixing
caused by the eddy diffusivity. An example is when the specified velocity field
corresponds to a RANS solution.
TU R B U L E N T M I X I N G P A R A M E T E R S
Some physics interfaces provide the turbulent kinematic viscosity, and these appear as
options in the Turbulent kinematic viscosity T list. The list always contains the User
defined option where any value or expression can be entered.
The default Turbulent Schmidt number ScT is 0.71 (dimensionless).
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F D I L U T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
397
FURTHER READING
See the section About Turbulent Mixing in the CFD Module Users Guide (this link
is available online or if you have the CFD Module documentation installed).
Turbulent Mixing of a Trace Species: Application Library path
CFD_Module/Single-Phase_Tutorials/turbulent_mixing
Web link:
http://www.comsol.com/model/
turbulent-mixing-of-a-trace-species-12727
Initial Values
This node specifies the initial values for the concentration of each species. These serve
as an initial guess for a stationary solver or as initial conditions for a transient
simulation.
DOMAIN SELECTION
If there are several types of domains with different initial values defined, it might be
necessary to remove some domains from the selection. These are then defined in an
additional Initial Values node.
INITIAL VALUES
Enter a value or expression for the initial value of the Concentration or concentrations,
ci. This also serves as a start guess for stationary problems.
Mass-Based Concentrations
Use the Mass-Based Concentrations node to add postprocessing variables for mass-based
concentrations (SI unit: kg/m3) and mass fractions (dimensionless) for all species.
MIXTURE PROPERTIES
The default Solvent density solvent is taken From material. For User defined, enter a
value or expression manually. Define the Molar mass of each species, which is needed
to calculate the mass-based concentration.
398 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
Reactions
Use the Reactions node to account for the consumption or production of species
through chemical reactions. Define the rate expressions as required.
DOMAIN SELECTION
From the Selection list, choose the domains on which to define rate expression or
expressions that govern the source term in the transport equations.
Several reaction nodes can be used to account for different reactions in different parts
for the modeling geometry.
REACTION RATES
Add a rate expression Ri (SI unit: mol/(m3s)) for species i. Enter a value or expression
in the field. Note that if you have the Chemistry interface available, provided with the
Chemical Reaction Engineering Module, the reaction rate expressions can be
automatically generated and picked up using the drop-down menu. For an example,
see the application Fine Chemical Production in a Plate Reactor as linked below.
R E A C T I N G VO L U M E
When specifying reaction rates for a species in porous media, the specified reaction rate
may have the basis of the total volume, the pore volume, or the volume of a particular
phase. For nonporous domains, the settings of the Reacting Volume section has no
impact.
The Reacting Volume section is only available in the products that
provide the Transport of Diluted Species in Porous Media interface. See
details: http://www.comsol.com/products/specifications/.
For Total volume, the reaction expressions in mol/(m3s) are specified per unit
volume of the model domain (multiplied by unity).
For Pore volume, the reaction expressions in mol/(m3s) are specified per unit
volume of total pore space. The reaction expressions will be multiplied by the
domain porosity, p. (p equals unity for nonporous domains).
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F D I L U T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
399
For Liquid phase, the reaction expressions in mol/(m3s) are specified per unit
volume of liquid in the pore space. The expressions will be multiplied by the liquid
volume fraction . ( equals p for Saturated Porous Media domains).
For Gas phase, the expressions are multiplied by the gas volume fraction av = p .
av equals 0 for Saturated Porous Media domains.
FURTHER READING
See the theory chapter on chemical species transport, starting with the section Mass
Balance Equation.
Fine Chemical Production in a Plate Reactor: Application Library
path Chemical_Reaction_Engineering_Module/
Reactors_with_Mass_and_Heat_Transfer/plate_reactor
Web link: http://www.comsol.com/model/
fine-chemical-production-in-a-plate-reactor-8589
No Flux
This node is the default boundary condition on exterior boundaries. It represents
boundaries where no mass flows in or out of the boundaries. Hence, the total flux is
zero.
Inflow
Use this node to specify all species concentrations at an inlet boundary.
If you want to specify the concentration of a subset of the partaking species, this can
be done by using the Concentration node instead.
For the Electroanalysis interface, this node is available when you select the Convection
check box on the physics interface Settings window.
CONCENTRATION
For the concentration of each species c0,c (SI unit: mol/m3), enter a value or
expression.
400 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
B O U N D A R Y C O N D I T I O N TY P E
This section in the settings is only available for some products. Search for Inflow on
the page: http://www.comsol.com/products/specifications/ for more details on
availability.
The option Concentration constraint constrains the concentration values on the
boundary by the use of pointwise constraints. The other option, Flux (Danckwerts) can
be more stable and fast to solve when high reaction rates are anticipated in the vicinity
of the inlet. Oscillations on the solutions can also be avoided in such cases. The latter
condition uses a flux boundary condition based on the velocity across the boundary
and the concentration values. See further details in the theory section.
CONSTRAINT SETTINGS
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
You can find details about the different constraint settings in the section Constraint
Reaction Terms.
FURTHER READING
See the theory chapter in the section .
Outflow
This node is not available if Diffusion only is included in the model.
Set this condition at outlets where species are transported out of the model domain by
fluid motion. It is assumed that convection is the dominating transport mechanism
across outflow boundaries, and therefore that diffusive transport can be ignored, that
is:
n ( D c ) = 0
Concentration
This condition node adds a boundary condition for the species concentration. For
example, a c = c0 condition specifies the concentration of species c.
CONCENTRATION
Individually specify the concentration (SI unit: mol/m3) for each species. Select the
check box for the Species to specify the concentration, and then enter a value or
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F D I L U T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
401
expression in the corresponding field. To use another boundary condition for a specific
species, click to clear the check box for the concentration of that species.
CONSTRAINT SETTINGS
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
You can find details about the different constraint settings in the section Constraint
Reaction Terms.
Flux
This node can be used to specify the total species flux across a boundary. The total flux
of species c is defined accordingly:
n ( cu Dc ) = N 0
where N0 is an arbitrary user-specified flux expression (SI unit: mol/(m2s)). For
example, N0 can represent a flux from or into a much larger surrounding environment,
a phase change, or a flux due to chemical reactions. N0 can also be a function of the
concentration and the electric potential (if the mass transport includes migration of
ionic species).
When diffusion is the only transport mechanism present, the flux condition is extended
to include a mass transfer term to describe flux into a surrounding environment:
n ( Dc ) = N 0 + k c ( c b c )
where kc is a mass transfer coefficient (SI unit: m/s), and cb is the concentration
(SI unit: mol/m3) in the surroundings of the modeled system (the bulk
concentration). The mass transfer coefficient (to be specified) is often given by
boundary-layer theory.
INWARD FLUX
This is used to individually specify the flux of each species. To use another boundary
condition for a specific species, click to clear the check box for the mass fraction of that
species.
Note: Use a minus sign when specifying a flux leaving the system.
402 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
Symmetry
The Symmetry node can be used to represent boundaries where the species
concentration is symmetric, that is, where there is no mass flux in the normal direction
across the boundary.
This boundary condition is identical to that of the No Flux node, but applies to all
species and cannot be applied to individual species.
Flux Discontinuity
This node represents a discontinuity in the mass flux across an interior boundary:
n ( Nd Nu ) = N0
N = ( cu Dc )
where the value N0 (SI unit: mol/(m2s)) specifies the jump in flux at the boundary.
This can be used to model a boundary source, for example a surface reaction,
adsorption or desorption.
FLUX DISCONTINUITY
In this section the jump in species flux (or surface source) is specified.
Select the Species check box for the species to specify and enter a value or expression
for the material flux jump in the corresponding field. To use a different boundary
condition for a specific species, click to clear the check box for the flux discontinuity
of that species.
Periodic Condition
The Periodic Condition node can be used to define periodicity or antiperiodicity
between two boundaries. The node can be activated on more than two boundaries, in
which case the feature tries to identify two separate surfaces that can each consist of
several connected boundaries. For more complex geometries, it might be necessary to
add the Destination Selection subnode, which is available from the context menu
(right-click the parent node) as well as from the Physics toolbar, Attributes menu.
With this subnode, the boundaries that constitute the source and destination surfaces
can be manually specified.
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F D I L U T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
403
FURTHER READING
For an example of using a periodic condition, see this application example:
The KdV Equation and Solitons: Application Library path
COMSOL_Multiphysics/Equation_Based/kdv_equation
Line Mass Source
This feature is only available in a limited set of add-on products. See http://
www.comsol.com/products/specifications/ for more details on availability.
The Line Mass Source feature models mass flow originating from a tube or line region
with an infinitely small radius.
For the Reacting Flow in Porous Media, Diluted Species interface, which is available
in some add-on products, the Line Mass Source node is available in two versions, one
for the fluid flow (Fluid Line Source) and one for the species (Species Line Source).
SELECTION
The Line Mass Source feature is available for all dimensions, but the applicable selection
differs between the dimensions.
MODEL DIMENSION
APPLICABLE GEOMETRICAL ENTITY
2D
Points
2D Axisymmetry
Points not on the symmetry axis and the symmetry axis
3D
Edges
SPECIES SOURCE
Enter the source strength, q l,c , for each species (SI unit: mol/(ms)). A positive value
results in species injection from the line into the computational domain, and a negative
value means that the species is removed from the computational domain.
Line sources located on a boundary affect the adjacent computational domains. This
effect makes the physical strength of a line source located in a symmetry plane twice
the given strength.
FURTHER READING
See the section Mass Sources for Species Transport.
404 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
Point Mass Source
This feature is only available in a limited set of add-on products. See http://
www.comsol.com/products/specifications/ for more details on availability.
The Point Mass Source feature models mass flow originating from an infinitely small
domain around a point.
For the Reacting Flow in Porous Media, Diluted Species interface, which is available
in some add-on products, the Point Mass Source node is available in two versions, one
for the fluid flow (Fluid Point Source) and one for the species (Species Point Source).
SPECIES SOURCE
Enter the source strength, q p,c , for each species (SI unit: mol/s). A positive value
results in species injection from the point into the computational domain, and a
negative value means that the species is removed from the computational domain.
Point sources located on a boundary or on an edge affect the adjacent computational
domains. This has the effect, for example, that the physical strength of a point source
located in a symmetry plane is twice the given strength.
FURTHER READING
See the section Mass Sources for Species Transport.
Open Boundary
This feature is only available in a limited set of add-on products. See http://
www.comsol.com/products/specifications/ for more details on availability.
Use this node to set up mass transport across boundaries where both convective inflow
and outflow can occur. Use this boundary condition to specify an exterior species
concentration on parts of the boundary where fluid flows into the domain. A condition
equivalent to the Outflow node applies to the parts of the boundary where fluid flows
out of the domain.
The direction of the flow across the boundary is typically calculated by a fluid flow
interface and is provided as a model input to the Transport of Diluted Species
interface.
EXTERIOR CONCENTRATION
Enter a value or expression for the Exterior concentration.
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F D I L U T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
405
Thin Diffusion Barrier
Use this boundary condition to model a thin layer through which mass is transported
by diffusion only. To set up the node, specify the layer thickness and a diffusion
coefficient for each transported species.
THIN DIFFUSION BARRIER
Enter a Layer thickness ds (SI unit: m). The default is 0.005 m (5 mm). Enter a
Diffusion coefficient Ds,c (SI unit: m2/s). The default is 0.
Thin Impermeable Barrier
This feature models a thin mass transfer barrier. The feature is available on interior
boundaries and introduces a discontinuity in the concentration across the boundary.
On each side of the boundary, a no-flux condition is prescribed for the mass transport.
The Thin Impermeable Barrier boundary feature can be used to avoid meshing thin
structures.
Solving a model involving coupled fluid flow and mass transfer, the Thin Impermeable
Barrier feature can be combined with an Interior Wall or Rotating Interior Wall feature
in order to model a thin solid wall.
Equilibrium Reaction
This feature is only available in a limited set of add-on products. See http://
www.comsol.com/products/specifications/ for more details on availability.
Use this node to model an equilibrium reaction in a domain. This feature is available
with two species or more.
The equilibrium reaction is defined by the relation between the chemical activities of
the chemical species participating in the reaction (the equilibrium condition) and the
stoichiometry of the reaction.
The node solves for an additional degree of freedom (the reaction rate) to fulfill the
equilibrium condition at all times in all space coordinates.
If the Apply equilibrium condition on inflow boundaries check box is selected, the
specified inflow concentration values in all active Inflow boundary nodes for the physics
interface are modified to comply with the equilibrium condition.
406 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
EQUILIBRIUM CONDITION
The list defaults to Equilibrium constant or select User defined. For either option, the
Apply equilibrium condition on inflow boundaries check box is selected by default.
For Equilibrium constant, enter an Equilibrium constant Keq (dimensionless). The
default is 1. Enter a value or expression for the Unit activity concentration Ca0 (SI
unit: mol/m3). The default is 110-3 mol/m3. Equilibrium constant creates an
equilibrium condition based on the stoichiometric coefficients, the species activities,
and the law of mass action.
For User defined, enter an Equilibrium expression Eeq (dimensionless).
STOICHIOMETRIC COEFFICIENTS
Enter a value for the stoichiometric coefficientc (dimensionless). The default is 0. Use
negative values for reactants and positive values for products in the modeled reaction.
Species with a stoichiometric coefficient value of 0 are not affected by the Equilibrium
Reaction node.
Surface Equilibrium Reaction
This feature is only available in a limited set of add-on products. See http://
www.comsol.com/products/specifications/ for more details on availability.
Use this node to model an equilibrium reaction on a boundary (surface). The settings
for this node are similar to Equilibrium Reaction.
Porous Electrode Coupling
This feature is only available in a limited set of add-on products. See http://
www.comsol.com/products/specifications/ for more details on availability.
Use this node to add a molar source in a domain that is coupled to one or multiple
Porous Electrode Reaction nodes of an Electrochemistry Interface.
The molar source is calculated from the number of electrons, stoichiometric
coefficients, and volumetric current densities of the coupled porous electrode reactions
specified in the Reaction Coefficients subnodes.
In the Transport of Concentrated Species interface, the molar sources (or sinks) are
multiplied by the species molar masses to obtain the corresponding mass sources.
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F D I L U T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
407
Additional Reaction Coefficients subnodes are available from the context menu
(right-click the parent node) as well as from the Physics toolbar, Attributes menu.
Note that if you are also modeling the momentum transport and expect a
non-negligible total mass source or sink, which is often the case in gas diffusion
electrodes, you need to also add a corresponding Porous Electrode Coupling node in
the Fluid Flow interface.
Reaction Coefficients
Add this node to the Electrode-Electrolyte Interface Coupling and Porous Electrode
Coupling features to define molar fluxes and sources based on electrode current
densities in an Electrochemistry interface.
The molar flux or source is proportional to the stoichiometric coefficients and the
current density according to Faradays law.
All current densities from the Electrode Reaction (iloc, SI unit: A/m2) or the Porous
Electrode Reaction (iv, SI unit: A/m3) nodes are available for selection as the Coupled
reaction, and user-defined expressions are also supported.
Enter the Number of participating electrons nm (dimensionless) and the Stoichiometric
coefficient vc (dimensionless) as explained in the Electrode Reaction documentation or
the theory section.
Use multiple subnodes to couple to multiple reactions.
Electrode-Electrolyte Interface Coupling
Use this node to define a flux boundary condition based on current densities of one or
multiple Electrode Reaction nodes in an Electrochemistry interface.
The flux is proportional to the current densities and the stoichiometric coefficients
according to Faradays law as defined by summation over the Reaction Coefficients
subnodes.
In the Transport of Concentrated Species interface, the molar fluxes are multiplied by
the species molar masses to obtain the corresponding mass fluxes.
Note that if you are also modeling the momentum transport and expect a
non-negligible total mass flux over the boundary, which is often the case for gas
diffusion electrodes, you need to also add a corresponding Electrode-Electrolyte
Interface Coupling node in the Fluid Flow interface.
408 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
Porous Media Transport Properties
This feature is only available in a limited set of add-on products. See http://
www.comsol.com/products/specifications/ for more details on availability.
Use this node to model the transport of diluted species in porous media.
MATRIX PROPERTIES
Select an option from the Porous material list. The default is Domain material.
By default the Porosity, p (dimensionless) is taken From material. For User defined,
enter a different value. The default is 0.3.
When the Adsorption in porous media check box is selected on the Settings window for
the physics interface, the default Density (SI unit: kg/m3) is taken From material. For
User defined, enter a different value. The default is 1400 kg/m3.
DIFFUSION
Select a Fluid material (when available and applicable).
Specify the Fluid diffusion coefficient DF,i (SI unit: m2/s). Enter a value or expression
for each of the species in the corresponding input field. The default is 1 x 10-9 m2/s.
Select the Effective diffusivity modelMillington and Quirk model (the default),
Bruggeman model, Tortuosity model, or User defined. For Tortuosity model, enter a value
for the tortuosity F,i (dimensionless). The default is 1.
ADSORPTION
This section is available when the Adsorption in porous media check box is selected on
the Settings window for the physics interface.
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F D I L U T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
409
Select a Sorption typeLangmuir (the default), Freundlich, or User defined to specify
how to compute cp, the amount of species sorbed to the solid phase (moles per unit
dry weight of the solid):
For Langmuir:
Enter a Langmuir constant kL,c (SI unit: m3/mol) and an Adsorption maximum
cp,max,c (SI unit: mol/kg):
For Freundlich:
Enter a Freundlich constant kF,c (SI unit: mol/kg), a Freundlich exponent NF,c
(dimensionless), and a Reference concentration cref,c (SI unit: mol/m3).
For User defined:
Enter an Adsorption isotherm kP,c (SI unit: m3/kg).
For more information, see Adsorption in the theory section of the Chemical Reaction
Engineering Module Users Guide.
DISPERSION
This section is available when the Dispersion in porous media check box is selected on
the Settings window for the physics interface.
Select the Specify dispersion for each species individually check box to specify the
dispersion tensor DD (SI unit: m2/s) for each species separately. The default is to use
the same dispersion tensor DD for all species.
Select an option from the Dispersion tensor listUser defined (the default) or
Dispersivity. For User defined, use it to specify the dispersion components as
user-defined constants or expressions. Select Isotropic, Diagonal, Symmetric, or
Anisotropic based on the properties of the dispersion tensor.
Select Dispersivity when Convection has been added as the transport mechanism. Specify
the dispersivities (SI unit: m) to define the dispersion tensor DD (SI unit: m2/s)
together with the velocity field u. Select an option from the Dispersivity model list
Isotropic (the default) or Transverse isotropic based on the properties of the porous
media. For isotropic porous media, specify the longitudinal and transverse
dispersivities. For transverse isotropic porous media, specify the longitudinal,
horizontal transverse, and vertical transverse dispersivities.
FURTHER READING
See the theory chapter in the section .
410 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
Partially Saturated Porous Media
This feature is only available in a limited set of add-on products. See http://
www.comsol.com/products/specifications/ for more details on availability.
Use this node to model the transport of diluted species in partially saturated porous
media.
SATURATION
Select Saturation or Liquid volume fraction from the list.
For Saturation, enter a value for s (dimensionless) between 0 and 1. The liquid volume
fraction is then computed from the saturation and porosity as = sp.
For Liquid volume fraction, enter a value for (dimensionless) between 0 and the value
of porosity. The saturation is then computed from the porosity and the liquid volume
fraction as s = p.
Select a Fluid fraction time changeFluid fraction constant in time (the default), Time
change in fluid fraction, or Time change in pressure head.
For Time change in fluid fraction, enter d/dt (SI unit: 1/s).
For Time change in pressure head, enter dHp/dt (SI unit: m/s) and a Specific
moisture capacity Cm (SI unit: 1/m).
DIFFUSION
Select a Liquid material from the list.
Specify the Liquid diffusion coefficient DL,c (SI unit: m2/s). Enter a value or expression
for each of the species in the corresponding input field. The default is 1 x 10-9 m2/s.
Select the Effective diffusivity model, liquidMillington and Quirk model (the default),
Bruggeman model, Tortuosity model, or User defined. For Tortuosity model, enter a value
for L,c (dimensionless). The default is 1.
When the Volatilization in partially saturated porous media check box is selected on the
Settings window for the physics interface, also define the Gas material, Gas diffusion
coefficient, and Effective diffusivity model, gas.
ADSORPTION
This section is available when the Adsorption in porous media check box is selected on
the Settings window for the physics interface. The settings are the same as for Porous
Media Transport Properties.
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F D I L U T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
411
DISPERSION
This section is available when the Dispersion in porous media check box is selected on
the Settings window for the physics interface. The settings are the same as for Porous
Media Transport Properties.
VO L A T I L I Z A T I O N
This section is available when the Volatilization in partially saturated porous media check
box is selected on the Settings window for the physics interface.
Enter a value for the Volatilization kG,c (dimensionless) for each species.
Volatilization
This feature is only available in a limited set of add-on products. See http://
www.comsol.com/products/specifications/ for more details on availability.
This feature is available when the Volatilization in partially saturated porous media check
box is selected on the Settings window for the physics interface.
Use the boundary condition to model a thin layer through which mass is transported
by volatilization only. To set up the node, specify the layer thickness and the
atmospheric concentration of each species in the thin layer for each transported
species.
VO L A T I L I Z A T I O N
Enter a Layer thickness ds and the atmospheric concentration for each species. The Gas
diffusion coefficient DG,c (SI unit: m2/s) and the Volatilization coefficient kG,c
(dimensionless) for each species are taken from the adjacent Partially Saturated Porous
Media domain.
Reactive Pellet Bed
Note that this feature is only available if you are licensed to use the Chemical Reaction
Engineering Module. See details: http://www.comsol.com/products/specifications.
Use this feature to model packed bed reactors with catalytic pellets. For details, see the
section Theory for the Reactive Pellet Bed. By default, subnodes for Reactions and
Initial values are added.
412 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
BED PARAMETERS
Here you can specify the bed porosity, which is the void fraction in the packed bed
structure. Select From densities to calculate the porosity from the bed density and the
individual pellet density. Select User defined to specify the porosity directly.
PELL ET SH APE AN D SIZE
The default shape is spherical. Cylinders, flakes, and user-defined shapes can also be
selected. A uniform pellet size or a discrete size distribution can be selected. Select a
Pellet size distributionUniform size (the default), Two sizes, Three sizes, Four sizes, or
Five sizes to select up to five different particle sizes.
Depending on the shape selection, equivalent radii or volumes and surface areas will
be required as input. If a size distribution is selected, the volume percentage of each
size is required as input.
Note that different chemical reactions can be specified for each pellet size if a
distribution is specified.
SURFACE SPECIES
In order to add surface species, click the Add button and enter the species name in the
Surface species table. Added surface species are be available inside all pellet types
defined in the Pellet Shape and Size section, but not in the bulk fluid.
For each pellet type, specify the Reactive specific surface area, Sb,reac (SI unit: 1/m),
corresponding to the surface area, per volume, available for surface reactions.
PELL ET PARA MET ERS
Enter a Pellet porosity pe (dimensionless) to specify the porosity of the pellet internals.
Select Diffusion modelMillington and Quirk model (the default), Bruggeman model,
Tortuosity model, or User defined to describe the effective correction of the diffusion
coefficient in the pellet. In the case of the Tortuosity model, a value for the tortuosity
pe within the pellet is required.
Enter also the Diffusion coefficient Dpe,c (SI unit: m2/s). If a User defined diffusion
model is selected, an Effective diffusion coefficient Dpeff,c (SI unit: m2/s) is entered. The
default value is 110-9 m2/s in both cases.
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F D I L U T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
413
PELLET-FLUID SURFACE
For the coupling of concentration between the pellet internals and the surrounding
fluid, two Coupling type options are available:
Continuous concentration, assuming that all resistance to mass transfer to/from the
pellet is within the pellet and no resistance to pellet-fluid mass transfer is on the bulk
fluid side. The concentration in the fluid will thus be equal to that in the pellet pore
just at the pellet surface: c pe,i = c i . This constraint also automatically ensures flux
continuity between the internal pellet domain and the free fluid domain through
so-called reaction forces in the finite element formulation.
Film resistance (mass flux): The flux of mass across the pellet-fluid interface into the
pellet is possibly rate determined on the bulk fluid side, by film resistance. The
resistance is expressed in terms of a film mass transfer coefficient, hDi, such that:
N i,inward = h D, i ( c i c pe, i ) .
The Film resistance (mass flux) option computes the inward surface flux,
Ni,inward=hDi(ci-cpe,i). hDi is the mass transfer coefficient (SI unit: m/s) and is
calculated with the default Automatic setting from a dimensionless Sherwood number
expression or with User defined mass transfer coefficients.
The Active specific surface area (SI unit: m-1) is required to couple the mass transfer
between the pellets and the bed fluid. Select either the Automatic setting that calculates
the specific surface area from the shape information given above. User defined is also
available for explicit surface area specification.
The Sherwood number expression can be computed from three available expressions:
Frssling, Rosner, and Garner and Keey. The Frssling equation is the default and
probably the most commonly used for packed spheres. All of these are based on the
dimensionless Reynolds, Re, and Schmidt, Sc, numbers, which are computed from
Density and Dynamic viscosity. Select these to be taken either From material or choose
the User defined alternative.
PELLET DISCRETIZATION
The extra dimension in the pellet needs to be discretized into elements. Select a
DistributionCubic root sequence (the default), Linear, or Square root sequence. Enter
the Number of elements Nelem.
CONSTRAINT SETTINGS
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
See the details about the different constraint settings in the section Constraint
414 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
Reaction Terms.
FURTHER READING
Theory for the Reactive Pellet Bed in the Theory section of this manual.
For an application using the Reactive Pellet Bed feature, see
A Multiscale 3D Packed Bed Reactor: Application Library path
Chemical_Reaction_Engineering_Module/Reactors_with_Porous_Catalysts/
packed_bed_reactor_3d
Web link: http://www.comsol.com/model/
a-multiscale-3d-packed-bed-reactor-17019
Reactions
The Reactions subfeature to the Reactive Pellet Bed is used to define reaction terms to
the transport within the reactive pellets. The feature also defines the corresponding
averaged heat sources to be applied to heat transport in the bulk fluid.
DOMAIN SELECTION
From the Selection list, choose the domains on which to define rate expression or
expressions that govern source terms in the transport equations.
Several reaction nodes can be used to account for different reactions in different parts
for the modeling geometry.
REACTION RATES
Add a rate expression Ri (SI unit: mol/(m3s)) for species i using a value or an
expression. One reaction rate per species and pellet type can be entered.
Note that if you have the Chemistry interface available, provided with the Chemical
Reaction Engineering Module, the reaction rate expressions can be automatically
generated and picked up using the drop-down menu. For an example, see the
application Fine Chemical Production in a Plate Reactor as linked below.
SURFACE REACTION RATES
The section is available when one or more surface species have been added in the
Surface Species section of the Reactive Pellet Bed feature.
Specify the rate expression Rsurf,i (SI unit: mol/(m2s)) corresponding to the surface
reaction rate of each volumetric species i participating in the surface reaction.
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F D I L U T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
415
Furthermore, specify the surface reaction rates for the participating surface species in
the corresponding table.
If several pellet types have been defined, one set of surface reaction rates per pellet type
can be defined.
Note that if you have the Chemistry interface available, provided with the Chemical
Reaction Engineering Module, the reaction rate expressions can be automatically
generated and picked up using the drop-down menu.
HEAT SOURCE
Specify the heat source originating from the heat of reaction of the chemical reactions
inside the pellet can be specified. Both heat sources from reactions in the fluid, and
heat sources resulting from surface reactions can be defined. When using several pellet
types, heat sources for each type can be added.
The heat sources are most conveniently picked up from a Chemistry feature that
defines the reaction rate and the heat of reactions. In that case, the Rate expression can
be selected from the drop-down menu. Else it can be set to User Defined.
The defined heat source can be used by a Heat Source feature in any of the heat
transfer interfaces.
Species Source
In order to account for consumption or production of species in porous domains, the
Species Source node adds source terms expressions Si to the right-hand side of the
species transport equations.
DOMAIN SELECTION
From the Selection list, choose the domains on which to define rate expression or
expressions that govern the source term in the transport equations.
If there are several types of domains, with subsequent and different reactions occurring
within them, it might be necessary to remove some domains from the selection. These
are then defined in an additional Species Source node.
SPECIES SOURCE
Add a source term Si (SI unit: mol/(m3s)) for each of the species solved for. Enter a
value or expression in the field of the corresponding species.
416 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
Hygroscopic Swelling
The Hygroscopic Swelling multiphysics coupling node (
) is used for moisture
concentration coupling between the Solid Mechanics interface and either the
Transport of Diluted Species or Transport of Diluted Species in Porous Media
interfaces.
Hygroscopic swelling is an effect of internal strain caused by changes in moisture
content. This strain can be written as
hs = h ( c mo c mo,ref )
where h is the coefficient of hygroscopic swelling, cmo is the moisture concentration,
and cmo,ref is the strain-free reference concentration.
It requires a license of either the MEMS Module or the Structural Mechanics Module.
The multiphysics feature will appear automatically if both the Transport of Diluted
Species and the Solid Mechanics interfaces are added to the same component. For the
most current information about licensing, please see See http://www.comsol.com/
products/specifications/.
FURTHER READING
More information about how to use hygroscopic swelling can be found in Hygroscopic
Swelling Coupling section in the Structural Mechanics Module Users Guide.
More information about multiphysics coupling nodes can be found in the section The
Multiphysics Node.
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F D I L U T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
417
T he T r a ns po r t of Con c en t rat ed
Species Interface
The Transport of Concentrated Species (tcs) interface (
), found under the Chemical
) when adding a physics interface, is used to study
gaseous and liquid mixtures where the species concentrations are of the same order of
magnitude and none of the species can be identified as a solvent. In this case, properties
of the mixture depend on the composition, and the molecular and ionic interactions
between all species need to be considered. The physics interface includes models for
multicomponent diffusion, where the diffusive driving force of each species depends
on the mixture composition, temperature, and pressure.
Species Transport branch (
The physics interface solves for the mass fractions of all participating species. Transport
through convection, diffusion, and migration in an electric field can be included.
It supports simulations of transport by convection, migration, and diffusion in 1D,
2D, and 3D as well as for axisymmetric components in 1D and 2D. The physics
interface defines the equations for the species mass fractions, including a diffusion
model (Mixture-averaged, Maxwell-Stefan, or Ficks law).
The available transport mechanisms and diffusion models differs between various
COMSOL products (see http://www.comsol.com/products/specifications/).
Some examples of what can be studied with this physics interface include:
The evolution of chemical species transported by convection and diffusion.
The migration in an electric field in the case of ionic species, in mixtures and
solutions that cannot be deemed as being diluted.
Concentrated solutions or gas mixtures, where the concentration of all participating
species are of the same order of magnitude, and their molecular and ionic interaction
with each other therefore must be considered. This implies that the diffusive
transport of a single species is dependent on the mixture composition, and possibly
on the temperature, the electric potential, the pressure, or any combination.
When this physics interface is added, the following default nodes are also added in the
Model Builder Transport Properties, No Flux, and Initial Values. Then, from the Physics
toolbar, add other nodes that implement, for example, boundary conditions and
reactions. You can also right-click Transport of Concentrated Species to select physics
features from the context menu.
418 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
SETTINGS
The Label is the default physics interface name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the physics
interface. Refer to such physics interface variables in expressions using the pattern
<name>.<variable_name>. In order to distinguish between variables belonging to
different physics interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and
underscores (_) are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first physics interface in the model) is tcs.
EQUATION
The basic equation for an individual species i is:
( i ) + ( i u ) = j i + R i
t
(8-1)
The displayed formulation changes depending on the active transport mechanisms and
the selected diffusion model.
TR A N S P O R T M E C H A N I S M S
The Transport of Concentrated Species interface always accounts for transport due to
diffusion.
The available diffusion models and the additional transport mechanisms differs
between various COMSOL products (see http://www.comsol.com/products/
specifications/).
Diffusion Model
The Maxwell-Stefan option employs the most detailed diffusion model, but is also the
most computationally expensive. The model is intended for diffusion dominated
models, and requires that the multicomponent Maxwell-Stefan diffusivities of all
component pairs are known. No stabilization is available when selecting this model.
The Mixture-averaged option is less computationally expensive than the
Maxwell-Stefan model. It is a simpler model that can be used when variations in the
partial pressures and temperature can be assumed to not affect the multicomponent
diffusion. The model includes stabilization but requires the multicomponent
Maxwell-Stefan diffusivities of all component pairs.
The Ficks law model is a general model that should be used when the diffusion is
assumed Fickian, or when no multicomponent diffusivities are available. Also, when
molecular diffusion is not the dominating transport mechanism and a robust but
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F C O N C E N T R A T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
419
low order model is wanted, the Ficks law options should be used. The model
includes stabilization.
Additional Transport Mechanisms
Under Additional transport mechanisms, click to select or clear any combination of
check boxes as needed. The Convection check box is selected by default. The second
term on the left-hand side of Equation 8-1 represents mass transport by convection.
Knudsen Diffusion
For Mixture-averaged and Ficks law, it is possible to include Knudsen diffusion. This
mechanism accounts for species collisions with the surrounding media, for example,
the pore walls the species pass through. It is also an important component when setting
up a Dusty gas model. The migration of ionic species is not active by default. Click to
select the Migration in electric field check box to activate migration. The migration term
is part of the relative mass flux vector.
Mixture-Averaged Diffusion Model
When using the Mixture-averaged diffusion model the relative mass flux vector is
m
m M
T T
j i = D i i + i D i --------- + D i --------
M
T
where the last term on the right-hand side is the migratory flux, which is added by
selecting the Migration in electric field check box.
m
The mixture-averaged diffusion coefficient D i is computed as
1 i
m
D i = -------------------------xk
N
-------kiD
ik
where Dik (SI unit: m2/s) is the multicomponent Maxwell-Stefan diffusivities, which
are supplied as inputs to the model.
Maxwell-Stefan Diffusion Model
When using the Maxwell-Stefan diffusion model the relative mass flux vector is
Q
j i = i
k=1
420 |
i
d D
D
ik k -------- T
T
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
where D ik (SI unit: m2/s) are the multicomponent Fick diffusivities, dk (SI unit: 1/
T
m) is the diffusional driving force, T (SI unit: K) is the temperature, and D i (SI
unit: kg/(ms)) is the thermal diffusion coefficient.
The diffusional driving force is defined as
Q
1
d k = x k + --- ( x k k ) p k g k + k
p
l gl
(8-2)
l=1
where gk is an external force (per unit mass) acting on species k. In the case of an ionic
species, the external force due to the electric field, which is added by selecting the
Migration in electric field check box, is
zk F
g k = ---------
Mk
(8-3)
where zk is the species charge number, F (SI unit: As/mol) is Faradays constant and
(SI unit: V) is the electric potential.
Ficks Law Diffusion Model
When using the Ficks law diffusion model the relative mass flux vector is
F
F M
T T
j i = D i i + i D i --------- + D i --------
M
T
F
where D i (SI unit: m2/s) is a user-defined diffusion coefficient (isotropic, diagonal,
or symmetric). The last term on the right-hand side is the migratory flux, which is
added by selecting the Migration in electric field check box.
SPECIES
Select the species that this physics interface solves for using the mass constraint in
Equation 8-4 (that is, its value comes from the fact that the sum of all mass fractions
must equal 1). In the From mass constraint list, select the preferred species. To
minimize the impact of any numerical errors, use the species with the highest
concentration. By default, the first species is used.
Q
1 = 1
(8-4)
i=2
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F C O N C E N T R A T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
421
CONSISTENT AND INCONSISTENT STABILIZATION
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Stabilization.
There are two consistent stabilization methods available when using the
Mixture-Averaged Diffusion Model or Ficks Law Diffusion ModelStreamline
diffusion and Crosswind diffusion. Both are active by default.
The Residual setting applies to both the consistent stabilization methods.
Approximate residual is the default setting and it means that derivatives of the
diffusion tensor components are neglected. This setting is usually accurate enough
and computationally faster. If required, select Full residual instead.
There is one inconsistent stabilization method, Isotropic diffusion, which is available
when using the Mixture-Averaged Diffusion Model or Ficks Law Diffusion Model.
ADVANCED SETTINGS
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
Normally these settings do not need to be changed.
Regularization
From the Regularization list, select On (the default) or Off. When turned On, regularized
mass fractions are calculated such that
0 w i, reg 1
Regularized mass fractions are used for the calculation of composition-dependent
material properties, such as the density.
Pseudo time stepping
The Use pseudo time stepping for stationary equation form option adds pseudo time
derivatives to the equation when the Stationary equation form is used in order to speed
up convergence. When selected, a CFL number expression should also be defined. For
the default Automatic option, the local CFL number (from the CourantFriedrichs
Lewy condition) is determined by a PID regulator. For more information, see Pseudo
Time Stepping for Mass Transport in the Chemical Reaction Engineering Module
Users Guide.
422 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
DISCRETIZATION
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Discretization. For more
information about these settings, see the Discretization section in the The Transport
of Diluted Species Interface documentation.
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual see Table 2-3 for links
to common sections and Table 2-4 to common feature nodes. You can
also search for information: press F1 to open the Help window or Ctrl+F1
to open the Documentation window.
Domain, Boundary, and Pair Nodes for the Transport of Concentrated
Species Interface
Theory for the Transport of Concentrated Species Interface
Species Transport in the Gas Diffusion Layers of a PEM: Application
Library path Batteries_and_Fuel_Cells_Module/Fuel_Cells/
pem_gdl_species_transport_2d
Web link:
http://www.comsol.com/model/
species-transport-in-the-gas-diffusion-layers-of-a-pem-260
DEPENDENT VA RIA BLES
Add or remove species in the model and also change the names of the dependent
variables that represent the species concentrations.
Specify the Number of species. There must be at least two species. To add a single
species, click the Add concentration button (
) under the table. To remove a species,
) under the table.
select it in the list and click the Remove concentration button (
Edit the names of the species directly in the table.
The species are dependent variables, and their names must be unique with
respect to all other dependent variables in the component.
Adding a Chemical Species Transport Interface
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F C O N C E N T R A T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
423
Domain, Boundary, and Pair Nodes for the Transport of
Concentrated Species Interface
The Transport of Concentrated Species Interface has these domain, boundary, and pair
nodes, listed in alphabetical order, available from the Physics ribbon toolbar (Windows
users), Physics context menu (Mac or Linux users), or right-click to access the context
menu (all users).
In general, to add a node, go to the Physics toolbar, no matter what
operating system you are using. Subnodes are available by clicking the
parent node and selecting it from the Attributes menu.
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual see Table 2-3 for links
to common sections and Table 2-4 to common feature nodes. You can
also search for information: press F1 to open the Help window or Ctrl+F1
to open the Documentation window.
For axisymmetric components, COMSOL Multiphysics takes the axial
symmetry boundaries (at r = 0) into account and automatically adds an
Axial Symmetry node to the component that is valid on the axial symmetry
boundaries only.
These nodes are described in this section or as indicated:
Flux
Porous Media Transport Properties
Flux Discontinuity
Reaction
Inflow
Reaction Sources
Initial Values
Symmetry
Mass Fraction
Thin Impermeable Barrier1
No Flux
Turbulent Mixing
Open Boundary
Transport Properties
Outflow
1 The node is described for the Transport of Diluted Species interface.
424 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
Transport Properties
The Transport Properties is the main node used to model mass transfer in a fluid
mixture with the Transport of Concentrates species interface. The node adds the
equations governing the mass fractions of all present species, and provides inputs for
the transport mechanisms and for the material properties of the fluid mixture.
The settings in this node are dependent on the check boxes selected under Transport
Mechanisms in the Settings window of the Transport of Concentrated Species
interface.
When the Convection check box is selected, the Turbulent Mixing subnode is available
from the context menu as well as from the Physics toolbar, Attributes menu.
The options available in this feature differs between COMSOL products. (See http:/
/www.comsol.com/products/specifications/).
MODEL INPUTS
Specify the velocity field, the pressure, and the temperature to be used in the physics
interface. The velocity becomes the model input for the convective part of the
transport. The pressure model input is used in the diffusional driving force in
Equation 8-2 (that is, when a Maxwell-Stefan Diffusion Model is used) and when
calculating the density from the ideal gas law. The temperature model input is used
when calculating the density from the ideal gas law, but also when thermal diffusion is
accounted for by supplying thermal diffusion coefficients. If the model includes
migration, this section also includes the electric potential as the model input for
transport due to migration in an electric field.
Velocity Field
Select the source of the Velocity field u:
Select User defined to enter manually defined values or expressions for the velocity
components (SI unit: m/s). This input is always available.
Select a velocity field defined by a Fluid Flow interface present in the model (if any).
For example, select Velocity field (spf) to use the velocity field defined by the Fluid
Properties node fp1 in a Single-Phase Flow, Laminar Flow interface with spf as the
Name.
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F C O N C E N T R A T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
425
Temperature
Select the source of the Temperature field T:
Select User defined to enter a value or an expression for the temperature (SI unit: K).
This input is always available.
If required, select a temperature defined by a Heat Transfer interface present in the
model (if any). For example, select Temperature (ht) to use the temperature defined
by the Heat Transfer in Fluids interface with the ht name.
Absolute Pressure
Select the source of the Absolute pressure p:
Select User defined to enter a value or an expression for the absolute pressure
(SI unit: Pa). This input is always available.
In addition, select a pressure defined by a Fluid Flow interface present in the model
(if any). For example, select Absolute pressure (spf) to use the pressure defined in a
Laminar Flow interface with spf as the Name.
Electric Potential
When the transport feature includes migration, select the source of the Electric
potential V:
Select User defined to enter a value or expression for the electric potential
(SI unit: V). This input is always available.
If required, select an electric potential defined by an AC/DC interface that is
present in the model (if any). For example, select Electric potential (ec) to use the
electric field defined by the Current Conservation node cucn1 in an Electric
Currents interface ec.
DENSITY
Define the density of the mixture and the molar masses of the participating species.
Mixture Density
Select a way to define the density from the Mixture density listIdeal gas or User
defined:
For Ideal gas, the density is computed from the ideal gas law in the manner of:
426 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
pM
= ----------Rg T
Here M is the mean molar mass of the mixture and Rg is the universal gas constant.
The absolute pressure, p, and temperature, T, used corresponds to the ones defined
in the Model Inputs section.
For User defined enter a value or expression for the Mixture density .
Molar Mass
Enter a value or expression for the Molar mass Mw for each species. The default value
is 0.032 kg/mol, which is the molar mass of O2 gas.
DIFFUSION
Specify the molecular and thermal diffusivities of the present species based on the
selected Diffusion model.
When using a Maxwell-Stefan Diffusion Model or a Mixture-Averaged Diffusion
Model, specify the Maxwell-Stefan diffusivity matrix Dik and the Thermal diffusion
T
coefficients D w .
F
When using a Ficks Law Diffusion Model, specify the Diffusion coefficient D w and the
T
Thermal diffusion coefficients D w for each of the species.
Maxwell-Stefan Diffusivity Matrix
Using a Maxwell-Stefan Diffusion Model or a Mixture-Averaged Diffusion Model, the
Maxwell-Stefan diffusivity matrix Dik (SI unit: m2/s) can be specified. For a simulation
involving Q species the Maxwell-Stefan diffusivity matrix is a Q-by-Q symmetric
matrix, where the diagonal components are 1. Enter values for the upper triangular
components, Dij, which describe the inter-diffusion between species i and j. The
numbering of the species corresponds to the order, from top to bottom, used for all
the input fields for species properties (see for example the molar mass fields in the
Density section).
Diffusion Coefficient
Using a Ficks Law Diffusion Model, the diffusion is by default assumed to be isotropic
F
and governed by one Diffusion coefficient D w (SI unit: m2/s) for each species. To allow
for a general representation, it is also possible to use diffusion matrices (diagonal,
symmetric, or anisotropic).
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F C O N C E N T R A T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
427
Thermal Diffusion Coefficient
T
To model thermal diffusion, prescribe the Thermal diffusion coefficients D i
(SI unit: kg/ms), by entering one thermal diffusion coefficient for each species in the
corresponding field. In a multicomponent mixture, the sum of the thermal diffusion
coefficients is zero. The default value for all thermal diffusion coefficients is 0.
Specify the molecular and thermal diffusivities of the present species based on the
selected Diffusion model.
KNUDSEN DIFFUSION
The Knudsen diffusion transport mechanism accounts for the interaction of the species
with the surroundings (inter-species collisions excluded), for example the pore wall
when a species passes through porous media.
Depending on which Diffusion model is selected, either the Ficks law or the
M
Mixture-averaged diffusion coefficient D i is corrected with the Knudsen diffusion
K
coefficient D i in the following way
MK
Di
-1
1
1 -
- + ------= -------
M
K
Di
Di
For gases, the Kinetic gas theory is often valid and requires the Mean path length path
(SI unit: m). Typically, for transport in porous media, the pore diameter can be entered
here. For other cases, choose User defined.
MIGRATION IN ELECTRIC FIELD
This section is available when the Migration in electric field check box is selected for the
Transport of Concentrated Species interface.
Settings for the mobilities are used for the Mixture-averaged and Ficks law transport
models. By default the mobility is set to be calculated based on the species diffusivities
and the temperature using the Nernst-Einstein relation. To manually specify the
mobilities, select User defined for the mobility um,c (SI unit: smol/kg) and enter one
value for each species.
Enter the Charge number zc (dimensionless, but requires a plus or minus sign) for each
species.
Specify the temperature (if you are using mobilities based on the Nernst-Einstein
relation) and electric field in the Model Inputs section.
428 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
Porous Media Transport Properties
The Porous Media Transport Properties node is used to model mass transfer in porous
media using the Transport of Concentrated Species interface. The node adds the
equations governing the mass fractions of all present species, and provides inputs for
the transport mechanisms and for the material properties of the fluid mixture.
The settings in this node are dependent on the check boxes selected under Transport
Mechanisms in the Settings window of the Transport of Concentrated Species
interface.
The options available in this feature differs between COMSOL products. (See http:/
/www.comsol.com/products/specifications/).
MODEL INPUTS
Specify the velocity field, the pressure, and the temperature to be used in the physics
interface. The velocity becomes the model input for the convective part of the
transport. The pressure model input is used in the diffusional driving force in
Equation 8-2 (that is, when a Maxwell-Stefan Diffusion Model is used) and when
calculating the density from the ideal gas law. The temperature model input is used
when calculating the density from the ideal gas law, but also when thermal diffusion is
accounted for by supplying thermal diffusion coefficients. If the model includes
migration, this section also includes the electric potential as the model input for
transport due to migration in an electric field.
Velocity Field
Select the source of the Velocity field u:
Select User defined to enter values or expressions for the velocity components
(SI unit: m/s). This input is always available.
Select a velocity field defined by a Fluid Flow interface present in the model (if any).
For example, select Velocity field (spf) to use the velocity field defined by the Fluid
Properties node fp1 in a Single-Phase Flow, Laminar Flow interface with spf as the
Name.
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F C O N C E N T R A T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
429
Temperature
Select the source of the Temperature field T:
Select User defined to enter a value or an expression for the temperature (SI unit: K).
This input is always available.
If required, select a temperature defined by a Heat Transfer interface present in the
model (if any). For example, select Temperature (ht) to use the temperature defined
by the Heat Transfer in Fluids interface with the ht name.
Absolute Pressure
Select the source of the Absolute pressure p:
Select User defined to enter a value or an expression for the absolute pressure
(SI unit: Pa). This input is always available.
In addition, select a pressure defined by a Fluid Flow interface present in the model
(if any). For example, select Absolute pressure (spf) to use the pressure defined in a
Laminar Flow interface with spf as the Name.
Electric Potential
When the migration has been selected in the Transport Mechanisms section of the
interface, select the source of the Electric potential V:
Select User defined to enter a value or expression for the electric potential
(SI unit: V). This input is always available.
If required, select an electric potential defined by an AC/DC interface that is
present in the model (if any). For example, select Electric potential (ec) to use the
electric field defined by the Current Conservation node cucn1 in an Electric
Currents interface ec.
MATRIX PROPERTIES
Enter a value or expression for the Porosity, p (dimensionless), of the porous media.
In order use a porosity defined in a material; specify the material using the Porous
material list, and select From material from the Porosity list.
DENSITY
Use this section to define the mixture density, and to specify the molar masses of the
participating species.
430 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
Mixture Density
Select a way to define the density from the Mixture density listIdeal gas or User
defined:
For Ideal gas, the density is computed from the ideal gas law in the manner of:
pM
= ----------Rg T
Here M is the mean molar mass of the mixture and Rg is the universal gas constant.
The absolute pressure, p, and temperature, T, used corresponds to the ones defined
in the Model Inputs section.
For User defined enter a value or expression for the Mixture density .
Molar Mass
Enter a value or expression for the Molar mass Mw for each species. The default value
is 0.032 kg/mol, which is the molar mass of O2 gas.
DIFFUSION
Specify the species molecular and thermal diffusivities in nonporous media in the
manner described for the Transport Properties node.
To account for the effect of porosity in the diffusivities, select an Effective diffusivity
modelMillington and Quirk model, Bruggeman model, Tortuosity model, or No
correction. Using one of the first four models, the effective transport factor, fe, is
defined from the porosity and the fluid tortuosity factor in the manner of:
p
f e = ----F
(8-5)
For No correction, the effective transport factor is set to one.
1 3
For the Millington and Quirk model, the effective transport factor is F = p
For the Bruggeman model, the effective transport factor is F =
1 2
p
.
For the Tortuosity model, specify the tortuosity factor is F .
The species diffusivities and mobilities are automatically adjusted for porous media
transport using the effective transport factor.
MIGRATION IN ELECTRIC FIELD
This section is available when the Migration in electric field check box is selected for the
Transport of Concentrated Species interface.
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F C O N C E N T R A T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
431
Settings for the mobilities are needed for the Mixture-averaged and Ficks law diffusion
models. By default the mobility is set to be calculated based on the species diffusivities
(adjusted by the Effective diffusivity model in the Diffusion section) using the
Nernst-Einstein relation. To manually specify the mobilities, select User defined for the
mobility um,w (SI unit: smol/kg) and enter one value for each species.
Enter the Charge number zc (dimensionless, but requires a plus or minus sign) for each
species.
Specify the temperature (if you are using mobilities based or the Nernst-Einstein
relation) and electric field in the Model Inputs section.
Turbulent Mixing
Use this node to account for the turbulent mixing caused by the eddy diffusivity. An
example is when the specified velocity field corresponds to a RANS solution.
The Turbulent Mixing subnode is available from the context menu (right-click the
Transport Properties parent node) or from the Physics toolbar, Attributes menu. The
node defines the turbulent kinematic viscosity using a turbulent Schmidt number.
This feature is available if Convection is selected as a transport mechanism and if the
Diffusion model is Mixture-averaged or Ficks law.
TU R B U L E N T M I X I N G
Some physics interfaces provide the turbulent kinematic viscosity, and these appear as
options in the Turbulent kinematic viscosity T (SI unit: m2/s) list. The list always
contains the User defined option that makes it possible to enter any value or expression.
The default Turbulent Schmidt number ScT is 0.71 (dimensionless).
About Turbulent Mixing
Reaction
Use the Reaction node to define species source terms resulting from a single chemical
reaction. For turbulent flow, the Reaction node includes the Eddy-dissipation
turbulent-reactions model.
432 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
REACTION RATE
Select a Reaction rateAutomatic (the default), or User defined. Selecting Automatic the
laminar flow reaction rate is computed using the mass action law.
For User defined, input a custom expression or constants for the Reaction rate r.
Specify the reaction stoichiometry by entering values for the stoichiometric coefficients
(dimensionless) of each species. Enter negative values for reactants and positive values
for products.
RATE CONSTANTS
When the Use Arrhenius expressions check box is not selected, input custom expressions
or constants for the Forward rate constant kf and Reverse rate constant kr.
When the Use Arrhenius expressions check box is selected, enter values for the following
parameters of the forward and reverse reactions:
Forward frequency factor Af and Reverse frequency factor Ar (dimensionless)
Forward activation energy Ef and Reverse activation energy Er
Forward temperature exponent nf and Reverse temperature exponent nr
(dimensionless)
TU R B U L E N T F L OW
Note this section is only available when then licensed to the CFD Module (see http:/
/www.comsol.com/products/specifications/).
When the Turbulent-reaction model is set to None, laminar flow is assumed and the
reaction source terms are defined from the reaction stoichiometry and reaction rates
prescribed.
When the Turbulent-reaction model is set to Eddy-disspation, turbulent flow will be
accounted for in the reaction mass sources in the manner described in The Reaction
Source Term for Turbulent Flow. In this case, enter values for the Turbulent reaction
model parameters ED and ED (dimensionless).
The Eddy-dissipation model also requires an estimation of the turbulent mixing time of
the fluid flow turbulence. When a Fluid Flow interface defining it is present in the
model, it can be selected from the Turbulence time scale list. For example select
Turbulence time scale (spf/fp1) to use the time scale defined by the Fluid Properties node
fp1 in a Turbulent Flow, k- interface with the Name set to spf.
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F C O N C E N T R A T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
433
Reaction Sources
In order to account for consumption or production of species due to one or more
reactions, the Reaction Sources node adds source terms to the right-hand side of the
species transport equations.
REACTIONS
Add an expression for the reaction mass source, Ri, for each individual species present,
except for the one computed from the mass constraint (see Species). Enter a value or
expression in the field for the corresponding species.
Select the Mass transport to other phases check box if mass is leaving or entering the
fluid as a result of the reactions, for instance due to condensation or vaporization in a
porous matrix. In this case the mass source for the species calculated from the mass
constraint can also be specified. The net mass transfer corresponds to the sum of the
mass sources for all species.
R E A C T I N G VO L U M E
When specifying reaction sources for a species in porous media, the specified mass
source may have the basis of the total volume, or the pore volume. For nonporous
domains, the Reacting Volume setting has no impact.
For Total volume, the reaction mass source expressions are specified per unit volume
of the model domain.
For Pore volume, the reaction mass source expressions are specified per unit volume
pore space. In this case the reaction mass sources will be multiplied by the domain
porosity p (p equals unity for nonporous domains).
Initial Values
The Initial Values node adds initial values for the mass fractions that can serve as an
initial condition for a transient simulation, or as an initial guess for a nonlinear solver.
If required, add additional Initial Values nodes from the Physics toolbar.
INITIAL VALUES
The initial mass fractions can be specified using a number of quantities. Select the type
of input from the Mixture specification list. Select:
Mass fractions (the default) to enter mass fractions ( 0, 1 for example)
Mole fractions to enter mole fractions ( x 0, 1 for example)
434 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
Molar concentrations (SI unit: mol/m3) to enter molar concentrations ( c 0, 1 for
example)
Number densities (SI unit: 1/m3) to enter number densities ( n 0, 1 for example)
Densities (SI unit: kg/m3) to enter densities ( 0, 1 for example)
Enter a value or expression in the field for each species except for the one computed
from the mass constraint.
INITIAL MIXTURE DENSITY
When the selecting Molar concentrations, Number densities, or Densities are selected
from the Mixture specification list, the should also be specified. Select Ideal gas or User
defined from the Initial mixture density list.
For Ideal gas, also specify the Initial pressure p0 and the Initial Temperature T0. Note
that dependent variables solved for are evaluated to zero for initial values. When
solving for pressure or temperature together with the mass fractions, apply the initial
values from the corresponding interfaces here as well.
For User defined, input a custom for the Initial mixture density m0.
Mass Fraction
The Mass Fraction node adds boundary conditions for the species mass fractions. For
example, the following condition specifies the mass fraction of species i: i = i,0.
Set the mass fractions of all species except the one computed from the mass constraint.
This ensures that the sum of the mass fractions is equal to one (see Species). This node
is available for exterior and interior boundaries.
MASS FRACTION
Specify the mass fraction for each species individually. Select the check box for the
species to specify the mass fraction, and enter a value or expression in the
corresponding field. To use another boundary condition for a specific species, click to
clear the check box for the mass fraction of that species.
CONSTRAINT SETTINGS
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F C O N C E N T R A T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
435
Flux
The Flux node can be used to specify the total mass flux across a boundary. The total
inward flux is defined in the manner of:
n ( i u + j i ) = N 0, i
(8-6)
In Equation 8-6, N0,i (SI unit: Pas/m) is an arbitrary flux expression for species i and
can be a function of i, temperature, pressure or even electric potential. Set the mass
flux of all species except the one computed from the mass constraint. This ensures that
the sum of the mass fractions is equal to one (see Species). This node is available for
exterior boundaries. The Flux node can, for example, be used to describe a
heterogeneous reaction or a separation process occurring at the boundary.
INWARD FLUX
Specify the Inward flux for each species individually. Select the check box for the species
to prescribe a flux and enter a value or expression for the flux in the corresponding
field. To use another boundary condition for a specific species, click to clear the check
box for the flux of that species. Use a positive value for an inward flux.
Inflow
The Inflow node adds a boundary condition for an inflow boundary where one
condition for each species is specified. It is available for exterior boundaries. The
condition can be specified using the following quantities:
The mass fraction: = 0
The mole fraction: x = x0
The molar concentration: c = c0
The number density, which describes the number of particles per volume: n = n0
The density: = 0
A concentration quantity other than the mass fractions can only be used when all
species are defined, as in this boundary condition. The other quantities are
composition dependent and therefore unambiguous only when all species are defined.
For this reason the Mass Fraction node, which allows some species to use a different
boundary condition, only includes inputs for the mass fractions.
436 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
INFLOW
Select a Mixture specification:
Mass fractions (the default) to enter mass fractions ( 0, 1 for example)
Mole fractions to enter mole fractions ( x 0, 1 for example)
Molar concentrations (SI unit: mol/m3) to enter molar concentrations ( c 0, 1 for
example)
Number densities (SI unit: 1/m3) to enter number densities ( n 0, 1 for example)
Densities (SI unit: kg/m3) to enter densities ( 0, 1 for example)
Enter a value or expression in the field for each species except for the one computed
from the mass constraint.
CONSTRAINT SETTINGS
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
No Flux
The No Flux node, which is the default boundary condition available for exterior
boundaries, represents boundaries where no mass flows in or out; that is, the total flux
is zero:
n N = n ( i u + j i ) = 0
NO FLUX
Select Apply for all species to specify no flux for all species. Select Apply for to specify no
flux for each species individually. To use another boundary condition for a specific
species, click to clear the check box for that species.
Outflow
The Outflow node is the preferred boundary condition at outlets where the species are
to be transported out of the model domain. It is useful, for example, in mass transport
models where it is assumed that convection is the dominating effect driving the mass
flow through the outflow boundary. This node is available for exterior boundaries. The
boundary condition is applied to all species and corresponds to one of the following
equations depending on the selected diffusion model:
For the Mixture-Averaged Diffusion Model:
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F C O N C E N T R A T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
437
n D i i = 0
For the Ficks Law Diffusion Model:
f
n D i i = 0
Symmetry
The Symmetry node can be used to represent boundaries where the species
concentration is symmetric; that is, there is no mass flux in the normal direction across
the boundary:
n N = n ( i u + j i ) = 0
This boundary condition is identical to the No Flux node, but applies to all species and
cannot be applied to individual species. The Symmetry node is available for exterior
boundaries.
Flux Discontinuity
The Flux Discontinuity node represents a discontinuity in the mass flux across an interior
boundary:
n ( Nd Nu ) = N0
N = ( i u + j i )
where the value of N0 specifies the size of the flux jump evaluated from the down to
the upside of the boundary.
FLUX DISCONTINUITY
Specify the jump in species mass flux. Use a positive value for increasing flux when
going from the downside to the upside of the boundary. The boundary normal points
in the direction from the downside to the upside of an interior boundary and can be
plotted for visualization.
Select the Species check boxes to specify a flux discontinuity, and enter a value or
expression for the Flux discontinuity N0 (SI unit: kg/(m2s)) in the corresponding field,
N0, w1 for example. To use a different boundary condition for a specific species, click
to clear the check box for the flux discontinuity of that species.
438 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
Open Boundary
Use the Open Boundary node to set up mass transport across boundaries where both
convective inflow and outflow can occur. Use the node to specify an exterior species
composition on parts of the boundary where fluid flows into the domain. A condition
equivalent to the Outflow node applies to the parts of the boundary where fluid flows
out of the domain. The direction of the flow across the boundary is typically calculated
by a Fluid Flow interface and is entered as Model Inputs.
EXTERIOR COMPOSITION
Enter a value or expression for the species composition. Select:
Mass fractions (the default) to enter mass fractions (0, 1, for example)
Mole fractions to enter mole fractions (x0, 1, for example)
Molar concentrations (SI unit: mol/m3) to enter molar concentrations (c0, 1, for
example)
Number densities (SI unit: 1/m3) to enter number densities (n0, 1, for example)
and to describe the number of particles per volume n = n0
Densities (SI unit: kg/m3) to enter densities (0, 1, for example)
A concentration quantity other than the mass fractions can only be used
when all species are defined.
T H E TR A N S P O R T O F C O N C E N T R A T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
439
The Reacting Flow Multiphysics
Interfaces
The CFD Module includes predefined multiphysics interfaces that couples fluid with
mass transport and reactions.
Selecting a multiphysics interface under the Chemical Species Transport>Reacting Flow
branch of the Model Wizard or Add Physics windows, one of the Single-Phase Flow
interfaces (laminar or turbulent flow) and a Transport of Concentrated Species interface
are added to the Model Builder.
In addition, the Multiphysics node is added, which includes the multiphysics coupling
feature Reacting Flow. The Reacting Flow feature predefines and controls the couplings
between the separate interfaces in order to facilitate easy set up of models.
In this section:
The Reacting Laminar Flow Interface
The Reacting Turbulent Flow, k-e Interface
The Reacting Turbulent Flow, k-w Interface
The Reacting Turbulent Flow, SST Interface
The Reacting Turbulent Flow, Low Re k-e Interface
The Reacting Flow Coupling Feature
Physics Interface Features
The Reacting Laminar Flow Interface
The Reacting Laminar Flow multiphysics interface is used to simulate laminar flow
coupled to species transport in a gas or liquid.
It combines the Laminar Flow, and Transport of Concentrated Species interfaces. The
Reacting Flow multiphysics coupling, which is added automatically, couples fluid flow
and mass transport. The fluid flow can either be free flow, or flow in a porous medium.
The species transport supports both a mixture, where the concentrations are of
comparable order of magnitude, and low-concentration solutes in a solvent.
The interface can be used for stationary and time-dependent analysis in 2D, 2Daxi and
3D.
440 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
On the constituent physics interfaces:
The equations solved by the Laminar Flow interface are the Navier-Stokes equations for
conservation of momentum and the continuity equation for conservation of mass. A
Fluid Properties feature is active by default on the entire interface selection. A Fluid and
Matrix Properties feature can be added in order to model flow in porous media by
solving the Brinkman equations.
The Transport of Concentrated Species interface solves for an arbitrary number of mass
fractions. The species equations include transport by convection, diffusion and,
optionally, migration in an electric field.
The Reacting Turbulent Flow, k- Interface
The Reacting Turbulent Flow, k- multiphysics interface is used to simulate flow in the
turbulent regime coupled to species transport in a gas or liquid.
It combines the Turbulent Flow, k- and Transport of Concentrated Species interfaces.
The Reacting Flow multiphysics coupling, which is added automatically, couples the
fluid flow and mass transport and applies turbulence modeling for the mass transport.
The species transport supports both a mixture, where the concentrations are of
comparable order of magnitude, and low-concentration solutes in a solvent.
The interface can be used for stationary and time-dependent analysis in 2D, 2Daxi and
3D.
On the constituent physics interfaces:
The equations solved by the Turbulent Flow, k- interface are the Navier-Stokes
equations for conservation of momentum and the continuity equation for
conservation of mass. Turbulence effects are modeled using the standard two-equation
k-e model with realizability constraints. Flow close to walls is modeled using wall
functions.
The Transport of Concentrated Species interface solves for an arbitrary number of mass
fractions. The species equations include transport by convection, diffusion and,
optionally, migration in an electric field. Mass transport close to solid walls is modeled
using wall functions, and reactions within the turbulent flow are modeled using the
eddy dissipation model.
THE REACTING FLOW MULTIPHYSICS INTERFACES
441
The Reacting Turbulent Flow, k- Interface
The Reacting Turbulent Flow k- multiphysics interface is used to simulate flow in the
turbulent regime coupled to species transport in a gas or liquid.
It combines the Turbulent Flow k- and Transport of Concentrated Species interfaces.
The Reacting Flow multiphysics coupling, which is added automatically, couples fluid
flow and mass transport and applies turbulence modeling for the mass transport. The
species transport supports both a mixture, where the concentrations are of comparable
order of magnitude, and low-concentration solutes in a solvent.
The interface can be used for stationary and time-dependent analysis in 2D, 2Daxi and
3D.
On the constituent physics interfaces:
The equations solved by the Turbulent Flow k- interface are the Navier-Stokes
equations for conservation of momentum and the continuity equation for
conservation of mass. The fluid flow turbulence is modeled using the Wilcox revised
k- model with realizability constraints. Flow close to walls is modeled using wall
functions.
The Transport of Concentrated Species interface solves for an arbitrary number of mass
fractions. The species equations include transport by convection, diffusion and,
optionally, migration in an electric field. Mass transport close to solid walls is modeled
using wall functions, and reactions within the turbulent flow are modeled using the
eddy dissipation model.
The Reacting Turbulent Flow, SST Interface
The Reacting Turbulent Flow, SST multiphysics interface is used to simulate flow in the
turbulent regime coupled to species transport in a gas or liquid.
It combines the Turbulent Flow, SST and Transport of Concentrated Species interfaces.
The Reacting Flow multiphysics coupling, which is added automatically, couples fluid
flow and mass transport and applies turbulence modeling for the mass transport. The
species transport supports both a mixture, where the concentrations are of comparable
order of magnitude, and low-concentration solutes in a solvent.
The interface can be used for stationary and time-dependent analysis in 2D, 2Daxi and
3D.
On the constituent physics interfaces:
442 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
The equations solved by the Turbulent Flow, SST interface are the Navier-Stokes
equations for conservation of momentum and the continuity equation for
conservation of mass. The fluid flow turbulence is modeled using the SST model. The
SST model is a low-Reynolds number model which means that it resolves the velocity,
pressure, and mass fractions all the way down to the wall. For that reason this physics
interface is suited for studying mass transfer at high Schmidt numbers. The SST model
depends on the distance to the closest wall, and the interface therefore includes a wall
distance equation.
The Transport of Concentrated Species interface solves for an arbitrary number of mass
fractions. The species equations include transport by convection, diffusion and,
optionally, migration in an electric field. Reactions within the turbulent flow are
modeled using the eddy dissipation model.
The Reacting Turbulent Flow, Low Re k- Interface
The Reacting Turbulent Flow, Low Re k- multiphysics interface is used to simulate flow
in the turbulent regime coupled to species transport in a gas or liquid.
It combines the Turbulent Flow, Low Re k- and Transport of Concentrated Species
interfaces. The Reacting Flow multiphysics coupling, which is added automatically,
couples fluid flow and mass transport and applies turbulence modeling for the mass
transport. The species transport supports both a mixture, where the concentrations are
of comparable order of magnitude, and low-concentration solutes in a solvent.
The interface can be used for stationary and time-dependent analysis in 2D, 2Daxi and
3D.
On the constituent physics interfaces:
The equations solved by the Turbulent Flow, Low Re k- interface are the Navier-Stokes
equations for conservation of momentum and the continuity equation for
conservation of mass. The fluid flow turbulence is modeled using the AKN
low-Reynolds number k-e model. The low-Reynolds number model resolves the
velocity, pressure, and mass fractions all the way down to the wall. For that reason this
physics interface is suited for studying mass transfer at high Schmidt numbers. The
AKN model depends on the distance to the closest wall, and the interface therefore
includes a wall distance equation.
The Transport of Concentrated Species interface solves for an arbitrary number of mass
fractions. The species equations include transport by convection, diffusion and,
THE REACTING FLOW MULTIPHYSICS INTERFACES
443
optionally, migration in an electric field. Reactions within the turbulent flow are
modeled using the eddy dissipation model.
The Reacting Flow Coupling Feature
Use the Reacting Flow (
) multiphysics coupling to simulate mass transport and
reactions in a gas or liquid mixture where the fluid flow can be dependent on the
mixture composition.
DOMAIN LEVEL SYNCHRONIZATION
The Reacting Flow coupling synchronizes the features from a Single-Phase Flow
interface and a Transport of Concentrated Species interface. When added, the density
in the Single-Phase Flow interface is automatically synchronized to the one defined by
the Transport of Concentrated Species interface. Conversely, the velocity field used by
the latter interface is synchronized to the one computed in the former interface.
T H E S T E F A N VE L O C I T Y
The Reacting Flow coupling feature automatically couples mass transfer on boundaries
and applies a corresponding velocity contribution for the flow. Prescribing a net mass
boundary flux in the Transport of Concentrated Species interface, either using a Flux or
Mass Fraction feature, the Reacting Flow feature computes the The Stefan Velocity, and
applies this in Wall features using the same selection.
TU R B U L E N T M A S S TR A N S F E R
When a turbulence model is used, the Reacting Flow coupling applies turbulence
modeling for the mass transport in the following manners:
Turbulent mass transport is added, defined from the turbulent viscosity and a
turbulent Schmidt number (for more information, see Turbulent Mass Transport
Models).
Mass transport wall functions. When a turbulence model using wall functions is used
for the fluid flow, the Reacting Flow coupling automatically adds wall functions for
the mass transport on the same boundaries (for more information, see Mass
Transport Wall Functions).
SETTINGS
The Label is the default multiphysics coupling feature name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the coupling node.
Refer to such variables in expressions using the pattern <name>.<variable_name>. In
444 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
order to distinguish between variables belonging to different coupling nodes or physics
interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and underscores (_)
are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first multiphysics coupling feature in the model) is rf1.
DOMAIN SELECTION
The Reacting Flow coupling is automatically defined on the intersection of the
selections for the coupled interfaces.
The Selection list displays the domains where the coupling feature is active.
TU R B U L E N C E
When the flow interface uses a turbulence model, select an option from the Mass
transport turbulence model listKays-Crawford, High Schmidt Number, or User-defined
turbulent Schmidt number.
For User-defined turbulent Schmidt number, enter a Turbulent Schmidt number ScT
(dimensionless).
The turbulent mass transfer added to the mass fraction equations is defined as
T
N i, T = --------- i
Sc T
where T is the turbulent viscosity defined by the flow interface, and the turbulent
Schmidt number, ScT, depends on the Mass transport turbulence model used.
Note, since the Reacting Flow coupling feature adds the turbulent mass transport, it
should not be combined with a Turbulent Mixing feature (subfeature to Transport
Properties in the Transport of Concentrated Species interface).
COUPLED INTERFACES
This section defines the physics involved in the multiphysics coupling. The Fluid flow
and Species transport lists include all applicable physics interfaces.
THE REACTING FLOW MULTIPHYSICS INTERFACES
445
The default values depend on how this coupling node is created.
If it is added from the Physics ribbon (Windows users), Physics contextual toolbar
(Mac and Linux users), or context menu (all users), then the first physics interface
of each type in the component is selected as the default.
If it is added automatically when a multiphysics interface is chosen in the Model
Wizard or Add Physics window, then the two participating physics interfaces are
selected.
You can also select None from either list to uncouple the node from a physics interface.
If the physics interface is removed from the Model Builder, for example Laminar Flow is
deleted, then the Species transport list defaults to None as there is nothing to couple to.
If a physics interface is deleted and then added to the model again, then
in order to reestablish the coupling, you need to choose the physics
interface again from the Fluid flow or Species transport lists. This is
applicable to all multiphysics coupling nodes that would normally default
to the once present interface. See Multiphysics Modeling Approaches in
the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual.
Physics Interface Features
Physics nodes are available from the Physics ribbon toolbar (Windows users), Physics
context menu (Mac or Linux users), or right-click to access the context menu (all
users).
In general, to add a node, go to the Physics toolbar, no matter what
operating system you are using.
LAMINAR FLOW
The available physics features for The Laminar Flow interface are listed in the section
Domain, Boundary, Pair, and Point Nodes for Single-Phase Flow in the COMSOL
Multiphysics Reference Manual.
T U R B U L E N T F L O W , k-
The available physics features for The Turbulent Flow, k- interface are listed in the
section Domain, Boundary, Pair, and Point Nodes for Single-Phase Flow.
446 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
T U R B U L E N T F L O W , k-
The available physics features for The Turbulent Flow, k- interface are listed in the
section Domain, Boundary, Pair, and Point Nodes for Single-Phase Flow.
TU R B U L E N T F L O W, S S T
The available physics features for The Turbulent Flow, SST interface are listed in the
section Domain, Boundary, Pair, and Point Nodes for Single-Phase Flow.
T U R B U L E N T F L O W , L O W R E k-
The available physics features for The Turbulent Flow, Low Re k- interface are listed
in the section Domain, Boundary, Pair, and Point Nodes for Single-Phase Flow.
TR A N S P O R T O F C O N C E N T R A T E D S P E C I E S
The available physics features for The Transport of Concentrated Species interface are
listed in the section Domain, Boundary, and Pair Nodes for the Transport of
Concentrated Species Interface.
THE REACTING FLOW MULTIPHYSICS INTERFACES
447
The Reacting Flow in Porous Media
Interfaces
In this section:
The Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfcs) Interface
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Reacting Flow in Porous Media
(rfcs) Interface
The Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfds) Interface
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Reacting Flow in Porous Media
(rfds) Interface
The Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfcs) Interface
The Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfcs) interface is added to the Model
Builder after selecting Transport of Concentrated Species under the
Chemical Species Transport>Reacting Flow in Porous Media> branch when
adding a physics interface.
The Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfcs) interface (
) is used to study the flow and
chemical composition of a gas or liquid moving through the interstices of a porous
medium. The fluid can consist of a mixture of species where the individual
concentrations are of comparable order of magnitude. Apart from porous media
regions, the flow system may also include regions with free flow.
This physics interface solves for the velocity and pressure fields, together with an
arbitrary number of mass fractions. In porous media regions, the Brinkman equations
governing the fluid momentum are solved. In free-flow regions these are replaced by
the Navier-Stokes equations. The continuity equation governing the total
conservation of mass is solved in all regions. For the chemical species, the governing
transport equations include convection, diffusion and, optionally, migration in an
electric field.
When this physics interface is added, the following default nodes are also added in the
Model BuilderTransport Properties, No Flux, Wall, and Initial Values. Then, from the
Physics toolbar, add other nodes that implement, for example, boundary conditions.
448 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
You can also right-click Reacting Flow in Porous Media to select physics features from
the context menu.
SETTINGS
The Label is the default physics interface name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the physics
interface. Refer to such physics interface variables in expressions using the pattern
<name>.<variable_name>. In order to distinguish between variables belonging to
different physics interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and
underscores (_) are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first physics interface in the model) is rfcs.
SPECIES
This section is described for The Transport of Concentrated Species Interface.
PHYSICAL MODEL
Diffusion model is described under Transport Mechanisms for The Transport of
Concentrated Species Interface. Compressibility and Reference pressure level are
described under Physical Model for The Free and Porous Media Flow Interface.
DISCRETIZATION
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Discretization. These
settings are the same as for The Transport of Diluted Species Interface.
ADVANCED SETTINGS
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
Normally these settings do not need to be changed. From the Regularization list, select
On (the default) or Off.
When turned On, regularized mass fractions are calculated such that
0 w i, reg 1
Regularized mass fractions are used for the calculation of composition-dependent
material properties, such as the density.
DEPENDENT VA RIA BLES
The dependent variables (field variables) are the Velocity field u (SI unit: m/s), the
Pressure p (SI unit: Pa), and the Mass fractions w (dimensionless). Use the Add
THE REACTING FLOW IN POROUS MEDIA INTERFACES
449
concentration (
) and Remove concentration (
) buttons as needed. Add or remove
species in the model and also change the names of the dependent variables that
represent the species concentrations. Enter the Number of species.
The names can be changed but the names of fields and dependent variables must be
unique within a component.
More information on the applicability of the physics interface can be found in the
individual documentation for the Transport of Concentrated Species and Free and
Porous Media Flow interfaces. See Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the
Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfcs) Interface for links to the feature nodes, most of
which are shared with other physics interfaces.
Theory for the Reacting Flow in Porous Media Interfaces
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Reacting Flow in
Porous Media (rfcs) Interface
The Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfcs) Interface has these domain, boundary,
point, and pair nodes, listed in alphabetical order, available from the Physics ribbon
toolbar (Windows users), Physics context menu (Mac or Linux users), or right-click to
access the context menu (all users).
In general, to add a node, go to the Physics toolbar, no matter what
operating system you are using. Subnodes are available by clicking the
parent node and selecting it from the Attributes menu.
The following nodes are described in this section:
450 |
Diffusion
Reacting Boundary
Initial Values
Transport Properties
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
The following nodes are described for the Free and Porous Media Flow interface:
Forchheimer Drag
Porous Matrix Properties
Microfluidic Wall Conditions
Volume Force
The following nodes are described for the Transport of Concentrated Species interface:
Flux
Open Boundary
Inflow
Outflow
Mass Fraction
Reactions
No Flux
Symmetry
The following nodes are described for the Laminar Flow interface:
No Viscous Stress
Periodic Flow Condition
Flow Continuity
Pressure Point Constraint
Inlet
Symmetry
Outlet
Symmetry
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual see Table 2-3 for links
to common sections and Table 2-4 to common feature nodes. You can
also search for information: press F1 to open the Help window or Ctrl+F1
to open the Documentation window.
Transport Properties
Use the Transport Properties node to define the fluid properties, the thermal diffusion
coefficient, and the Maxwell-Stefan diffusivity matrix.
FLUID PROPERTIES
Fluid material, Density, and Dynamic viscosity are described for the Free and Porous
Media Flow interface, Fluid Properties node.
Molar mass is described in the Density section for the Transport of Concentrated
Species interface, Transport Properties node.
THE REACTING FLOW IN POROUS MEDIA INTERFACES
451
DIFFUSION
Maxwell-Stefan diffusivity matrix and Thermal diffusion coefficient are described for the
Transport of Concentrated Species interface, Transport Properties node.
Diffusion
Use the Diffusion node to define the mixture density, molar mass, Maxwell-Stefan
diffusivity matrix, and thermal diffusion coefficient.
DENSITY
Mixture density and Molar mass are described for the Transport of Concentrated Species
interface, Transport Properties node.
DIFFUSION
Maxwell-Stefan diffusivity matrix and Thermal diffusion coefficient are described for the
Transport of Concentrated Species interface, Transport Properties node.
Initial Values
The Initial Values node prescribes initial values for the mass fractions, velocity field, and
pressure that can serve as initial conditions for a transient simulation, or as an initial
guess for a nonlinear solver.
The initial mass fractions can be specified from the following quantities:
The mass fraction: = 0
The mole fraction: x = x0
The molar concentration: c = c0
The number density, which describes the number of particles per volume: n = n0
The density: = 0
DOMAIN SELECTION
If there are several types of domains with different initial values. These can be defined
adding multiple Initial Values nodes.
INITIAL VALUES
Select the type of input from the Mixture specification list. Select:
Mass fractions (the default) to enter mass fractions ( 0, 1 for example)
452 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
Mole fractions to enter mole fractions ( x 0, 1 for example)
Molar concentrations (SI unit: mol/m3) to enter molar concentrations ( n 0, 1 for
example)
Number densities (SI unit: 1/m3) to enter number densities ( n 0, 1 for example)
Densities (SI unit: kg/m3) to enter densities ( 0, 1 for example)
Enter a value or expression in the field for each species, except for the one computed
from the mass constraint.
Enter components for the initial value of Velocity field u (SI unit: m/s) and Pressure p
(SI unit: Pa).
Reacting Boundary
Use the Reacting Boundary node to define the boundary conditions for a reactive
surface over which there is a net mass flux. The flow velocity across the boundary is set
up automatically based on the sum of the species fluxes.
INWARD FLUX
Specify the Inward flux N0 (SI unit: kg/(m2s)) for each species individually by
selecting the check box for the species to prescribe a flux. Then enter a value or
expression for the flux in the corresponding field. Click to clear the check box for the
flux of a species to set the flux to zero. Use a positive value for an inward flux.
CONSTRAINT SETTINGS
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
The Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfds) Interface
The Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfds) interface is added to the Model
Builder after selecting Transport of Diluted Species under the Chemical
Species Transport>Reacting Flow in Porous Media> branch when adding a
physics interface.
The Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfds) interface (
) is used to study the flow and
chemical composition of a gas or liquid moving through the interstices of a porous
medium. The chemical species are assumed to be solutes, dissolved in a solvent of
THE REACTING FLOW IN POROUS MEDIA INTERFACES
453
significantly higher concentration. Apart from porous media regions, the flow system
may also include regions with free flow.
This physics interface solves for the velocity and pressure fields, together with an
arbitrary number of molar concentrations. In porous media regions, the Brinkman
equations governing the fluid momentum are solved. In free-flow regions these are
replaced by the Navier-Stokes equations. The continuity equation governing the total
conservation of mass is solved in all regions. For the chemical species, the governing
transport equations include convection, diffusion and, optionally, migration in an
electric field.
The physics interface combines the functionality of the Transport of Diluted Species
and the Free and Porous Media Flow interfaces.
When this physics interface is added, the following default nodes are also added in the
Model BuilderTransport Properties, No Flux, Wall, and Initial Values. Then, from the
Physics toolbar, add other nodes that implement, for example, boundary conditions.
You can also right-click Reacting Flow in Porous Media to select physics features from
the context menu.
SETTINGS
The Label is the default physics interface name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the physics
interface. Refer to such physics interface variables in expressions using the pattern
<name>.<variable_name>. In order to distinguish between variables belonging to
different physics interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and
underscores (_) are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first physics interface in the model) is rfds.
PHYSICAL MODEL
Compressibility, Neglect inertial term in free flow (Stokes flow), Swirl flow (2D
axisymmetric components), Neglect inertial term in porous media flow
(Stokes-Brinkman), and Reference pressure level are described for The Free and Porous
Media Flow Interface.
DEPENDENT VARIABLES
The dependent variables (field variables) are the Velocity field u (SI unit: m/s) and the
Pressure p (SI unit: Pa). The name can be changed but the names of fields and
dependent variables must be unique within a component.
454 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
Add or remove species in the model and also change the names of the dependent
variables that represent the species concentrations. Enter the Number of species. Use
) and Remove concentration (
) buttons as needed.
the Add concentration (
DISCRETIZATION
To display this section, click the Show button (
Transport of Diluted Species Interface.
) and select Discretization. The
More information on the applicability of the physics interface can be found in the
individual documentation for the Transport of Diluted Species and the Free and
Porous Media Flow interfaces. See Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the
Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfds) Interface for links to the feature nodes, most of
which are shared with other interfaces.
Theory for the Reacting Flow in Porous Media Interfaces
Domain, Boundary, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Reacting Flow in
Porous Media (rfds) Interface
The Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfds) Interface has these domain, boundary,
point, and pair nodes, listed in alphabetical order, available from the Physics ribbon
toolbar (Windows users), Physics context menu (Mac or Linux users), or right-click to
access the context menu (all users).
In general, to add a node, go to the Physics toolbar, no matter what
operating system you are using. Subnodes are available by clicking the
parent node and selecting it from the Attributes menu.
The Initial Values and Transport Properties nodes are described in this section. The
following are described for the Free and Porous Media Flow or Brinkman Equations
interface:
Line Mass Source
Point Mass Source
Microfluidic Wall Conditions
Porous Matrix Properties
Mass Source
Volume Force
THE REACTING FLOW IN POROUS MEDIA INTERFACES
455
The following nodes (listed in alphabetical order) are described for the Transport of
Diluted Species interface:
For the Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfds) interface, the Point Mass
Source node is available in two versions: one is used for the fluid flow (Fluid
Point Source) and one for the species (Species Point Source).
The same applies to the Line Mass Source node, one is used for the fluid
flow (Fluid Line Source) and one for the species (Species Line Source).
Concentration
Outflow
Flux
Periodic Condition
Inflow
Point Mass Source
Line Mass Source
Reactions
No Flux
Symmetry
Open Boundary
Thin Diffusion Barrier
The following nodes (listed in alphabetical order) are described for the Laminar Flow
interface:
No Viscous Stress
Periodic Flow Condition
Flow Continuity
Pressure Point Constraint
Inlet
Symmetry
Outlet
Wall
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual see Table 2-3 for links
to common sections and Table 2-4 to common feature nodes. You can
also search for information: press F1 to open the Help window or Ctrl+F1
to open the Documentation window.
Transport Properties
Use the Transport Properties node to define the fluid properties, including density and
dynamic viscosity. Also define the diffusion coefficient and, if applicable, the mobility
and the charge number.
456 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
FLUID PROPERTIES
Fluid material, Density, and Dynamic viscosity are described for the Free and Porous
Media Flow interface, Fluid Properties node.
DIFFUSION
If materials have been added to the Materials node, select an option from the Material
list. Otherwise the list defaults to None and values or expressions need to be entered in
the Diffusion coefficient Dc (SI unit: m2/s) field. The Diffusion coefficient is described
for the Transport of Diluted Species interface, Transport Properties.
Initial Values
Enter values or expressions for the Initial Values of variables and concentrations solved
for in the physics interface. These can serve as initial conditions for a time dependent
simulation or as an initial guess for a nonlinear solver.
DOMAIN SELECTION
If there are several types of domains, with subsequent and different initial values
occurring within them, it might be necessary to remove some of the domains from this
selection. These are then defined in an additional Initial Values node.
IN IT IA L VA LUES
Enter a value or expression for the Concentration c (SI unit: mol/m3). The default is
0 mol/m3. Enter the components for the initial value of Velocity field u (SI unit: m/
s) and for the Pressure p (SI unit: Pa).
THE REACTING FLOW IN POROUS MEDIA INTERFACES
457
Theory for the Transport of Diluted
Species Interface
The Transport of Diluted Species Interface provides a predefined modeling
environment for studying the evolution of chemical species transported by diffusion
and convection. The physics interface assumes that all species present are dilute; that
is, that their concentration is small compared to a solvent fluid or solid. As a rule of
thumb, a mixture containing several species can be considered dilute when the
concentration of the solvent is more than 90 mol%. Due to the dilution, mixture
properties such as density and viscosity can be assumed to correspond to those of the
solvent.
When studying mixtures that are not dilute, the mixture and transport properties
depend on the composition, and a different physics interface is recommended. See The
Transport of Concentrated Species Interface for more information.
Ficks law governs the diffusion of the solutes, dilute mixtures, or solutions, while the
phenomenon of ionic migration is sometimes referred to as electrokinetic flow. The
Transport of Diluted Species interface supports the simulations of chemical species
transport by convection, migration, and diffusion in 1D, 2D, and 3D as well as for
axisymmetric components in 1D and 2D.
In this section:
Convective Term Formulation
Mass Balance Equation
Crosswind Diffusion
Mass Sources for Species Transport
Danckwerts Inflow Boundary
Condition
Solving a Diffusion Equation Only
References
Mass Balance Equation
The default node attributed to the Transport of Diluted Species interface models
chemical species transport through diffusion and convection and solves the mass
conservation equation for one or more chemical species i:
458 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
c i
------- + ( D c i ) + u c i = R i
t
(8-7)
Equation 8-7 in its form above includes the transport mechanisms diffusion and
convection. If Migration in Electric Field is activated (only available in some add-on
products), the migration mechanism will be added to the equation as well. See more
details in the section Adding Transport Through Migration.
ci is the concentration of the species (SI unit: mol/m3)
Di denotes the diffusion coefficient (SI unit: m2/s)
Ri is a reaction rate expression for the species (SI unit: mol/(m3s))
u is the velocity vector (SI unit: m/s)
The flux vector N (SI unit: mol/(m2s)) is associated with the mass balance equation
above and used in boundary conditions and flux computations. For the case where the
diffusion and convection are the only transport mechanisms, the flux vector is defined
as
N i = D c + u c
(8-8)
If Migration in Electric Fields is activated, the flux vector is amended with the
migration term as shown in the section Adding Transport Through Migration.
The first term on the left side of Equation 8-7 corresponds to the accumulation (or
indeed consumption) of the species.
The second term accounts for the diffusive transport, accounting for the interaction
between the dilute species and the solvent. An input field for the diffusion coefficient
is available. Anisotropic diffusion coefficient tensor input is supported.
The third term on the left side of Equation 8-7 describes the convective transport due
to a velocity field u. This field can be expressed analytically or obtained from coupling
this physics interface to one that computes fluid flow, such as Laminar Flow.
On the right-hand side of the mass balance equation (Equation 8-7), Ri represents a
source or sink term, typically due to a chemical reaction or desorption on a porous
matrix. To specify Ri, another node must be added to the Transport of Diluted Species
interfacethe Reaction node, which has a field for specifying a reaction equation using
the variable names of all participating species.
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TR A N S P O R T O F D I L U T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
459
Equilibrium Reaction Theory
The feature Equilibrium Reaction is described in this section. A chemical equilibrium
reaction system is defined by the stoichiometry of the reaction and the relation
between the chemical activities of the chemical species participating in the reaction (the
equilibrium condition).
The kinetics of the reaction is so fast that the equilibrium condition is fulfilled at all
times in all space coordinates.
The equilibrium condition is commonly based on the stoichiometric coefficients,
i (dimensionless), of the reaction; the species activities of the reacting species
ai (dimensionless); and an equilibrium constant, Keq (1) according to:
ai i
i products
K eq = ---------------------------------
ai i
i reactants
where the species activities are defined as
ci
a i = c, i ------c a0
where ca0 (SI unit: mol/m3) is the standard molarity, and c,i (dimensionless) an
activity coefficient.
Defining the stoichiometric coefficients positive for products and negative for
reactants, the above equilibrium condition can also be written:
K eq =
ai
i
c,i is set to unity when the Equilibrium constant is selected on the
Settings window. For nonunity activity coefficients, a user defined
equilibrium condition can be used.
460 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
EQUILIBRIUM REACTIONS AND INFLOW BOUNDAR Y CONDITIONS
Contradictory constraints arise if the boundary conditions for concentrations or
activities are set so that the domain equilibrium condition is not fulfilled. Special
treatment is therefore needed at Inflow boundaries, where the concentrations are set
for all species in the mass transport interfaces.
One way of avoiding competing constraints on an inflow boundary is to add an
additional reaction coordinate degree of freedom, solved for to create a set of modified
inflow concentrations that fulfill the domain equilibrium condition. The reaction
coordinate gives rise to a concentration shift, which is the offset to the inflow
concentrations provided by the user. The shift for each species obeys the stoichiometry
of the reaction and the equilibrium expression. The modified inflow concentrations are
then used in the boundary conditions for the domain mass transport equations. The
resulting modified inflow concentrations can be seen as the stationary solution for a
batch reactor with the user inflow concentrations as initial concentrations. In addition,
the domain reaction rate degree of freedom of the equilibrium reaction is constrained
to zero on all Inflow boundaries.
EQUILIBRIUM REACTIONS AND CONCENTRATION BOUNDARY
CONDITIONS
No special treatment is made with regards to input concentration values of the
Concentration boundary node. Using this feature, you can explicitly set one or a set of
concentrations, and the equilibrium condition acts on the rest of the concentrations.
However, there is no solution to the problem if more concentrations than the number
of species minus the number of equilibrium reactions are set using this feature.
EQUILIBRIUM REACTIONS AND TIME-DEPENDENT SIMULATIONS
Spurious oscillations may occur in a time-dependent problem if the initial conditions
do not fulfill the equilibrium condition. Since equilibrium reactions are assumed to be
infinitely fast, the solution is to initialize the problem using an additional study step,
solving for a stationary problem with all non-equilibrium reaction rates set to zero.
Manual scaling of the reaction rate dependent variables is needed in this study step.
Convective Term Formulation
The default node attributed to The Transport of Diluted Species Interface assumes
chemical species transport through diffusion and convection and implements the mass
balance equation in Equation 8-7.
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TR A N S P O R T O F D I L U T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
461
There are two ways to present a mass balance where chemical species transport occurs
through diffusion and convection. These are the non-conservative and conservative
formulations of the convective term:
c
non-conservative: ----- + u c = ( D c ) + R
t
(8-9)
c
conservative: ----- + ( cu ) = ( D c ) + R
t
(8-10)
and each is treated slightly differently by the solver algorithms. In these equations D
(SI unit: m2/s) is the diffusion coefficient, R (SI unit: mol/(m3s)) is a production or
consumption rate expression, and u (SI unit: m/s) is the solvent velocity field. The
diffusion process can be anisotropic, in which case D is a tensor.
If the conservative formulation is expanded using the chain rule, then one of the terms
from the convection part, cu, would equal zero for an incompressible fluid and
would result in the non-conservative formulation above. This is in fact the default
formulation in this physics interface and ensures that nonphysical source terms do not
emerge from a solution for the flow field. To switch between the two formulations,
) and select Advanced Physics Options.
click the Show button (
Solving a Diffusion Equation Only
Remove the convection term from Equation 8-9 and Equation 8-10 by clearing the
Convection check box in the Transport Mechanisms section for The Transport of
Diluted Species Interface. The equation then becomes
----c= ( D c ) + R
t
Mass Sources for Species Transport
There are two types of mass sources in the Transport of Diluted Species interface: point
sources and line sources.
Note: The features below are only available in a limited set of add-on products. For a
detailed overview of which features are available in each product, visit
http://www.comsol.com/products/specifications/
462 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
PO IN T S OURCE
A point source is theoretically formed by assuming a mass injection/ejection, Q c (SI
3
unit: mol/(m s)), in a small volume V and then letting the size of the volume tend
to zero while keeping the total mass flux constant. Given a point source strength, q p,c
(SI unit: mol/s), this can be expressed as
lim
V 0
Qc = qp,c
(8-11)
An alternative way to form a point source is to assume that mass is injected/extracted
through the surface of a small object. Letting the object surface area tend to zero while
keeping the mass flux constant results in the same point source. For this alternative
approach, effects resulting from the physical objects volume need to be neglected.
The weak contribution
q p,c test ( c )
is added at a point in the geometry. As can be seen from Equation 8-11, Q c must tend
to plus or minus infinity as V tends to zero. This means that in theory the
concentration also tends to plus or minus infinity.
Observe that point refers to the physical representation of the source. A point source
can therefore only be added to points in 3D components and to points on the
symmetry axis in 2D axisymmetry components. Other geometrical points in 2D
components represent physical lines.
The finite element representation of Equation 8-11 corresponds to a finite
concentration at a point with the effect of the point source spread out over a region
around the point. The size of the region depends on the mesh and on the strength of
the source. A finer mesh gives a smaller affected region but also a more extreme
concentration value. It is important not to mesh too finely around a point source since
this can result in unphysical concentration values. It can also have a negative effect on
the condition number for the equation system.
LINE SOURCE
A line source can theoretically be formed by assuming a source of strength Q l,c (SI
3
unit: mol/(m s)), located within a tube with cross section S and then letting S tend
to zero while keeping the total mass flux per unit length constant. Given a line source
strength, q l,c (SI unit: mol/(ms)), this can be expressed as
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TR A N S P O R T O F D I L U T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
463
lim
S 0
Ql,c = ql,c
(8-12)
As in the point source case, an alternative approach is to assume that mass is injected/
extracted through the surface of a small object. This results in the same mass source,
but requires that effects resulting from the physical objects volume are neglected.
The weak contribution
q l,c test ( c )
is added on lines in 3D or at points in 2D (which represent cut-through views of lines).
Line sources can also be added on the axisymmetry line in 2D axisymmetry
components. It cannot, however, be added on geometrical lines in 2D since those
represent physical planes.
As with a point source, it is important not to mesh too finely around the line source.
For feature node information, see Line Mass Source and Point Mass
Source.
For the Reacting Flow in Porous Media, Diluted Species interface, which
is available with the CFD Module, Chemical Reaction Engineering
Module, or Batteries & Fuel Cells Module, these shared physics nodes are
renamed as follows:
The Line Mass Source node is available as two nodes, one for the fluid
flow (Fluid Line Source) and one for the species (Species Line Source).
The Point Mass Source node is available as two nodes, one for the fluid
flow (Fluid Point Source) and one for the species (Species Point Source).
Adding Transport Through Migration
Note: Migration is only available in a limited set of add-on products. For a detailed
overview of which features are available in each product, visit
http://www.comsol.com/products/specifications/
464 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
In addition to transport due to convection and diffusion, the Transport of Diluted
Species interface supports ionic species transport by migration. This is done by
selecting the Migration in Electric Field check box under the Transport Mechanisms
section for the physics interface. The mass balance then becomes:
c i
+ ( D i c i z i u m, i F c i V + c i u ) = R i
t
(8-13)
where
ci (SI unit: mol/ m3) denotes the concentration of species i
Di (SI unit: m2/s) is the diffusion coefficient of species i
u (SI unit: m/s) is the fluid velocity
F (SI unit: As/mol) refers to Faradays constant
V (SI unit: V) denotes the electric potential
zi (dimensionless) is the charge number of the ionic species, and
um,i (SI unit: mols/kg) is its ionic mobility
The velocity, u, can be a computed fluid velocity field from a Fluid Flow interface or
a specified function of the spatial variables x, y, and z. The potential can be provided
by an expression or by coupling the system of equations to a current balance, such as
the Electrostatics interface. Sometimes it is assumed to be a supporting electrolyte
present, which simplifies the transport equations. In that case, the modeled charged
species concentration is very low compared to other ions dissolved in the solution.
Thus, the species concentration does not influence the solutions conductivity and the
net charge within the fluid.
The Nernst-Einstein relation can in many cases be used for relating the species mobility
to the species diffusivity according to
Di
u m, i = -------RT
where R (SI unit: J/(molK)) is the molar gas constant and T (SI unit: K) is the
temperature.
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TR A N S P O R T O F D I L U T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
465
Note: In the Nernst-Planck Equations interface, the ionic species contribute to the
charge transfer in the solution. It includes an electroneutrality condition and also
computes the electric potential field in the electrolyte. For more information, see
Theory for the Nernst-Planck Equations Interface. This interface is included in the
Chemical Reaction Engineering Module.
Supporting Electrolytes
In electrolyte solutions, a salt can be added to provide a high electrolyte conductivity
and decrease the ohmic losses in a cell. These solutions are often called supporting
electrolytes, buffer solutions, or carrier electrolytes. The added species, a negative and
a positive ion pair, predominates over all other species. Therefore, the supporting
electrolyte species can be assumed to dominate the current transport in the solution.
In addition, the predominant supporting ions are usually selected so that they do not
react at the electrode surfaces since the high conductivity should be kept through the
process, that is, they should not be electro-active species. This also means that the
concentration gradients of the predominant species in a supporting electrolyte are
usually negligible.
Modeling and solving for a supporting electrolyte in the Electrostatics or Secondary
Current Distribution interfaces will give a potential distribution that drives the
migration in the Transport of Diluted Species Interface.
The current density vector is proportional to the sum of all species fluxes as expressed
by Faradays law:
i = F
zi Ni
i
The electroneutrality condition ensures that there is always a zero net charge at any
position in a dilute solution. Intuitively, this means that it is impossible to create a
current by manually pumping positive ions in one direction and negative ions in the
other. Therefore, the convective term is canceled out to yield the following expression
for the electrolyte current density, where j denotes the supporting species:
i = F
zj um, j F cj
2
466 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
(8-14)
Equation 8-14 is simply Ohms law for ionic current transport and can be simplified to
i =
(8-15)
where is the conductivity of the supporting electrolyte. A current balance gives the
current and potential density in the cell
i = 0
which, in combination with Equation 8-15, yields:
( ) = 0
(8-16)
Equation 8-16 can be easily solved using the Electrostatics or Secondary Current
Distribution interface and, when coupled to the Transport in Diluted Species interface,
the potential distribution shows up in the migration term.
Crosswind Diffusion
Transport of diluted species applications can often result in models with a very high
cell Pclt numberthat is, systems where convection or migration dominates over
diffusion. Streamline diffusion and crosswind diffusion are of paramount importance
to obtain physically reasonable results. The Transport of Diluted Species interface
provides two crosswind diffusion options using different formulations. Observe that
crosswind diffusion makes the equation system nonlinear even if the transport
equation is linear.
DO CARMO AND GALEO
This is the formulation described in Numerical Stabilization. The method reduces
over- and undershoots to a minimum, even for anisotropic meshes.
In some cases, the resulting nonlinear equation system can be difficult to converge.
This can happen when the cell Pclt number is very high and the model contains
many thin layers, such as contact discontinuities. You then have three options:
Refine the mesh, especially in regions with thin layers.
Use a nonlinear solver with a constant damping factor less than one.
Switch to the Codina crosswind formulation.
CODINA
The Codina formulation is described in Ref. 1. It adds diffusion strictly in the direction
orthogonal to the streamline direction. Compared to the do Carmo and Galeo
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TR A N S P O R T O F D I L U T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
467
formulation, the Codina formulation adds less diffusion but is not as efficient at
reducing over- and undershoots. It also does not work as well for anisotropic meshes.
The advantage is that the resulting nonlinear system is easier to converge and that
under-resolved gradients are less smeared out.
Danckwerts Inflow Boundary Condition
Constraining the composition to fixed values at an inlet to a reactor may sometimes
result in issues with unreasonably high reaction rates or singularities at the inlet
boundary. These problems may many times be mitigated by using a flux boundary
condition instead, based on the inlet concentrations and the fluid velocity. In chemical
engineering, this type of flux boundary condition is also known as a Danckwerts
condition.
Use the Danckwerts condition to specify inlet concentrations to domains where high
reaction rates are anticipated in the vicinity to the inlet (Ref. 2).
Given an inlet concentration ci,0, the Danckwerts inflow boundary condition reads
nNi = n (u ci,0)
See further:
References
1. R. Codina, A discontinuity-capturing crosswind-dissipation for the finite element
solution of the convection-diffusion equation, Computer Methods in Applied
Mechanics and Engineering, vol. 110, pp. 325342, 1993.
2. P.V. Danckwerts, Continuous flow systems: Distribution of residence times,
Chem. Eng. Sci., vol. 2, no. 1, 1953.
3. J.M. Coulson and J.F. Richardson, Chemical Engineering, vol. 2, 4th ed.,
Pergamon Press, Oxford, U.K., 1991.
4. J.M. Coulson and J.F. Richardson, Chemical Engineering, vol. 1, 4th ed.,
Pergamon Press, Oxford, U.K., 1991.
5. D.E Rosner, Transport Processes in Chemically Reacting Flow Systems, ISBN-13:
978-1483130262, Butterworth-Heinemann, 1986
468 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
6. D.M. Mackay, D.L. Freyberg, P.V. Roberts, and J.A. Cherry, A Natural Gradient
Experiment on Solute Transport in a Sand Aquifer: 1. Approach and Overview of
Plume Movement, Water Resourc. Res., vol. 22, no. 13, pp. 20172030, 1986.
7. C.W. Fetter, Contaminant Hydrogeology, Prentice Hall, 1999.
8. J. Bear and A. Verruijt, Modeling Groundwater Flow and Pollution, D. Reidel
Publishing, 1994.
9. J. Bear, Hydraulics of Groundwater, McGraw-Hill, 1979.
10. R.D. Burnett and E.O. Frind, An Alternating Direction Galerkin Technique for
Simulation of Groundwater Contaminant Transport in Three Dimensions: 2.
Dimensionality Effects, Water Resour. Res., vol. 23, no. 4, pp. 695705, 1987.
11. J. Bear, Dynamics of Fluids in Porous Media, Elsevier Scientific Publishing, 1972.
12. R.J. Millington and J.M. Quirk, Permeability of Porous Solids, Trans. Faraday
Soc., vol. 57, pp. 12001207, 1961.
13. I. Langmuir, Chemical Reactions at Low Temperatures, J. Amer. Chem. Soc.,
vol. 37, 1915.
14. R.B. Bird, W.E. Stewart, and E.N. Lightfoot, Transport Phenomena, 2nd ed.,
John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2007.
About Turbulent Mixing
A flow field obtained using a turbulence model does not explicitly contain the small
eddies. These unresolved eddies still have a profound effect on the species transport,
an effect known as turbulent mixing.
The Transport of Diluted Species interface supports the inclusion of turbulent mixing
via the gradient-diffusion hypothesis which adds the following contribution to the
diffusion coefficient tensor:
T
---------I
ScT
(8-17)
where T is the turbulent kinematic viscosity, ScT is the turbulent Schmidt number and
I is the unit matrix. While having the form of a diffusive contribution, Equation 8-17
really models a convective phenomenon and it can therefore only be applied along with
convection.
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TR A N S P O R T O F D I L U T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
469
The Schmidt number is typically given a value between 0.7 and 0.72, but it can range
between 0.3 and 1.3 (at least) depending on the application.
470 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
Theory for the Transport of
Concentrated Species Interface
The Transport of Concentrated Species Interface theory is described in this section:
Multicomponent Mass Transport
Multicomponent Diffusion: Mixture-Average Approximation
Multispecies Diffusion: Ficks Law Approximation
Multicomponent Thermal Diffusion
Turbulent Mixing
References for the Transport of Concentrated Species Interface
Multicomponent Mass Transport
Suppose a reacting flow consists of a mixture with i = 1, , Q species and j = 1, , N
reactions. Equation 8-1 then describes the mass transport for an individual species:
( i ) + ( i u ) = j i + R i
t
(8-18)
where, (SI unit: kg/m3) denotes the mixture density and u (SI unit: m/s) the mass
averaged velocity of the mixture. The remaining variables are specific for each of the
species, i, being described by the mass transfer equation:
i is the mass fraction (1)
ji (SI unit: kg/(m2s)) is the mass flux relative to the mass averaged velocity, and
Ri (SI unit: kg/ (m3s)) is the rate expression describing its production or
consumption.
The relative mass flux vector ji can include contributions due to molecular diffusion
and thermal diffusion.
Summation of the transport equations over all present species gives Equation 8-19 for
the conservation of mass
+ ( u ) = 0
t
(8-19)
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TR A N S P O R T O F C O N C E N T R A T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
471
assuming that
Q
i=1
i = 1 ,
ji = 0 ,
i=1
Ri =
i=1
Using the mass conservation equation, the species transport for an individual species,
i, is given by:
( ) + ( u ) i = j i + R i
t i
(8-20)
Q 1 of the species equations are independent and possible to solve for using
Equation 8-20. To compute the mass fraction of the remaining species, COMSOL
Multiphysics uses the fact that the sum of the mass fractions is equal to 1:
Q
1 = 1
(8-21)
i=2
Multicomponent Diffusion: Mixture-Average Approximation
The mixture-averaged diffusion model assumes that the relative mass flux due to
molecular diffusion is governed by a Ficks law type expression
m x i
j md, i = i D i --------xi
(8-22)
where i is the density and xi the mole fraction of species i. The diffusion hence
depends on a single concentration gradient and is proportional to a diffusion
m
coefficient D i . The diffusion coefficient describes the diffusion of species i relative to
the remaining mixture and is referred to as the mixture-averaged diffusion coefficient.
Equation 8-22 can be expressed in terms of mass fractions as
i m
m
j md, i = D i i + ----- D i M
M
using the definition of the species density and mole fraction
i
i = i , x i = ------- M
Mi
472 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
Assuming isobaric and isothermal conditions, the following expression for the
mixture-averaged diffusion coefficient can be derived from the Maxwell-Stefan
equations (Ref. 3):
1 i
m
D i = -------------------------xk
N
-------kiD
ik
The mixture-averaged diffusivities are explicitly given by be the multicomponent
Maxwell-Stefan diffusivities Dik. For low-density gas mixtures, the Dik components
can be replaced by the binary diffusivities for the species pairs present.
When using the mixture-averaged diffusion model, the species mass transport
equations are
( i ) + ( u ) i =
t
m
m M
T T
D i i + i D i --------- + D i -------- + R i
M
T
Apart from molecular diffusion, transport due to thermal diffusion is accounted for
T
through the third term within the parenthesis on the right-hand side. Here D i (SI
unit: kg/(ms)) is the thermal diffusion coefficient.
Multispecies Diffusion: Ficks Law Approximation
Using a Ficks law approximation, the relative mass flux due to molecular diffusion is
assumed to be governed by
F x i
j md, i = i D i, kl --------xi
(8-23)
where D i, kl represents a general diffusion matrix (SI unit: m2/s) describing the
diffusion of species i into the mixture. This form makes it possible to use any diffusion
coefficient, matrix, or empirical model based on Ficks law. For example, in situations
when the mass transport is not dominated by diffusion, an alternative is to use the
diffusion coefficients at infinite dilution,
F
D i, kk = D i
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TR A N S P O R T O F C O N C E N T R A T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
473
These coefficients are typically more readily available compared to the binary diffusion
diffusivities, especially for liquid mixtures.
When using multicomponent diffusivities based on Ficks law, as described above, or
when using mixture-averaged coefficients, the sum of the relative mass fluxes is not
strictly constrained to zero. To reduce the relative error it is preferable to choose the
species with the highest mass fraction as the species that is not solved for, and which is
instead computed from the mass conservation constraint in Equation 8-4. It is not
always necessary to know in advance which species has the highest mass fractionit is
possible to change the species solved for by the mass conservation constraint in
Equation 8-4.
When using the Ficks law approximation for the diffusion model, the species mass
transport equations are:
( i ) + ( u ) i =
t
F
F M
T T
D i i + i D i --------- + D i -------- + R i
M
T
Apart from molecular diffusion, transport due to thermal diffusion is accounted for
T
through the third term within the parenthesis on the right-hand side. Here D i is the
thermal diffusion coefficient (SI unit: kg/(ms)).
Multicomponent Thermal Diffusion
Mass diffusion in multicomponent mixtures due to temperature gradients is referred
to as the Soret effect. This occurs in mixtures with high temperature gradients and
large variations in molecular weight (or size) of the species. Typically species with high
molecular weight accumulate in lower temperature regions while the diffusion due to
the Soret effect transports species with low molecular weight to higher temperature
regions. In COMSOL Multiphysics, thermal diffusion is included by prescribing the
T
thermal diffusion coefficients D i . In a multicomponent mixture, the sum of the
thermal diffusion coefficients is zero:
Q
Di
i=1
474 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
= 0
Turbulent Mixing
A flow field obtained using a turbulence model does not explicitly contain the small
eddies. These unresolved eddies still have a profound effect on the species transport,
an effect known as turbulent mixing.
The Transport of Concentrated Species Interface supports the inclusion of turbulent
mixing via the gradient-diffusion hypothesis. In the case of mixture-averaged diffusion,
it adds the following contribution to the diffusion coefficient for each species:
T
--------Sc T
(8-24)
while for Ficks law diffusion, it adds the following contribution to the diffusion
coefficient tensor:
T
---------I
ScT
(8-25)
Here, T is the turbulent kinematic viscosity, ScT is the turbulent Schmidt number and
I is the unit matrix. While having the form of diffusive contributions, Equation 8-24
and Equation 8-25 really model a convective phenomenon and they can therefore only
be applied along with convection.
The Schmidt number is typically given a value between 0.7 and 0.72, but it can range
between 0.3 and 1.3 (at least) depending on the application.
References for the Transport of Concentrated Species Interface
1. C.F. Curtiss and R.B. Bird, Multicomponent Diffusion, Ind. Chem. Res., vol. 38
pp. 25152522, 1999.
2. R.B. Bird, W.E. Stewart, and E.N. Lightfoot, Transport Phenomena, 2nd ed., John
Wiley & Sons, 2005.
3. R.J. Kee, M.E. Coltrin, and P. Glarborg, Chemically Reacting Flow, John Wiley &
Sons, 2003.
4. A. Soulamani and M. Fortin, Finite Element Solution of Compressible Viscous
Flows Using Conservative Variables, Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and
Engineering, vol. 118, pp. 319350, 1994.
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TR A N S P O R T O F C O N C E N T R A T E D S P E C I E S I N T E R F A C E
475
Theory for the Reacting Flow
Interfaces
The following sections describe theory applicable for the Reacting Flow interfaces:
Pseudo Time Stepping for Mass Transport
The Stefan Velocity
The Chemical Reaction Rate
Turbulent Mass Transport Models
Mass Transport Wall Functions
Turbulent Reactions
The Reaction Source Term for Turbulent Flow
References for the Reacting Flow Interfaces
Pseudo Time Stepping for Mass Transport
In order to improve the solution robustness, pseudo time stepping can be used for the
Transport of Concentrated Species interface when solving a stationary model. Using
pseudo time stepping, a fictitious time derivative term:
i nojac ( i )
----------------------------------t
is added to the left-hand side of the mass fraction equations. Here is the fluid mixture
density, i is the mass fraction (dimensionless) of species i, and t is the pseudo time
step. Since inojac(i) is always zero, this term does not affect the final solution. It
does, however, affect the discrete equation system and effectively transforms a
nonlinear iteration into a time step of size t .
For a description of the pseudo time step term for the Navier-Stokes
equations and the pseudo time step see Pseudo Time Stepping for
Laminar Flow Models and Pseudo Time Stepping in the COMSOL
Multiphysics Reference Manual.
476 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
The Stefan Velocity
Heterogeneous reactions on fluid-solid surfaces can affect the mass, momentum, and
energy balances at the interface separating the fluid and the solid. On the reacting
surface, the production or destruction rate, rs,i (SI unit: mol/(m2s)), of a fluid phase
species is balanced by the total mass flux of the species. The mass balance for species i
on a boundary representing a fluid-solid interface is given by:
n [ i ( u + u d, i ) ] = r s,i M i
(8-26)
Here, n is the unit normal pointing out of the fluid domain, u is the mass averaged
velocity of the fluid mixture (SI unit: m/s), ud,i denotes the diffusion velocity
(SI unit: m/s), the velocity of species i relative to the mixture, and Mi is the species
molar mass (SI unit: kg/mol). Summing the mass balances at the surface, over all
species, results in an effective mixture velocity:
N
n u s =
rs,i Mi
(8-27)
i=1
referred to as the Stefan velocity, here denoted us. To reach Equation 8-27 the fact
that the sum of all mass fractions is one, and that the sum of all relative diffusive fluxes
is zero, was used.
Equation 8-27 implies that surface reactions result in a net flux between the surface
and the domain. A net flux in turn corresponds to an effective convective velocity at
the domain boundary; the Stefan velocity. It should be noted here that when solving
for mass transport inside a fluid domain, an outer boundary of the domain corresponds
to a position just outside of the a actual physical wall (on the fluid side). The domain
boundary does not coincide with the physical wall.
In most reacting flow models, the species mass fractions in the fluid domain are solved
for, without including the surface concentrations (mol per area) on exterior walls is not
included in the model. One reason for this is that the surface reaction rates are often
not known. In this case, surface reactions can be modeled either by applying a mass
flux or prescribing the mass fraction, or a combination of both, on fluid boundaries
adjacent to the reacting surface. The Stefan velocity on a fluid domain boundary is
then defined as the net mass flux resulting from the boundary conditions applied:
THEORY FOR THE REACTING FLOW INTERFACES
477
nD
n u s =
nN
n ( i us + Ni, d ) + n Nj, tot
i=1
(8-28)
j=1
Here, the first sum contains flux contributions resulting from boundary conditions
prescribing the mass fractions, and the second sum contains contributions from flux
conditions. The resulting Stefan velocity based on mass transport boundary conditions
is computed as:
n
N
D
n N i, d +
n N i, tot
i = 1
i=1
n u s = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------nD
1
i
(8-29)
Using a Reacting Flow interface, the Stefan velocity, defined in the manner of
Equation 8-29, is automatically computed and applied on boundaries corresponding
to walls by the Reacting Flow coupling feature. When a Mass Fraction or Flux feature
(in the Transport of Concentrated Species interface) is applied on a selection shared by
a Wall feature (in the Single-Phase Flow interface), the Stefan velocity is prescribed in
the wall normal direction on the shared selection.
The Chemical Reaction Rate
For laminar flow, or when the Turbulent-reaction model is set to None in a Reaction
feature (in Transport of Concentrated Species), the default (Automatic) reaction rate
used by the Reaction feature is based on the mass action law. Consider a general
reaction belonging to a set of j reactions and involving i species:
(8-30)
kj
aA + bB + ...
xX + yY + ...
kj
For such a reaction set, the reaction rates rj (SI unit: mol/(m3s)), can be described by
the mass action law:
f
rj = kj
i react
478 |
c i ij k j
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
i prod
c i ij
(8-31)
Here, k j and k j denote the forward and reverse rate constants, respectively. The
concentration of species i is denoted ci (SI unit: mol/m3). The stoichiometric
coefficients are denoted ij, and are defined to be negative for reactants and positive
for products. In practice, a reaction seldom involves more than two species colliding
in a reacting step, which means that a kinetic expression is usually of order 2 or less
(with respect to the involved concentrations).
In addition to the concentration dependence, the temperature dependence can be
included by using the predefined Arrhenius expressions for the rate constants:
n
E
k = AT exp -----------
R g T
Here, A denotes the frequency factor, n the temperature exponent, E the activation
energy (SI unit: J/mol) and Rg the gas constant, 8.314 J/(molK). The
pre-exponential factor, including the frequency factor A and the temperature factor
Tn, is given the units (m3/mol) 1/s, where is the order of the reaction (with
respect to the concentrations).
Turbulent Mass Transport Models
The RANS turbulence models included in the Reacting Flow interfaces are based on
averaging of the fluid flow equations. Applying a corresponding decomposition of the
fluctuating mass fraction, into mean and fluctuating parts, and averaging the mass
transport equations, additional unclosed terms are introduced in the equations. These
terms need to be modeled in order to close the set of equations. The most important
terms, containing the correlations of the velocity and mass fraction fluctuations,
referred to as the turbulent mass transport fluxes, are given by:
( u i )
--------------------------x i
Here the double primes denote Favre (density-based) fluctuations. In the case of
varying density flow, Favre averaging is favored over Reynolds averaging since it
reduces the number of unclosed terms and renders the equation on the same form as
the incompressible RANS equations. For more background on averaging, see
Turbulence Modeling.
The most common way to model this term is to use a gradient based assumption,
where the additional turbulent transport is related to the turbulent viscosity through a
turbulent Schmidt number ScT:
THEORY FOR THE REACTING FLOW INTERFACES
479
u i = --------- -------- = D T -------Sc T x i
x i
(8-32)
denotes the Favre averaged mass fraction which is the quantity solved for.
Here
Using a RANS turbulence model, the turbulent mass flux is defined from
Equation 8-32, and the equation solved for each species is:
)
) + (u
i =
(
t i
T
T T
M
i z i u m, i F V + R i
i Di
i +
-------- D i + ---------
+ D i -------- +
Sc T
M
T
where the molecular diffusion coefficient, Di, is given by the diffusion model
(Mixture-Average or Ficks Law).
KAYS-CRAWFORD
Assuming that the turbulent transport mechanisms of heat and mass processes are
analogous, the turbulent Schmidt number is defined by (Ref. 1):
0.3Pe T
1
Sc T = ---------------- + ------------------- ( 0.3Pe T ) 2 [ 1 e 1 ( 0.3Pe T
2Sc
Sc T
Sc T ) ]
where the Schmidt number at infinity is ScT = 0.85, and the turbulent Peclet number
is defined as the ratio of the turbulent to molecular viscosity times the Schmidt
number:
T
Pe T = ------ Sc
HIGH SCHMIDT NUMBER MODEL
In the case of high Schmidt numbers, which is typical for mass transport in liquids, the
mass transfer near walls can be significantly different than that for Schmidt numbers of
order unity. A diffusion layer near a solid wall, due to, for example, a reaction on the
wall, does not have the same properties as the (momentum) boundary layer. Most
importantly the diffusion layer thickness is significantly smaller than the boundary layer
thickness for high Schmidt numbers. In order to correctly capture the mass flux at the
wall, the wall resolution required is dictated by the diffusion layer rather than by the
boundary layer.
480 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
The High Schmidt number model is based on the model by Kubacki and Dick (Ref.
2) and is available when using the Low-Reynolds k- turbulence model or the SST
turbulence model. In this case the fluid flow is resolved all the way to the physical wall
and consequently, and species boundary equations are applied directly on the wall
(without using wall functions).
In the near wall region, where the species transport is limited by diffusion, the mass
diffusivity is modeled using an analytical function of the non-dimensional wall distance
due to Na and Hanratty (Ref. 3):
D T,w
m
------------ = b ( l * )
The non-dimensional wall distance applied, l * , corresponds to that defined by the
turbulence model. The value of the constants b and m are given in Table 8-1.
TABLE 8-1: NA AND HANRATTY PARAMETERS
SCHMIDT NUMBER
0.1 < Sc < 5
5 < Sc < 50
Sc > 50
m
-4
-4
7.310
5.310
-4
4.6310
3.38
Further out from the wall, where the mass transport is governed by the turbulent
transport, the transport is modeled using a turbulent Schmidt number of the form
(Ref. 2):
T
T
Sc T,c = 0.5882 + 0.228 ------ 0.0441 ------ [ 1 e 5.165 ( T ) ]
In order to combine the two descriptions, the blending function by Kader (Ref. 4) is
used:
T ( )
( 1 )
D T = ------------ e
+ D T,w e
Sc T,c
where
4
0.01 ( l * )
= ----------------------( 1 + 5l * )
THEORY FOR THE REACTING FLOW INTERFACES
481
Mass Transport Wall Functions
Analogous to the single-phase flow wall functions (see Wall Functions applied for the
Wall boundary condition), there is a theoretical gap between the solid wall and the
computational domain of the fluid. This gap is often ignored when the computational
geometry is drawn.
Assuming that the turbulent heat and mass transfer in the near-wall region are
analogous, the same type of wall functions used for the temperature (Ref. 8) is also
applicable for the mass transport. The mass transfer wall function is formulated as a
function of the molecular and turbulent Schmidt numbers of each species, instead of
the corresponding Prandtl numbers.
Assume that there is a mass fraction i,w just outside the wall and that it is in
equilibrium with the surface chemistry. The mass flux, for species i, between the wall
and a fluid with a mass fraction of i,f at the lift-off position is:
C 1 / 4 k 1 / 2 ( i, w i, f )
m wf = ---------------------------------------------------------- i+
where is the fluid density, C is a turbulence modeling constant, and k is the
turbulent kinetic energy. i+ is the dimensionless mass fraction given by (Ref. 8):
+ < +
for w
w1
+
Sc w
15Sc 2 / 3 500
----------
i+ =
+2
+ + < +
for w1
w
w2
Sc T
+ +
--------- ln w
+ +
for w2
w
where in turn
w C 1 / 2 k
+ = -----------------------------w
10 + = ----------- w1
Sc 1 / 3
+ = 10 10 ------- w2
Sc T
Sc = ---------------D i, m
Sc T
= 15Sc 2 / 3 --------- 1 + ln 1000 ---------
2 v
Sc T
v is the von Karman constant, and Di,m the mean species diffusion coefficient. The
latter corresponds directly to the mixture-averaged diffusion coefficient when using
482 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
the Mixture-average diffusion model. Using the Ficks law diffusion model, the mean
diffusion coefficient is computed as 1/Ntr(Di), where Di is the diffusion tensor and N
is the dimension of the model.
The computational result should be checked so that the distance between the
computational fluid domain and the wall, w, is almost everywhere small compared to
any geometrical quantity of interest. The distance w is available as a post processing
variable (delta_w) on boundaries.
Turbulent Reactions
In turbulent flow the reaction rate is significantly affected by the turbulence. Turbulent
fluctuations can increase the reaction rate due to the increased mixing, but it can also
quench it through removal of species or the heat required for ignition. The interaction
between the flow and the reactions can be quantified through the Damkhler number
Da:
T
Da = -----c
which compares the time scale of the largest turbulent flow structures (the integral
time scale), to the chemical time scale. In the limit of large Damkhler numbers
Da >> 1, the reactive time scale is significantly smaller than that of the turbulence. In
this regime the inner structure of a reaction zone is thin enough not to be affected by
turbulence. The reacting regions are, however, convected and wrinkled by the
turbulence. In this case the global reaction rate is proportional to the chemical reaction
rate times the surface of the reacting regions. In the limit of small Damkhler numbers
Da << 1, the chemical time scale is much larger than that of the turbulent flow. In this
case the global reaction rate is controlled by the chemistry, while the turbulence acts
by continuously mixing the species. This regime is referred to as a perfectly stirred
reactor.
MEAN VAL UE C LO SURE
A mean turbulent production rate can be obtained by directly applying the mean
concentrations and temperature in the kinetic reaction rate expressions:
R i = i M i r MVC,i
THEORY FOR THE REACTING FLOW INTERFACES
483
where i denotes the species stoichiometric coefficient, Mi the molar mass
(SI unit: kg/mol), and rMVC,i is the reaction rate from Equation 8-31 using mean
quantities.
This is referred to as mean value closure of the turbulent reaction rate, and corresponds
to keeping the first term in a Taylor series expansion of the turbulent reaction rate
following a Reynolds decomposition of the fluctuating variables (Ref. 5). The mean
value closure is directly applicable in the perfectly-stirred-reactor limit (Da << 1). In
this case the turbulence is able to mix the species in the sense of changing the mean
concentration, but the turbulent fluctuations do not affect the chemical reaction rate.
The mean value closure is also applicable in the limit of low turbulence levels since the
turbulent fluctuations tend to zero as the laminar flow regime is approached.
EDDY DISSIPATION MODEL
The eddy-dissipation model for the mean reaction rate originally developed by
Magnusson and Hjertager (Ref. 6) for non-premixed combustion. Using this reaction
model, the mean production rate of species i is defined as:
r
R i = i M i ------ min min ------------- ,
r Mr
T
------------- p M p
= i M i r ED,i
The model assumes that both the Reynolds and Damkhler numbers are sufficiently
high for the reaction rate to be limited by the turbulent mixing time-scale T. The
reaction can hence at most progress at the rate at which fresh reactants are mixed, at
the molecular level, by the turbulence present. Furthermore the reaction rate is limited
by the deficient reactant; the reactant with the lowest local concentration. When the
model parameter is finite, the existence of product species is also required for
reaction, modeling the activation energy required for reaction (ignition). For gaseous
non-premixed combustion the model parameters have been found to correspond to
(Ref. 6):
= 4 , = 0.5
For liquid reactions it is recommended that the model parameters are calibrated against
experimental or simulation data. Using a mix of the mean value closure and a modified
version of the eddy-dissipation model Bakker and Fasano (Ref. 7) found the following
parameter values
2 = 0.08 , 1 = 1 = 2 =
484 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
to give good results for a competitive reaction pair when compared with experimental
results.
A common approximation for the turbulence mixing time-scale T is T k (Ref.
5). Due to realizability constraints, a more accurate approximation is however
k
1
T = min ---, -----------------------
C 3 max
(8-33)
where in turn
1
max = --- S ij S ij
2
for 2D and
max =
2S ij S ij
-----------------3
for 3D and 2D axisymmetry. Equation 8-33 is directly applicable to the k- model.For
the k- and SST turbulence models, Equation 8-33 reads
1
1 - --------------------
,
T = min -------- * * 3 max
Equation 8-33 is used also for the low-Reynolds k- model even though k/ is not
actually the turbulence mixing time scale. To obtain a consistent turbulence mixing
time scale for low-Reynolds k-, k/ needs to be multiplied by a damping function that
goes to zero at solid walls. Ref. 5 does however notice that T is not a relevant time
scale close to walls since it is too small. The damping function is therefore neglected in
the eddy-dissipation model.
The Reaction Source Term for Turbulent Flow
For turbulent flow, or when the Turbulent-reaction model is set to Eddy-dissipation in
the Reaction feature (in Transport of Concentrated Species), the reaction source term
is computed as the minimum of the mean value closure and that from the eddy
dissipation model:
R i = i M i min r MVC,i, r EDC,i
THEORY FOR THE REACTING FLOW INTERFACES
485
This approach combines the regimes of the separate models. For fast reactions the
reaction rate is limited by the turbulent mixing. At the same time, in regions with low
turbulence levels, or low kinetic reactions rates, the latter limits the production rate.
References for the Reacting Flow Interfaces
1. W.M. Kays, Turbulent Prandtl NumberWhere Are We? ASME Journal of Heat
Transfer, vol. 116, pp. 284295, 1994.
2. S. Kubacki and E. Dick, Simulation of Impinging Mass Transfer at High Schmidt
Number with Algebraic Models, Progress in Computational Fluid Dynamics, vol.
11, no. 1, pp. 3041, 2011.
3. Y. Na and T.J. Hanratty, Limiting Behavior of Turbulent Scalar Transport Close to
the Wall, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, vol. 43, pp. 17491758, 2000.
4. B.A. Kader, Temperature and Concentration Profiles in Fully Turbulent Boundary
Layers, Int. J. of Heat and Mass Transfer, vol. 24, pp. 15411544, 1981.
5. T. Poinsot and D. Veynante, Theoretical and Numerical Combustion, 2nd. ed.,
R.T. Edwards, Philadelphia, 2005.
6. B.F. Magnussen and B.H. Hjertager, On Mathematical Modeling of Turbulent
Combustion with Special Emphasis on Soot Formation and Combustion, 16th Symp.
(Int.) on Combustion. Comb. Inst., Pittsburg, Pennsylvania, pp.719729, 1976.
7. A. Bakker and J.B. Fasano, Time Dependent, Turbulent Mixing and Chemical
Reactions in Stirred Tank, AIChE Symposium Series 299, vol. 90, pp. 7178, 1993.
8. D. Lacasse, . Turgeon, and D. Pelletier, On the Judicious Use of the k Model,
Wall Functions and Adaptivity, Int.J. of Thermal Sciences, vol. 43, pp. 925938,
2004.
486 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
Theory for the Reacting Flow in
Porous Media Interfaces
In this section:
Theory for the Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfcs) Interface
Theory for the Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfds) Interface
Theory for the Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfcs) Interface
The Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfcs) Interface solves for the mass fractions (wi)
of an arbitrary number of species, as well as for the flow field (u) and pressure (p).
DOMAIN EQUATIONS
The governing equations are basically the same as for the Transport of Concentrated
Species and the Free and Porous Media Flow interfaces, whereas this physics interface
adds the ability to apply correction factors to calculate effective mass transport
parameters in a porous domain. The effective mass transport parameters are treated the
same way as for the Reacting Flow in Porous Media, Diluted Species interface.
COMBINED BOUNDARY CONDITIONS
The combined boundary conditions for velocity and flux, for reactions occurring on a
boundary surface, are as follows.
Reactions occurring on a surface in contact with the fluid give rise to mass fluxes, and
if there is a net mass transport in or out of the fluid domain due to the reactions (for
example if a fluid condenses or evaporates) they impose a flow velocity at the surface.
Assigning the outward boundary normal as n and the inward mass flux for each species
over the boundary as ni (SI unit: kg/(m2s)), the flow velocity, u (SI unit: m/s) at the
boundary is coupled to the total mass flux of the species at the reacting surface in the
following way:
1
u n = --
ni n
(8-34)
where (SI unit: kg/m3) is the density of the fluid.
THEORY FOR THE REACTING FLOW IN POROUS MEDIA INTERFACES
487
Applying no slip conditions for the surface results in
1
u = --
ni n
(8-35)
This combination of boundary conditions can be applied using a Reacting Boundary
node.
Theory for the Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfds) Interface
The Reacting Flow in Porous Media (rfds) Interface equations are basically the same
as for the Transport of Diluted Species and the Free and Porous Media Flow interfaces,
the addition being the possibility to apply correction factors to calculate effective mass
transport parameters in a porous domain. The Effective Mass Transport Parameters in
Porous Media are discussed in this section.
E F F E C T I VE M A S S TR A N S P O R T P A R A M E T E R S I N PO R O U S M E D I A
The effective mass transport in a porous matrix is affected by the porosity of the porous
media as the matrix of solid material lowers the volume available for transport. The
tortuosity of the porous structure increases the transport length, and the species might
interact with the pore walls. Effective transport parameters for the diffusivities (Deff)
and mobilities (um,eff) are usually hard to measure. As an approximation, the
parameter values for a non-porous domain (D, um) can be used to calculate the
corresponding effective values by multiplying with a correction factor feff:
D eff = f eff D
u m, eff = f eff u m
(8-36)
A common way to calculate feff is to relate it to the porosity, , with the following
Bruggeman relation:
f eff =
32
(8-37)
The settings for applying effective species transport parameter corrections to a domain
are found under the Porous Matrix Properties node.
488 |
C H A P T E R 8 : C H E M I C A L S P E C I E S TR A N S P O R T I N T E R F A C E S
Thin-Film Flow Interfaces
The physics interfaces described in this section are found under the Thin-Film Flow
branch (
).
In this chapter
The Thin-Film Flow Interfaces
Theory for the Thin-Film Flow Interfaces
489
T he T hi n- Fi lm Fl ow In t erfaces
In this section:
The Thin-Film Flow, Shell Interface
The Thin-Film Flow, Domain Interface
The Thin-Film Flow, Edge Interface
Domain, Boundary, Edge, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Thin-Film Flow Branch
Interfaces
The physics interfaces found under the Thin-Film Flow branch (
) when adding a
physics interface describe momentum transport. These physics interfaces can be added
either singularly or in combination with other physics interfaces describing mass and
energy transfer. The thin-film flow interfaces are shown in Table 9-1.
TABLE 9-1: THE THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES DEFAULT SETTINGS
PHYSICS INTERFACE LABEL
NAME
SPACE DIMENSION
GEOMETRIC ENTITY LEVEL
Thin-Film Flow, Shell
tffs
3D
Boundaries
Thin-Film Flow, Edge
tffs
2D, 2D axisymmetric
Boundaries
Thin-Film Flow, Domain
tff
2D
Domains
Each of the physics interfaces can be configured to solve either the standard Reynolds
Equation (with a material or user-defined density specified at the absolute pressure), or
to solve the Modified Reynolds Equation, which should be used for gas flows. The
Modified Reynolds Equation assumes the ideal gas law and applies when gas pressure
changes in the flow itself result in significant density changes.
Theory for the Thin-Film Flow Interfaces
The Thin-Film Flow, Shell Interface
The Thin-Film Flow, Shell (tffs) interface (
), found under the Thin-Film Flow
branch (
) when adding a physics interface, is used to solve the Reynolds equation
or the modified Reynolds equation in a narrow channel that is represented by a surface
within the geometry. It is used for lubrication, elastohydrodynamics, or gas damping
simulations when the fluid channel is thin enough for the Reynolds equation or the
490 |
CHAPTER 9: THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
Modified Reynolds equation to apply. The physics interface is available for 3D
geometries.
This physics interface is defined in a boundary mode, which means that the boundary
level is the highest level for which this physics interface has equations and features; it
does not have any features or equations on the domain level. The boundary level
represents a reference surface on which the flow is solved. On one side of the boundary
level there is a wall and on the other a base surface, neither of which is represented in
the geometry. The wall and base surfaces are orientated with respect to the reference
surface normal as shown in Figure 9-1. Fluid flows in the gap between the wall and the
base.
Figure 9-1: Diagram illustrating the orientation of the wall and the base surfaces with
respect to the reference surface in the Thin-Film Flow interfaces. A vector from the
reference surface to the corresponding point on the wall always points in the nref
direction, where nref is the reference surface normal. Similarly a vector from the reference
surface to the corresponding point on the base points in the +nref direction. The height of
the wall above the reference surface (hw) and the height of the base below the reference
surface (hb) are also shown in the figure.
Using equations on the reference surface, the physics interface computes the pressure
in a narrow gap between the wall and the base. When modeling the flow, it is assumed
that the total gap height, h=hw+hb, is much smaller than the typical lateral dimension
L of the reference surface. The physics interface is used to model laminar flow in thin
gaps or channels. A lubricating oil between two rotating cylinders is an example of this.
When this physics interface is added, the following default nodes are also added in the
Model BuilderFluid-Film Properties, Border, and Initial Values. Then, from the Physics
toolbar, you can add other nodes that implement, for example, boundary conditions.
You can also right-click Thin-Film Flow, Shell to select physics features from the context
menu.
SETTINGS
The Label is the default physics interface name.
THE THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
491
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the physics
interface. Refer to such physics interface variables in expressions using the pattern
<name>.<variable_name>. In order to distinguish between variables belonging to
different physics interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and
underscores (_) are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first physics interface in the model) is tffs.
REFERENCE PRESSURE
Enter a Reference pressure level pref (SI unit: Pa). The default value is 1[atm]. This
pressure represents the ambient pressure and fluid loads are computed without
accounting for this pressure.
CAVITATION
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Show Advanced Physics
Options. Select the Cavitation check box to use when modeling bearings, for example.
Then enter a Cavitation transition width (SI unit: Pa). The default is 1 MPa.
Under normal operating conditions, the gases dissolved in the lubricant cause
cavitation in the diverging clearance between the journal and the bearing. This
happens because the pressure in the lubricant drops below the saturation pressure.
See theory for Cavitation for more information.
Note: Cavitation is only available in the Thin-Film Flow, Shell physics interface with a
CFD Module license. It is not available for the Thin-Film Damping boundary
condition, which can be added to the physics interfaces in the Structural Mechanics
area.
DEPENDENT VARIABLES
The dependent variable (field variable) is the Pressure pf. The name can be changed
but the names of fields and dependent variables must be unique within a component.
492 |
CHAPTER 9: THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
DISCRETIZATION
To display this section, click the Show button (
) and select Discretization.
Domain, Boundary, Edge, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Thin-Film
Flow Branch Interfaces
Theory for the Thin-Film Flow Interfaces
Journal Bearing: Application Library path CFD_Module/Thin-Film_Flow/
journal_bearing
Tilted Pad Thrust Bearing: Application Library path CFD_Module/
Thin-Film_Flow/tilted_pad_bearing
The Thin-Film Flow, Domain Interface
The Thin-Film Flow, Domain (tffs) interface (
), found under the Thin-Film Flow
branch (
) when adding a physics interface, is used to solve the Reynolds equation
or the modified Reynolds equation in a narrow channel that is represented by a domain
within the geometry. It is used for lubrication or gas damping simulations when the
fluid channel is thin enough for the Reynolds equation or the Modified Reynolds
equation to apply. The physics interface is available for 2D geometries.
When this physics interface is added, the following default nodes are also added in the
Model BuilderFluid-Film Properties, Border (the default boundary condition), and
Initial Values. Then, from the Physics toolbar, add other nodes that implement, for
example, boundary conditions. You can also right-click Thin-Film Flow, Domain to select
physics features from the context menu.
SETTINGS
The Label is the default physics interface name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the physics
interface. Refer to such physics interface variables in expressions using the pattern
<name>.<variable_name>. In order to distinguish between variables belonging to
different physics interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and
underscores (_) are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first physics interface in the model) is tff.
THE THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
493
The rest of the settings are the same as for The Thin-Film Flow, Shell Interface.
Domain, Boundary, Edge, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Thin-Film
Flow Branch Interfaces
Theory for the Thin-Film Flow Interfaces
The Thin-Film Flow, Edge Interface
The Thin-Film Flow, Edge (tff) interface (
) is used to solve the Reynolds equation or
the modified Reynolds equation in a narrow channel that is represented by an edge
within the geometry. It is used for lubrication, elastohydrodynamics, or gas damping
simulations when the fluid channel is thin enough for the Reynolds equation or the
Modified Reynolds equation to apply. The physics interface is for 2D and 2D
axisymmetric components.
The rest of the settings are the same as for The Thin-Film Flow, Shell Interface.
Domain, Boundary, Edge, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Thin-Film
Flow Branch Interfaces
Theory for the Thin-Film Flow Interfaces
494 |
CHAPTER 9: THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
Domain, Boundary, Edge, Point, and Pair Nodes for the Thin-Film
Flow Branch Interfaces
For the physics interfaces under the Thin-Film Flow branch, the following domain,
boundary, edge, point, and pair nodes (listed in alphabetical order) are described in
this section:
Border
Perforations
Fluid-Film Properties
Outlet
Initial Values
Symmetry
Inlet
Wall
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual see Table 2-3 for links
to common sections and Table 2-4 to common feature nodes. You can
also search for information: press F1 to open the Help window or Ctrl+F1
to open the Documentation window.
Fluid-Film Properties
Use the Fluid-Film Properties node to set the wall properties, base properties, fluid
properties, and the film flow model.
REFERENCE SURFACE PROPERTIES
In the Thin-Film Flow, Shell (tffs) and Thin-Film Flow, Edge (tffs) interfaces, the Reference
normal orientation setting allows you to reverse the direction of the reference surface
normal used by the physics interface. By default this is set to Same direction as geometry
normal. To reverse the direction, select Opposite direction to geometry normal.
In the Thin-Film Flow, Domain (tff) interface, the Reference surface normal orientation
setting allows you to set the direction of the reference normal so that it either points
out of or into the plane of the domain. By default this is set to Reference surface normal
points out of plane, such that the reference surface normal is given by {0,0,1}. Selecting
Reference surface normal points into plane sets the reference surface normal to {0,0,-1}.
WAL L P ROP E R T IE S
Enter a value or expression for the Height of wall above reference plane hw1 (SI unit: m).
The default is 10 m.
THE THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
495
By default the Additional wall displacement is User defined. Enter values or expressions
for uw (SI unit: m). The defaults are 0 m. Alternatively select a feature input (defined
by a separate physics interface) or None from the list.
When using a feature input to define an additional displacement based on the
movement of a structure, refer to Figure 9-1 to decide whether the additional
displacement should be added to the wall or the base.
If the reference normal points out of the structure for which the displacement is
provided, the structure should be considered to be the wall, and its displacement
should be added to the additional wall displacement.
If the reference normal points into the structure for which the displacement is
provided, the structure is the base and its displacement should be added to the
additional base displacement.To determine the reference normal orientation before
) on the Study toolbar (or
fully solving the model, click Show Default Solver (
right-click the Study 1 node and select Show Default Solver). Then expand the
Study 1>Solver Configurations>Solver 1 node, right-click the Dependent variables
sub-node and select Compute to Selected.
You can then add a 2D or 3D plot group with an Arrow Surface plot (in 3D) (
) or
), and use the Replace Expression (
) button to plot the
Reference surface normal.
Arrow Line plot (in 2D) (
Note that the orientation of the reference surface normal can be changed using the
Reference normal orientation setting in the Reference Surface Properties section.
Select a Wall velocity vw (SI unit: m/s).None (the default), Calculate from wall
displacement, or User defined. For User defined enter values or expressions for the
components of vw (SI unit: m/s). The defaults are 0 m/s.
BASE PROPERTIES
See Wall Properties above for details to help you decide whether the additional
displacement should be added to the wall or the base.
496 |
CHAPTER 9: THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
Enter a value or expression for the Height of base below reference plane hb1 (SI unit: m).
The default is 0 m.
By default Additional base displacement is User defined. Enter values or expressions for
ub (SI unit: m). The defaults are 0 m. Or select None from the list.
Select a Base velocity vb (SI unit: m/s)None (the default), Calculate from base
displacement, or User defined. For User defined enter values or expressions for the
components of vb (SI unit: m/s). The defaults are 0 m/s.
FLUID PROPERTIES
The default Dynamic viscosity (SI unit: Pas) is taken From material. For User defined
enter a different value or expression. The default is 0 Pas.
With the default options, the Density (SI unit: kg/m3) is taken From material. For
User defined enter a different value or expression. The default is 0 kg/m3. If the
Modified Reynolds Equation is being solved, the density is determined automatically by
the ideal gas law. If cavitation is enabled, the density is assumed to take the form
=c exp(pf) where pf is the fluid pressure, c is the density at the cavitation pressure,
and is the compressibility. (SI unit: 1/Pa). In this case enter the values for the Density
at cavitation pressure c (SI unit: Pa) and the Compressibility (SI unit: 1/Pa).
FILM FLOW MODEL
Select a Film flow modelNo-slip walls (the default), Slip at walls, User defined-relative
flow function, or User defined-general. The film flow model is used to compute the mean
fluid velocity as a function of the pressure gradient, the wall velocity, and the base
velocity. Within the gap the fluid velocity profile is a linear combination of the
Poiseuille and Couette velocity profiles.
Non Slip Walls
This flow model assumes no slip at both the wall and base surfaces. Thus the average
fluid velocity is computed by assuming that the fluid velocity at the wall and base is
equal to the wall and base velocity, respectively.
Slip at Walls
Use Slip at walls when slip occurs at the wall and/or the base. In this case the difference
between the wall or base velocity and the fluid velocity is proportional to the tangential
part of the of the normal stress tensor component. The slip length divided by the fluid
viscosity is the constant of proportionality in this relationship. The mean fluid velocity
is computed using this assumption, given the pressure gradient and the wall and base
velocities.
THE THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
497
Enter a Slip length, wall Lsw (SI unit: m). The default is 0.1 m. Select the Use different
slip length for base check box to enter a Slip length, base Lsb (SI unit: m). The default
is 0.1 m.
For the Modified Reynolds Equation it is possible to use the gas mean free path to specify
the slip length. Change the Type of Slip setting (which defaults to Slip Length with the
settings described above) to Mean free path and same accommodation coefficients or to
Mean free path and different accommodation coefficients.
For Mean free path and same accommodation coefficients enter a value for the Wall
and base accommodation coefficient (dimensionless). The default is 0.9.
For Mean free path and different accommodation coefficients enter values for the Wall
accommodation coefficient w (dimensionless, default 0.9) and the Base
accommodation coefficient b (dimensionless, default 0.9).
Select an option to define the Mean free pathCompute from material properties (the
default), User defined expression, or User defined with reference pressure.
For User defined expression enter an expression for the Mean free path (SI unit: m).
The default expression is ((70[nm])(1[atm]))/(tffs.ptot).
For User defined with reference pressure enter values for the Mean free path at
reference pressure 0 (SI unit: m; the default is 70 nm), and for the Mean free path
reference pressure p0 (SI unit: Pa; the default is 1 atm).
Rarefied-Total Accommodation (Modified Reynolds Equation Only)
The Rarefied-total accommodation option provides a rarefied gas model that assumes
total accommodation at the wall and the base. This model is accurate to within 5% over
the range 0<Kn<880 (here Kn is the Knudsen number, which is the ratio of the film
thickness to the mean free path). An empirical function, fitted to stationary solutions
of the Boltzmann equation, is used to define the Poiseuille component of the flow.
Select an option to define the Mean free pathCompute from material properties (the
default), User defined expression, or User defined with reference pressure.
For User defined expression enter an expression for the Mean free path (SI unit: m).
The default expression is ((70[nm])(1[atm]))/(tffs.ptot).
For User defined with reference pressure enter values for the Mean free path at
reference pressure 0 (SI unit: m; the default is 70 nm) and for the Mean free path
reference pressure p0 (SI unit: Pa; the default is 1 atm).
498 |
CHAPTER 9: THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
Select a Force model. Select:
Normal-pressure forces only (the default) to include only the normal pressure forces
in the model.
Couette (slide film) forces only to include only the shear forces generated from an
empirical model of the rarefied flow developed for pure Couette flows.
Shear and normal forces to include both the shear and pressure forces, combining the
other two force models.
Rarefied-General Accommodation (Modified Reynolds Equation Only)
The Rarefied-general accommodation option provides a rarefied gas model that assumes
the same accommodation coefficient, , at the wall and the base. This model is
accurate to within 1% over the ranges 0.7<<1 and 0.01<Kn<100 (here Kn is the
Knudsen number, which is the ratio of the film thickness to the mean free path). An
empirical function, fitted to stationary solutions of the Boltzmann equation, is used to
define the Poiseuille component of the flow.
Select an option to define the Mean free pathCompute from material properties (the
default), User defined expression, or User defined with reference pressure.
For User defined expression enter an expression for the Mean free path (SI unit: m).
The default expression is 70[nm]*1[atm]/tffs.ptot.
For User defined with reference pressure enter values for the Mean free path at
reference pressure 0 (SI unit: m, the default is 70 nm) and for the Mean free path
reference pressure p0 (SI unit: Pa, the default is 1 atm).
Select a Force model. Select:
Normal-pressure forces only (the default) to include only the normal pressure forces
in the model.
Couette (slide film) forces only to include only the shear forces generated from an
empirical model of the rarefied flow developed for pure Couette flows.
Shear and normal forces to include both the shear and pressure forces, combining the
other two force models.
User Defined-relative Flow Function
The User defined-relative flow function option enables user-defined models in which an
effective fluid viscosity is employed. The fluid viscosity is divided by an additional
factor Qch, which can be defined as an arbitrary expression in the GUI. It is also
possible to define the expressions for the fluid forces on the wall and on the base (these
are included as feature inputs in other physics interfaces).
THE THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
499
Enter values or expressions for:
Relative flow rate function Qch (dimensionless). The default is 0.
Fluid load on wall fw (SI unit: N/m2). The defaults are 0 N/m2.
Fluid load on base fb (SI unit: N/m2). The defaults are 0 N/m2.
User Defined - General
The User defined-general option allows for arbitrary flow models to be defined. Both
the Poiseuille and Couette terms in the mean velocity can be defined arbitrarily. It is
also possible to define the expressions for the fluid forces on the wall and on the base,
(these are included as feature inputs in other physics interfaces).
Enter values or expressions for:
Poiseuille mean fluid velocity coefficient vave,P (SI unit: m3s/kg). The default is
0 m3s/kg.
Couette mean fluid velocity component vave,C (SI unit: m/s). The defaults are 0 m/s.
Fluid load on wall fw (SI unit: N/m2). The defaults are 0 N/m2.
Fluid load on base fb (SI unit: N/m2). The defaults are 0 N/m2.
Arrow Line and Arrow Surface in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference
Manual
Border
Use the Border node to set a pressure condition at the border and the border flow type.
The Border flow condition is used to account for the pressure drop caused by the flow
converging into the gap, outside the thin layer. The acoustic elongation options does
this by adding additional thickness to the thin layer beyond the edge of the geometry
(assuming a pressure gradient in this layer equal to that at the boundary). The
Out-of-plane motion calculates the pressure gradient due to circulation of the fluid
caused by motion of the wall or base surfaces using a predefined model. Alternatively
the pressure gradient at the boundary can be specified using an arbitrary expression,
which allows for more sophisticated, user-defined models.
BORDER SETTINGS
Select a Border conditionZero pressure (the default), Pressure, or Border flow.
500 |
CHAPTER 9: THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
When the Cavitation check box is selected for the physics interface, Starvation is
available.
For Pressure enter a Pressure pf0 (SI unit: Pa) to define pf = pf0 on the boundary, edge,
or point. The default is 0 Pa. If the reference pressure pref, defined at the physics
interface level is 0, pf0 is the absolute pressure. Otherwise, pf0 is the relative pressure.
For Border flow select a Border flow typeAcoustic boundary condition-absolute
elongation, Acoustic boundary condition-relative elongation, Out-of-plane motion, or User
defined.
For Acoustic Boundary condition-absolute elongation enter a Border elongation L
(SI unit: m). The default is 0.1 m.
For Acoustic boundary condition-relative elongation enter a Relative border elongation
Lr (dimensionless). The default is 0.7.
For Out-of-plane motion enter the Model coefficients , , with defaults 0, 0, 1,
respectively. Also enter the Slip length, (SI unit: m). The default slip length uses
an if condition to set the slip length equal to that defined in the Fluid-Film
Properties node if a suitable Film flow model is selected. If the Slip length is not
defined in the Fluid-Film Properties node it defaults to 0.1m.
Note that the coefficients can be specified according to the results given in the paper
by Gallis and Torczynski (M. A. Gallis and J. R. Torczynski, An Improved
Reynolds-Equation Model for Gas Damping of Microbeam Motion, Journal of
Microelectromechanical Systems, vol. 13, pp. 653-659, 2004). The following
values are recommended:
THE THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
501
1 + 8,834 ----
h
= ---------------------------------
1 + 5,118 ----
h
0,634 + 1,572 ----
h
= ---------------------------------------------
1 + 0,537 ----
h
0,445 + 11,20 ----
h
= ---------------------------------------------
1 + 5,510 ----
h
where h is the gap height. The above equations are valid in the range 0/h1.
For User defined enter a Normal pressure gradient (SI unit: N/m3). The default is
pf/(0.1 m) N/m3.
For Starvation enter a value for the Fluid fraction 0 (dimensionless). The default is
0.6.
Perforations
Use the Perforations node for applications in MEMS devices, where the phenomenon
of squeezed film damping is important. A free hanging thin plate or the substrate often
has an array of etch holes that allow the gas in between to escape. The perforations
feature acts as a sink for gas that is proportional to both the ambient pressure and to
the pressure difference with respect to the ambient on the other side of the perforated
surface. The constant of proportionality is known as the admittance, Y, and can either
be defined directly or determined from the model due to Bao (M. Bao and H. Yang
Squeeze film air damping in MEMS, Sensors and Actuators A: Physical, vol. 136,
no. 1, 327, 2014). The ambient pressure (defined at the level of the parent physics
interface or Thin-Film Damping feature) is assumed to be the reference pressure
specified at the physics interface level.
Note that this feature applies only when the walls do not have tangential movement.
PERFORATIONS
Select a Perforation admittanceUser defined (the default) or Bao model.
For User defined, enter a value or expression for Y (SI unit: m2s/kg).
502 |
CHAPTER 9: THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
For Bao model, choose a Perforation shapeSquare (the default) or Circular. Then enter
the following as applicable:
Side length sh (SI unit: m).
Hole radius rh (SI unit: m).
Hole length lh (SI unit: m).
Hole density nh (SI unit: 1/m2).
Initial Values
The Initial Values node adds an initial value for the pressure that can serve as an initial
condition for a transient simulation or as an initial guess for a nonlinear solver. If more
than one set of initial values is required, add additional Initial Values nodes from the
Physics toolbar.
IN IT IA L VA LUES
Enter a value or an expression for the initial value of the Pressure pf (SI unit: Pa).
Inlet
Use the Inlet node to define an edge or point where fluid enters the gap.
INLET SETTINGS
Select an Inlet conditionZero pressure (the default), Pressure, or Normal inflow velocity.
When the Cavitation check box is selected for the physics interface (see Cavitation),
Starvation is also available.
For Zero pressure pf = 0 applies on the boundary, edge, or point.
For Pressure enter a Pressure pf0 (SI unit: Pa) to impose pf = pf0 on the boundary,
edge, or point. The default is 0 Pa. If the reference pressure pref, defined at the
physics interface level is 0, pf0 is the absolute pressure. Otherwise, pf0 is the relative
pressure.
For Normal inflow velocity enter a Normal inflow velocity U0 (SI unit: m/s). The
default is 0 m/s.
For Starvation enter a value for the Fluid fraction 0 (dimensionless). The default is
0.6.
THE THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
503
Outlet
The Outlet node defines an edge or point where fluid leaves the gap.
OUTLET SETTINGS
Select an Outlet condition Zero pressure (the default), Pressure, or Normal outflow
velocity.
When the Cavitation check box is selected for the physics interface (see Cavitation),
Starvation is also available.
For Zero pressure pf = 0 applies on the boundary, edge, or point.
For Pressure enter a Pressure pf0 (SI unit: Pa) to impose pf = pf0 on the boundary,
edge, or point. The default is 0 Pa. If the reference pressure pref, defined at the
physics interface level is 0, pf0 is the absolute pressure. Otherwise, pf0 is the relative
pressure.
For Normal outflow velocity enter a Normal outflow velocity U0 (SI unit: m/s). The
default is 0 m/s.
For Starvation enter a value for the Fluid fraction 0 (dimensionless). The default is
0.6.
Wall
The Wall node prevents fluid flow in the direction perpendicular to the boundary.
Symmetry
The Symmetry node sets the perpendicular component of the average velocity in the
gap to zero.
504 |
CHAPTER 9: THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
Theory for the Thin-Film Flow
Interfaces
The theory for the different versions of the Thin-Film Flow interfaces are described in
this section:
Thin-Film Flow
The Reynolds Equation
Flow Models
The Modified Reynolds EquationGas Flows
Flow Models for Rarefied Gases
Frequency Domain Formulation
Boundary Conditions
Cavitation
References for the Thin-Film Flow Interfaces
Thin-Film Flow
Figure 9-2 shows a typical configuration for the flow of fluid in a thin layer. The upper
boundary is referred to as the wall, and the lower boundary is referred to as the base.
Damping or lubrication forces operate on both surfaces.
In many cases the gap is sufficiently small for the flow in the thin film to be isothermal.
Usually the gap thickness, h, is much smaller than the lateral dimensions of the
geometry, L. If this is the case it is possible to neglect inertial effects in the fluid in
comparison to viscous effects (for MEMS devices this assumption is reasonable below
MHz frequencies). Additionally, the curvature of the reference surface can be ignored
when h/L1. Under these assumptions the Reynolds equation applies. For gas flows
under the same conditions it is possible to derive a modified form of the Reynolds
Equation, which uses the ideal gas law to eliminate the density from the equation
system. Such a modified Reynolds equation can even be adapted to model the flow of
rarefied gases.
Different terminology is used for thin-film flow in different fields of physics. In
tribology the term lubrication is frequently used, especially when the fluid is a liquid.
In resonant MEMS devices, flow in the thin layer of gas separating a device from the
THEORY FOR THE THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
505
substrate on which it is fabricated often provides significant damping. In this case
there is usually a distinction between squeezed-film damping, when the direction of
motion of the structure is predominantly perpendicular to the reference plane, and
slide-film damping for motion predominantly parallel to the reference plane.
Figure 9-2: An example illustrating a typical configuration for thin-film flow. A
reference surface with normal nref sits in a narrow gap between a wall and base. In
COMSOL the vector nref points into the base and out of the wall. The wall moves with a
displacement uwall and velocity vwall from its initial position. Similarly the base moves
from its initial position with displacement ubase and velocity vbase. The compression of the
fluid results in an excess pressure, pf, above the reference pressure, pref, and a fluid velocity
in the gap. At a point on the reference surface the average value of the fluid velocity along
a line perpendicular to the surface is given by the in plane vector vave. The motion of the
fluid results in forces on the wall (Fwall) and on the base (Fbase). The distance to the wall
above the reference surface is hw while the base resides a distance hb below the reference
surface. The total size of the gap is h=hw+hb. At a given time hw=hw1nref uwall and
hb=hb1nref uwall where hw1 and hb1 are the initial distances to the wall and base,
respectively.
The Reynolds Equation
The equations of fluid flow in thin films are usually formulated on a reference surface
in the Eulerian frame. Consider a cylinder, fixed with respect to a stationary reference
surface, as shown in Figure 9-3.
506 |
CHAPTER 9: THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
dA
Figure 9-3: Reference cylinder, fixed with respect to the stationary reference surface, in a
small gap between two surfaces (the wall and the base). The cylinder has outward normal,
nc. Its area, projected onto the reference surface, is dA.
The cylinder is fixed with respect to the reference surface, but its height can change
due to changes in the position of the base and the wall. Considering the flow in the
reference plane, the rate at which mass accumulates within the reference cylinder is
determined by the divergence of the mass flow field in the reference plane:
d ( h )
= t ( hv av )
dt
(9-1)
where h=hw+hb and the tangential velocity, vav represents the mean velocity of the
flow in the reference plane. Particular care must be taken with respect to the definition
of h. The above equation applies if h is measured with respect to a fixed point on the
reference surface as a function of time. The reference surface itself must be fixed in
space and obviously cannot deform as time progresses. Equations represented on the
reference surface are described as Eulerian, that is they are defined in a frame that is
fixed with respect to the motion of the fluid or of the body. Fluid flow problems are
usually formulated in the Eulerian frame and COMSOL adopts this convention in
most of its fluid flow interfaces. It is useful to note that the Eulerian frame is usually
THEORY FOR THE THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
507
called the spatial frame within the COMSOL interface. When a structure deforms in
COMSOL, the spatial frame changes shape.
The wall and the base can, and often do, move with respect to the reference surface.
The wall and base are usually the surfaces of mechanical components which are
deforming as a result of the pressure building up within the region of fluid flow. When
describing the physics of a deforming solid, it is often convenient to work in the
Lagrangian frame, which is fixed with respect to a small control volume of the solid.
As the solid deforms, the Lagrangian frame moves along with the material contained
within the control volume. Using the Lagrangian frame for describing structural
deformation means that changes in the local density and material orientation as a result
of the distortion of the control volume do not need to be accounted for by
complicated transformations. In COMSOL the Lagrangian frame, usually referred to
as the material frame, is used for describing structural deformations. When a structure
deforms in COMSOL, the material frame remains in the original configuration of the
structure, and the deformation is accounted for by the underlying equations.
Because of the mixed Eulerian-Lagrangian approach adopted within COMSOL,
particular care must be taken with the formulation of the Reynolds equations.
Typically it is not desirable to represent the geometry of the thin film itself directly,
because it is often much smaller than the other components in the model. The
equations apply on a single surface in the model, the reference surface. Since we do not
wish the reference surface to deform, the equations are added on the material frame
(even though this frame is normally used in a Lagrangian approach) and manual
transformations are added to the system to account for the fact that the structural
equations also exist on the material frame, and employ a truly Lagrangian approach.
The situation encountered when both the wall and the base undergo a displacement is
depicted in Figure 9-4. The Eulerian wall height changes from an initial value hw1 to
a final value hw. Similarly the base height changes from an initial value hb1 to hb.
508 |
CHAPTER 9: THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
uw
uwnref
uwthw1
wall
hw1
hw
reference
surface
X
nref
base
hb
hb1
ubthb1
ub
-ubnref
Figure 9-4: Diagram showing the displacement of the wall and the base with respect to the
reference surface, and the corresponding change in the height of the channel.
From the figure it is clear that:
h w = h w1 u w n ref u w t h w1
h b = h b1 + u b n ref u b t h b1
(9-2)
h = hw + hb
It should be noted that similar corrections should be applied to the velocity of the wall,
if it is computed from the structural displacement. That is the velocity should be
modified by a term proportional to its spatial gradient. This correction term, is
however, a second order term, and consequently it is usually negligible in practical
circumstances. It is neglected in the thin film flow interface.
Consequently, provided that the definitions of the wall and base height from
Equation 9-2 are used, the Reynolds equation takes the form:
( h )
+ t ( hv av ) = 0
t
(9-3)
THEORY FOR THE THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
509
The definition of the average flow velocity, vav, together with the forces that act on the
structure, remain to be specified.
Flow Models
The Navier stokes equations can be non-dimensionalized for a domain whose width
(h0) is much smaller than its lateral dimension(s) (l0) (see Ref. 1 for a detailed
discussion). When Re(h0/l0)2<<1, and terms of order (h0/l0)2 are neglected, the
Navier Stokes equations reduce to a modified form of the Stokes equation, which must
be considered in conjunction with the continuity relation.
wall
reference
surface
base
Figure 9-5: The coordinate system employed for the derivation of the average flow velocity.
The equations are most conveniently expressed by considering a local coordinate
system in which x and y are tangent to the plane of the reference surface, and z is
perpendicular to the surface, as illustrated in Figure 9-5. Using this coordinate system:
510 |
CHAPTER 9: THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
p f
v x'
=
x'
z' z'
p f
v y'
=
y'
z' z'
p
= 0
z'
Here pf is the pressure resulting from the fluid flow, is the fluid viscosity, and (vx,vy)
is the fluid velocity in the reference plane (which varies in the z direction).
These equations can be integrated directly, yielding the in-plane velocity distributions,
by making the assumption that the viscosity represents the mean viscosity through the
film thickness. The following equations are derived:
v x'
z' p f C
1x'
= --+ --------- z'
x'
2
z p f C 1x' z'
v x' = ------+ -------------- + C 2x'
2 x'
C 1y'
v y'
z' p f --------= --+
z'
y'
(9-4)
2
z p f C 1y' z'
v y' = ------+ -------------- + C 2y'
2 y'
(9-5)
The constants C1x, C2x, C1y, and C2y are determined by the boundary conditions.
Equation 9-4 shows that the flow is a linear combination of laminar Poiseuille and
Couette flows. The velocity profile is quadratic in form, as shown in Equation 9-5.
The average flow rate in the reference plane, vav , is given by:
hw
1
--h
v av
vx' dz'
( h w h w h b + h b ) p f h w h b
--------------------------------------------+ -------------------- C + C 2x'
1
6
x'
2
1x'
h
b
=
= --h
hw
2
2
( h w h w h b + h b ) p f h w h b
--------------------------------------------+ -------------------- C + C 2y'
--1- v y' dz'
6
y'
2
1y'
h
hb
The forces acting on the walls are determined by the normal component of the viscous
stress tensor, , at the walls (n - where n is the normal that points out of the fluid
domain). The viscous stress tensor takes the form:
THEORY FOR THE THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
511
p f + 2
v x' v y' v x' v z' v x'
+
x' y' x' z'
x'
T
= ( v + ( v ) ) pI = v x' + v y' p + 2 v y' v z + v y'
f
y' x'
y' z'
y'
v z'
v x' v z' v y' v z
+
+
p f + 2
z'
z' x' z' y'
Neglecting the gradient terms, which are of order h0/l0, results in the following form
for the stress tensor:
pf
v x'
z'
pf
v y'
z'
(9-6)
v x' v y'
pf
z' z'
The components of the stress tensor can be expressed in terms of the velocity and
pressure gradients using Equation 9-4. Note that the normals to both the wall and the
base are parallel to the z direction, to zeroth order in h0/l0. The forces acting on the
base and the wall are therefore given by:
h w p f C 1x'
------+ --------- x'
h b p f C 1x'
-----+ --------- x'
f w = h p C
w
1y'
------ f + -------- y'
pf
f b = h p C
1y'
-----b- f + -------- y'
pf
GENERAL SLIP BOUNDARY CONDITION
Assuming a slip length of Lsw at the wall and a slip length of Lsb at the base, the general
slip boundary conditions are given by:
512 |
CHAPTER 9: THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
L sb
v x'
b
v x' ( z' = h b ) v x' = --------- z'x' ( z' = h b ) = L sb
( z' = h b )
z'
L sb
v y'
b
v y' ( z' = h b ) v y' = --------- z'y' ( z' = h b ) = L sb
( z' = h b )
z'
v x'
L sw
w
v x' ( z' = h w ) v x' = ---------- z'x' ( z' = h w ) = L sw
( z' = h w )
z'
L sw
v y'
w
( z' = h w )
v y' ( z' = h w ) v y' = ---------- ( z' = h w ) = L sw
z'y'
z'
For non-identical slip lengths the constants C1x, C2x, C1y, and C2y take the following
values:
w
h b h w 2L sw h w + 2L sb h b p f
( v x' v x' )
C 1x' = ------------------------------------ -------------------------------------------------------------------------h + L sw + L sb
2 ( h + L sb + L sw )
x'
w
v x' ( h b + L sb ) + v x' ( h w + L sw )
C 2x' = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------h + L sw + L sb
2
h w ( h b + L sb ) + h b ( h w + L sw ) + 2h w h b ( L sw + L sb ) + 2hL sw L sb p f
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- x'
2 ( h + L sw + L sb )
w
h b h w 2L sw h w + 2L sb h b p f
( v y' v y' )
C 1y' = ------------------------------------ -------------------------------------------------------------------------h + L sw + L sb
2 ( h + L sw + L sb )
y'
w
v y' ( h b + L sb ) + v y' ( h w + L sw )
C 2y' = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------h + L sw + L sb
2
h w ( h b + L sb ) + h b ( h w + L sw ) + 2h w h b ( L sw + L sb ) + 2hL sw L sb p f
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2 ( h + L sw + L sb )
y'
The average flow rate becomes:
v av =
h ( v x' + v x' ) + 2 ( L sw v x' + L sb v x' ) h ( h 2 + 4h ( L sw + L sb ) + 12L sb L sw ) p f
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2 ( h + L sw + L sb )
12 ( h + L sw + L sb )
x'
h ( v y' + v y' ) + 2 ( L sw v y' + L sb v y' ) h ( h 2 + 4h ( L sw + L sb ) + 12L sb L sw ) p f
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12 ( h + L sw + L sb )
y'
2 ( h + L sw + L sb )
which can be expressed in vector notation as:
THEORY FOR THE THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
513
T
1
v av = -------------------------------------------- ( I n r n r ) ( ( h + 2L sw )v w + ( h + 2L sb )v b )
2 ( h + L sw + L sb )
2
h ( h + 4h ( L sw + L sb ) + 12L sb L sw )
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- t p f
12 ( h + L sw + L sb )
The above equation can be written on the form:
v av = v av, c v av, p t p f
(9-7)
where vav,c is a term associated with Couette flow and vav,p is a coefficient associated
with Poiseuille flow (see Table 9-2 below).
The forces acting on the two boundaries are given by:
b
h ( h + 2L sb ) p f
( v x' v x' )
-------------------------------------------+ ---------------------------------------2 ( h + L sw + L sb ) x' ( h + L sw + L sb )
fw =
h ( h + 2L sb ) p f
( v y' v y' )
-------------------------------------------+ ---------------------------------------2 ( h + L sw + L sb ) y' ( h + L sw + L sb )
pf
(9-8)
w
( v x'
b
v x' )
h ( h + 2L sw ) p f
-------------------------------------------+ ---------------------------------------2 ( h + L sw + L sb ) x' ( h + L sw + L sb )
fb =
( v y' v y' )
h ( h + 2L sw ) p f
-------------------------------------------+ ---------------------------------------2 ( h + L sw + L sb ) y' ( h + L sw + L sb )
pf
Note that the z direction corresponds to the nr direction. The x and y directions
correspond to the two tangent vectors in the plane. Using vector notation the forces
become:
h ( h + 2L sb )
T
b
w
f w = -------------------------------------------- t p f + ------------------------------------ ( I n r n r ) ( v v ) + p f n w
h + L sw + L sb
2 ( h + L sw + L sb )
h ( h + 2L sw )
T
w
b
f b = -------------------------------------------- t p f + ------------------------------------ ( I n r n r ) ( v v ) + p f n b
2 ( h + L sw + L sb )
h + L sw + L sb
In Equation 9-8 it is assumed that nw=nr and nb=nr. In COMSOL the accuracy of
the force terms is improved slightly over the usual approximation (which neglects the
514 |
CHAPTER 9: THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
slope of the wall and base as it is of order h0/l0) by using the following equations for
nw and nb:
nw = ( nr t hw )
nb = ( nr t hw )
These definitions are derived from Equation 9-4 and Equation 9-5 and include the
additional area that the pressure acts on as a result of the wall slope.
Once again, the force terms can be written on the form:
f w = f w, p t p f + f w, c
f b = f b, p t p f + f b, c
(9-9)
where fw,p is the Poiseuille coefficient for the force on the wall, and fw,c incorporates
the Couette and normal forces (due to the pressure) on the wall. Similarly, fb,p is the
Poiseuille coefficient for the force on the base, and fb,c incorporates the Couette and
normal forces (due to the pressure) on the base.
The cases of identical slip length and non-slip are limiting cases of the formulas derived
above. The main results are summarized in Table 9-2, where the constants defined in
Equation 9-7 and Equation 9-9 are used.
THEORY FOR THE THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
515
TABLE 9-2: EQUATION VARIABLES FOR VARIOUS FLOW MODELS
VARIABLE
DEFINITION
General Slip Flow Model
v av, c
T
1
------------------------------------------- ( I n r n r ) ( ( h + 2L sb )v w + ( h + 2L sw )v b )
2 ( h + L sw + L sb )
v av, p
h ( h + 4h ( L sw + L sb ) + 12L sb L sw )
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12 ( h + L sw + L sb )
T
----------------------------------- ( I nr nr ) ( vb vw ) + pf n
w
h + L sw + L sb
f w, c
f w, p
h ( h + 2L sb )
------------------------------------------2 ( h + L sw + L sb )
f b, c
----------------------------------- ( I nr nr ) ( vw vb ) + pf n
b
h + L sw + L sb
f b, p
h ( h + 2L sw )
------------------------------------------2 ( h + L sw + L sb )
Equal Slip Lengths Flow Model Lsw=Lsb=L
516 |
v av, c
T
1
--- ( I n r n r ) ( v w + v b )
2
v av, p
( h + 6L s h ) ( 12 )
f w, c
T
b
w
------------------( I nr nr ) ( v v ) + pf nw
h + 2L s
f w, p
h2
f b, c
T
w
b
------------------( I nr nr ) ( v v ) + pf nb
h + 2L s
f b, p
h2
CHAPTER 9: THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
TABLE 9-2: EQUATION VARIABLES FOR VARIOUS FLOW MODELS
VARIABLE
DEFINITION
Non-Slip Flow Model Lsw=Lsb=0
v av, c
v av, p
T
1
--- ( I n r n r ) ( v w + v b )
2
2
h ( 12 )
f w, c
T
--- ( I n r n r ) ( v b v w ) + p f n
w
h
f w, p
h2
f b, c
T
--- ( I n r n r ) ( v w v b ) + p f n
b
h
f b, p
h2
The Modified Reynolds EquationGas Flows
Thin-film gas flows are often isothermal, and in many cases the ideal gas law can be
assumed. Under these circumstances the ideal gas law can be written on the form:
RT 0
p A = -----------
Mn
where T0 is the (constant) temperature of the gas, Mn is the molar mass of the gas, and
R is the universal gas constant. Here the total gas pressure, pA = pref+pf, where pA is
the absolute pressure and pf is the pressure developed as a result of the flow.
Substituting this relation into Equation 9-3 and dividing through by the constant Mn/
RT0 results in a modified form of the Reynolds equation:
p
( h ) + t ( hp A v av ) p A ( v w t h w + v b t h b ) = 0
t A
(9-10)
This equation can be used to model isothermal flows of ideal gases. The average flow
rate and the forces acting on the bearings are computed in the same manner as for the
standard Reynolds equation.
SLIP BOUNDARY CONDITIONS FOR GASES
For a gas, the slip length is often expressed using the mean free path, , and a tangential
momentum accommodation coefficient, . For compatibility with the existing
THEORY FOR THE THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
517
literature on thin-film gas flow the following definition of the mean free path is used
by COMSOL Multiphysics in the Thin-Film Flow interfaces:
1
---
2RT 2
= --- ------------
p Mn
The slip length is then defined as:
2
L s = ------- -------------
2
Values for the tangential-momentum-accommodation coefficients for various gas
surface combinations are given in Ref. 2.
Flow Models for Rarefied Gases
For gases at low pressure, the ratio of the gas mean free path, , to the gap size (known
as the Knudsen number: Kn=/h) grows. For Knudsen numbers greater than 0.1 the
gas cannot be treated using the continuum Navier Stokes equations and the
Boltzmann equation must be solved instead.
At steady state, the solutions to the linearized Boltzmann equation for isothermal flow
in a narrow gap between parallel plates can be expressed as a combination of Poiseuille
and Couette flows. This is analogous to the solutions of the Navier-Stokes equations
in the limit of small h0/l0. Provided that the surfaces of the wall and base are identical
(which is normally the case in many practical applications) the Couette contribution to
the bulk fluid velocity is unchanged (it remains the mean of the wall and base velocities
for identical surfaces). The Poiseuille contribution to the flow is more complicated for
a rarefied gas. A practical approach, pioneered by Fukui and Kaneko (Ref. 3) is to solve
the linearized Boltzmann BGK equation over a range of Knudsen numbers and to
provide an empirical fit to the flow. This results in the following form for the average
velocity of the flow:
2
T
h
1
v av = --- ( I n r n r ) ( v w + v b ) ---------------- t p
2
12 eff
eff = ---------------------------------------Q ( Kn , w , b )
(9-11)
where Q(Kn, w , b) is a non-dimensional function of the Knudsen number (Kn) and
the tangential momentum accommodation coefficient at the wall (w) and base (b).
518 |
CHAPTER 9: THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
Q(Kn, w , b) is obtained by solving the linearized Boltzmann BGK equation for
steady Poiseuille flow with a range of Knudsen numbers and slip coefficients. This
approach assumes that stationary solutions of the Boltzmann equation apply inside the
gap, that is, that the flow can be treated as quasi-static.
Fukui and Kaneko provided data on Q(Kn, w , b) for the case where w=b (Ref.
4), which was subsequently fitted to different empirical formulas by Veijola and others
(Ref. 5). Note also that additional, more accurate, data is available in Ref. 6. Veijola
provided two empirical formulae, which apply under different circumstances with
various degrees of accuracy:
1 w=b=1 (available as the option Rarefied-Total Accommodation in COMSOL):
Q ( Kn ,1 , 1 ) = 1 + 9,638Kn
1,159
(accurate to within 5% in the range 0<Kn<880)
2 w=b= (available as the option Rarefied-General Accommodation in COMSOL):
6Q ( D, )
Q ( Kn , , ) = ------------------------D
D = -----------2Kn
0,17
1
D
0,64D
1 - -----------------------------------1,3 ( 1 ) - --------------------------------- -- + -----------Q ( D, ) = ---- + -------------------ln
+
+
+
4,1
1,83
0,72
6,4D
6 1,34 D
1 + 1,12D
D + 0,08D
(accurate to within 1% in the ranges D>0.01, 0.7<<1 and 0.01<Kn<100).
Both of these empirical models are available as flow models with the options listed.
Additionally a user-defined relative flow rate function can be defined (which could, for
example, be based on an interpolation function derived from the original data in Ref.
6). Data on the tangential momentum accommodation coefficients for various
gas-surface combinations is available in Ref. 2.
Various definitions of the mean free path are used in the literature,
frequently without explanation. For compatibility with the existing
literature on thin-film flow COMSOL employs the same mean free path
definition as Veijola and others.
In this definition the mean free path and Knudsen number are defined as:
1
---
2RT 2
= --- ------------
p Mn
1
---
2RT 2
Kn = ------- ------------
ph M n
(9-12)
THEORY FOR THE THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
519
where is the gas viscosity, p is the gas pressure, R is the molar gas constant, T is the
temperature, and Mn is the molar mass of the gas. Ref. 2 also employs this definition
of the mean free path.
In many applications the forces acting on the wall and base are important. The pressure
in the gas can be computed correctly by solving Equations 9-10 and 9-11. However,
this approach provides only the normal component of the traction acting on the wall
and base. To obtain the shear forces, the approach adopted by Torczynski and Gallis
(Ref. 7) is used. They produced an empirical expression for the shear force that has the
correct behavior in the free molecular flow and continuum limits as well as in the limits
for the accommodation coefficient. Torczynski and Gallis solve the problem of pure
Couette flow and derive an empirical function for the slip length that predicts the
correct forces for the flow in the gap in several limiting cases. Their empirical
expression for the slip length is given by:
d1
2 2
L s = ------------- ----------- 1 + ---------------------------------------------
1 + ( 2d Kn )
(9-13)
where d10.15 and d20.59. In principle d1 and d2 are variables themselves, but they
were found to be constant to within the accuracy of the DSMC experiments used to
derive their values.
The slip length in Equation 9-13 (which is used in COMSOL) differs
slightly from the equivalent expression in Ref. 7 as a result of a different
definition of the mean free path (Torczynski and Gallis mean free path is
different from Equation 9-12 by a factor of /2).
Equation 9-7 gives the following expressions for the shear forces on the wall and base
for pure Couette flow:
shear
b
w
= -------------------- ( I n r n r ) ( v v )
h + 2L s
shear
w
b
= -------------------- ( I n r n r ) ( v v )
h + 2L s
fw
fb
where Ls is taken from Equation 9-13.
A general flow incorporates both Poiseuille and Couette terms. Assuming that the
Poiseuille and Couette flows can be superposed, the forces become:
520 |
CHAPTER 9: THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
T
b
w
h
f w = --- t p + -------------------- ( I n r n r ) ( v v ) pn r
h + 2L s
2
T
h
w
b
f b = --- t p + -------------------- ( I n r n r ) ( v v ) + pn r
h + 2L s
2
(9-14)
here Ls is derived from Equation 9-13 and p is obtained by solving Equation 9-10
with Equation 9-11. Strictly speaking, Torczynski and Gallis result applies for Couette
flow only, and was derived for a more general variable-soft-sphere gas rather than for
the linearized BGK equations, using numerical simulations. From a practical
perspective, it seems likely that solutions of the linearized BGK equations would also
be fitted by these expressions, and in that case it should be possible to combine the
forces using superposition. In the absence of a detailed proof Equation 9-14 is not the
default option for the force model, but is available as an additional option.
Both Veijola and others (Ref. 5) and Cercignani and others (Ref. 5)
provided data for the relative flow rate Q(Kn, sw, sb) in specific cases
where the wall and base have different accommodation coefficients. Since
no details on how to compute the forces acting on the walls for highly
rarefied gases were published, these models are not currently supported
in COMSOL.
Frequency Domain Formulation
In the frequency domain it is necessary to make additional simplifications to the
equation system to produce a fully linearized equation set. In the general case the
physical quantities in the Reynolds and flow equations take the form:
h w = h w1 + h w
h b = h b1 + h b
p f = pf
v w = v w
h = h w1 + h b1 + h w + h b = h 1 + h
p A = p ref + pf
v b = v b
Here the tilde denotes a harmonically varying component. The components marked
with the subscript 1 are static offsets to the harmonic terms. In order to linearize the
equation system it is necessary to assume that the offsets are much larger than the
harmonic components. Practically speaking this means that the harmonically varying
pressures induced by the flow should be significantly smaller than the ambient
pressure, and the harmonic changes in the gap size due to the wall and base
THEORY FOR THE THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
521
displacements should be significantly less than the gap height itself. Given these
assumptions, the average fluid velocity can also be written on the form:
v av = v av
since in general both the Couette and Poiseuille terms vary harmonically to first order
accuracy.
Substituting these terms into the Reynolds equation gives:
( ( h + h ) ) + ( ( h + h )v ) = 0
av
1
t
1
t
In the frequency domain, the total absolute pressure pA is set to the reference pressure
pref, because the deviation from the reference pressure pf in this case represents an
oscillating component and cannot be added to the pressure in a straightforward
manner. is defined as a function of pA, and so contains no small harmonic
component. The products of small harmonic terms result in second order effects (at
double the frequency of interest) and can be neglected provided the harmonic terms
are much smaller than the static terms. The Reynolds equation therefore reduces to:
(h ) + t ( h 1 v av ) = 0
t
Note that:
( h )
= v b n ref v w n ref v b t h b1 v w t h w1
t
(9-15)
So the following result holds:
( v b n ref v w n ref v b t h b1 v w t h w1 ) + t ( h 1 v av ) = 0
(9-16)
Dropping the tildes leads to the form of the equation shown in the equation display:
( v b n ref v w n ref v w t h w1 v b t h b1 ) + t ( h 1 v av ) = 0
The modified Reynolds Equation takes the following form:
p
((
+ pf ) ( h 1 + h ) ) + t ( ( p ref + pf ) ( h 1 + h )v av ) = 0
t ref
Linearizing Equation 9-17 gives:
522 |
CHAPTER 9: THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
(9-17)
p ref
h h p
+ 1
+ t ( p ref h 1 v av ) = 0
t
t f
Equation 9-15 can be used to substitute for the time derivative of the harmonic
component of h in the above equation, yielding:
p ref ( v b n ref v w n ref v b t h b1 v w t h w1 )
+ h 1 (pf) + t ( p ref h 1 v av ) = 0
t
(9-18)
Dropping the tildes and using complex notation to express the time derivative of pf
gives:
p ref ( v b n ref v w n ref v w t h w1 v b t h b1 )
+ ih 1 p f + t ( p ref h 1 v av ) = 0
Equation 9-16 and Equation 9-18 are used as the basis for the frequency domain
formulation in the Thin-Film Flow interfaces. It is important to note that these
equations are independent of the harmonic components of the displacement, since
those terms lead to second order contributions to the frequency domain response (that
is they produce a response proportional to the square of the harmonic term, which
results in a signal at twice the driving frequency).
Since the frequency domain results do not depend on the variation in the
displacement, the additional displacement setting has no effect on the
solution in a frequency domain problem (unless the velocity is computed
from it by selecting Calculate from wall displacement or Calculate from base
displacement in the wall and base velocity settings respectively). This is
reflected in the equations given above (and in the equation display in the
physics interface) but can be non-intuitive, particularly when setting up a
model that is coupled with a structural analysis. If the velocity of both the
wall and the base is set to zero, then in the frequency domain there is no
response.
Boundary Conditions
Most of the boundary conditions either constrain the flow into the system by
prescribing a fluid velocity or constrain the pressure at the boundary. The border flow
condition is slightly more complex, requiring the gradient of the pressure to be set by
THEORY FOR THE THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
523
specifying the value of the gradient of the pressure in the anti-normal direction such
that:
n p =
The Border flow type selection list enables four ways that the value of can be specified:
The User defined option allows the value of to be directly entered as an expression
in a user input box. This allows for arbitrary normal pressure gradients.
The two Acoustic elongation options assume a linear gradient in the pressure outside
the domain away from the boundary. The pressure gradient is calculated by dividing
the pressure at the boundary, pf, by an elongation length, L. The elongation
length can either be specified as an absolute length or as a fraction of the domain
width, such that:
pf
n p = -------L
The Out-of-plane motion option calculates the pressure gradient at the boundary
using a model detailed in Ref. 8. This model is suitable for including the effects of
gas damping when fluid in a thin gap is subjected to out-of-plane motion of the
walls or base, e.g. when a microbeam is oscillating above an extended surface. When
this option is selected input boxes are provided to specify the required coefficients
(,,) and the pressure gradient is defined according to
p
12U
6 1 p
- 1 + ------ n p = -------------+ --------------2
2
h
h
h
where U is the out-of-plane velocity, is the slip length at the walls, and p is the
ambient pressure far from the boundary away from the domain.
Cavitation
Several types of cavitation can occur in thin film flow. When the flow pressure drops
below the ambient pressure, the air and other gases dissolved within the fluid are
released. This phenomenon, characteristic of loaded bearings, is known as cavitation
or gaseous cavitation. In some cases involving high frequency varying loads, as in
internal combustion engines, the pressure might drop below the fluid vapor pressure,
which is lower than the ambient pressure. In this case, bubbles are formed by rapid
evaporation/boiling of the fluid. This phenomenon is known as vapor cavitation.
COMSOLs cavitation feature is designed to address gaseous cavitation.
524 |
CHAPTER 9: THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
The implementation of the cavitation feature is based on a modified version of the
Elrods algorithm (Ref. 9 and Ref. 10). This algorithm automatically predicts film
rupture and reformation in bearings and offers a reasonable compromise between
accuracy and practicality. It is applicable to heavily and moderately loaded bearings but
it is not suitable when surface tension plays an important role.
Elrod and Adams algorithm is based on the JFO cavitation theory, a widely accepted
and adopted theory developed by Jakobson (Ref. 11), Floberg (Ref. 12 and Ref. 13),
and Olsson (Ref. 14). The JFO theory divides the flow in two regions:
A full film region where the pressure varies but is limited from below by the
cavitation pressure.
A cavitation region where only part of the volume is occupied by the fluid. Because
of the presence of the gas in the void fraction, the pressure in this region is assumed
to be constant and equal to the cavitation pressure.
Elrod and Adams derived a general form of the Reynolds equation, Equation 9-1, by
introducing a switch function, g, equal to 1 in the full film region and 0 in the
cavitation region. This switch function allows for solving a single equation for both the
full film and the cavitation region and leads to a modified version of Equation 9-7:
v av = v av, c gv av, p tp f
where the second and third terms on the LHS correspond to the average Couette and
average Poiseuille velocities, respectively. This switch function sets average Poiseuille
velocity is set to zero in the cavitation region.
Because the average Poiseuille velocity is set to zero in the cavitation
region, the density needs to be a function of the pressure variable and is
defined as
= c e
p f
where is the compressibility and c is the density at the cavitation
pressure. A density that is not pressure dependent would lead to empty
equations in the cavitation region since the pressure variable pf would no
longer present in the governing equations.
A variable can be defined, given by:
THEORY FOR THE THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
525
= ----c
In the cavitation region (<1) represents the fractional film content.
NOTE ABOUT RESULTS POSTPROCESSING
While the pressure is constant and equal to the cavitation pressure in the cavitation
region, the computed pressure is negative in this region. The value of this negative
pressure can be physically be interpreted as the volume fraction of fluid in the
cavitation region. The actual or physical pressure, available in the postprocessing
section as tffs.p, is equal to the computed pressure in the full film region ( 1) and
equal to the cavitation pressure in the cavitation region ( < 1).
References for the Thin-Film Flow Interfaces
1. B.J. Hamrock, S.R. Schmid and B.O. Jacobson, Fundamentals of Fluid Film
Lubrication, Marcel Dekker, 2004.
2. F. Sharipov, Data on the Velocity Slip and Temperature Jump on a Gas-Solid
Interface, J. Phys. Chem. Ref. Data, vol. 40, no. 2, 023101, 2011.
3. S. Fukui and R. Kaneko, Analysis of Ultra-Thin Gas Film Lubrication Based on
Linearized Boltzmann Equation: First ReportDerivation of a Generalized
Lubrication Equation Including Thermal Creep Flow, J. Tribology, vol. 110, no. 2,
pp. 253261, 1988.
4. S. Fukui and R. Kaneko, A Database for Interpolation of Poiseuille Flow Rates for
High Knudsen Number Lubrication, Transactions of the ASME, vol. 112, pp. 78
83, 1990.
5. T. Veijola, H. Kuisma, and J. Lahdenper, The Influence of Gas-surface Interaction
on Gas Film Damping in a Silicon Accelerometer, Sensors and Actuators, vol. A 66,
pp. 8392, 1998.
6. C. Cercignani, Maria Lampis, and Silvia Lorenzani Variational Approach to Gas
Flows in Microchannels, Physics of Fluids, vol. 16, no. 9, 2004.
7. J.R. Torczynski and M.A. Gallis, DSMC-Based Shear-Stress/Velocity-Slip
Boundary Condition for Navier-Stokes Couette-Flow Simulations, 27th
International Symposium on Rarefied Gas Dynamics (2010), AIP Conf. Proc. vol.
1333, pp. 802807, 2011.
526 |
CHAPTER 9: THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
8. M. A. Gallis and J. R. Torczynski, An Improved Reynolds-Equation Model for Gas
Damping of Microbeam Motion, Journal of Microelectromechanical Systems, vol.
13, pp. 653-659, 2004.
9. H. G.Elrod, A Cavitation Algorithm, J. Lubrication Technology, vol. 103, no. 3,
350354, 1981.
10. H. G. Elrod and M. L. Adams, A computer program for cavitation and starvation
problems, Cavitation and related phenomena in lubrication, Proceedings of the
1st LeedsLyon Symposium on Tribology, University of Leeds, UK, 1974.
11. B. Jacobson and L. Floberg, The finite journal bearing considering vaporization,
Transactions of Chalmers University Technology, Gteborg, Sweden, vol. 190, 1
119, 1957.
12. L. Floberg, On journal bearing lubrication considering the tensile strength of the
liquid lubricant, Transactions of the Machine Elements Division, Lund Technical
University, Lund, Sweden, pp. 126, 1973.
13. L. Floberg, Cavitation boundary conditions with regard to the number of
streamers and tensile strength of the liquid, Cavitation and related phenomena in
lubrication, Proceedings of the 1st LeedsL yon Symposium on Tribology, University
of Leeds, UK, pp. 3136 (Mechanical Engineering Publications Ltd, London, UK),
1974.
14. K.O. Olsson, Cavitation in dynamically loaded bearings, Transactions of
Chalmers University Technology, Gteborg, Sweden, vol. 308, 1965.
THEORY FOR THE THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
527
528 |
CHAPTER 9: THIN-FILM FLOW INTERFACES
10
Mathematics, Moving Interface Branch
The Level Set and Phase Field Moving interfaces are available under the
Mathematics>Moving Interface branch (
). Also see Modeling Multiphase Flow to
help you choose the best interface to start with.
In this chapter:
The Level Set Interface
The Phase Field Interface
The Ternary Phase Field Interface
Theory for the Level Set Interface
Theory for the Phase Field Interface
Theory for the Ternary Phase Field Interface
529
T he L e v e l S e t In t erfac e
The Level Set (ls) interface (
), found under the Mathematics>Moving Interface
branch (
) when adding an interface, is used to track moving interfaces in fluid-flow
models by solving a transport equation for the level set function. Simulations using the
Level Set interface are always time dependent since the position of an interface almost
always depends on its history.
The main node is the Level Set Model feature, which adds the level set equation and
provides an interface for defining the level set properties and the velocity field.
When this physics interface is added, the following default nodes are also added in the
Model BuilderLevel Set Model, No Flow (the default boundary condition) and Initial
Values. Then, from the Physics toolbar, add other nodes that implement, for example,
boundary conditions. You can also right-click Level Set to select physics features from
the context menu.
SETTINGS
The Label is the default physics interface name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the physics
interface. Refer to such physics interface variables in expressions using the pattern
<name>.<variable_name>. In order to distinguish between variables belonging to
different physics interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and
underscores (_) are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first physics interface in the model) is ls.
DEPENDENT VARIABLES
The dependent variable (field variable) is the Level set variable phi. The name can be
changed but the names of fields and dependent variables must be unique within a
model.
Conservative and Non-Conservative Form
Domain, Boundary, and Pair Nodes for the Level Set Interface
Theory for the Level Set Interface
Theory for the Two-Phase Flow Interfaces
530 |
CHAPTER 10: MATHEMATICS, MOVING INTERFACE BRANCH
Domain, Boundary, and Pair Nodes for the Level Set Interface
The Level Set Interface has the following domain, boundary and pair nodes described.
Initial Interface
No Flow
Initial Values
Outlet1
Inlet
Symmetry1
Level Set Model
1 Described for the Laminar Flow interface.
Boundary conditions for axial symmetry boundaries are not required. For
the symmetry axis at r = 0, the software automatically provides a suitable
boundary condition and adds an Axial Symmetry node that is valid on the
axial symmetry boundaries only.
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual see Table 2-3 for links
to common sections and Table 2-4 to common feature nodes. You can
also search for information: press F1 to open the Help window or Ctrl+F1
to open the Documentation window.
Level Set Model
The Level Set Model node adds the following transport equation governing a level set
function
+ u = ( 1 ) ----------
t
and provides the options to define the associated level set parameters and the velocity
field.
LEVEL SET PARAMETERS
Enter a value or expression for the Reinitialization parameter (SI unit: m/s). The
default is 1 m/s.
THE LEVEL SET INTERFACE
531
Enter a value or expression for the Parameter controlling interface thickness els
(SI unit: m). The default expression is ls.hmax/2, which means that the value is half
of the maximum mesh element size in the region through which the interface passes.
CONVECTION
Enter values or expressions for the components (u, v, and w in 3D, for example) of the
Velocity field u (SI unit: m/s). The applied velocity field transports the level set
function through convection.
Initial Values
Use the Initial Values node to define the initial values of the level set variable.
INITIAL VALUES
The initial positions of the two fluids, and consequently the separating interface, can
be specified in two ways. The level set function can be specified explicitly, using any
type of variable or expression. Alternatively the fluid occupying the current domain
selection can be specified. Using the former method, a Time Dependent study step can
directly be solved. Using the latter method, a Phase Initialization study step is needed
in order to initialize the level set function across the fluid-fluid interface.
Specify Domain Initially as one of the following:
Specify level set function explicitly
Fluid 1 ( = 0)
Fluid 2 ( = 1)
If the Phase Initialization (
) study step is being used, for the
initialization to work it is crucial that there are two Initial Values nodes
and one Initial Interface node. The Initial Values nodes should specify the
Domain Intially as Fluid 1 and Fluid 2 respectively. The Initial Interface
node should include all interior boundaries that defines the initial position
of the fluid-fluid interface.. If the selection of the Initial interface node is
empty, the initialization fails.
See Initializing the Level Set Function.
532 |
CHAPTER 10: MATHEMATICS, MOVING INTERFACE BRANCH
Inlet
The Inlet node adds a boundary condition for inlets (inflow boundaries). At inlets a
value of the level set function must be specified. Typically set to either 0 or 1.
SETTINGS
Enter a value for the Level set function value . The value must be in the range from 0
to 1, and the default is 0.
Initial Interface
The Initial Interface node defines the boundary as the initial position of the interface
= 0.
If the Transient with Initialization (
) study is being used, for the
initialization to work it is crucial that there are two Initial Values nodes
and one Initial Interface node. One of the Initial Values nodes should use
Domain initially: Inside interface and the other Domain initially: Outside
interface. The Initial Interface node should have all interior boundaries
where the interface is initially present as selection. If the selection of the
Initial interface node is empty, the initialization fails.
See Initializing the Level Set Function.
No Flow
The No Flow node adds a boundary condition that represents boundaries where there
is no flow across the boundary. This is the default boundary condition.
THE LEVEL SET INTERFACE
533
The Phase Field Interface
The Phase Field (pf) interface (
), found under the Mathematics>Moving Interface
branch (
) when adding a physics interface, is used to track moving interfaces by
solving two transport equations, one for the phase field variable, , and one for the
mixing energy density, . The position of the interface is determined by minimizing
the free energy.
The main node is the Phase Field Model feature, which adds the phase field equations
and provides an interface for defining the phase field model properties.
When this physics interface is added, the following default nodes are also added in the
Model BuilderPhase Field Model, Wetted Wall (the default boundary condition) and
Initial Values. Then, from the Physics toolbar, add other nodes that implement, for
example, boundary conditions. You can also right-click Phase Field to select physics
features from the context menu.
SETTINGS
The Label is the default physics interface name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the physics
interface. Refer to such physics interface variables in expressions using the pattern
<name>.<variable_name>. In order to distinguish between variables belonging to
different physics interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and
underscores (_) are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first physics interface in the model) is pf.
DEPENDENT VARIABLES
This interface defines the dependent variables (fields) Phase field variable and Phase
field help variable . If required, edit the name, but dependent variables must be
unique within a model.
Conservative and Non-Conservative Forms
Domain, Boundary, and Pair Nodes for the Phase Field Interface
Theory for the Phase Field Interface
534 |
CHAPTER 10: MATHEMATICS, MOVING INTERFACE BRANCH
Phase Separation: Application Library path CFD_Module/
Multiphase_Tutorials/phase_separation
Domain, Boundary, and Pair Nodes for the Phase Field Interface
The Phase Field Interface includes the following domain, boundary, and pair nodes,
listed in alphabetical order, available from the Physics ribbon toolbar (Windows users),
Physics context menu (Mac or Linux users), or right-click to access the context menu
(all users).
In general, to add a node, go to the Physics toolbar, no matter what
operating system you are using. Subnodes are available by clicking the
parent node and selecting it from the Attributes menu.
Initial Interface
Phase Field Model
Initial Values
Symmetry1
Inlet
Wetted Wall
1
Outlet
1
Described for the Laminar Flow interface.
In the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual see Table 2-3 for links
to common sections and Table 2-4 to common feature nodes. You can
also search for information: press F1 to open the Help window or Ctrl+F1
to open the Documentation window.
Phase Field Model
The Phase Field Model node adds the equations described in The Equations for the
Phase Field Method. The node defines the associated phase field parameters including
surface tension and interface thickness.
PHASE FIELD PARAMETERS
Define the following phase field parameters. Enter a value or expression for the:
Surface tension coefficient (SI unit: N/m).
THE PHASE FIELD INTERFACE
535
Parameter controlling interface thickness epf (SI unit: m). The default expression is
pf.hmax/2, which means that the value is half of the maximum mesh element size
in the region through which the interface passes.
Mobility tuning parameter (SI unit: ms/kg). The default is 1 ms/kg, which is a
good starting point for most models. This parameter determines the time scale of
the Cahn-Hilliard diffusion and it thereby also governs the diffusion-related time
scale for the interface.
Keep the parameter value large enough to maintain a constant interface
thickness but still low enough to not damp the convective motion. A too
high mobility can also lead to excessive diffusion of droplets.
EXTERNAL FREE ENERGY
Add a source of external free energy to the phase field equations. This modifies the last
term on the right-hand side of the equation:
2
2
2
f
= + ( 1 ) + -----
The external free energy f (SI unit: J/m3) is a user-defined free energy. In most cases,
the external free energy can be set to zero. Manually differentiate the expression for
the external free energy with respect to and then enter it into the -derivative of
external free energy field f .
CONVECTION
Enter values or expressions for the components (u, v, and w in 3D, for example) of the
Velocity field u (SI unit: m/s). The applied velocity field transports the phase field
variables through convection.
Additional Sources of Free Energy
Initial Values
Use the Initial Values node to define the initial values of the phase field variable.
536 |
CHAPTER 10: MATHEMATICS, MOVING INTERFACE BRANCH
IN IT IA L VA LUES
The initial positions of the two fluids, and consequently the fluid-fluid interface, can
be specified in two ways. The phase field variable can be specified explicitly, using any
type of variable or expression. Alternatively the fluid occupying the current domain
selection can be specified. Using the former method, a Time Dependent study step can
directly be solved. Using the latter method, a Phase Initialization study step is needed
in order to initialize the phase field function across the fluid-fluid interface.
Specify Domain Initially as one of the following:
Specify phase field function explicitly
Fluid 1 ( = -1)
Fluid 2 ( = 1)
If the Phase Initialization (
) study step is being used, for the
initialization to work it is crucial that there are two Initial Values nodes
and one Initial Interface node. The Initial Values nodes should specify the
Domain Initially as Fluid 1 and Fluid 2 respectively. The Initial Interface
node should include all interior boundaries that defines the initial position
of the fluid-fluid interface. If the selection of the Initial interface node is
empty, the initialization fails.
Inlet
The Inlet feature node adds a boundary condition for inlets (inflow boundaries). At
inlets a volume fraction Vf must be specified, typically either 0 or 1. Mathematically
this boundary condition imposes
= 2V f 1 and n -----2- = 0
INLET
Specify a value of the Inlet volume fraction Vf. The value must be in the range from 0
to 1 and the default is 0.
THE PHASE FIELD INTERFACE
537
Initial Interface
The Initial Interface node defines the boundary as the initial position of the interface
= 0.
If the Transient with Phase Initialization (
) study is being used, for the
initialization to work it is crucial that there are two Initial Values nodes and
one Initial Interface node. One of the Initial Values nodes is set to
phipf = 1 and the other to phipf = 1. The Initial Interface node should
have all interior boundaries where the interface is initially present as
selection. If the selection of the Initial Interface node is empty, the
initialization fails.
Wetted Wall
The Wetted Wall node is the default boundary condition representing wetted walls.
Along a wetted wall the contact angle for the fluid, w, is specified, and across it the
mass flow is zero. This is prescribed by
2
n = cos ( w )
in combination with
n -----2- = 0
WE TTE D WA LL
Enter a value or expression for the Contact angle w. The default value is /2 rad.
538 |
CHAPTER 10: MATHEMATICS, MOVING INTERFACE BRANCH
The Ternary Phase Field Interface
The Ternary Phase Field (terpf) interface (
), found under the Mathematics>Moving
) when adding a physics interface, is used to track moving
interfaces separating three different phases. The interface solves four transport
equations: two equations governing phase field variables, A and B , and two
equations for the corresponding generalized chemical potentials, A and B. The
position of the interfaces are determined by minimization of the free energy.
Interface branch (
The phase field variables are defined such that they represent the volume fraction of
the respective phase. The volume fraction of the third phase not solved for, but
computed from the natural constraint that the sum of the volume fractions of all phases
is one.
The main node of the interface is the Phase Field Model feature, which adds the phase
field equations and provides an interface for defining the phase field model properties
such as surface tensions and parameters controlling the interface thickness.
When this physics interface is added, the following default nodes are also added in the
Model BuilderMixture Properties, Wetted Wall and Initial Values. Then, from the
Physics toolbar, add other nodes that implement, for example, boundary conditions.
You can also right-click Ternary Phase Field to select physics features from the context
menu.
SETTINGS
The Label is the default physics interface name.
The Name is used primarily as a scope prefix for variables defined by the physics
interface. Refer to such physics interface variables in expressions using the pattern
<name>.<variable_name>. In order to distinguish between variables belonging to
different physics interfaces, the name string must be unique. Only letters, numbers and
underscores (_) are permitted in the Name field. The first character must be a letter.
The default Name (for the first physics interface in the model) is terpf.
DEPENDENT VA RIA BLES
This interface defines the dependent variables (fields):
Phase field variable, fluid A phiA
Phase field variable, fluid B phiB
T H E TE R N A R Y P H A S E F I E L D I N T E R F A C E
539
Generalized chemical potential of fluid A etaA
Generalized chemical potential of fluid B etaB
If required, edit the any of the names, but dependent variables must be unique within
a model.
Theory for the Ternary Phase Field Interface
Domain, Boundary, and Pair Nodes for the Ternary Phase Field
Interface
The Ternary Phase Field Interface includes the following domain, boundary, and pair
nodes, listed in alphabetical order, available from the Physics ribbon toolbar (Windows
users), Physics context menu (Mac or Linux users), or by right-clicking the interface
node to access the context menu (all users).
Initial Values
Phase Field Model
Inlet
Symmetry
Outlet
Wetted Wall
Mixture Properties
The Mixture Properties node adds the equations described in The Equations of the
Ternary Phase Field Method. The node defines the associated phase field parameters,
including the surface tension coefficients and parameters controlling the thickness of
the interfaces.
PHASE FIELD PARAMETERS
Define the following phase field parameters. Enter a value or expression for the:
Parameter controlling interface thickness . The default expression applied is
terpf.hmax*sqrt(2), which means that the thickness is related to the maximum
mesh element size in the domain. If the element size in the regions passed by the
interfaces is known before hand, it is recommended to apply a value of in that
order.
540 |
CHAPTER 10: MATHEMATICS, MOVING INTERFACE BRANCH
Mobility tuning parameter M0. This parameter determines the time scale of the
Cahn-Hilliard diffusion and it thereby also governs the diffusion-related time scale
for the interface. Keep the mobility tuning parameter value large enough to
maintain a constant interface thickness, but still low enough to not damp the
convective motion. A too high mobility can also lead to excessive diffusion of
droplets. By default M0 is set to 110-4 m3s/kg, which is a good starting point for
most models.
Additional free bulk energy . When needed add an a user defined expression of the
additional bulk energy.
S U R F A C E TE N S I O N
Specify the surface tension coefficients for the three types of interfaces present.
To use a predefined expression, select Library coefficient, liquid/gas interface or
Library coefficient, liquid/liquid interface. Then select an option from the list that
displays below (for example, Water/Air, Glycerol/Air and so forth).
For User defined, enter a value or expression for the surface tension coefficient
CONVECTION
Enter values or expressions for the components (u, v, and w in 3D, for example) of the
Velocity field u. The applied velocity field transports the phase field variables through
convection.
Initial Values
The Initial Values node adds initial values for the phase field variables that can serve as
initial conditions for a transient simulation.
IN IT IA L VA LUES
Enter initial values or expressions for Phase field variable A and the Phase field variable
B corresponding to the mass fraction of the respective phase. The value must be in the
range from 0 to 1.
Inlet
This condition should be used on boundaries for which there is a net convective flow
of the phases into the adjacent domain.
T H E TE R N A R Y P H A S E F I E L D I N T E R F A C E
541
INLET
Specify phase field variables, corresponding to the volume fractions, of phase A and
phase B. The value must be in the range from 0 to 1. The volume fraction of phase C
will be evaluated such that the sum of all mass fractions equals one.
Mathematically this boundary condition imposes
M0
i = i, 0 , n -------- i = 0
i
for phases i = A and B.
Outlet
This condition should be used on boundaries for which there is a net convective
outflow from the domain.
Mathematically this boundary condition imposes
M0
n -------- i = 0
i
for phases i = A and B.
Symmetry
This condition should be used on boundaries which represent a geometrical symmetry
line across which the flow of the fluid phases is zero.
Mathematically this boundary condition imposes
M0
n -------- i = 0
i
for phases i = A and B.
Wetted Wall
Use this node to represent a solid wall along which the contact angles between the
separating interfaces and the wall should be prescribed.
542 |
CHAPTER 10: MATHEMATICS, MOVING INTERFACE BRANCH
WE TT ED WAL L
Enter values or expressions for the contact angles for the three interfaces types:
The Contact angle of interface from phase A to phase C .
The Contact angle of interface from phase B to phase C .
The Contact angle of interface from phase A to phase B .
The definition of the contact angles with respect to the wall are shown in the figure
below
Figure 10-1: Definitions of the contact angels in the Wetted Wall feature of the Ternary
Phase Field interface.
T H E TE R N A R Y P H A S E F I E L D I N T E R F A C E
543
Theory for the Level Set Interface
Fluid flow with moving interfaces or boundaries occur in a number of different
applications, such as fluid-structure interaction, multiphase flows, and flexible
membranes moving in a liquid. One way to track moving interfaces is to use a level set
method. A certain contour line of the globally defined function, the level set function,
then represents the interface between the phases. For The Level Set Interface the
fluid-fluid interface can be advected with an arbitrary velocity field.
In this section:
The Level Set Method
Conservative and Non-Conservative Form
Initializing the Level Set Function
Variables For Geometric Properties of the Interface
Reference for the Level Set Interface
The Level Set Method
The level set method is a technique to represent moving interfaces or boundaries using
a fixed mesh. It is useful for problems where the computational domain can be divided
into two domains separated by an interface. Each of the two domains can consist of
several parts. Figure 10-2 shows an example where one of the domains consists of two
separated parts. The interface is represented by a certain level set or isocontour of a
globally defined function, the level set function . In COMSOL Multiphysics, is a
smooth step function that equals zero (0) in one domain and one (1) in the other.
Across the interface, there is a smooth transition from zero to one. The interface is
defined by the 0.5 isocontour, or level set, of . Figure 10-3 shows the level set
544 |
CHAPTER 10: MATHEMATICS, MOVING INTERFACE BRANCH
representation of the interface in Figure 10-2.
Figure 10-2: An example of two domains divided by an interface. In this case, one of the
domains consists of two parts. Figure 10-3 shows the corresponding level set representation.
Figure 10-3: A surface plot of the level set function corresponding to Figure 10-2.
The physics interface solves Equation 10-1 in order to move the interface with the
velocity field u:
+ u = ( 1 ) ----------
t
(10-1)
The terms on the left-hand side give the correct motion of the interface, while those
on the right-hand side are necessary for numerical stability. The parameter, ,
determines the thickness of the region where varies smoothly from zero to one and
is typically of the same order as the size of the elements of the mesh. By default, is
constant within each domain and equals the largest value of the mesh size, h, within
THEORY FOR THE LEVEL SET INTERFACE
545
the domain. The parameter determines the amount of reinitialization or stabilization
of the level set function. It needs to be tuned for each specific problem. If is too small,
the thickness of the interface might not remain constant and oscillations in can
appear because of numerical instabilities. On the other hand, if is too large the
interface moves incorrectly. A suitable value for is the maximum magnitude of the
velocity field u.
Conservative and Non-Conservative Form
If the velocity is divergence free, that is, if
u = 0
(10-2)
the volume (area for 2D problems) bounded by the interface should be conserved if
there is no inflow or outflow through the boundaries. To obtain exact numerical
conservation, switch to the conservative form
+ ( u ) = ( 1 ) ----------
(10-3)
in Settings window for The Level Set Interface.
Using the conservative level set form, exact numerical conservation of the integral of
is obtained. However, the non-conservative form is better suited for numerical
calculations and usually converges more easily. The non-conservative form, which is
the default form, only conserves the integral of the level set function approximately,
but this is sufficient for most applications.
Initializing the Level Set Function
If the study type Transient with Phase Initialization is used in the model, the level set
variable is first initialized so that it varies smoothly between zero and one over the
interface. For that study, two study steps are created, Phase Initialization and Time
Dependent. The Phase Initialization step solves for the distance to the initial interface,
Dwi. The Time Dependent step then uses the initial condition for the level set function
according to the following expression:
1
0 = ------------------------D
1 + e wi
in domains initially outside the interface and
546 |
CHAPTER 10: MATHEMATICS, MOVING INTERFACE BRANCH
1 0 = ----------------------D
1 + e wi
in domains initially inside the interface. Here, inside refers to domains where <0.5
and outside refers to domains where >0.5.
For the initialization to work it is crucial that there are two Initial Values
nodes and one Initial Interface node. One of the Initial Values nodes
should use Domain initially: Inside interface and the other Domain initially:
Outside interface. The Initial Interface node should have all interior
boundaries where the interface is initially present as selection. If the
selection of the Initial interface node is empty, the initialization fails.
The Level Set Interface
Studies and Solvers and Transient with Initialization in the COMSOL
Multiphysics Reference Manual
Variables For Geometric Properties of the Interface
Geometric properties of the interface are often needed. The unit normal to the
interface is given by
n = ---------
(10-4)
= 0,5
The curvature is defined as
= n
(10-5)
= 0,5
These variables are available in the physics interface as the interface normal and mean
curvature.
It is only possible to compute the curvature explicitly when using
second-order or higher-order elements.
THEORY FOR THE LEVEL SET INTERFACE
547
Reference for the Level Set Interface
1. E. Olsson and G. Kreiss, A Conservative Level Set Method for Two Phase Flow,
J. Comput. Phys., vol. 210, pp. 225246, 2005.
548 |
CHAPTER 10: MATHEMATICS, MOVING INTERFACE BRANCH
T he o r y f o r t he Ph ase Fi el d In t erface
The Phase Field Interface theory is described in this section:
About the Phase Field Method
The Equations for the Phase Field Method
Conservative and Non-Conservative Forms
Additional Sources of Free Energy
Initializing the Phase Field Function
Variables and Expressions
Reference for the Phase Field Interface
About the Phase Field Method
The phase field method offers an attractive alternative to more established methods for
solving multiphase flow problems. Instead of directly tracking the interface between
two fluids, the interfacial layer is governed by a phase field variable, . The surface
tension force is added to the Navier-Stokes equations as a body force by multiplying
the chemical potential of the system by the gradient of the phase field variable.
The evolution of the phase field variable is governed by the Cahn-Hilliard equation,
which is a 4th-order PDE. The Phase Field interface decomposes the Cahn-Hilliard
equation into two second-order PDEs.
For the level set method, the fluid interface is simply advected with the flow field. The
Cahn-Hilliard equation, on the other hand, does not only convect the fluid interface,
but it also ensures that the total energy of the system diminishes correctly. The phase
field method thus includes more physics than the level set method.
The free energy of a system of two immiscible fluids consists of mixing, bulk distortion,
and anchoring energy. For simple two-phase flows, only the mixing energy is retained,
which results in a rather simple expression for the free energy.
The Equations for the Phase Field Method
The free energy is a functional of a dimensionless phase field parameter, :
THEORY FOR THE PHASE FIELD INTERFACE
549
F ( , , T ) =
--2-
1
2
+ f ( , T ) dV =
ftot dV
where is a measure of the interface thickness. Equation 10-6 describes the evolution
of the phase field parameter:
f tot
f tot
+ ( u ) =
(10-6)
where ftot (SI unit: J/m3) is the total free energy density of the system, and u
(SI unit: m/s) is the velocity field for the advection. The right-hand side of
Equation 10-6 aims to minimize the total free energy with a relaxation time controlled
by the mobility (SI unit: m3s/kg).
The free energy density of an isothermal mixture of two immiscible fluids is the sum
of the mixing energy and elastic energy. The mixing energy assumes the
Ginzburg-Landau form:
2
2
2
1
f mix ( , ) = --- + --------2- ( 1 )
2
4
where is the dimensionless phase field variable, defined such that the volume fraction
of the components of the fluid are (1+ )/2 and (1 )/2. The quantity
(SI unit: N) is the mixing energy density and (SI unit: m) is a capillary width that
scales with the thickness of the interface. These two parameters are related to the
surface tension coefficient, (SI unit: N/m), through the equation
2 2
= ----------- --3
(10-7)
The PDE governing the phase field variable is the Cahn-Hilliard equation:
+ u = G
t
(10-8)
where G (SI unit: Pa) is the chemical potential and (SI unit: m3s/kg) is the mobility.
The mobility determines the time scale of the Cahn-Hilliard diffusion and must be
large enough to retain a constant interfacial thickness but small enough so that the
convective terms are not overly damped. In COMSOL Multiphysics the mobility is
determined by a mobility tuning parameter that is a function of the interface thickness
= 2. The chemical potential is:
550 |
CHAPTER 10: MATHEMATICS, MOVING INTERFACE BRANCH
2
( 1 )
G = + ---------------------2
(10-9)
The Cahn-Hilliard equation forces to take a value of 1 or 1 except in a very thin
region on the fluid-fluid interface. The Phase Field interface breaks Equation 10-8 up
into two second-order PDEs:
+ u = -----2-
t
(10-10)
= + ( 1 )
(10-11)
Conservative and Non-Conservative Forms
If the velocity field is divergence free, use the conservative formulation:
+ u = -----2-
t
Using the conservative phase field form, exact numerical conservation of the integral
of is obtained. However, the non-conservative form is better suited for numerical
calculations and usually converges more easily. The non-conservative form, which is
the default form, only conserves the integral of the phase field function approximately,
but this is sufficient for most applications.
Additional Sources of Free Energy
In some cases, the expression for the free energy can include other sources. It is
possible to incorporate these by modifying Equation 10-11:
2
f
2
2
= + ( 1 ) + -----
(10-12)
where f is a user-defined free energy (SI unit: J/m3).
The expression for the external free energy must be manually
differentiated with respect to and then entered into the f field.
In most cases, the external free energy is zero.
THEORY FOR THE PHASE FIELD INTERFACE
551
Initializing the Phase Field Function
If the study type Transient with Phase Initialization is used in the model, the phase field
variable is first initialized so that it varies smoothly between zero and one over the
interface. For this study, two study steps are created, Phase Initialization and Time
Dependent. The Phase Initialization step solves for the distance to the initial interface,
Dwi. The Time Dependent step then uses the initial condition for the phase field
function according to the following expression:
D wi
0 = tanh ----------
2
in Fluid 1 and
D wi
0 = tanh ----------
2
in Fluid 2. These expressions are based on a steady, analytic solution to
Equation 10-10 and Equation 10-11 for a straight, non-moving interface.
If the Transient with Phase Initialization (
) study is being used, for the
initialization to work it is crucial that there are two Initial Values nodes and
one Initial Interface node. One of the Initial Values nodes is set to phipf
= 1 and the other to phipf = -1. The Initial Interface node should have
all interior boundaries where the interface is initially present as selection.
If the selection of the Initial Interface node is empty, the initialization
fails.
Studies and Solvers in the COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual
Variables and Expressions
Unlike the level set method, the phase field method does not require expressions for
the unit normal to the interface or smoothed delta functions, so they are not available
for analysis. Variables that are defined are the chemical potential, which can be
rewritten in terms of the dependent variable ,
552 |
CHAPTER 10: MATHEMATICS, MOVING INTERFACE BRANCH
G = ------2
and the surface tension force F = G .
The mean curvature (SI unit: 1/m) of the interface can be computed by entering the
following expression:
G
= 2 ( 1 + ) ( 1 ) ---
Reference for the Phase Field Interface
1. P. Yue, C. Zhou, J.J. Feng, C.F. Ollivier-Gooch, and H.H. Hu, Phase-field
Simulations of Interfacial Dynamics in Viscoelastic Fluids Using Finite Elements with
Adaptive Meshing, J. Comp. Phys., vol. 219, pp. 4767, 2006.
THEORY FOR THE PHASE FIELD INTERFACE
553
Theory for the Ternary Phase Field
Interface
The Ternary Phase Field Interface theory is described in this section:
About the Phase Field Method
The Equations for the Phase Field Method
Reference for the Phase Field Interface
About the Phase Field Method
The phase field method offers an attractive alternative to more established methods for
solving multiphase flow problems. Instead of directly tracking the interface between
two fluids, the separating interface is identified as the region across which the phase
field variables of the two adjacent phases varies between its two limiting values. The
surface tension force is added to the Navier-Stokes equations as a body force by
multiplying the chemical potentials of the phases by the gradient of the corresponding
phase field variable.
The evolution of each phase field variable is governed by the Cahn-Hilliard equation,
which is a 4th-order PDE. The Ternary Phase Field interface decomposes each
Cahn-Hilliard equation into two second-order PDEs.
For the level set method, the fluid interface is simply advected with the flow field. The
Cahn-Hilliard equation, on the other hand, does not only convect the fluid interface,
but it also ensures that the total energy of the system diminishes correctly. The phase
field method thus includes more physics than the level set method.
The free energy of a system of immiscible fluids consists of mixing, bulk distortion, and
anchoring energy. For simple three-phase flows, only the mixing energy is retained.
The Equations of the Ternary Phase Field Method
The ternary phase field model implemented in COMSOL is based the work of Boyer
and co-workers in Ref. 1. The model is designed in order to study the evolution of the
three immiscible phases, denoted phase A, phase B and phase C respectively. Each
phase is represented by a phase field variable which takes values between 0 and 1. The
phase field variables satisfies the constraint
554 |
CHAPTER 10: MATHEMATICS, MOVING INTERFACE BRANCH
i = 0
(10-13)
i = A , B, C
and density of each phase is assumed to be constant. This implies that the phase field
variable corresponds directly to the volume fraction of the phase in question.
The free energy of the three phase system is defined as a function of the phase field
variables in the manner of:
2 2
2 2
2 2
F = AB A B + AC A C + BC B C +
2 2 2
(10-14)
A B C ( A A + B B + C C ) + A B C
Here the ij denotes the surface tension coefficient of the interface separating phase i
and j, and the capillary parameters i are defined as
i = ij + ik jk
(10-15)
and is a function or parameter specifying the additional free bulk energy. By default
is zero. In this case it can be seen that the free energy in Equation 10-14 represents
the mixing energy, since only interfaces between two phases (where two phase field
variables varies between the limiting values) contributes to the free energy.
The Cahn-Hilliard equations to be solved for each phase p = A,B,C are
u j i
M 0 i
--------i + ------------= -------- -------- --------
t
x j
x j i x j
4 T
i = ---------
ji
i
1 F F 3
- ------ ---- -------- -------- -------- j i j 4 j x j x j
(10-16)
It can be noted that the Cahn-Hilliard equation is originally a 4th-order PDE. In
COMSOL this is split up into two second order PDEs by introducing an additional
dependent variable, the generalized potential , one for each phase. In order to satisfy
Equation 10-14, two sets of the equations shown in Equation 10-16 are solved, those
for phase A and phase B. The phase field variable, and correspondingly the mass
fraction, for fluid C is computed from Equation 10-14.
In Equation 10-16 (SI unit: 1/m) is a parameter controlling the interface thickness,
M0 (SI unit: m3/s) is a molecular mobility parameter, and the parameter T is defined
as
T H E O R Y F O R T H E TE R N A R Y P H A S E F I E L D I N T E R F A C E
555
3
1
1
1
-----= ------- + ------- + ------T
A B C
(10-17)
Reference for the Ternary Phase Field Interface
1. F. Boyer, C. Lapuerta, S. Minjeaud, B. Piar and M. Quintard, Cahn-hilliard/
Navier-Stokes model for the simulation of three-phase flows, Transport in Porous
Media, vol. 28, pp. 463484, 2010.
556 |
CHAPTER 10: MATHEMATICS, MOVING INTERFACE BRANCH
11
Glossary
This Glossary of Terms contains application-specific terms used in the CFD
Module software and documentation. For finite element modeling terms,
mathematical terms, and geometry and CAD terms, see the glossary in the
COMSOL Multiphysics Reference Manual. For references to more information
about a term, see the index.
557
Glossary of Terms
anisotropy Directional dependence. Is often obtained from homogenization of
regular structures, for example, monolithic structures in tubular reactors.
Boussinesq approximation An approximate method to include buoyancy effects, for
which the density variation is only taken into account in the buoyancy term.
Brinkman equations A set of equations extending Darcys law in order to include
transport of momentum through shear in porous media flow.
boundary layer Region in a fluid close to a solid surface. This region is characterized
by large gradients in velocity and other properties. In turbulent flow it is often treated
with approximative methods because of the difficulty to resolve the large gradients.
bubbly flow Flow with gas bubbles dispersed in a liquid.
conjugate heat transfer heat transfer that takes place in both a solid and a fluid.
creeping flow Models the Navier-Stokes equations without the contribution of the
inertial term. This is often referred to as Stokes flow and is applicable when viscous flow
dominates, such as in very small channels or microfluidic devices.
crosswind diffusion A numerical technique for stabilization of convection-dominated
PDEs by artificially adding diffusion perpendicular to the direction of the streamlines.
It reduces oscillations near sharp gradients.
Darcys law Equation that gives the velocity vector as proportional to the pressure
gradient. Often used to describe flow in porous media.
Euler flow Flow of an inviscid fluid. Often used to approximate high speed
compressible flows.
Euler-Euler model A two-phase flow model that treats both phases as
inter-penetrating continua.
Ficks laws The first law states that the diffusive flux of a solute infinitely diluted in a
solvent is proportional to its concentration gradient. The second law introduces the
first law into a differential material balance for the temporal evolution of the solute.
558 |
CHAPTER 11: GLOSSARY
fluid-structure interaction (FSI) When a fluid flow affects the deformation of a solid
object and vice versa.
fully developed laminar flow Laminar flow along a channel or pipe that only has
velocity components in the streamwise direction. The velocity profile does not change
downstream.
Hagen-Poiseuille equation See Poiseuilles law.
heterogeneous reaction Reaction that takes place at the interface between two phases.
homogeneous reaction Reaction that takes place in the bulk of a solution.
intrinsic volume averages The physical properties of the fluid, such as density,
viscosity, and pressure.
k- turbulence model A two-equation RANS model that solves for the turbulent
kinetic energy, k, and the dissipation of turbulence kinetic energy, . Utilizes wall
functions to describe the flow close to solid walls.
k- turbulence model A two-equation RANS model that solves for the turbulent
kinetic energy, k, and the specific dissipation rate, . Utilizes wall functions to describe
the flow close to solid walls.
law of the wall See wall function.
low-Reynolds k- turbulence model Two-equation RANS model that solves for the
turbulence kinetic energy, k, and the dissipation of turbulence kinetic energy, .
Includes damping functions to be able to describe regions with low Reynolds numbers,
for example close to solid walls.
low Reynolds number The region close to the wall where viscous effects dominate.
Mach number Dimensionless number equal to the flow velocity over the speed of
sound. Compressible effects because of the flow speed can be neglected for Mach
number less than 0.3.
multiphase flow Flow with more than one phase.
G L O S S A R Y O F TE R M S
559
Navier-Stokes equations The momentum balance equation for a Newtonian fluid
coupled to the equation of continuity. The meaning of the term originally only referred
to the momentum balance but it is here used in the more general context.
Newtonian fluid A fluid for which the stress is proportional to the rate of strain. Many
common fluids such as water and air are Newtonian.
non-Newtonian fluid A fluid for which the stress is not proportional to the rate of
strain. Blood and suspensions of polymers are examples of non-Newtonian fluids.
Poiseuilles law Equation stating that the mass rate of flow in a tube is proportional to
the pressure difference per unit length and to the fourth power of the tube radius. The
law is valid for fully developed laminar flow.
pressure work Describes the reversible conversion of work, performed by the pressure
in a fluid, into heat.
RANS Reynolds-averaged Navier-Stokes; implying that a time-averaging operation
has been performed on the equations of motion. The Reynolds stresses (correlations
between fluctuating velocity components) obtained from this averaging operation
have to be obtained from an additional set of equations - a closure. Turbulence models
like the k- and Spalart-Allmaras models constitute closures to the RANS equations.
Reynolds number A dimensionless number that describes the relative importance
between inertia and viscous effects. Flow at high Reynolds number have a tendency to
undergo transition to turbulence.
Soret effect Mass diffusion due to temperature gradients in multicomponent
mixtures.
Spalart-Allmaras turbulence model A one-equation turbulence model that solves for
the undamped turbulent kinematic viscosity, T .
SST turbulence model The Shear Stress Transport model is a two-equation
turbulence model combining the k- model in the near-wall region with the k- model
in the free stream. The SST model is a low-Reynolds number model requiring high
resolution near walls. The dependent variables are the turbulent kinetic energy, k, and
the turbulent dissipation rate, .
Stokes flow See creeping flow.
560 |
CHAPTER 11: GLOSSARY
streamline diffusion A numerical technique for stabilization of convection-dominated
PDEs by artificially adding upwinding in the streamline direction.
superficial volume averages The flow velocities, which correspond to a unit volume of
the medium including both pores and matrix. They are sometimes called Darcy
velocities, defined as volume flow rates per unit cross section of the medium.
thin-film flow Flow in very thin regions where the it can be assumed to always have a
fully developed profile.
viscous heating The heat irreversibly generated from work by viscous friction in a
fluid.
wall function Semi-empirical expression for the boundary-layer flow used in
turbulence models. Often based on the assumption of negligible variations in the
pressure gradient tangential to the surface.
G L O S S A R Y O F TE R M S
561
562 |
CHAPTER 11: GLOSSARY
I n d e x
A
absolute pressure 67, 359
450
added mass force 330
reacting flow in porous media (rfds)
adding species 387
455
AKN model 167
rmspf interfaces 101
algebraic yPlus turbulence model 56
ternary phase field 540
Application Libraries window 24
tff interface 495
application library examples
tffs interfaces 495
convection and diffusion 397
tpdl interface 368
Euler-Euler model, laminar flow 291
transport of concentrated species 424
inlet (laminar flow) 78
transport of diluted species 394
laminar flow 56
boundary stress (node) 81
migration in electric field 397398
Boussinesq approximation 202
mixture model, laminar flow 275
Brinkman equations 375
phase field 535
Brinkman equations interface 353
rmspf interfaces 97
theory 375
thin-film flow, shell 493
transport of concentrated species 423
transport of diluted species 392
turbulent bubbly flow 260
turbulent flow (hmnf) interface 216
turbulent flow, k-epsilon (spf) 60
turbulent flow, k-omega (spf) 61
B
bubble number density 314
C
Cahn-Hilliard equation 549, 554
cavitation, thin film flow 524
CFL number
high Mach number flow 231
pseudo time stepping, and 98
settings 56, 258, 275, 290, 355
Basset force 330
chemical potential variable 552
border (node)
common settings 42
thin-film flow 500
boundary nodes
Brinkman equations 355
bubbly flow 260
Darcys law interface 346
concentration (node) 401
concentration of species 387
conjugate heat transfer multiphysics interface
theory 199
Euler-Euler interface 293
contact angle (node) 105
free and porous media flow 362
continuity equation, Darcys law 373
hmnf interfaces 216
continuity equation, multiphase flow 320
level set 531
convective terms, diluted species 462
mm interfaces 277
Couette flow 511
phase field 535
creeping flow (spf) interface 50
reacting flow in porous media (rfcs)
theory 106
INDEX|
563
Damkhler number 483
tff interface 495
damping, squeezed- film 506
tffs interfaces 495
Darcy velocity 350, 373
tpdl interface 368
Darcys law interface 345
transport of concentrated species 424
theory 373
transport of diluted species 394
defining species concentration 387
drag force 330
dense flows 330
drag law, Hadamard-Rybczynski 324
diffusion (node)
Dusty gas model 420
reacting flow in porous media (rfcs)
452
eddy dissipation concept (EDC) 484
eddy viscosity 148
diffusion models 419
edge nodes
dilute flows 331
Darcys law interface 346
dimensionless distance to cell center var-
hmnf interfaces 216
iable 169
tff interface 495
dispersed liquid droplets 329
tffs interface 495
dispersed phase boundary conditions
electrode-electrolyte interface coupling
321
(node)
dispersed phase number density 321
transport of diluted species 408
dispersed phase particles 327
emailing COMSOL 24
dispersed solid particles 329
entrance length 74
dissipation, turbulent 315
entropy waves 229
documentation 22
Etvs number 315
domain nodes
Equilibrium Reaction
Brinkman equations 355
theory for 460
bubbly flow 260
equilibrium reaction (node) 406
Darcys law 346
Ergun packed bed expression 331
Euler-Euler interface 293
Ettehadieh solid pressure model 332
free and porous media flow 362
Euler-Euler equations 327, 333
hmnf interfaces 216
bubbly flow 311
level set 531
mixture model 318
mm interfaces 277
Euler-Euler model, laminar flow (ee) in-
phase field 535
terface 288, 291
reacting flow in porous media (rfcs)
theory 327
450
exit length 79
reacting flow in porous media (rfds)
455
rmspf interfaces 101
ternary phase field 540
fan (node) 86
fan curves
inlet boundary condition 87
Faradays law 466
564 | I N D E X
Favre average 149, 201
gas boundary conditions 270
Ficks law approximation diffusion 473
gas constant 479
Ficks law diffusion model 421
gaseous cavitation 524
flow continuity (node) 92
general stress (boundary stress condition) 82
flow coupling (node) 196
flow rate in SCCMs 76
geometry, simplifying 31
fluid (node)
Gidaspow and Ettehadieh solid pressure
model 332
hmnf interfaces 218
Gidaspow model 330
fluid and matrix properties (node)
Brinkman equations 356
Gidaspow solid pressure model 332
Darcys law 348
Ginzburg-Landau equation 550
gravity 95
fluid flow
gravity (node)
approaches to analysis 30
Brinkman equations theory 375
bf interfaces 263
Darcys law theory 373
ee interfaces 299
turbulent flow theory 146
mm interfaces 284
grille (node) 91
fluid properties 31
fluid properties (node)
Hadamard-Rybczynski drag law 324, 331
bf interfaces 262
Haider-Levenspiel model 331
free and porous media flow 363
Haider-Levenspiel slip model 324
spf interfaces 66
Henrys law 264
fluid-film properties (node) 495
high Mach number flow (hmnf) interfaces
fluids and matrix properties (node) 369
theory 224
fluid-solid mixtures 328
high mach number flow, laminar inter-
flux (node)
face 211
transport of concentrated species 436
high mach number flow, Spalart-Allmaras
transport of diluted species 402
(hmnf) interface 215
flux discontinuity (node) 403
high machnumber flow, k-epsilon (hmnf)
Darcys law 351
interface 213
transport of concentrated species 438
high Schmidt numbers 480
transport of diluted species 403
hybrid outlet 230
Forchheimer drag (node)
Hygroscopic Swelling 417
Brinkman equations 357
free and porous media flow 365
free and porous media flow interface 361
theory 378
frozen rotor 178
Fukui and Kaneko 518
implementing, Euler-Euler equations 333
inflow (node) 400
transport of concentrated species 436
initial interface (node)
level set 533
phase field 538
INDEX|
565
initial values (node)
internet resources 22
bf interfaces 265
interphase momentum transfer 330
Brinkman equations 358
intrinsic volume averages 375
Darcys law 349
ee interface 295
Karman constant 206, 482
Kays-Crawford models 204
free and porous media flow 366
k-epsilon turbulence model 58, 155
hmnf interfaces 217
bubbly flow 315
level set 532, 536
mixture models 322
mm interfaces 281
knowledge base, COMSOL 25
phase field 541
Knudsen diffusion 420
reacting flow in porous media (rfcs)
Knudsen number 518
452
k-omega turbulence model 60
reacting flow in porous media (rfds)
Krieger type model 330
457
Krieger type viscosity model 280
rmspf interfaces 102
spf interfaces 69
thin-film flow 503
tpdl interface 370
transport of concentrated species 434
transport of diluted species 398
initializing functions 546, 552
inlet (boundary stress condition) 83
inlet (node)
bf interfaces 267
Darcys law 350
ee interface 297
hmnf interfaces 220
level set 533
mm interfaces 285
phase field 537
single-phase flow 73
ternary phase field 541542
thin-film flow 503
tpdl interface 372
interface normal variable 547
interior fan (node) 89
interior wall (node)
spf interfaces 90
laminar bubbly flow (bf) interface 256
theory 311
laminar flow interface 51
laminar inflow (inlet boundary condition)
74
laminar mixture model (mm) interface
theory 318
laminar outflow (outlet boundary condition) 79
laminar three-phase flow, phase field interface 252
laminar two-phase flow, level set (tpf) interface 240241, 246247
leaking wall, wall boundary condition 71
level set functions, initializing 546, 552
level set interface 530
theory 301, 544
level set model (node) 531
lift force 330
line mass source (node)
fluid flow 94
species transport 404
line source
species transport 463
566 | I N D E X
local
face 272
CFL number 56, 258, 275, 290, 355
mixture model, turbulent flow (mm) in-
local CFL number 98, 174
terface 275
high Mach number flow 231
mixture properties (node) 278, 540
low re k-epsilon turbulence model 62
mixture viscosity 279
low Reynolds number
mixture-averaged diffusion model 420,
k-epsilon turbulence theory 167
472
lubrication 505
modeling strategy 30
L-VEL turbulence model 57
modified Reynolds equation, gas flow 517
modified Reynolds equation, thin-film
Marangoni effect (node) 197
flow 505
mass action law, laminar flow 478
momentum balance equations 328
mass balance 327
moving interfaces 549, 554
mass based concentrations (node) 398
moving wall (wall functions), boundary
mass conservation, level set equations
condition 72
304
moving wall, interior wall boundary con-
mass flux (node)
dition 91
Darcys law 350
MPH-files 24
tpdl interface 371
multiphase flow theory 301, 311, 318,
mass fraction (node) 435
544, 549, 554
mass fractions 387
mass source (node)
Navier-Stokes equations 301
Brinkman equations 357
Nernst-Einstein relation 396, 465
Darcys law 349
Neumann condition 159
mass transfer (node)
bf interfaces 264
mm interfaces 283
mass transport 471
mathematics, moving interfaces
level set 530
phase field 534, 539
theory 544, 549, 554
no flow (node)
Darcys law 351
level set 533
no flux (node) 400
tpdl interface 371
transport of concentrated species 437
no slip, interior wall boundary condition
90
Maxwell-Stefan diffusion model 420
no slip, wall boundary condition 70
mean curvature variable 547
no viscous stress (open boundary) 81
mean value closure 484
nodes, common settings 42
MEMS Module 366
non-conservative formulations 304, 462
meshing 33
non-isothermal flow interface
microfluidic wall conditions (node) 366
mixture model, laminar flow (mm) inter-
theory 199
normal stress, normal flow (boundary
INDEX|
567
stress condition) 82
O
Ohms law 467
open boundary (boundary stress condition) 83
open boundary (node)
spf interfaces 80
transport of concentrated species 439
transport of diluted species 405
outflow (node)
transport of concentrated species 437
transport of diluted species 401
outlet (boundary stress condition) 83
outlet (node)
bf interfaces 268
Darcys law 351
hmnf interfaces 222
mm interfaces 286
spf interfaces 78
ternary phase field 542
thin-film flow 504
tpdl interface 372
transport of diluted species 394
partially saturated porous media (node)
411
perfectly stirred reactor 483
perforations (node) 502
periodic condition (node)
transport of diluted species 403
periodic flow condition (node) 85
phase field interface 534
theory 301, 549, 554
phase field model (node) 535
phase properties (node) 293
physics interfaces, common settings 42
point mass source (node)
fluid flow 93
species transport 405
point nodes
Brinkman equations 355
Darcys law interface 346
Euler-Euler interface 293
free and porous media flow 362
hmnf interfaces 216
pair nodes
Brinkman equations 355
Darcys law interface 346
Euler-Euler interface 293
free and porous media flow 362
hmnf interfaces 216
level set 531
phase field 535
reacting flow in porous media (rfcs)
450
reacting flow in porous media, (rfds)
455
rmspf interfaces 101
ternary phase field 540
tff interface 495
tffs interfaces 495
transport of concentrated species 424
568 | I N D E X
reacting flow in porous media (rfcs)
450
reacting flow in porous media (rfds)
455
rmspf interfaces 101
tff interface 495
tffs interfaces 495
point source
species transport 463
Poiseuille flow 511
porous electrode coupling (node) 407
porous matrix properties (node) 364
porous media and subsurface flow
Brinkman equations interface 353
Darcys law interface 345
free and porous media flow interface
in porous catalyst pellets 415
361
theory, Brinkman equations 375
reactions (node)
theory, Darcys law 373
transport of concentrated species 434
theory, free and porous media flow
transport of diluted species 399
reactive pellet bed (node) 412
378
porous media transport properties
regularized mass fractions 449
removing species 387
(node) 409
Prandtl number 204
Reynolds number
pressure (node) 349
extended Kays-Crawford 205
pressure and saturation (node) 371
low, turbulence theory 167
pressure point constraint (node) 93
slip velocity models 324
pseudo time step 476
turbulent flow theory 146
pseudo time stepping
Reynolds stress tensor 148, 156
hmnf interfaces 231
Reynolds-averaged Navier-Stokes. See
settings 56, 258, 275, 290, 355
R
RANS.
rotating interior wall (node) 104
RANS
rotating machinery (rmspf) interfaces
Euler-Euler interface 276
theory 177
mixture model interface 292
rotating machinery, laminar flow (rmspf)
theory, single-phase flow 147
interface 96
rarefied gas 518
rotating machinery, turbulent flow (rm-
rarefied, general accommodation 499
spf) interface 98100
rarefied, total accommodation 498
rotating wall (node) 103
rarefied-general accommodation 519
rarefied-total accommodation 519
reacting boundary (node)
reacting flow in porous media (rfcs)
453
reacting flow in porous media (rfcs) interface 448
theory 487
reacting flow in porous media (rfds) interface 453
theory 488
Reacting Volume 399
reaction (node) 432
reaction coefficients (node) 408
SCCM, flow rate in 76
Schiller-Naumann model 331
Schiller-Naumann slip model 324
Schmidt number 323, 335, 337, 479
screen (node) 84
selecting
heat transfer interfaces 184
high Mach number flow (hmnf) interfaces 210
multiphase flow interfaces 234
porous media and subsurface flow interfaces 340
single-phase flow interfaces 44
reaction rate, turbulence and 483
SEMI standard E12-0303 75
Reactions
shear rate magnitude variable 68
INDEX|
569
single-phase flow
surface equilibrium reaction (node) 407
turbulent flow theory 146
surface tension force variable 553
single-phase flow interface
Sutherlands law 219
laminar flow 51
swirl flow 156
slide-film damping 506
symmetry (node)
sliding wall (wall functions), boundary
bf interfaces 270
Darcys law 350
condition 72
sliding wall, wall boundary condition 71
mm interfaces 287
slip length 518
spf interfaces 80, 223
slip model
thin-film flow 504
Hadamard-Rybczynski 324
transport of concentrated species 438
Schiller-Naumann 324
transport of diluted species 403
slip model theory 314
Haider-Levenspiel 324
Reynolds number 324
slip velocity, wall boundary condition 71
slip, interior wall boundary condition 91
slip, wall boundary condition 71
solid pressure and particle interaction
332
Soret effect 474
sound waves 229
Spalart-Allmaras turbulence model 64
spf.sr variable 68
squeezed-film damping 506
SST turbulence model 61
standard cubic centimeters per minute
76
standard flow rate 76
standard settings 42
static pressure curves 84, 87
Stokes equations 51
Stokes flow 50
superficial volume average, porous media 376
supersonic inlet 230
supersonic outlet 231
Supporting Electrolytes 466
570 | I N D E X
technical support, COMSOL 24
tensors
Reynolds stress 156
ternary phase field interface 539
theory
bf interfaces 311
Brinkman equations 375
conjugate heat transfer multiphysics
interface 199
Darcys law 373
Euler-Euler model, laminar flow 327
free and porous media flow 378
hmnf interfaces 224
level set 544
mm interfaces 318
non-isothermal flow 199
phase field 549, 554
reacting flow in porous media (rfcs)
487
reacting flow in porous media (rfds)
488
rmspf interfaces 177
spf interfaces 106
thin-film flow 505
tpf interfaces 301
transport of concentrated species in-
terface 471
transport of diluted species interface
458
k-epsilon, mixture models 322
k-omega 60
low re k-epsilon 62
turbulent flow k-epsilon model 146
L-VEL 57, 153
turbulent flow low re k-epsilon model
Spalart-Allmaras 64, 170
146
thermal creep, wall boundary condition
72
thermal diffusion 474
SST 61
turbulence models, reacting flow 479
turbulent bubbly flow (bf) interface 258
theory 311
thin diffusion barrier (node) 406
turbulent compressible flow 149
thin-film flow interfaces
turbulent conjugate heat transfer
theory 505
thin-film flow, domain (tffs) interface 493
thin-film flow, edge (tff) interface 494
thin-film flow, shell (tffs) interface 490
thin-film gas flows 517
This Impermeable Barrier 406
TMAC, microfluidic wall conditions 366
Torczynski and Gallis 520
traction boundary conditions 81
theory 201
turbulent dissipation rate
multiphase flow 315
turbulent flow algebraic yPlus (spf) interface 56
turbulent flow k-epsilon (spf) interface
58
turbulent flow k-epsilon interface
theory 146
transport mechanisms 425, 429430
turbulent flow k-omega interface 60
transport of concentrated species inter-
turbulent flow low re k-epsilon (spf) in-
face 418
theory 471
transport of diluted species in porous
media interface 392
transport of diluted species interface 389
theory 458
transport properties (node)
reacting flow in porous media (rfcs)
451
reacting flow in porous media (rfds)
456
turbulence models
terface 62
turbulent flow low re k-epsilon interface
theory 146
turbulent flow L-VEL (spf) interface 57
turbulent flow Spalart-Allmaras (spf) interface 64
turbulent flow, SST (spf) interface 61
turbulent kinetic energy theory 315
k-epsilon model 155
mixture model 322
RANS 150
turbulent length scale 173
albebraic yPlus 150
turbulent mass transport flux 479
algebraic yPlus 56
turbulent mixing 469, 475
k-epsilon 58, 155
turbulent mixing (node)
k-epsilon, bubbly flow 315
transport of concentrated species 432
INDEX|
571
transport of diluted species 397
turbulent mixture model (mm) interface
theory 318
turbulent non-isothermal flow interfaces
theory 201
websites, COMSOL 25
well posedness 227
Wen and Yu fluidized state expression
330
bubbly flow 311
wetted wall (boundary condition) 244
mixture model 318
wetted wall (node) 538, 542
367
undamped turbulent kinematic viscosity
171
vacuum pump (node) 84
vapor cavitation 524
variables
dimensionless distance to cell center
169
level set interface 547
phase field interface 552
viscous drag, coefficient 314
viscous slip, wall boundary condition 72
volume averages 375
volume force (node)
Brinkman equations 358
ee interfaces 300
free and porous media flow 365
spf interfaces 69
vorticity waves 229
W wall (node)
bf interfaces 265
ee interface 296
mm interfaces 281
single-phase flow 70
thin-film flow 504
wall distance initialization study step 165,
572 | I N D E X
72
turbulent Schmidt number 469, 475
two-phase Darcys law (tpdl) interface
wall functions, wall boundary condition
turbulent Prandtl number 204
two-fluid Euler-Euler model
168
wall functions, turbulent flow 157
You might also like
- Brass Methods: An Essential Resource for Educators, Conductors, and StudentsFrom EverandBrass Methods: An Essential Resource for Educators, Conductors, and StudentsNo ratings yet
- PIPESIM 2019: Steady-State Multiphase Flow Simulator100% (1)PIPESIM 2019: Steady-State Multiphase Flow Simulator32 pages
- Microfluidics Module Users Guide - COMSOL Multiphysics 5.4No ratings yetMicrofluidics Module Users Guide - COMSOL Multiphysics 5.4308 pages
- SolidWorks 2013 Flow Simulation Technical ReferenceNo ratings yetSolidWorks 2013 Flow Simulation Technical Reference192 pages
- Doe Fundamentals Handbook: Thermodynamics, Heat Transfer, and Fluid Flow Volume 3 of 30% (1)Doe Fundamentals Handbook: Thermodynamics, Heat Transfer, and Fluid Flow Volume 3 of 369 pages
- Flow Simulation Solving Engineering ProblemsNo ratings yetFlow Simulation Solving Engineering Problems80 pages
- COSMOS Analysis Products. COSMOS FloWorks Fundamentals - 2008 PDFNo ratings yetCOSMOS Analysis Products. COSMOS FloWorks Fundamentals - 2008 PDF238 pages
- Review-on-numerical-techniques-applied-in-impulse-hydro-t_2020_Renewable-EneNo ratings yetReview-on-numerical-techniques-applied-in-impulse-hydro-t_2020_Renewable-Ene17 pages
- Fly Fishing Guide to the Battenkill: Complete Guide to Locations, Hatches, and HistoryFrom EverandFly Fishing Guide to the Battenkill: Complete Guide to Locations, Hatches, and HistoryNo ratings yet
- Essential Trout Flies: 50 Indispensable Patterns with Step-by-Step Instructions for 300 Most Useful VariationsFrom EverandEssential Trout Flies: 50 Indispensable Patterns with Step-by-Step Instructions for 300 Most Useful Variations3/5 (5)
- Options Trading for Income: Learn the strategies and techniques for maximizing returns and minimizing risk in the options market (2023 Guide for Beginners)From EverandOptions Trading for Income: Learn the strategies and techniques for maximizing returns and minimizing risk in the options market (2023 Guide for Beginners)No ratings yet
- 'Ware the Dark-Haired Man: The Hieromonk's Tale, Book ThreeFrom Everand'Ware the Dark-Haired Man: The Hieromonk's Tale, Book ThreeNo ratings yet
- X 4 Cos ( (K) /2) - Cos (K) - 3, y Sin (K) + 10 Sin ( (K) /2)No ratings yetX 4 Cos ( (K) /2) - Cos (K) - 3, y Sin (K) + 10 Sin ( (K) /2)1 page
- X 4 Cos ( (K) /2) - Cos (K) - 3, y Sin (K) + 10 Sin ( (K) /2)No ratings yetX 4 Cos ( (K) /2) - Cos (K) - 3, y Sin (K) + 10 Sin ( (K) /2)1 page
- Error - Failed To Compute Elastoplastic Strain Variables - 1150 - Knowledge Base PDFNo ratings yetError - Failed To Compute Elastoplastic Strain Variables - 1150 - Knowledge Base PDF3 pages
- Nexans MV 11kV 33kV Cable Terminations - Slip On and Cold Shrink PDFNo ratings yetNexans MV 11kV 33kV Cable Terminations - Slip On and Cold Shrink PDF25 pages
- Real-Time Weapons Detection System Using Computer VisionNo ratings yetReal-Time Weapons Detection System Using Computer Vision6 pages
- Being: A Study in Ontology Peter Van Inwagen all chapter instant download100% (6)Being: A Study in Ontology Peter Van Inwagen all chapter instant download66 pages
- Look-Ahead Sigma-Delta Modulation and Its Application To Super Audio CDNo ratings yetLook-Ahead Sigma-Delta Modulation and Its Application To Super Audio CD340 pages
- Activity Sheets in Precalculus Quarter 2, Week 1& 2No ratings yetActivity Sheets in Precalculus Quarter 2, Week 1& 27 pages
- Application of Linear Algebra in Dimension of 2d and 3dNo ratings yetApplication of Linear Algebra in Dimension of 2d and 3d6 pages
- CLS JEEAD-18-19 XIII Mat Target-2 SET-1 Chapter-4 PDFNo ratings yetCLS JEEAD-18-19 XIII Mat Target-2 SET-1 Chapter-4 PDF49 pages